HE UNIVERSITY mi'itnsiin] I rlL r tiilLut[8ii!L'\! ti o 111 LI y 11 1892=1902 Book_-^_ Id'IZ'I^^^ THE PRESIDENT'S REPORT ^be *llln{vcr0lt^ of (tblcago POUNDED BY JOHN D. ROCKEFSLLEB THE Presidents Report JULY, 1892— JULY, 1902 U.- CHICAGO ttbc tlntversitB of Cbtcago iprees 1903 '> '-^, Copyright 1903 BY THE DNIVEESITY OF CHICAGO 6«nrod unkuowii 2d copy accepted Order Diy, TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents ----- v-ix 0^' The President's Repokt - - -. - xi-cxliii Note of Presentation - xi-xii The Board of Trustees - - xii-xvi The University Staff of Instruction - - - xvi-xxvi The Public -------...- xxvi-xxxiii The Students --- -.. xxxiii-xxxvi The Alumni - - - - xxxvii-xxxix The Founder of the University xxxix-xliii Administrative History - - - - ' - . - . - xliii-xlviii Buildings and Grounds - - xlviii-lii The Business Management of the University lii-lviii The University Press - - - - Iviii-lxiii University Extension - - Ixiii-lxvi Affiliation and Co-operation - - - - Ixvi-lxxi The Divinity School - - - Ixxi-lxxvi The Medical School - Ixxvi-lxxx The Law School ----- Ixxx-lxxxiii The School of Education - - - Ixxxiii-lxxxvii University College - - - Ixxxvii-lxxxix The College of Commerce and Administration - - - - Ixxxix-xci The Senior Colleges - - xci-xciii The Junior Colleges - - . . _ xciv-cxiv Fellowships, Scholarships, and Student Service .... cxv-cxxiii Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums ------ cxxiii-cxxvi The Morgan Park Academy - - - cxxvii-cxxviii The Student Social Life - - - cxxix-cxxxiv The Religious Work and Life -------- cxxxiv-cxxxvi The More Important Experiments ------ cxxxvi-cxxxviii Celebrations -- --- cxxxviii-cxliii The Forecast ------------ cxliii EEPORTS OF THE DEANS ---------- 1-219 The Dean of the Faculties of Arts, Literature and Science 1-52 Legislation and Administration ------ 3_g Departments of Instruction ------- 6-8 The Unit of Work and the Unit of Time - - - - 8 The Plan of Concentration ------- 9 The System of Four Quarters ------ 9 The Summer Quarter -------- 9_ii Attendance of Students - 11-13 Schools and Colleges -------- 13 vi The President's Keport The Graduate Schools -------- 13-52 Admission - -- 13-21 Attendance 21-27 Candidacy for Degrees 27-28 The Award of Higher Degrees - - - - 28-30 Theses --------- 30-38 Positions of Doctors and Masters - - - 38-40 Fellowships ------- 40-52 The Dean of the Ogden Graduate School of Science - - 53-63 Needs of the School -------- 53-54 The Department of Mathematics B4 The Department of Astronomy 54 The Department of Physics 56-57 The Department of Chemistry - 57 The Department of Geology ------- 57-58 The Department of Zoology 58-59 The Department of Anatomy 59-60 The Department of Physiology 60-61 The Department of Nem-ology 61 The Department of Paleontology 61 The Department of Botany 62 The Department of Pathology and Bacteriology - - - 63 The Dean of the Senior Colleges - - 64^96 Total Membership of the Senior Colleges - - - - 64-65 Attendance in the Senior Colleges - 65-66 Proportion of Students Taking All Their College Work in the University - - - - - - - - 66-68 Summer Work - - •- 69-71 Flexibility of the Course - - 71-77 Eecord of a Typical Class Compared with One from an Eastern College -------- 78-80 Graduation by Degrees and Sexes - - . - . 81-83 Character of the Student Body ------ 83-84 The CuiTiculum - - - 85-88 Statistics for 1899-1902 89-96 The Dean of the Junior Colleges - 97-121 Eegistration in the Junior Colleges 97-103 Statistics of Admission - - - 104^105 College Failures and Conditions 105 Withdrawals ----- 105-106 Eelations of Junior and Senior Colleges - - . . 106-107 Fourth Courses 107 The Cun-icula of the Junior College ----- 107-113 Student Eligibility for Public Appearance - - . - 113-114 The Course Book and Undergraduate Handbook - - - 114-115 Chapel Assembly 115 Table of Contents vii Division Lectures - . . 115-116 Membership and Organization of the Junior College Faculty 116-117 Entrance Scholarships 118-119 Senior College Scholarships 119-121 The Dean of Women -.-.-.... 122-144 Changes in the Faculty 122 List of Women Fellows -------- 122-123 List of Women Scholars ---.-.. 123-124 Degrees Conferred on Women - 124 Theses Subjects - - - 124r-125 Attendance of Women Students ------ 125-127 Physical Culture 128-130 Women's Houses 130-133 Unclassified Women Students 133-137 The Woman's Union ------ - 137-138 Scholarships - - 138-139 Choice of Studies - - - - 139-144 The Dean op University College 146-155 Origin of University College 146-147 The College for Teachers 147-151 Union of College- and Class-Study Department - - - 151-153 University College, 1900-1901 ------ 153 University College, 1901-1902 - 154-155 The Dean op the Divinity School 156-210 History of the School Prior to 1892 ----- 156-161 The Education Society -------- 162-163 The Graduate Divinity School ------ 163-166 The English Theological Seminary - - - - - 166 The Danish-Norwegian Theological Seminary - - - 166-169 The Swedish Theological Seminary ----- 169-172 The Disciples Divinity House ------ 172-174 The Cumberland Presbyterian Divinity House - - - 174-175 - Statistics - . . . 175-210 The Dean of Univeesity Affiliations - . . - - 211-214 The Dean of the Morgan Park Academy 215-219 The Buildings - 215-216 The Faculty - - - 216-217 Courses of Study - - - 217 The Summer Quarter - - - 217-218 Statistics of Attendance -------- 218 A School for Boys Only - - - - ' - - - 218-219 System of Discipline - - - 219 EEPORTS OF THE DIRECTORS -------- 221-395 The Associate Librarian ...---- 223-290 I. The First Eight Years, 1892-1899 - - - - 223-235 II. The Years 1899-1902 - 235-265 The President's Eepoet III. The General Library and the Departmental Libraries 266-290 The Library Staff ----- 223-224 Summary of Actions of Administrative Board 224-229 Co-operation with the Public Library - 229 Loan Desk Statistics ----- 230 Additions to the Library - - 230-231; 233-234 Loss of Books ------ 231-232 Traveling Libraries ----- 232-233 Co-operation vrith the Newberry Library - 234-235 Reports for 1899-1902 - - - - 235-246 List of Periodicals Eeceived - - - 247-263 The Libraries of Professors von Hoist and Northrup ----- 264 Needs of the Library ----- 264^265 The General Library and Departmental Li- braries ------ 266-290 The Dieeotoe of the Univebsity Pbess - . - - 291-303 Origin and Organization 291-292 Scope and Management 292-294 Development of the Work 294^303 Conclusion --------- 303 The University Extension Division 304-385 The Lectdre-Stddy Department ----- 304-313 Introductory Statement . - - - 304r-309 Statistics of the Lecture-Study Work - 308 Statistics of Number of Courses Given - 309 Traveling Libraries 309-310 Number of Courses Given by Each Lecturer 310 Places at Which Courses Have Been Delivered 310-313 Summary 313 The Correspondence-Stddy Department - - - 314-335 Introductory Statement - - - - 314-315 Statistics ------- 316-335 The Director of Physical Culture and Athletics - 336-370 A. For Men - - - 336-366 Introductory Statement ----- 336-339 Instruction -------- 339 The Staff of the Division ----- 340 Faculty Representatives on the Administrative Board 340-341 Student Representatives on the Administrative Board 341 The Athletic Teams of the University - - 342-346 Winners of the" C" ------ 346-352 Records of Games 353-360 Track Meets and Scores 361-362 Track and Field Athletics 362-365 Table of Contents B. Fob Women -------- 366-370 The Gymnasium 366 Athletic Fields ------- 366 TheStaflP ---.--.-- 366 Instruction ------- 367-368 Athletics - - 368-369 Physical Examinations - - . . - 370 The Eeligious Woek in the Univeksity - - - 371-386 The Official Recognition of Religion - - - - 371 The Divinity School - - 372 The Chaplain - - - 372 The New Board of Preachers 373 New Mandel Hall -------- 373 The Board of the Christian Union - . - - 373-375 Religious Activities of University Instructors - - 375 The Associations -------- 376-885 Missions --------- 385 Moral Influences 385-386 The University House System 387-395 KEPOKTS PEOM THE LABOKATOKIES 397-467 The Yeekes Obsekvatokt ------- 399-428 The Hull Zoological Laboratory 429-439 The Walker Museum - 440-442 The Department of Geology - 443-446 The Hull Botanical Laboratory 447-449 The Hull Physiological Laboratory . - . - 450-451 The Bacteriological Laboratory - . . . 452 The Kent Chemical Laboratory 453-467 REPOKTS OF OTHER OFFICERS 469-491 The Business Manager 471-489 The Registrar - 490-491 AN HISTORICAL SKETCH 493-574 THE PRESIDENT'S REPORT To the Board of Trustees of the University of Chicago : Gentlemen : In presenting herewith the first Decennial Report of the University, it is perhaps necessary to recall the various dates from which calculation has been made. The first gift for the University of Chicago was announced in Boston, May 30, 1889, and at that time a resolution was passed to undertake the establishment of a college in Chicago. The Board of Trustees was duly appointed in June, 1890, and held its first meeting for organization July 9, 1890. The first officers of instruction began work July 1, 1891. It was decided by the Trustees, in connection with the Quin- quennial Celebration in 1896, to regard July 1, 1891, as the actual date of the begin- ning of the work of the University. The doors of the institution were opened for students October 1, 1892. The present Report covers the preliminary year 1891-92 and ten years of actual work closing July 1, 1902. It has been thought wise to regard the celebration of the Decennial of the University as covering the entire period of the year 1901-2. Exercises were held during the first week of July, and during the year the members of the various Departments, in celebration of the event, have contributed papers which are published in the volumes accompanying this Report. In placing before you the Reports of the various Administrative Officers of the University (Vol. I), the Catalogue of books, articles, and reviews published during these years (Vol. II), the contributions of the various Departments of the University (Vols. III-X), together with the Second Series of more elaborate contributions (Vols. I-XVII), and the General Register of students and alumni, I desire to call attention to certain general matters which are not included in the special Reports, to make comment on these facts, and to formulate such suggestions as appear to be warranted by the experience of this first decade. In my comments and suggestions I have assumed the privilege of speaking frankly and plainly. It has seemed to me that a Report which was not thus candid and direct would not be worthy of the institution represented. For the comments and suggestions herewith presented no one is to be held responsible but myself. I desire at this point to express the hope that a similar Report may be made by the officials of the University in connection with each decade of its progress. In these modern times ten years count for as much as one hundred years did formerly. It is worth the while of those engaged in any important undertaking, educational or otherwise, to sum up the results of the work accomplished in ten years, to consider the policies which have prevailed, and to decide whether, in view of all the facts, these policies have been correct and have secured the results desired. Moreover, it is to be remembered that many policies, at least those of minor importance, may wisely be xi xii The Peesident's Report changed from time to time even under the same administration; for a policy which may have been the best for a certain period may not be the best for another period. It has been customary in educational administration to wait for the change of an administration before introducing or adopting new policies. This is a mistake. The institution is thus too frequently compelled to wait a longer period than is wise. It may, of course, be difficult for an administration to adapt itself from time to time to changes, but, however difficult this may be, it would seem to be upon the whole a wise policy. I. THE BOAKD OF TRUSTEES The membership of the Board of Trustees has suffered material change during the ten years. Of the original twenty-one members, only eight are still identified with the work. During the period under review, three have been taken away by death, and ten have been compelled to withdraw because of outside work or for other reasons. The members of the Board have exhibited to a remarkable extent three important char- acteristics: faithfulness in service, unanimity in action, and generosity in giving. During the ten years there have been held more than two hundred and fifty meetings at which at least a quorum has been present, the average attendance being twelve or thirteen. This fact is significant when it is remembered that several mem- bers of the Board have been absent for long periods in Europe, and that four or five members have lived at a distance from Chicago, viz., at Detroit and New York city. To this large number of Board meetings must be added the still larger number of com- mittee meetings (not less than a thousand) at which four or more members have always been present. It will not be forgotten that the membership of the Board is largely made up of men who are connected with large enterprises. This is illustrated by the fact that during the period of organizing the University five members of the Board were at the same time Directors of the World's Columbian Exposition. On nearly every important question the action of the Trustees has been unanimous. I can recall only half a dozen matters, some of them of very minor importance, which have passed the Board with votes recorded in the negative. This seems an almost incredible statement when it is recalled that over ten thousand distinct recommenda- tions, covering every imaginable subject both of an educational and business character, have been presented to the Board for its consideration. That this unanimity has not grown out of indifference is seen from the further fact that many matters have been debated through a period of one, two, or even three years before a conclusion has been reached. No man can calculate the actual value of the time given the University by the Trustees in Board meetings, committee meetings, and conferences ; but, in addition to all this, the Trustees have themselves contributed about $1,000,000 to the University treasury, thus giving indubitable evidence of their personal interest in the great enter- prise intrusted to their charge. In some instances these gifts have been made with considerable cost to the donor, but in every case with a splendid enthusiasm. The President's Report xiii In the first years, and in connection with the financial panic of 1893, there were times of serious concern. It was not altogether certain that the new institution could meet the heavy demands made upon it in view of the generous scale on which it had been started. In these times of crisis the strength and courage of the Trustees indi- vidually and collectively appeared at its best. One may never forget some of these meetings in times when only the greatest skill and wisdom prevented disaster. But while some days, it is true, have been very dark, during most of the time the sky has been fairly bright ; and today the Trustees may regard with some degree of satisfaction the outcome of these ten years of labor. During the larger portion of this period the work of the Trustees has been placed in the hands of committees. The Committee on Instruction and Equipment has con- sidered and made recommendations on all appointments, all matters of educational policy, all purchases of equipment and apparatus, including books and collections. The work of this committee has been exceedingly arduous. All nominations for posi- tions on the staff have received careful study, and all questions of promotion and salary have here been taken up. During the period under review the committee has supervised the expenditure of about $5,000,000. The Committee on Buildings and Grounds has had the most important and responsible task of determining the character of buildings, selecting architects, and passing final judgment on plans and specifications. The success or failure of this work will be determined by the estimate placed upon the results accomplished as they appear in the twenty-nine buildings, costing $4,000,000, which now stand upon the University Quadrangles. The Finance Committee has been in special charge of the funds of the University, and has recommended all investments. The investments and reinvestments for the ten years have approximated the sum of $15,000,000, at present distributed as follows: in real estate, $3,443,138.35; in bonds, $4,024,846.68; in stocks, $310,427.09; in mortgages, $896,550. The responsibility of this work has been very great, and the amount of time demanded for it almost incalculable. The committee has acted upon the principle that investments must be of the very highest character to secure recommendation. Other committees of the Board requiring a smaller amount of work have been : the Committee on Affiliated Work, including Morgan Park Academy, and the Committee on the University Extension and University Press Divisions. It has been the custom of the Trustees from the beginning to take up for consid- eration in the month of October the Budget for the year beginning the following July. The Budget Committee, consisting of the chairmen of the various committees, together with the President of the Board of Trustees and the President of the University, has carefully gone over the estimated receipts and expenditures for the coming year. To this committee have been presented the requests of various Departments. After a full consideration of all such requests, the Trustees have regularly voted the Budget for the ensuing year in the last week in December. The invariable rule has been to approve no expenditures except those for which the money was actually provided. The XIV The Peesident's Kepoet conservatism of the estimates thus made six months before the time set for the begin- ning of such expenditures may be gathered from the following table, which presents the estimated receipts and expenditures, together with the actual receipts and expen- ditures, for the five years beginning 1897: Year Estimate Eeceipts Expenditures 1897-1898 $703,213 729,515 749,107 759,365 893,025 S706,973 723,083 744,955 775,655 977,828 S678,400 1898-1899 1899-1900 719,923 747,186 790,584 944,348 1900-1901 1901-1902 An Expenditure Committee, consisting of the President of the University, the Secretary of the Board of Trustees and the Auditor, together with the President of the Board of Trustees — who, however, has been unable ordinarily to be present at the meetings of the committee— has supervised the expenditure of the various appropriations in accordance with general rules established by the Trustees. No officer of the University has been accorded the privilege of expending even the smallest sum of money unless that expenditure has beforehand been authorized under an appro- priation made by the Trustees. The establishment of the Budget from year to year and the rigid adherence to its provisions have made it possible to reduce the work of the University to a thoroughly business basis, and it may fairly be claimed that the affairs of no business corporation are conducted more strictly on business lines than are those of the University. For the convenience of all members of the Board, and for the information of those who are unable to be present at particular meetings, the minutes of the Board from month to month are transmitted in copy to each member. This provision has made it possible for all of the members to keep themselves in touch with every detail of University work, in so far as that work is supervised by the Trustees. The history of these years shows conclusively that the attitude of the Trustees toward the Faculties -of the University has been broad and liberal. It is understood that all questions involving financial expenditure fall within the province of the Trus- tees and are to be considered by them ; that all appointments to office in the University are made directly by the Trustees upon recommendation of the President ; and that on questions of fundamental policy, involving the establishing of new Faculties and the change of statutes as established by the Trustees, final action is reserved for the Trus- tees themselves. But it is a firmly established policy of the Trustees that the respon- sibility for the settlement of educational questions rests with the Faculties, and although in some instances the request of a Faculty has not been granted for lack of the funds required, in no instance has the action of a Faculty on educational questions been disapproved. It is clearly recognized that the Trustees are responsible for the financial administration of the University, but that to the Faculties belongs in the fullest The President's Kepobt xv extent the care of educational administration. During the years covered by this Report there has been no case of an appeal to the Trustees by a minority in any Faculty or governing Board against the action of a majority or against the action of the President. The history of the growth of the University is in itself the best testimony of the largeness of view taken by the Board of Trustees. With a body of Trustees less intel- ligent or less able, such progress would have been impossible. It is fair to say that in the breadth of view which has characterized the work of the Trustees there is to be seen an expression of the spirit of the city of Chicago — a spirit to which the University is indebted for many of the important elements that have entered into its constitution. Justice compels me to refer particularly to the work of certain of the Trustees. To Mr. Martin A. Ryerson, the President of the Board during ten years of its his- tory; to Mr. Andrew McLeish, the Vice-President, who has on several occasions in the absence of the President assumed his duties; to Mr. Charles L. Hutchinson, the Treasurer of the Board during the entire period; to Mr. Frederick A. Smith, the Chair- man of the Committee on Instruction and Equipment; to Mr. George C. Walker, who has served on various regular and special committees; to Mr. Thomas W. Goodspeed, the Secretary of the Board of Trustees; and to Mr. Edward Goodman, the Treasurer of the Baptist Theological Union, the friends of education in Chicago and the North- west are indebted for a service in each case without which the University could not have accomplished its work, and for a devotion which, I make bold to say, has not been surpassed in connection with any educational movement in American history. Not least among the virtues of the Trustees has been the measure of sympathy and support which has uniformly been accorded by them to the President of the Uni- versity. It may be said that such official support is to be expected on the part of Trustees, and that without it nothing can be effected. This is, of course, true; but I have in mind, in addition to this, the personal help which as individuals the Trustees have accorded me, and without which I could not possibly have endured the strain involved in the work of organization, or maintained the courage needed in the face of so many difficulties. There has been no moment in the ten years when I have not felt that each Trustee was a warm personal friend to whom I might go for that intangible help which a cold officialism does not furnish, but which exists only in connection with per- sonal friendship. I desire to present the following suggestions: 1. The University should procure the portraits of those who have served as Trus- tees during these first ten years. Whatever may hold true of future decades, it will always be recognized that special responsibilities rested upon the Trustees of the first decade. The name of each Trustee is so closely associated with the work in all its parts and as a whole as to justify the demand that his portrait should be one of the possessions of the University to be transmitted to later years. 2. Since the period of first organization has now passed, and the work of the Uni- xvi The President's Report versity is better comprehended; and since also the details of the work are growing with great rapidity and will continue so to grow, it should be considered whether the present plan of organization in committees will prove in the future to be the most effective. This plan undoubtedly possesses many advantages, chief of which is the fact that the work and responsibility are thus divided, and the various members of the Board are enabled to become more thoroughly acquainted with certain divisions of the University than they could possibly become with all its divisions. But it is a ques- tion whether by this organization sufficient unity is secured ; whether, as in the case of the ruling bodies of large cities, it would not be better to throw the responsibility of all the details upon a smaller number of men who might be able or willing to give a larger share of their time to the work ; and whether, as in the case of business con- cerns, larger responsibility may not be placed upon the administrative officers. Such a smaller body would constitute an Executive Committee, to which might be given large powers in the intervals between Board meetings. It is perhaps true that in the case of no institution in the country are details presented to the Board of Trustees to such an extent as in the case of the University of Chicago. This policy has surely justified itself in the past, but with the growth of the University it may be doubted whether such men as are desired to serve as Trustees will have the time, aside from their other duties, to consider the work of the University in so great detail. II. THE UNIVERSITY STAFF OF INSTRUCTION During the first year, 1892-93, the staff of the Faculty, including the teachers in the Morgan Park Academy, numbered 103. This included 34 instructors of the rank of Professor, 14 of the rank of Associate Professor, 22 of the rank of Assistant Professor, 13 of the rank of Instructor, 9 of the rank of Associate (then called Tutor), 11 of the rank of Assistants and Keaders. The average salary per month was $195. For the fifth year, 1896-97, the staff of the Faculty, including the Morgan Park Academy, num- bered 170. This included 44 instructors of the rank of Professor, 26 of the rank of Associate Professor, 34 of the rank of Assistant Professor, 40 of the rank of Instructor, 10 of the rank of Associate, 16 of the rank of Assistants and Readers. The average salary per month was $182. For the tenth year, 1901-2, the staff of the Faculty, including the Morgan Park Academy, numbered 280. This included 76 instructors of the rank of Professor, 34 of the rank of Associate Professor, 44 of the rank of Assistant Professor, 41 of the rank of Instructor, 40 of the rank of Associate, 45 of the rank of Assistants and Readers. The average salary per month was $171. It will be seen that the total number has grown in ten years from 103 to 280, and that the average monthly salary has decreased in ten years from $195 to $171. The following table presents the various Departments in which these instructors have been distributed. This distribution shows for the ten years that practically little attention has been given to work, on the one band, in subjects connected with j3]jsthetics, and, on the other hand, in subjects connected with Technology. It appears that the strength of The President's Eepoet xvu the institution has been devoted, outside of the Divinity School, to the regular subjects in Arts, Literature, and Science. It may be claimed that in the distribution between the Humanities and Science the latter has been fairly dealt with. When account is tn h O s -2I ■ti .2 uin, m M 1 '0 m < s < 1-1 Ui 1 g CD 4J tn 1 5 SI Chemistry - Geology - Zoology Anatomy - Physiology - Neurology - Paleontol- i ogy 'i Botany Pathology ■ Public Speaking" Pedagogy - Church History Syste- matic Theology Danish- Norwegian- Theol.Sem. Philoso- phy Political Economy^ Political Science 1892-93 1896-97 1901-02 1892-93 1896-97 1901-02 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1897-98 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 '1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-92 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1 1 1 5 6 5 1 1 1 i i 1 1 1 i i 2 "i i 1 '2 3 i 2 1 i 4 2 2 1 1 2 2 '2 2 1 '2 i i 2 1 i i 1 2 1 2 3 "i 1 3 i '2 2 '2 i i 1 'i 'i i 2 3 i 4 i i 3 '3 i 'i 1 i 1 '2 i '2 "i i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i i 1 '2 "i i 1 i '2 4 i '4 "4 '3 i 2 i 'i 1 i History J Archseol- ( ogy ( Sociology - Compara- tive Religion Semitic Lan- guages Biblical and Patris- tic Greek Sanskrit - Greek Latin Romance Germanic English Literature in English Mathe- matics Astronomy- Physiology- 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 ■"1892-93 1897-98 11902-03 "1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-03 1892-93 1897-98 1902-Oa 2 2 4 1 1 1 2 3 i 2 2 5 2 2 2 i 1 2 3 2 4 4 1 1 2 2 3 2 5 1 1 2 2 '2 4 1 1 2 1 2 3 'i 1 3 5 1 1 '3 3 1 'i i 2 2 ' 1 i "2 "i 1 1 3 2 3 2 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 3 1 '3 2 1 2 i 1 '2 '2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 4 5 5 1 i 1 3 1 1 1 1 '2 '2 2 i 1 3 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 4 1 '2 '3 1 '2 3 '3 i i i i i 2 '2 '4 i i '3 i i i i "i 1 i i '2 3 i 1 taken of the several laboratories erected, the considerable amount of equipment pur- chased, and the strong staff appointed in the various departments of Science, it will be recognized that a large share of the facilities of the University has been turned in xviii The President's Eepobt this direction. Criticism has been made more than once to the effect that it would have been better to have inaugurated work in the Technological Departments from the beginning — in other words, that the practical side deserved a larger consideration than it received. It is certainly true that the demand for the more practical departments of Engineering has been very great, and that if these departments had been organized at the beginning they would today be perhaps the strongest departments in the Uni- versity. My answer to the suggestion, however, is twofold : First, it seemed upon the whole wise to devote the entire energy of the institution in scientific lines to depart- ments of pure science, with the purpose of establishing these upon a strong foundation. This work being finished, there would be ample opportunity for the other work, and the other work would be all the stronger when it came, because of the earlier and more stable foundation of pure science. Second, it was also thought wise not to lay too much emphasis on the practical side of education at the outset. No one could fail to see that sooner or later in an environment like that of Chicago the practical side would be sufficiently cared for. The greater danger was that pure science might be left without provision. In any case, the plan adopted was the one which at the time seemed to be the correct one ; and events, so far as I can interpret them, do not appear to have contradicted this opinion. Some interest was excited in the first years of the organization of the University in view of the larger salaries paid to Heads of Departments. The position taken by the Trustees in this matter has never been challenged, nor does anyone today regret the action. In my opinion this action was one of utmost importance. I do not mean to suggest that men of prominence in the field of letters and science are mercenary, but this action was taken as an expression of the serious interest of the Trustees in the work which they had proposed for themselves. Two policies were open for the organization of the staff of instruction. The first, strongly urged by many educators, was that of selecting a few younger instructors and allowing the work to grow more gradually imder the domination of a single spirit. The other policy, which was regarded as impracticable by many, was the one adopted, namely, to bring together the largest possible number of men who had already shown their strength in their several departments, each one of whom, representing a different training and a different set of ideas, would contribute much to the ultimate constitution of the University. Considerable risk attended the adoption of the second policy, for it was an open question whether with bo large a number of eminent men, each maintaining his own ideas, there could be secured even in a long time that unity of spirit without which an institution could not prosper. During the first year there were times when to some it seemed doubtful if the experiment of bringing together so large a number of strong men would prove successful ; but during the middle of the second year certain events occurred which led up to the birth, as it were, of the spirit of unity which had not been hoped for. The Saturday morning on which this new spirit first manifested itself in its fulness may well be regarded as the date of the spiritual birth The President's Report xix of the institution. From that time to the present there has never been the slightest question in the mind of any student of the situation that there existed a strong and powerful influence outside of any personal agency which made for unity of spirit. That this should have come so early in our history was the occasion at the same time of surprise and satisfaction. The organization in Departments with recognized Heads was effected more rigidly than in any other institution. This organization secured to each Department a separateness and an independence which exhibited both advantages and disadvantages. It was advantageous in that it located responsibility, drew sharp lines, and made more evident points of strength and weakness. It was disadvantageous in that for a time it prevented a much-needed correlation of work between closely related Departments, and laid perhaps too great emphasis upon the difference in rank of ofBcers. Both of these difficulties, however, soon took care of themselves. After a period of three or four years, the process of synthesizing began, and of their own accord Departments, without losing their independence, began to come together for conference on all questions of common interest. Out of this voluntary association there grew up at first Conferences, and very recently by legislative enactment the Group Faculties. I shall refer to these in another connection, and mention them here merely to show the evolution which gradually took place. The other difficulty was also largely removed. It soon became apparent that those Departments in which all the members of the staff came together in democratic fashion and worked out the plans of the Department were best organized for securing good results. Despotism on the part of a Head of Department was short- lived, and while some Heads of Departments reserved larger authority than others, the general relationship of the members of the staff in almost every Department was adjusted to the characteristics of those concerned. The organizing spirit in not a few Depart- ments became that of some other officer than the Head, who perhaps gave himself more exclusively to the work of research instead of to that of administration. Upon the whole, therefore, the plan has probably developed as few difficulties as any other plan which might have been followed. It has the supreme advantage of being exceedingly flexible, and the administration of the different Departments is today almost as varied as the number of the different Departments. This is as it should be. The machinery is a secondary matter, and should be as far as possible that which the men most closely interested themselves prefer. Only after the first year were the Departments of Botany and Physics organ- ized. It is also to be noted that during the first years the Departments of the Germanic and Romance Languages were to some extent slighted, especially in the field of higher work. This discrimination, however, is a thing of the past, and these Departments are now fully organized. At the close of the second year the so-called Department of Biology was divided into five Departments, namely, Zoology, Botany, Anatomy, Physiology, and Neurology, and still later the Department of Paleontology was set apart. Here again the question may be raised as to the more minute division XX The Peesident's Repokt of Departments. It is generally believed that the lines of departmental organization may not be strictly drawn. From a more scientific point of view, it is quite certain that the study of special problems will carry the student into two or more of the different Departments as they are now constituted. In general little difficulty has arisen from the divisions. There have been times when the line between Political Economy and the Social Science was not satisfactory; as also that between Geology and Zoology. The relationship of Paleontology on the one hand to the geological work, and on the other to that of Zoology, has been disputed, but the departmental organization as originally adopted, with the slight modifications which have been made, seems upon the whole the one best adapted to the interests of all concerned. A spirit of co-operation has grown up which has shown itself in many ways, and from the more developed growth of which much good may be expected. The staff has been singularly free from cliques. A caucus is something practically unknown. Debate is always free and outspoken. The division of the Faculties varies with almost every question which comes forward. Men who oppose each other vigorously on one subject work together most harmoniously when another subject comes forward for con- sideration. At two or three times within the ten years there has been more or less excitement. This has demonstrated the sincerity of men in the expression of their con- victions, and, as stated above, men who on one of these cases were vigorous opponents, on another clasped hands as allies. Upon the whole, it is perhaps strange that such periods when feeling has become, perhaps, too intense, have not been more frequent. In no community in the world has there been shown a greater readiness to permit the rule of the majority. It seems evident that a closer bond of union will exist between the Professional Faculties and the staff of the Faculties of Arts, Literature, and Science than is ordi- narily found in institutions of learning. No sharp line has yet been drawn between the members of the Professional Faculties and those of the other Faculties. It is my most earnest hope that the tendency which has already shown itself in this matter may continue, and that as other Professional Faculties shall be organized they shall not be isolated from the University at large or from any portion of it, but rather that they shall take their full share in the discussion and disposition of all questions which con- cern the University life and policy. The future of professional work in this country is largely dependent, in my opinion, upon the closeness of its relationship to the University. Concerning the individual work of the members of the staff I cannot speak too strongly, but this work is represented in the large number of men and women who have received degrees from the University, and in the remarkable number and notable character of the publications which have been put forth by members of the staff. For a record of this splendid service I refer you to the special volume of this Report, entitled Publications of Members of the University, 1892-1902. The honors conferred on the various members of the staff by governments and by institutions of learning are more numerous than can here be recited. The Peesident's Eepoet The following persons on permanent appointment have been taken away by death during their service at the University : Ezekiel Gilman Robinson, Professor of Ethics and Apologetics ; James Robinson Boise, Professor of New Testament Greek, Emeritus ; George Washington Northrup, Professor of Systematic Theology ; George Baur, Asso- ciate Professor of Comparative Osteology and Paleontology; Francis W. Parker, Director of the School of Education. The following officers on permanent appointment have been called away from the University to occupy positions in connection with other institutions or in other fields: Professor Franklin P. Mall, to Johns Hopkins University; Professor Edmund Janes James, to the presidency of Northwestern University; Associate Professor George Emory Fellows, to the presidency of the University of Maine; Professor Adolph Caspar Miller, to the University of California. There are two points in connection with the work of the members of the staff mention of which I cannot omit. The charge of sensationalism has been made by some unthinking persons against certain instructors in the University. This has had its origin in the misrepresentations of professorial utterances which have appeared in the public press, having come from the pens of irresponsible reporters. An effort has been made in most of these cases to discover the basis of the newspaper state- ments, and it has generally been found that a remark, entirely innocent, has been twisted either by the reporter or by the editor to subserve a Eumorous purpose. I take the liberty of repeating here a statement made at a recent Convocation: " I am moved to make a statement of fact and opinion concerning two related subjects which quite recently have attracted some attention in the public mind. The first of these is the freedom of opinion enjoyed in these days by members of the University. The second is the use and abuse of this right by professors of the Uni- versity Faculty. Concerning the first, I may be permitted to present a statement adopted unanimously by the members of the Congregation of the University on June 30, 1899: "Resolved, 1. That the principle of complete freedom of speech on all subjects has from the beginning been regarded as fundamental in the University of Chicago, as has been shown both by the attitude of the President and the Board of Trustees and by the actual practice of the President and the professors. " 2. That this principle can neither now nor at any future time be called in question. " 3. That it is desirable to have it clearly understood that the University, as such, does not appear as a disputant on either side upon any public question; and that the utterances which any professor may make in public are to be regarded as representing his opinions only. " To this statement of the Congregation I wish to add, first, that whatever may or may not have happened in other universities, in the University of Chicago neither the Trustees, nor the President, nor anyone in official position has at any time called an instructor to account for any public utterances which he may have made. Still further, in no single case has a donor to the University called the attention of the Trustees xxii The President's Eepoet to the teaching of any officer of the University as being distasteful or objectionable. Still further, it is my opinion that no donor of money to a university, whether that donor be an individual or the state, has any right, before God or man, to interfere with the teaching of officers appointed to give instruction in a university. When for any reason, in a university on private foundation, or in a university supported by public money, the administration of the institution or the instruction in any of its depart- ments is changed by an influence from without; when an effort is made to dislodge an officer or a professor because the political sentiment or the religious sentiment of the majority has undergone a change, at that moment the institution has ceased to be a university, and it cannot again take its place in the rank of universities so long as there continues to exist to any appreciable extent the factor of coercion. Neither an individual, nor the state, nor the church has the right to interfere with the search for truth, or with its promulgation when found. Individuals, or the state, or the church may found schools for propagating certain special kinds of instruction, but such schools are not universities, and may not be so denominated. A donor has the privilege of ceasing to make his gifts to an institution if, in his opinion, for any reason, the work of the institution is not satisfactory; but as donor he has no right to interfere with the administration or the instruction of the university. The trustees in an institution in which such interference has taken place may not maintain their self- respect and remain trustees. They owe it to themselves and to the cause of liberty of thought to resign their places rather than to yield a principle the significance of which rises above all else in comparison. In order to be specific, and in order not to be misunderstood, I wish to say again that no donor of funds to the University — and I include in the number of donors the founder of the University, Mr. Eockefeller — has ever by a single word or act indicated his dissatisfaction with the instruction given to students in the University, or with the public expression of opinion made by an officer of the University. I vouch for the truth of this statement, and I trust that it may have the largest possible publicity. " Concerning the second subject, the use and abuse of the right of free expression by officers of the University staff: As I have said, an instructor in the University has an absolute right to express his opinion. If such an instructor is on an appointment for two or three or four years, and if during these years he exercises this right in such a way as to do himself and the institution serious injury, it is of course the privilege of the University to allow his appointment to lapse at the end of the term for which it was originally made. If an officer on permanent appointment abuses his privilege as a professor, the University must suffer and it is proper that it should suffer. This is only the direct and inevitable consequence of the lack of foresight and wisdom involved in the original appointment. The injury thus accruing to the University is, moreover, far less serious than would follow if, for an expression of opinion differing from that of the majority of the Faculty, or from that of the Board of Trustees, or from that of the President of the University, a permanent officer were asked to present his resig- The President's Kepoet xxiu nation. The greatest single element necessary for the cultivation of the academic spirit is the feeling of security from interference. It is only those who have this feel- ing that are able to do work which in the highest sense will be beneficial to humanity. Freedom of expression must be given the members of a university faculty, even though it be abused; for, as has been said, the abuse of it is not so great an evil as the restric- tion of such liberty. But it may be asked: In what way may the professor abuse his privilege of freedom of expression ? Or, to put the question more largely : In what way does a professor bring reproach and injury to himself and to his institution? I answer: A professo]- is guilty of an abuse of his privilege who promulgates as truth ideas or opinions which have not been tested scientifically by his colleagues in the same depart- ment of research or investigation. A professor has no right to proclaim to the public a truth discovered which is yet unsettled and uncertain. A professor abuses his privilege who takes advantage of a class-room exercise to propagate the partisan views of one or another of the political parties. The university is no place for partisanship. From the teacher's desk should emanate the discussion of principles, the judicial state- ment of arguments from various points of view, and not the one-sided representations of a partisan character. A professor abuses his privilege who in any way seeks to influence his pupils or the public by sensational methods. A professor abuses his privilege of expression of opinion when, although a student and perhaps an authority in one department or group of departments, he undertakes to speak authoritatively on subjects which have no relationship to the department in which he was appointed to give instruction. A professor abuses his privilege in many cases when, although shut ofe in large measure from the world, and engaged within a narrow field of investi- gation, he undertakes to instruct his colleagues or the public concerning matters in the world at large in connection with which he has had little or no experience. A professor abuses his privilege of freedom of expression when he fails to exercise that quality ordinarily called common sense, which, it must be confessed, in some cases the professor lacks. A professor ought not to make such an exhibition of his weakness, or to make an exhibition of his weakness so many times, that the attention of the public at large is called to the fact. In this respect he has no larger liberty than other men. "But may a professor do all of these things and yet remain an officer in the Uni- versity? Yes. The professor in most cases is only an ordinary man. Perfection is not to be expected of him. Like men in other professions, professors have their weak- nesses. But will a professor under any circumstances be asked to withdraw from the University? Yes. His resignation will be demanded, and will be accepted, when, in the opinion of those in authority, he has been guilty of immorality, or when for any reason he has proved himself to be incompetent to perform the service called for. The public should be on its guard in two particulars: The utterance of a professor, however wise or foolish, is not the utterance of the University. No individual, no group of individuals, can speak for the University. A statement, by whomsoever made, is the statement of an individual. xxiv The President's Report "And further, in passing judgment, care should be taken that the facts are known. It is a habit of modern journalists, and especially of the average student reporter for the newspapers, so to supply facts, so to dress up the real facts, so to magnify and exaggerate, so to belittle and ridicule universities and university men, that serious injury is wrought, where perhaps no such injury was intended. It is the fashion to do this sort of thing, and it is done regardless of the consequences. Real regard for the interests of higher education would lead to the adoption of a different policy ; but, as matters stand, the professor is often charged with acts and utterances implying an imbecility which is not characteristic of him, and to him there are frequently ascribed startling and revolutionary sentiments and statements of which he is wholly innocent. I may sum up the point in three sentences: (1) college and university professors do make mistakes, and sometimes serious ones; but (2) these are to be attributed to the professor and not to the university ; and (3) in a large majority of instances the mis- take, as published to the world, is misrepresented, exaggerated, or, at least, presented in such a form as to do the professor, the university, and the cause of truth itself, gross injustice." I take the liberty of presenting the following suggestions : 1. Those who are Heads of Departments and clothed with the responsibility of such Headship should consider carefully what is involved in this responsibility, and the manner in which it affects the relations of the Head to the other members of Depart- ments. The Head should be something more than a mere chairman of the Depart- mental Faculty. It is quite certain that the Head should not regard himself as the autoci'atic ruler of the Department. In some cases the Head has gone to one extreme, and the result has been lack of proper organization and effective service. In other cases the Head has gone to the other extreme, and the result has been friction and estrange- ment on the part of members of the Department. It is possible that in some Depart- ments there are officers who because of natural temperament are better able to administer the affairs of the Department than the Head himself. It is not an altogether unfortunate thing that this fact should be recognized and the younger officer be given permission to do that work because he can do it with less effort. The distribution of the work of the Department is perhaps the most important single factor in its ultimate success, and this must in large measure rest with the Head after consultation with the other mem- bers. It seems inconceivable that a Head will ever allow himself to break the close personal relationship which ought to exist between himself and his colleagues. Yet this sometimes happens to the great detriment of the Department. 2. The University has been accustomed in the case of some Departments of Science to make provision for a Laboratory Assistant or Research Assistant whose services shall be at the disposal of the Head of the Department. The actiial outcome of this plan is much greater than might at first be supposed. It really means that the Head, notwith- standing administrative duties, is thus enabled to carry on his research work, because to the Assistant he may assign work which under his supervision is as well performed by the The President's Eepoet xxv Assistant as by the Professor. I can easily see how the employment of such an Assistant upon a small salary would actually double the productive power of the Professor, while the training thus secured by the Assistant would be of more service than any course of study which could be prescribed. The question is therefore whether the time has not come for the appointment in every Department of such a Research Assistant, one who can be asked to collect material, arrange bibliography, and perform that ordinary service which requires so large an amount of time and which another may perform with as great satisfaction as the high-salaried officer. 3. It is probable that too large a portion of the time of instructors is given to the preparation of ordinary text-books. It cannot be argued, however, that the preparation of college text-books, as well as that of text-books for secondary schools, does not fall within the legitimate province of the university professor. It is not so much a qixestion of the thing itself, but rather the proportion of time thus employed. It is important to recognize the fact that, while there is a demand for restatement of truth already secured, such demand should not lay too heavy a burden upon any one man or upon the men in any single institution. 4. There should be established Research Professorships, the occupants of which might lecture or not according to the best interests of the work in which they are engaged. This is practically the character of the Professorships in the Observatory. There should be chairs in other Departments, perhaps a chair in every Department, to which there might be made a permanent appointment, or which might be occupied for a longer or shorter period by the various members of the Department capable of doing research work. 5. Another step forward should be taken in the matter of salaries. The sum of 13,000 is not a sufficient income for one who holds the full professorial rank. This salary should be at least $4,000, while that of the Associate Professor should be made |3,000. With the salaries thus arranged, the Assistant Professor receiving $2,000, the Associate Professor receiving $3,000, and the full Professor who is not a Head of a Department receiving $4,000, the situation would be greatly improved. While it may not be said that there is too large a difPerence between the highest salaries and the lowest, it may be said truly that not enough men receive the higher salaries. The difficulty of carrying out such a policy with the continually diminishing rate of interest received on endow- ments is self-evident, but this means simply that a larger endowment is needed for the satisfactory support of the work undertaken. 6. Arrangements should be made to encourage a larger number of men to devote six months of the twelve to research and investigation, their lecture work and teaching being confined to the other six months. This plan has already been adopted in several individual cases. It is very desirable to place the advantages of this arrangement at the command of others. With the privilege thus secured of living a year abroad and a year at home, the highest results may be achieved. 7. The University should plan and execute at the earliest possible season a pension xxvi The President's Keport system which should make ample provision for those who have been connected with the University for a definite period. Such a system goes far to make the calling of the professor an attractive one, and to relieve his mind from anxiety concerning his old age. The man who at twenty-five or twenty-seven takes up his work in the University on a salary of $1,200 or $1,500, whose expenses increase more rapidly in proportion than his income, with only a meager salary at the best before him, will be greatly helped by the knowledge that provision has been made for him in case of illness or old age. Such a system has already been introduced in one or more of our institutions in America, and no institution can be regarded as thoroughly established of which such a provision does not form a part. 8. There are certain obligations which members of the staff sometimes fail to observe. Among these may be mentioned: a) Promptness at the beginning of the Quarter's work. It is a wrong to the institution and an injustice to the students for a Professor to fail to make his appear- ance at the first exercise for which he is announced in the University schedule. b) The continuation of lectures and recitations to the end of the time for which he has been announced. It has sometimes seemed that the final date of an official term of residence was but slightly regarded by those who had some occasion to leave at an earlier period. c) Access to instructors is a right which students may demand, and a reasonable amount of time should be set apart for such work. The office hour should be kept as regularly by a Professor as by a Dean. 9. That custom which seems to forbid one officer visiting the class-room of another, or to make such visits questionable, is an unfortunate one. Much good would follow from the intervisitation of classes by the different officers. The failure of instructors to observe the teaching of other instructors is at least in part responsible for the failure of many to make use in their work of the most common pedagogical principles. It is the purpose of the President to take occasion to visit the class-rooms of instructors as frequently as his other duties will permit. It is hoped that the other officers of the University may think it wise to adopt this custom. III. THE PUBLIC The question next in importance to that of securing a spirit of unity in a Faculty made up of so many different elements was that of obtaining the good-will and sup- port of the Chicago public. There was grave doubt whether the citizens of Chicago would rally to the support of an institution established so closely in connection with a single denomination and assisted so generously by one man. The history of other institutions organized wholly or in part along the same lines was not encouraging, and the very fact that Mr. Rockefeller was understood to be able to furnish all the money that might be needed was a source of difficulty; but the people of Chicago exhibited in this matter great breadth of mind and intelligence. Moved by the example of a few The President's Report xxvii men, known throughout the country for their large and generous consideration of important questions, the public at large soon came into friendly relationship with the University. This closer interest and sympathy was secured in part through the fact of the name, "The University of Chicago," and in part through Mr. Rockefeller's refusal to allow his name to be made a part of the main title of the University. It was really a source of considerable surprise that men of such character and in such numbers should within so short a time ally themselves in one way or another with the fortunes of the institution. These three facts — namely, the sympathy of the public, the strength of the Faculty, and the character of the Trustees — furnish the basis for the progress thus far made. From the beginning the University has adopted the policy of making its affairs known to the public. This has not been done with the desire to advertise itself. A charge to this effect has frequently been made by those who, for the time being, were perhaps disturbed by the rapidity of the University's growth. Our feeling has been that the tastitution is a public institution and that everything relating to its inside history, including its financial condition, should be made known. Its deficits have been pub- lished as well as its surpluses, and we attribute largely to this policy of public state- ment, not only the interest of the public, but the confidence which has been shown on so many occasions. It is generally understood that everything relating to the internal history will be made known within a proper time ; in other words, the books of the University, both financial and educational, the minutes of its Faculties, and even the record-book of the President are open to all. Nothing is concealed. Even that which at the first sight would seem to be disadvantageous is made known. The amount and character of its investments are published annually. Perhaps no other institution has shown a greater readiness to allow its internal affairs to be known and criticised. The financial support accorded has been something phenomenal. In the course of ten years the list of donors to the University includes more than three thousand names, besides that of Mr. Rockefeller. The gifts actually received, ranging from one dollar upward, have aggregated (up to June 30, 1902) $17,417,275, and of this sum, $5,978,371 has been given by friends of the University other than the founder. It is perhaps true that in the history of educational benevolence there is no parallel example. If account were taken of the wills which are known to have been made, this sum would be greatly increased. It is only fair to add that this interest has been largely a local one, inasmuch as the greater part of the $5,978,371 has come from Chicago. The classes of society from which these contributions have been received are of every possible grade. It is also to be remembered that in the case of at least 90 per cent, of these gifts the initiative was taken by the donor himself. In no way has the University received more loyal support than in the great mul- titude of young men and women who have been committed to its care. When we reflect that there still exists a strong tendency in Chicago and the West, especially on the part The Peesident's Eepoet of the alumni of eastern institutions, to send the children to the institution with which the parent was connected, and when we consider the great value of a period of residence entirely removed from the scenes of earlier life, we cannot be mistaken in interpreting the fact of the large number of students at work within the walls of the institution as an indication of interest and confidence on the part of the public. The moral support indicated in this and in so many ways has been a bulwark of strength in these early years — years necessarily full of difficulty and discouragement. To the public press the University is more greatly indebted than it can adequately express; and while not infrequently statements have appeared which seemed to be injurious, it is certain that in no considerable number of cases have such representations been made for the purpose of injuring the institution. The opinion of the newspaper public as to what is helpful and what is interesting often differs from that of the party concerning whom the statement is made. On the whole, it may be said that a fairly satisfactory representation of the work of the University has been presented through the press. It is at all events true that the interest of the papers has been greater than we could have wished, and that, in part, because of this interest, the University is known throughout the world in a way in which it would not otherwise have been known. The press will bear testimony that the University has not sought this prom- inence ; that indeed much has been done by the officers of the University to avoid it ; and that more than once official steps have been taken to persuade the press that the University would be just as well satisfied with a more limited share of its attention. It seems necessary to make this statement, since many people honestly believe that the University from the beginning has had a Bureau of Publicity, and that this Bureau has been conducted at great expense for the purpose of advertising the institution. The University has occasionally accepted space in educational journals for the announce- ment of the opening and closing of its terms of work or for special announcements of special schools or divisions. It has also published similar announcements in the daily press of Chicago. But outside of these announcements its general policy has been not to expend money for advertising purposes except in the preparation of circulars of information which are sent out upon request. The attitude of other institutions of learning has been very interesting. Institu- tions of secondary education have almost without exception sought the help of the University and expressed their appreciation of such help. The growth of the Con- ference of University Instructors and Teachers of Secondary Schools is an indication of the good relationship existing between the University and secondary schools. In another place (p. Isvi) I shall speak more definitely of the relationship by affiliation and co-operation. The colleges of the surrounding states at first regarded the estab- lishment of the University as a source of menace to their interests. Some of them feared that their students would flock in a body to the city of Chicago and their halls be left entirely deserted; others were inclined to be hostile in their spirit. But as years passed it was recognized that the coming of the University had in no way The President's Report xxix injured even a single institution of learning in the Mississippi valley; tliat while students entered the University from all sections of the country, there were still more students for the colleges than they had had before. It appeared that the establish- ment of the University of Chicago had deepened the interest in college education throughout the West, and that every college was to a greater or less extent the partaker of the advantages accruing from this deeper interest. It was at first thought impossible that the University could take an interest in other institutions, and that of necessity it must be hostile to the smaller colleges, but the utterances of University officers on this question, and the actual facts as they began to be known, proved the contrary. It was soon apparent: (a) that large assistance could be secured from the University in many ways; (6) that close proximity stimulated the work of the college and incited its students to continue in study after the college years had been finished; (c) that a broader spirit prevailed than in the former days, and that, in con- sequence of this, larger help was being secured for the maintenance of the college. It is now quite generally recognized that the University of Chicago sustains a relation- ship to these smaller colleges of the Mississippi valley which no other institution can sustain. The state university in each case is the distinct rival of the neighboring colleges because, not only in undergraduate work, but in the professional work, the standards of requirement are such as to make the state institution a competitor. If the standards of admission to the professional schools of the state universities were higher, the colleges would have the privilege of preparing men for this higher work; but since requirements of admission to these professional schools are in no case higher, and in many cases lower, than the requirements of admission to the Fresh- man class, the state university is in every department a rival of the college, while, on the other hand, the University of Chicago, requiring for admission to its professional schools at least three years of college work, sustains an entirely different relationship • — one which encourages the doing of college work before entering upon professional work. This fact is coming to be more and more generally appreciated, and because of it the colleges are being drawn closer to the University. During this first ten years of the University's history it is a striking fact that a large proportion of the colleges located in the South and West have sent from one- fourth to two- thirds of the members of their Faculties to be students in the University. The universities east and west have at different times represented various atti- tudes. Among the eastern institutions there was at first indifference, followed by a certain degree of contemptuous interest, and this, in turn, as the plans of the University became more definitely understood, by an attitude of curiosity and surprise, which later developed into cordial interest and sympathy. Many remarks were made in public and in private about the institution, outlined on paper, the lack of culture in Chicago, and the need of centuries for the upbuilding of an institution of learning. In the West, on the other hand, there seems to have been a considerable degree of sympathy with the work of the University from the beginning. The state universities, XXX The President's Report appreciative of the western spirit, recognizing the strength of the location in Chicago, and understanding the basis of development from their own experience, saw clearly that with sufficient resources an important work could be built up. They were of course suspicious as to the possibility of securing resources within a short time, but with the occasional transfer from the various institutions of strong members in their stafp, there soon came to exist, not only an appreciation of the University's work, but a decided interest in its success. It was learned that the people of the states influenced by Chicago were ready to do larger things for the universities located in those states because of the larger things being done in Chicago. It was soon possible to secure the adjustment of larger salaries and the appropriation of larger funds for develop- ment, and while there has been occasional indication of a narrow and unpleasant spirit, in the great majority of cases the attitude has been one of larger view and of thorough cordiality. We have made earnest effort to maintain a proper relationship with sister institutions, and, so far as we are aware, nothing that could be called discourteous or illegitimate has been done to destroy such relationships. The general movement toward co-operation on the part of institutions of learning is one of the most marked tendencies of the last decade, and it is not claimingtoo much, perhaps, to sug- gest that our own University has performed its share of service in bringing about this better understanding. It is generally understood that there exists upon the part of certain groups of teachers in the public schools a strong feeling of prejudice against the University. This feeling, so far as it exists, has grown out of a misunderstanding, and indeed a misrepresentation, of certain actions of the President of the University at the time when he was serving as a member of the Board of Education of the city of Chicago. When it was demonstrated that the educational funds of the city would not permit the continuance of salaries at the rate being paid, an effort was made, in which the Presi- dent of the University joined, to adjust matters in such a way that the city should not be embarrassed and the Board of Education brought into reproach. Many of the teachers felt that this attitude of the President was due to his belief that the salaries paid were too large, and that teachers could be obtained for smaller salaries. His position was wholly misunderstood. On every legitimate occasion the President has advocated higher salaries in the public schools, as well as higher salaries in the colleges and universities, but he recognizes that salaries can be paid only when funds are provided, and that the amount of salaries must in every case be determined by the amount of funds available. Certain factors have entered into this feeling on the part of many teachers to which reference may not here be made. It is, however, believed that with a better understanding, and with the removal of certain misrepresentations, this feeling of hostility will pass away. It is certainly the desire of the University to be of direct service to all who are engaged in the work of teaching. A great deal of satisfaction has been found in the fact that so many of the class of working- people have found it possible to send their sons and daughters to the Uni- The President's Kepokt xxxi versity to secure an education. No accurate statement of numbers can be given, but it is quite certain that a large proportion of the students of the University coming from the city of Chicago belong to families ordinarily classified as those of the working- people. Nearly every nationality represented in the city is represented in the Univer- sity. Not infrequently utterances have been made in the meetings of trades unions which have shown an utter lack of appreciation of the work being done by the Univer- sity for the sons and daughters of the men gathered in those very unions. We under- stand that it is lack of acquaintance with the institution and its purposes that explains such utterances. In the near future a better conception will be entertained in these quarters. It is true that the sons and daughters of men of the working classes are unable to pay the fees prescribed by the University, but it is to be remembered that hundreds of students each year are assisted in the payment of their fees by scholarships and student service, and in many cases the Scholars appointed by the faculties of the high schools are young men and women of such parentage. It is impossible in a Report of this character to pay proper tribute to the memory of those men and women who formed a part of the great public to which the Univer- sity is indebted for help in establishing its work thus far done. The roll of our illus- trious dead is not yet a long one, but it contains names closely associated with the early history of the University, and it is important to note that in many cases the help rendered was not material help. Here belong: J,ustin A. Smith, D.D., editor of the Standard, who was the friend of higher education from his youth up, who labored earnestly for the establishment of the Uni- versity, was the first Recording Secretary of the Board of Trustees, and to the end of his life remained a useful friend of the institution and a trusted adviser of its officers. Silas B. Cobb, one of the very early settlers of Chicago, who took great satisfac- tion in providing the funds for the building of Cobb Lecture Hall. Sidney A. Kent, one of the leading business men of the city, who not only built Kent Physical Laboratory, but made provision in his will for the permanent care of the building. Mrs. Nancy S. Foster, who came to Chicago at an early day, and who first built the original Foster Hall, and afterward enlarged and completed it. Mrs. Henrietta Snell, who built Snell Hall in memory of her husband. Mrs. Caroline E. Haskell, who endowed the Haskell and Barrows Lectureships, built the Haskell Oriental Museum, and was unwearied in her eiforts to aid the University. I desire to make the following suggestions to the public: 1. The impression which seems to have gained ground that the University, in view of the large gifts which have been made to it, is not appreciative of smaller gifts, is an entirely erroneous one. There are many ways in which a small gift can be used to the best advantage; in illustration I mention the following: a) A gift of Twenty Dollars as a prize for marksmanship in the work of the Military Company. xxxii The President's Report h) Books, or money for the purchase of books, even in the smallest of sums. c) The provision of pictures and paintings for the decoration of the many buildings. d) The planting of a single tree. e) The sum of $120 will pay the tuition of a poor student for one year. /) The sum of $480 will carry him through his college course. g) The sum of $3,000 will pay the tuition of one poor student as long as the University endures. There should be five hundred such endowed Scholarships in the Colleges of the University. h) There should be two hundred and fifty endowed Fellowships in the Grraduate Schools of the University. These endowments may be from $8,000 upward. 2. The public has been led into error in so far as it has come to believe that the Faculty of the University contains men who say or do things for the sake of a sensa- tional result. The men against whom this charge has been made deprecate most seriously the fact that the University and themselves should be thus maligned. As a matter of fact, to all who know those men it is apparent that they are removed the farthest pos- sible from any such desire for notoriety. Unfortunate representations growing out of statements perfectly legitimate in themselves have made these men the targets of a merciless tendency to use for humorous purposes everything which can possibly be so used. 3. It is necessary to repeat a suggestion which has been made before, to the effect that the public should be careful not to treat the words of an individual professor as if they were the official utterance of the University. Each officer of the University is given the largest possible freedom. He is expected to follow out his individual bent. The University is of course responsible for giving him this opportunity, but it should not be held responsible for each and every word that is uttered by him. It is a mis- take to charge reproach upon a University because of the utterance of a professor who holds opinions with which the person making the charge is not in sympathy. This is also true of the words of the President of the University, which should never be taken as an official statement of the University itself, unless he distinctly utters it as such and indicates the particular body. Trustees or Faculty, for which he speaks. All other utterances are of an individual and personal character, and he should be given permis- sion, as is every other professor, to make utterances for himself. 4. The fundamental purpose of the press of a city is surely to assist that city in building up its institutions, and not to injure it by tearing down institutions recog- nized as bringing credit to the city. In the spirit of the times, the newspapers of Chicago have permitted themselves too frequently to print statements utterly devoid of foundation, and to make representations of a humorous character equally hurtful to the University. The press is cognizant of the fact that eastern papers and eastern institutions lose no opportunity to take up these statements and use them to the injury of the University and of the city of which the University forms a part, and distinct and permanent injury is the result of such treatment. Because the daily press has not The President's Repoet xxxiii appreciated the nature and degree of the injury thus wrought, it has permitted itself to deal in this reprehensible way with institutions deserving only of assistance, and institutions which not only deserve but need such assistance. In other words, the press has with one hand greatly assisted the University and similar institutions, but with the other hand has torn down the very work it has sought to build up. This is not economical, nor is it on the whole a respectable treatment to accord an institution of the character of the University of Chicago. It is a degrading of the institution, and in such treatment the press degrades itself. IV. THE STUDENTS The number of students has risen gradually from year to year, beginning with 594 in the autumn of 1892, and closing with 2,431 in the autumn of 1901. The total number of matriculants has been 14,307. The sources of this large student body have been exceedingly varied. Every state in the Union has made contributions, the ten states from which the largest number have come being Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Ohio, Missouri, Wisconsin, New York, Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Kansas. It has been a subject of general comment that the chief characteristics of the student body have been steadiness, sturdiness, strength, strong individuality, high ideals, and clear purpose. Members of the Faculties of eastern institutions have been struck with the individual strength and character of the student body. The student constitu- ency does not perhaps equal in outward polish that of one of the larger institutions of the East, but in ability to organize work, in skill of adaptation of means to end, in deter- miaation of purpose to win, in readiness to make sacrifice for the sake of intellectual advancement, no body of students ever gathered together in this country, or in any other country, has shown itself superior to the student body of the University of Chicago. The student spirit is of course still in its infancy and has not yet worked out the best possible means of expression, but the changes that have come about in the last three years are clear evidence that the infancy just referred to is rapidly becoming a thing of the past, and that maturity of strength is being attained. The individual spirit has shown itself in so many ways that the history of individual enter- prise is perhaps the most pathetic chapter in the history of the University. The strong development of the individual which has been encouraged by the institutions and regulations of the University has been gained at some cost to the spirit of the mass, but this individual spirit, which is characteristically the spirit of the university as distinguished from that of the college, has in proper ways subordinated itself to the more general spirit, and this without detriment to itself. The presence of so large a number of graduate students has influenced to an appreciable extent the general char- acter of the imdergraduate student body, and this has not in all cases resulted in disadvantage to the latter. Furthermore, the individual freedom of the graduate student has been shared by every undergraduate student, and while this has to some The Peesident's Eepoet extent prevented the massing of the students together for certain purposes, it has nevertheless proved to be a distinct source of advantage to the individual student. Upon the whole, the relationship between student and professor has been a close one. It is ordinarily not expected that in an institution with city environment, and in an institution of so large a size, a great degree of intimacy is to be secured. Such intimacy is indeed frowned upon in certain of the larger institutions. It has been different with us. A large majority of the professors have cultivated close personal relationship with the members of their classes. Undoubtedly many an individual has passed out of the institution without entering into such intimacy even with a single officer, but this is not true of a large number, and when true is to be explained in most cases by the peculiar character of the student himself. In some cases officers of the University have held themselves aloof from students, but these cases also have been few, and in general as close a relationship exists in the University between student and officer as might be expected or as is really called for. The student who comes to the University after two years of residence in a college, the faculty of which numbers twelve or fifteen, should not complain if, after his first year in the University, he is not personally acquainted with more than thirty or forty of the three hundred instructors. His acquaintance is three times as extended as it was in the smaller college, although he does not yet know more than 10 per cent, of the officers of the University. The fact that he cannot become acquainted with a larger number means nothing, for he already knows a much larger number than he would have met in the smaller institution. The number of cases requiring discipline has been surprisingly small, and the cases of the most serious character have occurred in the graduate schools rather than in the colleges. There has been the usual number of instances of cheating in theme work and in examinations. No student has been arrested by a police officer during the history of the University, and no student has been dismissed for drunken- ness. Cases of immorality which have come to the notice of the authorities have been exceedingly few. In cases of discipline of the most serious character, the President, in consultation with the officers most nearly connected, has acted without bringing the matter to the attention of the Faculties. In ordinary cases the Faculty has taken action. But in nearly every case students have returned after the term of suspension and finished their course of study. Kules of conduct have been few, the general requirements being those ordinarily expected of men and women living in good society. There probably has been a less satisfactory development of the literary spirit among the students than might have been expected. This has been due in part to the newness of the situation and to the lack of encouragement and stimulus in certain lines. Great emphasis has been placed on the scientific side of work, and perhaps there has been greater interest developed in the philology than in the literature of a given language. It is also true that in these years the aesthetic side of work has been The Peesident's Report xxxv sadly ignored. A change has already been instituted, and in time the results should show themselves. No larger interest in athletic matters has grown up than would naturally have been looked for. The refusal of the University to adopt the policy of other institutions in going out to search for athletes and to persuade them to enter the University by holding out inducements of many kinds is so thoroughly recognized that the athletic management has been severely criticised both by the students and the alumni for its lack of progressive enterprise in this respect; and yet in spite of this so-called failure to do the proper thing, a reasonable number of candidates for athletic honors have presented themselves, and the record of the institution for ten years may be called good. It is at all events singularly above reproach. A very large number of the students support themselves wholly or in part by the aid of the Employment Bureau. Hundreds of students are enabled to secure work of one kind or another which contributes toward their expenses. This work is of various kinds, including: stenography and typewriting, clerical work, manual labor, dining- room service, bill collecting, canvassing, bookkeeping, lighting street lamps, distributing newspapers and circulars, folding Sunday papers in newspaper offices, domestic service, reading to aged people, serving as companions to children and youths, inspecting city gas lamps, acting as ticket clerks at suburban railway stations, or telephone switchboard operators, or stereopticon lantern operators, making lantern slides, reporting for news- papers, and clerking in stores. There have been more demands for yoimg women to do housework than could be supplied. As a rule these places are not desirable. There have been also more openings for students to do canvassing work for book houses, and college novelty houses, than could be filled. The average student does not take kindly to this sort of work, although some men who are naturally adapted to the work secure good returns from it. Perhaps as many as three hundred students each year receive some help from this Bureau. There was some question in the minds of the Trustees as to the merits of the so-called "Dormitory System" of college life. Effort was made on the part of certain educators at the time of the opening of the University to show that the dormitory life was a survival of the Middle Ages, and that it was something entirely injurious to the development of a proper manhood and womanhood. Our own experience has been exactly the opposite. With each recurring year the demand for residence on the grounds is greater, and the results of such residence are more clearly apparent. This is especially true in the case of women. The accommodations for men, however, have been so meager and unsatisfactory as to give small opportunity for judgment. The avidity with which the rooms in the new Hitchcock Hall have been taken, contrary to the expectations of many, shows conclusively that proper accommodations cannot be secured outside of the halls of the University, and even when it is possible to secure them, there is an attraction about life in a University building which is not found in isolation from the University grounds. The only exception to this is in the case of xxxvi -The President's Repoet the Fraternity Houses, which after all can hardly be called an exception, for they rep- resent really only an intensification of the dormitory system. One of the most pleasing things in the history of the student life has been the custom, now firmly established, for the retiring class to present to the University a memorial gift. These gifts have been accepted by the institution with great apprecia- tion as indicative of the good spirit which has always existed between the institution and its students. The following is a list of the gifts thus far made: The Senior Bench, by the class of 1896 ; the President's chair, 1897 ; a stone drinking fountain, 1898; a pulpit, 1899; the planting of a tree upon the campus, 1900; the Douglas Tablet, 1901; and a stained-glass window for Mandel Hall, 1902. I desire to make the following suggestions with reference to the student body now in residence and to those who are to come: 1. In view of the satisfactory work of the Student Councils, and in accordance with their development, larger and larger responsibility should be laid upon them. There seems to be no good reason why a considerable share of the government may not be placed with proper restrictions in their hands. This means a development of the plan of self-government. The more fully this plan can be worked out with com- mon consent and satisfactory guarantees, the better for the life of the University both social and educational. 2. More halls for the residence of students should be built. Experience shows that up to a certain point such halls will be occupied as rapidly as they are provided. Nothing will contribute more largely to the development of the proper spirit and life than the provision of student houses on the quadrangles, or in close proximity. 3. Provision should also be made, in accordance with the recommendation of the Junior College Faculty, concerning those students whose homes are in the city and who do not desire a sleeping place at the University, for the erection of halls in which accommodation for groups of twenty-five or thirty should be arranged. These accom- modations should include study-room, toilet-room, and lunch-room, and every under- graduate of the University should have his own place at the University. 4. Larger plans should be worked out for the management of the Employment Bureau. There is practically no limit to the amount of work which such a bureau can secure for those who need assistance. No fee is charged the students. The salaries of that ofiice are a part of the University expense; but a larger corps of strong men should be employed to take charge of the work. 5. Additional scholarships should be established, and the present scholarships of the Junior and Senior Colleges extending for one year should be made two-year scholarships with proper limitations. 6. Something should be done to encourage a larger interest in literary work of a creative character. Whether this can best be done by prizes may be a question. The President's Repokt xxxvii V. THE ALUMNI I desire to call attention to the publication in connection with the Decennial Series of the first general Register of the University. This Register, which appears as a separate volume, will contain lists of the Trustees of the University, the officers of instruction, the officers of administration, the Fellows of the University, the alumni of the University, and the honorary alumni of the University. It is a source of regret that a triennial catalogue could not have been published from the beginning. With this Decennial Register as a basis, the work should be revised and republished at least every five years. It remains to be seen how important this publication will prove to be. It has been interesting to note the readiness with which the alumni in the various sections of the country have come together for the organization of associa- tions. Such associations have been established in Boston, New York, Indianapolis, Chicago, and Omaha. Nothing can be more advantageous to the general interests of the University than the association in this way of the alumni. The friends of the Uni- versity have noted with much satisfaction the strong and enthusiastic support which has characterized the men and women on whom the degrees of the University have been conferred. In the earlier years of an institution it is hardly to be expected that this spirit will manifest itself in any striking maimer. Only when an institution has lived thirty or fifty or one hundred years can the alumni constituency, under ordinary circumstances, become a strong factor, but in our case so long a time has not been required to witness the development of this spirit. The close touch in which a great majority of the alumni keep with the institution, the frequent visits made in connection with the Convocations and at other times, the definite suggestions which are constantly being received, and the not infrequent tangible expression in the form of gifts — all testify to the warmth and cordiality of the feeling cherished. A single exception has shown itself in the attitude of certain alumnss on questions recently discussed by the Faculty and Trustees. In this case the officers of the association refused to recognize the actual facts as presented to them officially, and saw fit to promulgate statements which were in a large measure misleading on account of their falsity. A single example of the interest of the alumni may be cited, viz., the work which was done in assisting in the establishment of the Daily Maroon, a work greatly appreciated by all connected with the University. The man who is only ten years or less out of college has not usually reached a place of prominence, and consequently we should not yet expect the alumni of the University to be occupying high positions. Indeed, the alumni of a new institution have many things with which to contend. It is natural that the alumni of universi- ties established for many years will use their influence in every line of work to assist the younger alumni of their own institutions. It was difficult in the early days for the alumni of the University of Chicago to secure that recognition which they deserved, because the stronger influence of older institutions was, at least indirectly, being exerted against them ; but in spite of the youth of the institution and of the diffi- xxxviii The Peesident's Kepoet CTilties just stated, our graduates have already achieved the highest success in nearly every line of work. Before the work of instruction had begun, the Trustees voted to re-enact the degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Divinity in the case of those graduates of the old University of Chicago and Morgan Park Theological Seminary who would come for- ward and receive the new degree at one of the Convocations. By this arrangement the University, before it had actually opened its doors, was in possession of a considerable body of alumni. The lines of distinction between the old and the new have been largely destroyed, and the spirit of co-operation prevails. A fuller reference to the subject of degrees will be made in another paragraph. Through its Bureau of Eecommendations the University is enabled to render valuable assistance to the alumni. The work of this Bureau, at first limited to making recommendations for teachers, has recently been extended, and now includes recom- mendations for any kind of work. The University desires through this Bureau to aid the alumni of the University, where aid is desired, in securing such positions as they may be able to fill most advantageously. A delicate responsibility is thus assumed, since not infrequently an alumnus is hardly satisfied with the statement that the Uni- versity, from its knowledge of his work in college and his career after leaving college, is able to make. The Bureau of Recommendations must be absolutely sincere and honest in the statements which it shall make. The officers of the University evidently can have no motive in connection with this Bureau other than that of giving assistance. To the alumni of no other institution of learning probably is there given so responsible a place in connection with the management of the affairs of the university as to the alumni of our own University. This is based upon the statute establishing and regulating the Congregation. Since this body includes in its constituency (a) every person who has received the Doctor's degree, (6) representatives of the Masters to the number of fifty, (c) representatives of the Bachelors of Arts, Literature, and Sci- ence to the number of one hundred, it is evident that it will ultimately be largely under the influence of the alumni, and since this body has been given the power to require a reconsideration of any action of a ruling body, its influence in the development of the policy of the University cannot be overestimated. It is customary to say to those receiv- ing the higher degrees of the University that the acceptance of such degrees is not to be interpreted as an honorary dismissal from the institution, but rather as a final initia- tion into the University of which forever afterwards they are members. Not infre- quently in the history of the Congregation men who were professors in other institu- tions of learning have sat in judgment upon the policy of the University of Chicago, being entitled to do this by virtue of the fact that they were Doctors of the Univer- sity or representatives duly elected. Much efficient work has been accomplished by the Secretary of the Alumni, who m connection with other work has administered the affairs of the association. The The President's Eeport xxxix time will soon come probably when the entire service of a strong man may profitably be occupied in the work of furthering the interests of the alumni, and through them of the institution. I desire to present the following suggestions: 1. Copies of the Annual Begister should be mailed to every alumnus of the Uni- versity who indicates his desire to receive the same. Each alumnus, as a representative of the institution, should acquaint himself with the changes which are constantly being made in the internal work and organization of the University. These are formulated from time to time in the Begister, and although the volume is an expensive one, it is not asking too much of the University to supply its members (every alumnus being a member) with a copy. 2. Steps should be taken to enlarge the Bureau of Eecommendations. Here again the work has grown in an unprecedented manner. Much has been accomplished, but much more remains to be done. Only through adequate organization of the office can the many demands made upon it be satisfactorily met. 3. Whenever an opportunity presents itself for bringing together permanently eight or ten of the alumni, an association should be formed. Such an association will undoubtedly grow, and though at first small, a nucleus will be furnished around which will gather the new members of the University. 4. Regular provision should be made for the visitation of these associations by representatives of the Faculty. It is as necessary that the Faculty should keep in touch with the alumni as that the alumni should keep in touch with the University. 5. A large emphasis should be laid upon the fact that the alumni are members of the University, and that local separation should not interfere with the growth of close connection with the institution. VI. THE FOUNDER It is a delicate and somewhat difficult task to undertake to make a statement on the relations of the founder of the University to the institution, for much that I should like to say must of necessity be omitted. The story of the beginning of Mr. Rockefeller's interest in a college or university in Chicago is a long and intensely interesting one. The main features of it will probably not be made public until after the death of those who were the principal actors in it. His association with the Theological Seminary at Morgan Park was the occasion of his later interest in the larger work. His keen insight into the future led him to select Chicago as the center of the educational work which it was in his mind to foster. His study of the situation was one extending over several years, and only after he had given the subject a prolonged consideration was a decision finally reached. The fundamental principle in his policy from the beginning to the present has been to render assistance in such a way as that the responsibility for giving may not be taken from others. The wisdom of this policy has fully demonstrated itself. The fact that the list of donors contains xl The President's Eepoet so large a number of names is in large measure due to the working out of this important policy. The method was one which has at times seemed severe, for Mr. Rockefeller has been very conscientious in carrying out his contracts, doing only what he has agreed to do, and compelling the other party to do his share according to the agreement. But the good results of the method are fully apparent, and the fact that the University has received in gifts $17,000,000, and that this sum has come from over three thousand donors, is in itself sufficient evidence of Mr. Rockefeller's wisdom in this whole matter. If any feature of his relationship has been more marked than another, it has been the steady perseverance with which he has pursued the purpose originally outlined. So far as I understand the case, he has not wavered. His attitude has always been that of intelligent interest. But this has never led him to interfere in any way with the educational details of the work. Much ado was made on a certain occasion with reference to the resignation of a professor, it being asserted that this resignation had come about through the influence of the University's patron. It was said at that time, and it may be repeated again, that the representations to that effect were abso- lutely false. Mr. Rockefeller was not even aware that such a professor was in the University until he saw in the newspapers an account of his resignation. I carmot do better than reproduce here Mr. Rockefeller's brief address presented on the occasion of the Decennial celebration of the institution: Mr. President, Gentlemen of the Board of Trustees, Members of the Faculty, Students of the University of Chicago, Ladies and Gentlemen : It is a great pleasure for me to be present on this occasion. Five years have quickly passed since my last visit, and I see on every hand the great work which has been accomplished during that period — greater by far than our most sanguine expectations at that time. The extent and magnitude of the work are not alone measured by what we see of new structures and additional lands, together with new books and apparatus, but also by the steady and remarkable growth in the influence which this University exerts. It has stood, and will stand, for the best and the highest; for the good of man and the glory of God. ************* The University is to be congratulated on its Board of Trustees. It was no easy undertak- ing to secure such a Board, composed as it is of men occupying the most important positions in the business and professional world. This task, however, was rendered less difficult on account of the widespread confidence felt in om- President. Much as we value the contributions of money which have been so generously furnished by the many friends of the University, we cannot overestimate the services of the Trustees, which have been given with unsurpassed ability, loyalty, and devotion. Indeed, I am certain that many gifts of money and property to the University of Chicago have been made because of the growing and well-merited confidence which the services of these Trustees have inspired in the public at large. In addition to these gifts, it is well known to you that large contributions have been made by individual members of this Board, and I imderstand there are still others in contemplation. The statement has been made, on good authority, that the Faculty of the University of Chicago is not surpassed by that of any other university in our covmtry. It has been chosen with the greatest care by those eminently qualified to make such choice. No pains or money The President's Report xli were spared in securing the very best professors and teachers, from every part of our own coun- try and also from Europe. Certain it is that the high commendations with which they came to this University have been borne out in the work which they have since accomplished. They have proved themselves broad-minded and progressive men, and the large body of students from all parts of the country who have been in attendance at the University of Chicago is the best testimonial to their ability and efficiency. The confidence and esteem in which the Faculty is held are shared by the President, the Board of Trustees, and the community at large. Most friendly and cordial relations exist between the Faculty, the students, and all others shar- ing with the Faculty the responsibilities of the University administration, and at no time has there been so bright an outlook for the University as at present. Students of the University of Chicago, what can I say to you that will enable you to make the best use of your opportunities? You look out upon the world with bright prospects, and from a standpoint far more advantageous than that of many who preceded you. Whatever your station may be hereafter, do not fail to tm-n gratefully to your families and friends who have stood by you in your time of struggle for an education. Many of them toiled incessantly through long, weary years, that you might be possessed of advantages which they were unable to secure for themselves. I entreat you not to forget them, and not to fail, as the years go by, frequently to express to them your gratitude and regard, and to return to them, in loving and helpful attentions, the proof of the sincerity of your unfailing appreciation. These expressions will give happiness to them, and the reflex influence of your words and acts of gratitude will bring blessing to you. We all rejoice in yovu: hope of success. We trust that you will be so anchored in the possession of sterling qualities that you will turn to best account whatever life has in store for you. In the end the question will be, not whether you have achieved great dis- tinction and made yourselves known to all the world, but whether you have fitted into the niches God has assigned you, and have done your work day by day in the best possible way. We shall continue in the future, as in the past, to need great men and women to fill the most important positions in the commercial and professional world, but we shall also need just as much the men and women who can and will fill the humblest positions imcomplainingly and acceptably. The vital thing is to find as soon as possible the place in life where you can best serve the world. Whatever position this is, it is the highest position in the sight of good men and in the economy of God. I tremble to think of the failures that may come to some of you who are possessed of the brightest intellects and capable of the greatest accomplishments. I shall expect to see many who are here present among the slow, methodical, plodding ones, who are not at all distinguished as you for brilliancy, go forward until at last they are found occupy- ing positions of the greatest honor and responsibility. Some of the foes which threaten your success may not be apparent to you until it is too late. If you are to succeed in life, it will be because you master yourselves, and if you are to continue masters, and not slaves, you do not need that I should say to you here today that you must jealously guard the approach of any foe to your well-being. You will do well not to underestimate the strength of such a foe. How many a young man whom I knew in my school days went down because of his fondness for intoxicating drinks! No man has ever had occasion to regret that he was not addicted to the use of liquor. No woman has ever had occasion to regret that she was not instrumental in influencing young men to use intoxicants. So much has been said on the subject of success that I forbear making particular suggestions. The chances for success are better today than ever before. Success is attained by industry, perseverance, and pluck, coupled with any amount of hard work, and you need not expect to achieve it in any other way. Citizens of Chicago, it affords me great pleasure to say to you that your kindly interest in, and generous support of, this University have been of the greatest encouragement to all those xiii The Peesident's Keport interested in its welfare, and have also stimulated others to contribute to its advancement. It is possible for you to make this University an increasing power for good, not only for the city of Chicago, but for our entire country, and indeed the whole world. The success of the University of Chicago is assured, and we are here today rejoicing in that success. All praise to Chicago ! Long may she live, to foster and develop this sturdy representa- tive of her enterprise and public spirit ! On two occasions only has Mr. Kockefeller found it possible and convenient to visit us. The first was the celebration of the Quinquennial, and the second that of the Decennial. On both of these occasions his public addresses were so well con- ceived and so admirably expressed, and their adaptation to the situation so evident, that with one accord all who heard or read them were delighted. During both of these visits he has shown a keen appreciation of the kind and courteous expressions made to him by the friends and Trustees of the University. In no year of the University's history has lie given more substantial evidence of his abiding love for the University and of his deep interest for its future than during the year closing June 30, 1902. This statement would be incomplete without a full recognition of the part which has been played by the wife of the founder. From the first hour to the present her heart has been full of sympathy for the work, and on many occasions her words of encouragement have been a source of great service. It would indeed be difficult to determine whether the husband or the wife is the more strongly interested of the two. It is an occasion for regret that arrangements for celebrating Founder's Day have never been satisfactorily completed. The Trustees at first designated Mr. Rockefeller's birthday, July 16. Afterward it was thought best to designate the day on which he first visited the University, July 1, 1896. Neither of these days seems to come at the right season of the year, and up to the present time a combination of Convocation Day and Founder's Day has been made. The relationship between the founder of the University and the Trustees has been at all times a most cordial one, and every step in the progress of the University has been one of common agreement. I desire to present the following suggestions: 1. The Trustees should take steps in the immediate future to secure a bronze or marble bust of the founder of the University. The painting by Eastman Johnson is of course a most important treasure, but this is not sufficient, and we cannot be satisfied until there is placed in its proper position a more lasting representation of the founder. 2. The question of a permanent day to be set apart as Founder's Day, and to be celebrated as such every year, is one which should now receive careful consideration. In the earlier years it was thought best not to press this question for decision until a larger experience might be secured. The question of holidays and celebrations is one of great importance in the calendar of the University, and no permanent holidays in addition to those already established by law should be granted until this question has been settled. 3. It would seem to be proper and altogether appropriate that the University, The President's Report xliii whenever assembled in Convocation, should send a communication to the founder. These meetings of the entire University are not complete without some recognition each time of the great and splendid service which has been done the cause of educa- tion in the Mississippi Valley by the foresight, courage, and magnanimity of this one man. A proper acknowledgment of this fact in such form as may be adopted from time to time is a tribute to which he is entitled. 4. An effort should be made by the Trustees to secure a visit from the founder each year of the remaining years of his life. Such a visit would always bring with it inspiration and increased zeal in the furtherance of the work, and such a visit, I am persuaded, would likewise prove to be a source of real satisfaction to the founder. An urgent appeal to him would perhaps secure his favorable consideration of this suggestion. 5. Provision should be made for acquainting the students of the University, not only with the relationship of Mr. Rockefeller to the University as founder, but also with the elements in his character which make him prominent among the men of modern times. Respect for his modest reserve would perhaps lead to the postpone- ment of any direct action along the line of this suggestion for the present, but the matter is certainly deserving of consideration in the near future. VII. ADMINISTRATIVE HISTORY It was a memorable occasion on Saturday afternoon, October 1, 1892, when the Faculties of Arts, Literature, and Science held their first assembly. At this meeting the President reported that regulations covering the various lines of University admin- istration had been adopted by the University Trustees, and it was expected that these regulations would be continued in force and the University be conducted in accordance with them until in any particular case a majority of the Faculty should agree upon a modification or substitute. The regulations which thus formed the basis of organiza- tion are contained in Bulletins Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4. A comparison of the regulations of the University as now codified with the first regulations will indicate to what extent the original plans have been conserved. The first measure presented to the Faculties for their consideration related to the establishment of fraternities. The Minutes of the meeting show the following entry: .... moved that under the restrictions named by the President, the Secret Societies be permitted in the University. On motion of Mr. Laughlin, this matter was committed to a com- mittee for consideration. The President named on this committee Messrs. Judson, Hale, Small, Tufts, and Stagg. It soon became apparent that the Faculty, numbering nearly one hundred mem- bers, was too large a body for the transaction of business relating to details. A proposition was made and adopted to organize boards of administration, one for the Junior Colleges, one for the Senior Colleges, and one for the Graduate Schools. Affairs were conducted through these Boards under the General Faculty until December xliv The President's Repoet 10, 1895. After a full discussion, the General Faculty recommended to the Trustees its division into three distinct Faculties, each corresponding to the Administrative Board which had hitherto existed. In the spring of 1902 the Senior College Faculty and the Graduate Faculty were combined into one, called the United Faculties, the supervision of the Senior College students being left to the administration of a Board which is virtually a standing committee of the United Faculties. At this time the Junior College was more distinctly separated than before from the other Faculties. A minority of the Faculties has urged the readoption of the policy of a General Faculty, to which all matters of legislation should be submitted, and in which should be included the work of the Junior Colleges as well as that of the Senior Colleges and the Graduate School. But, after a full discussion of the matter, a majority of the Congregation declared its opinion substantially in favor of the policy that had been in vogue. The policy is based upon the following principles: 1. The consideration of legislation and its application to the cases of individual students cannot economically be handled by a large body, the results being practically those of a mass meeting. 2. University legislation is largely an outgrowth of precedents established in consideration of individual cases, and this work in particular is impracticable in a body consisting of fifty or more officers. 8. While in a small institution each officer can easily keep in touch with all the departments of the institution's work, in a large institution specialization in the admin- istration is as necessary as specialization in departmental work. Opportunity must be given men to find that particular phase of general university work which appeals to them most closely ; and by the training which comes from experience these men as specialists are fitted to do particular kinds of work, while at the same time they are perhaps rendered unable to do other kinds of work. 4. Officers of instruction in a large institution must consent to limit their interests . and sympathies to particular phases of the work, or they will not have the opportunity to perform properly the duties expected of them in coimection with their departmental subjects. 5. To this end special Boards are created for the management of special lines -of University work and life. For example : (a) the Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums ; (h) the University Press; (c) the University Extension; [d) the Bureau of Recommen- dations ; (e) Student Organizations, Publications, and Exhibitions ; (/) Religious Work of the University; and so forth. Inasmuch as each of these lines of work affects alike the work of officers and students in all the divisions of the University, they cannot be properly relegated to any single Faculty, but should be conducted by Boards on which all Faculties are represented. Some officers have felt that this policy deprived them of an opportunity of joining themselves more closely with the various fields of university work, but it seems clear that in a large institution, with so many departments and so varied interests, it would The Peesident's Report xIv be impossible for any single individual to keep in toucli with all the departments in such a manner as to make his judgment concerning the work of a particular division of any value. At the same time, it is recognized as a fundamental principle that every officer of the University should have an opportunity to make inquiry and to raise questions con- cerning the action of any Faculty or Board or ruling body in the institution. As affording such an opportunity, the University Congregation was established in the autumn of 1896. By the statute creating this body, (1) every officer of the rank of Instructor or above is constituted a member ; (2) every action of every ruling body in the University must be submitted quarterly for the approval or disapproval of the Congregation; (3) if the Congregation votes its disapproval, the Faculty or the Board in which the action was originally taken is required to reconsider it within thirty days, and, if the action is again voted, to report the same with reasons therefor to the Congregation at its next meeting; (4) the privilege of raising new questions and establishing committees of investigation is granted ; (5) the right to make suggestions in detail and to call for reports is granted. The Congregation thus affords a forum in which any officer may present his views upon any subject, for the consideration of the University at large, and in which the public opinion of the University at large is obtained concerning any matter, new or old, which may be presented. The history of the meetings of the Congregation thus far held shows four things: 1. Every subject of larger importance has sooner or later come before the Con- gregation, and thus every officer of the University has had the privilege of presenting his views on every subject connected with the development of the University. 2. The larger number of important subjects have received their fullest discussion in the Congregation, a discussion open to every member of the Congregation. 3. Whenever the Congregation has indicated clearly and definitely its opinion on an important question, the Faculty having to do with that question has accepted the opinion of the Congregation as authoritative. 4. The most important changes made in five years have in every case come as a result of the discussions in the Congregation. In order to secure unity throughout the institution, on the one hand, of educa- tional policy and, on the other, of administrative policy, the Senate, made up almost entirely of Heads of Departments, and the Council, made up of administrative officers, review each month the proceedings of Faculties and Boards, and have the right by statute to modify or veto such actions. This power is but rarely exercised, but the fact that these bodies have the power to modify the actions of other ruling bodies in itself secures the desired unity of legislation and administration. By this system, which when understood is devoid of all elements of complexity, there are gained four things : (a) the service of specialists in the various divisions of work ; (5) independence of action by the various Faculties; (c) unity of policy through the Senate and Council; and (d) the influence of public opinion through the Congregation. xlvi ' The President's Keport It is still a mooted question whether the President and the Deans in an institu- tion of higher learning should at the same time be officers of instruction. It is urged, on the one side, that such a policy will result in overwork on the part of the officers or a neglect of one or the other of the duties assigned, namely, the administration, the work of teaching, or the work of investigation. It is maintained, on the other hand, that the administrative officer should have that sympathy with the student which ordi- narily comes from contact with some students as pupils, and that sympathy with the staff of instructors which is impossible if the administrative officer himself is not an instructor. Our own experience has furnished strong testimony in favor of the policy of distributing the administrative work among a large number of men who in each case belong to the staff of instructors. While occasionally there have been points of disagreement, and while sometimes this disagreement has reached a more or less serious stage, in no case has there been real rupture in any given Faculty or between any two Faculties or Boards. The spirit of accommodation has been marked, and it may well be questioned whether by any other system of administration results of the character actually produced could have been secured. Concerning the relationship of the President to the various Boards in the Faculty, a statement will be made in another paragraph. I desire to make the following suggestions : 1. Those Deans who have the larger responsibilities — for example, the Dean of a Faculty as distinguished from a Dean in a Faculty— should be given greater freedom from teaching, and especially should this be done in cases in which there is clearly marked ability for investigation. If the Dean's work may be reckoned as half of the work of an instructor, and if each instructor not doing a Dean's work is expected to do investiga- tion equal at all events to one-half the work of an instructor, the normal unit of a professor's work is three. Some men will give two parts to instruction and one part to investigation; others, two parts to administration and one part to investigation; still others would give one part to instruction, one part to administration, and one part to investigation. 2. Greater emphasis should be placed upon the independent authority of the several Boards and Faculties than has heretofore been done. The cases of modifica- tion or veto on the part of the Senate or Council are so few that each Board and Faculty may well consider itself authorized to proceed independently as if no such body as the Senate or Council existed. 3. Two meetings of the Congregation should be held each Quarter instead of one. Experience has shown that a single meeting is not sufficient for the transaction of all the matters to be brought before the Congregation. A meeting might perhaps be held at the close of the fourth or fifth week of the Quarter, and the regular proce- dure at this meeting might profitably be the review of the actions of ruling bodies during the preceding Quarter. This would leave opportunity for action by the bodies concerned to be taken between the first and second meetings of the Congregation in The Pkesident's Report xlvii the Quarter, and would relegate to the second meeting the reports from Faculties on special subjects referred to them, the reports of committees established, and the con- sideration of new questions. 4. The place of the Congregation Dinner should be more permanently fixed. This dinner has been changed from time to time, and for this reason has not become as permanent an institution as might be desired. It has, however, an important function to perform : (o) in bringing together the members of the Congregation, includ- ing representatives of the alumni as well as of the Faculties ; (h) in affording members of the Congregation an opportunity to bring their friends into closer touch with the University ; (c) in affording an opportunity for showing proper courtesy to the Convo- cation orator and special guests of the University ; and (cZ) in giving the President an opportunity to speak confidentially to the members of the University on subjects of special importance and interest — an opportunity which is not otherwise afforded, unless the time of the regular meeting of the Congregation is taken. 5. It will be necessary within a short time to take up the consideration anew of the constitution of the Senate. This body, consisting originally of ten or twelve per- sons, now has a membership of thirty or more. The close and confidential assistance which the smaller body furnished the President cannot be rendered by the larger body. Is it probable that the Senate should ultimately become a representative body, its members to be selected by the Board of Trustees, or to be elected by the various Faculties ? 6. In the recent reorganization of the United Faculties, certain group committees were established consisting of the officers of instruction belonging to closely related Departments. The chairman of each group, in accordance with the regulation, is to be elected by the members of the group. Experience has already shown that the chairman is not always selected with a view to his executive ability. It would seem necessary, therefore, that, as in an important eastern institution, the chairmen of these committees be appointed, like the Deans, by the Board of Trustees. 7. In the future differentiation of the work in each case the Dean of a Faculty should be that officer who is the chief administrative officer of the Faculty, and upon him should be placed the particular responsibility for the administration of its work. The Dean or Deans in such a Faculty should have for their function the more restricted work of dealing with students. The time has come, for example, when the Dean of the Junior Colleges and the Dean of the United Faculties should be relieved from the responsibility of dealing with particular students. The administrative work of the Faculties themselves in connection with the curricula and outside relationships is sufficient to engross their time. 8. The administrative work of the Faculties can never be properly handled until adequate quarters for such work have been provided. The use of rooms not con- structed for the purpose, the distribution in several buildings of officers who should be closely associated in a single building, together with the lack of proper facilities for xMii The President's Kepokt committee work and even for the holding of Faculty meetings, all contribute to more or less unsatisfactory results in the work of administration. A central Administrative Building, constructed with special reference to the present organization, should be erected in the immediate future. With such a building, if properly arranged, the work would be handled with far greater efficiency and with marked economy. VIII. BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS The original plan of the grounds included three blocks running from Fifty -ninth street to Fifty-sixth street between Ellis avenue on the west and Greenwood avenue on the east. In arranging for the buildings on this piece of ground, it soon became apparent that the ground was ill adjusted for any scheme that would prove satisfactory. After a most earnest debate in the Board of Trustees, it was decided to purchase the block on Fifty-ninth street lying west of Lexington avenue and to exchange the block on Ellis avenue between Fifty-seventh and Fifty-sixth for the block on Lexington avenue between Fifty-eighth and Fifty-seventh. This gave a piece of ground eight hundred by twelve hundred feet. Plans were made for the erection of buildings on these grounds. At that time it was hardly expected that the University could extend its holdings. It became clear that space was needed for an athletic field, and after the block between Fifty-seventh and Fifty-sixth on Ellis avenue through the courtesy of Mr. Marshall Field had been occupied for several years at a nominal rental, Mr. Field and Mr. Rockefeller joined in presenting this block and the adjoining block on the east, thus enlarging the University holdings to six blocks or thirty-five acres. Two years later the growth of the institution seemed to be so great that in the near future addi- tional land would be needed. With this in mind, the Business Manager was author- ized to make additional purchases, and as a result the University is now in possession of all of the frontage on Fifty -ninth street between Cottage Grove avenue and Madison avenue. Certain portions of some of these blocks still remain unpurchased. Mention should be made of the generous gift of Mrs. Scammon of one-fourth of the block known as the Scammon Block between Kimbark avenue and Monroe avenue and Fifty- ninth and Fifty-eighth streets. The remainder of this block has been purchased. There are some who have visions of even more extended possessions in the matter of lands, but it is reasonable to suppose that for the present the University has moved in this direction as far as it is possible. It is understood that the two blocks next to Cottage Grove avenue are to be set aside for Technological work, the two east of these and west of the Divinity Halls for the Junior College for Men. The block west of the Scammon Block and a portion of the block on which the President's house stands will be used for buildings in connection with the Junior College for Women. In addition to this, the University has been given sixty-five acres of land on Lake Geneva with approximately six hundred feet of lake frontage. This gift was made by Mr. John Johnston, Jr. All of the property included in this statement is used for the purpose of the University campus. The President's Repoe't xlis The following are the buildings of the University, arranged in the order of erec- tion, with the names of the donors, and the actual cost: Building Date Erected Cost Donor Cobb Hall Graduate Hall ) Middle Divinity [ South Divinity ) Kent Chemical Laboratory Ryerson Physical Laboratory Snell Hall Nancy Foster Hall Beecher Hall Kelly Hall Walker Museum Haskell Oriental Museum Hull Biological Laboratories Yerkes Observatory Green Hall Foster Hall Addition School of Education (temporary building) 1892 1892 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1896 1897 1897 1898 1900 1901 8221,956.03 172,805.72 202,270.19 200,371.41 53,586.41 62,966.86 62,126.05 62,149.21 109,275.11 103,017.49 325,000.00 325,000.00 72,000.00 20,466.04 24,983.89 Silas B. Cobb John D. Rockefeller Sidney A. Kent Martin A. Ryerson Mrs. Henrietta Snell Mrs. Nancy Foster Mrs. Jerome Beecher Mrs. Elizabeth Kelly George C. Walker Mrs. Caroline E. Haskell Miss Helen Culver Charles T. Yerkes Mrs. Elizabeth Kelly Mrs. Nancy Foster Several funds BUILDINGS UNDEE CONSTRUCTION AT THE CLOSE OF THE FIRST TEN YEARS Building Cost Donor Charles Hitchcock Hall Press Building '. Power Plant Prank Dickinson Bartlett Gymnasium School of Education Group of buildings on corner of Fifty-seventh street and Lexington avenue £150,000.00 105,606.00 365,000.00 240,000.00 610,000.00 500,000.00 Mrs. Charles Hitchcock John D. Rockefeller John D. Rockefeller A. C. Bartlett and friends Mrs. Emmons Blaine and friends C. L. Hutchinson, John J. Mitchell, Leon Mandel, the Reynolds estate, and friends After long discussion in the Congregation, extending through more than two years, a Commission consisting of Trustees and Professors was appointed by the Board of Trustees to take up the question of locating buildings on the remaining space of the central quadrangles. The Eeport of this Commission is published in detail on pp. 266 ff. of this volume. The large amount of faithful and efficient service rendered by the Chairman of this Commission, Mr. Burton, deserves special acknowledgment. It is believed that the conclusions of the Commission will be substantially carried out, and already the plans for the Law Building have been prepared with reference to this project. The proposition of the Commission makes the Library the central feature of a group of seven buildings. On the east of the Library facing Fifty-nruth street will be located the building for the Historical Departments ; north of it and a little to the west, the building of the Law School ; and still farther north, a building for Philosophy and Psychology. Directly west of the Library will be located the building for the Modern Languages, north and east of which is the present Haskell Museum, and north The President's Report of this the building for the Divinity School. The location on the corner of Fifty-ninth street and Ellis avenue will be occupied by the building for the Classical Departments. In the earlier days, when buildings were being erected on every side and tunnels for heat and light were being constructed, it did not seem worth while to take up the consideration of the treatment of the grounds, but more recently landscape gardeners have been employed to make a study of the situation, and the results of their work have been incorporated in plans, the execution of which will ultimately cost about one hundred thousand dollars for the four central blocks. The cost of putting a block of ground in proper shape is estimated at about twenty-five thousand dollars. On the basis of this calculation the Trustees have already inaugurated the plan of taking up a portion of the University grounds each year for complete and thorough treatment. The greatest expense is involved in preparing the soil in such a manner as that trees may attain their proper growth. I desire to make the following suggestions: 1. Ground should be secured for the intercollegiate athletic games at a point not far distant from the University, but distinctly separated from the University buildings. The possession of such a field would (a) furnish an additional practice field, which is already needed and will be much more needed in future years ; (6) relieve the libraries and class-rooms of the noise and distraction of the games, which has come to be something exceedingly serious ; (c) secure better arrangement for the transportation of those attending the games. Nothing could be much worse than the present Marshall Field from this latter point of view. 2. The building for which there is the greatest need is the Library. On this point the entire membership of the University Faculties agrees. It is estimated that the building proposed, including the furnishings, will cost from three-quarters of a million to a million dollars. The greatest assistance that could be rendered the University would be the provision for such a building. 3. The plans for the Women's Quadrangle will soon be completed, and work should be begun at once upon the erection of the proposed buildings. These buildings will include the following: (a) a gymnasium for all the women of the University ; (h) a caf 6 and club-house for women, corresponding to the caf 6 and club- house now being erected for men; (c) residence halls for women; (d) halls furnishing suites of rooms for non-residence Houses such as Spelman ; (e) a building for class- rooms; (/) laboratories; (g) assembly-room and library. 4. At the same time work should begin upon the Men's Quadrangle to be located west of Ellis avenue on Fifty-ninth street. This Quadrangle will contain the following buildings : (a) a gymnasium for Junior College men ; this will not be needed for some time ; [b) a club-house for Junior College men ; the erection of this also might be delayed for some time in view of the general club-house already provided; (c) residence Halls for men; (d) Halls for non-residence Houses such as Washington and Lincoln; (e) buildings for class-rooms and laboratories; (/) assembly-room and library. The Peesident's Kepoet 5. Other buildings which are needed at once, and for which provision should be made, are the following : (a) the Classical Building, to be erected on the corner of Fifty- ninth street and Ellis avenue at a cost of $150,000 to |200,000; (6) the Modern Lan- guage Building, to be erected on Fifty-ninth street, directly west of the proposed Library, at a cost of |250,000 ; (c) the building for the Historical Departments, to be erected directly east of the proposed Library Building, at a cost of |250,000; (d) the building for Philosophy and Psychology, to be erected directly north of the Law School Building and west of Walker Museum, at a cost of $150,000; (e) the building for the Divinity School, to be erected directly north of Haskell Oriental Museum, at a cost of $200,000; (/) a building fd5- the Departments of Geology, Geography, Min- eralogy, Paleontology, and Anthropology, with provision for a large museum space, to be erected on Lexington avenue north of Beecher Hall and east of Walker Museum, at a cost of $250,000; (g) a building for the Departments of Mathematics and Astronomy, to be erected south of Mandel Hall on Lexington avenue, at a cost of $200,000; (h) the Administration Building referred to above, to be erected at the head of Fifty-eighth street on Lexington avenue, at a cost of $200,000; (i) the University Chapel, to be used exclusively for the religious services of the University, and to be erected north of Cobb Lecture Hall on Ellis avenue, at a cost of $500,000. The total cost of buildings necessary for the proper maintenance of the University's work in the Departments already established on the four main Quadrangles would therefore be from $2,900,000 to $3,200,000. 6. New buildings for the Medical work of the first two years are greatly needed. These, according to the present plans, are to be erected on Fifty-seventh street between Ellis and Lexington avenues, facing south. They will be in close relationship with the Biological Buildings on the other side of the street. Considering the large number of medical students and the crowded condition of the laboratories, this matter should receive immediate attention. 7. The staff of employees, whose work is connected with the care of buildings and grounds, now numbering 117, should be reorganized on lines of greater efficiency. A bet- ter distribution of work is possible. The service is at present exceedingly unsatisfactory. In ^11 probability the sum of money set apart for this service has not been large enough. 8. The Trustees should enact that a specially designated uniform be worn by all members of the staff of employees engaged in connection with the buildings and grounds, including janitors. This uniform should be selected with special care, in view of the fact that many of the men are engaged in labor during a large portion of the time. With a better organization, as suggested above, supplemented by the uniforming of the staff of employees, the service will be greatly improved. 9. The University should undertake to provide more definitely and more reasonably for those of its employees who live on or near the grounds. Better accommodations should be arranged for sleeping-rooms, parlors, and for general means of self -improve- ment. It is hardly consistent to engage in Settlement Work in the Stock Yards dis- lii The President's Report trict and to ignore, at the same time, the opportunities and the necessities upon our own grounds. IX. THE BUSINESS MANAGEMENT OF THE UNIVERSITY The desire of the Trustees has been to conduct the afPairs of the University in accordance with business methods of the strictest character; and no pains have been spared to organize the business side of the work in such a manner as to accomplish this end. No better illustration of the growth of the University could be cited than the history of the business management. During the first year the work was handled under the Buildings and Grounds Committee by the Secretary of the Board of Trustees with a single bookkeeper and a stenographer. When the work of the University began, a Registrar was appointed to collect fees and room rents, and to represent the University in financial dealings with the students. A Chief Accountant was soon needed, and around him was gathered a staff of bookkeepers. In the year 1894 the Trustees voted to establish the oflice of Comptroller, later changed to Business Manager, and Mr. Henry A. Rust was appointed to fill the position. In ■ that year the buildings and grounds of the University were valued at $1,781,252.98; the furniture, books, and equipment, at $322,613.12; the investments of the University, at 12,159,052.16; and the expenditures of the Budget were $529,674.19. These sums had respectively become, in the year closing June 80, 1902: buildings and grounds, $4,109,035.79; the furniture, books, and equipment, $822,747.70; invest- ments, $8,674,962.12; expenditures of the Budget, $944,348.26. The staff of employees consisting of one stenographer and one bookkeeper has grown to a staff including a Business Manager, an Auditor, three assistant book- keepers, seven clerks, two stenographers, in all fourteen, to whom is intrusted the management of the business part of the University's work. This does not include the clerks, stenographers, and assistants in the offices of the President, the Deans, and other educational administrators. It has been a source of great satisfaction that in these first years, when the busi- ness of the University was being organized, the University could have so wise and strong and faithful an ofiicer at the head of its finances as Mr. Rust has shown himself to be. In accepting this position Mr. Rust brought to it a large experience as an engineer in the erection of buildings, a refined and cultivated taste in everything that related to buildings and grounds, and a thorough and business-like appreciation of the financial side of the work. The University is to be congratulated upon its good fortune in having enjoyed the services of such a man for so long a time.' From the following tables may be gathered certain interesting facts, viz. : (1) the growth of the assets of the University from year to year ; (2) the distribution of these assets; (3) the percentage of income realized on invested funds; (4) the various sources of the University's income and the proportionate amount furnished by each. 1 The resignation of Mr. Rust and the appointment of his successor, Mr. Wallace Heckman, do not fall within the period covered by this report. The President's Keport liii June 30, 1894 ----- " 1895 1896 ----- " 1897 ----- 1898 1899 1900 1901 ----- 1902 ----- The distribution of these assets on June 30, 1902, Investments Buildings ------ Grounds - Books ------- Scientific equipment Fvirniture ------ Material and supplies Printing Office plant - - - - Cash and ciuTent assets - $ 4,272,147.06 - 5,586,160.65 7,732,626.06 - 8,311,642.60 8,937,759.41 ■ 9,157,721.50 9,880,777.52 ■ 12,364,216.58 15,128,375.95 was as follows: $ 8,674,962.12 2,812,032.60 ■ 2,281,378.36 314,949.78 440,993.48 - 66,804.54 36,569.28 - 10,521.77 490.164.02 Eats per Cent. - 5.30 Total $15,128,375.95 The per cent, of income realized on invested funds has been as follows: Date June 30, 1895 - ' - 1896 ------- 5.22 1897 ------- 5.20 1898 5.05 1899 ------- 5.03 " 1900 ------- 4.66 " 1901 ------- 4.44 1902 4.12 The various sources of the University's income and the proportionate amount furnished by each for the year 1901-2: Invested funds ------------ $258,187.42 Students --..- a) Tuition fees --------- $269,065.03 6) Other fees -------- 56,106.74 c) Room rents --------- 46,364.35 John D. Rockefeller ---------- a) CmTent expense - - 253,144.00 6) Medical work -------- 50,000.00 c) History books - 7,500.00 Publications receipts - - - Theological Union - - - - Donations, old subscriptions, and miscellaneous ----- 371,536.12 Per Cent. 26.4 38.0 310,644.00 31.9 23,182.91 9,300.00 4,977.88 2.3 0.9 0.5 Total $977,828.33 100.0 liv The President's Report The following statement, originally prepared for another publication, presents briefly the principles which have controlled the action of the Trustees in the manage- ment of the business of the University : First : The business affairs of a great institution should be conducted, not for the sake of increasing the business, but in a manner wholly subservient to the best inter- ests of the educational work which has been undertaken. To this end every dollar possible, consistent with good business prudence, will be expended for educational purposes, and every dollar possible will be saved from the expenditures involved in the administration of the business affairs. In other words, the successful business management is not in itself an end, but merely a means for providing facilities of an educational character. Second: The business affairs of a large institution are of the nature of a public trust, and consequently difPer essentially from the business affairs of a company or an individual. It follows that no risks of any kind may be incurred. Speculation with university funds is criminal. A transaction which would be perfectly proper for an individual, and from a business point of view satisfactory, may be utterly lacking in those characteristics which should secure its approval by the board of trustees of a university. It is probable that no business management in the world is more con- servative than that of the large institutions of learning. It is also probable that in no other business concerns has the percentage of loss on investments or from dis- honesty been so small. Third: The trusteeship of a university, although involving the greatest possible responsibility and demanding work in large amount and of high character, must be a voluntary service. The president of the university should be the only salaried ofEcer among the trustees ; an exception will be made in the case of the treasurer, if he is at the same time business manager. It may not be claimed that such voluntary service is difficult to secure. The honor and satisfaction of connection with a work of such a character will be deemed sufficient reward by men of the highest ability. Fourth : In the administration of the business affairs of an institution the princi- ples of civil service must prevail. Favoritism of any kind, not to speak of nepotism, is insufferable. Those who are held responsible for certain divisions of the work must be given the privilege of making recommendations for the positions under their direction, subject to the approval of the higher authorities. Promotion from those already in the ranks is an essential element. Fifth: Absolute economy must be exercised in every department of the institu- tion. The officers charged with the responsibility of expending money should be held to strict account. It is undoubtedly true that many men, who are eminent in their respective departments for learning and for ability to give instruction, fail from the business point of view to conduct their own affairs or those of the institution, when intrusted to them, with proper care. Debt may be incurred only when satisfactory provision has been made in advance for its payment when due. The Peesident's Report Iv Sixth : Special consideration from the business point of view must be given to the problems connected with the expenses of student life. It is a mistake to encourage luxury, or even to make it possible. However wealthy a young man may be, he can- not spend a large sum of money annually and be a student. For the time being, at all events, he must limit his expenditures, and directly or indirectly the university must see that this is done. On the other hand, it is equally important that provision be made for the assistance of worthy students who find themselves unable to continue their work because of the lack of means. It is possible to make mistakes in assisting stu- dents who do not deserve assistance, and in rendering assistance in a manner which will injure the student even if he deserves help. To require that every student who receives help from the university shall make suitable return to the university in the form of service or of repayment of money is a practical business way of treating the whole matter. Help should be rendered only in return for work done or as a loan to be repaid. In the latter case there is no objection from the business point of view, if the loan is arranged on terms especially favorable to the student. Such a student cannot be expected in every case to furnish satisfactory security, but without such security money should not be loaned except to those whose character is personally known to the officers to be above reproach. Seventh: The financial transactions of a large institution should be announced regularly to the public. The exact amount of expenditures in the various departments, even in detail, and the receipts from any and every source are facts which the public deserves to know ; and knowledge of these facts will give to the university the con- fidence of the public. No single act can be performed by an institution that will accomplish greater good than the regular and systematic publication in official form of the receipts and expenditures of money. Eighth: Contracts with members of the teaching staff are not treated like contracts with the officers of the university conducting the business side of the institution or like contracts made in ordinary business affairs. A large university is accustomed to accept the resignation of a professor or instructor whenever it may be proffered, whatever may have been the time for which the professor or instructor was appointed. Resignations are thus accepted in the case of men who have been appointed to do a certain service, and before even beginning to do that service desire to connect themselves with another institution. It is not considered out of place for one institution to make assiduous effort to draw away a member of the staff of another institution. The feeling prevails everywhere in the large universities that whatever is for the best interests of the individual will in the end prove to be for the best inter- ests of education; and the university can in no case afford to deprive an individual officer of an opportunity to accept a position of greater possibility and influence. It is only in the smaller institutions of learning that this principle is not recognized. Ninth : A university, although possessed of twenty millions of dollars, is, from a legal point of view, a charitable institution. Whatever may be its wealth or lyi The President's Kepokt influence, its aflfairs are managed as are those of great charitable institutions. It does not hesitate to accept from any and every source gifts, large and small, with which to prosecute its work for the public benefit. It declares no dividends, but it gives to the public through its students every dollar paid by the students, and with each such dollar three or five in addition. In an institution of learning, those who are responsible for the business manage- ment of it have to do with many different kinds of work. Their task is not finished when the buildings and grounds of the university have been cared for and the invested funds have been looked after. Among the other kinds of business which must be handled are the following: the collection of fees of various kinds, of room rents, and of board bills; the payment of salaries and bills; the handling of students' deposits of money ; the provision of work for needy students ; the supervision of the University Press ; the auditing of all accounts ; the management of the University Commons, and the boarding arrangements in the women's dormitories. I remember distinctly that within so short a time as twelve years ago in the administration of even a large university there was no such thing as stenographic ser- vice. The following list of stenographic appointments as it stands at this time throws some light on the development of this phase of the business management of a univer- sity: President's office, 2 ; Business Manager's office, 1 ; Secretary and Auditor's office, 1 ; Graduate Dean's office, 1 ; Senior Dean's office, 1 ; Divinity Dean's office, 1 ; Medi- cal Dean's office, 1; Lecture-Study Department, 2; Correspondence-Study Department, 3 ; Eecorder's office, 1 ; Board of Kecommendation, 1 ; office of the Dean of Affiliations, 1 ; University College, 1 ; South Side Academy and Laboratory School, 1 ; School of Education, 2; Junior Dean's office, 1; Morgan Park Academy, 1; University Press and journals, 7; total, 28. An important phase of the development of the business side of the University's Tv'ork has been the establishment within the last two years of the office of Auditor. The By-Laws of the University establishing the duties of the Business Manager and the Auditor are as follows: BUSINESS MANAGER Subject to the control of the Committee on Finance and Investment, and such regulations as the Board may from time to time adopt, the Business Manager shall have the management of all property, whether real, personal, or mixed. He shall receive and promptly turn over to the Treasxurer all moneys and securities; he shall sign and issue all checks upon funds of the University, but only in payment of vouchers previously certified by the Auditor; and he shall, also, take the initiative in seeking investments for the fvmds of the University, and promptly report thereon to the Committee on Finance and Investment. No investment, purchase, or sale for the account of the endowment funds of the University nor any contract concerning the same shall be made by the Business Manager without the approval of the Committee on Finance and Investment. The Business Manager shall superintend the recovery of litigated claims in favor of the University, and have charge of all legal proceedings. The President's Eeport Ivii In case of vacancy in the office of Business Manager, or his inability to act, his duties shall be performed by the chairman of the Committee on Finance and Investment. AUDITOK The Auditor shall exercise a general supervision over all accounts of officers of the Univer- sity which may have to do with the receipts or disbursements of funds, and he shall require full and true records of all such receipts and disbursements to be kept, both in his own office and by the officers aforesaid, who shall keep their accounts in such manner and render to him such statements of accovmt as he may direct. He shall keep full and appropriate books of account fully setting forth the financial condition and transactions of the University. He shall supply such statements of account as may be from time to time required of him, or as may be needed to correctly show the financial condition of the University. He shall examine all accounts, claims, and demands against the University, and no money shall be drawn from its Treasury unless the amount thereof be adjusted and settled by him and found to be within the appropriation for that general purpose. Accounts so found to be due shall be paid, upon vouchers certified by him, by warrant drawn by the Business Manager on the Treasurer, and coimtersigned by the Secretary, which vouchers shall state the particular fund or appropriation to which the account is chargeable and the person to whom payable. If he shall, upon the examination of any account, doubt its correctness, or find the appropriation insufficient, he shall submit the account to the Committee on Finance and Investment for its decision. No money shall be drawn fi-om the Treasury except by warrants drawn as aforesaid. The By-Law establishing the duties and powers of the Finance Committee is as follows : The Committee on Finance and Investment shall, on the first day of July in each year, begin the examination and audit of the business accounts of the University for the previous fiscal year, and may employ for that purpose such persons or firms as it may select, and shall deter- mine the amount of compensation to be paid for such service. As soon as the above-mentioned annual audit shall furnish the necessary data therefor, the same committee shall conduct an examination of the securities and funds of the University as shown upon its books, and report thereon to the Board of Trustees not later than October 1. Nothing here provided shall prevent the Finance and Investment Committee from making other examinations of the accounts, securities, and funds of the University at any other time it may determine. The Committee on Finance and Investment shall have authority in the intervals between meetings of the Board of Trustees to change the form of the investments of the University or to make new investments in sums aggregating, but not exceeding, $300,000, without the previous approval of the Board, but the said committee shall, at the next meeting of the Board, report in writing its action to the Board. I desire to make the following suggestions : 1. Steps should be taken at once to provide larger space for the accommodation of the business offices. It is entirely impossible for the work to be properly conducted within the quarters now allotted. In this connection I may mention again the desira- bility of a building which should provide at the same time for the administration of the educational and financial affairs of the University. 2. In view of the large amount of real estate now controlled by the University and the great number of tenants (in all over six hundred), it would seem to be a profit- Iviii The President's Kepokt able arrangement for the University to establish and organize its own machinery foi conducting a real-estate ofBce. This can be handled directly by the University more efficiently and more economically than by distributing it to real-estate agents. It is important that this matter should be recognized and acted upon in the very near future. 3. No arrangement of any kind has been worked out by which the Faculties of the University may gain an acquaintance with the financial afPairs in which of neces- sity they must be greatly interested. It is evident that the various appropriations assigned to Departments and individuals would be more satisfactorily expended if those who expend the money had a somewhat intimate knowledge of the sources of income aiid the difficulties which attend the securing of the amounts necessary for the efficient conduct of the institution. It would seem to be wise that at all events a meeting of the Congregation should be held each year at which the President and the financial officers should lay the financial affairs of the University in some detail before the members of the Congregation. Not only have the professors a right to know these details, but their sympathy with the work of the University as a whole would be secured by the possession of such knowledge. 4. It is important that whatever shall seem to be necessary for the proper conduct of the administration of the business part of the University should be provided. It will prove to be a mistake to limit unduly the Budget expenditures in this division of the work. With endowment funds of ten millions, and other assets amounting to eight millions or more ; with buildings and grounds at the University valued at four millions, and other real estate valued at seven millions or more, it is incumbent upon the Uni- versity to provide the strongest possible force for the proper conduct of this business. X. THE UNIVERSITY PRESS The first organization of the University Press was in the form of a stock company independent of the University, with which the University entered into a contract. The head of this company was Mr. D. C. Heath, of D. C. Heath & Co., Boston. It soon became apparent that the relationship was not sufficiently close, and although the management of the company was entirely satisfactory, and there had arisen no friction of any kind, all parties concerned were agreed that it would be best to transfer the rights of the company directly to the University. The interest and enthusiasm in those early days of Mr. Heath and Mr. R. R. Donnelley cannot be forgotten. After two years, the contract was mutually changed in July, 1894, and the property of the company was purchased by the University. The Press has been under the successive management of Mr. Charles Wells Chase, Mr. Hazlitt Alva Cuppy, Mr, Ned Arden Flood, and Mr. Newman Miller. Owing to the lack of uniformity in the system of accounting it is impossible to give a report which will show the development from the beginning of the several departments of the Press independently. The only figures obtainable showing the The President's Repoet lix status of the various departments of the University Press are in connection with the inventories of stock and equipment taken each year. In the following tables the figures pertaining to the equipment of the manufacturing plant have been based upon a 10 per cent, reduction each year on account of the depreciation. Date July 1, 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 Purchase and Re- tail Department (Stock) $ 7,009.92 8,410.24 10,450.59 7,754.73 9,163.94 9,091.00 11,550.14 10,634.70 14,505.95 Manufacturing Department (Plant and Stock) 813,210.53 15,433.75 18,994.02 19,570.32 24,490.55 20,975.37 24,453.73 15,482.. 39 20,029.90 Publication Department (Stock) 4,442.98 11,578.. 35 The Press is conducted on the basis of a Constitution adopted by the Trustees, which classifies the work under the following departments : the Manufacturing Depart- ment, the Publication Department, and the Purchase and Retail Department. The following departmental journals are published by the Press : Journal Departments Connected Issues per Year Average PaKes per Year The Biblical World Biblical Faculties 12 4 4 10 10 6 8 12 4 10 4 985 The American Journal of Theology Divinity School 900 The American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures Semitif? Tjano-nacreR 265 The School Review School of JSducation 710 The Elementary School Teacher School of Education 860 The American Journal of Sociology The Journal of Geology Sociology and Anthropology . GftoloETV 870 820 The Botanical Gazette Botany. . 930 The Journal of Political Economy Political Economy 605 The Astrophysical Journal Astronomy and Astrophysics . Private owner 710 The Manual Training Magazine 256 The following series of studies are published, numbers being issued from time to time: 1. "Studies in Classical Philology." Three complete volumes and one mmiber of the fourth volume. 2. " Germanic Studies." Three numbers. 3. " English Studies." Five numbers. 4. "Economic Studies." Five numbers. 5. " Political Science Studies." Seven numbers. 6. "Bulletins of Anthropology." Four numbers. 7. "Divinity Studies." Two numbers. 8. " Historical and Linguistic Studies in Literature Belated to the New Testament." Two numbers. Ix The President's Report 9. " Publications of the Yerkes Observatory." One volume. 10. " Contributions from Walker Museum." Three numbers. 11. "Contributions from the Hull Botanical Laboratory." Forty numbers. The following statement shows the output of books and pamphlets by fiscal years: 1892-93 - - - - - 2 1893-94 ----- 3 1894-95 ----- 11 1895-96 ----- 8 1896-97 ----- 31 1897-98 27 1898-99 22 1899-00 ----- 28 1900-01 28 1901-02 ----- 40 Total - - - - - 200 The following statement shows the output of books and pamphlets by Departments : Department of Philosophy and Physiology - - 10 Department of Education ------ 41 Departments of Theology and Religion - - - 7 Department of Political Economy (complete) - - 31 Department of History ------ 7 Department of Semitic Languages and Literatures - 44 Departments of Science ------ 58 Miscellaneous 2 Total - - 200 The most ambitious undertaking of the Press outside of the publication of the journals is the manufacture and publication of the two series of volumes celebrating the Decennial of the University. The growing appreciation of the work of the Press on the part of the Trustees is shown in the fact that a new building for the use of the various departments of the Press has just been completed at a cost of $110,000. This building is constructed on modern principles and furnishes a very satisfactory headquarters for the work of this very important division. While at present occupied in part by the Library and the Law School, in the very near future the entire building will be devoted to the work of the Press. The mechanical equipment of the University Press at the close of the tiscal year ending June 30, 1902, was valued at $10,521.77. This amount is represented by the equipment of the composing-room, with the exception of a job outfit including two small presses, paper cutter, type, etc. For the work which has been attempted the plant is thoroughly equipped. In addition to this the plant includes a smaller dress of modern body type The President's Kepoet Ixi amounting in the aggregate of the various sizes to about eight thousand pounds. In the job department are about two hundred fonts of sufficient size and variety to handle a large volume of work. There are also large fonts of Greek in five sizes, Hebrew in two, Nestorian Syriac, Arabic, and Ethiopic. With the addition to these special fonts of a most thorough equipment of mathematical, astronomical, and other signs and accents, the University Press has been able to produce work possible in very few printing houses. The question has been raised whether the cost to the University of the printing of its journals and books was not greater by the present policy than if the work were done by contract. This question is a difficult one to answer conclusively without going into a very elaborate explanation, because it is a matter which is affected very largely by conditions. The question must be considered from a theoretical standpoint, practical comparison being impossible because prior to the present time the work has been divided, a part having been done on contract and a part at first hand. However, experience has demonstrated that, so far as concerns the work done by the Press, it has been put out at a less price than the same work would have cost on contract with an outside firm. The question resolves itself into an inquiry as to whether it is possible for the University to operate the various departments of the University Press as economically as the same work could be administered by another party. Granting that it is possible to secure competent administrative ability, there is no reason why the conditions should be difl'erent in connection with the work done by the University Press from what they would be if it were executed by a private corporation. The item of labor is the same in all parts of the city. Printing stock has a marketable value which is easily ascertained, and with the volume of its business the University is able to secure as low prices as those granted to any publishing house. These and many other items of expense which might be mentioned are practically the same for all printers and publishers, and if the administrative ability of the affairs of the Press is competent, the business will show a profit. The principal saving, therefore, to the University lies in the amount of profit which would accrue to any commercial corpora- tion engaging in the same class of work. Aside from the saving of the regular commercial profit, there are many incidental advantages which result in an actual saving of money to the University in the opera- tion of its own printing and publishing plant. It would be impossible without a great loss of time and money to carry on the volume of printing and publishing now con- ducted through the University Press if the manufacturing and publication activities were not closely associated with the local interests of the University itself. Under the present conditions, while a great saving of time is effected in the doing of all of the composition at first hand, an expense of about $1,200 per year is incurred in the item of cartage, which would be saved if all of the work could be done at first hand. It is doubtful if such work as characterizes most of our journals and books could be Lsii The Peesident's Kepobt secured on contract with any such degree of accuracy or speed as that with which it is now accomplished. These results can be reached only by the employment of workmen trained to our particular class of work, in order that they may know in an emergency just what to do and when and how to do it. Only the editors of the journals and those in direct charge of the publication of the oificial documents of the University can appreciate the great convenience of having the work done on the ground at first hand. It goes without saying that the money spent on much of the printing done by the University Press means a direct benefit to the University; and it would seem that the results of the expenditures must be measured very largely by the promptness and accuracy which accompany the issue of alT printed matter. To those acquainted with the printing business the result of continuous requests for accommodations by a cus- tomer of a printing house is well known. An average printing firm cannot be induced to favor one customer as against others without using the situation as a basis for increased charges. The University has many times felt the result of situations of this kind without being in a position to remedy the difficulty. The possibility of doing all the work in its own plant would eliminate embarrassment of this sort. The affairs of the Press have been conducted by a Board appointed by the Trustees from the different Faculties, nominated by the President, and in addition the Director of the Press and the editors of the journals. This Board conducts the work through four principal committees, namely: (1) Manufacturing Committee, (2) Publication Committee, (3) Purchase and Retail Committee, (4) Official Publications Committee. The Trustees in the regular Budget of the University make a special appropriation for each journal; also appropriations for particular books or studies. I desire to make the following suggestions: 1. A better organization is needed for that portion of the work which includes the purchase of apparatus and equipment for the University. The connection between this work and that of the Press has not been as close as it should be. Of necessity each Laboratory must exert a large infiuence, not only on the character of material pur- chased, but also on the selection of the particular place of purchase. All of this work, however, should be conducted through a central agency, and this agency may more satisfactorily be connected with the University Press than operated as a separate divi- sion of the institution. This work requires a larger force of assistants, and deserves more careful and detailed consideration in the future than it has thus far received. 2. Provision should be made for keeping in New York city at least a small stock of the publications of the Press. Our publication list is from every point of view a most respectable one, and includes not a few books which have created for themselves quite a large demand. An arrangement can easily be made for the care of such a stock in connection with the University's office already established in New York city to handle the advertising of the Press. 3. One advertising representative cannot do the work both in the East and the West. It would be profitable to establish in Chicago, as well as in New York, an office The President's Repoet Ixiii for securing advertising for the journals. To this office also might be committed the care of such announcements in the magazines and papers as the University desires to have made from time to time of its various Departments, as well as the advertising business of the Press itself. 4. It is important for the sake of the University as well as for the success of its publications that proper representation of the Press be secured in England and on the continent. Nothing that has been done thus far seems altogether satisfactory. One of two policies must be decided upon: either to concentrate the representation of the Press and select one representative for the work of all the Departments in London and another on the continent; or to place different books and journals with different dealers in England and on the continent. On the whole, the former policy seems preferable. An effort should be made to secure a proper arrangement within the near future. 5. It will be necessary within a year to give to the Press a larger proportion of the Press Building than it now occupies. If the Law School can be transferred to its new building October 1, 1903, the space now occupied by it can be satisfactorily used by the Press and a small portion of it perhaps given to the Library ; but it is necessary, from the point of view of the Press, that the erection of the new Library Building be finished as early as possible. At the present rate of progress the Press will require within three years every foot of space afforded by the present building. 6. The members of the University at large should cultivate a closer sympathy with the work of the Press. As individuals and as a University they are to derive from it great benefit. The measure of this sympathy, however, may be determined by the degree of knowledge which is possessed by members of the University. It seems important, therefore, that regular reports should be made by the Director of the Press to the Congregation of the University, such reports to cover in general the work of the Quarter closing at the time of the meeting of the Congregation. XI. UNIVERSITY EXTENSION Even the briefest sketch of our ten years in University Extension is very inter- esting. Under the leadership of Mr. George Henderson for one year, Mr. Nathaniel Butler for three years, and Mr. Edmund J. James for six years, the work has made steady progress. Once or twice there has been a falling backward, but this was due to local reasons, and in every case the lost ground has been regained with large additions. Starting with three subdivisions outside of the Library work, namely, Lecture-Study, Class-Study, and Correspondence-Study work, it was thought best to allow the Class- Study work to develop into the University College, which has finished five years of most successful work, and since the first year has been treated as an organization inde- pendent of University Extension. The development of the Lecture-Study work is shown in Table A, p. 308. The least successful part of the work has been the development of class work in Ixiv The President's Report connection with the Lecture Studies. No such success has attended this part of the movement as is reported to be found in the English University Extension work. Among the more prominent lecturers of the ten years have been the following : Professors Moulton, Zueblin, Sparks, Willett, Starr, Troop, Butler, and Fellows. Among the special lecturers who have rendered good service are Henry W. Kolfe, Lorado Taft, John Graham Brooks, Jenkin Lloyd Jones, and W. M. E. French. When it is recalled that in the ten years the amount of $400,000 has been contrib- uted in small sums of one, two, three, and five dollar fees for the support of a great intellectual movement, and that all of this money, with an additional $100,000 fur- nished by the University, has been employed in placing before the various Centers men of international reputation in the various departments of study, the significance of the movement will come to be appreciated. The University Extension work has not been conducted as an advertising scheme, and yet it has without question brought many people, old and young, into contact with University thought and life who otherwise would not have known such contact. It is probably true that the work has been appreciated by college graduates more than by any other single class of people. They have found that in the midst of the activities of life something is needed as an incen- tive and help in stimulating their intellectual development. The work of the Traveling Libraries (see Special Report, p. 232) has been most helpful. If a larger sum of money could have been secured for use in these Libraries, even greater good could have been accomplished. The development of the Correspondence-Study work is shown in the following table : Statistics Showing the Growth of THE Cokeespondence-Stcdt Depaetment fkom Octobek 1, 1892 (Date of Oeganization), to June 30, 1901 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Teachers giving instruction Courses actually given Different students enrolled Total registration in all courses. . . 23 39 82 93 33 62 185 209 41 78 279 311 44 97 425 481 59 128 555 641 66 151 755 881 73 186 845 1,015 80 208 930 1,158 89 208 1,081 1,311 92 217 1,249 1,485 The steady advance of the Correspondence-Study work is noteworthy. Very fre- quently propositions have been made to popularize this work and greatly increase the number of students who have availed themselves of its service, but these propositions have been uniformly rejected. The work done by correspondence in connection with the University is as serious and as strong as any work attempted in the class-room. It is in large measure conducted by those who are at the same time doing the class- room work of the University. It is asserted by the instructors that in most cases twice as much actual work on the part of the student is called for. There is no other correspondence work being done which does not have for its primary object the making of money. Academic traditions have been respected, and the work may justly be said to have been conducted exclusively on an academic basis. In view of the great The President's Kepokt Ixv amount of correspondence work offered in every section of the country, there has been some question in the minds of the University authorities as to whether reproach might not come on our own institution because so large an amount of the instruction elsewhere offered is valueless. On the other hand, we have to recall the fact that hundreds of institutions called universities are offering degrees for work of a decidedly inferior character, but this does not take away the responsibility of institutions attempting to give instruction of the highest order. The friends of the University may rest assured that the Correspondence work done under its auspices is at all times exactly on a par, so far as its character is concerned, with the work done in the lecture-rooms of the insti- tution. It has been a source of satisfaction to note the change of attitude on the part of a large proportion of the Faculty during these last few years. At first the Faculty was rightly suspicious of the whole matter, but as the character of the work became better understood, and as one after another was persuaded to undertake courses for himself, acquaintance with the methods and results led to a change of opinion, and today it may be said that a thorough respect for it and an appreciation of its useful- ness in connection with the residence instruction of the University are felt throughout the institution. I desire to make the following suggestions : 1. If the Lecture-Study work is to hold its place in the future, a larger staff of lecturers must be employed. The present staff is not able under the highest pressure to meet the demands made in the various communities. 2. In order to maintain a staff of Extension men, a premium mxist be placed upon Extension work. This premium may take one of two forms : either (a) that of a larger salary than is paid the professor who does his work within the walls of the University, or (6) that of a shorter service for the same salary. Ordinarily the Exten- sion professor should be allowed to finish his work in six months and be given a full six months' vacation for study and recuperation. In any case the hardship of travel- ing over long distances in the western territory must be compensated for in some way. 3. It is extremely desirable that the officers of the regular staff of the University should be detached from class-room work and placed in the Lecture-Study field now and then for a period of three months. The result of this will be twofold. Not only will there accrue a great advantage to the Extension work itself, but the University will be profited in having its lecturers come in contact with life and work outside the University walls. 4. The work of the Correspondence-Study Department will never be thoroughly established until a separate staff of officers shall have been created. It is too much to ask the regular officers of the University to iucrease their duties, even with extra pay, by conducting individual Correspondence work. Besides, this movement has now reached a point where it deserves the full and continuous consideration of men whose whole time shall be devoted to it. It is important that the Correspondence staff be organized at an early date. Ixvi The President's Kepoet 5. Adequate quarters for the administration both of the Lecture-Study and the Cor- respondence-Study Departments must be provided. It will soon be impossible to con- duct it in the present rooms. As at present maintained, there is great loss, not only of effort on the part of those engaged in the work, but of actual results because of the absence of proper facilities. 6. Up to the present time the cost of administering the Lecture-Study courses has averaged a sum of money equivalent to the income on $150,000 or $200,000, but inasmuch as it has been necessary to conduct lectures as far as possible on a business basis, much of the most important work has been omitted. With even a small endow- ment rich results could be secured. It is desirable that an endowment of at least $500,000 should be provided for this Department. The income of $1,000,000 could be expended most profitably. 7. Encouragement should be given to the establishment of Extension Colleges in the smaller cities having a population of 25,000 or upward. In these Extension Col- leges would be centered the intellectual activity of the city. With a local committee under the direction and guidance of the University excellent results would be secured. The steps which have been taken in this direction in one or two cities ' should be encouraged in other cities of the West. The possibilities of this work are without limit. XII. AFFILIATION AND CO-OPERATION The report of the officer in charge of the Co-operating Schools and the Affiliations will be foimd to contain material of the most suggestive character. The word "affilia- tion" has been used in connection with colleges and academies under the control of non- state boards of trustees, while the word "co-operation" has been used in connection with high schools which were under state or municipal control. The word "affiliation," borrowed from English educational terminology, has not come to be popular. In the minds of many, the act of affiliating an institution is equivalent to absorbing the institu- tion and taking away its independent existence. This conception of course is far wide of the truth. The fundamental principle underlying the plan and methods of affiliation has been to do nothing which would in any way interfere with or prevent the fullest exercise of independent action on the part of the institution affiliated. To this end the entire financial control has been left in the hands of the local Board. Only two privileges, as a matter of practice, have been exercised by the University in connection with the affiliated institutions, viz. : (1) that of revievsdng the papers prepared by the instructors for the examination of the students ; and (2) that of advising in the appoint- ment of new instructors. The University has found itself in a position to be of real assistance in both of these particulars to the college instructors, and experience has shown the value of this aid. The existence of the smaller colleges is not only a desirable thing ; it is a necessity in the intellectual growth of the great sections of the country which make up the West, the Northwest, and the South, and the greatest calamity which could possibly The President's Eepoet Isvii befall the cause of higher education in the United States would be the extinction, or even a considerable deterioration, of the small college. When the history of these colleges is considered, the work which they have done, the work which they alone can do in many sections, and the utter impracticability of supposing that all the students of any given state can be persuaded to go to one of two or three places in that state for a higher education, the necessity will be felt of stemming the tide which is setting in against the small college, and of doing something in a constructive way which will help the courageous souls who today are conducting these institutions, and give them a firmer basis upon which to work. This has been the thought underlying the policy of affiliation with colleges as it has thus far been developed in connection with the University of Chicago. Three things in addition are to be said : 1. The policy has been an experimental one, and has not gone far enough to demonstrate with perfect satisfaction the lines of operation which ultimately should be adopted. Enough, however, has been done to prove beyond question that something of the kind proposed is possible and most desirable. 2. No considerable effort has been made to increase the number of afiiliated institutions, partly because the machinery for the conduct of the afiiliated work has not been perfected, and partly because it was thought wise to move very slowly in a matter of so much consequence. 3. More opposition to the policy has arisen from the Faculties of the University and its students than from the colleges themselves and their students. The opposition in the University Faculties has arisen (o) in large measure from ignorance of the plans proposed and the results already achieved; (6) in some measure because of the additional labor required of the University officers in carrying out the plans; (c) in a considerable measure also because of a deeply rooted feeling that it is next to impos- sible to expect good work in a small institution, the fact being ignored that the instruction in the Freshman and Sophomore years in the better class of small colleges, at least in certain departments, is probably superior to that of the same years in the larger universities. The opposition on the part of the colleges and their constituencies grows out of (a) the fear of losing their independence, as suggested above ; (6) the fact that afiiliation is something new and its advantages are not yet understood; (c) the fear, in many cases, that the first step will be followed by a second which will consist in the removal of the last two years of the college course and the withdrawal of the privilege of conferring degrees. There are certain difficulties with which the colleges must contend during the next few years. These are, to make the statement as brief as possible: a) The growth and development of the high school, and the probability that this growth will not stop until two years of college work have been added to the present curriculum of the high school. b) The rivalry of the state universities ; for these institutions appeal to the same constituency, not only for their college students, but also for their professional students. Ixviii The President's Report the latter being admitted on requirements no higher, but in many cases lower, than those required for entrance to the Freshman class. The state university is thus a distinct rival of every college within the state. Any success achieved by the small college must be won largely at the expense of the state university and vice versa. Because of its political power and financial strength, the state university will win the victory unless steps are taken by the small college to secure the needed strength and influence. c) The lack of means; for with the growth of scientific work and with the modern methods of work in other departments, laboratories and libraries have become an essential factor, and these can be provided only at great cost. d) The lack of public confidence, in that so many of the smaller colleges pretend to give a full college education, though the intelligent public is fully aware of the fact that it is impossible for the institutions in question to do this with the funds at their disposal. e) A lack of confidence on the part of men of means, due to the bad . financial management of these institutions. A score of well-known colleges could be named whose trustees have allowed endowment funds to be used for current expenses. /) The tendency, everywhere manifest, for those having the necessary means to go to the larger institutions where greater numbers seem to give greater opportunity. fjf) The proposition, in various forms, to reduce the college course from one of four years to one of three. The problem of the smaller college is, therefore, a serious one. Although it has been pointed out clearly and definitely that it possesses many distinct advantages in comparison with the larger institution, public sentiment is, nevertheless, turning away from the smaller college. In solving this problem the small colleges may not turn to the state universities for help, because, as indicated above, these universities are in the truest sense their rivals. The University of Chicago, it may be said without boasting, sustains a unique relation to the small colleges of the West, Northwest, and South. The constituency of its college work is understood to be the city of Chicago, and this city, with its two millions of inhabitants, ought to sustain three or four strong colleges. In other words, the University of Chicago has more college work to do in the future for the city of Chicago than it can probably succeed in doing, without attempting to enter the terri- tory of its sister-colleges. While students actually come to the University from the surrounding states, and are always welcome, the University puts forth no distinct effort to secure such students, and therefore does not enter into rivalry with the colleges of those states. In the case of its professional schools, unlike those of the state univer- sities, the University requires practically a college education before admission may be gained. In this particular it encourages the student to remain at college, while the state institution, in admitting students to the professional schools on the same basis as to the Freshman class of the Arts and Sciences, distinctly discourages students who The President's Report Ixix enter the various professions from taking a college course. Furthermore, the Uni- versity is selfishly interested in building up the small colleges because, on the one hand, these colleges furnish students for the Graduate Schools of the University, aside from its professional schools, and, on the other, furnish Faculties in which those who have taken the degrees of the University may find employment. In each of these three particulars the University of Chicago stands alone in the West, Northwest, and South. The University has therefore every reason to encourage the strengthening of the college, and it is hoped that as a result of the policy of affiliation, with such modi- fications as experience will dictate, a plan may be found by which, with equal accepta- bility to the colleges and to the University, the service which the University can render the colleges may be formulated and the proper machinery provided for its execution. The relationship of the University to its co-operating schools is one presenting many problems. It is manifestly desirable to maintain, by means of visitation, a close connection with these schools, and yet the necessary visitation makes upon the Uni- versity and its ofiicers demands which it is almost impossible to meet. The ordinary system of accrediting schools upon the visitation of a professor is not satisfactory. Our policy has been to require at least two visits, one from the regular inspector and another from a member of the officers' staff. Our plan of co-operation includes also the principle of dealing with the individual teachers of a school rather than with the school as a whole through its principal. The teachers thought worthy of the honor are theoretically treated as University Deputy Examiners, and the examinations which they offer from time to time are accepted in lieu of examinations furnished by the University itself. This system has not worked out so satisfactorily as might have been desired. The whole question of entrance from the high school into the college is one which has attracted much attention throughout the country, and it is possible that the problem may be solved by the proposals which are being suggested through the North Central Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools. It is to be noted that the co-operating list of the University includes a large proportion of the best high schools of the West and South. In connection with the work of affiliation and co-operation there have been held annually, and sometimes semi-annually, Conferences with Superintendents, Principals, and High-School Teachers. Each Conference seems to have been more successful than its predecessor. The attendance upon these Conferences has grown to be very large, the regular membership in the last one being at least five hundred. At this Conference, held November 7 and 8, 1902, a resolution was adopted establishing a commission of twenty-one members, organized in three committees of seven each, for the comparative study of the curricula of the Elementary School, the Secondary School, and the Junior College. In connection with these Conferences there has been held an annual Declamation Contest to which high schools and academies throughout the West have sent repre- Ixx The Peesident's Eepobt sentatives. The winner is awarded a scholarship for a year in the University. The interest manifested in connection with these contests has been noteworthy. While, then, the policy of affiliation and the plans of co-operation are as yet in a stage of development, it is unquestionable that an important development has already taken place, and that the results of past experience furnish the basis for important modifications, some of which are suggested below: 1. The scholarships at the present time distributed among the co-operating high schools which entitle the holder to free tuition in the University for one year should be increased in their amount to cover the tuition fees for two years instead of one. 2. In addition to the annual Declamation Contest for which a scholarship is offered as a prize, scholarships to be awarded on the basis of competitive examinations should be established — one in Latin, one in English, one in Mathematics, one in French, one in German, one in Physics, one in Chemistry, and one in History; these scholarships to provide the tuition fee of the student for two years in the University. The examinations might be conducted either at the University or in the schools upon papers prepared by the Departments of the University. 3. In view of the distinct feeling in western high schools and academies on the part of teachers and students against examinations, and in view of the great educa- tional value of examinations when properly conducted, strenuous effort should be made to encourage taking of examinations by students on frequent occasions, those encour- agements to be in the form of prizes, as in the case of the scholarships suggested above, or in the form of money prizes, the spirit of interscholastic rivalry being taken advantage of in so far as it may seem to be legitimate. 4. The whole subject of the official relationship of the University to the high schools should be taken up for special consideration with a view to devising methods by which the relationship may be made closer and the results of the closer relationship become more apparent. 5. The principle of appointing teachers as Deputy Examiners should be still further developed, and to this end special honor should be bestowed upon those who do this work, and special privileges granted them. 6. A Conference between the University and the colleges of the West and South should be instituted similar to that already established between the University and the high schools and academies, and in this Conference the problems of the college in its relationship to the university should be discussed from the point of view of both college and university. 7. Steps should be taken to organize a local corporation under the auspices of the University, but legally independent of it, which shall be controlled by a board of trustees made up of men of national reputation, the purpose of this corporation being as follows : (a) to receive and invest money, the income of which shall be used for the maintenance of college work, in colleges to be specified by the donor, or chosen by the trustees of the corporation so organized ; (b) to investigate the financial afPairs of The Peesident's Kepoet b colleges whose trustees may indicate their desire for such investigation and to conduct the financial affairs of the colleges when invited so to do, with a view to providing a proper financial management ; (c) to study the general management of colleges, to suggest practical economies on the educational side as well as on the financial, aiid to secure such advantages, financial and otherwise, as would come from the close associ- ation of several institutions under the general conduct of one corporation. XIII. THE DIVINITY SCHOOL The relationship of the Divinity School to the University is a somewhat anomalous one. With a separate Charter and a distinct Board of Trustees, the School has none the less been an organic part of the University. The change of location from Morgan Park, where the work had been conducted for many years, to the city, and from its separate location to close contact with the University, was nothing less than a revolu- tion. The results of this change of location and character have been significant. The School has taken on a larger breadth of view and a much larger constituency. The attendance during the last five years at Morgan Park averaged annually 156; the attendance during the last five years of its connection with the University has aver- aged, on the basis of three Quarters to the year, 254. This growth is quite remark- able in view of the history of other Theological Seminaries during this period, for during the same five years in eleven representative Theological Seminaries there has been a decrease from an average attendance of 128 to an average of 111. The growth in the stafp of instructors has been from 16 in 1892 to 22 in 1902. During this period two Professors have passed away: first, in 1896, Professor Simpson, a man of strong intellect and striking character; and in December, 1901, the Nestor of theologians in the West, Professor Greorge W. Northrup, by whom the Seminary was practically created, and to whom the University is indebted for much that was helpful in connection with its early history. Several important steps have characterized the progress of the work. Among these have been the following: 1. The establishing of a tuition fee — the usual fee prescribed in the other Depart- ments of the University, $120 a year. This step has contributed largely to the posi- tion of respect and eminence enjoyed by the Divinity School in relation to the other divisions of the work — a position in striking contrast with that of the Divinity School in many other institutions. The University has established a large number of scholar- ships, but these scholarships are assigned only to those who have shown themselves possessed of real ability, and in many cases the Divinity student prefers to pay his fee even when a scholarship might be obtained. Only two institutions, it is believed, have taken this step, which marks a distinct advance in the history of theological education. 2. The Divinity School has entered into a close relationship with the college work, and has permitted the undergraduate students who are candidates for the Ixxii The President's Eepoet Bachelor's degree to select two-thirds of the work of the last year from the Divinity curriculum. This privilege has not always been taken advantage of, but has in many cases shown itself to be legitimate and proper. More recently the privilege has been extended to cover the work of an entire year. 3. The study of Hebrew was made optional July 1, 1899; and it would appear from the statistics that, while 100 per cent, of the regular students took Hebrew before this arrangement was announced, since that time only 27 per cent, of those who entered without Hebrew have taken up the study. However, there has been no diminution in the number of candidates for higher degrees in the Department of Semitics, since only a very small proportion of the students under the former system ever studied to any appreciable extent beyond the small amount of work actually required for the degree of D.B. The experiment has not been conducted a sufficient length of time to enable us to determine whether it will prove permanently successful. In any case, those who have selected the subject have done so from choice, and the results accomplished by them have been more satisfactory. 4. In each Department a series of three Outline or Survey coiirses has been pro- vided which aims to give the student a general appreciation of the entire field covered by the Department. These courses are prescribed. With the general view thus obtained, the student is in a better position to select those Departments to which he will devote his larger attention in the later years of the course ; and further, with these prescribed courses as a basis, the student is given large liberty to elect one or more Departments in which he may specialize. Here again it may be said that sufficient time has not elapsed to enable a correct opinion to be formed as to the actual results obtained. Is it possible that the preliminary survey of the field may satisfy the stu- dent, and lead him to think that he has actually done sufficient work? While there may be disavantages in the plan, there are evident advantages, and a considerable degree of enthusiasm has thus far characterized the work of these particular courses. 5. The work of the Summer Quarter has taken on something of a special character. Many pastors and theological students from other institutions have taken advantage of the presence of the distinguished teachers of various denominations and countries who lecture during this Quarter. The following is a list of some of the many who have served as regular instructors on the staff: Professor Charles Rufus Brown, of Newton Theological Institution, Newton Centre, Mass. ; the late Professor Alexander Balmain Bruce, of the Free Church College, Glasgow ; Professor Sylvester Burnham, of Colgate University, Hamilton, N. Y. ; Rev. W. H. P. Faunce, now President of Brown Univer- sity; Professor Caspar Ken6 Gregory, of the University of Leipzig; Professor Arthur C. McGiffert, of Union Theological Seminary, New York; Professor Rush Rhees, of Newton Theological Institute (now President of the University of Rochester) ; Pro- fessor J. S. Riggs, of Auburn Theological Seminary ; Professor George Adam Smith, of the Free Church College, Glasgow. 6. Plans have been perfected by which students who so desire may count as a part The President's Report Ixxiii of their curriculum practical work carried on under the guidance of a pastor in one of the city churches. Substantial benefit has been gained by this arrangement, and many students have availed themselves of this opportunity. 7. While the work of the Divinity School has been arranged for those who are graduates of a college, occasional exceptions have been made in the case of mature stu- dents ; but in general these exceptions have been restricted to the Summer Quarter and to special classes organized for the instruction of such students. It is the result of our experience that the man who has not had the advantage of college education and the man who has shared that advantage may not work together, under ordinary circum- stances, with profit to either class. 8. An interesting development of the work has been the establishment of the so-called Divinity Houses. The first of these Houses was established in accordance with the following action of the Board of the Theological Union, which was approved* by the Board of Trustees of the University: MEMORANDUM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE DISOIPLEs' DIVINITY HOUSE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO AND THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, BOTH CORPORATIONS ORGANIZED AND EXISTING UNDER AND BY VIRTUE OP THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF ILLINOIS First : The Disciples' Divinity House of the University of Chicago hereby agrees to build one or more halls at some point in proximity to the grounds of the University of Chicago, to be called by name or names hereafter to be agreed upon by the parties to this contract, it being understood that the hall or halls shall be used as a home for students of the Christian denomi- nation attending the University of Chicago; it being further understood that the grounds and halls shall be the sole and exclusive property of said Disciples' Divinity House of the University of Chicago. Second : The University of Chicago hereby agrees to furnish to the students of said House all the privileges of the University on the same terms as to the students living in the houses of the University itself; it being further imderstood that students pursuing courses of theological studies shall be admitted in accordance with the regulations governing the Divinity School, and that said students, after having completed the courses of study laid down by the University, shall receive the proper recognition of such work in the form of appropriate degrees. Third: It is mutually agreed that the Disciples' Divinity House of the University of Chicago shall have the privilege of nominating one or more instructors or oflBcers, who shall be given general charge of their said hall or halls, and of students residing therein; provided said instructors or officers shall be elected by the Board of Trustees of the University of Chicago; it being understood: 1. That the officers of the House shall be recognized as members of the University of Chicago; shall be invited to confer with the Divinity Faculty of the University on questions which relate exclusively to the interests of the House or its members, and upon such questions only; and that the House shall be represented in the University Council by its principal officer, who shall be called Dean. 2. That the officers of the House shall give instruction in connection with the department or departments of the University designated at the time of their election, which instruction shall be accepted of students in lieu of other similar instruction offered by the University in accordance with the regulations of the Divinity School. Ixxiv The President's Keport 3. That the support and maintenance of such officers and instructors shall be provided by the Disciples' Divinity House of the University of Chicago; it being understood that the Uni- versity of Chicago shall have no financial responsibility in connection veith said House, its officers, or teachers. In witness ivhereof said Disciples' Divinity House of the University of Chicago and The University of Chicago have respectively caused these Presents to be signed by their duly authorized officers, and their corporate seals to be affixed hereto at Chicago this 18th day of October, A. D. 1894. Disciples' Divinity House op the University of Chicago. Signed by F. M. Kiekham, President of its Board of Trustees. Signed by N. S. Haynes, Secretary. The Univeesitt of Chicago. Signed by Maetin A. Ryeeson, President of its Board of Trustees. Attested by T. W. Goodspeed, Secretary. The Cumberland Presbyterian House has been organized upon the same basis. The execution of this plan has shown that it is capable of a still fuller develop- ment. The actual facts are contained in the Reports of the Deans. Upon the whole it may be said that no Department of the University has exhibited larger growth or a better character of growth than has characterized the Divinity School. While the relationship between the two Boards of Trustees has been all that could be desired, and in no single case has any friction existed as the result of disagreement, the experience of these years seems to show that the present arrangement cannot be permanent either for the best interests of the Theological Union or for those of the University. The difficulties of the situation may be summed up as follows: 1. Unless the present policy is considerably modified, the Theological Union, it is maintained, will lose the advantage of its charter dating from the year 1856, a Charter securing special privileges, which probably ought not to be permitted to lapse. 2. The interest of the University is distinctly in a School of Theology which shall partake exclusively of a scientific character, while it is also within the scope of the University to develop a School of Theology which shall emphasize the practical side of this work. It is a question whether both of these things can be accomplished in the same school. 3. The subject of theology in its broadest scope, and viewed from the scientific point of view, is one which may not be limited by the influence of a single denomina- tion, nor indeed by any group of denominations. Such work should indeed be estab- lished and may be independent of denominational influence. 4. In like manner the staff of a School of Divinity controlled by university ideals should not be restricted to teachers selected from a single denomination or from any group of denominations. There should be opportunity to obtain the strongest man, whatever might be his denominational connection. These are some of the difficulties which confront us, and for which a solution should be found. The place of the theological work as a great division of the The President's Kepoet Ixxv University is thoroughly established. The only question is under what auspices, with what ideals, and in what associations this work shall be conducted. I desire to make the following suggestions: 1. A special investigation should be instituted which shall have for its purpose the consideration of two questions: (a) the advisability of continuing the policy of making the study of the Hebrew language optional for those who take the highest degree in Divinity; and (5) the advantages and disadvantages which are associated with the present plan of the so-called Preliminary or Survey courses. 2. In spite of the failure up to this time to solve the question of providing theological education for students of a mature age who have not had the advantages of a college course, the subject should be given further study; and the question may well be considered whether there is not a place for the College of Divinity side by side with the School of Divinity, the former leading to the degree of Bachelor of Divinity and including a curriculum of four years based upon the high schools, the latter restricting its work to college graduates. There is evidently no call for a curriculum based upon a training inferior to that of the high schools. 3. Inasmuch as certain universities, including our own, have given the degree of Bachelor of Laws an inferior place, restricting it to students who have had no consider- able portion of the college training, and have established for the regular degree in Law, to be conferred upon those who have taken a college course, the degree of J.D. (Doctor of Law), the Divinity School should take up the question whether the corresponding degree of Doctor of Theology is not the proper one to be conferred upon those who have finished its work. 4. While theoretically the curriculum of the Divinity School has recognized the Social Settlement and the advantage of training gained in the Settlement, the work thus far done in this direction has been small. It would seem to be opportune at this time to devise means by which the real benefit of such work shall be placed at the command of the students. 5. It is generally acknowledged that the arrangements for such instruction in Public Speaking and in Music as would be most helpful to students in Divinity have not yet been formulated. This formulation is worthy of immediate consideration. 6. The line between scientific Divinity, if such a phrase may be used, and practical Divinity must be more sharply drawn, and such reorganization of the work should be brought about as will adapt it more closely to the needs of different classes of students. 7. A rearrangement of the work in the Departments of Homiletics, Practical Theology, and Sociology, as presented to the Divinity students, seems necessary. This rearrangement, under what might be called the Department of Practical Theology, is, however, something quite different from the proposition to draw a line between scientific and practical Divinity. In this case reference is made to the Department concerned; in the other, to the methods of work in all the Departments of the Divinity school. 8. Serious consideration should be undertaken of the problems underlying the Ixxvi The Peesident's Repoet present relationship of the Theological Seminary to the University, with a view to determining whether (a) it would be wise to revoke by common consent the present contract existing between the University and the Theological Seminary, provided that such a financial adjustment can be made as will permit the establishment upon a practical basis of an independent Theological Seminary under the Baptist Theological Union; (6) whether in this case it would be wise for the University to establish a separate Divinity School, non-denominational, co-ordinate with the other Graduate Schools of the University, and under the direction of the Board of Trustees, or perhaps to limit its theological work to those chairs already provided for in the Faculty of Arts, Literature, and Science ; (c) whether it would be wise for the University to encourage other Theological Schools of different denominations to locate their buildings near the University and become federated with the Divinity School of the University on terms which may be satisfactory to all parties, it being understood that the proposed affiliated Seminaries shall be legally independent, that their buildings and grounds shall be their own property, and that their relationship to the University shall be an educational arrangement of such character as to benefit the students and teachers of such schools as well as the University. It is clearly appreciated that the questions here raised are fundamental; but in view of the trend of the times, the great economies which could be seciired, the larger independence attained by the Seminary of the Theological Union, the great mutual benefit to other theological institutions and to the University accruing from the location of the former in proximity to the latter, it is believed that they deserve full and immediate consideration. This consideration is recommended, although it is very far from clear that, under all the circumstances, any change what- ever should be made in existing contracts. XIV. THE MEDICAL SCHOOL It has been only during the last year of the first decade that medical work as such has been conducted in the University. Before the opening of the University a propo- sition was received to enter into affiliation with Rush Medical College. It did not seem wise at that time to accept this proposition. It was repeated in one form and another until in December, 1897, it was accepted in the following action of the Trustees : The following report was received from the Committee on Academy and Affiliations : " The Committee also made a report recommending that a petition of the Rush Medical College for affiliation be granted on certain conditions. After full consideration, the recom- mendation was approved and the conditions named were adopted in the following form : " 1. The Board of Trustees of Rush Medical College shall be reorganized in such manner as that it shall consist of men who are satisfactory to the Board of Trustees of the University, are interested in ediication and have no pecuniary interest in the earnings of the school. " 2. The Board of Trustees as thus reorganized shall pledge itself to increase the prelimi- nary requirements for entrance to the Eush Medical College in accordance with the action already taken by its Trustees, so that in 1902 the requirements for admission shall include the Freshman and Sophomore years of college work. The President's Report Ixxvii "3. That affiliation shall take efifect June 1, 1898, provided the debts of Eush Medical Col- lege shall have been paid by that time. In case it shall appear on June 1, 1898, that the College needs more time for the payment of its debts, the Trustees of the University of Chicago will entertain a request to extend the time for a period not to exceed eighteen months, but in no event shall affiliation be entered into until said debts shall have been paid." In April, 1901, the work of the first two years of the course in Rush Medical College was transferred to the University and made an organic part of the University work, in accordance with the following action on the part of the Trustees of the University : The Committee on Instruction and Equipment submitted the following recommendation, viz. : " That the University consent to the request of the Board of Trustees of Rush Medical College, to receive the present Freshman class of Eush Medical College and the Freshmen classes entering July 1, 1901, and thereafter, as students of the University; it being understood that, in accordance with the laws of the state, they shall remain enrolled as students of Rush Medical College also, the fees of the students to be paid to the University; but that this action is made dependent upon the securing by the University of the sum of fifty thousand dollars (31)50,000) with which to provide for initial expenses necessarily connected with such work." Drs. Billings and Ingals made very full statements relating to the question. After very full consideration by the Trustees, it was voted that the following proviso should be added to the recommendation of the Committee, viz. : " it being understood that the work assumed by the University can be conducted without increasing the deficit already provided for in the budget for the coming year." With this addition, the recommendation of the Committee was adopted by a unanimous vote. In April, 1902, the following proposition was received by the Trustees of the University : The Trustees of Eush Medical College believe that the high purposes for which the Col- lege was founded, and which it has attempted to carry out for more than sixty years, will be best served by its organic union with the University of Chicago. To the end that this may be accomplished, we hereby submit, for your consideration, the following proposition : 1. If it can be legally done, and upon compliance with the other conditions hereinafter to be mentioned, the Trustees of the Eush Medical College will, on or before January 1, 1903, transfer to the University of Chicago all its property — real, personal, and mixed — and its good- will, which includes the privileges of the Central Free Dispensary and the Presbyterian Hos- pital, thus affording privileges indispensable to a medical college, which would cost a large amoimt to obtain There shall, also, be transferred all the appliances and equipment in said buildings, or on said premises, or elsewhere, which belong to the College. 2. The Eush Medical College, with the consent of the Presbyterian Hospital, will transfer the contract now existing between the Eush Medical College Trustees and the Presbyterian Hospital. 3. So far as it can legally be done, the Eush Medical College Trustees will provide that any endowment, hereafter received by it, or in its name, shall belong to the University of Chicago. 4. The Trustees and Faculty of the Eush Medical College, with such assistance as may be obtained from its friends, will endeavor to secure for the purposes hereof the sum of 11,000,000, to be used for medical buildings, equipment, and instruction, at the discretion of the Trustees of the University of Chicago. In consideration of the foregoing, the University of Chicago is to agree that, upon compliance with these conditions, and the raising of the 11,000,000 Ixxviii The President's Report referred to above, it toII thereupon assume and thereafter continue to conduct the work of Rush Medical College. The plan for the future development of Medicine, as suggested by the Trustees oi Eush Medical College in connection with the proposition just recited, is as follows : 1. In addition to the present Departments of Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, and Physi- cal Chemistry, which shall also be part of the Ogden School of Science, three clinical Depart- ments shall be created in the University of Chicago, all constituting the Faculty of Medicine. 2. The work of these clinical Departments (Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics) shall be conducted for (1) undergraduates, and (2) for research work. For undergraduates: (a) during the third year of the medical course at the University, as soon as satisfactory arrangements can be made; (6) during the fourth year at Rush Medical Col- lege, at the University, and elsewhere, if thought wise, as may be arranged. For research work: (a) at the University; (6) at Rush Medical College, and elsewhere, as may be arranged. 3. The work of each of these Departments shall be under a Dean, who shall correlate the work of the Departments in the several places. 4. All instructors in all Departments shall be members of the Faculty of the Rush Medical College of the University of Chicago. All instructors in the fundamental branches of Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, Physical Chemistry, etc., shall be members of the same Faculty as those of the Clinical Departments (Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics); and they shall, also, be mem- bers of the Faculty of the Ogden School of Science. The real basis for the development of medical work in the University was fur- nished in the gift by Miss Helen Culver of one million dollars for the endowment of the Biological Departments, and in the use of a part of this gift in the erection of the Laboratories of Botany, Anatomy, Physiology, and Zoology. These buildings are at present crowded to their fullest capacity, and in the near future additional space will be required. The property of Rush Medical College includes the following : Real estate and buildings (three buildings) - - - $290,000.00 Furniture and fixtm-es - - " - - - - - 15,000.00 Equipment and apparatus ------- 25,000.00 Library ----- 16,000.00 John Philips's Endowment for Central Free Dispensary - 7,743.81 Freer Prize Endowment 3,200.00 Nicholas Senn Fellowship Fund ----- 15,000.00 Total - - . . $371,948.81 In addition to the partial equipment of the Departments already provided for in connection with the biological work, the sum of |50,000 was contributed by a friend of the University for the purchase of additional equipment and apparatus. Quite recently the sum of $20,000 has been presented for the purchase of additional books in the Departments concerned in Medicine. The Rush Medical Library now contains 14,000 volumes. In the Departmental Libraries immediately connected with the work of Medicine in the University there are 9,368 volumes, making a total of 23,368 vol- umes in the medical work under the charge of the University. The President's Repokt Ixxix -The students of Rush Medical College have always been known for the high grade of work performed and for their excellent character. As a result of the advancement in the requirements for admission, the grade of students is still higher. I desire to make the following suggestions : 1. In spite of the difficulties connected with the proposition, it is on the whole best to locate the new buildings for the first two years of medical work at the Univer- sity on Fifty-seventh street directly opposite the Hull Biological Court. 2. At the earliest possible date provision should be made for giving the men of the first two years some instruction in connection with clinical material. 3. The order of procedure in the development of the medical work should be as follows : a) On the South Side at the University : (1) The erection of new buildings for Anatomy and Pharmacology, as suggested above. (2) The establishment of a chair of Medicine in connection with the work at the University, and the appointment of its Head in order that ample time may be given for the preparation of plans both of buildings and work in general. (3) The provision of a temporary Dispensary with a few beds, in which certain forms of disease may be studied. This should be located within a quarter of a mile or less of the present University buildings. (4) The pro- vision at the earliest possible date of permanent hospitals for Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics, and the organization of the Departments to take charge of these hospitals and give the necessary instruction. (5) The provision, as early as possible, of hospi- tals for children's diseases and contagious diseases. The sum needed for the erection of the buildings and the endowment of the work in each of these five hospitals will be at least $1,000,000. b) On the West Side in connection with Rush Medical College : (1) The raising of the proposed sum of $1,000,000. (2) The completion of the group of buildings of which the Senn Memorial Building forms the first part. This will cost about $350,000. (3) The organization on the proper basis of a School of Dentistry which shall be in close association with the School of Medicine, with the requirements for admission much higher than those ordinarily demanded in schools of dentistry. (4) The organi- zation of a Nurses' Training School which shall be entirely under the control of the Medical Department of the University. (5) A revision of the agreement now existing between the Rush Medical College and the Presbyterian Hospital, in accordance with which the present arrangements shall be re-enacted by the Trustees of the Hospital with such changes as may be agreed upon, in favor of the University of Chicago. (6) The readjustment of the arrangement existing between Rush Medical College and the Central Free Dispensary. c) The reorganization of the various Departments under Deans in accordance with the plan outlined above, and the further development of the clinical work on the North Side. 4. Since the degree of M.D. is used to designate graduation from many institu- Ixxx The Peesident's Report tions which make but slight requirements for admission, and since this degree is required by law in the various states, it would seem proper to grant to the graduates of the Medical School who have already taken their Bachelor's degree, and are there- fore Graduate students, the degree of Doctor of Science contemporaneous with that of M.D. This would correspond with the degree of J.D. (Doctor of Law) for the graduate of the Law School, and Th.D. (Doctor of Theology) for the graduate of the Divinity School. XV. THE LAW SCHOOL While the organization of the School of Law had been contemplated for many years, and a large part of the preparation for the same made, it was not until the closing year of the first ten that the actual steps were taken for its establishment. The order of these steps was as follows : 1. The preparation of a schedule of organization by a Committee of the Senate, consisting of Messrs. Judson, Small, and Laughlin, acting with the President. 2. The adoption of the recommendations contained in this Memorial by the Com- mittee of the Trustees, and the addition of supplementary conditions by the Board. The final form of this action was as follows : January 21, 1902. The President reported from the Committee on Instruction and Equipment the following recommendation, which, after full consideration and discussion, was approved and adopted : "1. Whereas, It is important to proceed to the organization of those departments of the University not yet established ; " 2. Whereas, It seems desirable at present to offer especially those departments of work which appeal to men ; "3. Whereas, The demand for instruction in Law grows every day more pressing ; "4. Whereas, The University is today actually giviag the instruction called for in the first year of a School of Law ; "5. Whereas, (1) The instruction called for in the remaining two years, (2) the cost of administration, (3) the cost of advertising, &c., can be provided for a sum not to exceed $18,000 a year, and this expense would probably be met by the tuition fees of the, students registering for the work ; "6. Whereas, Temporary quarters for the School may be arranged in the building now occupied by the School of Education ; "7. Whereas, There would still remain the necessity for providing a library, estimated to cost 150,000 ; " It is voted ; "1. That Mr. Rockefeller be requested to consider the advisability of giving to the Uni- versity the sum of $50,000 for the purchase of a law library ; and, if he shall consent, " 2. The President be authorized to proceed to organize the University School of Law, to be open for instruction October 1, 1902, with the understanding — "a) That the total expense of the School (not including the cost of the library) for the first year shall not exceed $18,000, and for the second year $22,000 — a sum estimated to corre- spond to the receipts from tuition fees and matriculations. "6) That the School be arranged to include : "(1) A preparatory year equivalent to the third college year; and The Peesident's Kepoet Ixxxi " (2) A three-years' course of study, to which no one shall be admitted who is not a graduate of an approved college or who has not completed three years of study in such a college. " c) That the students of the preparatory year and those of the first year of the Law work who do not have a Bachelor's degree be reckoned, for administrative and financial purposes, students of the School of Law. "d) That the general items of the budget of expenditures be as follows : " Administrative salaries - - - - - I 1,000 Administrative expenses . - - - 800 General expenses 500 Instruction 14,000 Books and librarian 800 Heat and light 800 $17,900" 3. The gift by Mr. Rockefeller of $50,000 for the purchase of books. 4. The consent of the Harvard Corporation to grant Professor Beale leave of absence for two years to act as Dean of the new Law School during its period of organization. 5. The securing of a gift for the Law School Building. 6. The selection of the Faculty and adoption of regulations. All of these steps had been practically completed at the close of the first ten years of University work, and so belong to the first period of its history. Three important points were adopted as fundamental in the policy of the School: 1. That it should be located at the University, and thus constitute a part of the University environment and form an organic part of the University, making contribu- tion to the University life and at the same time imbibing the spirit and purpose of that life. 2. That it should be essentially a Graduate School, its regular students being required to have the Bachelor's degree, or at least three years of work in an approved college. 3. That, while the methods of each instructor should be left to be determined by himself, the system which should serve as a basis of the work should be the so-called "Case System." On the first and second points there was entire unanimity on the part of the Committee of the Senate and the Trustees. On the third point the feeling was not so unanimous. This question, however, seemed to receive a practical settlement in the choice of instructors finally agreed upon. The task of selecting the books for the library was intrusted to Professors Beale and Mack, and the result of their work has shown itself to be thoroughly satisfactory. The library, as thus far organized, contains over 20,000 volumes, and includes the reports of all the courts of the United States, and of the several states and territories, of England, Scotland, Ireland, Canada, Australia, and India; the statutes now in force in these jurisdictions; a large number of session laws, many of them rare and Ixxxii The Peesident's Eepoet valuable; an adequate collection of treatises, trials, and legal periodicals; and the necessary books of reference. A large collection of civil-law treatises and of tlie reports of the European states is to be procured at once. Much consideration has been given to the question of degrees. At first provision was made only for the degree of J.D. (Juris Doctor) which is intended for those who have already received the Bachelor's degree. This step was taken after consulta- tion with the other graduate law schools of the country, Harvard and Columbia. Later it was decided to bestow the degree of Bachelor of Laws on special students who are qualified to enter the Junior Colleges, provided they maintain a high standing. Special mention should be made of the courtesy of the Harvard Corporation in permitting Professor Beale to accept the temporary appointment of Dean, referred to above. This action indicated a broad spirit and an appreciation of the closer relation- ships which are coming to exist between higher institutions of learning. The University of Chicago acknowledges most cordially its obligation to Harvard for this unprecedented favor. The building intended for the Law School has been planned with great care. Pains have been taken in the provision, not only for the things needed, but also for the things desired. It will be of stone, in the English Gothic style, which has been consecrated to English law by the use, for legal purposes, of Westmiaster Hall and the Inns of Court. The basement will contain smoking- and conversation-rooms, toilet- rooms and lockers. On the first floor will be two large lecture-rooms, capable of seating about 175 men each, and a number of smaller lecture-rooms, class-rooms, offices, etc. On a mezzanine floor above will be the stack-room of the library, 9 feet high, occupying this entire floor of the building ; here will be the work tables and studies of the professors, the librarian's room and other rooms for the administration of the library, and stack-room for at least 100,000 law books. Above this will be the reading-room, a great hall 160 feet long and 50 feet wide, with timbered roof and clerestory windows, equaling in dignity and beauty the great English academic halls. The impressive dignity and the historic associations of the architecture of this great hall will of themselves be of much educational value. The reading-room will furnish wall space for about 25,000 volumes. On the same floor will be the Dean's office. The building will be thoroughly ventilated, and all parts of it, except the smaller lecture-rooms, will be lighted by windows on both sides. The building will be in the main Quadrangle of the University, and will be connected by covered passages with the general library of the University and with the building of the Historical Departments, when the latter buildings are erected. By the action of the Board of Trustees, a pre-legal year has been established for students who are preparing to enter the Law School. The work of this year consists of Political Economy, Constitutional History, Political Science, Commerce, and Logic. I desire to make the following suggestions : The President's Repoet Ixxxiii 1. There should be established, as early as practicable, a Journal for the Law School, to be edited by its professors. This Journal might be, if thought best, the continuation of a Journal already established, which could be secured on satisfactory terms, or a new Journal with a constituency to be obtained. The advantage of controlling such a Journal is apparent and needs no argument. 2. Provision should be made for instruction in subjects of Law for which students from other divisions of the University might register. Such courses should be arranged for, even if they should prove to be courses outside of those ordinarily ofPered in the Law-School curriculum. There should be particularly included courses which would prove of advantage to students of the College of Commerce and Administration. 3. It is desirable that the Law School should conform to the general policy of the University and offer courses in the Summer Quarter. These courses shoiild be so arranged that students who desire to begin the work of the Law School may make the Summer Quarter their first Quarter. Instruction should also be provided for those who desire to take the second and third years of the law course as well as those who desire to undertake special work in connection with the law of modern commercial life. In other words, opportunity should be provided for work on the part of (a) those who wish to complete their course in a shorter time than the three calendar years ordinarily required; (6) students of other institutions who wish to do special work in particular subjects ; (c) graduates of schools of law already engaged in practice who desire to make special investigations in particular lines; and (d) teachers of law in other law schools who wish to undertake advanced work with professors of law of international reputation. 4. Care must be taken that the Law School shall not be regarded as an institution which has a merely nominal connection with the University. Effort should be made to keep it in the closest touch with the other divisions of the University, and to this end in matters of legislation there should not be departure from the usages of the University already established, except in those cases where the circumstances make clear demand. XVI. THE SCHOOL OF EDUCATION The institution established under the name of The Chicago Institute by Mrs. Emmons Blaine, and originally located on the North Side, after one year of work in that location was transferred to the University and reorganized as an organic part of the University. Within a few months, Colonel Francis W. Parker, the Director of the School, was taken away. This serious loss rendered necessary certain changes in the staff of the Faculty. Upon the election to the Directorship of Mr. John Dewey, the Department of Education in the University was joined to the School of Education, and the larger plans contemplated in the original contract, by which secondary work as well as ele- mentary work should form a part of the scheme of work, were completed. At an Ixxxiv The President's Eeport important meeting held in May, 1902, the Faculties of the School of Education, the Department of Education, the South Side Academy, the Chicago Manual Training School, and the Laboratory School were organized as a single Faculty, thus bringing about the union of these various interests and their organization into one administra- tive body. At this meeting committees were appointed on the curriculum of the various sections of the work and upon the consideration of questions relating to build- ings and grounds. With this action the second year of the history of the School was closed. The difEculties encountered by the School, of which the greatest was the loss of the Director, Colonel Parker, have included also the following: 1. The embarrassment of doing two years' work at the University in a provisional building which does not furnish adequate facilities. 2. The fact that the buildings planned are to cost more than the sums originally appropriated. This excess of cost is due in part to the adoption of Bedford stone as the material for the buildings, and in part also to the fact that they are to be made strictly fireproof. The opinion prevailed that both of these steps were not only desirable, but necessary. 3. The fact that so large a portion of the original endowment, viz., $425,000, consists of the unproductive piece of real estate lying between North Clark street on the west and North Park avenue on the east, Webster avenue on the south and Belden avenue on the north, purchased for the site of the School as originally proposed. Inasmuch as this investment produces no income, but, on the other hand, is a source of expense on account of taxes, it becomes necessary, in accordance with the provision made in the original contract, to use a portion of the principal of the endowment for a period of six years. The maximum which may thus be employed is $25,000 a year. 4. The adjustments which are required by the University environment, involving, on the one hand, great economy and advantage, but, on the other, careful arrange- ment of curriculum and a new distribution of work among the members of the Faculty. 5. Adjustments growing out of the fact that the work as originally proposed has limited itself, perhaps too rigidly, to the ground covered ordinarily in the normal school, leaving out of view necessarily the larger and higher work which under the new circumstances seems to be demanded. 6. The existence of the Laboratory School (formerly the Elementary School), which for seven years has been conducted as a Laboratory of the Department of Edu- cation in the University. This School, with its separate Faculty and pupils, has had for its aim the working out of certain important educational theories. The question of adjusting the relationship of this School to the Elementary School of the School of Education involves several points for serious consideration, among which may be named : a) Is it necessary henceforth to conduct two independent schools? The President's Eepoet Ixxxv b) Even if such a policy is desirable, how can both be properly conducted with the money at the disposal of the University? c) In case both schools are maintained separately, what shall be the distinction between the two, and to what extent may there be co-operation in the matter of teachers ? d) Can both schools, if maintained separately, occupy a single building, or must there be a separate building for the Laboratory School in addition to those already erected for the School of Education ? 7. The adjustments involved in placing the Chicago Manual Training School with its distinctive features in connection with the South Side Academy. 8. The relationship to be sustained between the instruction in the various Depart- ments in these schools and the corresponding Departments of the Junior Colleges. These and other problems still await solution. The Departments concerned are engaged in their earnest consideration. The journal formerly entitled the Course of Study, and connected with the Chicago Institute, has been continued under the name of the Elementary School Teacher. This journal is published by the School of Education under the Managing Editorship of Professor Ella F. Young. It is intended to serve, not merely as an organ of the School of Education, but as a medium for the discussion of all questions relating to the field of elementary education. The possibilities of the School of Education are very great, although considerable disappointment has been felt thiis far in the small number' of professional students registered. It is believed that the failure thus far is due to causes beyond the control of those who have been connected with the School. It is confidently felt that, with the establishment of the School in its permanent quarters in the new buildings, with the larger scope which the combination of various interests will invite, and with the closer correlation of all the factors in the situation, the number now enrolled, viz., one hundred, will be doubled, or even quadrupled, within the near future. It is estimated that the buildings now in process of erection, including those which are to follow within a short time, will be capable of accommodating five hundred professional stu- dents, five hundred secondary pupils, and three hundred elementary pupils. The library and the various departments are thought to be more strongly equipped in books and apparatus than those of any other school of a similar character in the West or Northwest. The following is a brief description of the building now being erected: It is situated on Scammon court, between Kimbark and Monroe avenues, and faces the Midway Plaisance. The building will be of stone, with tile roof to correspond with the other buildings of the University, although the actual details of the style are somewhat different. It will have a frontage of 350 feet, and a depth, through its two wings, of 162 feet. It will be four stories high, but passenger and freight elevators will give easy access to the upper floors. An attractive feature of the plan is the large Ixxxvi The President's Repoet open court, the quadrangle, which is now accepted as the best arrangement for a uni- versity building. The court will oifer great possibilities for landscape effects, and in the final plan will be symmetrical and surrounded with buildings. The wings on the east and west sides are low, to insure a circulation of air in the court, and also to take advantage of the prevailing western winds in summer. To increase the effect of the whole, and to insure a certain privacy, the building is set upon a terrace. The west half of the building will be assigned mainly to the professional depart- ment, and the first two floors in the east wing to the Elementary School. In detail the disposition of the rooms is as follows: The part of the basement used for rooms is taken up with the geographical laboratory, and the casting-room and the furnace-room used in connection with clay-modeling. On the first floor are the assembly hall, physics laboratory, rooms for astronomy and mathematics, the offices of the Director and the Dean, and four full-sized grade-rooms and eight half- sized grade-rooms to be used as group-rooms. On the second floor are the rooms for oral reading, geography, geology, history, and library. In the east wing there are four full- and four half-sized group-rooms and a play-room for the kindergarten. On the third floor there are rooms for chemistry and biology, a lecture hall, museum, four general class-rooms, two for psychology, two for domestic science and sanitation. On the fourth floor there are rooms for music, photography, manual training, art, a Faculty room for lunch and kitchen, clay-modeling, textiles, and dyeing. It will be seen that the general arrangement is such as to insure plenty of light for each of the rooms and for all of the corridors. From this fact it is believed that the building will lend itself easily to the decorative effects which can be planned with a view to an appropriate treatment of the building as a whole. The corridors will be lined with brick of a soft gray color, and the floor will be of cement, in a shade of red harmonizing with the walls. The finish overhead will be in rough plaster, to add life to the color effects. The interior woodwork will be of dark-stained birch. Birch has been selected rather than oak or other woods of a more porous nature, because of the ease with which it may be kept clean. With the exception of the kiln-room and the casting-room, there are no work-rooms in the basement. The building will be equipped with a complete interior telephone system. The heating and ventilation will be of the Plenum system, the same as in our public schools, except that the amount of air furnished each person per hour will be greater, and the velocity of the air entering the room not so great. In addition, the laboratories are equipped with an exhaust system. I desire to make the following suggestions: 1. The connection between the School of Education and the various Departments of the University, while already close, should be made still closer. The higher the grade of the teacher, the more important becomes the factor of actual knowledge as compared with method ; in other words, if it shall prove to be the policy of the School to prepare the higher grade of teachers as well as principals and superintendents, the The Peesidbnt's Eepoht Ixxxvii University must make a larger and larger contribution as compared with that of the School itself. This can come about only if the curriculum of the school allows the fullest possible opportunity for the student to do work in the University. 2. It is probable that, after all, the laboratory method will prove to be the better method for training teachers as well as for working out anew the solution of educa- tional problems. If this is true, it will not be necessary, as has heretofore been sup- posed, to multiply indefinitely the number of pupils for the purpose of affording an opportunity to train the teachers, nor will it be necessary to place the pupils unre- servedly in the hands of amateur teachers. 3. If the suggestion just made proves to be correct, it will be possible with the growth of the professional school to reduce the number of pupils in both the elemen- tary and secondary divisions in order to make room for professional students. 4. It is apparent that in the suggestion just made lies the possible solution of the combination of the two elementary schools now in existence. It seems wise, upon the whole, to make some adjustment of the curriculum and requirements for admission in order to accommodate the large number of teachers desiring to be present during the Summer Quarter, and it is probable that nothing would be lost by modifying in this way the general regulations of the School. 5. Consideration should be given to the question whether it is not possible to arrange a system of co-operation between normal schools of the various states and the School of Education similar to that which exists between the high schools and the Colleges of the University, or between the various Colleges and the Graduate School of the University. 6. It is also to be considered whether a large factor in the future work of the School of Education shall not be the training of specialists in the various departments of educational work, rather than furnishing the usual courses of study covered in the ordinary normal school. XVII. THE UNIVEKSITY COLLEGE In 1898 Mrs. Emmons Blaine, after a study of certain facts presented to her, kindly consented to contribute $5,000 a year for five years toward the establishment of courses of study for teachers and others at some down-town place more accessible to the public than on the Quadrangles of the University, these courses to be offered in afternoons and evenings and on Saturdays. An annual gift of $1,200 was subse- N CO ^ i.-:! CD j_ tH tH Quarter 1 fl a S to a to a s. 60 en tti a ■u 13 s O fl Id a 60 a ^ < ^ p. ^ 3 < 1 & o H 3 fiQ Total number Majors summer work Average number Quarters per student 1 1 Average number Majors per student 3.2 2.9 Average number Majors per Quarter the basis for ascertaining this. During these years the number of students who have taken summer work as continuous work, and who therefore did not take full vacation during the year in which they took summer work, is as follows: TABLE G STUDENTa Taking Summer Wokk as a Foueth (Additional) Quakteb, and not as a Substitute FOE Anothee Quaetee One-half Quarter One Quarter One and one-half Quarter . . Two Quarters Two and one-half Quarters . Three Quarters Three and one-half Quarters Four and one-half Quarters , Total 1898-1899 6 17 8 11 i 1 44 W. 18 11 24 9 16 i 1 62 1899-1900 M. 5 11 4 5 3 2 31 w. 27 14 19 7 10 5 2 58 1900-1901 18 41 W. 28 7 15 9 27 7 15 2 8 2 3 1 1 These figures, however, need to be further corrected by an examination of the following table, which shows the number of Quarters during which the students who took continuous summer work were in residence. It is evident that the students who took only one-half Quarter were able to have seven weeks' vacation; that those who took one and one-half Quarters were able to have seven weeks' vacation in one of the years; and, further, that a considerable number of those who are recorded as having taken one Quarter took this in the form of two terms of six weeks each. Hence the number of students who have worked continuously, without any vaca- tion, must be correspondingly reduced. FLEXIBILITY OF THE COURSE A second unique feature of the University curriculum has been the flexibility of the course. The tables of graduation which will follow later will show to what extent the privilege of graduating at other times than June has been utilized by undergraduate students. It will appear that, in general, about one-half of the Bachelors have received degrees at Convocations other than the June Convocation. A more detailed view of the extent to which students have availed themselves of the flexibility of the course is furnished by the immediately following tables, which show the proportion of students who have taken what might be called a normal course— meaning by this the course of four academic years of nine months each; and, further, 72 The Peesident's Kepokt what proportion of students has extended or shortened this course. There are several ways in which the course may be extended or shortened. The course may be extended by taking less than normal work during the time of residence, or by being out of residence for more than the oi'dinary vacation of three months. It may be shortened by residence during the summer, or by extra work during the time of residence, or by both of these means. In Table I the statistics show, in the case of students who have graduated in the years 1898 to 1901, the number who have graduated upon what might be called the "normal date," reckoned according to the ordi- nary academic year; i. e., for a student entering in October, 1896, the normal date of graduation would be June, 1900. In estimating the numbers in this column, no account has been made of the fact that certain of these students entered with entrance conditions, because in the ordinary college, students make up such conditions and graduate with their class. The column headed "Number of Quarters," under "Normal," gives the number of students who have taken the pre- cise number of Quarters for graduation that would normally be required; i. e., twelve Quarters, of twelve weeks each, equivalent to four academic years of thirty-six weeks each. The similar columns under "Extended" and "Shortened" indicate respectively the numbers of students who have taken more or less than the normal time, and therefore have done less or more than regular work when in residence. The table is accordingly to be read as follows: In the class of 1898-99, 27 men and 36 women were in residence the normal number of Quarters (that is, for those who took all their work in the University, 12 Quarters; for others, a correspondingly less number); 36 men and 28 women were in residence more than this nor- mal number; 26 men and 22 women, less than the normal number. In like manner, 33 men and 41 women graduated at the time at which they would normally graduate under the usual college curriculum; 25 men and 22 women graduated at a later date; and 24 men and 10 women, at an earlier date. It will be noted that more students have hastened the date of graduation than have shortened the number of Quarters. This would mean that the date had been hastened by sum- mer work, rather than by extra work. It will be noted, on the other hand, that for the past two years the number of those who have been in residence the normal number of Quarters is approxi- mately the same as that of those who have graduated upon the normal date. TABLE H Number of Students in Thkee Geaduating Classes who Have Extended or Shortened their Cotjese 1898-189E ]899-190( 1900-1901 M. W. T. M. W. T. M. W. 27 26 53 20 31 51 34 38 33 41 74 23 33 56 33 36 31 30 31 30 39 35 38 42 38 54 45 36 40 38 36 40 36 28 64 24 25 49 19 23 25 22 47 20 32 52 37 32 39 42 40 35 33 34 21 25 35 34 34 31 39 37 41 36 26 22 48 23 23 46 37 29 24 10 34 21 17 38 20 22 30 28 29 35 28 31 41 33 27 12 21 33 21 25 23 24 T. Normal: Number of Quarters Date Per cent.. Quarters . Per cent. Date Extended: Number of Quarters Date Per cent., Quarters . Per cent.. Date Shortened : Number of Quarters Date Per cent., Quarters . Per cent., Date 72 69 41 38 42 69 22 38 66 42 37 24 The Senior Colleges 73 TABLE I Date of Graduation d 00 tn rid CD to d o CO 1 o CD a CD •4-3 § 3 1 a en tn ■S a a CO tn +3 CO nj (D IH tn d a CO Q ;>" tn 1 § a CO RJ (U tH tn CD a EH -4-3 1 C<1 to i-i CO tn CO tn" «i •u >H CO a CD 03 PH CO tn -a i .^ M >i a T3 -CI Q (D PlaT-^ £ .a J< ©Ai a g-a § Sis g^.i) S§^ a S.aS ■a o S u ^0 d 1 a lh 11 III 5s« M M g-o P cfl a cd H m w^ i" s« ^Mco -u=» -o». ^C«:« -« S=» B 1898-1899: Men 8 3 24 6 41 Women 9 3 5 1 1 19 Total 17 6 29 1 6 1 60 1899-1900: Men 7' 1 4 14 7 1 1 8 1 1 1 26 Women 20 Total 7 5 21 2 8 2 1 46 1900-1901: Men 7 6 4 2 13 11 1 1 2 2' 1 2 1 •• 31 Women 22 Total 13 6 24 2 2 2 1 2 1 53 It will be seen from the above table — what has been apparent in registration — that a student who takes summer work is likely to wish to do extra work during part or all of the rest of the year. In the case of a student who has no conditions or penalties for absences to make up, it is evident that this would naturally be the case, because it would be of no value to a student to complete six weeks of summer work, unless he was enabled to hasten his graduation by some other means. LENGTHENING THE COURSE Tables H, I, and J show also the number of students who have graduated upon a date later than the normal date, and those who have been in residence more than the normal number of Quarters. The following tables, L and M, show, respectively, the number of Quarters in which less than normal work has been done by students graduating in the years 1898-1901, and the number of Majors which have been lost by completing less than normal work in a given Quarter. In Table M three ways are shown by which a student may have completed less than normal work: (1) he may have registered for less than three courses; (2) he may have failed in a course ; (3) his absences may have been sufficiently numerous to reduce his credit in that course, accord- ing to the rule that when the absences in a course amount to 25 per cent, of the total number of exercises in that course, only half credit for the course can be received. 76 The President's Eepokt TABLE L Ndmbee of Qoaetees in which Less than Nosmal Woek (Thkee Majors) was Done H 1 IH 2 2% 3 3"/2 4 4'/2 5 6 61/2 7 7!4 8 9 9K 10 12 13 16H Total Mss-ia99: 2 3 5 1 3 i 17 14 31 19 18 37 9 7 16 2 '2 3 i 7 2 2 11 9 20 7 5 12 8 5 13 1 i i' 1 5 6 " 5 6 11 1 3 4 1 i 2 1 3 i' 1 2 6 8 3 4 7 2 1 3 2 '2 i' 1 3 6 9 2 4 6 1 1 4 2 6 1 1 2 i' 1 i' 1 1 i i' 1 2 2 i 1 1 1 2 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 2 i' 1 1 1 1 2 i 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 52 49 Total 101 1899-1900 : Men 52 48 Total 100 1900-MOl: Men 24 25 Total 49 TABLE M Majoes Lost by Caeeying Less than Noemal Woek in a Given Quaetbe 1. By Registeation Vi 1 l'/2 2 2^2 3 3H 4 4y. 5 S'A 6 6/2 7 7'/z 8 8'/2 9 9H 10 UH 12 I6V2 18^2 Total 1898-1899: Men .... Women . Total . 1899-1900 : Men .... Women . Total . 1900-1901 : Men .... Women . Total . 6 6 12 S 8 16 1 3 7 10 10 11 21 10 7 17 4 1 5 5 4 9 3 3 9 4 13 6 5 11 6 2 "8 4 2 6 2 1 3 2 3 5 1 7 8 3 3 6 3 2 5 4' 4 1 i 2 6 8 4 4 8 1 2 3 2 '2 1 1 2 3 2 5 3 1 4 1 i 2 '2 i' 1 4 2 6 1 5 6 i' 1 i' 1 2 '2 i' 1 2 2 4 i' 1 1 1 2 i 1 2' 2 1 i 1 1 2 i 1 1 i 2 2 i' 1 i' 1 i' 1 1 1 i' 1 i 1 46 50 96 47 46 93 29 27 56 2. By Failuee 3. By Absences Vs 1 l'/2 2 VA 3 ZVi 4 4'/j 6 6% 13 Total i4 1 I'/i 2 2H Total 1898-1899 : Men 2 1 3 1 'i 7 4 11 10 5 15 3 2 "2 1 i 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 1" 1 1 i 2 2 4 3 '3 1 1 i 2 '2 2 '2 1" 1 1 i 1 i 19 11 30 17 6 23 g 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 i 2 1 3 2 '2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 'i 1 i 6 Women Total 4 10 1899-1900: 4 Women Total 1900-1901 : Men 1 5 2 Women Total 2 5 1 4 12 1 3 The exact reasons for short registration cannot be given, but it would appear, I think, that most of the men who have registered for less than normal work have done so to enable them to do outside work as a means of defraying their expenses; while the women in many cases have taken less than normal work on grounds of health. In contrast with this table, the following tables, N and O, will show: (1) the number of Quarters during which more than normal work was taken; (2) the number of Majors gained by graduates of this same period, by carrying more than normal work in one or more Quarters; and (3) the purpose, so far as it can be estimated, for which the students carried this extra work: The Senior Colleges 77 TABLE N NOMBEK OF QUAETEES DUEING WHICH MOEE THAN NOEMAL WOEK (3 MAJOES) WA9 CAEEIED !4 1 IH 2 214 3 3V4 4 4'/^ 5 6 6'/j 7 Total 1898-1899: Men 25 16 41 9 25 34 8 10 18 3 1 4 1 1 2 1 5 6 6 14 20 14 6 20 8 11 19 4 1 5 1 "i 2 "2 12 5 17 10 10 20 2 2 4 2 "i 1 2 3 1 "i 7 3 10 2 2 4 2 . 2 4 2 1 3 1 3 4 2" 2 1 "1 1 "i 1 1 2 1 1 i" 1 1 "1 63 45 Total 108 1899-1900: Men 1 1 2 3 1 4 40 Women Total 45 85 1900-1901: Men 33 Women Total 31 64 TABLE O Majoes Gained btt Caeeting Moee Than Noemal Woek in a Given Quaetee 1. To Make up Shoet Woek 2. To Make up Failuee 3. To Make dp Absences V4 1 154 2 2H 3 3'/2 4 Total Vi 1 I'/j 2 3 Total 'A 1 2H la H 1898-1899: Men 10 10 1 5 3 2 31 2 8 2 1 2 15 1 2 3 Women 8 13 4 2 3 i 31 2 3 5 Total 18 23 5 7 3 5 1 62 4 11 2 i 2 20 i 2 3 1899-1900: Men 9 6 1 2 2 1 1 22 1 10 1 1 1 14 3 1 1 5 Women 10 11 3 1 1 26 1 2 3 1 1 Total 19 17 4 2 3 2 i 48 2 12 1 1 1 17 4 1 1 6 1900-1901: Men 3 10 3 1 1 18 1 1 2 4 1 1 Women 7 7 2 2 18 4 4 1 1 Total 10 17 5 2 1 1 36 1 5 2 8 1 1 2 4. To Make up CoitDi- TION3 5. To Shoeten Time Requieed foe Geaduation '/2 1 I'/s 2'/= 3 Total H 1 1V4 2 2'/2 3 3'/j 4 4H 5 5V4 6 Total 1898-1899: 3 3 1 4 4 9 3 5 3 4 8 2 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 25 Women 1 20 Total 1 6 1 8 12 8 12 3 5 3 2 45 1899-1900: Men 1 3 1 5 4 2 2 2 1 1 n Women 4 2 2 8 7 7 1 1 3 20 Total 5 5 i 2 13 11 9 2 3 1 2 3 31 1900-1901: Men 1 1 1 3 6 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 19 Women 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 7 Total i 2 i. 4 7 4 4 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 26 78 The Pbbsident's Kepoet CONTRAST BETWEEN THE MEMBERSHIP OF A CLASS GRADUATING FROM THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, 1900-1901, AND A CLASS GRADUATING FROM A TYPICAL EASTERN INSTITUTION The statistics presented in the preceding tables, especially in tables C, H, I, and J, give the basis for a very interesting comparison between the constituency of a graduating class at the University of Chicago, from the time of its entrance to the time of its graduation, as compared with the graduating classes of the older institutions. In the University of Chicago, as the tables show, about one-third of a class graduate in the noxmal time; about one-third in less than normal time; and about one-third in more than normal time; and, moreover, as has already been shown in the summary to Table C, only a relatively small proportion — from 28 per cent, to 40 per cent. — have completed all of their work at the University of Chicago. This makes an additional element of irregularity. On the other hand, in the ordinary college of the usual type, the great majority of the class does all of its work at the institution in question, and the class graduates with very nearly the same constituency with which it entered. For instance, at one of the typical institutions of the East, which is selected because its graduating class for 1901 , of 232, is not very far from the size of the University of Chicago class of 208, of the same year, the published statistics state that the class entered with 298 men. Sixty-six dropped out, six died, and twenty-four subsequently joined the class. In order to make the comparison more accurate, however, the following tables and accompanying chart have been prepared, showing two sets of data. The first, presented in Table P, traces the history of the students who entered the University without advanced stand- ing during the year July, 1898, to April, 1899, inclusive. These students would correspond roughly to the Freshman class that would be expected to graduate in June, 1901. The table shows (1) how many of these have dropped out, and the dates upon which they have dropped out; (2) how many have remained in residence and have not yet graduated, with the amount of Majors standing to their credit, from which it is possible to see when they will graduate, if they continue in residence; and (3) the number who have graduated either during this present year or the preceding year. TABLE p Eecoed of Students Entebing the Junioe College Without Advanced Standing in the Year 1897-! THE Freshman Class Entering July, 1897, to Apell, 1898 I. E., OF Entered Dropped Graduated Years Sp. '00 Sum. '00 Total 3 years Aut. '00 Win. '01 Sp. '01 Total Total First Second Third Total Grad. lS97Summe7' Men 1 1 5 2 2 1 1 Women 2 2 2 «... 1 1 Total 1 1 7 2 2 4 2 2 Autumn : Men 8 4 7 19 8 2 1 3 1 2 20 23 Women 9 1 10 9 3 1 4 2 3 18 23 Total 17 5 7 29 17 5 2 7 3 5 38 46 Winter: Men 5 1 1 1 1 Women 3 1 2 6 2 1 1 Total 3 1 2 6 7 i 1 2 2 Spring : Men 1 Women 2 i i 2 Total 3 1 1 2 Summary : Men 8 5 7 20 19 4 2 6 1 3 21 25 31 Women 12 2 2 16 15 3 3 6 2 5 20 27 33 Total 20 7 9 36 34 7 5 12 3 8 41 52 64 Decennial Publications, I Plate 1 CHART SHOWING THE COLLEGIATE HISTORY OF THE CLASS ENTERING 1897-9S, CONJOINTLY WITH THAT OF THE CLASS GRADUATING lSIOO-1901 (To Illustrate Tables P and Q) The Senior Colleges 79 It thus appears that of the 36 students who have dropped out; 20 dropped out at the end of the first year and 16 during or at the close of the second year, of whom 3 left on receiving their Associate title. It appears that there are 85 still (July 1, 1901) in residence who have not graduated; that 7 graduated within the year 1899-1900; and, if we include those graduating in the summer of 1900, inasmuch as these latter students would have the opportunity of entering a professional school or beginning work as tutors in the autumn, it would appear that 11 brought their period of graduation within what may be fairly called three years, leaving 44 who graduated in four years, or approximately four years, after their entrance. Table Q, which follows, presents the counterpart of this, and shows the previous history of the class of 208 who graduated during the year 1900-1901. It appears that three members of the class entered in the year in which the University opened, 1892-93, and that others have entered at various intervals since, many having been here only for the past year or for one Quarter. Recced TABLE Q OF Geaddates, Aeeangbd According to Year of Entrance and Quarter of Graduation QUAETER OF Entered Geaduation 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1S99-1900 1900-1901 Summer: Men Women Total .... Autumn : Men Women Total .... Winter: Men Women Total .... Spring: Men Women Total .... Summary : Men Women Total .... .... 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 i'" 1 1 '"i 1 1 2 2 1 3 i'" 1 1 1 2 2 "2 5 3 8 2 "'2 1 "i i "■ 1 i'" 1 3 2 5 4 1 5 9 6 15 '2" 2 1 3 4 14 12 26 5 3 8 2 3 5 4 4 8 17 20 37 28 30 58 12 3 15 1 "i 2 2 4 7 12 19 22 17 39 7 ....^ 1 2 3 4 1 5 3 13 16 15 16 31 4 3 7 3 3 6 10 8 18 17 14 31 Grand total: men, 102; women, 101; total, 203.^ The above figures are shown more forcibly by the attached chart. The upper part of the chart represents the history of the students who entered in 1897-98, as shown in Table P. The lower part of the chart represents the history of the students who graduated in 1900-1901. The space in which the two overlap shows, of course, the number of students who entered in 1897-98 and graduated in 1900-1901. The heavier-colored spaces represent the men and the lighter the women. The space in which the two overlap, therefore, would represent more nearly the con- stituency of an ordinary college class. It is seen that this makes a relatively small portion of the total constituency of those who have graduated in the year 1900-1901. In the case of the one man and two women who, according to the chart, entered the University in the year 1892-93, it is, of course, not the case that they were in continuous residence up to the time of their gradua- tion; and the same is true of others who entered at an early date. The groups of students who were in the University for short periods, indicated in the lower parts of the chart, entered with advanced standing from other institutions. SFive students took the degree without residence as undergraduates, making a total of 208. Compare with Table C. 80 The President's Kepoet /8 9S-3 18 95-4 18 94-5 /895-6 /8 36-7 /8 97-8 /8 /a 98-9 19 99 00 /9 00-/ 19 oi-z 3 / 2.70 / T€ tal men in Senior Colleges tal women in Senior Colleges, tal men graduated tal women graduated / ^ Tc / Tc Tr 242 &38 ^■^ / .„.H .............. «.,...„. 'zer 1 1 / It n 1 ^ '' ''-"" 1 1 1 1 151 1 i I i j / i 156 1 / i .' y^ / ; • ' 1 ; 1 1 1; / 1 '■m 1 ,-/ 1 ,.' / 1 t .X'' / / 1 .^--' ''''\ / / ' y ' ,' \ / / / / / 1 / / /' / ^ / /' / / ^'' / / 33 ^ * / / / / 1 / IZ 7 ^" / ' ,---■ CHART TO ILLUSTRATE TABLES B AND E The Senior Colleges 81 GRADUATION BY DEGREES AND SEXES TABLE R The Senior Colleges Graduation (College Degrees Conferred) at the Convocations Held at the Close of the Respective Quarters 1892-1893: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1893-189i: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1894-1895: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1895-1896: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1896-1897: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1897-1898: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1898-1899: A.B Ph.B S.B Total 1899-1900: A.B *Ph.B.— L > a F-l i i 1 i i 1 '2 2 i i i 1 i i i i i i '2 '2 '2 i "2 "2 'a 6 i '2 '3 '3 3 ■3 i '3 '4 '4 4 '4 1 i i i 1 1 i 2 '2 >> '0 CD "2 "z 2 i i i 1 2 3 i i 1 i 1 i i i 1 'i tc til • ■ 1 i i i i i i i 1 i >i PM '2 '2 '2 *2 1 i '2 '2 '2 2 '0 C3 2 '2 '2 i i i 3 '3 >3 a a pq i i 1 "i 1 li 'a a i i i i i 1 >> ja 5 1 4 '9 1 10 ■9 1 10 i 'i 1 i 'a i 1 1SS8- P- 1 (D ■S 0) 3 1899- 1 1 1 iSOO- 1 1" 1 1 T i90J- £ 1" 1 1 99: Failures Conditions . . Total Failures Conditions . . Total 'otal for year. 1900: Failures Conditions.. Total - Failures Conditions . . Total ^otal for year. - 1901: Failures Conditions . . Total ■ y Failures ■ Conditions . . • Total ■ otal for year. ■ moz: Failures - Conditions.. ■ Total Failures ^ Conditions.. ■ Total ■ - otal for year. ■ M.. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. T... M.. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. T... M.. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. M.. W. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. T... M.. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M,. W.. M.. W.. M.. W.. T... M.. W.. T... 1 '5 2 6 2 8 6 2 8 i 2 1 2 3 '2 1 3 '2 1 2 1 3 '2 1 3 i i i i i i i i 1 i 1 2 1 1 2 '2 '2 2 '2 '2 2 2 2 i i i 1 i 1 2 '2 i i 1 i 1 i 1 2 1 2 3 1 i i i i i 2 '2 1 i '2 2 1 i i 3 '3 '2 '2 2 '2 2 i i 1 1 2 1 1 2 i i 1 i 1 '2 2 1 ■3 2 5 3 2 5 i 1 i 1 i i i i i i i 1 i 1 3 i 1 4 5 i 4 5 ■7* i 's 8 1 i i 1 8 9 '2 "2 2 2 2 i i 1 i 1 '2 1 2 1 3 '2 '2 2 2 3 5 i 2 1 2 3 i 2 1 2 3 2 4 6 '5 3 5 3 8 2 i 2 1 3 7 4 11 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 '2 1 2 1 3 '2 1 3 2 '2 '2 '2 '2 i 1 1 i '2 "2 "2 3 '3 1 i '2 2 '2 '2 '3 2 3 2 5 3 2 5 1 1 i 1 2 2 2 '2 2 4 6 3 5 8 3 i 2 4 2 6 "2 1 2 1 a 6 3 9 1 1 1 1 2 1 ■3 1 4 '4 5 1 6 'i i 1 i 1 i i i i "2 '2 2 "2 1 'i i i i 1 '4 '4 ■4 4 1 5 6 2 12 8 18 10 28 3 1 11 7 14 8 22 32 18 50 7 4 3 4 10 8 18 3 3 3 7 6 10 16 17 17 34 5 7* 8 7 13 14 27 5 2 15 3 20 5 25 33 19 52 6 ii 8 17 8 25 5 1 9 4 14 2 16 31 10 41 96 The President's Report Table BB shows the number of failures and conditions of students in the Senior College since the preceding report. If this is compared with the table of failiu'es and conditions pub- lished in the report of the Junior Colleges, it will be seen that there are very few failures and conditions in the Senior Colleges. This result may doubtless be attributed to three causes: 1. Natural selection. The poorest students drop out of college before reaching the Senior College. 2. The prevailingly elective character of the work of the Senior College students. This operates in two ways : (a) It is universally recognized that our required courses in Mathematics or Language are exceptionally difficult for certain students who may do good work in other lines. (6) In addition to this negative reason, there is also a positive reason of greater interest and success in elective work. 3. The student undoubtedly profits by the discipline of the earlier years and learns how to work more successfully. It would probably be impossible to determine which of these reasons is the most effective in reducing the number of failures and conditions. Respectfully submitted, James Hatden Tufts, Dean. THE JUNIOR COLLEGES To the President of the University : Sir: I submit herewith my report on the condition of the Junior Colleges for the ten years, 1892-1902. In the arrangement of this report of ten years of work, the more statistical portion precedes that which deals with the discussion of educational and historical questions pertaining to the Junior Colleges. It must be borne in mind that, except for occasional specific references to other branches of the University, the statements and tables apply simply to the Junior Colleges and their students. The Junior Colleges include the first two years' work of students who are candidates for one of the degrees A.B., Ph.B., and S.B. The work of the Junior Colleges is conducted under its own administrative officers. The organization of the work, while similar to that of the Senior Colleges, does not resemble the latter in every detail. The comrses offered in the Junior Colleges, while also open to students of the Senior Colleges, the Graduate Schools, and the School of Education, and to the students in Medicine, are conducted especially with a view to the needs of the Junior College students, who form in these courses an overwhelming majority. Fifteen out of the eighteen Majors of work are prescribed, and at least two-thirds of the work of the first two years must be selected fi-om these required courses. The accomplishment of at least twelve Majors of the required work and of a total of eighteen Majors is marked by the conferring of the title of Associate in Arts, Literature, or Science, as the case may be, and transference to the corresponding Senior College. Thus, while Junior students may sometimes take work offered in the Senior Colleges, and may sometimes remain in the Junior Colleges more than two years on account of failure for one reason or another to complete a sufficient number of the required courses, on the whole, the students of the Junior Colleges are a fairly homogeneous body, and the classes in which they recite are fairly homogeneous in composition. REGISTRATION IN THE JUNIOR COLLEGES The following table of registrations in the Junior Colleges for the first ten years of the University shows the number of students that have been dealt with, and their distribution by sex and degree sought. The year 1892-93 is omitted, as the records do not in every case show the degrees sought. It will be observed that the distribution of the students in reference to candidacy for particular degrees has undergone a marked change during the period covered by the statistics. In the earlier years the number of candidates for the A.B. and Ph.B. degrees was each more than twice as great as those registered in the S.B. coiurse. Yet even this does not completely express the preferences for particular lines of work in the University. Until recently, while the preparation reqixired for admission to each course was quantitatively the same, the freedom to postpone the last two years of preparatory Latin and to take them in the College made the terms of admission to the S.B. course more liberal and caused an artificial swelling of the number in that course, by the classification in it of students whose real preference lay, not in the direction of scientific, but along literary and historical, lines. The later application of the same liberal provision to the A.B. and Ph.B. courses, and the introduction of the new curricu- lum — Commerce and Administration — relieved the scientific course of this artificial inflation. Thus the very marked increase in the proportion of the whole number of students who are 97 98 The Peesident's Eepoet TABLE I Eegisteation in the Junior Colleges, by Sex and Degeee Sought 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 A.B.: Men 79 47 126 49 56 105 39 4 43 120 43 163 62 79 141 51 11 62 233 133 366 113 56 169 88 94 182 59 17 76 260 167 427 120 53 173 84 101 185 58 22 80 262 176 438 107 65 172 70 110 180 71 19 90 248 194 442 125 69 194 81 156 237 68 36 104 10 '" 10 284 261 545 111 63 174 96 178 274 111 30 141 36 11 47 354 282 636 101 69 170 81 231 312 125 47 172 71 8 79 378 355 733 75 Women 64 Total 139 Ph.B.: Men 90 276 Total 366 S.B.: Men 126 Women 52 Total 178 C. and A. : Men . 82 Women Total 167 107 274 7 89 Total: Men 373 399 Total 772 candidates for the degree of S.B. is all the more noteworthy. The percentage has risen steadily from 15.7 in 1893-94 to 23.1 in 1901-2. The ever-increasing tendency of incoming students to gravitate toward the Ph.B. course is even more marked. The percentage has risen from 38.3 in 1893-94 to 47.4 in 1901-2. On the other hand, not only has the relative number of students in the A.B. course declined, but the actual number registered in this course has even diminished, in spite of the greatly increased attendance of the Junior Colleges as a whole. In 1893-94 the percentage was 46, in 1901-2 it was 18. The relations in respect to sex, brought out by the above data, are also worthy of notice. It will be seen that, while in the first three years over 60 per cent, of the students in the Junior Colleges were men, in the tenth year the proportion had fallen to 50 per cent. When the details are scrutinized, we find that, while at the beginning the number of men was greatest in the A.B. course and least in the S.B. course, in the later years the order has been completely reversed. The number of men in the Ph.B. and A.B. courses has practically stood still, while that in the S.B. course has rapidly advanced, having (in fact) tripled itself in ten years. Simultaneously the new course leading to the degree of Ph.B. in Commerce and Administration has grown rapidly and without drawing any appreciable number of women. Thus during the tenth year the percentage of the men of the Junior Colleges in the four courses stood as follows: S.B., 33.8; Ph.B. (Lit.), 24.1; Ph.B. (C. and A.), 22.0; A.B., 20.1. Turning to the women, we find that, while in the year 1893-94 the preference of the women in the matter of degrees seemed the same as that of the men, the Ph.B. (Lit.) course came to the front in the next year, and has maintained a position of increasing predominance ever since. In the tenth year the percentages of the women choosing each of the four courses was as follows: Ph.B. (Lit.), 69.1; A.B., 16.0; S.B., 13.0; Ph.B. (C. and A.), 1.8. The beginning made during 1900 in the definite organization of a course preparatory to Medicine accounts largely for the rather sudden acceleration of the flow of students, both men and women, into the S.B. course during the last two years. The Junioe Colleges 99 While in the Summer Quarter most of the courses of instruction required of Junior College students are offered, the number of classified Junior College students in residence in Summer Quarters has been only about one-third of the average number in attendance during the other three Quarters. Their places are taken largely by teachers pursuing similar work, many of whom intend eventually to classify and take a degree. The extent to which students in residence during the Spring Quarter continue their work in the Summer is shown by the fact that of the 520 students in residence during the Spring of 1902, no less than 151 (or about 30 per cent.) were registered for the Summer Quarter. These students, together with 21 entering and 4 returning students, made up the total of 176 classified Juniors. Of these, 140 remained in residence throughout both Terms. EEGISTKATION BY DEPARTMENTS The distribution of the work of the students of the Junior Colleges among the various departments is afTected chiefly by the requirements of the several courses. Two-thirds of the work of the student must be selected from the required list and, if the rather mobile require- ments in History and Philosophy are anticipated in the Junior Colleges, no truly elective work representing the free choice of the student will be taken in the first two years. If the student has presented an irregular group of admission credits, his electives may be displaced by required studies so as to raise the minimum of work required during the first two years to five-sixths of the whole. Thus the table showing the courses actually taken by the students of the Junior Colleges represents the composite resultant of the operation of individual requirements super- imposed on A.B., Ph.B., or S.B. degree requirements, with a minimum of individual preference. These influences are discussed in greater detail below. The following table shows the requirements for the various degrees as they existed dtiring the year 1901-2. The changes, which during the earlier years were numerous, are given in a table in Dean Capps's report for 1897-98 (p. 90). TABLE II Junior College Requirements (in MAJOsa) foe Various Degrees, 1901-2 Pol. Ec. Pol. Sci. Hist. See. Greek Latiu Mod. Lang.i Eaglish Math. Sciences Elective A.B 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 Ph.B 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 S.B 3 3 3 62 3 Ph.B. (c.&A.) 2 i 3 i 3 3 2 2 1 The college requirements, as applied to each individual, are affected by the particular sub- jects offered for admission. There are certain commonly occurring irregularities in the admission groups offered which modify the college curricula of large groups of students. Thus many offer but two years of Latin for admission, and so the College work of these individuals is altered by the inclusion of four (or, as in the case of the S.B. student, of three) more Majors of Latin. Again, the three years of Modern Languages expected in the preparation of S.B. and Ph.B. students are often represented by one or two years only. Thus, two or four Majors of French or German are added to the Junior College requirements. Then many fail to offer Solid Geometry or 'In S.B. and Ph.B. courses, if one modern language only is offered for admission, three Majors of the other are lequired in college. 2 Specified as Chemistry, Botany, or Zoology, Geology, two Majors each, excepting so far as one unit of any of them has been offered for admission, 100 The President's Repokt TABLE III Eegistkations by Departments (in Pek Cent.) 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 189S-98 1896-97 M. w. T. M. W. T. M. w. T. M. W. T. M. w. T. I A. 1.0 ■3.0 0.2 12.0 o.'s 1.0 'glo 9.0 9.0 13.0 19-0 i6!6 's.b 0.3 4.0 0.5 0.1 1.0 '6^2 11.0 ■6'2 i.b ■g'.o 13.0 8.0 13.0 22.0 0.4 9.0 '5.6 0.2 5.0 1.0 1.0 '2!6 0.2 11.0 o'.s ols 1.0 ■g'.o 11.0 9.0 13.0 20.0 0.2 10.0 'Y.b 0.25 4.0 0.7 0.5 2.0 0.1 3.0 4.0 13.0 '6'.3 'oi? 0.2 ■4:6 11.0 7.0 8.0 IS.O 0.2 13.0 0.2 9.0 3.0 2.0 0.6 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 12.0 . . 2.0 '6'. 2 'h'o 11.0 10.0 in.o 19.0 0.2 15.0 's'o 0.6 4.0 1.0 i'.b 1.0 0.1 3.0 3.0 13.0 i^o 'o.h 0.2 '5!6 11.0 8.0 9.0 19.0 0.2 14.0 0.1 6.0 2.0 3.0 O.S 0.1 0.8 3.0 's'o 3.0 13.0 '2:6 0.2 0.2 0.1 'b'.b 10.0 7.0 80 14.0 0.2 10.0 0.4 8.0 5.0 3.0 1.0 0.7 1.0 0.2 'i'.b 3.0 'i'.b 1.0 16.0 0.2 3.0 '0.3 'b'.b 15.0 9.0 8.0 18.0 '&'.b 0.4 3.0 1.0 3.0 1.0 0.6 0.5 'i'.b 3.0 'i'.'a 2.0 15.0 0.1 2.0 0.1 0.1 0.2 'b'.b 12.0 8.0 8.0 16.0 0.1 9.0 0.4 6.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 0.6 0.8 0.1 'i'6 4.0 0.2 4.0 3.0 13.0 '2'2 0.1 0.3 0.2 'b'.b 10.0 8.0 8.0 19.0 0.2 10.0 0.4 3.0 4.0 1.0 1.0 0.2 0.9 0.3 'i'6 5.0 'i!6 1.0 11.0 0.3 3.0 '6.'2 's'.b 15.0 9.0 8.0 25.0 0.2 7.5 0.4 1.0 0.4 3.0 2.0 0.1 0.9 i'.b 4.0 0.1 3.0 2.0 12.0 0.1 3.0 0.1 0.3 0.1 'i'.b 12.0 9.0 8.0 21.0 0,2 9.0 0.4 2.5 2.0 3.0 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 'i'6 4.0 0.1 3.0 2.0 7.0 0.1 4.0 'b'.i 7.0 12.0 10.0 7.0 19.0 3.0 9.0 0.2 3.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 0.6 1.0 'i'.b 3.0 0.2 0.4 1.0 10.0 0.4 3.0 'b'.i 6.0 16.0 7.0 9.0 21.0 4.0 9.0 '2.6 1.0 2.0 0.6 0.2 2.0 0.2 '2^6 4.0 IB. II. III. IV. Pedagosy Political Economy. . . Political Science 0.1 3.0 2.0 8.0 V. VI. Archfeology 0.2 4.0 VII. VIII. Comp. Religion IX. X. XI Biblical Greek Sanskrit 'b'.i 6.0 XII. 13.0 XIII 9.0 XIV. 7.0 XV 19.0 XVI. XVII Literature in English 4.0 9.0 XVIII. XIX. Astronomy 0.2 3.0 XX. 3.0 XXI. 2.0 XXII. 1.0 XXIII. 0.4 XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII. Physiolof^y Neurology Paleontology Botany 1.0 0.1 'i'.b 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 lUO 100 100 100 M. W. 1898-99 W. T. 1899-1900 M. T. 1900-1901 M. W. T. 1901-1902 M. W. T. I A. IB. II. III. IV. V. VL VII. VIII. IX. X. XI. XII. XIII. XIV. XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. ■XXV. XXVI. xxvn. Philosophy Pedagogy Political Economy. . . Political Science History ArchsBology Sociology Comp. Religion Semitics Biblical Greek Sanskrit . . Greek Latin Romance German English Literature in English Mathematics Astronomy Physics Chemistry Geology Zoology Anatomy Physiology Neurology Paleontology Botany 4.0 0.2 2.0 3.0 8.0 0.1 3.0 7.0 13.0 10.0 8.0 15.0 0.8 9.0 0.4 4.0 5.0 3.0 1.0 0.3 1.0 0.1 'i!6 2.0 0.2 0.2 1.0 11.0 0.2 3.0 'i!6 7.0 14.0 10.0 9.0 20.0 1.8 9.0 0.3 1.0 2.0 4.0 1.0 'i!6 0.1 0.1 1.0 3.0 0.2 1.0 2.0 11.0 0.1 3.0 'i'.b 7 13.0 10 9.0 17.0 1.0 9.0 0.3 3.0 4.0 3.0 1.0 0.2 1.0 1 i'.b 3.0 2.0 8.0 0.1 2.0 0.1 0.3 0.1 '7^6 14.0 11.0 7.0 17.0 1.0 11.0 0.2 4.0 4.0 3.0 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.1 'i'6 2.0 0.4 1.0 0.4 9.0 0.1 2.0 0.1 0.2 0.4 '5.6 16.0 13.0 6.0 21.0 1.0 11.0 's.b 2.0 3.0 1.0 'i'.6 2.0 0.2 2.0 1.0 8.0 0.1 2.0 0.1 0.2 0.1 "6:3 15.0 13.0 7.0 19.0 1.0 11.0 '3'6 3.0 3.0 1.0 'i'6 2.0 '4.0 2.0 10.0 '2^6 5.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 16.0 0.1 12.0 0.3 2.0 5.0 4.0 1.0 0.5 4.0 0.1 i .'6 2.5 0.2 1.0 ii'6 0.1 3.0 7.0 14.0 11.0 9.0 20.0 0.1 12.0 0.1 2.0 1.0 3.0 1.0 'i.'6 1.0 2.0 0.1 3.0 1.0 10.0 0.1 3.0 5.0 12.0 12.0 8.0 18.0 0.1 12.0 0.2 2.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 0.4 3.0 0.1 'i'6 4.0 0.4 5.0 3.0 9.0 '4^6 4.0 6.0 9.0 8.0 19.0 0.3 10.0 0.2 3.0 6.0 3.0 1.0 1.0 3.0 0.1 'i'6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3.0 0.3 0.3 0.4 10.0 '2.'6 3.0 16.0 10.0 11.0 21.0 1.0 11.0 '2^6 2.0 2.0 1.0 '2.'6 2.0 100 4.0 0.2 3.0 2.0 11.0 '3.6 3.0 11.0 9.0 9.0 20.0 0.5 11.0 0.1 2.0 4.0 3.0 1.0 0.2 2.0 3.0 "8. '6 3.0 10.0 0.1 2.0 '6.'4 '6 .'2 9.0 7.0 7.0 3.0 19.0 0.2 n.o 0.1 2.0 6.0 4.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.3 1.0 10.0 0.1 4.0 '2.'6 b'.i 3.0 15.0 9.0 11.0 22.0 1.0 11.0 0.1 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.2 0.1 1.0 2.0 0.1 4.0 2.0 10.0 0.1 3.0 i.o o.'i 3.0 11.0 8.0 10.0 20.0 0.6 11.0 0.1 3.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 100 100 The Junior Colleges 101 Physics, and thus one Major of Mathematics in the former case, and two Majors of Physics in the latter, appear among the college coiu'ses. The com-ses actually taken in the Junior Colleges may now be given. In the accompanying table there is shown the percentage by Departments of the total number of Majors of work done in all the twenty-seven Departments by Junior students. The ten years of the University are given complete, and in the three divisions of the columns for each year are given the percentages for men, for women, and for both sexes together. Scrutiny of the table shows that the registrations in Languages, and particularly Modern Languages, are very numerous. This is accounted for by the fact that (1) the college require- ments in Language, including English, are large, varying from six to eleven Majors according to the course; (2) these requirements are increased by the amounts, often considerable, by which the Language work offered for admission has fallen short of that recommended; (3) the school training seems to foster the habits of mind employed in Language study more successfully than those needed in Mathematics and Science; (4) the bent of the very numerous women students is toward Language work. Again, the registrations in Philosophy and Political Economy are larger than might be expected in view of the impediments detailed above, and of the additional fact that, by rule of the Departments concerned, Psychology cannot be taken before the fifth Quarter and Political Economy, except in the case of students in the College of Commerce and Administration, not before the fourth Quarter. History, although not a Junior College require- ment in two of the four courses, is usually taken early in the curriculum by all students. The preference for various departments of work, in its relation to sex, is illustrated by arranging the departments in the order of preference for each sex separately. The result furnishes some indication of the trend of taste in the two sexes, so far as the very limited opportunity for exercising choice in the Junior Colleges can affect figures pertaining mainly to required curricula which are the same for men and women. The order for the year 1901-2 is given as a sample : TABLE rv Depaetments Aeeanged rN Oedee of the Peopoetion of Woek Done in Them by Junioe College Students Men Per Cent. Women Per Cent. English 19 H 10 9 8 7 7 6 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 English 22 Mathematics 15 History German 11 11 Political Economy Latin History. 10 Romance 9 Romance 4 Chemistry Greek 3 Geology Physics 3 Philosophy 2 Political Science Chemistry 2 Greek Botany Philosophy Political Science Literature in English. . Geolosfv 2 Socioloev 1 Physics 1 Physiology Zoology Anatomy 1 1 1 Botany Political Economy 0.3 Semitics 0.2 Sanskrit 0.1 Literature in English Arohseology Archaeology 0.1 0.1 Astronomy Anatomv . ... 0.1 102 The Peesident's Kepoet MATRICULATION The Quarter System enables students to matriculate and begin work in the University with equal advantage on any one of four occasions during the year. Natui-ally the majority of the new students of each year's class enter on the first of October, yet the numbers entering on the other three dates is very considerable. The following table shows the numbers of our students matriculated in the Junior Colleges during each of the four Quarters of the last sis years. The sexes are shown separately. A summary for the first five years of the University occupies the first column. It will be noted, therefore, that the year 1896-97 appears separately and is included also in the summary: TABLE V Matriculations bt Quaetees Accoeding to Sex and Degeee Sought 1892-97 1895-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 Quarters Summary M. w. T. M. W. T. M. W. T. M. W. T. M. W. T. M. w. T. Arts 7 2 9 8 2 10 5 2 7 20 12 32 4 2 6 5 3 8 6 4 10 r 27 17 44 38 19 57 46 27 73 28 25 53 33 28 61 21 27 48 223 112 335J Winter.... 7 1 8 8 5 13 7 7 14 6 6 4 4 8 2 2 4 1 Spring.. ,. Total.... 4 46 3 23 7 ~69 1 ^52 26 1 78 4 77 1 5 47124 2 15 27 2 67 2 44 1 3 lo 31 33 2 230 114 344 64 Literature 1 1 2 Summer . . 2 2 2 8 10 3 18 21 13 14 27 4 7 11 3 10 13 r Autumn .. 13 22 35 14 34 48 40 75115 30 82 112 28 102 130 35 107 142 154 179 ,3.33-^ Winter . . . 4 7 11 3 9 12 7 17 24 4 8 12 9 9 1 11 12 1 Spring 3 4 7 5 6 11 4 6 10 1 3 4 i 6 7 2 4 6 155 180 335 Total.... 20 35 55 24 57 81 54 116 170 48 107 155 33 124 157 41 132 173 Science 6 6 Summer . . 4 1 5 8 1 9 11 3 14 14 14 7 2 9 3 3 6 r Autumn .. 15 2 17 24 6 30 24 19 43 45 6 51 49 24 73 37 15 52 108 27 135J Winter.... 3 2 5 6 3 9 1 1 2 10 10 6 1 7 8 1 9 1 Spring.. ., Total.... 2 ~24 5 2 29 4 42 1 11 5 "53 1 37 2 25 3 62 4 73 6 4 79 3 65 1 "28 4 "93 3 51 1 lo 4 114 27 141 71 Commerce and Summer . . 1 1 3 3 Administrat'n j Autumn .. Winter.... 8 8 20 4 3 23 4 31 1 1 1 32 2 43 2 4 47 2 1 Spring.. .. ^^ -^ 177 188 9 365 1 ~25 186 3 143 1 28 329 1 36 178 ~~2 190 1 38 368 1 li 169 4 189 1 50 Total.... ~90 ~63 153 118 ~94 212 Total 499 321 820 358 The states, territories, and foreign countries from which these students have come is given in the next table. It will be seen that every state, with the exception of North Dakota, Delaware, Idaho, Nevada, North Carolina, and Khode Island, has been represented. At the same time the Junior College students are drawn to a much greater extent from the city of Chicago and surrounding territory than is the case in the Graduate Schools. The percentage of the whole number of students coming from Chicago during the ten successive years has been: 43.3, 47.1, 49.7, 53.9, 57.3, 60.1, 58.2, 53.8, 51.4, 54.9. The corresponding numbers for Illinois, including Chicago, have been: 71.7, 70.4, 70.8, 73.1, 75.3, 73.6, 75.0, 69.0, 69.8. During the year 1901-2 there came from Iowa 6.9 per cent.; from Indiana, 3.9 per cent.; from Wisconsin, 2.8 per cent.; from Ohio, 2.2 per cent.; from Missouri, 2.1 per cent.; from New York and Tennessee, about 1 per cent, each. The Junior Colleges 103 TABLE VI Geogeaphical Disteibution by Annual Eeoisteations Alabama Arizona Arkansas California Colorado Connecticut . . . Florida Georgia Illinois Chicago Indiana Iowa Kansas Kentucky Louisiana Maine Massachusetts . . Maryland Michigan Minnesota Mississippi Missouri Montana Nebraska New Hampshire New Jersey New Mexico New York Ohio Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania . . . South Carolina. South Dakota . . Tennessee Texas Utah Vermont Virginia Washington West Virginia . . Wisconsin Wyoming Manitoba New Brunswick Nova Scotia .... Ontario Quebec Great Britain . . Italy Germany Hawaii Japan Russia Samoa Sweden Total 1892-93 51 78 4 3 i 3 1893-94 180 2 1 1 64 129 6 10 5 3 i 1 3 1 2 3 1 10 274 1894-95 77 182 17 19 5 1 366 1895-96 1 2 1 i 81 230 15 17 3 2 6 1 4 '4 1 9 10 1896-97 79 251 13 19 5 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 1 4 16 427 438 1897-98 60 267 17 17 6 2 2 1 i 3 1 '5 1 5 1 5 11 1 1 25 1898-99 444 2 1 1 1 i 92 317 23 13 8 6 1 2 4 7 1 10 1 1 2 1 22 545 1899-00 4 2 3 1 1 97 342 29 26 12 7 i 7 2 1 14 1 6 'i 1 9 16 1 4 2i 638 1900-01 2 129 377 28 41 13 12 '2 5 '7 11 1 7 23 6 1 1 3 6 1 1 1 4 25 733 1901-02 2 3 5 1 '2 115 424 30 53 12 6 2 11 2 16 3 3 7 17 i 10 1 1 7 3 1 3 22 2 772 104 The President's Repoet STATISTICS OF ADMISSION The students of the Junior Colleges are drawn from five distinct sources, each of which bears a different relation to the University. These are (1) the Morgan Park Academy, an insti- tution which is an integral part of the University; (2) the affiliated schools, which are closely allied, although independent institutions; (3) the co-operating schools, which are chiefly public high schools, visited periodically by representatives of the University; (4) other secondary schools, whose pupils are admitted chiefly by examination; (5) institutions of college rank whose pupils are admitted with advanced standing. The following table shows the percentage of the whole number admitted which came from each of these sources. As in the table of matriculations, the first five years are summarized and the last six are given separately. The apparent variations in the proportion admitted with advanced standing is due in large part to changes in the mode of classifying those who are admitted in this way. All who receive credit for eighteen Majors or more are now classified as Senior College students, even when the specific subjects offered do not coincide with the requirements of the University of Chicago. TABLE YII Peecentage of Students Admitted feom Each of the Five Soueces 1892-97 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 Morgan Park 7.6 14.1 26.1 18.5 33.7 5.6 18.8 29.4 14.0 32.2 9.9 18.6 27.3 15.1 29.1 5.5 12.3 44.5 10.0 27.7 5.7 14.8 46.8 14.0 18.7 7.3 13.1 47.4 18.8 13.4 2 6 Afliliated schools 12 1 52 7 Other secondary schools With advanced standing 17.4 15.2 The numbers of students entering the four courses offered by the Junior Colleges, as related to the class of institutions in which the previous training has been obtained, is highly significant. In the following table the students coming to the University during the last three years from a given class of institutions have been divided so as to show the per cent, entering upon each of the four curricula: TABLE VIII Peecentage of Students Admitted to Each College, Classified by Peeviods Schools (1899-1902) A.B. Ph.B. S.B. C.&A. (Ph.B.) 18.5 16.6 22.7 12.8 21.0 11.3 26.3 12.8 26.5 6.7 Total Morgan Park Academy . Affiliated schools Co-operating schools . . . Other secondary schools With advanced standing 33.4 25.5 17.7 14.5 23.5 31.5 39.0 50.0 46.4 43.3 100 100 100 100 100 TABLE IX Peopoetions of the Students in Junior Colleges, 1892-1902, Who (1) Weeb Conditioned, and (2) Failed; Estimated Accokding to Sex 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. Conditions (1) .. j Failuses (2) 1 Men Women Men Women 11.5 4.5 14.9 4.5 7.7 2.1 11.5 2.1 3.6 2.4 10.8 7.1 4.3 1.3 6.5 1.3 12.6 4.7 5.6 4.7 8.0 3.6 8.0 2.4 3.1 4.7 12.9 5.9 4.7 5.1 13.8 4.7 8.4 3.8 12.5 2.1 6.2 3.2 4.1 8.7 2.7 15.6 7.4 4.4 7.0 16.0 4.8 8.3 3.2 11.5 1.7 11.5 7.7 2.5 5.2 2.5 13.4 4.5 to.o 1.5 12.0 6.2 3.4 0.7 13.1 1.1 6.0 2.1 The Junior Colleges 105 TABLE IX- -Continued 1897-98 1898-99 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 S. A. W. Sp. S. 5.8 1.1 1.5 A. 10.0 3.2 7.4 1.6 W. 14.0 6.0 7.2 2.5 Sp. 10.0 7.3 3.3 3.3 S. 7.8 1.4 4.5 A. 13.5 7.4 7.3 3.7 W. 7.7 8.0 5.0 1.5 Sp. 8.8 5.1 3.3 5.1 S. 2.4 2.8 4.9 2.8 A. 10.8 7.6 7.6 3.4 W. Sp. S. 14.4 6.3 4.4 1.0 A. 16.2 12.3 13.0 9.4 W. 14.7 9.2 11.6 7.1 Sp. 7.8 15.6 14.2 6.9 8.2 0.6 9.4 4.1 3.5 2.9 10.6 4.6 4.6 1.7 11.3 6.6 12.7 6.3 11.7 7.4 7.8 4.5 11.8 Conditions (1) Women Men 8.6 8.7 Failuees (2). .. Women 4.5 COLLEGE FAILURES AND CONDITIONS The table shows the proportion of the students in the Junior Colleges who were conditioned or failed in any study. The sexes are considered separately, as are also the Quarters of each of the ten years. Failures may be due to five causes: (1) insufficient preparation; (2) insufficient ability; (3) lack of diligence, on account of athletic and social distractions; (4) necessity of earn- ing a livelihood while in college; (5) introduction to unfamiliar methods of study. Often a com- bination of two or more of these causes may be accountable for lack of success. The first Quarter of residence is likely to show the results of some of these influences most prominently, and hence, as the Autumn Quarter is the first Quarter for a majority of Junior students, it is in this Quarter that the greatest percentage of failures or conditions appears. After the first Quarter the student either adapts himself more perfectly to the novel conditions or withdraws. WITHDRAWALS During the last three years a systematic effort has been made to learn the intentions of all students withdrawing from the Junior Colleges. The greater number of withdrawals are accounted for by graduation into the Senior Colleges. Some of the chief reasons given are shown in the following table. The numbers in each column apply to students who were mem- bers of the Junior Colleges during the preceding Quarter and failed to return. Thus in the Spring of 1900, sixty-seven graduated into the Senior Colleges, and sixty-nine went out of resi- dence for reasons enumerated, and therefore did not reappear in this list for the Summer Quarter of the same year; TABLE X Withdrawals 1899-1900 19QO-1901 1901 -1902 S. A. W Sp. s. A. w. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. 1. Graduation into Senior Col . 62 9 41 26 67 10 47 28 79 10 36 39 2 Vacation 29 12 6 3 5 3 4 9 5 4 1 10 2 2 16 13 7 1 10 10 3 1 18 8 4 22 2 11 1 33 23 13 2 7 6 4 2 23 2 7 10 3. To teach. 4 6 5. Profession 2 6. Lack of funds 10 2 7 10 5 4 4 4 8 10 4 1 7. Another institut'n 10 i 8 6 20 6 9 5 35 17 23 6 8. Poor health 6 8 11 10 6 6 17 12 8 15 14 8 9. Miscellaneous 1 5 1 1 1 1 4 3 3 1 10. No reasons given . 6 5 6 4 2 7 2 4 It wiU be seen that the number on vacation is greatest in summer, but is considerable also in winter and spring. Those withdrawing to teach usually intend to return later. Those entering other institutions have been chiefly men going to technical, medical, and law schools. 106 The President's Keport and women going to women's colleges. Among the miscellaneous reasons were "loss of a parent" (4); "home duties" (4); "travel" (3); "death" (1); "leaving city" (5); "family reasons" (2); "imforeseen circumstances" (2). RELATIONS OF JUNIOR AND SENIOR COLLEGES The relation of the Junior College to the Senior has already received incidental mention. A certain number of students remain classified as Juniors even after they have earned more than eighteen Majors of credit. This occurs (1) when entrance conditions remain unfulfilled; (2) when the requisite minimum of twelve Majors of required Junior College work has not yet been reached; and (3) when a student has entered with advanced standing of such a nature that the required courses remaining to be taken are so nimierous as to make impossible graduation when eighteen Majors have been received. The percentage of Junior College students who were thus classified as Juniors for a longer period than two years was as follows: 1894-95- 1895-96 - 1896-97 1897-98 - 1898-99 1899-00 - 1900-01 1901-02 - Jvmiors who have the necessary preparation may take courses offered in the Senior Col- leges. Thus the electives are often taken in work of this kind, and students who have overrun the eighteen Majors are also frequently to be found in Senior College courses. The registra- tion of Junior students in Senior courses is given along with other data in the next table. The TABLE XI 7.5 per cent 12.6 (t 13.9 (( 6.3 a 2.1 u 3.6 (t 4.9 (( 7.1 ti Philosophy .... Education Political Econ'y Political Science History Archfeology. Sociology . . . Greek Latin Romance . . . German .... English Lit. (in Eng.) Mathematics Astronomy . Physics Chemistry . . Geology Zoology Anatomy . . . Physiology.. Neurology . . Botany Public Speaking OES IN 3ENI0K COUESES 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 6 9 16 18 12 3 12 6 15 4 3 14 13 18 40 24 9 21 66 48 107 123 158 189 - 152 3 1 45 5 38 75 116 9 15 15 12 2 20 20 9 32 18 22 38 31 39 39 30 24 30 39 41 59 93 84 121 108 44 20 35 30 40 19 12 1 13 4 3 1 4 7 11 6 9 6 9 23 15 22 35 46 19 46 59 58 65 4 5 15 28 8 3 16 15 12 6 4 7 9 2 2 1 1 8 7 8 io 11 9 10 17 SeNIOES in JnNIOE COUESES Philosophy Education . Political Econ'y Political Sci'nce History Archagology. . . . Sociology Greek Latin Romance German English Lit. (in Eng.) . . . Mathematics . . . Astronomy Physics Chemistry Geology Zoology Anatomy Physiology Neurology Botany Public Speak'g. 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 156 197 214 1 190 40 61 75 75 49 30 5 46 58 42 90 6 1 29 54 42 38 25 48 29 32 86 48 93 67 76 110 115 120 49 67 93 104 55 52 19 66 78 25 19 38 54 8 24 36 36 29 50 43 17 29 70 29 20 22 30 12 22 23 23 '4 '9 33 26 ii 30 io is 34 48 38 89 1901-02 226 77 84 22 51 38 84 106 54 4 73 79 32 30 25 33 63 The Junior Colleges 107 very large registration in some Departments seems to indicate that more Junior College courses might usefully be ofltered in those Departments. The total number of registrations of Juniors in Senior College courses was small compared to those in Jvmior coiu'ses: in 1897-98, 465; in 1898-99, 494; in 1899-1900, 602; in 1900-1901, 847; in 1901-2, 800. These were respectively 17, 14.4, 15.7, 19, and 17.6 per cent, of the total registrations. Many Senior College students entering with advanced standing have Jimior College requirements still to fulfil. Many others take Junior College studies as electives. For this reason Junior College courses frequently contain a fair proportion of Senior College students. The accompanying table gives the number of registrations by Senior College students in Junior College courses. FOURTH COURSES The regulations lay upon the Dean the duty of deciding, after investigation of the previous record and the circumstances of the application, whether a student may be permitted to carry more than three Majors of work in one Quarter. The proportion of students applying for this privilege is not great, and many of the applications are refused. The table shows the percentage of Junior College students doing extra work. The data for men and women are treated sepa- rately and the figures for all Quarters of the ten years are given. TABLE xn Peopoetions of the Students in Junioe Colleges 1892-1902 who Took Fourth Coueses Estimated Accoeding to Sex 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 S. A. W. Sp. S. A. w. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. w. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. Men 11.5 11.5 15.9 7.7 2.1 9.6 16.6 5.1 4.1 8.4 10.6 39.4 32.9 4.7 7.4 7.6 4.2 13.8 7.6 11.0 18.3 8.2 2.1 5.6 3.7 15.4 16.0 16.6 15.8 10.4 10.0 2.8 2.2 11.4 9.4 7 1 COUESES Women 4.5 1897-98 1898-99 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. S. A. W. Sp. 7.8 12.9 6.6 4.1 17.1 9.0 2.6 5.1 4.6 8.9 2.9 5.9 15.0 8.0 5.6 5.3 5.6 11.7 6.9 11.6 10.5 7.5 0.4 2.0 2.3 7.1 2.8 1.4 3.5 1.9 3.9 2.0 8.9 7.3 3.6 1.9 5.3 1.7 ' 4 COUESES Women 1.5 THE CURRICULA OF THE JUNIOR COLLEGE The history of the Junior College curriculum was so completely set forth by Dean Capps in his report for the year 1897-98 that it remains only to summarize the chief problems which have arisen, and to describe the solutions, complete or partial, which have been worked out. A few minor changes made since July 1, 1898, will also be included. At the outset in 1892 the University of Chicago adopted the plan of certain eastern univer- sities and colleges in announcing that all students who sought admission must pass entrance examinations. It is instructive to trace the gradual modification of this policy, as the institution has sought, on the one hand, to bring itself into closer relations with the secondary schools of the middle West, and, on the other, to meet the demands of professional training. It may be profitable to discuss this process of adjustment under the following divisions: 1. The adjustment of entrance requirements. 2. The adjustment of the Junior College curriculum to the changes in entrance requirements. 3. The modification of the Junior College curriculum to meet the demands of different curricula and of professional schools. 108 The President's Keport ADMISSION requirements In 1892 the University indicated the following subjects as acceptable for admission, viz.: Greek. Latin. Greek and Roman History. Mathematics. English. French (first and second year). German (first and second year). Physics. Chemistry. These subjects were appraised in terms of a "unit," which was described as the work accomplished in a secondary school in a subject pursued for thirty-six weeks of daily recita- tions. Inasmuch as the amount of work accomplished in a four-years' high-school course was deemed equivalent to thirteen such units, this nimiber was fixed upon as the requirement for admission. An examination of the high-school system of the middle West soon made it plain that a large number of subjects were being taught which were not recognized by the University. The institution therefore enlarged the list of entrance subjects by adding in 1893 the following: Biology. Physiography. Geology. Astronomy. Solid Geometry. Elementary United States History (for which at first no credit was given). Mediaeval and Modern History. Third-year French. Third-year German. This enlargement of the entrance list brought the University into much closer relation with the secondary schools, and no further change was made until 1896, when Elementary United States History, which henceforth was given credit value. Advanced United States History, Ele- mentary and Advanced English History, and Civics were added. These entrance units include practically everything offered in the high schools of the West, with the exception of the two subjects of Drawing and Music. The drawing of the public schools is in many cases subdivided into mechanical and free-hand drawing. There was considerable complaint from the high schools of Chicago that many hours devoted to these subjects were not recognized by the University of Chicago. A proposal to include at least Mechanical Drawing in the list was considered for several Quarters by committees and dis- cussed by the Junior College Faculty, with the final result in 1901 of making Mechanical Drawing an elective admission subject with a maximum credit of one unit. Thus in the course of ten years the number of admisssion subjects has increased from eleven to twenty- seven. It would be a serious mistake, however, to infer from this enlargement of the admission group that the subjects added after the first year are offered to the same extent as those originally announced. The margin however, does afford relief to large numbers of students whose preparation varies by one, two, or three imits from that recommended by the University. The failure to recognize the need of a more liberal policy as regards the number of admission units would have isolated the University from the secondary schools. The absence in the West of large preparatory schools whose energies are directed to fitting students for the requirements The Junior Colleges 109 of certain colleges and universities makes it absolutely essential that western institutions of higher education should adapt themselves to the public secondary schools. Another step in this attempt to articulate the secondary schools with the Jimior College was taken in November, 1897, when the value of the unit was modified, and the number of units required for admission was raised from thirteen to fifteen. This change was made in order that a more just relative valuation might be placed upon the different admission subjects, as well as upon the work of a school as a whole. A most serious injustice in the old system was that which assigned to Mathematics, including Solid Geometry, only two units, although the best schools devote two and a half to three years of preparation in this subject; while assigning to English only one unit for four years of work, however unsystematic, was obviously absiud. This change in unit value made it possible to give two and a half units to Mathematics and two to English, while some of the elective subjects could be appraised more fairly at a half unit. The new unit value was defined as the equivalent of one hvmdred and fifty hours of prepared work, two hours of laboratory work being considered equal to one hour of prepared work. With the improvement of instruction in some of the preparatory subjects, it is conceivable that still further modifications of the unit may become desirable. One advantage which would accrue from reducing the value of the unit and increasing the number of units demanded would be the possibility thus afforded of making nicer discriminations. It would enable the University to assign one value to a subject studied in the first year of the high school, and a greater value to the same subject when pursued, for example, in the last year. A third change which is significant may be noted briefly. It is the change from an exami- nation to a modified certificate system for admission purposes. Soon after the opening in 1892 it became evident that a strict examination policy in a region where the certificate system had been imiversally adopted would for a long time at least isolate the University and seriously retard its growth in numbers and influence. After ftill discussion as to the wisdom of maintain- ing the examination system or of adopting the certificate plan of the state imiversities, a com- promise method was finally chosen. Instead of accepting a certificate from a high school as a whole, it was decided to require certificates from individual teachers in the schools. It was thought that this would fix responsibility definitely, and would be a stimulus to teachers and a safeguard to the University. There are no data for determining the comparative results of the two systems. The significant fact is that the University has practically conformed to the system which prevails in the middle West. COLLEGE EEQUIEEMENTS The widening of choice in entrance subjects had an inevitable influence upon the cur- ricula of the Junior Colleges. In both theory and practice the Junior College curriculum in the University belongs rather to a six-year period of preparation than to a four-years' college course. The Junior College is commonly described as a " clearing-house " between the secondary school, on the one hand, and the higher work of the Senior College and Graduate Schools, on the other. The clearing-house system is based upon (1) the assumed equivalence of preparatory and college subjects; (2) the necessity of adjustment to the enlarged curricula of the secondary schools; (3) the necessity of securing a minimum common to all curricula, and of shaping the student's course for one of the three degrees granted by the University. In theory the system is ingenious and natural. In practice it comes nearer to giving complete satisfaction than such machinery often does. The assumed equivalence of preparatory and college subjects is one of the weak points of the system. This weakness displays itself conspicuously in subjects begun in high school and continued in college. Where later work is dependent upon earlier courses the inadequacy of preparation makes itself felt. In English, French, and German, 110 The President's Eepoet to some extent in Physics and Chemistry, the chief difficulties appear. It is not unusual for students who have received credit for a year or two of French or German to be quite unable to maintain successfully the college course which theoretically continues from the point where they have left off. On the other hand, in the case of Latin, Greek, and Mathematics there is comparatively little difficulty. This seems to show that where methods of instruction have been worked out carefully, conventionalized, and adopted almost universally, the clearing-house system is successful, but in those subjects which have not yet been organized effectively, and in the sciences to which modern laboratory methods are essential, the equivalence between preparatory and college work is far from being a fact. The difiference in the maturity of the student at various stages is another factor which affects certain pursuits more than others. Its influence on language-study is, for example, very different from its effect on science. In order to make the clearing-house system theoretically complete, the University might offer beginning coiu:ses in all subjects which it requires of candidates for its degrees. As a matter of fact, however, the number of beginning subjects which students for various reasons are unlikely to offer on admission is comparatively small. The accumulation of entrance condi- tions in these subjects has pointed out from time to time the need of adding certain elementary courses. This has been done, until now the University offers beginning courses (including those given from the outset) in Greek, French, German, Physics, Chemistry, Solid Geometry, and History. The proposal to add beginning courses in Latin has so far been defeated, although it is not illogical to urge this fui-ther extension of the plan. When the Secondary School of the University is fully organized, it may conceivably provide special college classes in beginning subjects. This would be a consistent carrying out of the theory that the Junior College is a part of the preparation course, rather than the beginning of higher work. The public opinion which distinguishes so sharply between high school and college would for a long time, however, make it difficult to assert formally this relationship between the secondary school and the first two years of the old-fashioned college course. It is appropriate in this place to point out some of the effects of the clearing-house which at the outset were not distinctly foreseen. When the Junior College ciurriculum was organized and differentiated for the three degrees offered by the University, specific requirements were made which have left for election a maximum of three Majors in three of the coxirses and of one Major in the course in Commerce and Administration. Theoretically, these three Majors in the three com-ses of A.B., Ph.B. in Literature, and S.B.. were provided to permit from the beginning of the course continuity of work in one Department or group of Departments. In practice, how- ever, it has become evident that the election is actually made to a very large degree, not in college, but in the high school. Certain entrance subjects are demanded absolutely for admis- sion. If they are not offered, they become entrance conditions. Other subjects are only recom- mended for admission, but they become requirements for graduation in case other entrance subjects have been substituted for them. Thus electives are seriously encroached upon by the college requirements accruing from a preparation which varies from the type recommended by the University. This variation is marked, and results in a serious reduction of electives. As an illustration of this may be cited the fact that, of 111 A.B. students in residence in the Winter Quarter, 1901, 72 had on entrance the full number of three electives, 19 had two electives, 17 had one, and 3 had no margin of choice. Of 209 candidates for the degree of Ph.B. in Literature, 85 had three electives, 47 had two, 39 had one, and 38 were without any flexibility in their curricula. Of 59 Ph.B. students in the Commerce and Administration course, 34 had the one elective normally provided, while 25 had none. Out of 123 candidates for the B.S. degree, 31 had three electives, 9 had two, 24 had one, and 59 were without choice. These facts, which may be regarded as fairly representative of conditions during the past five years, make it evident that The Junior Colleges 111 the candidates for the A.B. degree who have passed through the more conventional preparatory course come nearest to the theoretical demands of the University and retain the electives originally assigned. The candidates for the Ph.B. are in worse case, and are unable to preserve the con- tinuity of special work for which the electives were provided. The students in the scientific course are decidedly at a disadvantage, and obviously need the various measiures of relief which have been devised from year to year to meet the serious problem involved. The fact that nearly half of the S.B. students in 1901 offered only two units of Latin on entrance, and were com- pelled under the general rules to complete three Majors of Latin in college, was a leading, but not the only, cause of this encroachment upon the electives. Another effect of the clearing-house system is the replacing of college work by high- school studies; for example, in the case of Science, the rules do not directly recognize the equivalence in the values of subjects. Nevertheless interchanges take place indirectly. For example, none of the preparatory Science is accepted for advanced standing in college, but a student who offers an excess of Science on entrance, substituting it for some other admission unit, is relieved of a certain amount of Science requirement in the Colleges of Arts and Philosophy (but not of Science). Thus, out of a certain 196 students, A.B. and Ph.B., who matriculated in the Junior College in the autumn of 1900, 134 were wholly exempt from college Science require- ments, for which acceptable but not recommended entrance subjects (usually French or German, sometimes History or Solid Geometry) were substituted. Thus in reality the college Science of the A.B. and Ph.B. courses was in the great majority of cases displaced by preparatory Science. To a limited extent the same effects are noticeable in the case of History. Up to the Winter Quarter of 1901 the required courses in History had not conformed to the clearing-house system ; that is, students who offered European (Medieeval and Modern) History should theo- retically have been relieved from all History requirements in college, but until action was taken by the Junior College Faculty in February, 1901, the presentation of entrance credits in Mediee- val and Modern History merely conferred the right to substitute Senior College History Courses for the Junior requirements. As this practice was clearly in violation of the principle of the clearing-house and worked to the disadvantage of other subjects which did conform, the change was made by the Faculty. Statistics are not yet available, but it is safe to say that the effect of this action will be to substitute in some measure high-school for college History. ADJUSTMENT TO PEOFESSIONAL SCHOOLS Up to this point, attention has been directed to the relations existing between the Junior College and the high school. It remains to consider some of the problems which concern the relation of the Junior College to the Senior College, and to the cuiTicula which lead to the three degrees granted by the University. The further tendency to shape undergraduate work in preparation for professional training, as, for example, in the so-called Pre-Medical coui-se, the Law course,' the School of Commerce and Administration, and in the early future the School of Technology, gives rise also to problems of adjustment. The chief conflict comes over the use of the electives which have already been mentioned. These electives, as has been pointed out, serve two purposes, although they were originally planned for one. They were designed to give the student opportunity from the outset of his coxirse to pursue uninterrupted work in one Department or group of Departments. As a matter of fact, it has been shown that these elect- ives are to a very large degree, notably in the S.B. coxurse, used to compensate for irregu- larities in admission. It is instructive to note the gradual modification of the clearing-house system to meet this practical difficulty. The best illustration is afforded by the various devices for preserving the electives in the S.B. com-se. 3 This course at present does not make any special demands for substitution. 112 The President's Eepoet 1. On the original theory of the clearing-house, students entering the S.B. course with only two units of Latin should take fom- Majors in college. By action of the Faculty, this requirement of four Majors was reduced to three. This is constructively a substitution of one Major for S.B. students. 2. The above provision was, however, far from liberal enough to meet certain exigencies. Oftentimes S.B. students presented for admission an excess of Language and History, with the minimum of Science. Under the operation of the clearing-house their electives might be seri- ously reduced and continuity of work in Science made impossible. A compUcated measure was worked out and adopted in 1899. This permits a student in Science whose electives have been encroached upon to " recover such electives if he wishes to use them for Science or Mathematics to an extent not to exceed one Major for each half-unit by which the amount of Science offered for entrance may fall short of three and one-half units." A careful study of this provision shows that it gives relief to the student whose preparation has been one-sided, and permits him to substitute Science and Mathematics usually for Latin, sometimes for French and German. 3. In spite of the flexibility provided in 1 and 2 above, cases have occurred in which still fur- ther relief has seemed imperative. It sometimes happened that the Junior College requirements, together with the recovered electives, demanded more than eighteen Majors for a Junior College course. This case was met by another action of the Faculty, taken in 1899, which further declared that the Junior College coru-se must never exceed eighteen Majors, and that where the general rules demanded such excess in the S.B. group, the Latin and Modern Language require- ment might be reduced " not to exceed three Majors in either, to the extent of four Majors in all. These reductions shall be granted after consideration of each case by the Committee on Curriculum." A number of other modifications of the clearing-house system have been made, all of them designed to meet such difficulties as those already described. The more important of these provisions are as follows : 1. Students preparing for Medicine in the S.B. course are permitted to substitute Biologi- cal Science for the third Major of Mathematics and for one of the two Majors of Geology. 2. Students in Commerce and Administration receive the Ph.B. degree. When they offer four units of Latin on admission, they are excused from further Latin requirement and permit- ted to substitute four Majors of Political Economy, Political Science, and Social Science. Students in this course are also excused from taking Psychology and Ethics, which are often taken in the Senior College, but are largely pursued by Junior College students in their second year. 3. Still another provision for substitution has been made in the case of those students who enter the University with advanced standing. The amount of substitution is naturally in pro- portion to the amount of such advanced standing. This provision does not directly affect the Junior College, except in the case of students who enter with less than eighteen Majors' credit. If such students come from an " approved college," that is, one whose work in grade and gen- eral scope is regarded as equivalent to that of the University, none of the Junior College requirements are enforced. This is constructively the permission to substitute in such cases to the extent by which the curricula of approved colleges vary from that of the Junior College. In the case of students, however, who enter with eighteen Majors from colleges not on the approved list, four Majors of substitution are permitted. It is evident from the facts which have been presented that the limit of flexibility in the system is being rapidly approached. If provisions for substitution are multiplied, the time will be reached when the exceptions will far exceed in niunber the original general principles. In these circumstances two classes of proposals have begun to appear. Both seek greater freedom, The' Junior Colleges 113 one by enlarging the clearing-house policy, the other by minimizing the system of require- ments. A little reflection will show that the clearing-house principle can be maintained and at the same time greater flexibility may be secured by enlarging the interchangeable subjects or groups of subjects which are " cleared." Certain proposals made within the last two or three years are significant in connection with this idea : 1. The Senate proposed to the Junior College Faculty in the autumn of 1900 to group Mathematics with Science in the requirements in the A.B. and Ph.B. courses, that is, suggested that, instead of demanding two Majors of Mathematics and two Majors of Science, the Faculty require " four Majors of Mathematics and Science." It has also been proposed to require " one unit of Science " for admission, instead of specifying Physics. 2. No action has been taken upon certain proposals to create a single subject. Language, which shall include Greek, French, German, English, etc., or two Language groups : Ancient and Modern. It seems likely that any further attempt to secure greater flexibility in the curricxilum will take the form of enlarging the subject or subject groups, both for admission and for college requirement. While almost all discussions of the curriculum bring forth sporadic proposals for a prac- tically free elective system, there has been no serious movement in that direction. The changes, as this rapid survey shows, have rather taken the form of gradual adaptation to situations as these have arisen. On the whole, the curriculum system is giving satisfaction, but there are problems hinted at in this report which deserve further consideration. In the Spring Quarter of 1902 the Junior College Faculty decided to create a Commission to consider the whole ques- tion of the entrance requirements and the Junior College Curriculum. A careful study of the difficulties to be overcome will doubtless lead to still further modifications looking to a nicer adjustment of means to ends. STUDENT ELIGIBILITY FOR PUBLIC APPEARANCE From the beginning, the University insisted that students whose work was defective must not participate in athletic games, concerts, declamation contests, or other events technically known as "public appearances." The principle was clear, but the practical administration of it was beset with difficulties. Until the adoption of the present system in the spring of 1900, it was the custom for the Deans to send out to instructors lists- of students who desired to take part in some impending event. Often it was not possible to make up those lists until almost the day of the game, concert, or play. If the instructors reported the work of anyone on the list "unsatisfactory "or below grade, he was notified that he was ineligible, and that he must refrain from participation until the adverse report should be withdrawn. This plan was unsatisfactory to the administration and irritating to the student body. The chief defects were: (1) unfairness to the students, the listing of whose names suggested to the instructors suspicion and possible severity of judgment; (2) the temptation to besiege the instructors with explanations and promises in order to have the report withdrawn; (3) hardship upon the managers of athletic musical, dramatic, and other affairs who never could reckon with certainty upon their teams and clubs. In order to remedy this state of affairs the Faculty adopted in the Spring Quarter of 1900 a plan the essential features of which are: 1. At the end of the third, sixth, and ninth weeks of every Quarter special report cards are sent to each instnictor with the request that he report at once the names of all students who are below a passing grade, /. e., C. 2. To be effective these reports must be returned to the Dean's office within five days. 114 The President's Kepoet 3. A report once made cannot be changed either by the instructor or by the Dean. When eqioity seems to demand a modification, the case must be submitted to the Board of Physical Culture and Athletics. 4. When a student at the end of one three-weeks' period is reported below grade, he is thereby made ineligible for the subsequent three weeks. This system has worked admirably. It is definite, automatic, final. The instructor who fails to report students dm-ing the Quarter cannot, in justice, give a very low term mark. In two cases the Faculty has voted an arbitrary change of mark when, without any adverse report during the Quarter, an instructor has reported class work a failure. The system, therefore, makes it important for the instructor to report, and to report promptly, for if the card is late the report must be ignored. Again the members of the Faculty, since they are powerless to change marks once reported, are protected against student importunities. The students themselves know exactly where they stand and can count definitely upon specified periods either of eligi- bility or of enforced retirement. In the few cases in which the Board of Physical Culture and Athletics has permitted an instructor to change marks, excellent reasons have been shown for such equitable modifications. In general the plan has greatly improved the relations between the Faculty and the students. The Faculty is no longer regarded as arbitrarDy and with slight warning interfering with student affairs. Censure falls rather upon those students who, know- ing clearly all the conditions, fail to maintain their scholarship, and thus mar or endanger the success of teams and clubs. The reports, however, are by no means exclusively, or even chiefly, for the purpose of determining eligibility. They are designed to aid the Deans in supervising the work of all students. Within a few hours after a report card is received from an instructor each student whose name appears upon it is notified that he is below grade in the course. He is requested either to see his Dean at once, or to send to him on an appended card any statement or explana- tion that is to be offered. In this way a close watch is kept upon the work of all students. It is in a sense a paternal system. It is too early to assert what effect it has upon the student body. A priori it might be expected to weaken the sense of responsibility and to foster habits of dependence. The experiment is certainly worth continuing until its effects can be more accurately estimated. THE COURSE BOOK AND UNDERGRADUATE HANDBOOK Obviously one of the chief administrative problems of a university is to record accurately the work of students, and to have its records easily accessible. It is also of prime importance that the regulations of the institution should be put in such form that students may clearly understand all essential reqifirements and rules. In a university where entrance and college studies are to so large an extent specified as in the University of Chicago, it is especially necessary that both Faculty and students should keep in mind a rather complex system. The Deans cannot register students, nor can advisors give useful counsel, without knowing both the exact entrance credits and the college requirements in individual cases. Under the old plan the master record cards of all students were, as now, kept in the Kecorder's office. Duplicates of these cards, posted each Quarter, were sent to the various Deans, who made them the basis of registration and advice. Students had no access to their credit record except through the Deans, to whom they resorted constantly to learn how many Majors they had accomplished, and how many and which they must still complete. This involved a maximiun of annoyance in the offices, and still left the majority of the students in a state of vague uncertainty. Furthermore, the requirements and regulations for imdergraduates were published in a bulky form and scattered through a large number of pages in different parts of the Register and Circular of The Junioe Colleges 115 Information. These conditions made ignorance of the law a rather plausible plea. To meet the demands of the situation the Dean of the Junior Colleges assumed the responsibility for preparing a compact manual of information to be published in two forms: (1) as an Under- graduate Handbook, and (2) with additional record pages as a Course Book. With the co-operation of the various offices concerned, the first edition was published in October, 1901. Every under- graduate was supplied with a Course Book in which both his admission and college credits, and the further requirements for graduation were specified. Matriculating students now receive Course Books from the Dean of Admissions, so that they have from the outset a record of their work and a clear, condensed statement of the University's requirements and rules. Each Quarter the books are returned to the office, posted by the Recorder, and returned to their owners. No student can register without producing his Course Book, which at once enables the Dean to point out the next work to be undertaken. If any special arrangement is made with a student, it is valid only when noted by the Dean on certain pages provided for the piupose in the Comrse Book. If the student desires to leave the University for another institution, his Course Book, posted to the date of his withdrawal and 'accompanied by a letter of dismissal, becomes his credential. The device has served its purpose admirably. The student, with definite information always in his possession, adjusts himself readily to the situation and ceases to be dependent upon his Dean, who, on the other hand, is relieved of an immense amount of irksome routine and escapes the dangers of giving orally information which too frequently is misinterpreted. CHAPEL ASSEMBLY The problem of religious exercises for undergraduates has been dealt with in various ways during the ten years of the University's history. At the outset the older academic traditions all demanded a religious exercise, and New England precedent, at least, suggested compulsory attendance. Conditions at Chicago presented difficulties. To require attendance of students living at a distance might break seriously into their plans and involve hardship. The principle of requiring attendance at a religious exercise also aroused opposition in some quarters. It was decided after a time to make attendance voluntary. Under this regime the attendance at chapel exercises was ordinarily small. It was artificially increased, however, when prominent visitors came to the University, or when musicians of note took part in the exercises. The sys- tem, on the whole, was unsatisfactory. A compromise was arranged when in November, 1896, the present plan was adopted, by which the Jimiors meet on Monday, the Seniors on Tuesday, and other divisions of the University on their respective days. Attendance was made compulsory. The exercises were given a somewhat more religious tone, and members of the Faculty were relied upon for the addresses. Here again difficulties were encoimtered in securing speakers. With the introduction by the University of the new plan of regular University preachers, the problem of the Chapel Assembly has been successfully solved. DIVISION LECTURES The weekly exercises known as Division Lectures had their origin in 1895-96. The pro- posal to establish these lectures was discussed at several meetings of the Junior College Faculty. The chief reasons urged in favor of the plan were as follows : 1. It would afford a regular meeting of students, and foster a sense of solidarity. 2. It would provide a survey of the whole field of University study, and afford some basis for intelligent election of special work in the last two years of the course. 3. It would in some measure show the relationships existing between the various pursuits of the Junior College cmrriculum. 116 The Pkesident's Kepoet After much debate as to whether attendance upon this exercise should be required, and regular examinations set at the close of each course, it was finally voted to establish the lec- tures, require attendance, but not to insist on any test or grading of work. A committee in charge of the plan worked out a scheme of lectures which was designed to accomplish the results indicated above. The schedule of lectures announced for the Winter Quarter, 1897, was as follows : Division VI. Ten lectures on "The Plan of the Organization of the University," "The Ideals of University Life," etc. Division V. "Mathematics as a Pursuit and as the Instrument of the Sciences" (two lectures) ; "The Inorganic Sciences" (four lectures) ; "The Organic Sciences" (four lectures). Division IV. "The Science of Mind" (five lectures); "The Sciences of Association" (five lectures). Division III. "The Economic Aspects of Society" (five lectures); "The Legal and Political Aspects of Society " (five lectures). Division II. "The Historical View of Society" (two lectures); "Languages, Literature, and Arts as Products of Social Life" (five lectures); "A Synthetic View of Studies in Relation to the Problems of Life " (three lectures). Division I. Ten Lectures on "The Principles Which Should Guide Students in the Selection of Courses." An examination of this a priori scheme shows that a conspectus of the sciences was pro- vided for, and that in the course of six Quarters each member of the Junior Colleges would have presented to him all the large fields of tmiversity work, and would, in addition, have his atten- tion called to the fundamental relations existing between these different pursuits. The success of such a plan was dependent (1) upon the hearty sympathy and co-operation of the members of the Faculty, (2) upon the willingness of certain members best fitted for the work to prepare special lectures adapted to the purpose. Unfortunately, these conditions did not exist. A few members were interested in the experiment, but the majority regarded it with apathy. Furthermore, no compensation for this extra service was provided, enthusiasm and loyalty being cotmted upon as sufficient stimulus. The inevitable result was that the schedule had to be modified according to the exigencies of the situation. The members of the Faculty who were willing to lecture at all had to be permitted to discuss the subjects which best suited their special interests and preparation. Little by little the original plan has been transformed until it is hardly recognizable at the present time. In spite of these difficulties, however, the lec- tures have served their piu^sose in bringing the students together regularly. Although the origi- nal plan has been almost wholly abandoned, many valuable addresses on a variety of important themes have been delivered before the students of the Jrmior Colleges. The chief weakness in the system lies in the fact that members of the Faculty have been asked to render without additional compensation an important and by no means easy service. If the Division Lectures can be put upon another basis, there is no reason why they should not play an important part in the intellectual life of the undergraduates. MEMBERSHIP AND ORGANIZATION OF THE JUNIOR COLLEGE FACULTY In any year the Faculty of the Junior Colleges is made up of certain officers of the Uni- versity ex officio, together with all members of the University staff who offer Junior College courses druring four Quarters, beginning with the Summer. One of the conventional criticisms of undergraduate work in large universities is the assertion that teaching is almost wholly in the hands of inexperienced tutors, assistants, and instructors, while the attention of professors is bestowed upon Seniors and Graduate Students. Table XIII shows the composition of the Junior Faculty by academic rank for the ten years 1892-1902. The nrunber of professors who The Junioe Colleges 117 give Junior College instruction has increased from one to twelve. The significant facts, however, are those of percentages rather than of absolute numbers. The ratio of teachers of professorial rank to the whole Junior Faculty for each year is given in the last line of the table. It is note- worthy that the percentage (42) for the last year is practically the same as that for the first year. Furthermore, the comparatively narrow margin of variation (37 per cent, to 45 per cent.) for the whole period bears testimony to the steady policy of the University to maintain in the elementary courses a large representation from the professorial ranks. TABLE XIII Composition of Juniok College PAcnLTV 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1 3 9 6 10 4 1 11 12 11 6 7 10 14 23 4 4 10 13 18 6 8 14 17 28 8 8 20 20 24 7 7 20 23 22 15 5 17 18 30 13 8 13 20 37 12 Associate Professors 8 15 19 Others 29 Total 29 45- 39 41+ 60 38-1- 49 37- 73 38-1- 80 45 79 43-h 85 43+ 91 37+ 83 Percentage of those of profes- 42+ While older members of the Faculty, as the table shows, have a considerable part in Junior College instruction, they are not, for various reasons, as active participants in Junior Col- lege Faculty meetings as might be desirable. Because of membership in other bodies, many of these professors feel unable to attend the meetings of the Junior College Faculty. In estimating, therefore, the size of the Faculty for administrative purposes, deductions must be made for such absence as well as for those who are out of residence in any given Quarter. The average attendance at Faculty meetings for the year 1899-1900 was twenty -three — about 40 per cent, of the active resident Faculty ; in the year 1900-1901 the percentage fell to 30, while for the year closing July 1, 1902, the percentage rose to 50. When it is remembered that these averages include each Quarter at least one meeting called for the dispatch of merely routine business, these figures show a significant interest on the part of the Faculty. In accordance with the general plan of University organization adopted by the Senate in the winter of 1902, the following committees on curriculum have been organized in the Junior College Faculty : 1. Ancient Languages and Literatures. 2. Modern Languages and Literatures. 3. Philosophy and the Social Sciences. 4. Mathematics and Physical Sciences. 5. The Organic Sciences. The statute further provides that professional or technical Faculties may be represented by committees in the Junior Faculty. The Committee on Commerce and Administration is, so far, the only one organized under this provision. The chairman of these subcommittees, together with the Dean of the Junior Colleges, form a general curriculum committee to which is intrusted the consideration of proposals that affect the curriculum of the Junior Colleges as a whole. For administrative purposes the following standing committees are annually appointed : Examinations. Scholarships. DiscipHne. Public Exercises. Advanced Standing. 118 The Peesident's Report ENTEANCE SCHOLARSHIPS The following students have received (Entrance Scholarships) : 1900-1901 I. FROM co-operating SCHOOLS OUTSIDE OF CHICAGO Sam. Severance, Louisville, Ky., Boys' high school Alfred Kaar, Princeton high school Harvey Trimble, Princeton high school Florence Frysinger (>^), Rocli Island Mildred Dodge (J^), Rock Island Frank L. Scott, St. Louis, Mo., high school Luella Sloan, East Aurora high school Edith Gillett, West Aurora high school Benj. Feniger, Cleveland, O., Central high school Pearl Foltz, St. Joseph, Mich., high school Ruth Cohen, Quincy high school Erma Ellis, Kansas City, Mo., Central high school Charles McCabe, Council Bluffs, la., high school H. C. Hubbart, Fort Scott, Kan., high Martha Tarnow, Riverside high Louise Miller, Dayton, O., Steele high Lee W. Maxwell, Clyde Township high J. F. McFadden, Thornton Township high Bessie McClure, Pittsburg, Pa., high Cora Sands, Richmond, Ind., high Keokuk, la., high Alice Matless, Eleanor Culton, Clara L. Primm, Frieda Berens, Frank F. Stephens, Bloomington high Springfield high Oak Park high Topeka high May Fenerty, Louisville, Ky., Girls' high school school school school school school school school school school school school school II. FROM CHICAGO HIGH SCHOOLS Hannah Ryan, South Division high school Myrtle Starbird, Englewood high school Bertha McCloud, South Chicago high school Hermann I. Schlesinger, Lake View high school Jessie Bradshaw, John Marshall high school Andrew F. McLeod, Jefferson high school Isadore Wolfsohn, Medill high school Agnes MacNeish, Northwest Division high school Ethylle Andrus, Austin high school Ethel Jaynes, West Division high school Frances Ashley, Calumet high school 1901-1902 PROM CO-OPERATING SCHOOLS OUTSIDE OF CHICAGO Sam. Salinger, Louisville, Ky., Boys' high school Marie Kiedaisch, Keokuk, la., high school Edna Moore, Richmond, Ind., high school Earl Wahlgren, Council Bluffs, la., high school Julia Swadener, Dayton, O., Steele high school Robert Gibboney, Rockford high school Charles J. Stowell, Bloomington high school Clyde Amel Blair, Fort Scott, Kan., high school Emma M. Schuster, Elgin high school Aileen Spaulding, Terre Haute, Ind., high school Charles Berta, Joliet high school Mabelle Payne, Rock Island high school Beulah Bass, Oak Park high school Louise Bearse, La Grange high school Lily Buckendahl, West Aurora high school Anna Youngman,'Louisville, Ky., Girls' high school Bessie H. Packard, Kansas City, Mo., Central h. s. Rhoda Harlowe, Milwaukee, West Division Lilian M. Lane, Leavenworth, Kan., high school James Brinsmaid, Topeka, Kan., high school Arthur P. Solberg, Sioux City, la., high school Albert K. McCurdy, Moline high school Charlotte White, Cedar Rapids, la., high school Florence Hamilton, Blue Island high school II. FROM CHICAGO HIGH SCHOOLS Katherine J. Vaughan, Lake high school Benj. Freud, Jefferson high school Nanna Marx, Northwest Division high school Nellie Jackson, Calumet high school LOian M. Belfleld, Lake View high school Francis McGuane, South Chicago high school Hattie May Palmer, Robert S. Waller high school Ernest E. Quantrell, Eleanor Murphy, Leonard Hancock, Beulah E. Church, Clara H. Taylor, Bertha Thompson, Northwest Div. high school South Division high school John Marshall high school Austin high school Englewood high school Hyde Park high school The Junior Colleges 119 III. FEOM AFFILIATED ACADEMIES Dean P. Wickes, Chicago Manual Training school Clara Denham, Dearborn Seminary Engene V. Beifeld, Princeton-Yale school Walter B. Zeisler (U), Arthur A. Keefer (%). Harry W. Getz, Harvard school South Side Academy SENIOR COLLEGE SCHOLARSHIPS During the past three years Senior College Scholarships have been awarded to the follow- ing students : 1899-1900 South Division high school North Division high school Englewood high school Morgan Park Academy South Chicago high school South Side Academy Morgan Park Academy Calumet high school Wayland Academy, Beaver Dam, Wis. Englewood high school South Side Academy Illinois Female school Morgan Park Academy Wayland Academy, Beaver Dam, Wis. South Side Academy North Division high school Lake high school Illinois State Normal Lima, O., high school John Marshall high school West Division high school Englewood high school Mount Carroll Seminary Webb school Austin high school Lake high school Englewood high school Morgan Park Academy Armour Institute John Marshall high school Louisville, Ky., male high school Northwest Division high school Armour Institute Helena, Montana, high school Englewood high school Hyde Park high school Mary G. Borough Germanic Josephine May Burnham English Geo. A. Brayton Geology Wm. S. Harman History W. W. Hart Mathematics John Mills Physics Margaret Morgan Latin Anna McCaleb Philosophy Bertha A. Pattengill Greek John P. Ritchie Chemistry Grace E. Sellon Political Economy Clara M. Welch Romance 1900-1901 Arthur F. Beifeld Romance Arthur B. Bestor History Harold B. Challis Philosophy Frances Donovan Germanic Matilda V. Gibson Greek Wm. L. Goble Chemistry Edwin G. Kirk Zoology David Robertson Physics Grace Lincoln Geology Benj. Robinson Mathematics Florence Turney English Mabel Whiteside Latin 1901-1902 Wm. A. Averill Geology Margaret Davidson Enghsh Elsie Flersheim Greek Oscar Hamilton Chemistry Evelyn Hayden Physics Helen Hayner French Leon Lewis Political Economy Harris MacNeish Mathematics Nanna Ostergren Philosophy John Redpath Latin Josephine Stone History Sam. Strauss Germanic 120 The President's Kepobt For the ensuing year the award has been made to the following students: Edward Brown Frank DeWolf George Fahr Anna Goldstein Agnes MacNeish Ralph Merriam Cash Newkirk Milton Sills Myrtle Starbird Berthold Ullman George Winchester The following students Summer, 1898 1. Anna McCaleb 2. H. E. P. Thomas 3. Frances Burling 4. M. Mandeville 5. (No contestant) 6. H. W. Jones Autumn, 1898 1. C. S. Eaton 2. R. C. McClure 3. J. S. Patek 4. O. L. McCaskill 5. Grace Switzer 6. C. J. Williamson Winter, 1899 1. Mary Cain Lincoln 2. Alma Yondorf 3. O. L. McCaskill (Claribel Goodwin, alt.) 4. Millard Riley Myers 5. C. J. Williamson (Florence Straus, alt.) 6. (No contestant) Spring, 1899 1. J. W. Thomas 2. Ruth Vail 3. Harold B. Challiss 4. Nina McQuilken 5. Maude F. Sperry 6. (No contestant) Summer, 1899 1. Donald G. Richberg 2. Bertram G. Nelson 1902-1903 Political Economy Geology Chemistry Germanic Mathematics History English Philosophy Greek Latin Physics Morrison high school South Chicago high school Allegheny College Lake high school Northwest Division high school Atlanta high school Morgan Park Academy Hyde Park high school Englewood high school Northwest Division high school Elmore high school PUBLIC SPEAKING PRIZES have received University Prizes 3. Antonie Krejsa 4. Karle Wilson 5. Luverne Hall 6. Eugene Watson Autumn, 1899 1. Donald G. Richberg (Rowland Rogers, alt.) 2. Rowland H. Ritchie (Sidney Klein, alt.) 3. Henry W. Jones 4. Maud L. Sperry (Clifton L. Paden, alt.) 5. Charles M. Barber 6. Charles W. McNear Winter, 1900 1. S. G. Levy 2. Mark R. Jacobs 3. Eugene G. Neubauer 4. Joseph Priest 5. Levi D. Russell 6. O. L. McCaskill Spring, 1900 Upper Juniors : 1. D. A. Robertson 2. B. W. Robinson 3. P. C. de Jong Lower Juniors : 1. P. Davis 2. J. Priest (E. L. Van Dellen, alt.) 3. W. G. McLaury Summer, 1900 1. Mary Roth for excellence in declamation : 2. Chas. M. Barber (Luella Horn, alt.) 3. Alfred Crawford 4. Leon P. Lewis 5. H. P. MacNeish 6. Karle Wilson (Henry D. Reid, alt.) Autumn, 1900 1. Florence Frysinger 2. G. H. Norton 3. H. E. Smith 4. A. L. Jones 5. C. A. Quackenbush 6. H. J. Lurie 7. M. R. Jacobs Winter, 1901 Upper Juniors : 1. Leon P. Lewis 2. H. J. Lurie Scholarships to : 3. Anna M. Hardie 4. Marie Lamb Lower Juniors : 1. C A. Quackenbush 2. Florence Frysinger Scholarships to : 3. Zerlina Hirsh 4. C. C. Nuckols Spring, 1901 1. Leon P. Lewis (W. C. Wilson, alt.) 2. Zerlina Hirsh 3. F. A. Fischel The Junior Colleges 121 4. H. J. Lurie 5. Maurice Lipman 6. H. Wilkinson Ford (Abigail Cowley, alt.) (Aubrey P. Nelson, alt.) Summer, 1901 1. P. A. Fischel 2 A. R. Vail 3. Ethel C. Randall (Ralph Merriam, alt.) i. Henry Pomeroy Miller 5. Edson B. Cooke 6. Vida Sutton Autumn, 1901 Upper Juniors : 1. Harry J. Lurie 2. Zerlina Hirsh Scholarships to : 3. Ethel Jaynes 4. Joseph Beifus Lower Juniors : 1. Walter Eggemeyer 2. Laura Watkins (George Fairweather, alt.) (NelUe Conroy, alt.) Winter, 1902 1. Paul Atlee Walker 2. Leo Falk Wormser 3. Zerlina Hirsh (Eugene L. Hartigan, alt.) 4. Milton Sills Spring, 1902 1. Fannie Benson 2. George O. Fairweather 3. Clarke S. Jennison 4. F. O. Tenney Summer, 1902 No contest Respectfully submitted, George E. Vincent, Dean of the Junior Colleges. THE WOMEN OF THE UNIVERSITY To the President of the University : Sir : As Dean of Women, I submit the following report for the years 1899-1900, 1900- 1901, and 1901-2, together with summaries for the years 1892-1901. CHANGES IN THE FACULTY The changes which took place among the women of the Faculty during the year 1899- 1900 were as follows : Julia E. Bulkley, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Pedagogy, and Lisi C. Cipriani, Ph.D., Docent in Literature in English, resigned. The following new appointments were made : Ella Flagg Young, Associate Professorial Lecturer in Pedagogy; Maud Lavinia Kadford, Ph.M., Assistant in English; Ida Eurniss, Assistant in Physical Culture. Promotions were made as follows: Elizabeth Wallace, S.B., from an Associateship to an Instructorship in Romance; Ella Adams Moore, Ph.B., from an Assistantship to an Associate- ship in English; Amy Eliza Tanner, Ph.D., from an Assistantship to an Associateship in Phi- losophy; Edith Burnham Foster, Ph.B., from an Assistantship to an Associateship in English. In the report of the previous year mention of the appointment of Porter Lander MacClintock, A.M., to an Instructorship in English, was inadvertently omitted. The officers of instruction and administration of the University included twenty-two women. During the year 1900-1901 the following changes were made: Edith Burnham Foster, Ph.B., Associate in English, resigned; Ella Flagg Young, Ph.D., was promoted from an Asso- ciate Professorial Lectureship to an Associate Professorship, and Susan Helen Ballon, Ph.B., from an Assistantship to an Associateship in Latin; Isabelle Bronk, Ph.D., was appointed to an Assistantship in Romance Languages, and Frances Ada Knox, A.B., to an Assistantship in His- tory. The officers of instruction and administration included twenty-one women. During the year 1901-2 the following changes were made: Ella F. Young, Ph.D., was promoted from an Associate Professorship to a Professorship ; Isabelle Bronk, Ph.D., Assistant in Romance Languages, resigned; Lisi C. Cipriani, Ph.D., was appointed to an Assistantship in Romance Languages ; and twenty women were added to the staff through the union of the Chicago Institute with the University. This increased the total number of women officers of instruction and administration to forty-one. The following table indicates the Fellowships held by women during the years covered by the report : TABLE I Name Breckinridge, Sophonisba Preston Bronk, Isabelle Crandall, Harriet Emeline Davis, Katherine Bement Enteman, Minnie Marie Harris, Mary Belle Hefferan, Mary Moore, Anne Peabody, Susan Wade Penfleld, Harriet Eva Thompson, Helen Bradford Thormeyer, Bertha List of Women Fellows, 1899-1900 College Wellesley College Illinois Wesleyan University University of Wisconsin Vassar College University of Wisconsin Bucknell University Wellesley College Vassar College Wellesley College Oberlin College University of Chicago Butler College 122 state Department Kentucky Political Science New York Romance Wisconsin English New York Political Economy Wisconsin Zoology Pennsylvania Latin Michigan Zoology North Carolina Physiology Ohio Political Science Ohio Philosophy Illinois Philosophy Indiana Germanic The Women op the University 123 Name Breckinridge, Sophonisba Preston Becker, Henrietta Katherine Cor win, Lutie Rebecca Crandall, Harriet Emeline Enteman, Minnie Marie Hefferan, Mary Hewes, Amy Misener, Geneva Moore, Anne Peabody, Susan Wade Penfield, Harriet Eva Thormeyer, Bertha Wilcox, Alice Wilson Becker, Henrietta Katherine Corwin, Lutie Rebecca Dey, Mary Helena Gordon, Kate Hatcher, Orie Latham Hefferan, Mary Hewes, Amy Misener, Geneva Wilcox, Alice Wilson TABLE 1— Continued List of Women Fellows, 1900-1901 College Wellesley College University of Chicago Hartford Theol. Seminary University of Wisconsin University of Wisconsin Wellesley College Woman's College of Baltimore Queen's University Vassar College Wellesley College Oberlin College Butler University Vassar College List of Women Fellows, 1901-1902 University of Chicago Hartford Theol. Seminary McGill University University of Chicago Vassar College Wellesley College Woman's College of Baltimore Queen's University Vassar College State Department Kentucky Political Science Illinois Germanic Ohio Semitic Wisconsin English Wisconsin Zoology Michigan Zoology Maryland Sociology Ontario Greek North Carolina Physiology Ohio Political Science Ohio Philosophy Indiana Germanic Rhode Island Zoology Illinois Germanic Ohio Semitic Ontario Romance Wisconsin Philosophy Virginia English Michigan Zoology Maryland Sociology Ontario Greek Rhode Island Zoology The Club of Women Fellows, as the result of several discussions and conferences, adopted a questionnaire and planned an investigation concerning the conditions under which Fellow- ships are held in different institutions and the work accomplished, especially by women Fellows. The members of the Club have been favored with addresses by Professor A. C. Miller, on "Women as University Fellows;" Professor T. C. Chamberlin, on "Capabilities of Women for Scientific Work;" Professor Jacques Loeb, on "Aims of Women in Graduate Study;" Pro- fessor G. H. Mead, on "The Relation of Women to the New Education." The Club has been entertained socially by Dean Talbot, Mrs. H. P. Judson, Mrs. W. D. MacClintock, and Mrs. Paul Shorey. Scholarships were awarded to women as follows : 1899-1900 In the Senior Colleges: Philosophy, Anna McCaleb Political Economy, Grace E. Sellon Greek, Bertha A. Pattengill Latin, Margaret Morgan Romance, Clara M. Welch Germanic, Mary G. Borough English, Josephine M. Burn- ham In the Graduate Schools: Pedagogy, Pearl L. Hunter History, Lucie Hammond Greek, Helen K. Darrow Latin, Clara L. Mooney Germanic, Emma C. Jonas Physics, Marie K. Werkmeis- ter Chemistry, Mary B. Pardee 1900-1901 In the Senior Colleges: Geology, Grace B. Lincoln Germanic, Frances M. Dono- van Greek, Matilda V. Gibson English, Florence Turney Latin, Mabel K. Whiteside In the Graduate Schools: Philosophy, Matilde Castro Pedagogy, Kate Gordon Greek, Julia Lilian Peirce Latin, Mary Bradford Peaks Romance, Eda D. Ohrenstein Chemistry, Mary B. Pardee The Zuinglius Grover Me- morial Scholarship, Margaret Morgan 124 The President's Repokt 1901-1902 In the Senior Colleges: Philosophy, Nanna M. Oster- gren History, Josephine Stone Greek, Elsie Flersheim Eomance, Helen G. Hayner English, Margaret Davidson Physics, Evelyn S. Hayden In the Graduate Schools: History, Laura A. Thompson Sociology, Elsie P. Honn Latin, Nina Estelle Weston Germanic, Frances M. Dono- van Botany, Mary E. Mathews Anatomy, Mary O. Lincoln TABLE n Degrees Coneekked Degrees have been conferred on women, as follovps: Doctor of Philosophy Master of Arts Master of PhUosophy Master of Science Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Philosophy Bachelor of Science 1899-1900 1900-1901 5 7 2 35 7 3 1 28 3 6 24 1 3 2 14 38 33 51 230 •44 62 71 310 8 10 1901-1902 14 1892-1902 58 The certificate or title of Associate was conferred on sixty women members of the Junior Colleges in 1899-1900; on eighty-three in 1900-1901, and on seventy-six in 1901-1902. TABLE III Subjects of Theses Presented by Women Candidates For the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy : Katherine Bement Davis. Annie Marion MacLean. Elizabeth Laetitia Moon. Martha Edith Rickert. Sophonisba Preston Breckinridge. Isabelle Bronk. Minnie Marie Enteman. Mary Belle Harris. Clara Millerd. Anne Moore. Helen Bradford Thompson. Katherine Elizabeth Dopp. Florence May Lyon. 1899-1900 " Causes Affecting the Standard of Living and Wages." " The Acadian Element in the Population of Nova Scotia." " Ideas of Future Life among the Algonquins." "Emare: A Middle English Romance." " Isolation in School Systems." 1900-1901 " Legal Tender; A Study in English and American Mone- tary History." " Antoine Furetifere: A Study of his Life and Works." " Coloration of Polistes, the Common Paper Wasp." "The Lyric of Kalidasa: Its Form and Subject-Matter." " Aristotle's Conception of Pre-Socratio Philosophy." " The Effect of Electrolytes on Rigor Mortis." " Psychological Norms." 1901-1902 " The Place of Industry in Elementary Education." "Development of the Sporangium and Gametophyte of Selaginella rupestris." For the Degree of Master of Arts, Philosophy, or Science : 1899-1900 Frances Holmes Abbot. " The Religious Conceptions of Wordsworth's ' Excursion.' " Emma Kirkland Clark. Eva Comstock Durbin. " The Use of the Dative Case in Sallust." " The Alsatian Question in the French Revolution." The Women op the Univeesity 125 Charlotte Comstock Gray. Dora Johnson. Mattie Belle Matheny. Ruthella Bernard Mory. Caroline Louise Ransom. Elizabeth Marguerite Strauchon. Emily Churchill Thompson. Anna Lavinia Van Benschoten. ' The Visions of Santa Teresa." ' Constructions of Specification in Plautus and Terence." "The Hexameter of Lucilius." 'The Growth of Toleration as Developed in the Foundation of Maryland." 'A Partial Catalogue of the Collection of Greek Vases in the Art Institute of Chicago." 'The Sense of Color in Chaucer." ' Unreal Conditions in Present Time from Homer to Herod- otus." " Motion of a Particle Attracted by a Central Force Vary- ing Inversely as the Fifth Power of the Distance." Nellie Mason Auten. May EsteUe Cook. Mary LeGrand Didlake. Marjorie Lucile Fitch. Helen Mary Taylor. Adella Nelson Todd. 1900-1901 " Some Phases of the Sweating System in Chicago." "Browning's Dramas." "The Structure of the Feathers of the Pigeon and the Modifications Underlying the ' Frilled Feathers.' " " Traces of Gallic Influence in the German of Chamisso." " Division of the Lemniscato into Thirteen Equal Parts." " The Pedagogy of Religious Teaching." Sarah Field Barrow. Grace Darling. Mary Helena Dey. Mary Elizabeth Mathews. Elizabeth Moore. Mary Law McClintock. Mary Annie Pace. Bertha Thormeyer. Georgia Louise Yocum. 1901-1902 " Studies in the Language of Spenser." " Stage-Setting from 1500 to 1575." ■ "Commentary on the First Epistre de VAmant vert of Jean Lemaire de Beiges." " A Comparison of the Dimensions of Cells in Etiolated and Non-Etiolated Leaves." " Matthew Arnold and the Oxford Movement." " The Romantic Element in Mrs. Radcliffe's Work." No thesis required. "The Treatment of Nature in Works of Representative German Romanticists." " An Anatomical Comparison of Some Winter and Summer Leaves." TABLE IV Attendance of Women Students 1899-1901 1899-1900 1900-1901 1801-1902 354 334 (1)1 365 (8) 185 (3) 227 (13) 242 (30) 282 (28) 355 (59) 399 (25) 11 7 9 27 14 14 (1) 191 (8) 395 (2) 398 (7) 468 (5) 455 (36) 405 (22) 15 (3) 635 (38) 1,518 (44) 1,787 (HI) 2,482 (134) 1,474 1,676 2,348 Graduate Schools Senior Colleges Junior Colleges Divinity School, Graduate Divinity School, Unclassified University College Unclassified Medical students School of Education Total Grand total of different students, 1 Figures in parentheses show repetitions. 126 The Pebsident's Repoet ~5 1 S06I-I06I c- ^ s g OCD CO t- S3 c- rHtOrHrH '^t- rH l-HO ^gwcocoou.,^ COOOrHt-^ «: .-# w "J I06M)06t «3 gg.g.a.^^oogj22S^S jirarH^rH (MCO-*CDrHCDNt-C:i CO ^*t ! 6681-8681; c- iraiMOC-rHMeOi-HMQOi-HeOCO OO-^CC rHMrHrHl/3 rH rHCO rH rH Ca Ig CO CO O rH Ca Oa rH O CO rH tr- CO rH M rH ■ lO cgrH g 2 868t-i68I "^ 5'- SSS'°""£!?3S'"S^S T-il-i S-^-'S -'S'-^'—S eg S3 '3 •-3 S06I-T06t 'H OJ CO rH CO CO |m ^ ; t- lO ;iH j ■rHCg •Oi-^ ■ • 1 T06X-O06T i-aC lO '• -* r^rH eg 1 1 ; JOI OO 868I-t68l •iHrH inWrHrH rHOOW -OOrHrH •rH rH • iO rH 1 rH ::::"= s g era 03 1 6061-1061 W(MiHeO'-HCOO-*rHO»niOOM r-*(M CJrH CO O Ol 00 00 rH in CO ^00 00 '■ ^ rH CO rH C<1 rH (M '^ CO CO-* eg CD >H -co -^ i I06I-006I C003-HrH00(NIN!£lOirHlX> r.rt Oi [ OS rtWrHrH ■ CO OS CO j CO | [ "^ l"" j^ §3 868I-(,68I NCO |o3 ;WgOi C3i(N COW rH (MOO WW Oi 30 tH O - s Cat-rH rH CO U3 rHCg '■ IcoegrHCD o < i 1< J— 3f= 1 C f: H ( C a E T C i ; c • a \ C 1 C 1 t 3 a 3S .1 c s a T a as ) i ■■i ;2 a! [-1 t o c a £ c 3 1 57 o JCOE- cn M P : : : rt 5.33^ = 6 E ^ : 6 : ^ . 'o - u : T C C 1 3 ^ The Women of the University 127 table ti Colleges and UNrvEESiTiES from Which Gkajjuate and GHAonATE-DiviNiTY Women Came, 1899-1902 Acadia C . . . Adrian C. .. AdelphiC. Albion C... Alexandria C . Allegheny O Alma C AmityC Andrew C . . Ark. Indus. U. Ark., U. of.. Baird U.... BakerU.... Baldwin U. Baltimore U Baylor U. . . Beaumont C Bellevue C. Belmont C. Beloit C . . . . Bethany C. . Black Hill C Blackburn U. Blue Mt. Fern. Boston U Bryn Mawr C . BuchtelC. Bucknell U. Butler U... Calif., U. of. Carleton C. Carthage C . Central C . . Cen. Tenn. U. Cen. U. of la . . Cen. Wesleyan Chicago, U. of. Cincinnati, U. i Clinton C . . . . Coates C Coe C Colgate U Colo. Agri. C . . Colorado C . . . Colorado, U. of Col'mbusFem.C Converse C . . . Cornell C . . . . Cornell U . . . . Corvallis C . . . Cotner U Denison U. .. . Denver, U. of. De Pauw U . . Des Moines C Doane C . . Drake U.. Drury C . . . Earlham C Elmira O . . Emporia C Eureka C . Fair Lawn C Findley C . . . 1899-0 53 2 2 1 2 1900-t 1901-2 1 1 1 1 1 •■ 4 i i 1 1 6 1 1 i 1 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 64 61 2 1 'i 1 1 1 'i 9 6 7 6 i 4 2 2 8 2 1 1 3 4 2 1 'i ;U.. Fla. Agri. C . . . Franklin C FurmanU Geneva C Geneva, U. of . . Grand Island C Greenville C . . . Hamline U Hardin C Hanover C Hastings C Hedding C . . . . Heidelberi Hillsboro ( Hillsdale C. Hinsdale C. Hiram C . . . Howard Payne C. Illinois, U. of ... . 111. Wesleyan C. Indiana, U. of. . . Iowa Agri. C Iowa C Iowa, U. of la. St. Normal C. Iowa Upper U . . . Iowa Wesleyan C Irving C Kalamazoo C. Kan. State Ag. C Kansas, U. of. Ky.Ag.&Mech.C Knox C Lake Forest U . . Lawrence U . . . . Lei. Stanf.Jr. U LexingtouMo.Fem.C Lincoln U Lombard U . . Lucy Cobb C Marietta C . . Maryville O . Mass.Inst.ofTech Miami U Michigan, U. of . . Middleburg C . . . Milton C Minnesota, U. of. Miss. Indus. Inst, Mississippi, U. of Missouri C Missouri, U. of. . . Mo. Wesleyan U. Monmouth C Montana, U. of . . Mont. Wesleyan U Mt. HolyokeC. Mt. Union C . . . . McGillU McMinnville C . Nashville, U. of. Nebraska, U. of. Nevada, U. of . . . 189&-0 1900-1 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 5 2 's ii 11 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 9 1 7 1 4 • • i 2 1 1 2 1 • • 'i 2 1 14 7 'i 2 5 5 2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 6 5 'i 4 4 1 1 • • 2 'i "i 3 3 1 •• 1901-2 Northwestern C Northwestern U. Oakland City C. Oberlin C . . . . Ohio State U. Ohio Wesleyan U Olivet C Oregon, U. of . . Oskaloosa C Ottawa U Otterbein U . . . Ouachita C Oxford C Park C Peabody Norm. C Pennsylvania C Purdue U Queen's U Radclifle C... Ran. -Macon Worn. C Richmond C Ripon C Rookford C Rogers ville Syn. C Scarritt Col. Inst. Shepardson C . . . ShurtleffC Simpson C Smith O So. Dakota, U. of So. Georgia C . Southwest Kan.C Southwest.Bap. U Stephens C Syracuse U Tabor C Tarkio C Texas, U of Thiel C Toronto, U. of . . TulaneU Vanderbilt U... Vassar C Washburn C . . . Washington U. . Washington, U. of Wayneburg C Wellesley C . . Wells C Wesleyan Fem. C Wesleyan U . . Western C . . . West'n Reserve U Westfleld . . . . Westminster C . West Virginia U Wilson C Wisconsin, U. of Wittenberg C . . . Woman's C. Bait- Wooster, U. of . . Yankton C Zurich, U. of . . . 1899-0 1 19 1 1 i 27 1900-1 19 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 '7 2 1 2 1901-2 10 3 i 1 1 1 12 i 1 ie 1 3 1 1 2 ii '3 3 128 The President's Eepoet PHYSICAl, CULTURE In the Autumn Quarter, 1899, the entire direction of the registration of women for Physical Culture was transferred to the Dean of Women. This arrangement has proved to be very satis- factory from several points of view. An opportunity was afforded to the Dean to meet regularly and officially every woman undergraduate, and the conference for registration in Physical Cul- ture was frequently extended to consultation or confidence concerning academic, social, or per- sonal interests, which it would have been difficult to discuss without the aid of some formal or impersonal point of departure. This experience has done much to remove the barrier of official- ism which students often imagine exists between themselves and an administrative officer. An increasingly large number of women have sought counsel and sympathy in later, voluntary, interviews. The following tables show what assignment was made of women students as to Physical Culture, every regular undergraduate being recorded. Under the rules of the University, ten Quarters of Physical Culture are included in the requirements for the Bachelor's degree. This rule implies that every regular undergraduate student shall have systematic Physical Training together with her class-room work during every Quarter but two. These two Quarters are usually in the year before graduation, but there are exceptions, as when a student, though enrolled as a regular Junior College student, is taking but one study. In such a case she is allowed, if she prefers, to meet the Physical Culture requirement at a later period in her course. The number of excuses granted on the advice of the University Physician or recommendation of the Instructor in Physical Culture — 16 per cent, in the Winter Quarter and 17 per cent, in the Spring Quarter — may seem rather large, but, as the table shows, there are many legitimate rea- sons for exempting students from a requirement which is more severe in the University of Chi- cago than in any other institution of high rank. When all the circumstances are taken into account, the number may be fairly considered to be comparatively small. It will undoubtedly be smaller still when there are more adequate and comfortable accommodations for the training, and no occasion will be felt to relieve the pressure by interpreting the grounds for excuse rather freely. It has been understood that, except in rare cases, no regular student may be excused on the ground of physical disability or pressure of other duties, if at the same time she takes more than the usual three courses of study. The wisdom of this rule has been amply proved, and it will be even more strictly administered in the future. There is evidence from all sides of the benefits received from the training, and the advan- tages of the Gymnasium are frequently sought by students who are not required to take the work. It is nevertheless true that the general conditions are far from favorable for the best results, and in the judgment of the Dean it would be well to consider the advisability of lessen- ing the number of periods of attendance in the Gymnasium for students living at a distance, at least until more capacious quarters are provided. TABLE VII Registeation of Women in Phtsioaii CnLTDKE WiNTEE QUAETEE, 1900 Speing Qdaetee, 1900 Grad'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Grad'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Instructed 7 67 12 15 22 168 2 '28 13 235 14 15 50 3 47 15 37 21 140 7 29 16 206 22 Completed 37 50 The Women of the University 129 TABLE YU— Continued CLASSIFICATION OF EXCUSES ACCEPTED ■WinteeQe.,1900 Speing Qe., 1900 Senior Junior Senior Junior !Ph.vsical disability 11 2 2 7 21 3 4 14 1 2 1 3 24 Equivalent exercise 3 Transferred from Grad. Set.. . Miscellaneous. '2 Total 22 28 21 29 SnMMEE QnAETEE, 1900 — FiEST Teem Second Tekm Grad'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Senior Junior Unclass. Total Instructed 11 20 23 17 20 44 11 's 35 110 34 17 28 16 2 4 3 21 10 '5 5 42 Deferred 12 Completed 4 Excused 8 Total 11 80 63 35 189 25 36 5 66 Autumn Quaetee, 1900 WiNTEE Quaetee, 1901 Gr'd'te Senior Junior Unclass. Divin. Total Gr'd'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Instructed 9 84 22 11 18 244 12 26 32 1 370 34 11 44 10 71 13 15 19 209 13 'si 23 '2 313 Deferred 26 Completed 15 Excused 52 Total 9 135 282 32 1 459 10 118 253 25 406 Speinq Quaetee, 1901 SuMMEE Quaetee, 1901 — FiEST Teem Grad'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Grad'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Instructed Deferred 7 72 4 35 22 220 7 "25 12 311 11 .35 47 13 '2 44 18 14 6 71 6 's 23 151 24 Completed Excused 14 16 Total 7 133 252 12 404 15 82 85 23 205 Summer Quaetee, 1901— Second Teem Autumn Quaetee, 1901 Senior Junior Unclass. Total Grad'te Senior Junior Unclass. Total Instructed 7 26 9 42 9 76 18 4 17 283 4 '25 46 12 414 Deferred 34 Completed 4 Excused 42 Total 7 26 9 42 9 115 312 58 494 130 The President's Kepoet TABLE \ll— Continued WiNTEE Qdaetee, 1902 Speing Qdaetee, 1902 Grad'te Senior Junior Unolass. Total Grad'te Senior Junior Unci ass. Total Instructed Deferred Completed 7 73 16 26 17 237 9 '34 48 10 '3 365 35 26 54 3 76 6 34 22 236 17 '25 35 10 6 350 23 34 53 Total 7 132 280 61 480 3 138 268 51 460 WOMEN'S HOUSES Very few changes have been made in the administrative force of the Women's Houses. Mr. A. C. Miller was elected Councilor of Nancy Foster House in place of Mr. W. D. Mac- Clintock, resigned, and was succeeded by Mr. P. I. Carpenter. Mr. G. S. Goodspeed was elected Councilor of Kelly House, vice Mr. K. M. Lovett, resigned. On the resignation of Miss Edith Burnham Foster, Miss Luauna Eobertson was appointed Head of Kelly House, and during her absence in Europe Miss Susan Wade Peabody served. Miss Isabelle Bronk was appointed Head of Beecher House, and was succeeded by Miss Florence May Lyon. The following additions to the membership have been made: NAMES OF THOSE ADMITTED TO MEMBEESHIP IN BEECHEE HOUSE 1899-1900 Abbot, Myrta Barton, Charlotte Bodler, Anna Dobyns, Martha Donnehy, Ella Dymond, Edith Fitch, Marjorie L. Fritz, Florence Harper, Sarah J. Hoblett, Margaret S. Kimball, Edna Lachmund, Meta Langellier, Roxane Lloyd, Nellie M. McDonald, Jeannette Perry, Frances M. Whittlesey, Deo Younker, Dorothy 1900-1901 Angus, Frances R. Barney, Sara Burg, Caroline C. Burgess, Dora C. Clawson, Edith W. Cohen, Ruth Combs, Elizabeth B. Cowley, Abigail Crofoot, Marguerite Doherty, Eleanor Frasch, Lillian M. Garretson, Etta B. Goodrich, Elizabeth Hartley, Mabel M. Hood, Pearl Just, M. Lulu Kellor, Frances A. Lacey, Amelia E. Matless, Alice Moore, Elizabeth Norcross, Sarah E. Parker, Marguerite V. Shirk, Harriet Sisson, Genevieve Trill, Gertrude G. Waters, Beulah Wessa, Ida 1901-1902 Allyn, Irene L. Brookhardt, Eleanor Coggeshall, Corinne Dey, Mary Helena Evernham, Florence G. Free, Dora Ganser, Amelie B. Gile, Eleanor Harlowe, Rhoda Hughes, Helen Kennedy, Mary Kiedaisch, Marie M, Morris, Sarah Packard, Bessie H. Palmer, Cecil Pierce, Lucia W. Simpkin, Edith N. Sinclair, Mary E. Spayd, Barbara Stephens,Trances H. Stevens, Lucy C. Tompson, Lena A. White, Bertha Whitney, Luella C. Wilcox, Alice W. The Women of the University 131 NAMES OF THOSE ADMITTED TO MEMBERSHIP IN NANCY FOSTER HOUSE 1899-1900 Bacon, Georgia Baird, Grace W. Barrow, Sarah F. Brandeis, Helen Braun, Ada Bruere, E. Cornelia Cole, Florence C. Dehnst, Marie Dolfinger, Emma Doniat, Josephine Doyle, Eleanor M. Edwards, Edith GriiBths, Gwen Hall, Mary H. Hobbs, Julia C. Keay, Edith Kretzinger, Clara W. Merrill, Harriet A. Moore, Anne MacBride, Sarah E. McChesney, Mary P. Pain, M. Mabel Parrette, Ella M. Radford, Maud L. Ridlon, Hester Seidenstucker, Lisette Shaffer, Edith R. Stevenson, Letitia Stillwell, Katherine Swenson, Beatrice L. Tearse, Margaret 1900-1901 Averill, Jessie M. Beckett, Mabel B. Crandall, Harriet E. Darlington, Grace H. Duncan, Dorothy Ellison, Phoebe French, H. Mildred Cookin, Grace F. Harriman, Maude B. Hank, Mabel G. Harvieson, Carrie Hurlburt, Mary C. Hunter, Emma M. Kohlsaat, Helen F. Lyons, Marian C. Masters, Helen D. Mathews, Mary E. Meyer, L. Marie Myers, Clara L. Macrae, Euphon W. Nourse, Mary A. Packer, Elizabeth A. Paton, Winifred W. Perce, Elsie W. Robbins, Alice W. Rockwell, Mary W. Sachs, Cecile H. Turner, Vera Waterbury, Lottie L. West, Irene W. Wright, Emelie B. 1901-1902 Aitchison, Ruth Becker, Henrietta K. Benton, Ina Blackledge, Irene Blunt, Katherine Booth, Edith Cherry, Agatha Densmore, Ida Forbes, Ruth Freeman, Beatrice Grant, Amy Allisne Griffin, Ina Griffith, Glenna Griffith, Jeannette Hoffmann, Anna Frances Jenks, Anna Belle Joehnke, Wilhelmine Keyes, Eva B. Kimball, Hope King, Lorena C. V. Kirchoff, Frieda Kueiiner, Lulu Larsen, Ethel Long, Mary Alves Miller, Alice Miller, Florence D. Miller, Kate B. Moore, Elizabeth Munger, Elizabeth MacClintock, Mary L. McVicker, Alberta Oldershaw, Janet Porter, Lucy Primm, Clara Rawls, Fay Sharpless, Ada Small, Lavinia Sutton, Vida D. Thorington, Wilella Truesdale, Katherine Twombly, Eva Van Hoesen, Jeannette Van Hoesen, Margaret Wade, Margaret Woitishek, Mary Young, Evelyn Youngman, Anna NAMES OF THOSE ADMITTED TO MEMBERSHIP IN GREEN HOUSE 1899-1900 Adams, Emma'F. Atwood, Augusta Batchelder, Josephine H. Bones, Katherine H. Bronk, IsabeUe Brotherton, May Buck, Lilian Hazle Carter, Lilian Cheatham, E. Edith Clark, Maud Lulu Clarke, Emma K. Cole, Grace Corey, Alice Felicita Crandall, Harriet E. Crandall, Regina K. Combs, Elizabeth B. Curtiss, Alice H. Dewey, Ethel Dodge, Annie Louise Fish, Anna C. German, Clara L. Gordon, Kate Greyer, Elma H. Hall, Luverne Hefferan, Mary Hostetter, Adeline Johnson, Ethel B. King, Elizabeth M. Landers, Martha Lewis, Mary Elizabeth Loeb, Hannah Loeb, Hedwig 132 The President's Kepoet Manning, Grace E. Marshall, Anna H. Morse, M. Rowena Munroe, Jane Parker, Florence Peck, Ethel W. Radford, Alice E. Railsback, Monica Rosewater, Blanche Scott, M. Pauline Shaw, Clara H. Stevens, Ellen Yale Stitt, Grace E. M. Stewart, Louise E. Textor, Lucy E. Thompson, Edith L. Tunnicliff, Ruth Turney, Florence Vail, Ruth 1900-1901 Babb, Bijou Beckwith, Minnie A. Berger, Sophie Besley, Miriam Bickell, Edith Blair, Mary E. Bradley, Lucia Bryning, Pearl Calloway, Katherine DeCew, Louise DeLagneau, Alice Didlake, Mary LeG. Dobson, Mabel E. Donovan, Frances M. Furniss, Ida Goodwin, Claribel Harroun, Katherine Hunter, Eunice Kinney, Harriet M. Lacey, Amelia E. Mead, Annie M. McCloud, Bertha B. McKinney, Isabel Pratt, Anna B. Stettler, Augusta V. Straight, Bertha K. Swift, Nellie Vincent, Harriet Warvelle, Effle Young, Mariamne R. S. 1901-1902 Anderson, Mildred N. Bearse, Louise F. Beed, Grace Behrhorst, Edith Bray, Gladys M. Brockway, M. Ruth Brown, Ivy I. Brown, Louise C Chadsey, Mildred Colman, Laura L. Conover, L. Lenore Dodge, Mildred E. Eastman, Eliza Maria Everett (Mrs.) Naomi Frazeur, Laurie R. Galvin, Anna Gardner, Emeline E. Gibbons, Vernette L. Gibson, Myrtle Hanson, Myra Hequembourg, Agatha D. Kellerman, Ivy King, Jos6 B. King, Kate M. Kinney, Harriet M. Lament, Caroline O. Marine, Merle Meyer, Elise F. Meyer, Frieda I. Moore, Ruth Munson, Eunice H. Park, Elizabeth J. Payne, Mabelle Shields, Florence B. Smith, Elizabeth F. Smith, Sarah E. Snyder, Rosa B. Stafford, Grace W. Stuart, Florence L. Sweet, Margaret A. Temple, Mrs. Frances C. Turner, Abbie H. Vaughn, Lillian E. Weirick, Elizabeth S. NAMES OF THOSE ADMITTED TO MEMBERSHIP IN KELLY HOUSE 1899-1900 Auten, Nellie Mason Boyd, Florence H Crowell, Winifred G. Darlington, Genevieve Ellison, Anna E, Frisbie, Fannie C. Hamilton, Grace Hardinge, Madeleine Harrigan, Alice J. Hassall, Malvina A. Kaufman, Kate E. Kellogg, Josephine Kimball, Ruth Kingsbury, Sara Johnson, Dora MacBride, Sarah E. Young, Olive M. 1900^1901 Arnold, Edith Brown, Maude I. Chapman, Grace Dorchester, Mary W. Dunn, Helen A. Fox, Stella R. Graham, Mary C. Hutchinson, Ida Loring, Julia E. Miller, Louise Miller, Rhue Myrtle Moore, Stella Morton, Mary G. McGavock, Martha Mittenthal, Harriet E. Olcutt, Amelia Roberts, Estelle Russell, Eva M. Smoot, Sarah E. Tarnow, Martha W. Truax, Ruth R. Tuttle, Jessie' R. Walker, Jane B. Walters, S. Annie Waltej-s, Florence L. Warren, Grace Warren, Bertha C. Wells, Anna Payne Wheeler, Jean F. Willis, Gwendolen B. Yocum, Georgia L. 1901-1902 Ahrens, Anna H. Alspaugh, Lenore Ashley, Winifred The Women of the Univeesity 133 Chambers, Helen Churchill, Laura Churchill, Mabel Cobb, Mary Rena Grupe, Mary Hopps, Carolyn Houghton, Madge Kellor, Frances Lane, Lillian Mills, Mary McCoy, Luella McDonnell, Katherine McFarland, Elizabeth Swadener, Julia Swinford, Geneva Todd, Edith Vondragek, Olga ^ Watts, Lucie C. NAMES OF THOSE ADMITTED TO MEMBEESHIP IN SPELMAN HOUSE 1899-1900 Bray, Gladys Burns, Eloise Chandler, Marie Going, Harriet Graves, Mae L. Meserve, Louie Misener, Geneva MoQuilkin, Nona Rattray, Jennie Reese, Olga Salter, Esther Sherman, Jessie Swezey, Anne D. Wakeman, Caroline Ward, Laura Waugh, Caroline 1900-1901 Biegler, Marion Hill, Leila Lilly, Faith Moore, Anne Morrison, Mary Spink, Josette Thompson, Jennie Williams, Alene Williams, Nellie Wilson, Margaret 1901-1902 Latimer, Faith Murphy, Mary Thompson, Alice UNCLASSIFIED WOMEN STUDENTS In the Autumn of 1899 the unclassified women students were put under the direction of the Dean of Women. This group of women includes some of the most able as well as some of the least satisfactory students in the University, and the administration of their interests pre- sents problems of a serious and difficult character, as has been pointed out in previous reports and as is the experience in nearly every college and university. The following facts are presented concerning the women who were in attendance during the Autumn, Winter, and Spring Quarters, 1899-1900 : TABLE vni Attendance and Registeation of Unclassified Women, 1899-1900 (Omitting Summee Quartbe) Total Entered 1 Major Percent. 2 Majors Percent. 3 Majors Percent. 4 Majors Percent. Autumn Winter Spring 120 97 67 120 26 10 32 30 19 26.6 30.9 28.3 23 14 15 19.2 UA 22.4 60 50 31 50.0 51.6 46.3 5 3 2 4.2 3.1 3.0 Total number of vfomen ( less repetitions) - - 156 In attendance one Quarter ------ 53 In attendance two Quarters - - - - - - 50 In attendance three Quarters ----- 53 Classified -----14 Eighty-three came from Illinois ( including sixty-one from Chicago) ; the remaining seventy-three came from twenty-six different states and countries. The following table shows the number of Quarters during which unclassified women students had attended the University previous to the Autumn Quarter, 1899: 184 T HE President' s Repoet TABLE IX No. of Quarters.. % 1 i;4 2 2'4 3 3!4 4 i'A .5 5;4 6 7'4 8 11V4 12 12!4 No. of students. . M 7 10 2 11 1 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Twenty-eight of the ninety-foxir students who entered the University during the year for the first time remained three Quarters, thirty-two remained two Quarters, and thirty-four remained one Quarter. The ten students who entered in the spring should be deducted from the last number, though it is probable that some of them will never return. Of the fifty-three who were in attendance throughout the regular college year (nine of whom had been in attendance previously), twelve became classified. Only nine of the remain- ing forty-one may be said to have done special work in one or at most two Departments. The others took general work. Twenty-seven students who were in attendance through the Autumn and Winter Quarters left at the opening of the Spring Quarter. The reasons recorded for their leaving the University are as follows: vacation, to return later, 8; to teach, 5; poor health, 3; poor work, 3; lack of money, 2; father's illness, 2; work completed, 1; imknown, 3. TABLE X KBelSTEATION OP UNCLASSIFIED WOMEN FOE AUTUMN, WiNTEE, AND SPEING QuAETEES, 1899-1900, IN GeADD.ATE School, Senioe College, and Jdnioe College Coueses Dbpaktment Philosophy Pedagogy Political Economy . . . . Political Science History Archceology Sociology Comparative Religion, Semitics Biblical Greek Sanskrit Greek Latin Romance Germanic English Literature in English . Mathematics Astronomy Physics Chemistry Geology Zoology Anatomy Physiology Neurology Botany Public Speaking Total Graduate No. of Reg- istrations 5 5 9 3 i 1 io 52 Percentage Ratio 0.46 0.93 0.77 o!77 i!39 0.46 6. is 0.15 i!54 0.15 0.62 0.62 .02 Senioe No. of Reg- istrations 2 9 2 27 ii 2 3 4 13 93 6 2 183 Percentage Ratio 0.31 1.39 '6'.3i 4.20 'i'.TO 0.31 0.46 0.62 2.00 14,32 0.93 0.31 0.31 '6! 46 0.15 0.46 28.24 Junioe No. of Reg- istrations 22 33 3 30 65 52 105 '28 2 4 13 11 12 11 1 413 Percentage Ratio 3.40 'i!39 '5'.ii 1.24 0.46 4.62 10.03 8.02 16.20 4.32 0.31 0.62 2.00 1.70 1.85 '6!62 i.ib 0.15 63.74 Total No. of Reg- istrations 27 15 9 2 65 '24 "9 3 "e 34 69 65 208 6 30 2 4 15 12 15 1 4 4 18 1 648 Percentage Ratio 4.17 2.32 1.39 0.31 10.08 3.71 'i!.39 0.46 '6!92 5.23 10.65 10.02 32.06 0.93 4.63 0.31 0.62 2.31 1.85 2.31 0.15 0.62 0.62 2.78 0.15 100.00 The Women of the University 135 Thirty of the one hundred and twenty who were in attendance in the Autumn left at the end of the Quarter and did not return through the year. The reasons recorded are classified as follows : poor health, 6; work completed, 5; vacation, to return later, 5; to teach, 4; business engagements, 1; lack of money, 3; poor work, 1; to study at Stetson University, 1; change of residence, 1; family reasons, 1 ; unknown, 2. It is to be noted specially that sixty-nine of the one hundred and fifty-six women did all their work in the Junior College; 24 took Elementary French, 16 Elementary German, 35 the first course in Rhetoric and Composition, and 36 the general course in English Literature. Over 60 per cent, of all the work was done in the Language Departments. Over 63 per cent was done in the Junior Colleges, whereas in 1897-98 about 50 per cent, was done in Junior College courses. TABLE XI Ages of UNCLASsrFiED Women SinDENTS, 1899-1900 Age No. Age No. Age No. Age No. 20-25: 20 2 11 14 16 13 30-35: 30 31 32 33 34 8 4 6 9 3 40-45: 40 5 2 1 1 3 50-60 : 50 2 21 41 51 52 22 23 42 43 1 53 24 44 54 55 35-40: 35 45-50 : 45 1 56 10 7 6 4 6 30 2 5 2 2 4 12 2 3 1 Total 25-30 : 25 4 26 36 46 156 27 28 37 38 47 48 49 29 39 33 15 6 The age for admission is fixed at twenty-one, and if a student is nearer twenty-one than twenty, it has been the custom to consider this requirement met, especially if the student seems well qualified in other respects. There were twenty-seven students under twenty-three years of age. Two of these were honorary students, or "hearers" only, and three, who were practically conditioned regular students, became classified during the year. The following facts concerning the remaining twenty-two are worthy of notice : Six attended 1 Quarter, 7 attended 2 Quarters, 9 attended 3 Quarters ; 4 attended in the Autumn only, 2 attended in the Spring only, 5 attended in the Autumn and Winter only. Fifteen counted Chicago as their home. Four of the 9 who attended throughout the year were doing work as conditioned regular students, while 5 were doing work for "general culture," to use their own favorite, but indefinite, phrase. None were working in any real sense as specialists. Six took Elementary German, 2 Elementary French, 9 the first course in Enghsh Ehetoric and Composi- tion, and 7 the first course in general English Literature. The 22 students took 98 courses, for which the following marks were given : A, 4 ; B, 48 ; C, 80 ; i>, 20 ; E,8; and 10 courses were not completed. There were 8 whose grades averaged above C and 1 above B, while 65 per cent, of the marks were C or below. The facts presented concerning the unclassified women students during the year 1899- 1900 give added force to the statements, made by Deans MacClintock and Castle in previous years, as to the lack of continuity in attendance and the great diversity in preparation and pur- pose shown by this class of students. They indicate in addition the low grade of work done by the youngest of these students. 136 The President's Report Dean MacClintock pointed out (President's Eepoet for 1897-98, p. 109) that the Uni- versity has three duties to the unclassified student body : (1) to use every means to keep out drifting, unprepared persons who remain but a few months ; (2) to encourage mature, well- trained students, who come for exact training in their work, and who will carry out from the University higher standards of scholarship ; (3) to urge, and even compel, all who yet can to finish their preparation and take the full college course. Dean Castle has wisely laid stress on the importance of dealing with these students as individuals, and experience has shown more than once the injustice resulting from laying down too specific or detailed restrictions to which all must conform regardless of the individual element. It was self-evident that the reputation of the University would shortly suffer, if it had not already suffered, from the connection with it of so large a number of transient and badly pre- pared students, who in many cases derive no benefit from their connection with the University commensurate with the injm-y done to it by their membership. It is a well-known fact that the conditions of such membership are not usually as clearly set forth by the students as are the claims for prestige which are based upon it. As a result of these studies and investigations, the rules governing the admission of unclassified women were more rigidly administered during the ensuing year, and admission to elementary courses only was denied, and prerequisites were strictly observed. Owing to these, and possibly other, causes, the attendance during the Autumn, Winter, and Spring quarters of 1900-1901 fell fi'om 156 of the preceding year to 140, The following additional facts are given: TABLE XII Total number of unclassified women, 1900-1901 - - - 455 In attendance Summer (only) ------ 321 In attendance Autumn --------99 In attendance Winter --. 85 In attendance Spring ----..--72 Attended four Quarters ------- 5 Attended three Quarters ---...-40 Attended two Quarters ---...- 37 Attended one Quarter -----..- 52 Entered in the Autumn Quarter ----- 45 Remained three Quarters - - - . - _ 24 Remained two Quarters --..-- 9 Remained one Quarter ------ 12 Entered in the Winter Quarter - - . . _ 12 Remained two Quarters ------ 6 Remained one Quarter ------ 6 Entered in the Spring Quarter ------ 17 Classified --.--_-... 15 One hundred and eleven, of whom fifty-one attended in the Summer only, resided in Chicago. During the winter of 1900-1901 the Faculty discussed methods by which the number of unclassified students who properly belonged in the Junior Colleges might be so classed, and it was decided that this could best be accomplished by placing such students under all the rules of the Junior Colleges. Due recognition was given at the same time to the needs of the advanced special student. The following requirement was ultimately announced to be put in operation October 1, 1901: Unclassified students are subject to all the general regulations of the University pertaining to undergraduate students, including those prescribing attendance on Division Meetings and Lectures, Chapel-Assembly and Physical Culture, unless more than one-half of their work is in the Senior Colleges or in the Graduate Schools. The Women of the Univeksity 137 It is hoped that this measure will work advantageously in raising the standards of scholar- ship and earnestness among the less mature and less well-trained students, while not unneces- sarily restricting the freedom of the smaller number who have projBted to the utmost by the advantages of the University and whom the University has always been proud to count among its members. THE WOMAN'S UNION In October, 1901, the Board of Student Organizations authorized a Commission, under the chairmanship of the Dean of Women, to proceed to the organization of a woman's club. The Commission met for the first time on November 4, 1901, and on December 19 adopted the following constitution: CONSTITUTION OF THE WOMAN'S UNION NAME The name of this organization shall be the Woman's Union of the University of Chicago. OBJECT The object of this organization shall be to unite the women of the University tor the promotion of their common interests. MEMBEKSHIP The members shall be of two classes, regular and honorary. The privileges of regular membership shall be open to the following classes: 1. Women students registered in any Department of the University. 2. Women members of the Faculty, women oificers, and women in the employ of the University. 3. Women members of the families of Trustees, Faculty, and officers of the University. 4. Wives of registered students. 5. Alumnas of the University. Honorary membership may be conferred by unanimous vote of the Union upon recommendation of the Membership Committee. Honorary members shall have all the privileges of regular member- ship, and shall be exempt from the payment of fees. OFFICERS The business of the Union shall be conducted by a Council, consisting of a President, a Vice- President, a Secretary, a Treasurer, and a House Committee of seven members. The Council shall be elected by the Union at its annual meeting, and shall fill any vacancies occurring in its member- ship. The President, Treasurer, and chairman of the House Committee shall be considered the executive officers of the Union, with power to approve all bills, and to direct the affairs of the Union in the interim of the meetings of the Council. The members of the House Committee, other than the chairman, shall serve as chairmen of committees on membership, finance, entertainment, philanthropy, hospitality, and lunch-room. These committees shall be chosen by the Council on nomination by their respective chairmen. DUTIES OP OFPIOEKS 1. The duties of the President shall be to preside at all meetings of the Union and of the Council. 2. In the absence of the President, the Vice-President shall perform her duties. 3. The duties of the Secretary shall be to keep the records of the meetings of the Union and of the Council, to send out notices, and to carry on such correspondence as shall be intrusted to her. 4. The duties of the Treasurer shall be to receive and to disburse all moneys belonging to the Union, to collect the dues, to keep a record of the accounts, and to make a quarterly report to the Council and an annual report to the Union. DDES The membership fee shall be fifty cents a quarter, or one dollar a year. 138 The President's Repokt MEETINGS The annual meeting of the Union shall be held during the third week of the Winter Quarter. Special meetings of the Union may be called by the Secretary at the request of the President, the chairman of the House Committee, or three members of the Union. QUORUM At any annual or special meeting of the Union twenty-five members shall constitute a quorum. AMENDMENTS Amendments to this constitution may be adopted at any meeting of the Union, the proposed amendment having been included in the notice calling the meeting for its consideration. The following oiScers were elected: President, Miss Marion Talbot, Dean of Women; Vice-President, Mrs. Henry Rand Hatfield; Secretary, Miss Mildred Richardson (Senior College); Treasurer, Miss Ruth Hardy (Graduate School); Chairman of the House Committee, Miss Gertrude Dudley, Director of Physical Culture for Women. Members of House Committee: Chairman of Committee on Membership, Miss Elizabeth Baker (School of Education); Chairman of Committee on Finance, Mrs. Warner Fite; Chairman of Committee on Entertainment, Mrs. George C. Howland; Chairman of Committee on Philanthropy, Miss Mary C. Lincoln, (Graduate School); Chairman of Committee on Hospitality, Miss M. Ethel Freeman (Young Women's Christian Association); Chairman of Committee on Lunch Room, Miss Susan W. Peabody (Head of Kelly House). Members of Committees: Membership, Miss Agnes Wayman (Senior College), Miss Sophonisba P. Breckinridge; Finance, Mrs. Ella F. Young (Professor of Education), Miss Josephine Robertson; Entertainment, Miss Margaret G. Coulter (Young Women's Christian Associa- tion), Miss Elizabeth D. Clarke (Junior College); Philanthropy, Miss Myra Reynolds (Head of Nancy Foster House), Miss Laura Colman (School of Education); Lunch-Room, Mrs. Alice Peloubet Norton (School of Education), Mrs. Ralph C. H. Catterall; Hospitality, Mrs. Henry Gordon Gale, Miss F. M. Lyon (Head of Beecher House), Miss Eleanor Culton (Junior College). The rooms of the Union in the Disciples' chiirch, corner of Fifty-seventh street and Lex- ington avenue, were formally opened on Wednesday afternoon, January, 8, 1902. Since that time they have been in constant use through the daytime, except on Simdays. The special features have been a reading-room, a rest-room, and a lunch-room, and receptions and entertain- ments have been given regularly on Wednesday afternoons. A special committee has furnished music at the noon hour twice a week. Luncheons, imder the direction of Miss Susan Wade Peabody, have been furnished to as many as seventy in a single day. By special arrangement the Secretary of the Young Women's Christian Association or Women Students' Christian League has held daily office hours at the rooms. Other organizations of students have occasionally had the use of the rooms for meetings and receptions. During the Winter Quarter there were 180 annual and 66 quarterly members, and during the Spring Quarter 217 annual and 56 quarterly members. The hope has been fully realized that the women of the University will find in the new organization a means of uniting them in a large and generous fellowship, and of meeting some of the social needs which many members of the University have felt in the past. The experi- ence thus far won serves also to point out new paths of usefulness for the future. SCHOLARSHIP Since the award of scholarships and honors has been announced in the Convocation programs, 929 students have received the Junior College certificate — 496 men, or 53 1^ per cent., and 433 women, or 46 i per cent. Forty-three of these men received Senior College scholarships, or 54 1^ per cent, of all that were awarded, and 36 women, or 45 J per cent. Ninety-three men and 128 women received honors for scholarship based on class and examination grades. If The Women of the Univeesity 139 the women had received honors in the same proportion to their numbers as the men the number of women would have been 81 instead of 128. In the same period of time 1,164 students have received the Bachelor's degree — 611 men, or 53 per cent., and 550 women, or 47 per cent. Fifty -three men received graduate Scholarships, or 62 per cent., and 33 women, or 38 per cent. One hundred and forty-five of the men and 199 of the women received honors for scholarship on graduation, and 44 men and 73 women received special honors. If the women had received honors and special honors in the same proportion to their numbers as the men, the number of women would have been 130 for honors and 39 for special honors, instead of 199 and 73, respectively. The total nimiber of persons who have received the Bachelor's degree is 1,294, including 698, or 54 per cent, men, and 596, or 46 per cent, women. The total number admitted to the Phi Beta Kappa Society solely on scholarship record is 135, including 59, or 43.7 per cent, men, and 76, or 56.3 per cent, women. A percentage of 8.5 of the men received this honor and 13 per cent, of the women. The degree of Doctor of Philosophy has been awarded to 244 persons, including 209 men and 35 women. The grades have been as follows: men, rite, 48, or 23 per cent.; cum laude, 74, or 35.4 per cent.; magna cum laude, 74, or 35.4 per cent.; summa cum laude, 13, or 6.2 per cent.; the corresponding numbers for women are 3, or 8.5 per cent.; 19, or 54.3 per cent.; 12, or 34.3 per cent.; 1, or 2.9 per cent. CHOICE OF STUDIES The motives or influences which lead the student in making up a program of studies in college are by no means so few, so simple, or so universal as some educational theorists have recently assumed. However it may have been a generation ago, few young people today, either boys or girls, enter college with a clearly defined purpose or plan to guide them in their studies; and still fewer have decided upon a vocation for which they wish to fit themselves. Even of these few there are always some who, under the influence of a broader outlook or wider experience and knowledge, change their decision after entering college. As long as the college was the stepping-stone chiefly to the law or to the ministry, the curriculmn remained fixed and the scholastic methods which were fitted to this end remained unchanged . With the broaden- ing of the function of the college and the recognition of the value of mental discipline and cultivation, independently of the special vocation in life, the rigidity of medisevalism was grad- ually forced to give way, and under a great leadership the benefits of higher scholarship were shown to be the right of a larger class of young people. The curricula of American colleges now represent two educational theories: it is held on the one hand, that all subjects of human knowledge, if equally well taught, are of equal value as instruments for human discipline and culture; and, on the other hand, that certain subjects of hiunan knowledge are fundamental and essential, not only to all general culture, but to the understanding of other subjects. There are naturally wide variations in the application of the second theory. The propor- tion of required studies may vary approximately from one-twelfth to eleven-twelfths of the whole course of study. With the widening of the scope and amount of elective work there come an opportunity and an obligation for both the student and the college whose full significance is unfortunately too frequently missed by one or the other, if not by both. Just so far as the required curriculum represents the progressive judgment of the faculty as to what is basic in collegiate training, there is no responsibility on the part of the student. It is always interesting to watch the expression of a young student when she is told that a certain course is to be taken. She may silently or openly rebel against " required work " — often just because it is required. Having felt the spirit of some of the modern pedagogy, she claims the right to " express herself 140 The President's Keport according to her nature." Quite as often, however, she shows an expression of relief that in this new experience, so confusing in its richness, she can feel the guiding wisdom of some other judgment than her own. When a young woman is brought face to face with the problem of choosing her studies, there are certain iniiuences at work in her mind which consciously or unconsciously guide her in her choice, even independently of any help which the college, through its appointed officer, may give her. Her expression of the reason for her choice may be very frank, or even naJve. " I am going on with Latin because I always stood well in it in high school;" " French always came easy so I think I will keep it up;" "I am going to specialize in English, because my writing has always been praised and I have had a story published and was our class poet;" " I always thought I'd like Psychology; it sounds so interesting" — such are some forms of expres- sion of the individual judgment. Sometimes the advice or request of a parent or teacher is quoted and followed as final. " My father thinks I ought to take Mathematics; I am so careless;" " My mother thinks Chem- istry would be helpful to me at home;" " My father liked Philosophy in college and wants me to take it;" " My teacher thinks I ought to keep up my Greek all through college" — in these and other ways the young student shows that she has had help and counsel in making out her course of study. The preparatory training sometimes determines to a considerable extent the studies which may be taken later. A subject such as Greek may not be offered in the high school. Instruc- tion, notably in the sciences, may be so defective as to furnish the young student with no proper preliminary training, and a large range of subjects may be a closed book to her. On the other hand, subjects that have been well taught in the high school often make the only foundation on which to build, and they are in many cases the only subjects of which the student thinks in planning her future work. There are, as has been said, a few students who wish to prepare themselves for a special vocation; such as medicine, journalism, or librarianship. At first thought their problem seems an easy one, but on fiuther consideration it is found to be not very widely differentiated from the problems of other students, unless the college so far sets aside its true function as to assume in part the role of a technical or professional school. In this case there is the temptation to take a short-cut to the profession — a temptation which is proving stronger vsith the seeming conflict between commercialism and scholarship, but which women are resisting quite as vigor- ously, to say the least, as men. There are unquestionably many college women who look forward to teaching as a profes- sion, but they are not so numerous as is popularly supposed, and their proportion is steadily growing less. It is natmal that they should choose to study subjects which they expect to teach. In this choice they are frequently led by aptitude for a study, but it often happens that they choose a subject, such as History or English, which they do not particularly care for, because there are more positions open to them. A subject such as Physics or Zoology may be set aside, even though the student is eager to pursue it, because her principal or superintendent tells her that " there is almost no chance for a woman to get a position to teach it." There is, moreover, a large and increasing number of girls who, while not definitely expecting to teach, are feeling the spirit of the age and, led by the counsel of prudent fathers, and even of mothers made wise by bitter experience, undertake to fit themselves by some special line of study " to support themselves in case they should have to." The fact that, if the emer- gency should arise, it might not come until their stock in trade of method and fact was too antiquated to be of avail, does not lessen the value which such an impetus lends to the process of training. At the present time teaching seems to be the easiest and most natural means of self-support to which a young woman can look forward and for which she can prepare herself. The Women of the University 141 And this will probably be the case for many years to come, or imtil teaching in secondary schools becomes a learned profession drawing to it men of the best caliber in at least equal pro- portion with women. Certain influences which cannot be easily put into words or exactly formulated are known in every college to have weight in guiding students in their choice. The popularity of an instructor, due to a strong personality or to catchy cleverness, and accordingly of varying dura- tion, is a factor which must be reckoned with in estimating the real significance of statistics showing the choice of studies. For example, a strong personality may explain a very large choice of Fine Arts in one institution, or the loss of a great teacher account for a great falling off in the number of students taking Political Economy in another. It is well known in every college community that the popularity of an instructor is a very uncertain quantity, fluctuating seemingly without adequate ground, and sometimes declining solely because of the substitution of a more for a less rigorous method of instruction ; but it exists, and must be taken into account. "A girl from my school told me to be sure to take Mr. X," and " I want to wait until I can have Mr. Y," are remarks by students which are often heard. This expression of desire, while sometimes resting on gross injustice, may nevertheless be a proper basis for the choice of a subject, for everybody knows that a teacher may be greater than the greatest subject in influ- encing a student. Every Faculty knows, too, how subjects have waves of popularity which are sometimes beyond explanation. One year students may rush to a subject like Psychology, for example ; and the next year there may be a reaction and the classes in that subject be comparatively small. The influence of " snap " courses is everywhere tacitly, or even openly, acknowledged. The fact that the college curriculum has been broadened so as to make it serve the needs of more types of young people also means that with its adjunct interests and activities it will attract some who are more or less intellectually indolent. Sometimes the mental awakening comes soon, sometimes it never comes, and a student passes through the college course and technically meets the requirements for graduation with an amount of work which would startle the shades of her theological or legal ancestors. The student rests on the judgment of her fellows when making out a program whose first characteristic is to be " easy." There are cases which can be ignored, while others need bold or skilful handling by the officer in charge of registration. The specially interesting cases are those in which the officer is frankly called upon to assist the student in finding " snap courses," and, while he may never admit it to himself officially, he may tacitly follow the lead of a student who says : " I am going to take such and such a course, because my other courses are so hard, or because my eyes are troubling me, or because I have been ill and must get back into work gradually." From many points of view the most interesting motive in choice of studies is the love of a subject. This may lead a student into strange paths, judged from a utilitarian standpoint. She may be asked why she chooses Calculus, Archaeology, Comparative Philology, or Constitu- tional Government ; and when she replies that it is for very love of the subject, an intellectual indulgence, there seems to be some ground for believing that scholarship apart from bread- winning is among the ideals of American women. Every administrative officer will agree that such an experience uplifts him and illumines his whole work. Considerations of sex are rarely taken into account by women any more than by men on making a choice of studies, in spite of the professedly final pronunciamentos of some edu- cators that they are of paramount importance. It has been seen that the needs, real or fancied, of the individual are guiding factors, but it occasionally happens that a girl is at the same time so old-fashioned in her views as to choose womanly subjects, and so radical as to be led by the assumed fitness of a subject for her sex as a whole rather than for herself as a member of it. 142 The President's Report The choice by sex may take one of two forms. A girl may say she will take Literature (usually pronounced " literatoor ") and History of Art because they are proper subjects for the feminine mind, or she will take Physiology and Sociology because women have special interest in family and philanthropic life. A distinguished educator has recently pleaded that " the college curriculum for a woman should contain subjects which she could recognize as having a practical bearing on her after-life," which for "the great majority of women will be in the home." If this argument has in mind courses such as cooking and sewing, it would be equally logical to require men to take com-ses in house construction and similar subjects, which will surely have " a practical bearing on their after-life," if they are to be householders, as the great majority of them will be. But just as it is true that the training given by Mathematics and Economics will be more useful to the householder as a citizen than the technical details of masonry or plumbing, so the subjects which can develop judgment and sense of proportion and keenness of observation in the woman will stand her in better stead as a home-maker than the knowledge of any niunber of elabo- rate recipes or complicated stitches. The following tables present statistics in regard to the actual choice of studies by under- graduates of Chicago, Harvard, and Wellesley in two different years: TABLE XIII PbBCBNTAGE DISTEIBCTION of REGISTEATION9 OF Eegulae Undeegeaduates, 1897-98, 1899-1900 THE UNIVEE9IT¥ OF CHICAGO Depaetment Philosophy Pedagogy Political Economy — Political Science History Archaeology Sociology Comparative Religion Semitics and Bib. Lit. Biblical Greek Comparative Philology Greek Latin Romance Men 1897-8 1899-0 7.40 2.54 6.58 9.35 0.04 3.95 6"74 0.35 5!44 9.62 8.38 5.97 0.16 5.21 4.68 10.05 0.03 4.18 0.06 0,03 3.93 6.97 11.34 Women 1897-8 1899-0 6.26 1.12 0.67 13.09 0.17 4.45 6!56 6.55 12.53 9.31 7.05 0.44 1.49 0.58 12.36 0.11 4.69 0.04 4.69 12.76 10.40 Depaetment Germanics English Literature in English Mathematics Astronomy Physics Chemistry Geology Zoology Anatomy Physiology Neurology Botany Public Speaking Men 1897-8 1899-0 8.14 13.31 0.50 7.51 0.31 3.60 5.32 3.48 0.78 0.98 0.82 0.82 7.38 12.31 0.16 9.11 0.25 2.10 4.62 3.42 2.01 5.12 0.88 0.06 Women 1897-8 1899-0 9.71 17.21 0.67 6.72 0.17 1.81 2.54 3.22 0.56 0.73 1.58 0.34 8.98 18.33 0.07 7.89 0.18 1.31 1.31 3.20 1.05 0.95 0.04 HAEVAED COLLEGE Department Semitic Indo-Iranian Greek Latin Classical Philology English .Germanic Romance Comparative Literature Slavic History Government Economics Philosophy and Education . . 1897-1898 0.91 0.01 1.97 5.00 0.10 20.45 7.83 9.52 0.04 0.03 12.35 3.00 8.37 7.75 1899-1900 0.76 0.02 2.12 4.08 0.07 16.76 7.28 9.21 0.01 13^94 5.79 10.92 6.78 Department Fine Arts Architecture Music Mathematics Astronomy Engineering Military Science Physics Chemistry Botany Zoology Geology American Archseology Anat., Physiol., and Hygiene 1897-1898 5.38 0.15 0.82 2.57 0.48 0.52 1.48 1.40 4.40 0.84 0.76 3.43 0.07 0.34 1899-1900 4.11 0.13 0.53 2.65 0.32 1.09 1.76 1.44 4.39 0.68 1.51 3.02 0.21 0.42 The Women of the University 143 TABLE XIII— Continued WELLESLEY COLLEGE Departmeot Greek Latin German , . French Italian Rhetoric Philology Biblical History English Literature Philosophy History and Political Science Economics Pure Mathematics 1897-1898 4.53 4.43 9.23 6.56 1.18 5.72 0,09 6.74 12.25 7.74 6.08 3.22 7.87 1899-1900 3.32 5.18 9.67 7.75 0.45 8.06 0.06 6.61 11.05 6.46 6.29 2.09 10.20 Department Applied Mathematics Chemistry Physics Geology and Mineralogy Botany Zoology and Physiology Hygiene Pedagogy Bibliography Elocution Art Music 1897-1898 0.43 3.48 1.32 1.33 4.86 3.67 2.01 2.50 0.69 2.03 1.80 0.24 1899-1900 0.52 2.78 3.69 1.41 3.14 4.46 2.03 1.24 0.66 1.22 1.13 0.53 Univeksity of Chicago Welleslet Col. Haevaed Col. Defabtmekt Men Women Women Men 1897-1898 1899-1900 1897-1898 1899-1900 1897-1898 1899-1900 1897-1898 1899-1900 Philosonhv and Pedafiroffv 7.40 22.42 16^26 31.15 26! 22 2.58 6.13 24.18 16! 96 31.25 19 '56 8.01 6.26 19.33 19! si 37.24 2.87 7.48 19.20 17] 56 37.77 13! 89 4.07 10.24 9.30 6.74 9.05 34.94 2.04 14.43 10.54 2!72 7.70 8.38 6.61 8.56 36.98 1.66 18.60 9.63 i!88 7.75 23.72 S^OO 37.87 6.35 12.28 1.94 2.00 6.78 Social and Historical Sciences Biblical Literature and History 30.65 7!65 33.26 4.77 Physical Sciences and Mathematics 11.82 2.61 Engineering and Military Science. . Bibliography and Elocution 2.85 The above tables need to be studied in the light of specific knowledge of the part played by required studies at the different colleges. The comparatively large amount of required work at Chicago accounts for some of the large percentages. The following summary shows the real electives taken by students who have graduated from Chicago. The details of choice are pre- sented on the following page. TABLE xrv DiSTEIBnTION OF ElECTIVES BY STUDENTS WHO GRADUATED FROM THE UnIYEKSITY OF CHICAGO PBIOE TO June, 1901 — Summaey Philosophy and Pedagogy Social and Historical Sciences Classics Modern Languages Physical Sciences and Mathematics Biological Sciences A.B. Men 3.29 39.88 10.82 25.13 14.98 5.91 Women 4.49 23.05 23.83 36.13 9.11 3.40 Ph.B. Men 3.19 52.85 1.07 28.33 10.54 4.00 Women 5.21 33.21 7.02 44.16 7.13 3.27 S.B. Men 2.34 22.46 0.68 12.38 43.28 18.89 Women 2.99 17.10 0.70 22.01 36.95 20.25 144 The President's Repoet 'o'lqnd S" i?j OOi-H (M-* «3-* i-(CO jSuB^jog jSaojo} GO'S c-o -no3IE ■*CO i?2o3Ep9jJ IC-* OJ 1 .. I 54 1 277 38 1= 9 2^:::;: ii 21 7 18 1 1 7 3 3 1 10 4 9 2 6 15 2 15 5 9 7 3 ... 16 3 11 . 1 .. > 16 1 130 21 of 2 I-::::: 32 3S 3 31 1 4^ 11 11 43 1 4 1 2 2 13 5 2 7 12 2 . 1 ... 14 1 9 2 11 5 1 2 1 7 2 2 3 5 6 2 3 ... 8 3 19 < 1 .. I 23 1 143 20 2 8 1 9 2 3 . 3 1 1 .. 5 4 1 2 1 1 4 1 2 2 5 2 "i 3 1 2 2 1 6 4 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 "i "i 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 3 1 8 1 3 3 3 3 2 4 6 5 1 1 ... 6 1 5 6 65 14 It 4 5=:::::-8 5 13 3 2 5 1 1 1 . .. 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 4 1 i 6 2 1 3 4 1 2 6 1 .. 4... 4 41 9 1 3 6 10 ^1 ' 4 14 1 1 3 1 ... 4 3 1 1 1 ... 2 .. 4 1 1 5 2 2 1 4 2 3 ' i "i 4 1 1 5 3 2 1 5 2 3 2 2 1 2 "2 2 2 1 2 2 7 2 1 4 "i 7 3 1 . . 7 1 2 1 8 3 47 13 1 1 fi 7:::;:-3 7i 4 7 6 1 2 ... 7 1 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 1 ... 3 1 33 10 73 1 1 4 1 1 a 8^::::: -2 ll ... 2 1 1 ... 2 2 ... 2 12 2 2 ... 1 . 3 2 3 3 1 "i 1 1 1 1 3 ... 3 vo 2 1 2 1 10 "i 6 4 "i 2 1 "i 1 .. 6 1 '1 1 2 1 2 1 2 P::::;-4 9} 2 3 7 ... 2 1 ... 1 1 1 5 ... 2 5 6 6 4 4 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 6 . . 34 4 9 1 4 "i 1 5 1 3 10' 7 m 4 ... 7 1 5 2 ... 1 ... 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 2 1 1 1 2 1 "i 1 1 1 .. 25 2 . 11 1 1 1 1 3 loi::::: "i 11 2 114 ... 2 ?. "3 '.'.'. . 2 ... 3 1 ... 2 1 1 1 2 7 1 1 2 2 2 2 9 lis 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 12 3 12s 121 1 13 2 ... 3 1 1 1 2 ... 2 ... 1 13 1 . 1 ... . 1 ... 2 3... 1 4 1 1 3 1 3 "i 3 1 14 J 2 2 fi "2 "2 4 1 1 11 3 1 1 2 14 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 il- 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ls 2 ... 2 3 1 1 1 16 .:;;: "1 ... 1 1 ... 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 6 6 16i'.'.'.'.'. "2 16' ... 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 "i 3 1 1 175 1 1 1 171 1 1 1 18 1 1 1 185 "i '.'.. 1 1 2 1 181 1 1 1 1 2 19 191 1 ] 1 1 2 2 1 1 1011 365 2 19? 2 271 ... 2 2 1 . 1 1 325 1 ... 46 17 1 . , .. 1 Totals.. 120 4816S 63 83 2J 112 11' 2' )U6 lie 22 132 108 54 16: 87 33 120 10' OS 1701 14 32 146119 » 15' 1376 180 The President's Kepoet TABLE XVIII Kesisteation op Divinity Students in Non-Divinity Codeses, 1893-1902, by Years and Depaetments Departments Philosophy Pedagogy Political Economy Political Science History Archeology Sociology Comparative Religion. Sanskrit Greek Latin Romance Germanic English Literature in English. Mathematics Astronomy Physics Chemistry Geology Zoology Physiology Paleontology Public Speaking Library Economy Botany Physical Culture Military Science Total 228 1893-9i 41 24 94 15 1 2 2 6 43 1891-95 17 112 21 "3 4 2 9 14 118 2 16 324 1895-91 30 2 8 d. 21 i62 13 "2 1 13 17 37 132 9 17 468 1896-97 52 3 6 5 7 i53 14 "2 2 7 11 34 87 1 1 1 94 480 1897-98 35 166 12 2 11 3 8 17 74 64 2 71 496 41 4 5 63 26 1 9 6 7 15 53 71 25 "2 8 1 355 1899-00 1900-01 42 27 9 3 19 68 5 3 9 3 10 15 48 64 4 1 3 3 1 17 1 2 1 360 38 6 2 2 13 '47 8 3 5 3 7 16 16 6 190 1901-02 31 "e 4 15 36 12 1 7 7 9 19 19 4 1 1 20 3 195 Total 327 50 44 25 113 'to! 126 11 48 29 65 121 301 589 16 2 5 5 4 10 8 1 262 1 5 16 1 2,886 TABLE XIX DiSTEIBUTION (BY PeEOENTAGES) OF EeGISTEATION OF DiVTNITY STUDENTS IN NON-DlVINITY DePAETMENTS, BY Yeaes and Gkoups Group 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Total Philosophical and Sociological Languages and Literatures 76.3 23.7 46.6 49.4 0.9 3.1 51.3 43.2 1.9 3.6 50.0 29.8 0.6 19.6 48.4 36.1 1.2 14.3 41.7 45.6 3.1 7.0 2.6 48.0 42.0 5.0 5.0 61.0 29.5 3.2 4.2 2.1 53.3 33.8 1.0 10.3 1.6 48.1 40.3 2.0 Public Speaking 9.0 Physical Culture 0.6 Total Electives 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 The Divinity School 181 TABLE XX INSTKDOTOES IN THE DIVINITY SCHOOL, 1892-1902, BT YeAK3 ANB DEPARTMENTS Department 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 SS3 Old Testament 7 New Testament i Systematic Theology 2 Church History 3 Homiletics 2 Sociology 1 Public Speaking Disciples' Cumberland Presbyterian . Total (after deducting rep etitions) 18 17 20 24 2i 3 2 3 3 1 2 2 22 7 4 2 3 2 1 1 4 22 21 25 24 14 12 6 6 4 1 3 5 1 48 TABLE XXI Insteuction (in Majors) in the Divinity School, 1892-1902, by Years and Departments Department Old Testament New Testament Systematic Theology Church History Homiletics Sociology Public Speaking Disciples' Cumberland Presbyterian. . Total 1892-93 27.50 15.00 8.00 10.50 6.50 4.00 71.50 1893-94 25.25 14.50 10.00 8.50 6.00 6.00 70.25 1894^95 41.50 20.50 6.50 15.00 8.00 6.00 97.50 1895-96 46.00 18.00 10.00 17.00 8.00 9.00 112.00 1896-97 109.50 1897-98 39.00 23.00 9.00 13.00 8.50 9.00 3.50 2.50 107.50 1898-99 39.00 23.00 8.00 16.00 8.00 10.00 2.00 3.00 109.00 1899-00 107.00 1900-01 109.75 1901-02 37.50 25.00 13.50 15.50 9.50 6.00 4.00 0.50 111.50 Total 371.5 207.0 92.0 147.5 79.5 76.5 17.5 12.0 02.0 1005.5 TABLE XXII Eegistbations (on Major-Course Basis) i in the Divinity School, 1892-1902, by Years and Department Department Old Testament New Testament Systematic Theology Church History Homiletics Sociology Public Speaking Disciples' Cumberland Presbyterian . Total 1892-93 285 194 138 274 110 116 1116 1893-94 269 1.38 242 201 137 99 1084 1894-95 389 307 92 272 178 68 1303 1895-96 389 307 206 281 101 85 "4 3 1375 1896-97 376 288 218 272 112 103 25 4 1398 1897-98 311 406 213 293 158 101 51 17 1549 1898-99 337 336 123 214 106 164 54 9 1,341 1899-00 491 464 158 316 90 63 50 13 1643 1900-01 479 545 213 269 91 129 95 4 1824 1901-02 451 440 171 Total 3774 3421 1772 274 2664 138 1219 76 1002 92 4 1645 367 54 3 14274 1 That is, counting a registration for a Major course as (me, for a double Major as two, for a Minor as one-half, etc. In cases where fractions enter in this way, the next highest whole number is taken. This accounts for the apparent discrepancies in the totals. 182 The President's Eepokt TABLE XXIII AVEKAGB NUMBBE OF MAJOH3 PEE InSTEUCTOE, 1892-1902, BY YEAE9 AND DePAETMENTS Department 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1S92- 1902 Old Testament 3.93 3.75 4.00 3.50 3.25 4.00 3.61 3.63 5.00 4.00 3.25 6.00 4.61 5.13 2.17 5.00 2.67 6.00 5.75 3.60 3.33 5.67 4.00 9.00 i'66 2.00 4.66 4.50 4.50 6.33 2.83 10.50 0.75 1.00 4.88 7.67 4.50 4.33 2.83 9.00 1.75 1.25 5.71 5.75 4.00 5.33 4.00 10.00 2.00 0.75 5.50 6.25 3.50 5.67 3.75 6.00 1.75 1.25 4.41 5.00 3.67 4.13 4.25 10.00 1.50 0.50 4.69 5.00 6.75 3.88 4.75 6.00 2.00 0.50 26.54 New Testament Systematic Theology Church History 17.25 15.33 24.58 19.88 Socioloffv 76.50 Public Speaking 5.83 2.40 Cumberland Presbyterian . . 2.00 Total 3.97 4.13 4.88 4.66 4.56 4.81 4.95 5.09 4.39 4.65 20.95 TABLE XXIV Average NnMBEE of Eegisteations (on MAJOE-ConESB Basis) pee Instehctoe, 1892-1902, by Yeaes and DEPAETMENTS Departments 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1892- 1902 Old Testament 40.64 48.50 68.75 91.17 55.00 116.00 38.39 34.38 120.75 100.25 68.25 98.50 43.14 76.63 30.50 90.50 59.17 67.50 48.63 61.30 68.50 93.67 50.50 84.50 ■2^00 3.00 41.75 41.88 109.00 90.67 37. as 103.00 12.50 4.00 38.81 135.33 106.50 97.50 52.67 101.00 25.50 8.50 48.07 83.88 61.50 71.33 70.71 115.88 79.00 105.17 59.88 108.85 71.00 67.13 45.25 128.50 47.50 4.00 56.38 87.90 85.25 68.50 69.00 76.00 46.00 4.00 269.55 New Testament 285.06 Systematic Theology 295.25 443.92 53.00 44.75 304.75 Sociology 163.50 54.00 2.13 63.00 25.00 6.25 1001.50 Public Speaking 122.33 10.80 Cumberland Presbyterian. . 3.00 Total 61.97 63.72 65.14 57.27 58.22 70.41 60.96 78.21 72.93 68.54 297.38 TABLE XXV AVEEAGE NUMBEE OF EeGISTEATIONS PBE COTJKSE, 1892-1902, BY YEAES AND DEPAETMENTS Department 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1892- 1902 Old Testament 10.35 12.93 17.19 26.05 16.92 29.00 10.64 9.48 24.15 25.06 21.00 16.42 9.36 14.95 14.08 18.10 22.19 11.25 8.46 17.03 20.55 16.53 12.63 9.39 i'.bo 1.50 8.95 15.97 24.22 14.32 13.18 9.81 16.67 4.00 7.96 17.65 23.67 22.50 18.59 11.22 14.57 6.80 8.63 14.59 15.38 13.38 13.25 16.35 27.00 2.83 12.74 18.54 22.57 18.56 11.93 10.50 14.29 5.00 13.59 21.77 19.36 16.30 10.65 12.85 31.67 8.00 12.03 17.58 12.63 17.68 14.53 12.67 23.00 8.00 10.16 16.53 Systematic Theology Church History 19.26 18.06 Homiletics 15.33 Sociology Public Speaking Disciples' 13.09 20.97 4.50 Cumberland Presbyterian . . 1.50 Total 15.60 15.42 13.36 12.27 12.76 14.41 12.30 15.35 16.62 14.75 14.20 The Divinity School 183 TABLE XXVI INSTEUCTION IN THK DlVINITT SCHOOL, 1892-1902, BT YEAES AND INSTEUCTOES 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1892-1902 a d d 2 a a en d fl w fl , fl en fli fl en fl fl en p fl en a fl jn fl a en C fl .2 1. /■ fl 1 fl 0.2 p S.2 au _o.2 .2n 0.2 Su S.2.2P. 0.2 .2. S.J .2^ S.2 .2^ 0.2 Su s.| .°|'-2- ■^■^ ^ .w +J ■r-,-U ^J ^ ■rr.^ 4J Q ■i-j-W -^ *^ IwRTRTTOTOR rt y tO.O^ a M.^ ca c 10.5 rt Oj.rt, CO rt ai^ 5*0 "S.S cd nJ.^ cS «.& cC rtu eej.;=. ^1^ O X Af %J \J ^ V/'Ur SI .sa-s sg SI ^S.2 sg ^a-2 SI ag SI sa-2 .M^ en ^a-2! .2^ en SI SI 2'm en SI ^ ts ,« si tiCd oi °.| 'SJO4S °| 'Slaij qg 5Jfl.S o| tDfl.5 og U)fl rt °| b£fl «3 03 6Dfl cfl "og bcfl rt "Sf tifl =^ "3| 5fl « s^ ,S 0P5 .2" oP5 OtS CD ofQ Ow oj oCQ Om m oM ChH oW Om gpq oH ® oW 0.5 a> oW oS 00m Om <5 oCQ ^ Ph " Z « z « 2; K Z Oh z OS •z « g M g K g M Z M Old Testament: W.R.Harper 7 105 5^2 63 91/2 113 9 163 8 129 6 132 6/2 127 10/2 327 U 365 11 264 87 1786 S. Burnham IH 16 IVs 16 E. G. Hirsch 3/2 17 5" '12 3 11 9/2 '26 4 " "4 i ' "i 2% "e i" '27 32H 97 George Adam Smith . . ''/2 '22 H 22 I. M. Price 6" 2 '89 16 4% IH '■is 24 9" 4 '85 57 s" 2 '68 19 51/2 4/2 '62 46 6^ '46 3 i" '77 7 3 37 28 5 " 1 '34 9 8" 1 '68 9 66?i 19'/i 631 G. S. Goodspeed 211 R. F. Harper 5'/2 31 3'/2 8 7'/2 30 8 47 7 18 83i 29 5/2 '26 11 29 4 10 4 11 6iU 231 J. H. Breasted 1 4 m 14 4 22 7 41 11 25 1 3 4 13 :^34 120 H.L.Wmett K 23 1/2 19 ;i 10 3/2 24 iii ig 3 33 IS'ji 127 C. F. Kent 2'/i 1 ig 9 2H 'si 22 2" 2 "9 17 i.H 'si 5H '38 6/2 '25 514 '36 'Ji "4 7 24?i 59 C. E. Crandall 180 C.R.Brown 1 8 1 8 J. M. P. Smith ii-i 'io ii "4 2 14 G.R. Berry i" "2 iVi "s 2'4 10 W. R. Harper and Breasted 2 27 2 27 W. R. Harper and Wil- lett 1 11 1 11 W. R. Harper and Crandall 1 37 2 47 1 19 4 103 Price and Breasted. .. 1 9 1 9 Price, Willett, and Crandall 2 24 2 24 Breasted and Willett - i' 'i2 1 12 Breasted and Crandall 2 ' '42 2 42 Willett and Smith.... 2 '22 2 22 Crandall and Brown.. i" 'i7 1 17 New Testament : E. D. Burton 7 97 61^ 83 6-/2 7 93 IGO 6 6 126 136 8 3 190 31 8 8'/. 149 176 6 83i 90 158 8 9'-.i 139 231 8Si 6?i 241 148 4 8V4 89 190 68 ?i 57;i 1296 Shailer Mathews 1230 C. R. Gregory 1 14 1 10 1 10 3 34 J.S. Riggs i " "36 1 SO Rush Rhees i" 'is 1 18 P. A. Nordell 4" 58 3" ii iii 'i2 2" "4 4 9/2 58 W. M. Arnolt 27 C. W. Votaw 'vi "2 41/2 31 2'/2 42 3 28 6" '49 6'/, '8i eii 71 7H '87 2 ' 40 6 ■ii 441/j 500 T. H. Root 31/2 38 6 " '55 5' '74 ay, 11 38 E. J. Goodspeed 129 H. T. DeWolfe ii "s M 8 C. E. Woodruff V" 'ii '/i 14 Burton and Mathews. 'i/j si '/4 31 Mathews and Votaw.. i" "7 14" "6 1/2 13 Systematic Theoloav: G. W. Northrup..:.... i% 94 5 147 4'/2 47 3'/2 5S 3 98 3 107 2 35 1 28 26y» 6U G. B.Foster 1 30 6 138 6 120 6 106 6 88 6 130 7" iis 6 " ios 44 865 A.B.Bruce Vi 12 H 12 F. Johnson i " 'is 1 15 B. P. Simpson 3'/. ■« 5" '95 sy. 139 G. B. Smith 3 '37 7/2 '66 ioy2 103 Northrup and Foster. 1 23 1 28 Church History ; E.B. Hulbert 5'/; 159 4y2 120 5 93 6 129 7 140 5 140 7 116 6/2 144 5 96 7 124 58/2 1258 F. Johnson 3!-« 79 3!4 81 4 99 4 65 4 46 4 49 4 49 41^ 48 4/2 1 52 44 1/2 31 37/2 1 598 A. C. McGiffert *-2 44 A. K. Parker i 5 1 5 J. W. Conley i;:- 36 1!4 36 J. W. Moncrief 6" 'so 7" '88 4" '86 4" ioi 5" '49 e" i24 6 " '78 6' iis 48 724 BomiUtics. Ch, Polity, and Pastoral Duties : 5 81 5/2 1 123 7 156 g 86 g 77 g 108 30 20 6 2 86 20 5 2/2 72 18 6 2/2 72 19 8 l'/2 116 22 60/2 i7y2 1 976 F. Johnson 114 29 14 14 14 2 15 2 18 2 198 W. H. P. Faunce H 17 M 37 C. R. Henderson Vi "s M 8 Sociolony : C. R. Henderson 4 116 6 99 6 68 9 S5 lOH 103 9 101 10 164 6 63 10 129 6 76 76/j 1002 Public Speaking: S.H. Clark 1 11 3 26 2 31 1 23 1 10 8 101 W. B. Chamberlain... Vt 14 54 25 1 39 F. M. Blanchard 2" '54 iii ig i 53 i io 5/2 136 Clark and Blanchard. 1 19 2 72 3 91 Disciples* Div. House: H.L. Willett 1 1 1/2 11 H 2 % 3 3/2 17 E. S.Ames 1 3 i '4 2 7 W. L. Garrison i 6 Vt '2 lU g E. Gates 1 2 'H 4 ' a 4 2 10 H. Van Kirk 1 3 2 io 3 13 Cum.Pres.Div. House : W. C.Logan 2 3 2 3 'That is, counting two registrations for a Minor course as equivalent to one registration for a Major course £ind one for a Double Major as equivalent to two for a Major, etc. 184 The President's Eepoet TABLE xxvn Eegistkation in the Divinity School, 1892-1902, by Cocbbes (Showing the number of times each course was given, its value in Majors, the total registration, and the registration on Major-course basis) Semitic Languages and Literatures Professor W. R. Harper : Beginning Hebrew The Book of Kings Books of Samuel and Hebrew Grammar Advanced Hebrew Grammar Advanced Hebrew Grammar : Etymology Advanced Hebrew Grammar : Syntax General Survey of O. T. Literature and History. . . Development of Old Testament Literature Old Testament Institutions and Laws Old Testament Legal Literature Old Testament Legal Literature Early Old Testament Traditions Prophecy and the History of Prophecy The Minor Prophets of the Assyrian Period The Minor Prophets of the Post-Exilic Period The Minor Prophets of the Babylonian Period The Book of Hosea Old Testament Wisdom Literature (= Old Testa ment Philosophy and Ethics) The Book of Job Hebrew Poetic Literature Exegetical Study of Selected Psalms Hexateuchal Analysis The Atonement Arabic Language Arabic Language Advanced Arabic Arabic Geography, History, and Commentary Arabic Geography, History, and Commentary Arabic Poetry and Inscriptions Earlier Suras of the Kuran Earlier Suras of the Kuran Later Suras of the Kuran The Thousand and One Nights Ethiopic Semi liars: The Psalms Amos Hosea Micah I Micah II Micah and Nahum Zechariah Arabic Seminar Earlier Suras of the Kuran Comparative Semitic Grammar Comparative Semitic Etymology I Comparative Semitic Etymology II Comparative Semitic Etymology III Comparative Semitic Syntax I Comparative Semitic Syntax II Comparative Semitic Syntax III Comparative Semitic Phonology Value of Course in Majors 1 1 1 1 K 1 1 1 ^ H K 1 1 1 1 1 "4 1 1 1 1 H 1 1 No. of Times Given 4 1 1 2 4 5 8 1 3 1 1 4 6 1 2 2 1 5 1 2 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Total Registra- tions 51 6 28 35 40 56 369 19 101 14 22 49 181 22 50 57 156 19 18 5 13 29 24 4 2 11 9 7 22 7 3 6 7 6 13 14 9 8 4 14 9 2 9 5 2 1 8 5 3 11 Total Value in Majors 5 1 2 1 1 H 4 H H 1 1 3 % 1 1 Eegistra- tion on Major Basis 51 6 28 18- 20 28 369 19 101 14 11 49 181 22 25 29- 4 156 19 18 5 13 15- 24 2 1 11 5- 7 22 4- 3 6 4- 6 13 14 9 8 4 14 9 2 9 5 2 1 8 5 3 11 The Divinity School 185 TABLE XXYII — Continued Semitic Languages and Literatures Professor W. R. Harper: Sunday Morning Bible Courses : Hebrew Laws : Priest Codes Early Old Testament Traditions Prophecy and the History of Prophecy Isaiah I-XII Isaiah XL-LXVI The Work of Isaiah Jeremiah Hebrew Philosophy and Ethics The Book of Job Early Hebrew Psalms Later Hebrew Psalms Professor W. R. Harper and Associate Professor Breasted : Hebrew Language Professor W. R. Harper and Assistant Professor Willett : Hebrew Language Professor W. R. Harper and Dr. Crandall : Hebrew Language Historical Hebrew : Books of Samuel Professor Burnham : Advanced Hebrew Grammar The Psalter (Hebrew) The Book of Psalms (English) Professor Hirsch : Hebrew Sight-Reading The Book of Job Introduction to the Textual Criticism of the O. T . Introduction to the Textual Criticism of the O. T . Palestinian Archasology Life in Old Testament Times General Introduction to Rabbinical Literature and Life General Introduction to Rabbinical Literature and Life Rabbinica Rabbinical Commentaries on Genesis or Other Books of the Old Testament History of the Jewish Sects Mishnah Selected Portions of the Mishnah and Abodahzarah Introduction to Talmudic Literature The Talmud Targumic Aramaic Selected Portions of the Babylonian Talmud. . . . Legislation of the Talmud Civil and Criminal Legislation of the Talmud. . . Talmudical Analogies to the New Testament The Thousand and One Nights The Thousand and One Nights Philosophical Literature of the Arabians Hebrew Arabic Philosophy Assyrian Languages Coptic Ethiopic Mandaic Advanced Syriao Advanced Syriao Value of Course in Majors y^ % % H u 1 1 y^ % 1 1 y^ 1 1 y^ 1 1 y^ y^ 1 y u No. of Times Given Total Registra- tions 22 58 64 33 56 41 55 121 124 99 79 27 11 3 83 1 20 1 3 1 16 1 13 1 1 2 4 2 5 1 2 1 3 1 18 2 6 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 5 2 3 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 3 5 1 7 2 3 1 1 1 4 2 16 1 1 2 3 2 3 3 7 1 3 Total "Value in Majors y y y y Registra- tion on Major Basis 11 29 32 17- 28 21- 28- 61- 62 50- 40- 27 11 3 83 1 20 U 2 y y 8 7 y 1 1 2 2 5 y 1 1 3 1 18 2 6 y y 1 2 y 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 5 '¥ 2 3 1 1 3 7 1 2 y 1 1 8 1 4 y 1 1 2 1 2 3 7 y 2 186 The President's Eepoet TABLE XXYIl— Continued Semitic Languages and Literatures Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Registra- Value in Majors Given tion Majors 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 y2 1 43 K 1 8 106 8 1 4 58 4 Vz 1 21 Vi H 1 21 M 1 1 2 1 K 1 15 Vi M 1 4 M M 2 22 1 V2 3 10 IK 1 1 2 1 H 1 8 J^ M 1 29 % 1 1 31 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 8 1 K 1 14 K 1 3 10 3 1 2 9 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 ^ 1 10 .1^ 1 1 27 1 1 2 23 2 1 1 31 1 % 1 7 K M 1 12 ^ 1 1 20 1 }4. 1 10 Vi 1 1 3 1 % 1 8 % 1 2 15 2 % 1 15 J^ 1 1 5 1 Vi 1 11 }-2 1 2 17 2 Vi 2 22 1 1 1 9 1 M 1 6 J^ 1 1 6 1 1 2 12 2 J^ 1 13 }^ 1 1 5 1 1 3 15 3 Je 1 10 }i 1 1 2 1 }^ 3 54 IJ^ 1 2 17 2 )i 1 4 }^ 1 1 3 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis Professor Hirsch : Seminars: Rabbinical Philosophy The Talmud Professor George Adam Smith : The Hebrew Psalter Professor Price : Hebrew Language, I Hebrew Language, II Hebrew Language, II Historical Hebrew Historical Hebrew : Books of Kings The Books of Samuel Sight-Reading in Kings Advanced Hebrew Grammar : Etymology Advanced Hebrew Grammar : Syntax Old Testament History Old Testament History Biblical Chronology General Survey of O. T. Literature and History. . . General Introduction to the Old Testament Special Introduction Special Introduction History of the Canon and Text of the O. T History, Principles, and Methods of Old Testa- ment Interpretation Special Introduction to the Prophetic Books Origin, Growth, and Character of the Prophetic Books Origin, Growth, and Character of the Prophetic Books Hebrew Prophets Messianic Prophecy Samuel and Kings in English Ezekiel in English Jeremiah in English The Minor Prophets in English The Psalter in English Isaiah I-XXXIX in English Isaiah Isaiah I-XXXIX Isaiah I-XXXIX Isaiah XL-LXVI Isaiah XL-LXVI Jeremiah Jeremiah Deuteronomy Deuteronomy Deuteronomy and Selections from the Prophets. Ezekiel Ezekiel V The Book of Job The Hebrew Psalter The Psalms Modern Discoveries and the Old Testament Modern Discoveries and the Old Testament Books of Kings and Their Parallel Assyrian Records " Special " Work in the Old Testament Biblical Aramaic and the Book of Daniel 1 2 22- 106 58 11- 11- 2 8- 1 11 5 2 4 15- 31 9 8 7 10 9 4 5 27 23 31 4- 6 20 5 3 4 15 8- 5 6- 17 11 9 3 6 12 7- 5 15 5 2 27 17 2 3 The Divinity School 187 TABLE XX.YII— Continued Semitic Languages and Literatures Professor Price: Biblical Aramaic Assyrian Early Babylonian Inscriptions Seminars: Isaiah I-XII Babylonian Bilingual Psalm Literature, I Babylonian Bilingual Psalm Literature, II Professor Price and Associate Professor Breasted : Hebrew Language, I Professor Price, Assistant Professor Willett, and Dr. Crandall : Hebrew Language, I and II Professor Goodspeed : History of Antiquity to the Fall of the Persian Empire ' Contemporary History of the Old Testament : Egypt, Babylonia, and Assyria Oriental Antiquity under Assyrian Domination. . . History of Babylonia and Assyria History of Egypt Egyptian Historical Documents Studies in Assyro-Babylonian Historical Docum'ts Introduction to the History of Hebrew Monarchy Biblical History Biblical History History of Israel Beginnings of Hebrew History History of the Hebrew Monarchy History of the Hebrews from Solomon to the Maccabees Post-Exilic Biblical History Exilic and Post-Exilic History: Beginnings of Judaism Ancient Semitic Religions ^ Religions of the Semites : Egyptians^ Religions of the Semites : Babylonians and Assyrians ^ Religions of the Semites : Hebrews and Phoeni cians ^ , Professor R. F. Harper: Historical Hebrew Historical Hebrew: Books of Kings Historical Hebrew: Books of Samuel Sight-Reading in Samuel Samuel: Critical Work Deuteronomy Micah Semitic Archseology Palestinian Life Mishnah Sumerian Texts Books of Kings and the Cuneiform Inscriptions. . . The Cuneiform Inscriptions and the Old Testament Biblical Aramaic Arabic Language Value of Course in Majors K 1 y2 H 1 1 1 1 1 1 H H %4 y^ y 1 1 No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion 11 6 5 3 1 1 12 101 2 16 4 17 12 3 10 12 33 2 18 3 35 3 24 2 19 1 9 1 19 2 18 1 6 1 3 1 4 1 17 i 1 '6 36 i 3 i 9 i 8 2 7 i 5 i 4 i 12 1 3 1 2 i 9 10 2 6 Total Value in Majors rn Registra- tion on Major Basis 24 101 2 16 V. 2 y 1 9 6 2 5 12 1 a3 1 9 3 35 3 24 2 19 1 9 y 2 10 18 1 3 3 1 4 1 5 1 3 1 9 1 \v. 18 M 1 5 4 1 4 if 3 2 W 6 1 3 1 2 U 5 2 10 J< 3 1 This course properly belongs in the department of History. The figures are not counted in the totals under Semitics. 2 The courses in Semitic Religions are counted in the department of Comparative Religion, and the figures are not counted in the totals in the Department of Semitics, 188 The Eeesident's Keport TABLE TSy 11— Continued Semitic Languages and Literatures Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Eegistra- Value in Majors Given tion Majors 1 6 1 7 26 7 1 2 1 10 30 10 1 2 1 1 1 1 H 1 2 Y 1 3 1 4 13 4 H 1 7 Yz 6 18 6 4 9 4 1 2 1 2 7 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 11 3 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 1 4 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 M 1 5 M H 2 16 1 Y^ 1 10 Y 1 4 1 1 2 1 K 1 3 K % 1 2 ^ Yi 1 2 Y 1 3 1 K 2 6 1 ^ 2 5 1 1 3 1 3 6 3 3 5 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 8 2 Y^ 2 5 1 3 7 3 2 3 2 1 4 1 K 1 2 Y 1 7 1 Yi 2 6 1 1 2 1 1 5 1 Y 1 44 Y 1 1 12 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis Professor F. R. Harper: The Kuran Syriao for Beginners Advanced Syriae Assyrian Language Intermediate Assyrian Advanced Assyrian Advanced Assyrian Assyrian and Babylonian Inscriptions Assyrian Historical Inscriptions Assyrian Historical Inscriptions Early Assyrian Historical Inscriptions Later Assyrian Historical Inscriptions Assyrian Mythological Inscriptions Assyrian Syllabaries and Mythological Inscriptions Assyrian Religious Texts Assyrian Letters Assyrian Letters and Babylonian Contracts . . . Babylonian Historical Inscriptions Early Babylonian Inscriptions Babylonian Religious Texts ■ Babylonian Psalms and Hymns Babylonian Psalms and Addresses Babylonian Contracts Seminar: Comparative Semitic Etymology, II Associate Professor Breasted: Hebrew Language, II Hebrew Sight-Reading in Kings Critical Reading in Deuteronomy Samuel: Critical Work Selected Assyrian Historical Inscriptions (x) . Arabic Language Arabic Language Arabic Syntax Arabic Prose , Arabic Prose and Composition Arabian Nights Arabian Nights: Sight-Reading Early Suras of the Kuran Arabic History Arabic Geography Arabic Poetry and Inscriptions Maqrizi (Prose Reading) Hieroglyphics for Beginners Hieroglyphics for Beginners Egyptian Texts Late Egyptian Coptic Language Coptic Language History of Egypt History of Egypt Egyptian Archfeology Egyptian Life and Antiquities Sunday Course: Egypt and Israel Associate Professor Breasted and Assistant Professor Willett: Hebrew Language, I 6 26 2 30 2 1 1 3 13 4- 18 9 2 7 2 2 2 U 3 2 1 4 4 5 2- 8 5 4 2 2- 1 1 3 3 3- 3 6 5 3 1 8 3- 7 3 4 1 7 3 2 5 22 12 The Divinity School 189 TABLE XXVn— Continued Semitic Languages and Literatures Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Registra- Value in JMajors Given tion Majors 2 ■ 21 2 H 8 y % 12 1 K 4 y M 1 M M 6 M 1 2 1 Vi 6 K Vi 6 y ^ 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 40 3 ^ 2 38 1 1 2 7 2 % 1 45 y 2 1 11 2 1 2 15 2 Vi 1 24 y ^ 1 22 y % 2 6 1 M 1 1 y y% 1 1 y 1 1 12 1 K 1 2 ^ K 1 7 y 1 2 13 2 ^ 1 9 >^ 1 2 24 2 y^ 1 20 y 1 3 22 3 1 2 11 2 1 2 14 2 1 1 18 1 K 1 8 y ^ 1 11 y 1 1 6 1 M 1 21 M y^ 1 1 y M 1 4 M M 2 15 y M 1 10 y J^ 2 6 y M 1 5 M M 2 7 1 y 2 8 1 y^ 1 3 ^ 1 1 10 1 y 4 14 2 y 3 6 1>^ Registra- tion on Major Basis Associate Professor Breasted and Dr. Crandall: Hebrew Language, I and II Assistant Professor Willett: Historical Hebrew: Books of Samuel Historical Hebrew: Books of Kings Hebrew Sight-Reading, I Hebrew Sight-Reading, II Hebrew Sight-Reading: Chronicles, Ezra, Nehe- miah, and Esther Deuteronomy Deuteronomy Jeremiah The Psalter in English Biblical Apocalyptic Palestinian Geography Outline of Hebrew History Outline of Hebrew History Palestinian Life and Government Sunday Course: Prophecy and the History of Prophecy Assistant Professor Willett and Dr. J. M. P. Smith: Hebrew Language, I and II Dr. Kent: Outline of Hebrew History Messianic Prophecy The Minor Prophets Minor Prophets of the Babylonian Period Isaiah I-XXXIX in English The Minor Prophets of the Assyrian Period in English Old Testament Wisdom Literature Title not given Title not given Dr. Crandall : Historical Hebrew Historical Hebrew Historical Hebrew and Syntax Books of Samuel Samuel : Critical Work Kings : Critical Work Genesis : Critical Work The Book of Judges The Book of Chronicles Books of Kings Hebrew Sight-Reading Hebrew Sight-Reading Sight-Reading : Historical Hebrew Sight-Reading : Samuel and Kings Sight-Reading : Samuel Sight-Reading : Deuteronomy Sight-Reading : Deuteronomy Sight-Reading : Jeremiah Advanced Hebrew Grammar Advanced Hebrew Grammar : Etymology Advanced Hebrew Grammar : Syntax Old Testament : "Special." Biblical Aramaic The Targum 42 4 6 1 1- 2- 2 3 3 15 1 1 40 19 7 23- 22 15 12 11 3 1- 1- 12 1 4- 13 5- 24 10 22 11 14 18 4 6- 6 6- 1- 1 4- 5 2- 2- 4- 4 2- 10 7 3 190 The Peesident's Report TABLE XXYII— Continued Systematic Languages and Literatures Value of No. of Total Course in Times Registra- Majors Given tion 1 1 17 M 5 1 6 1 2 K 3 H 12 H 6 1 7 H 8 Total Value in Majors Registra- tion on Major Basis Dr. Crandall and Dr. Brown : Hebrew Language, I Dr. Berry : Sight-Reading : Kings Assyrian for Beginners Early Assyrian Historical Inscriptions Dr. Brown : Jeremiah : Critical Study Jeremiah (in English) Dr. J. M. P. Smith : Sight-Reading : The Prophetic Books Deuteronomy The Minor Prophets }4 1^ 17 2- 6 2 The New Testament Literature and Interpretation Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Registra- Value in Majors Given tion Majors 1 3 90 3 1,^ 1 as Vz 1 1 7 1 V^ 1 4 % H 1 7 % 1 1 5 1 1 3 168 3 K 1 14 Vi 1 4 38 4 1 1 16 1 H 1 43 % % 1 9 ¥2 1 1 28 1 % 1 10 H 1 8 190 8 Vi 1 33 H % 1 35 M 1 4 87 4 1 1 13 1 1 2 13 2 H 1 23 % 1 5 98 5 % 1 27 }i 1 1 19 1 1 2 19 2 % 1 21 M }4 1 18 H V2 1 24 M V2 1 8 K 1 1 14 1 % 1 30 % 1 3 17 3 Registra- tion on Major Basis Professor Burton : New Testament Greek Greek Grammar New Testament Syntax New Testament Syntax Textual Criticism of the New Testament Syntax of the Article and the Noun in the N. T... . General Survey of New Testament Literature Introduction to the Gospels Introduction to the Synoptic Gospels Historical Study of the Life of Christ Historical Study of the Lite of Christ Special Research in the Life of Christ Life of the Apostle Paul, and Introduction to the Pauline Epistles Rapid Interpretation The Gospel of Matthew The Gospel of Matthew in English The Gospel of Mark in English The Gospel of John Theology of the Gospel and the First Epistle of John Theology of the Synoptic Gospels Theology of the Synoptic Gospels The Epistle to the Romans The Epistle to the Romans Theology of Romans The Epistle to the Galatians The Epistle to the Galatians The Epistle to the Colossians I. Thessalonians The Second Group of the Letters of the Apostle Paul Theology of the Second Group of the Epistles of Paul The Third Group of the Letters of the Apostle Paul New Testament Quotations from the Old Testa ment : The Gospels 90 17- 7 2 4- 5 168 7 38 16 22- 5- 28 5 190 17- 18- 87 13 13 12- 98 14- 19 19 11- 9 12 14 15 17 The Divinity School 191 TABLE TSyU— Contimted The New Testament Literature and Interpretation Professor Burton: New Testament Quotations from the Old Testa- ment : The Gospels New Testament Quotations from the Old Testa- ment : The Epistles New Testament Quotations from the Old Testa- ment : The Epistles The Teaching of Jesus in its Relation to the Thought of his Day The Doctrine of the Atonement in the N. T . . . The Doctrine of the Atonement in the N. T. . . Studies in the Apostolic Fathers Research Special Special Seminars : Lexicographical Seminar : Historical Study of Im- portant New Testament Words Lexicographical Seminar, I Lexicographical Seminar, II Theology of the Synoptic Gospels Theology of John Theology of the Gospel of John The Gospel of John Theology of Romans Theology of Romans Sunday Courses: Historical Study of the Life of Christ, II Historical Study of the Life of Christ, from the Birth to the End of the Galilean Ministry. . . Historical Study of the Life of Christ, from the Departure from Galilee to the Ascension Life of Paul, I Life of Paul, II Ethical Teachings of Jesus Professor Burton and Professor Mathews : Historical Study of the Life of Christ, III Professor Gregory : Greek Paleography Documents and Criticism of the N. T. Text . . . Professor Mathews : New Testament Greek The Gospel of Matthew in English The Gospel of Mark in English The Gospel of Luke The Gospel of Luke The Gospel of Luke in English The Gospel of Luke in English The Teaching of Jesus The Religious Teachings of Jesus The Ethical Teachings of Jesus The Social Teachings of Jesus The Parables of Jesus Paul and the Pauline Epistles The Second Group of the Epistles of the Apostle Paul The Epistle to the Galatians The Epistle to the Ephesians The Epistle to the Ephesians Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Eegistra- Value in Majors Given tion Majors M 7 Y^ 1 2 1 ^ 12 ^ K 10 Yz 1 13 1 'A 27 Y H 3 Y% 1 1 1 1 1 1 Vz 1 Yi 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 I 1 35 2 1 9 1 1 16 1 1 14 1 1 16 1 M 5 K Vz 73 Yz K 70 Yz H 57 K H 41 Yi H 65 1 K 21 M H 61 Yz Yi 3 23 ^}4 % 3 44 IK 1 2 59 2 1 23 1 Y. 19 Y2 1 15 2 y% 6 Yz 1 11 1 Yz 29 K 1 41 1 Y^ 53 Y Yt 54 Y 1 7 1 Yi 91 IY2 1 13 1 M 12 H Y% 52 m 1 17 1 Y^ 21 Yz Registra- tion on Major Basis 4- 5 13 14- 2- 1 1 1- 2 2 2 35 9 16 14 16 3- 37- 35 29- 21- 33- 6- 31- 12- 22 59 23 10- 15 3 11 15- 41 27- 27 7 46- 13 6 26 17 11- 192 The President's Report TABLE XXVII— Conimwed The New Testament Literature and Interpretation Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion Total Value in Majors ^ 1 9 32 358 'i Yz 2 43 1 2 31 2 Y 3 63 Wi 3 23 3 3 37 3 y^ 12 35 ¥ H 19 93 y . 4 12 2 2 1 7 1 7 1 17 1 18 1 6 1 6 1 15 2 6 1 'i 12 51 39 31 38 44 38 31 y y y y y y M 14 y 1 1 7 1 'A 12 y y^ 12 23 I y^ y^ 16 44 1 9 1 y^ 19 M y 16 y 1 5 1 y 16 36 ^ 1 8 170 8 1 5 49 5 1 4 14 4 1 1 3 1 1 2 23 2 Registra- tion on Major Basis Professor Mathews: Teachings of the Apostle Paul History of New Testament Times in Palestine Political History of the Jews in N. T. Times Social and Religious History of Palestine in New Testament Times Social and Religious History of Palestine in New Testament Times History of New Testament Times in the Graeco- Roman World History of the Apostolic Age History of .the Apostolic Age The Life of Christ, I The Life of Christ, II The Life of Christ Sources of the Life of Jesus The Apostolic Fathers The Life of Christ (in Palestine) The Historical Geography of Palestine (in Palestine) History of the Canon of the New Testament Sociological Ideas of the Gospels Seminars: Sources of the Life of Christ The New Testament Canon The Book of Acts The Gospel of Luke Sunday Courses: Institutions of Early Christianity The Life of Christ, I The Teachings of Jesus The Parables of Jesus Religious Teachings of Jesus Life of Paul, II Life of Paul, III The Teachings of the Apostle Paul as to Social Problems Professor Mathews and Assistant Professor Votaw : Paul's Corinthian Epistles Sunday Course: Bible-Class Teaching Professor Rhees : Gospel of John in English Special Phases of the Life of Jesus Professor Riggs : The Epistle to the Hebrews The Teachings of the Apostle Paul Assistant Professor Nordell : History of the Maccabean Age and N. T. Times . . . Introduction to New Testament Books Rapid Interpretation of the Gospels Historical Study of the Life of Christ Outline of the Life of the Apostle Paul Outline History of the Apostolic Age Assistant Professor Votaw: New Testament Greek Rapid Translation and Interpretation Textual Criticism of the New Testament History of New Testament Times General Survey of the New Testament Literature. 16 358 22- 31 32- 23 37 6 35 10- 93 12 2 7 7 17 18 6 6 15 3 26- 20- 16- 10- 22 19 4- 7 6 6 12- 8 22 9 10- 8 5 8 18 170 49 14 3 23 The Divinity School 193 TABLE XK.Y11— Continued The New Testament Literature and Interpretation Assistant Professor Votaw: Life of Christ (for the Colleges only) The Life of Christ The Booli of Acts The Founding of the Christian Church The History of the Apostolic Age The History of the Apostolic Age The Teaching of Jesus The Gospel of John (in English) Rapid Reading and Interpretation of Certain Pauline Epistles Paul's Corinthian Epistles Paul's Corinthian Epistles Writings of the Apostle Peter (in English) Selected Readings in Jewish and Patristic Greet: The Septuagint Jewish Literature of New Testament Times Sunday Courses: The Institutions of Judaism The Miracles of Jesus The Life of Paul, I The Life of Paul, II Dr. Arnolt : Paul's Epistle to the Thessalonians Introduction to the Epistle to the Hebrews, the General Epistles, and the Revelation New Testament Quotations from the O. T Textual Criticism of the New Testament History of the Problem of the Synoptic Gospels and of the Historical Criticism of the Fourth Gospel Origin of the Septuagint Origin and History of the Septuagint and Other Greek Versions of the Old Testament Rapid Reading of Portions of the Septuagint . . . The Writings of Josephus Christian Literature to Eusebius " Special " Dr. E. J. Goodspeed: New Testament Greek Rapid Translation and Interpretation of the N. T. Textual Criticism of the New Testament Rapid Reading in the Septuagint The Apostolic Fathers Christian Literature to Eusebius Mr. Root : Maccabean Age and New Testament Times Apocrypha Rapid Translation of the New Testament Studies in the Epistles of Paul (in English) Studies in the Apostolic History Mr. De Wolfe : Gospel of John Mr. Woodruff : The Gospel of Luke (in English) Value of Course in Majors 1 1 y2 H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 H No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion 2 9 4 24 29 4 52 14 40 1 4 3 11 11 10 30 9 44 4 2 2 1 1 2 5 78 26 7 6 7 5 5 3 3 26 7 15 27 Total Value in Majors 1 3 )4 1 3 1 M ¥2 1 1 1 1 }4 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 H 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis 2 9 4 24 29 2 52 7 8 40 1- 2 3 11 11 5- 22 2 1 1- 2 5 78 26 7 6 7 5 5 2- 2- 26 4- 14- 194 The President's Repoet TABLE TK.YU— Continual Department of Systematic Theology Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion Total Value in Majors ? 1 1 2 38 1 1 3 2 67 61 ¥" 1 1 1 3 23 29 120 1 1 3 1 29 74 42 1/ IK 1 1 1 22 1 ¥ i 2 93 87 2 2 1 1 17 1 Vz 1 14 V2 2 1 10 2 2 1 5 2 1 2 19 2 1 2 9 2 1 5 147 5 1 1 1 24 30 1 H 1 1 3 23 60 H 3 1 1 50 1 1 1 4 18 65 Vz 4 1 ^ 19 2 1 2 16 2 1 1 14 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 25 1 1 1 6 14 130 '1 1 1 52 1 1 2 12 2 1 3 96 3 1 2 17 2 1 3 37 3 1 3 39 3 1 1 28 1 1 22 1 ¥ 14 23 1 1 17 1 H H 2 2 2 4 17 24 30 19 H 1 1 1 1 1 23 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis Professor Northrup : Biblical Theology Theology as Taught by Paul Theology as Taught by Paul Introduction and Theology Proper Theology Proper Prolegomena The Doctrine of God The Doctrine of God Anthropology The Doctrine of Redemption Soteriology Soteriology Christology Constructive Christology Eschatology Seminars : Christology, I Christology, II Christology New England Theology Professor Foster : Outline of Systematic Theology Outline of Systematic Theology Introduction and Theology Proper The Doctrine of God Anthropology Anthropology: The Doctrine of Sin Christology Eschatology Patristic Theology. Scholastic Theology The Theology of the Reformation Development of Protestant Theology since Kant. . Theological Methodology Theological Encyclopedia and Methodology Theological EncyclopEedia and Methodology Christian Ethics Apologetics: The Essential Nature of the Chris- tian Religion Apologetics, II: History of Apologetics Philosophical Apologetics Kaftan's Dogmatik Seminars : Development of Protestant Theology since Kant. . The Theology of Ritschl and the Ritschlians Professor Northrup and Professor Foster : Christology Assistant Professor Simpson : Christian Evidences Christian Evidences Inspiration and Theology Proper Doctrine of Inspiration Doctrine of Inspiration Inspiration Theology and Anthropology Anthropology Soteriology Soteriology and Eschatology Ethics 1 38 34- 61 12- 15- 120 15- 37 42 22 47- 87 17 7 20 10 19 9 147 12 30 12- 60 50 9 65 19 16 14 10 6 25 7 130 52 12 96 17 37 39 28 22 7 23 17 2 9- 12 15 10- 23 The Divinity School 195 TABLE TSYII— Continued Department of Systematic Theology Professor Johnson : Soteriology Mr. G. B. Smith : Outline Course in Theology Patristic Theology Theology of the Greek Church Theology of the Latin Church Christian Ethics Anthropology The Doctrine of Grace The Doctrines of the Holy Spirit and of Grace The Theological Significance of Leading Move- ments of Thought in the Nineteenth Century . . . Herrmann's Ethik Herrmann's Ethik Professor Bruce : Agnosticism and the Historical Foundations of the Christian Church Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Total Registra- Value in tion Majors 15 1 24 5 5 3 21 10 5 22 1 3 8 ¥2 23 H Registra- tion on Major Basis 15 24 5 5 3 21 10 5 22 1 3 4 12- Department of Church History Professor Hulbert : Ancient Church History (A. D. 30-800) Prior to Constantine Prior to Constantine The Church in the Age of Constantine From Constantine to 'Theodosius From Theodosius to Charles the Great The Conversion of Northern and Western Europe . History of the Church in the Middle Ages History of the Church from the Invasions of the Barbarians to the Reformation In Celtic and in Anglo-Saxon Britain The Scotch Reformation The Scotch Reformation Under the Tudors The English Reformation and Puritanism, I The English Reformation and Puritanism, II English Church History since the Reformation . . . The Pilgrim Fathers and Plymouth Colony The Puritan Fathers and the New England The ocracy The Struggle for Religious Liberty in Virginia. . . . The Struggle for Religious Liberty in Virginia. . . . Christian Missions in the 16th, 17th, and 18th Cen turies Christian Missions in the 19th Century Modern Missions Modern Missions Seminars : Second Century Problems in Church Polity From the Norman Conquest to the Age of Wiclif. . English Church History since the Reformation . . . Value No. of Total Total Course in Times Registra- Value in Majors Given tion Majors K 2 43 1 1 6 177 6 K 1 2 K 'A 2 30 1 1 10 277 10 K 2 36 1 1 3 38 3 y2 2 68 1 1 1 32 1 K 3 36 m 1 2 23 2 H 3 44 VA a 1 24 % 1 3 84 3 1 3 78 3 1 1 19 1 1 3 66 3 1 3 73 3 1 1 16 1 % 2 25 1 1 3 60 3 1 2 36 2 1 2 58 2 M 1 40 H 1 1 6 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 15 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis 22- 177 1 15 277 18 38 34 32 18 23 22 12 84 78 19 66 73 16 13- 60 36 58 20 6 11 15 196 The Peesident's Repokt TABLE XXYII — Continued Department of Church History Professor Hulbert: Religious Liberty since the Reformation American Baptists History of Christian Doctrine Professor Johnson : Prior to Constantine Prior to Constantine The Columbian Period The German Reformation The German Reformation The Swiss Reformation The Swiss Reformation The Counter Reformation The German Church since the Reformation The German Church in Recent Times History of Doctrines Christian Art Christian Art : Architecture, Sculpture, and Paint- ing Christian Art : Painting Christian Art : Painting Title not stated Professor McGiffert : History of the Primitive Church History of Christian Doctrine Dr. J. W. Conley: American Missions Missionary Societies Dr. A. K. Parker : Christian Missions in the 19th Century Associate Professor Moncrief : Outlines of Church History Outlines of Church History Sources of Church History from Constantine to Charles the Great From Charles the Great to Boniface VIII Mediaeval Ideas and Institutions Forerunners of the Reformation in Italy Preparation in England and Bohemia for the Reformation Preparation in England and Bohemia for the Reformation Preparation in England, Bohemia, and Germany for the Reformation History of the Reformation Period History of the Reformation Period The Dutch Reformation The French Reformation The French Reformation The Philosophy of History The Philosophy of History Seminars : Augustine : Introduction to the History of Opinion, Christian and Philosophical Special Investigations in the 14th and 15th Cen- turies Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion Total Value in Majors 1 1 9 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 5 168 5 M ¥ 3 1 9 65 30 127 ^y '1 ¥ 2 3 21 28 1 3 i< 2 38 1 1 6 43 6 1 2 27 2 1 1 10 1 1 1 10 1 1 3 34 3 1 1 15 1 1 1 25 1 1^ 1 1 1 31 18 ¥ y^ M 1 1 37 50 y y 2 1 56 16 1 y 1 1 5 1 1 9 264 9 M 1 11 y 1 1 3 1 1 2 13 2 1 2 17 2 1 9 141 9 1 2 29 2 y^ 1 13 y 1 4 38 4 1 2 32 2 K 1 22 y 1 5 54 5 1 4 36 4 y 1 1 2 19 20 \ y 2 28 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 14 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis 9 4 2 168 sa- ls 127 11- 28 19 43 27 10 10 34 15 25 16- 18 19- 25 28 5 264 6- 3 13 17 141 29 7- 38 32 11 54 36 10- 20 14 7 9 14 The Divinity School 197 TABLE XXYII— Continued Department of Homiletics, Church Polity, and Pastoral Duties Professor Anderson : Homiletics Plans and Sermons Plans and Sermons History of Preaching History of Preaching History of American Preaching Masterpieces of Pulpit Eloquence Hymnology Church Polity Pastoral Duties Church Polity and Pastoral Duties Church Polity and Pastoral Duties Title not stated Professor Johnson : Homiletics Homiletics Plans and Sermons Plans and Sermons , Professor Henderson : Pastoral Duties Dr. Faunce : The Art of Preaching Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Registra- Value in Majors Given tion Majors 1 10 197 10 1 10 168 10 H 8 178 4 1 7 60 7 y^ 1 11 y. H 1 6 ^ 1 9 130 9 1 4 24 4 yi 3 60 IJ^ ■u 2 39 1 1 12 242 12 % 1 6 K ¥2 1 10 M 1 7 66 7 % 7 94 m 1 6 63 6 H 2 44 1 V2 1 16 % % 2 74 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis 197 168 89 60 6- 3 130 24 30 20- 242 3 5 66 47 63 22 37 The Department of Sociology Professor Henderson : The Family The Family. .'. House Sanitation Rural Communities Urban Communities Urban Communities The Group of Industrials Social Institutions of Organized Christianity Social Institutions of Organized Christianity Contemporary Charities Contemporary Charities Social Treatment of Crime Social Treatment of Crime Criminal An' hropology Economic and Governmental Agencies for Welfare Economic and Governmental Agencies for Welfare Voluntary Associations Voluntary Associations Non-Political and Non-Economic Associations .... Non-Political and Non-Economic Associations .... Culture and Moral Statistics : Methods and Results Biblical and Ecclesiastical Sociology Philanthropy Philanthropy Field Work in Chicago's Charities and Corrections Special Field Work Field Work Seminars : Social Technology Methods of Social Amelioration, I Methods of Social Amelioration, I Methods of Social Amelioration, II Methods of Social Amelioration, III Value of No. of Total Total Course in Times Registra- Value in iVIaiors Given tion Majors 1 7 110 7 H 2 55 1 1 1 14 1 H 4 53 2 1 5 81 5 K 2 38 1 1 3 61 3 1 5 60 5 Vz 4 78 2 1 7 113 7 ii 3 51 W2 1 2 34 2 K 3 76 ^M 1 1 42 1 1 1 10 1 K 3 47 Vz 1 1 7 1 }4 2 7 1 1 1 35 1 K 1 29 Vi 1 1 7 1 H 1 9 H 1 4 37 4 H 1 10 H H 1 13 H 1 1 1 1 H 1 5 K 1 1 4 1 1 7 45 7 K 1 12 H 1 7 47 7 1 7 52 7 Registra- tion on Major Basis 110 28- 14 27- 81 19 61 60 39 113 26- 34 38 42 10 24- 7 4- 35 15- ■7 5- 37 5 7- 1 3- 4 45 6 47 52 198 The Peesident's Eeport TABLE XXYIl— Continued Department of Public Speaking Associate Professor Clark: Principles of Vocal Expression Bible and Hymn Reading Bible and Hymn Reading and Delivery of Sermons Bible and Hymn Reading and Delivery of Sermons The Delivery of Sermons Delivery of Sermons and Oratorical Analysis . . . Associate Professor Clark and Assistant Professor Blanchard: Principles of Vocal Expression Vocal Expression in Public Worship and Preaching Oratorical Analysis and Pulpit Oratory Professor Chamberlain: Vocal Expression in Public Worship and Preaching Bible and Hymn Reading and Delivery of Sermons Assistant Professor Blanchard: Principles of Vocal Expression Practical Public Speaking Vocal Expression in Public Worship and Preaching Vocal Expression in Public Worship and Preachin; Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion 25 37 23 13 5 19 38 34 50 28 29 10 86 22 Total Value in Majors 2 3 1 H 1 1,^ 1 1 1 H }4 2 1 2 Registra- tion on Major Basis 25 37 23 7- 5 5- 19 38 34 25 14 29 10 86 11 The Disciples' Divinity Courses Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion Total Value in Majors 1 1 1 1 9 1 H 1 10 ¥2 )i 2 9 1 ¥2 1 3 V2 1 % 1 1 1 3 3 11 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 1 1 ¥ 1 1 3 6 1 1 1 2 2 16 1 1 Registra- tion on Major Basis Assistant Professor Willett: History of the Idea of Christian Union History of Church Worship Place of Alexander Campbell in Modern Theologi- cal Thought The Place of the Disciples of Christ among the Religious Forces of Today Problems of Today in the Work of the Disciples of Christ Dr. Van Kirk: First Principles First Principles The Sources of Alexander Campbell's Theology. . . The Theological Position of Alexander Campbell and his Associates Dr. Ames: History of the Disciples History of Doctrine among the Disciples Dr. Garrison: Religious Movements of the 18th Century History of the Disciples Dr. Gates: History of the Disciples History of the Disciples 1 5- 5 5- 2- 3 2- 6- 3 4 2- The Cumberland Presbyterian Divinity Courses Value of Course in Majors No. of Times Given Total Registra- tion Total Value in Majors Registra- tion on Major Basis Mr. Logan: Origin and Growth of the Cumberland Presby- terian Church 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 Doctrine and Polity of the Cumberland Presby- terian Church 1 The Divinity School 199 TABLE XXVIII 1 Registeations in the Divinity School, 1892-1902, by Dbpartment3 Old Testament New Testament Systematic Theology Church History Homiletics Sociology Public Speaking Disciples' Cumberland Presbyterian, Total Total No. of Registrations 4,789 4,456 2,031 3,056 1,488 1,243 428 84 3 17,578 No. of Registra- tions on Major Course Basis 3,774 — I- 3,421 — [- 1,772- 2,664- 1,219 1,002- 367 54 3 14,274 Decrease by Re- duction to Major Course Basis 1,015- 1,035- 259- 392- 269 241- 61 30 3,304 Decrease by the Reduction to Major Course Basis 0.21 0.23 0.13 0.13 0.19 0.20 0.14 0.36 0.19 TABLE XXIX Geaduatigns in the Divinity School, 1892-1902, by Yeaes and Degrees 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Total D.B 11 3 6 2 14 1 7 2 6 '4 3 3 2 2 6 10 2 i i 10 1 4 29 '2 1 1 3 8 2 25 '3 3 3 15 '3 4 4 7 17 '2 9 5 9 16 1 '3 3 6 3 1 15 1 2 2 3 3 5 4 139 D.B. from Theological Union Th.B 9 17 AM 11 Ph.D 24 Dano-Norwegian Certificate Swedish Certificate English Certificate 40 59 25 Total 37 25 20 19 46 34 33 42 33 35 324 TABLE XXX Peimary and Secondaey Depaetments of Students Graduating with the Degree or D.B., 1896-1902 Homi- Z CO letics, &; Old Testa- ment New Testa- ment Biblical Theology Syste- matic Theology Chuech HisTOr.Y Church Polity, AND Pas- Soci- ology Totals toral P3 Year Duties z tB z g I >i d !» CO >> d >. a >. u rt >> rt >, a >> CO t; H Fi a 1 CO 1 a a d n a CO FI ■0 d S d ■0 Ph M ^ tc P^ aj Cu aj fM CO Pj 02 PM to Hi m z Z a 1896-97 6 32 2 9 7 6 14 2 4 4 29 293 1^ 1 29 1897-98 2 1* 6 4 1 5 13 11 2 6 25 26 6 1 25 1898-99 2 2 3 3 7 8 2 2 1 15 15 15 1899-1900 .... 1 45 6 4 2 6 8 1 2 1 17 18 i' 17 1900-1901 .... 1 2 10 3 3 4 3 3 1 2 16 16 16 1901-1902 .... 1 10 3 2 8 1 2 1 1 2 1 9 15 15 1 3 15 Total 12 11 36 26 1 19 43 46 12 1 17 117 1193 117 Total differ- ent men.. 19 62 1 62 58 18 11 117 iln comparing the statistics here given, where the unit uniformly is the registration for a Major course, with those where no such reduction has been made, allowance should bo made for the increase of numbers in the latter case due to the counting of registrations in Minor courses as equal in value to those in Major or double-Minor courses. As shown in the table, the difference between the results obtained by the two methods varies in the several Departments from nothing to more than one-third of the larger, and is on the average about one-fifth. 2 Including one in Assyriology. 3 Including one in Philosophy. * In Egyptology. 5 Including one in Assyrian and one in Aramaic. 6 One other with both subjects in Semitics. 7 One with all three subjects in Semitics, 200 The President's Report TABLE XXXI Peimaet and Secondabt Departments op Students GEAonATiNO with the Degeee of Ph.D., 1895-1902 Old Testament New Testament Biblical Theology Systematic Theology Chuech Histoey Yeab it a a C-2 It ea a 8 1 a u .g fin d 1 0) 1895-96 1896-97 'is 1 2^ 1 'i 2^ 2' 210 '2 i 2 2 2 '2 'i '2 1 i i 6 1 1 i i 1 .. 5 1 1 '5 1 i 1 1 i 1897-98 1 1 1 1898-99 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 2" 1 Total 7 9 9 4 5 9 1 1 7 7 4 4 Homiletice Sociology Philosophy Totals Si » " pu >> a Yeab >t >> > h z fi a 13 a - CO a T3 a _ n 'T3 13 a ^3 "rt a ^ u Oh xii t H fl( CO H H CO H CM CO H H 1895-96 1 1 1 1 1 1896-97 1 1 1 1897-98 1 1 3 3 3 1898-99 1 1 2 . 4 3 4 112 1899-1900 3 3 . 9 10 9 1 1900-1901 . 1 1 2 . 2 2 3 3 3 1901-1902 • •■ 3 3 3 Total . 2 6 8 . 3 3 24 24 24 1 1 Ald^n, Carl Alfred, 1897. Anderson, Anton August, 1897. Anderson, Carl Vilhelm, 1893. Anderson, Gustaf Robert, 1893. Arlander, Ragnar Andreas, 1900. Backlund, Jonas Oscar, 1902. Bergman, Herman, 1893. Calmer, Theodor Herman, 1900. Carlson, Eric, 1900. Carlson, Martin, 1895. Clint, Rudolph Anton, 15. TABLE XXXII Geaduates op the Swedish Seminaey "Det kristliga dopets ursprung och forutsSttning." "Det eviga straffet enligt Nya Testamentets lara." "Pauli lif." "Mosebockernas akthet ooh trovardighet." " Judarna under Mattatias och hans sOners regering." "Det adertonde arhundradets fria tankestrOmningar." " Syndafloden." "Pauli lif." " Judarnas fangenskap 1 Babylon." " Tecknen for Kristi andra tillkommelse." "Donatisterna." 8 Assyrian and Babylonian. 9 One in Assyrian. 10 One in Arabic. "Old Testament, Egyptology ; Assyrian, Old Testament. •2 In this case there were two subjects (Social Institu- tions and Social Philosophy), both in one department (Sociology). The Divinity School 201 Ekblad, Carl Henrik, 1899. Erikson, Bennet, 1897. Erikson, Johan Alfrid, 1900. Esselstr6m, Mats, 1900. Friborg, Emil Amandus, 1900. Friborg, JoEan, 1899. Hallin, Paul, 1901. Hasselblad, Carl, 1893. Hed^n, John, 1893. Hedberg, Viktor E., 1899. Hult, Salomon Alfrid, 1899. Johnson, Bengt Magnus, 1901. Johnson, Gustaf Adolf, 1897. Johnson, John Daniel, 1895. Johnson, Nils Edvard, 1899. Jonson, Magnus, 1893. Klingberg, Johan Eric, 1898. Larson, Robert, 1900. Lawrence, Antone Oliver, 1894. Lindahl, Carl August, 1902. Linden, Fredrik, 1893. Lindgren, Carl Johan Axel, 1900. Lindholm, Olof, 1893. Lovene, Peter, 1896. Nelson, Sven August, 1894. Nelson, Swaney August, 1895. Nilson, Carl Anton, 1894. Nylin, Carl Emil, 1895. Nylin, Johan David, 1897. Nyquist, Gustaf, 1900. Parsons, Nils Clarence, 1902. Paulson, Adolf, 1897. Koc^n, Johan, 1893. Rosenlund, Martin Anderson, 1897. Rosendahl, Johan August Hjalmar, 1901. Sandell, Victor, 1895. Salquist, Carl Axel, 1893. Scherstrom, Eric, 1902. Shugren, Eric Olof, 1902. Sten, Carl Gustaf, 1893. Sundmark, Carl Wilhelm, 1893. Taflin, Olof, 1893. Tornquist, Oskar F., 1899. Valerius, Nels Erik, 1898. Wallman, Carl Linus, 1897. Wedholm, Carl Edvard, 1899. Wid^n, Oscar Carl, 1898. Wiking, Carl Fridolf, 1893. "Syndafallet." " Nattvarden betraktad f ran Nya Testamentets synpunkt." "Hvari bestSr den hufvudsakliga olikheten mellan Johan- nes' Evangelium och de tre sakallade synoptiska evan- gelierna ? " " Omvandelsen." " Hedendomens gudsbegrepp." " Tillstandet i romerska riket vid Kristi fodelse." " Forsoningslaran." "Foreningen mellan kyrka och stat." " Bibelens lara om syndafallet och dess foljder." " Dopsattet." "Lagen i Gamla och Nya Testamentat." "Ursyndens foljder." " Aterlosningen." " Voro Petrobrusianerna villfarande?" " Det bibliska inspirationsbegreppets historiska utveckling." " Nadavalet eller utkorelsen af nid." "Det judiska sektvasendet." "Staden Babel." " Himmelriket fran Nya Testamentets synpunkt." "De arkeologiska upptackterna och bibelns historiska skildringar." " Gudsbelatet hos manniskan." "Nya Testamentets lara om helgelsen." "Dopet." "Det Tridentinska mOtet." "En forsamlingmedlems plikt, eller de olika gafvornas samverkan i forsamlingen." " Jerusalems forstOring." " Hvad synd ar betraktad fran biblisk synpunkt." " Waldenserna." "Manniskan." "Naturen af sjalens fdrening med Kristus." "Manniskans ursprung och urtillstand." " Kristi gudom." "Johan Calvin, hans lif och laror." " Vart lif och dess mal." "Maccabeerna." " Sjalens ododlighet." " Jamforelse mellan Augustini och Pelagii laror." " Kristus var of versteprast." " Det kristliga dopet." "Mose." " Kristi gudom." " Gnosticismen." " Forberedelser bland Guds gamla fdrbundsfolk for Kristi ankomst." " Karakteristik af aposteln Paulus." " Jordens daningshistoria, eller naturens epoker." " Helgelsen." "Den kristna forsamlingen." " Forberedande orsaker till pafvedomet." 202 The President's Report TABLE XXXIII Geaduates of the Dano-Noewegian Seminaey Andersen, Andrew S., 1900. Andersen, Hans Peter, 1896. Arensbach, Christian Nielson, 1897. Borsheim, Sjur Olsen, 1896. Brandsmark, Anders Larsen, 1894. Christensen, John, 1901. Christensen, Rasmus, 1896. Christiansen, Christian George, 1898. Gotaas, Johannes Olsen, 1901. Grarup, Christ Peterson, 1894. Grogaard, Elias Christian, 1901. Hoien, Ove Laurits, 1893. Holm, Frederik Theodor, 1897. Jakobsen, Bertinius, 1900. Jakobsen, Hans Jakob, 1898. Jensen, Fritz Stephanus, 1901. Johnson, Edward Peter, 1897. Kihl, Olaf Martin, 1899. Knudsen, Elias, 1900. Kristoffersen, Soren, 1896. Larsen, Andor Matias, 1899. Larsen, Christian, 1900. Larsen, Jakob, 1896. Larsen, Nels R., 1894. Larsen, Nils Christian, 1896. Lawdahl, Nels Sorenson, 1894. Nelson, Martin, 1896. Nielsen, James Peter, 1896. Nilson, Oskar Emil, 1899. Olberg, Ingebret, 190-2. Overgaard, Peder Federsen, 1896. Pedersen, Chris, 1899. Pedersen, Tellef Christian, 1893. Rasmussen, Lars, 1896- Rejnholdtsen, Severin, i»uO. Skotheim, Olav Halvorsen, 1898. Stiansen, Peder, 1902. Taranger, Anton, 1901. Vang, Enok Tander, 1902. Wesgaard, Martin Anderson, 1901. "Menighedens GrundlEeggelse." "Kristi andet Komme." "Det guddommelige Kald til at prsedike Evangeliet." " Johannesdaaben og dens Forhold til den kristelige Daab." " Helligaandens Person og Vaerk." "Forsoningen." "Bibelens Inspiration." "Pavedemmets Opkomst." " Forudbeslutningen." " Helligaandens Person og Gjerning." " Gjenfedelsen." "Skriftens Laere om Forsoningen." " Forudbestemmelsen." " Retfaerdiggjorelsen." " Den religiose Tilstand blandt Joderne paa Kristi Tid." " Hvorfor bor vi som Baptister holde fast ved lukket eller begrsenset Nadver? " No Thesis. "Det Nye Testamentes Laere angaaende Menighedsforfat- ning." " Indledning til Romerbrevet." "Lceren om evig Straf." • "Bibelens Mirakler." "Martin Luther." "De tidlige Kristenforfolgelser." " Det nytestamentlige Lovbegreb og de Kristnes Forhold dertil." "Den kristne Hyrde eller Pastor." " Det Gamle Testamentes Forhold til det Nye." " Helliggjarelsen." "Hvorfor hylder vi som Baptister den kongregationale Menighedsstyrelse? " '"Den skriftmaessige Betydning af Baptisternes sserkilte Prinoiper." "Roger Williams og Massachusetts Kolonierne." "Lukket Kommunion." " Det Gamle og Nye Testamentes Trovaerdighed." "Loven og den Kristnes Forhold til den. " Gnosticismen i de ferste Aarhundreder." "Konstantin den Store og hans Forhold til Kristendom- men." "De nytestamentlige Bagers historiske .iEgthed og Trovaer- dighed." " Bibelens Laere angaaende Inkarnationen." "Verdens Forberedelse for Kristus." "Betingelser for at vinde Sjaele og Midler for Udevelsen af et saadant Vaerk." "Apostelen Paulus som fremgangsfuld evangelisk Arbej- der." The Divinity School 203 TABLE XXXIV Candidates foe the English Ceetificates Allen, Hiram Howard, 1895. Andrews, John Stanley, 1902. Berry, Henry Havelock, 1895. Betts, Charles Richard, 1902. Blake, James, 1894. Carroll, Robert, 1895. Case, Frank Almerian, 1896. Dent, Joseph Croft, 1895. Evans, Thomas Silas, 1894. Fradenburg, John Victor, 1895. Giblette, Thomas John, 1895. Grablachofl, Wiliko, 1894. Gray, Robert, 1896. Hatch, Elmer Ellsworth, 1897. Hayworth, Solomon Alonzo, 1902. Ketman, Tony Louis, 1897. Lockwood, Clarence Herman, 1895. Mason, George Claude, 1895. Pearce, William, 1893. Robinson, Charles Wirt, 1895. Schlamann, Ernest Alfred, 1896. Speicher, John Gabriel, 1895. Swift, Franklin Waugh, 1902. Vreeland, Charles Frank, 1896. Wakeham, Nicholas, 1901. No Thesis. "Savonarola, Preacher and Prophet of the Renaissance." " City Missions." No Thesis. "The Influences which Formed Nero's Character." " The Law of Sacrifices." "John Clark." " Athenagoras on the Resurrection of the Dead." "Lifeof Dr. Chalmers." " The Battle of Naseby." "The Life of Marcus Aurelius." "The Eastern Church." " Charles G. Finney as a Preacher." "The Mythological Element in the Old Testament." " The Barbarian Invasions : A Study in the Philosophy of History." "The Ethics of Self-Expression." " The Trinity." " Savonarola." " Constantine and his Vision of the Cross." "The Causes of Christian Asceticism." "The New England Puritans and Religious Liberty." "John Wiclif and his Gift to his Countrymen." "The Origin of Sunday as a Christian Festival." " The Problem of Civil and Religious Liberty in the Early Connecticut Colony." "Denominational Co-operation." TABLE XXXV Thesis Subjects op Baoheloes op Theology (feom the Theological Union) Berry, Fred, 1893. Bixon, Frank Prince, 1894. Bower, Leslie, 1893. Davies, Frederick George, 1894. Dexter, Stephen Byron, 1902. Elliot, John Waterman, 1894. Martin, Benjamin F., 1894. MoGillivray, Donald Hugh, 1893. McGinnis, George, 1902. Post, Ansel Howard, 1893. Samuelson, John, 1897. Stewart, John Henry, 1894. Stoner, Mary Kimbrough, 1893. Stacker, Edwin Stanton, 1897. Theobald, Walter William, 1893. Thompson, Thora Maria, 1896. Wheeler, Horace Jonathan, 1894. " Home Life in the American City." " Lessons from the Life of Henry Ward Beecher." " Desecration of the Sabbath in our Cities." "Conversion of the Goths." No Thesis. " Charles Haddon Spurgeon as a Preacher." No Thesis. "The Symbolism of the Lord's Supper." No Thesis. "The Preparation of the Sermon." " Henry Barrowe." " The Protectorate of Oliver Cromwell." "Penny Banks." "The Christian's Life." "Hindrances to the Progress of Christianity in American Cities." "Petrarch, the First Modern Man." " The Historical Development of the Doctrine of the Atone- ment, from the Time of Anselm." 204 The Peesident's Kepoet TABLE XXXVI Thesis Subjects of Baceeloks of DrviNiTT (feom the Theological Union) Astby, James William, 1894. Eldridge, Charles D., 1902. Falls, James Washington, 1893. Ford, John Elijah, 1895. Girdwood, Joseph Haddon, 1893. Lord, George, 1895. McEwan, Allan, 1893. Nordlander, Eric Johan, 1894. Roc^n, John, 1901. 'Results in England of the Evangelical Revival of the Eighteenth Century." 'Knox in England." ' The Theory of a Second Probation." 'Jonathan Edwards as a Preacher." ' Some of the Present Obstacles in the Way of Evangelical Religion, and How to Meet them." 'Was Constantine a Regenerate Man?" ' The Christian Conception of God." ' The Theory of a Second Probation." ' The Persecution of the Pioneer Baptists in Sweden." TABLE XXXVII Thesis Subjects of Baceeloks of Divinitt Allison, Matthew Gay, 1894. Anderson, Frank Leonard, 1900. Anderson, Jacob Nelson, 1901. Atkinson, Henry Lawrence, 1901. Bateson, Frederick William, 1898. Bailey, John William, 1902. Behan, Warren Palmer, 1897. Beyl, Frederick Almon, 1901. Beyl, John Lewis, 1900. Binder, Rudolph Michael, 1897. Blanchard, William Louis, 1893. Bode, William, 1901. Boeye, John Franklin, 1902. Borden, Edwin Howard, 1897. Braker, George, 1896. Brelos, Carl George, 1900. Briggs, John Gallup, 1899. Brinstad, Charles William, 1893. Brown, Jay Schuyler, 1902. Burdiok, William De Lure, 1893. Burlingame, George Elston, 1899. Cabeen, James Wallace, 1893. Calvin, John Emmett, 1902. Calvin, Perry Sylvester, 1899. Campbell, George Alexander, 1898. Carlson, Walter Gustavus, 1897. Case, Carl Delos, 1898. Chalmers, William Everett, 1897. Chandler, John, 1900. Clough, Clarence Edmund, 1898. Coleman, Christopher Bush, 1900. Colestock, Henry Thomas, 1899. Coon, Daniel Israel, 1897. Coon, David Burdett, 1894. "The English Poor Law." " The Fatherhood of God." "An Exegetical Study of Romans 3:21-26." " The Feasts of Passion Week." " An Historical Treatment of the Doctrine of Chiliasm." "AIKAIOSTNH OEGT: A Study in Interpretation." " The Oxford Movement." " The Influence of Savonarola upon Art." " Hebrew Prophets and Prophecy." "Kant and Protestant Theology." " The Kingdom of God." "Isaiah's Picture of the Social Conditions of His Day." "The Homiletic Value of Whittier." "Galilee in the Time of Christ." "The Jewish Lack of Unity as a Preparation for the Messiah." " Condition of the World at the Advent of Christ." "Christ's Attitude Toward His Own Death." "The Probationary Theory of Salvation after Death." "The Church in the Country Districts." "Elements of Power in Preaching." "Sacerdotal Celibacy; Its Origin and Early Development." " Labor, Capital, and Christ." "The Teaching of Jesus concerning Prayer." "Wiclit and his Place in the Reform Movement." '' The Modern Aspects of Church Union." "Ansgar, his Life and Labors in Denmark and Sweden." " The Christology of the Synoptists." " The Influence of Thomas Cranmer on the English Refor- mation." "Humanism and its Influence on the Development of Luther." "The Purpose of Jesus' Miracles." "Christian Movements in American Colleges." " Substitution : A Stage in Theological Thought." " The Person of Christ in the Fourth Gospel." The Divinitz School 205 Corbett, Isaac Allen, 1901. Crawford, Jerry Tinder, 1898. Cressey, Prank Graves, 1898. Culbertson, Henry Coe, 1901. Davidson, Robert Bailey, 1897. Dye, Friend Taylor, 1900. Dykstra, Lawrence, 1897. Elmer, Franklin Davenport, 1898. Pisk, Henry Alfred, 1895. Foreman, Louis Thomas, 1901. Puller, William Harvey, 1901. Gallup, Clarence Mason, 1900. Garrison, Winfred Ernest, 1897. Gates, Errett, 1900. Gessler, Theodore Arthur, 1897. Givens, John Paris, 1902. Goodman, Alfred Ebenezer, 1897. Goodspeed, Edgar Johnson, 1897. Gray, Charlotte Comstock, 1898. Gray, Clifton Daggett, 1900. Griffin, Edwin Milton, 1893. Hageman, Simon Sylvester, 1899. Hazen, Joseph Chalmers, 1902. Heald, Prescott Silas, 1901. Hemenway, Charles Asa, 1893. Herrick, Jullien Avery, 1897. Hobbs, Ralph Waller, 1897. Holcomb, George Perry, 1893. Hoover, Henry Ward, 1899. Home, George, 1894. Hunter, Austin, 1902. Hunter, John, 1899. Hurley, Hugh Henry, 1898. Jackson, Francis Chester Rockwell, 1897. Jenkins, Joseph, 1898. Jewett, Frank Leonard, 1902. Johnson, Philip Matthew, 1899. Kinney, Edwin Bruce, 1897. Kunkle, Edward Charles, 1901. Kurtz, Prank, 1893. Lake, Elisha Moore, 1897. Lemon, Charles Augustus, 1897. Marsh, Arba John, 1897. "A Study in New Testament Christology." "The Contribution of the Synoptic Gospels to Dogmatic Anthropology." " Christ's Conception of the Kingdom of God, with regard to its Time, Nature, and Membership." "The Sect of the Pharisees." "Social Life in England from 1066-1320." "Religious Liberty in the Netherlands." "The Synod of Dort." " The Teaching of Jesus in the Synoptic Gospels Regarding his Death." "The Vatican Council and the Dogma of Papal Infalli- bility." "The Poverty of Luther." "The New Testament Usage of KaroKayy^, 'AiroXi^Tpmo-is, and 'IXatTTijioioj': A Study of the Doctrine of the Atonement." "The Principal Social Aspects of the Teaching of Paul in the Galatian, Corinthian, and Roman Letters." " The English Precursors of John Wyclif ." " The Contest for Religious Liberty in Massachusetts." " The Influence of Babylonian Poetry upon Hebrew Poetry." "Ritschl's Conception of Revelation and Sacred Scrip- ture." "Melancthon, or the Spirit of Compromise." " On an Unedited Syriac Manuscript of the New Testament." " Michael Angelo and his Place in the Reformatory Move- ment." "Translations from Babylonian Religious Texts." "Study of Paul's Doctrine of Justification." " God's Sovereignty in Relation to Man's Salvation." " The Teaching of Jesus in the Synoptic Gospels concerning Wealth." "The Social Progress of the Karens under Christianity." "The Thought of Redemption." "The English Bible from William Tyndale to King James I." "Effects of the Suppression of the Monasteries in the Reign of Henry VIII." " The Elements of Power in the Preaching of Christ." " George Pox and the Early Quakers." " The Relation of Paul to the Corinthian Church." "The Great Awakening under Edwards and Whitefield." "The Founder of British India." "The Causes of the Act of Toleration of 1689." " The Genuine and the Spurious in the Great Awakening." "Ritschl's Conception of the Kingdom of God: Is it that of Jesus, or is it Kant's?" "The Fundamental Ideas of Protestantism and its Histor- ical Development." "St. Francis of Assisi, His Life and Times." " The Relation of Faith in the Gospels and in John." "Virginia Baptists and Religious Liberty." "The Moravian Movement Prior to Herrnhut." "The Wesleyan Movement." "The Influence of the Historical Study of the Life of Christ on Modern Theology." 206 The Pbesident's Repokt Marshall, Richard Beauchamp, 1900. Martinson, Emil Martin, 1898. Mebane, William Nelson, 1896. Mecum, Edwin Welton, 1898. Meigs, Robert Van, 1898. Merrifleld, Fred, 1901. Miller, Henry Clay, 1901. Mills, John Freeman, 1893. Mortimer, Theron Winfleld, 1900. Murray, Charles Henry, 1897. MacNaul, Willard Carey, 1893. Oeschger, William, 1898. Oram, William George, 1897. Osgood, William Pleasants, 1898. Parsons, Everett Joseph, 1902. Parsons, Frederick Francis, 1902. Patrick, Bower Reynolds, 1897. Phillips, David, 1898. Place, Alfred William, 1902. Price, Orlo Josiah, 1898. Proctor, John Thomas, 1897. Purinton, Harry Edward, 1897. Reed, William Wallace, 1900. Reeve, James Josiah, 1898. Rhodes, Jesse Cassander, 1899. Robinson, Samuel Rowland, 1898. Russell, Luther Parker, 1900. Sanders, James Franklin, 1895. Sanderson, Eugene Claremont, 1894. Schmidt, Emanuel, 1898. Schoemaker, William Ross, 1899. Shatto, Charles Rollin, 1891. Sherman, Franklyn Cole, 1899. Shouse, Henry Messick, 1899. Slater, John Rothwell, 1898. Snow, Ralph Rensselaer, 1897. Soares, Theodore Geraldo, 1897. Spaulding, Clarence Sydney, 1900. Stevens, Elmer Tilson, 1898. Stevenson, George Edmund Traver, 1899. St. John, Wallace, 1898. Stoughton, Harry Augustus, 1901. Valentine, Louis Peter, 1900. "The Philosophy of History as Developed by Augustine." " The Element of Mysticism in New England Theological Thought." " A Comparison of the Cuneiform and Biblical Accounts of the Deluge." " New Plymouth Colony, 1629-1691." " Whitefield as a Revivalist." " Paul's Conception of the SigniScance of Baptism." " The Humanism of Petrarch as Seen in his Letters and Sonnets." "Authority of Christian Consciousness." "The English Stage in the Time of Charles II." "The Court of High Commission." "The Atoning Significance of the Death of Christ." "The Life and Work of Barton W. Stone." " The Old Testament Conception of Sin." " The Nature and Grounds of Justification in the Epistle to the Romans." "Jesus' Doctrine of God, in the Synoptics." " The Basis of Redemptive Certainty." " Schleiermacher's System of Thought, and its Influence on Modern Theology." " Paul's Collection for the Poor Saints at Jerusalem." " The Teaching of Jesus in the Synoptic Gospels concerning Faith." "The Ethics of the New Life, According to the Fourth Gospel." "Methods of Mission Work in China." "Interpretation of Romans 3:21-26." " A Critical Estimate of Augustine's ' De Trinitate.' " " The Mission of Christ, According to John's Gospel." "The Trend of the Church on the Doctrine of the Regene- rate Life." " The Philosophy of the New England Witchcraft Delusion." " Auricular Confession." "John Calvin and the French Reformation." " Characteristics of Buddha and Christ Compared." " Exodus 15 :1&-18, 21." " The Central Principles in Christ's Ethical Teaching." " The Kingdom of God." " Fra Angelico: The St. John of Art." "The Missionary Career of Thomas Coke." " The Inspiration of the Old Testament." "The Versions of the English Scriptures in the Sixteenth Century." "The Epistle to the Philippians: Introduction and Inter- pretation of 3 : 2-16." " II Morgante Maggiore of Luigi Pulci as a Source." "The Social Condition of England in the Fourteenth Century." " The Place of the Earl of Shaftesbury in the Labor Move- ment." " The Drink Habits of the New England Colonies." " Preventive Work for Imperiled Children." "The Relation of Art to the Church." The Divinity School 207 Van Home, Theodore Julian, 1893. Vaughan, Richard Miner, 1898. Waite, Claire Luther, 1902. Waldo, William Albigense, 1899. Ward, John Albert, 1894. Wight, Wallace Edward, 1894. Williams, Clarence Russell, 1901. Wilson, Albert Sherwood, 1902. Wood, Joel Franklin, 1897. Woods, Prank William, 1898. Woolston, Howard Brown, 1901. Wright, George Clarence, 1897. Wright, Howard Foster, 1902. Wright, Peter Clark, 1902. Wright, Richard Robert, Jr., 1901. Wyant, Andrew Robert Elmer, 1897. Yates, Julian Emmet, 1900. Young, Emanuel Sprankle, 1899. Zahniser, Charles Reed, 1900. "The Influence of Puritan Religious Legislation upon Sub- sequent Christianity." " Dante's Conception of Punishment." " The Sabbath of the Primitive Hebrews." "Resurrection of Jesus Christ as a Fact." "The Significance of Sacrifice." "Analysis and Key to the Symbols of the Book of Revela- tion." " Strophic Structure and Exposition of Micah 3." " The Preparation for the Reformation." "The Influence of the Crusades upon European Civiliza- tion." "Paul's Conception of the New Life." "The Teaching Office of the Church." " The Resurrection of Christ." "The Place of Women in the Early Church." "History of the Glebe Lands in Virginia." " The Industrial Condition of Negroes in Chicago." "Jonathan Edwards and the Great Awakening in New England." " The Inductive Method of Leonardo da Vinci." "The Life of Jesus." "The Transcendental Element in the Kingdom of God." Barta, Alois, 1897. Semitics. Deinard, Samuel Nathaniel, 1901. SeTnitics. Gray, Charlotte Comstock, 1900. Church History. Harris, William, 1899. Church History, Comparative Reli- TABLE XXXTIII Thesis Subjects of Masters of Aets "The Poetic Element in the Book of Mioah." Nelson, Josef Fredrik, 1901. Semitics. Sanders, James Franklin, 1899. Honiiletics. Smith, Arthur Maxson, 1899. Systematic Theology. Swift, George Hiram, 1902. Thompson, Carl Dean, 1902. Sociology, Political Economy. Waid, George Henry, 1900. Church History, Philosophy. Yoshizaki, Enos Hikoichi, 1901. New Testament. " The Doctrine of Revelation in the Quran." "The Visions of Santa Teresa." " The Philosophy of Religious Reformation and Revival." " The History of Hebrew Sacrifice from the Exodus to the Exile." " Frederick W. Robertson as a Preacher." "The Origin of American Unitarianism." No Thesis. " The Need of Co-operation of the Rochdale Type." " The Religious Condition of America, 1745-1820." " St. Paul's Attitude toward Ethnic Religions." Baird, Philip Caster, 1898. Hebrew, Assyrian. Barta, Alois, 1900. Old Testament, Arabic. TABLE XXXIX Thesis Subjects op Doctoes of Philosophy "The Method of the Prophets." "The Syntax of the Sentence in Isaiah 40-66.' 208 The President's Eepoet Behan, 'Warren Palmer, 1899. Church History, Sociology. Case, Carl Delos, 1900. Systematic Theology, Church History. Cross, George, 1900. Systematic Theology, New Testament. Garrison, Winfred Ernest, 1898. Church History, Philosophy. Gates, Errett, 1902. Church History, New Testament. Gillette, John Morris, 1901. Sociology', Philosophy. Goodspeed, Edgar Johnson, 1898. New Testament, Old Testament. Gordon, William Clark, 1899. Social Institutions, Social Philosophy. Gray, Clifton Daggett, 1902. Assyrian, Old Testament. Herrick, Henry Martyn, 1900. New Testament, Old Testament, Sociology. Herrick, Jullien Avery, 1900. Systematic Theology, New Testament. Heuver, Gerald Dick, 1900. New Testament, Sociology. Hoben, Thomas Allan, 1901. New Testament, Sociology. Mebane, William Nelson, 1899. Assyrian, Hebrew. Osborn, Loran David, 1900. Systematic Theology, Sociology. Read, Eliphalet Allison, 1896. Systematic Theology, Sociology. Schmidt, Emanuel, 1902. Hebrew, Egyptology. Smith, Arthur Maxson, 1901. System.atic Theology, Philosophy. Smith, John M. P., 1899. Old Testament, Assyrian. Stevenson, James Henry, 1897. Assyrian and Babylonian, Hebrew Language and Literature. St. John, Wallace, 1900. Church History, New Testament. Van Kirk, Hiram, 1900. Systematic Theology, New Testament. "Social Work of the Church of Plymouth Colony, 1620- 1691." " The Incarnation and Modern Thought." " The Theology of Schleiermacher." "The Sources of Alexander Campbell's Theology." "The Early Relation and Separation of Baptists and Disciples." "The Culture Agencies of a Typical Manufacturing Group, South Chicago." "The Newberry Manuscript of the Gospels." "The Social Ideals of Alfred Tennyson, as Related to his Time." "The Shamash Religious Texts." "The Kingdom of God in the Writings of the Church Fathers." "The Development and Significance of the Leben Jesu Movement." "The Teaching of Jesus Concerning Wealth in relation to the Economic Conditions of his Time and the Teach- ings of his Contemporaries." " A Study of the Virgin Birth in the Ante-Nicene Litera- ture." "Assyrian Letters." " The Recovery and Restatement of the Gospel." "The Christian Idea of God in its Relation to Theology." "The Temple of Solomon in the Light of other Oriental Temples." "The Contribution of Thomas Aquinas to Modern Indi- vidualism." "History of the Idea of the Day of Yahweh." "Assyrian and Babylonian Contracts, with Phoenician Dockets." " The Contest for Liberty of Conscience in England." " The Sources of the Theology of Alexander Campbell." DENOMINATIONS IN THE DIVINITY SCHOOL In 1899-1900 there were represented twenty-five denominations; in 1900-1901, twenty-five and in 1901-1902, twenty-six. The percentage of (regular) Baptists in the three years was respectively: summer, 43, 35, 39; autumn, 63, 54, 55; entire year, 46, 42, 43. During the three years fotir other denominations have had the next largest representation, and have kept the same relative rank: Disciples (49, 51, 50); Methodists (40,46,46); Presbyterians (30,27,31); Congregationalists, (27, 23, 22). The Divinity School 209 TABLE XL Denominations in the Divinity School,i 1899-1900 Denomination Baptists Free Baptists Brethren Congregationalists Disciples German Evangelical . . . Jews Lutheran African M. B Free Methodist Methodist Episcopal . . . M.E. South Presbyterian Cumberland Presbyt'ri'n United Presbyterian . . Protestant Episcopal . . Reformed Church Seventh-Day Baptist . . Unitarian Universalist Not stated Total. Summer, 1899 75 2 12 26 2 1 1 1 15 5 11 3 165 10 17 99 3 19 33 1 2 1 1 1 21 8 17 6 54 229 AnTUMN, 1899 82 1 1 6 13 125 28 1 3 7 17 WiNTEK, 1900 78 1 1 7 17 153 124 25 93 1 3 8 19 149 Spsing, 1900 77 1 1 9 14 14 122 25 91 1 1 11 15 147 Yeae 1899-lSOO 119 1 3 18 37 2 1 1 1 19 5 14 4 1 2 3 1 2 2 5 241 44 54 156 1 6 27 49 1 2 1 1 1 30 8 21 8 1 7 4 2 4 2 7 339 Summer, 1900 Autumn, 1900 Winter, 1901 Spring, 1901 Year 1900-1901 Denomination o o g 03 3 cs 13 a 1 ■a 2 73 a 1 f 3 S a 3 tH u a P CO E-i ■3 Baptists 62 2 1 19 33 2 3 16 8 13 3 2 i 2 i 1 177 4 i '2 1 1 1 10 13 1 i 4 i '6 2 2 '3 'i 79 1 2 1 20 38 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 24 11 16 4 2 3 4 2 '2 1 70 'i 1 5 16 1 2 i 1 '7 4 8 3 '3 i 1 1 1 10 i 2 '4 1 1 1 i 80 i 1 6 18 1 2 'i 1 ii 5 9 4 '3 i 1 1 2 58 i '4 11 1 2 'i 1 6 5 7 3 2 '3 1 1 1 2 1 11 i 1 '3 1 1 'i 'i 69 i '5 12 1 2 i 1 "9 6 8 3 2 '3 1 1 2 2 2 53 1 'i '. 1 . 4 14 2 . i .' 1 . 1 . '5 5 4 2 1 . '3 '. 1 . 1 . 1 2 . 1 . 2 65 '. i 1 1 5 5 19 2 i 1 1 i 'e 1 6 2 6 1 3 1 ] '3 1 1 1 2 2 1 104 '2 1 21 42 4 4 1 2 1 1 1 20 9 16 4 2 'i 3 1 1 3 2 15 i 5 '4 2 2 1 i 'i 13 1 i 4 'i "e 2 2 '3 i 132 1 2 1 23 51 4 5 1 2 1 1 1 30 13 20 5 2 3 7 3 1 2 4 3 Missionary Baptists Free Baptists Brethren Congregationalists Disciples Friends Jews Mennonites Lutheran African M. E Methodist Protestant . . . M. E. of Canada Methodist Episcopal .... M.E. South Presbyterian Cumberland Presbyt'ri'n United Presbyterian Protestant Episcopal. . . . Reformed Church Roman Catholic Seventh-Day Adventist . Seventh-Day Baptist Unitarian Universalist Total 34 221 127 21 148 111 20 131 104 2 4 128 252 32 34 318 1 Not including the Scandinavian Seminaries. 210 The President's Repoet TABLE XL — Continued Summer, 1901 Autumn, 1901 WiNTEK, 1902 Speing, 1902 Yeae, 1901-1902 Denomination a H H 1 2 CD 13 a P H -a a H 3 •d 13 a P 3 58 2 's 33 3 1 i 1 15 13 1 1 11 2 1 2 2 5 1 1 1 1 8 i 1 2 'i 1 19 2 7 i 3 2 1 i i '2 '2 85 2 ii 41 3 1 1 1 1 20 15 2 1 13 3 1 2 3 5 1 2 1 1 1 2 62 2 '3 18 3 i '7 3 '7 3 1 1 i 10 '2 2 '2 i 2 ■ ' 1 72 2 '5 20 3 i '9 3 '8 5 1 1 'i 1 59 3 1 6 15 3 6 2 6 4 1 'i 1 8 "5 3 '2 1 i 67 3 1 11 18 3 '6 2 's 5 1 'i 1 1 47 3 1 5 14 3 '2 1 '4 2 1 '5 3 1 1 i 9 '3 2 i i 56 3 1 8 16 3 '2 1 '5 2 1 'e 3 1 1 i 1 105 3 1 15 40 5 1 2 2 1 22 14 2 1 18 4 1 3 2 5 1 'i 1 1 15 '5 3 '2 '2 2 i 19 '2 7 i ■3 2 1 "i i '2 '2 139 Free Baptists 3 Brethren (Progressive) . . Congregationalists Disciples 1 22 50 5 German Baptist Breth'n Jews 1 3 2 Mennonites. 1 Methodist Episcopal M. E. South 27 16 African M. E 3 Mormon 1 91 Cumberland Presbyt'ri'n Southern Presbyterian . , United Presbyterian Protestant Episcopal Reformed Church Roman Catholic Seventh-Day Adventist . Seventh-Day Baptist. . . . Unitarian 6 1 3 3 5 1 3 1 1 United Brethren United Evangelical 1 2 Total 164 14 41 219 112 20 132 108 20 128 94 17 111 251 30 41 322 TABLE XLI Degrees Held by Divinity Students Attending the Univeesity— 1899-1902 Degree 1899- leoo 190O- 1901 1901- 1902 Degree 1899- 1900 1?00- 1901 1901- 1902 Doctor of Laws '5 1 '2 49 1 2 1 63 1 5 196 12 i 8 i 1 71 1 1 1 56 '2 211 20 1 5 6 i 63 2 66 1 3 206 17 Bachelor of Laws 4 19 9 i 9 1 1 1 1 15 6 4 '1 i 3 Doctor of Divinity Bachelor of Science 13 Doctor of Philosophy Bachelor of Literature Bachelor of Sacred Literature Bachelor of Pedagogy Bachelor of Hebrew Literature Licentiate of Instruction Graduate of Theol. Seminary . Graduate of Gymnasium Graduate of Latin School Certificate in Arts Licentiate in Sacred Theology Total 6 Doctor of Pharmacy 1 1 Master of Theology Master of Arts 2 Master of Philosophy. Master of Science Bachelor of Divinity. Bachelor of Sacred Theology.. Bachelor of Theoloe^v Bachelor of Arts 383 402 397 Bachelor of Philosophy Respectfully submitted, Eei B. Hulbeet, Dean. THE UNIYERSITY AFFILIATIONS To the President of the University : Sir : I submit herewith my report of the Affiliated Work of the University for the period ending July 1, 1902. The work of the Office of Affiliations covers, in generg,!, the administration of the relations of the University with all secondary schools which prepare and offer students for admission to its undergraduate courses. The extensive and increasingly intensive relations which now, at the end of the first decade of the University's life, exist between it and the secondary schools of its natiu'al territory is a fit cause for congratulation. This result has come about through the persistent efforts of the University to know the schools, and in all proper and practicable ways to be known by them. The most immediate and pressing problem which at the beginning had to be met was the problem of the proper test of candidates for admission to the University. But a more impor- tant question has been to the front from the first, and has had much to do with all activities of the University in its relations with secondary schools : how can the University be most helpful to the schools in the advancement of soimd education in their common fields ? This spirit of hand-in-hand helpfulness has found expression in the two terms by which the official relation of University and school has been named: "affiliation" and "co-operation." The sources of the knowledge of the schools that the University has striven to gain, so far as the effective administration of the admission of students is concerned, are as follows. (1) the report of the principal upon the faculty, curriculum, and equipment of his school made at the time of application for admission to co-operation; (2) the reports of the different officers of the University, based upon personal visits to the school and observation of its work; (3) the charac- ter of the work of the students accredited to the University from the schools upon the personal vouchers of the principal and teacher concerned in the report. It is by this third means that the work of the schools and individual teachers has best been known. A record of the schools from which the students are received is kept, and the work of these students in the first year at the University is carefully observed. The results of these observations at the end of each year are transmitted to the respective schools, and are at the same time used as a basis of judgment as to the character of the work of the school. The University has entered into relations, more or less intimate, with secondary schools covering a wide range of territory, including, generally, the whole Mississippi valley and the Pacific slope. These schools may be divided into three classes according to the intimacy of their relations : I. Schools organically connected with the University body. These are (1) the Academy for Boys, which from the beginning has been a part of the University co-operative life; (2) the South Side Academy, and (3) the Chicago Manual Training School, both of which have long been in close affiliation with the University and which have now been incorporated with the Univer- sity as the secondary Division or Department of the School of Education. II. Academies which, while they retain their own independent business management, have voluntarily placed themselves imder the advisory direction of the University, so far as faculties, curricula, and educational methods are concerned. These schools, denominated Affiliated Schools, are as follows: Culver Military Academy (Culver, Ind.), Dearborn Seminary (Chicago), Elgin Academy (Elgin), Harvard School (Chicago), Francis Shinier Academy (Mt. Carroll), Kenwood 211 212 The President's Repoet Institute (Chicago), Prince ton- Yale School (Chicago; recently incorporated with the Harvard School), Kugby School (Kenil worth). University School for Girls (Chicago), and Wayland Academy (Beaver Dam, Wis.). III. High schools and academies, which, upon investigation, as described above, the Uni- versity has foimd to be of a high grade of excellence, able to prepare students for a first-class college. This looser relation, which alone, in the nature of the case, can be maintained with public schools, is described and designated by the term "co-operation." Following is the list of the schools of this class. The schools are public high schools, unless otherwise specified: Akron, O. Atlanta, Ga. Auburn, Ind. Aurora: East Side West Side Battle Creek, Mich. Bay City, Mich. Benton Harbor, Mich. Bloomington Blue Island Buffalo, Hasten Park (N. Y.) Canton, O. Cedar Rapids, la. Chicago: Austin Calumet Englewood English High and Manual Training School Jefferson John Marshall Lake Lake View Medill Northwest Division Robert A. Waller South Chicago South Division William McKinley The University School for Boys Cleveland, O.: Central East Side Lincoln South Side Clinton, la. Clyde Colorado Springs, Col. Columbus, O.: Central East Side North Side Council Bluffs, la. Davenport, la. Dayton, Steele, O. DeKalb Denver, Col.: North Side District No. 1 District No. 2 DesMoines, West Side, la. Dixon, South Side Dubuque, la. Duluth, Minn. Elgin Elkhart, Ind. Evanston Faribault, Minn.: St. Mary's Hall The Shattuck School Findlay, O. Fort Scott, Kan. Fort Wayne, Ind. Freeport Goshen, Ind. Grand Rapids, Mich. Harvey Helena, Mont. Hillside Home School, Wis. Hinsdale Indianapolis, Ind.: Manual Training Shortridge •Girls' Classical School Joliet Kansas City, Mo.: Central Manual Training Westport Keokuk, la. Lake Forest, Ferry Hall Semi- nary Lyons Township, LaGrange LaPorte, Ind. LaSalle Leavenworth, Kan. Logansport, Ind. Louisville, Ky.: Boys' Girls' Macon, Mo., Blees Military Academy Michigan City, Ind. Milwaukee, Wis.: East Division South Division West Division Milwaukee Downer College Minneapolis, Minn.: Central East Side Moline Morrison Oak Park Omaha, Neb.: High School Brownell Hall Orchard Lake, Mich., Military Academy Ottawa Ottumwa, la. Peoria Pittsburg, Pa. Princeton Pueblo, Col.: Centennial Central Quincy Racine, Wis. Richmond, Ind. Riverside Rockford Rock Island Saginaw, Mich. Sandusky, O. San Francisco, Calif.: Girls' Lowell Sioux City, la. South Bend, Ind. The University Affiliations 213 Springfield Hosmer Hall Waukesha, Wis.: Sterling Sycamore High School St. Joseph, Mich. Terra Haute, Ind. Carroll College St. Joseph, Mo. Toledo, O. Westtown Boarding School, Pa. St. Louis, Mo.: Topeka, Kan. Wheaton High School Waukegan Youngstown, O. From all the schools in the three classes above mentioned, graduates are now accepted into the University without examination, upon the oflBcial record of work done in the school, in so far as this work specifically meets the requirements for admission. For students from other schools, and for those who are lacking in certain requirements, the examination system is maintained under the supervision of this oiEce. The Office of Affiliations is therefore charged with all admission from secondary schools to the Junior Colleges of the University. From the standpoint of activities other than those mentioned above, in which the primary object was to ascertain the status of the schools with reference to the admission of their grad- uates to the University, the most important work of the Department of Affiliations has been in connection with the Annual Conferences, a historical statement with reference to which is here presented. When, in the fall of 1892, the University of Chicago opened its doors to students, the Uni- versity and its natural constituency, the secondary schools of Chicago, northern Illinois, and the states lying adjacent to this territory, were practically strangers to one another. On the one hand, the attitude of the University toward the schools, its admission requirements, its methods of administering these, and its policy with regard to the numerous problems which must of necessity arise in the adjustment of the relations that were to exist between school and college — all these the University, in its new field, had yet to work out, and the schools had yet to learn. On the other hand, the schools themselves, with their curricula, their equipments, their facul- ties, their spirit, were comparatively unknown to the University. Recognizing the immense importance of the secondary schools to its own success, as well as its own duty to all educational institutions, the University at once took the initiative in enter- ing into vital and helpful relations with the secondary schools. It realized that it could not decide all the questions which arose in connection with secondary education purely from its own point of view, but must confer freely and on equal footing with the leaders and teachers in the schools from which its Junior students must come. Accordingly, on November 5, 1892, in the second month of the University's public career, was held "The First Autumn Conference of University and Preparatory-School Teachers," as it was at that time called. At this Conference, to the invitation to which there was a generous response from principals and teachers, there were two public sessions, morning and afternoon, at which discussion, necessarily informal, was had of topics relating largely to the requirements for admission to the University. This subject has engaged the best thoughts and most careful and patient studies of the Faculties of the University ever since; but in any account of the solu- tion of this important problem the generous co-operation and assistance that have come from the secondary schools should not pass unmentioned. So successful was the first Conference that, at the request of the schools, a second Confer- ence was appointed for the following April; and from this time on, these Conferences have been an important feature of the spring and fall, ever growing in interest and value to all who have partaken in them. At the sixth Conference, in November, 1895, two important innovations were introduced: (1) a Friday afternoon and evening session, whereas before the sessions had been confined to Saturday; (2) a series of departmental conferences on Saturday afternoon, which sup- plemented the general session formerly held at that time. The value of these more technical 214 The President's Kepoet departmental conferences was at once apparent, and they have been a prominent feature ever since. Most helpful discussions of many vital and practical topics, arising out of actual class- room experience, have been had by those especially interested in the several departments. Following are some of the more important questions which have been discussed in the general sessions of the Conferences: " The Aim and Scope of Elementary Biology in the Preparatory School," 1894. " Some Exaggerations of the New Education," 1894. " The Higher Training of Teachers in England, Prance, and Germany," 1894. " The Future of the High School," 1895. Addresses on the subject of Pedagogy, 1895. " The True Object of an Educational System from an Economic Point of View," 1896. " The Aim and Claims of History in the Secondary Schools," 1896. " Twenty Years of Educational Agitation: Its Effect upon the Public High School," 1897. " The Eelation of the Secondary School to the Student's Choice of an Occupation," 1897. " The Fitness of Economics to Meet the Conditions of Adolescence," 1898. "Preparation for Citizenship; or. The School and the Citizen," 1898. "The Relation of Higher Education to Success in Business Life," 1899. " The Elective System in High School and Academy Work," 1900. " Current Problems in Secondary Education," 1901. The spring General Conferences were discontinued in 1899, and an Executive Session of Deans and Principals with the University Board of AfBliations was substituted as an annual event. Another innovation was established in the fall of 1898, when, in connection with the Conference, the first Annual Contest in Declamation between representatives of the Senior classes of the secondary schools was held. This aroused so much interest that the contest has been made an annual feature of the fall Conference. The full proceedings of the last two Con- ferences were published respectively in the December, 1900, edition of the University Record and in the January, 1901, number of the School Review. Respectfully submitted, Frank J. Miller, Dean of Affiliations. THE MORGAN PARK ACADEMY To the President of the University: Sir : I submit herewith my report as Dean of the Academy for Boys, at Morgan Park. In assuming the responsibility of training boys and girls, the Academy entered into the labors as well as the premises of schools of three sorts, whose grounds and buildings the University had acquired by gift and by lease, and this fact of local educational history gave special significance to the establishment at Morgan Park of the work of the University's second- ary school. Since 1877 the Union Theological Seminary had been engaged in its special line of educational effort, and its grounds and three buildings became the nucleus of the Academy's equipment when, in the summer of 1892, the Seminary became the Divinity School of the Uni- versity of Chicago and entered its quarters on the University Quadrangles. Almost adjacent to this property were the buildings and grounds of the Illinois Military Academy, which was the direct successor of the Morgan Park Military Academy, established in 1873. These were acquired by lease and added two buildings to the three of the other group. Removed by a short distance from the Military Academy was the single building of Dr. Thayer's Young Ladies' Seminary. By gift of Mr. George C. Walker, this building, with the ground about it, was added to the Academy's equipment. In this union of such educational elements it was not tmfitting that a co-educational policy should have prevailed, and to both boys and girls the invitation to enter the Academy was extended. THE BUILDINGS Thus the Academy's complement of buildings in 1892 was Blake Hall, which continued to serve as the recitation building and chapel, as in the days of the Theological Seminary ; the dormitory of the Theological Seminary, used as the girls' hall and called for the first time Morgan Hall; the Military Academy's barracks and recitation building, used as a boys' hall and called Park Hall; the drill hall of the military school, used as a gymna- sium for the boys; the library building of the Theological Seminary, transformed into the science laboratory ; and the building of Dr. Thayer's Female Seminary, newly designated as Walker Hall, and used as a dormitory for boys. In the fall of 1893 Morgan Hall, as it was larger than Park Hall, was used for the boys, since many more boys than girls were in attendance, and Park Hall became the girls' hall. Walker Hall ceased in 1894 to be a part of the Academy, having been turned over to the Scandinavian Seminaries of the Univer- sity. In 1894 a valuable addition to the Academy's equipment was made by Mr. George C. Walker, who gave to the University the stone library building and library lot adjacent to the Academy's grounds. At this time an arrangement was entered into with the Morgan Park Library Association by which the library of 3,500 volumes was given to the Academy. The con- sideration accompanying this gift was that the Academy should give five scholarships defraying each a fxill year's tuition and ten scholarships of half that value, to be awarded each year to children of residents of Morgan Park only. This library, consisting of books selected very largely by the late Dr Justin A. Smith, greatly strengthened the Academy's equipment, increas- ing its library to 5,000 volumes and providing a beautiful building to contain them. In the winter of 1895, through an explosion of a kerosene lamp, Park Hall was destroyed by fire, and from this time until the fall of 1897 to provide accommodations for the girls resi- dences in the village were rented and furnished for cottage dormitories. In 1896, together with other purchases of land adjacent to the Academy grounds, the University bought that which 215 216 The President's Eepoet had been used already for several years under lease from the owners of the Military School property, and from a part of this property an athletic oval was prepared. In the spring of 1896 work was begun on a new dormitory of forty-eight rooms for boys. This, called West Hall, was first used in the fall of 1897, and this year Morgan Hall was divided by partitions, and half of it was equipped for the accommodation of girls. In the winter of 1898 the gymnasium was destroyed by fire and as temporary substitute for it the basement of Morgan Hall was equipped for the girls and a hall in the village was rented and furnished for the boys. In 1898 East Hall was constructed as a boys' dormitory, its equipment including kitchen and dining-room sufficient in capacity for all the boys of the school. Divided really into two halls by a cross-partition of brick, this building was planned for sixty rooms and suites. The upper floor of the north division was used until the fall of 1900 for the purpose of a gymnasium. In this year the new brick Gymnasium was erected, containing four large divisions, of which one, with earth floor of dimensions 70 by 100 feet, is the ball court, devoted to all forms of indoor athletic sports. Adjacent to this is the group of rooms given up to baths and lockers. Over this is the apparatus-room, 60 by 42 feet, equipped with all forms of gymnasium apparatus. Opening from this are the boxing and fencing rooms, the trophy-room, and the offices of the Physical Director. The fourth division consists of the bowling-alley room, adjacent to the ball court, and contains a pair of regulation alleys. The Gymnasium thus completes the Academy's equipment of seven buildings. THE FACULTY The following is a fist of present and former members of the Faculty: Wayland J. Chase, A.M.: Associate in Introductory Year, 1892-94; Instructor in History, 1894-98; Recorder, 1897-98; Acting Dean and Assistant Professor of History, 1898-1900; Dean, 1900— . Isaac B. Burgess, A.M.: Acting Dean and Associate Professor of Latin, 1892-93; Associate Professor of Latin 1892-95; Professor of Latin, 1895—. Frank M. Bronson, A.M.: Instructor in Greek, 1892-94; Assistant Professor of Greek, 1894 — . Ernest L. Caldwell, A.B.: Associate in Mathematics and Physical Culture, 1892-94; Instructor in Mathematics, 1894—. Alfred R. Wightman, A.M.: Assistant in Latin, 1895-1900; Associate in Latin, 1900-1902. Harry D. Abells, S.B.: Assistant in Introductory Year, 1898-1901; Associate in Physics and Chemistry, 1901-02; Instructor in Physics and Chemistry, 1902—. Haydn E. Jones, Ph.D.: Assistant in History and Director of Physical Culture, 1900 — . Arthur W. Leonard, A.M.: Assistant in English, 1900-1902; Associate in English, 1902 — . Charles S. Fox, A.B., LL.B.: Assistant in German and French, 1900-1902. Reuben M. Strong, Ph. D.: Assistant in Botany and Physiography, 1901-02. Charles W. Larner: Assistant in Manual Training, 1901 — . Sarah E. Mills: Librarian, 1895—. Robert H. Cornish, A.M.: Instructor in Physics and Mathematics and Academy Recorder, 1892-94; Assistant Professor in Natural Science, 1894-97, and summer, 1899. Luanna Robertson, Ph.D.: Associate in German and English, 1892-94; Instructor in German, 1894r-1900. Elizabeth C. Cooley, A.B.: Associate in Latin and History, 1892-93. George N. Carman, A.B.: Dean and Associate Professor of English, 1893-95. Charles H. Thurber, Ph.D.: Dean, 1895-99. Clara P. Anderson, S.B.: Assistant in English, 1895-96. Edwin P. Brown, A.D.: Assistant in charge of Introductory Year, 1896-97. William H. Runyon, A.M.: Instructor in Natural Science, 1897-1900. Frederick D. Nichols, A.B.: Assistant in English, 1897-1900. Frederick D. Eby, A.B.: Assistant in charge of Introductory Year, 1897-98. Joseph G. Brobeck, S.B., M.D.: Assistant in Science and Director of the Gymnasium, 1897-1900. Alice N. Simpson, A.B.: Assistant in Introductory Year, summer, 1896; Reader in Latin, 1897-98. George L. Marsh, A.M.: Assistant in English, spring, 1900, The Morgan Paek Academy 217 John E. Webb, A.M.: Assistant in Biology and Physiology, 1900-1901. F'ritz Reichmann, Ph.D.: Assistant in Manual Training, 1900-1901. Moses O. Gile, A.M.: Assistant Professor of Greek, summer, 1893. S. Prances Pellett, A.M.: Assistant in Latin, summer, 1893. Lea R. DeLagneau, Assistant in E'renoh, summer, 1893-94-95. Edwin H. Lewis, Ph.D.: Assistant in English, summer, 1893-94. Francis W. Shepardson, Ph.D.: Assistant in History, summer, 1893. Herbert E. Slaught, Ph.D.: Assistant in Mathematics, summer, 1893-94. William D. Owen, Ph.D.: Assistant in Latin, summer, 1893. Paul O. Kern, Ph.D.: Assistant in German, summer, 1893-94. Alfred M. Wilson, Ph.D.: Assistant in Latin, summer, 1895. William H. Butts, A.M.: Assistant in Mathematics, summer, 1896. Johannes B. E. Jonas, A.M.: Assistant in German, summer, 1896. Leon Liebard, S.B.: Assistant in French, summer, 1896. William F. Tibbetts, A.M.: Assistant in Latin, summer, 1896. Addison W. Moore, A.M.: Assistant Professor in Educational Psychology, summer, 1896. Edith Earle, A.B.: Assistant in Mathematics, summer, 1897. Frederick W. Howard, A.M.: Assistant in Latin, summer, 1898. Adna W. Risley, A.B.: Assistant in Latin, summer, 1898. COURSES OP STUDY Though the Academy has always prepared students for other colleges and technical schools, the courses have been arranged with a view particularly to the entrance requirements of the University, and have therefore undergone, during the past ten years, the changes that modi- fications in these requirements made necessary. At first the Science course consisted of only one year, in Physics. In 1893 a year of Chemistry was added and a half-year of both Physiog- raphy and Botany, so that the course covered three years. In 1901 a full year was given to both Physiography and Botany, and since then the course has been of four full years. In that year, too. Manual Training was introduced, and now two years are offered in that subject, covering shop-work in wood and the elementary principles and practice of mechanical drawing. A third course in History has also been added, covering the mediaeval and modern periods. The course in Mathematics, originally three years, has been increased to four by the addition of Trigo- nometry, College Algebra, and Analytical Geometry; and a fifth year of College Latin has been offered for the last four years. These college courses have been introduced, not so much with a view to extending the scope of the Academy's work by one year as to afford opportunity for a full year's work to students whose preparation for college lacked less than a year of com- pleteness. It has resulted, however, that there have been enough college subjects thus offered, Modern Language, third-year Greek, and Mediaeval and Modern History being reckoned with the others in this category, so that the Freshman year's work at college has been done here by not a few students. In 1900 required Bible Study was introduced, especially with a view to sup- plying the lack of needed familiarity with the Bible as literature. In this work four courses have been offered each year, consisting of one recitation per week, throughout the year. From the first Physical Training has been an increasingly important part of the Academy's program of work, and has always been a requirement in the course of each pupil. THE SUMMER QUARTER As shown by the tabular statement of the attendance, during the first seven years of the Academy's history the Summer Quarter was regularly a part of the school year. The courses offered during the Summer were in many respects the same as those of the other Quarters. As the attendance was made up more largely of students attending for the 218 The President's Eepoet Summer only than of regular students, there was a considerable demand for review courses, and consequently classes were formed for this purpose in all departments. Since many teachers were in attendance, courses were arranged with a view to the teaching of methods also. Because of the smaller attendance, the cost of maintaining the Academy work during the Summer was always relatively much larger than during the other Quarters of the year, and, moreover, in other departments of the University many of the same courses as those of the Academy were being offered during this Quarter. Furthermore, a large proportion of the Summer students were women. When, therefore, the change was made by which the Academy became a school for boys only, it seemed best to discontinue for a time the session of the Summer Quarter, and since 1899 courses have been offered in the Fall, Winter, and Spring Quarters only. STATISTICS OF ATTENDANCE The following is a tabular statement of the attendance by Quarters : SUMHTEE QtlAETEE AnTUMN QUAETEE WiNTEE QUAETEE Seeing Qua etee Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 65 50 63 63 43 30 30 33 40 20 27 39 24 27 26 29 105 70 90 102 67 57 56 62 72 78 95 125 106 85 85 112 124 156 27 30 47 46 41 42 44 53 99 108 142 171 147 127 129 165 71 74 92 116 93 83 83 105 123 150 21 31 48 44 41 42 44 50 92 105 140 160 134 125 127 155 56 67 83 105 84 74 72 97 113 137 17 35 45 37 38 40 42 46 73 102 128 1895-1896 142 1896-1897 1897-1898 122 114 1898-1899 114 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 143 THE ACADEMY BECOMES A SCHOOL FOR BOYS ONLY The Academy's policy, as already indicated, originally was co-educational, and for eight years girls and boys had equal educational opportunity. During these years, however, the attendance did not increase as the excellence of the advantages offered justified the Trustees in expecting. Especially was this the case in the attendance of the girls who roomed in the Academy's dormitory; and since the Academy was and is a boarding-school rather than a day school, the attendance of pupils not resident in the village was judged to be the index of its real numerical strength. In the fall of 1899 the number of girls in attendance not living with relatives was twenty-six — exactly the same as it had been six years before, in the second year of the school. Moreover, this was the largest number during all these years, while the attend- ance of the boys had been increasing each year and was now about three times that number. The conclusions drawn from these facts, covering the experience of eight years, and based also on the experience of other schools, were that most parents in this part of our country were unwilling to have their daughters from fourteen to eighteen years of age away from home at a boarding-school for both boys and girls. It was believed, moreover, that among both parents of boys and the boys themselves the great majority preferred a boys' school to a co-educational school. In 1899 the Academy had three dormitories, two of which, used by the boys, were practically filled; the other, for girls, less than half filled, and containing no more than there had been six years before, no increase in the attendance of girls in the dormito- ries having occtu'red in all that time. It was not expected that there would be as many girls as there were boys; and yet it was thought essential to the success of co-education that the number The Morgan Paek Academy 219 of either be not very greatly in excess of that of the other. Since the girls were not increasing in numbers, and the boys were, this desired attendance ratio could be obtained only by reducing and limiting the number of boys, a consequence of which would be a small school and the restricting of the educational opportunity. The policy of the University was, on the con- trary, to enlarge and extend the educational opportunity that the Academy offered. Believing, therefore, that this could be done only by ceasing to receive girls and admitting boys alone, the Trustees in the summer of 1899 declared that after July 1, 1900, the Academy of the University of Chicago should be for boys. SYSTEM OF DISCIPLINE The school's theory and scheme of discipline have been to give to each student as large a measure of liberty tmder law as possible. This has come to mean in practice that the boys study in their own rooms, have no " limits " or " bounds " in the village, and are left to their own sense of responsibility and obligation in the conduct of many of the details of their daily life. On the other hand, the day is divided up into recitations and study periods, which they are required to observe carefully; absences from the village may be only by express per- mission; chapel and church attendance are required, and a certain neatness in care of room and personal appearance is enjoined. To the younger boys a more special supervision is given, and of course from boys whose record becomes unsatisfactory some of the personal privileges are taken away. To the few each year whose status, because of advanced studies, has been that of students in the Junior College, there has been given a larger liberty in exemption from some of the requirements, and each year for the last two years " Senior privileges " have been enjoyed by the graduating class in the Spring Quarter. These privileges have consisted principally in exemption from the requirements of study at the hours especially designated for that work and from required church attendance. Eespectfully submitted, Wayland J. Chase, Dean. KEPORTS OF THE DIRECTORS THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY I. E:fiSUME OP THE FIRST EIGHT YEARS, 1892-99 To the President of the University : Sir: I submit herewith my report on the condition of the University Library, dividing it into two parts, one covering the years 1892-99, being a r6sumS of the first eight years of the decade, as a preliminary statement, and the other a somewhat fuller form, including the more detailed statements, covering the last three years. In May of 1892 the agreement was made between the University and the present Librarian in accordance with which the charge of the organization of the University Library and libraries was placed in her hands. On September 1 the University Library was formally organized. The initial collections forming the nuclei about which subsequent additions have been grouped were the libraries of the Baptist Union Theological Seminary at Morgan Park, the old University of Chicago, the American Bible Union, the Cottonian Collection, and the Berlin Collection. The month was devoted to superintending the removal of these collections to the University quadrangles. On October 1 the University Library formally began its work in connection with the other activities of the institution. Room 8 B in Cobb Hall was placed at the disposal of the Librarian to be used as the headquarters and executive office. During the first Quarter the work of the Library consisted largely in ordering new books, checking orders received during the summer, and establishing a series of reference libraries in connection with the departments of instruction. During this period the reference work of the main library was limited to the use of general reference books placed on file in Room B, and such books as could be borrowed from other libraries, the lack of space available preventing the unpacking of the books from Morgan Park. The Librarian wishes to acknowledge in this connection, with grateful appreciation, the courtesy of many libraries, noticeably the Boston Public, Harvard, Columbia, Johns Hopkins, Princeton, and the State Historical Society of Wisconsin, which lent from their shelves the tools with which this Library did its early work. On January 3, 1893, the Library Department was moved from Room 8 B, Cobb Hall, into the temporary building situated on the corner of Lexington avenue and Fifty-seventh street, which building it occupied as a temporary home until 1902. The months of January, February, and March were spent in tmpacking and shelving the books from Morgan Park and from the Fifty-fifth street storeroom. Wherever there were books from any of the collections suitable for the use of departmental research they were transferred from the General Library to the Departmental Libraries, the selection in each case being made by the professor in charge of the Department interested. The staff has included the following persons : Zella Allen Dixson, A.M., Associate Librarian. William Isaac Thomas, Ph.D., Assistant Pro- Graduate, Mt. Holyoke College, 1880; Assistant Libra- fessor of Sociology and Superintendent of rian, Columbia College, 1885-86; Library Expert, 18S7- Departmental Libraries. 88; Librarian, Denison University, 1888-90; Special Student in British Museum, 1891; Librarian, Baptist A.B., University of Tennessee, 1884; A.M., ibid., 1885: Union Theological Seminary 1890-92; A.M. Shepard- Instructor in English and Modern Languages, ifiid. son C9llege, 1892; Assistant Librarian, the University 1886-87; Adjunct Professor of English and Modern of Chicago, I892-9D; Associate Librarian, i6id., 1895-j Languages, ibid., 1887-88; Student in Berlin and Got- bpecial Student in British Museum, 1899. tingen, 1888-89 ; Professor of English, Oberlia College, 223 224 The President's Ebport 1889-94; Fellow in Sociology, the University of Chi- cago, 1893-94; Professor of Sociology, Oberlin College, 1894-95; Fellow and Assistant in SocioloLry. the Uni- versity of Chicago, 1894-95; Instructor in Sociology, ibid., 1895-96; Ph.D., ibid., 1896; Superintendent of De- partmental Libraries, ibid., 189G-. *Jean Elizabeth Colville, A.M., Head Cata- loguer. A.B., Woostet University, 1886; A.M., ibid., 1889; In- structor in Greek and German, Franklin College, 18S6- 87; Librarian, Mt. Vernon (Ohio) Public Library, 1888- 90; Librarian, Northfield Seminary, 1891; Cataloguer, Baptist Union Theological Seminary, 1891-92; Head Cataloguer, the University of Chicago, 1892-94. Josephine Chester Robeetson, A.B., Head Cataloguer. A.B., Wellesley College, 1891 ; Teacher in Public Schools, Albion. N. Y., 1883-85; Instructor in Shepardson Col- lege, 1888-89; Librarian, Northfield Seminary, 1892; Li- brarian, State Normal School, Trenton, N. J., 1893-94; Graduate Student, the University of the City of New York, 1896 ; Head Cataloguer, the University of Chicago, 1894-. Cora Belle Peebine, A.B., Head of Accession Department. A.B., Wellesley College, 1891 ; Student Assistant in the University of Chicago, 1892-93; Head of Accession De- partment, ibid., 1893-. Clarence Almon Toeeet, Ph.B., Inspector of Departmental Libraries. Ph.B., Cornell College, 1890; Principal of Schools. Mt. Vernon, la., 1890-92; Graduate Student in the Uni- versity of Chicago. 1892-93; Assistant Cataloguer, ibid., 1893-94; Inspector, Departmental Libraries, ibid., 1894-. * Minnie Jones, A.B., Loan-Desk Assistant. A.B., Northwestern University, 1889; Instructor in Ke- waunee (Wisconsin) High School, 1890-91; Assistant in Baptist Union Theological Seminary, 1891-92 ; Loan- Desk Assistant in the University of Chicago, 1892-95. * George Washington Pasohal, A.B., Loan-Desk Assistant. A.B., Wake Forest College, 1892; Principal, Dalcho Academy, 1893; Graduate Student in the University of Chicago, 1894-96 ; Loan-Desk Assistant, ibid., 1894-96. ♦William Frederick Yust, A.M., Loan-Desk Assistant. A.B., Central Wesleyan College, 1893; Instructor in Public Schools, Canton, 111., 1893-94 ; Graduate Student in the University of Chicago, 1895-96; Loan-Desk As- sistant, ibid., 1896-99. Frank Leland- Tolmak, Ph.B., Loan-Desk As- sistant. Ph.B., the University of Chicago, 1899; Graduate Stu- dent, ibid., 1899-. * Julia Angell, Assistant. Assistant in the University of Chicago Library, 1892-93. * Hester Coddington, Assistant. Assistant in the University of Chicago Library, 1892-93. * Charlotte Florence Coe, Accession Assistant. Graduate of Lake Erie College, 1890; Assistant in the University of Chicago Library, 1892-93; Accession As- sistant, ibid., 1894-98. Anna Sophia Packer, A.B., Accession Assistant. A.B., the University of Chicago, 1895 ; Instructor, Mont- clair, N. J., Public School, 1895-98. * Fulton Johnson Coffin, A.M., Assistant in Haskell Library. A.B., Dalhousie College, 1887 ; A.M., Princeton Univer- sity, 1899 ; Assistant in Haskell Library, 1896-97. Julia Louise Dickinson, Assistant Cataloguer. Graduate, Dearborn Seminary, 1870; Assistant Cata- loguer in the University of Chicago, 1895-. Maegaeet Anne Hardinge, in charge Traveling Libraries. Graduate, Normal Department, Chicago High School, 1869 ; Teacher in Chicago Public Schools, 1869 ; Assis- tant Clerk, Chicago Board of Education, 1870-73; Grad- uate, Library Science Department, Armour Institute of Technology, 1894; in charge Traveling Libraries, the University of Chicago, 1895-. Charles Harris Hastings, A.B., Assistant in Historical Group Library. A.B., Bowdoin College, 1891 ; Assistant in Historical Group Library, the University of Chicago, 1895-1900. * William H. Heebick, Assistant. Assistant in the University of Chicago Library, 1892-93. EsTELLE Lutrell, A.B., Assistant in Biological Library. A.B., the University of Chicago, 1896 ; Assistant, i?Jid., 1894-95; Accession Assistant, ibid., 1895-96; Assistant in Biological Library, 1S97-. Sarah E. Mills, Assistant in Morgan Park Acad- emy Library. Assistant in Morgan Park Academy Library, 1892-. Ruth Edna Morgan, Assistant Cataloguer. Assistant Cataloguer, the University of Chicago, 1897-. * Edgar Dow Vaeney, A.M., Assistant in Haskell Library. A.B.. Bates College, 1886; A.M., ibid., 1893 ; Assistant in Haskell Library, 1897-99. * Peeston Pishon Bbuce, A.B., Assistant in Has- kell Library. A.B., Cornell CoUege, 1893; Graduate Student, the Uni- versity of Chicago, 1898- ; Assistant in Haskell Library, 1898-99. Feedinand Ellerman, Assistant in the Astro- nomical Library. Assistant in the Astronomical Library, the University of Chicago, 1899-. EPITOMIZED STATEMENT OF THE FORMAL ACTIONS OP THE ADMINISTRATIVE BOARD OF LIBRARIES, LABORATORIES, AND MUSEUMS In September, 1894, the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums was organized to have charge of the Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums of the University. This Board has included the following members : The President, Chairman The Recorder, ex officio Professor Lewellys F. Barker, ex officio Professor Thomas Chrowder Chambeelin, ex officio Professor John Meele Coulter, ex officio * Resigned. Professor Henry Herbert Donaldson, ea; officio Professor Geoegb Elleby Hale, ex officio Professor Harry Pratt Judson, ex officio Professor Albert A. Michelson, ex officio Professor John Uleic Nbp, ex officio The University Libeaey 225 Professor Charles O. Whitman, ex officio ♦Associate Professor George Baur, ex officio Associate Professor Clarence Fassett Castle, ex officio Associate Librarian Zella Allen Dixson, ex officio Associate Professor Jacques Loeb, ex officio Associate Professor Frederick Starr, ex officio Assistant Professor William Isaac Thomas, ex officio Assistant Professor James Rowland Angell, ex officio Professor Ernest DeWitt Burton ♦Professor Emil G. Hirsch Professor John Matthews Manly Professor Adolph C. Miller Professor Frank Bigelow Tarbell Associate Professor Starr Willard Cutting ♦Assistant Professor Martha Foote Ckow Assistant Professor Karl Pietsch Assistant Professor Thorstein B. Veblen Instructor Frederick Ives Carpenter The following rules and regulations for the administration of the Library have been form- ally approved by the Board: 1. The Library of the University includes the General Library, the Departmental Libraries, the Group Libraries, the Branch Libraries, and the Traveling Libraries of the University Exten- sion Division. They are all under the direction of the Librarian and subject to the control of the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums. 2. The rules governing the Library in all its activities are contained in the Library Manual. No violation of them will be excused on plea of ignorance. 3. Every member of the University will be given upon application a library card, which will entitle him to draw regularly from the Library not more than three volumes at any one time. In cases where more books are needed, special permission must be obtained from the Librarian. Individuals who are not members of the University may have all 'the privileges of the Library upon the payment of the library fee. 4. Complimentary library cards, for a term of four weeks or less, will be issued by the Librarian to properly accredited scholars visiting Chicago. 5. Books may be retained two weeks, and may be once renewed for the same period. When a library book has become four days overdue, a notice will be sent to the borrower, and the book must be returned at once. 6. A fine of five cents a day shall be paid on each volume not returned according to the terms of the preceding rule, and no other book will be delivered to the person incurring the fine until it is paid. When a book has been retained beyond the prescribed time, and a notice of the fact from the Librarian has been disregarded, a messenger will be sent to secure the book, and an additional fine of twenty-five cents will be charged. 7. Books may be renewed by mail, by addressing the Librarian and sending the number of the book. The receipt of such notice by the Librarian, before the expiration of the time limit, shall be the only evidence accepted of such application having been made. No books bearing a fine will be renewed until the account is settled. 8. All books are subject at all times to a recall by the Librarian for special purposes, and must be returned at once on receipt of the notice. 9. Any person applying for a book belonging to the Library, taken out at the time of such application, will be entitled to have it reserved, and on leaving with the Loan- Desk Assistant an addi-essed postal card will receive notice by mail of the return of the book, but said book will not be held for such applicant more than two days after the mailing of the notice. Applicants will be notified in the order of their applications. 10. Encyclopaedias, dictionaries, and other books of reference, elaborately illustrated works, and such other books as the Librarian shall deem necessary to withdraw from general circula- tion shall be used in the reference room only. ♦Changed. 226 The President's Report 11. All books lost or damaged must be replaced, or proper damages paid, theamoimt being determined by the Librarian. 12. Notes and marks of any kind on books belonging to the Library are strictly forbidden. 13. Overcoats, hats, and umbrellas must be placed in the racks provided for them, and not brought to the Library tables. 14. Silence and decorum must be strictly observed in all departments of the Library. 15. Any person abusing the privileges of the Library or violating the regulations shall be suspended by the Librarian from the privilege of using the Library. All students owing fines must settle the same before presenting themselves for any examination. No student will receive honorable dismissal from the University whose fines are unpaid. 16. No persons except members of the Library staff and the janitors shall have keys to the Library and no key shall be lent for any purpose whatsoever. 17. All rules and regulations apply to all members of the University, officers and students. THE DEPARTMENTAL, GROUP, AND BRANCH LIBRARIES The Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums has recommended, and the Trustees of the University have adopted, the following principles as a basis for the administration of these Libraries : 1. They shall be regarded as an organic part of the University Library, and therefore under the direction of the University Librarian. 2. They shall be regarded as reference libraries, and books may be withdrawn from them only under special conditions. 3. There shall be the same general plan for their administration and the use of their books. 4. Branch Libraries differ only from Departmental and Group Libraries by being at a distance from the University. GENERAL REGULATIONS 1. One person from the teaching force of each Department shall be selected by the Head or acting Head of that Department and by the President, who shall serve as Departmental Adviser in all matters pertaining to the management of the Library in that Department. 2. Each Departmental Library shall have two attendants, who shall be selected from the Graduate Scholars and Fellows of the Department, each of whom shall serve the Library two hours a day in arranging and cataloguing old and new books, and in doing other necessary work under the direction of the University Librarian. 3. An Inspector from the Library staff shall be chosen, whose duty it shall be to inspect each Departmental Library and make regular written reports upon the needs of the Depart- mental Libraries. 4. The Library Inspector shall notify the Library Adviser of any Departmental Library from which he shall remove any book, giving reasons for the removal, and" stating to what Department the book has been assigned. 5. A Superintendent of Departmental Libraries shall be appointed, who shall have general oversight of the administration of Departmental Libraries, and shall recommend to the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums measures whereby these libraries may be made more serviceable. 6. He shall examine all lists of books and periodicals proposed for purchase by Depart- mental Libraries, and when books or periodicals are not obviously appropriate to the Department making the proposal, he shall bring the matter to the attention of the Head of the Department concerned, and may then refer the proposal to the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums. The Univeesity Libeaey 227 7. When a Departmental Library presents an order for books or periodicals already iu another Departmental Library, or in the General Library, he shall arrange a transfer of the books or periodicals in question between the libraries concerned, approve the order, or refer it to the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums. 8. He shall, acting with the Librarian, confer with the editors in charge of University pub- lications in reference to securing, by exchange, periodicals proposed for purchase by Departmental Libraries or by the General Library. SPECIAL REGULATIONS The following special regulations have also been established : 1. Departmental Libraries shall be closed at six o'clock p. m., and shall not be open during the evening, except to those to whom special permission has been granted by the Departmental Adviser. 2. All officers of instruction may, with the approval of the appropriate Departmental Adviser, withdraw books from the library of their own Department and retain them for limited periods, to be agreed upon by the borrower and the Departmental Adviser, (a) The records of withdrawal of books are to be kept in each Departmental Library in an instructor's loan book, provided for that purpose, and the boiTOwer shall record his name, title of book, accession number, and the date of withdrawal. (6) The Departmental Adviser, in connection with the Head of the Department, shall determine the conditions under which books may be drawn from a Departmental Library, and inform the General Library of these conditions, (c) The Depart- mental Adviser may, through the General Library, call in a book at any time. A fine of fifteen cents a day will be imposed for each failure to return books at the hour designated. 3. These regulations shall govern officers in the University as well as students. 4. Officers of instruction are requested to make their suggestions and desires with reference to the Library through the Departmental Adviser. RELATION BETWEEN THE GENERAL LIBRARY, DEPARTMENTAL, GROUP, AND BRANCH LIBRARIES In October, 1895, the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums recommended, and the Trustees of the University adopted, the following statement of the relation existing between the General Library and all Departmental, Group, and Branch Libraries : The relation between the General Library and the Departmental, Group, and Branch Libraries shall be identical with that existing between these several libraries. In accordance with this principle the following regulations have been made : A. OWNERSHIP OF BOOKS 1. All books now in possession of the General Library are recognized as belonging to that Library. But it is understood that the books of the Berlin and the Morgan Park collections not yet distributed are held in trust for the advantage of all divisions of the Library, without individual preference of one over another. All other books in the General Library are regarded as belonging to it for the piu-pose of a general reference or circulating library. 2. All books now in possession of the several Departmental, Group, and Branch Libraries are recognized as belonging to these several libraries, except such books as have been loaned to any of these libraries by the General Library, either from the collection of the old University of Chicago or from books pmchased by funds specially appropriated for the General Library. B. LOAN OF BOOKS 3. Books belonging to the General Library shall be loaned to any of these libraries on the request of the Departmental Adviser, when, in the judgment of the University Librarian, they are not needed for the purposes of the General Library. 228 The President's Repoet 4. Books thus loaned shall be returned on demand of the University Librarian. 5. Any of these libraries may deposit with the General Library books temporarily not in use in these libraries, to be held there in trust for them. Such books will be put into circulation just as other books in the General Library, unless the Library Adviser shall request to the contrary. 6. Books thus held in trust shall be returned to the Library from which they came on demand of the Library Adviser. C. EXCHANGE AND TRANSFER OP BOOKS 7. Books belonging to the Berlin collection or to the Morgan Park collection, as far as they have not yet been distributed, shall be permanently assigned to any library on application by the Library Adviser and approval by the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums. 8. The Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums shall have the right to recall to the General Library any books thus granted. 9. Exchange of other books between two Departmental, Group, or Branch Libraries, or between the General Library and any one of these, or transfer of books from one library to another, may be arranged between the representatives of the libraries concerned on such terms as may be agreed upon, the General Library being duly informed and recording the transfer. 10. When any library presents an order for a large collection of books already owned by another library, or by the General Library, it shall be the duty of the Librarian to submit the order to the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums for approval. REGULATIONS FOR THE PURCHASE OF BOOKS FOR THE LIBRARIES The Trustees of the University, upon the recommendation of the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums, have also established the following regulations, in accordance with which books are purchased for the libraries : 1. Proposals for the purchase of books must be approved first of all by the Head or acting Head of the Department for whose use the books are desired. Persons, other than Heads or acting Heads of Departments, desiring to propose books for purchase should transmit their proposals to the Head or acting Head of the Department in which the book belongs. If an additional copy of any book already owned by the Library is desired, this should be indicated by the words "additional copy desired," placed after the title. If the succeeding volume of a work in course of publication is desired, the fact should be indicated on the proposal. 2. All proposals for books shall be made on the order cards provided by the Library, one card for each work, and each card must be separately signed by the Head or acting Head of the Department proposing the book. 3. The Librarian shall collate the list of books proposed for purchase with the catalogue of the Library. If any book in the list is already owned by the Library in any Department, and is not marked on the list as an additional copy desired, this fact, with particulars respecting the Department to which the copy belongs, shall be reported to the professor by whom the proposal was approved. Of the remainder of the list the Librarian shall secure an estimate of cost. The original proposals bearing the signature of the Head or acting Head of the Department shall be filed in the Library. 4. If the estimated cost of the books proposed at any one time is within the sum appro- priated and available to the Department proposing the books, the Librarian shall send a list of such books to the University Press for purchase. Such lists shall be signed by the Librarian and shall bear date on which it is sent to the Press. The signature of the Librarian to the words " approved for purchase " on each card or sheet of any list of books shall be the only authorization for the purchase of such books. The Librarian shall preserve a memorandum, in The Univebsitt Library 229 a book to be kept for that purpose, of all orders approved for purchase. If the estimated cost of any order exceeds the amount appropriated and available for the Department in question, the order shall be returned to the Head or acting Head of the Department, with information concern- ing the amount by which the estimate exceeds the money available. 5. With every consignment of books delivered by the University Press to the Librarian there shall be sent to the Librarian regular bills on University Press bill-heads, the books for each Department of the University being on a separate bill, "and no book shall be accepted by the Librarian unless accompanied by such bills. 6. The Librarian shall also sign and date any ready-reference receipt which the University Press may present with books delivered and accompanied by regular bills. This ready-reference receipt, being signed on delivery of the books without delay for collation of the orders, shall be construed only as a provisional acceptance of the books, and shall contain language so provided, not as waiving or surrendering any right of return otherwise belonging to the Library. For books returned to the Press, after being thus receipted for, the Librarian shall take a return receipt from the Press. 7. The bills named in sec. 5, when audited by the Librarian, shall be returned to the Univer- sity Press with the signature of the Librarian, indicating what books have been received. The sig- nature of the Librarian upon any bill, or opposite any item of a bill, shall be to the University Press the only voucher of the delivery of the book and its acceptance by the Library. The Librarian shall use such means as are accessible to detect errors in the bills and to secure their correction. 8. These identical bills bearing the signature of the Librarian for each item of the bill, or for the bill as a whole, shall be presented for payment to the Secretary of the University, and no bills not so audited and signed shall be accepted by him for payment. DELIVERY STATION OF THE PUBLIC LIBRARY In March, 1894, there was established at the General Library of the University a station of the Chicago Public Library, known as Station 11, South, by means of which daily consign- ments of books needed by members of the University are brought to the General Library for distribution. At first only one box a day was delivered, so that a book ordered one day could not be received until the following day. Now there is a collection in the morning and a delivery in the afternoon, making it possible for books to be ordered before 9 a. m. and delivered by 2 p. m. of the same dsty. This delivery station has greatly aided the Library in its work by relieving it of the necessity of buying popular books which would be needed only in the circulating depart- ment, thus enabling it to spend the money at its disposal for reference books and expensive sets of transactions. In 1894 there were issued from this station 121 cards ; in 1895, 205 ; in 1896, 290 ; in 1897, 227 ; in 1898, 298 ; in 1899, 303. Many more cards issued at other stations are used by Univer- sity students who find this more convenient than the home station. The following table represents the use the University has made of this station : TABLE I Chicago Public Libkaet Station Statistics Year Orders Vols. Delivered Renewals 1894 1,722 4,276 5,278 5,550 7,692 9,367 1,150 3,190 3,670 3,924 5,515 7,039 64 1895 436 1896 498 1897 530 1898 630 1899 680 230 The Pkesident's Kepokt LOAN-DESK STATISTICS During the year 1898-99 the loan-desk statistics show the following use of the General Library : TABLE II Calls at the desk - - 24,597 Average per day ---. gg Volumes drawn ---.--..... 8,667 Average per day -- 28 Books borrowed from other libraries ---...- 65 Books loaned to other libraries -- 72 New cards issued --_. 503 Complimentary cards to accredited scholars 9 Fines collected $198.16 ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY * BOOKS ADDED BY PTJECHASE The following collections form the nuclei of the University Library about which subsequent accessions have been gathered: TABLE III Baptist Union Theological Seminary .-.-.-. 40,000 Old University of Chicago 10,000 Berlin collection 175,000 Edward Olsen library (not yet delivered at the University) - - 5,000 TABLE IV Boohs Added to the Univeesitt Libhaet bt Pdechase July 1, 1893-July 1, 1899, 55,397 Voldmes, disteibijted a3 follows: Department General Library Philosophy Pedagogy Political Economy Political Science History Archaeology Sociology Sociology (Folk-Psychology) Anthropology Sanskrit and Comp. Philology Greek Latin Latin and Greek Romance German German (Scandinavian). . English Mathematics Astronomy (Ryerson) .... Astronomy (Yerkes) Chemistry Physics Geology Biology Zoology Anatomy No. Volumes 8,655 2,213 719 3,900 1,338 3,938 265 1,827 181 426 1,368 1,432 1,318 271 2,779 2,983 51 3,857 1,458 324 1,099 854 2,219 692 474 121 Amount Expended $121,201.89' 5,272.87 1,011.19 9,.368.52 4,408.60 10,099.02 1,490.70 4,611.35 2,560.80 3,643.62 4,456.29 6,244.87 5,586.01 5,634.05 9,320.94 4,838.32 1,274.62 2,614.56 2,253.37 5,846.53 9,121.76 1,936.39 927.28 Department No. Volumes Physiology Neurology Paleontology Botany Public Speaking Morgan Park Academy Physical Culture Music Latin, New Testament, and"] Church History I Latin, Greek, and Classical f ArchEeology J History, Political Economy, ~ Political Science, Sociology Comparative Religion Semitic Egyptology Divinity New Testament Church History Systematic Theology Homiletics Scandinavian Seminaries. . . Sociology (Divinity) Total , 514 281 774 1,046 133 1,346 189 19 36 127 440 1,550 j 1091 125 612 808 797 384 421 969 55,397 Amount Expended 1,395.70 1,081.96 1,065.46 2,347.14 228.07 2,705.61 146.85 45.82 Included under separate Departments Included under separate Departments 1,739.65 4,611.87 9,066.94 $248,158.62 ' Amount expended included bills of Berlin collection above mentioned. The University Libhart 231 BOOKS ADDED BY GIFT Since October, 1892, when the Library of the University of Chicago was fairly in running order, the gift-work has occupied a very important place in the Library administration. Eealizing that much of value might be had for the asking, requests have been sent to authors, editors of magazines, secretaries of societies, government, state, and city officials, insti- tutions and private individuals, stating our needs and asking for anything they might have to give. The success of the plan is shown by the fact that up to July 1, 1899, the Library had received 16,175 volumes, besides many hundreds of pamphlets and unbound theses. A card catalogue of these gifts has been kept, showing when they were received, by whom given, and to what Department they have been assigned. All orders for books are carefully checked with this gift catalogue, to prevent the purchase of books already owned by the University, but not represented in the order department. The following table shows the comparative yearly growth in this department: TABLE V VoLCMES Given feom Octobee, 1892, to Jclt, 1899 Years No. of Volumes October, 1892-July, 1893 ---------- 2,081 July, 1893-July, 1894 1,470 July, 1894-July, 1895 ---------- 2,017 July, 1895-July, 1896 ---------- 2,629 July, 1896-July, 1897 - . . - . 2,959 July, 1897-July, 1898 - - - - 2,436 July, 1898-July, 1899 ----- 2,583 Total 16,175 It is the general policy of the Library administration to place all gifts in the General Library, unless a special Department has been specified by the donor. LOSS OF BOOKS In the fall of each year a book inventory of all the libraries is taken with a view to ascer- taining what volumes are missing. The record of each succeeding year is corrected by the latest inventory. It frequently happens that volumes that have been missing in one year will be found upon the shelves in a subsequent inventory. The following table shows the comparative loss of books from 1892 to 1899. TABLE VI Tabulation of Lost Books Departments Philosophy Pedagogy Political Economy Political Science History Archaeology Sociology Anthropology Haskell Comparative Philology Greek Latin Latin and Greek 1892-95 21 1 18 27 13 1 7 82 1 9 5 4 1896 10 3 17 17 29 17 3 49 10 1 1897 10 8 31 26 16 37 13 30 8 8 1 11 20 15 13 15 23 26 6 22 13 14 36 21 26 19 7 24 2 15 11 Totals by Departments 65 46 117 104 99 1 103 23 211 3 48 47 5 232 The President's Keport TABLE \I — Continued Departments 1892-95 1896 1897 1899 Totals by Departments Romance German English Mathematics .... Astronomy Physics Chemistry Geology Biology Physical Culture Music Public Speaking . Totals by years 1 25 3 1 3 2 3 2 2 240 5 3 19 6 1 4 1 5 6 4 1 211 17 4 47 8 1 1 1 6 27 2 1 303 5 7 38 6 2 7 1 17 6 2 242 11 8 41 10 11 4 18 23 12 326 47 23 170 33 5 26 9 32 75 26 1 3 1,322 TRAVELING LIBRARIES The Extension Division has formed an active part of the organization of the University from the beginning, and the traveling libraries have been part of the necessary equipment of the Division from October, 1892, when the first lectures were given, up to the present time. These libraries are sent out in connection with the lecture courses given by the University Extension Faculty, and supply to educational centers away from the University the books neces- sary to secure the best results from the lectures. These libraries are made up of books relating to the subject of the lecture series being given at the time. Duplicate copies are furnished, and in some cases entire duplicate libraries, when the centers are large, or extra copies needed. The Board of Trustees provides the funds for the purchase of these books by an annual appropriation. No charge is made for the use of the traveling library, but each center is required to pay for its transportation and to replace any lost or injured volumes. The first traveling library was sent out for the season of 1892-93. It was sent to Freeport, 111., to a center studying the labor question, and contained 19 volumes. The present libraries number from 25 to 75 volumes, representing from 5 to 20 titles. The period of use extends from the Autumn to the Summer Quarter, inclusive. This period allows each center to offer two or three courses of lectures. The hbrary accompanying a lecture course is selected by the lecturer, purchased by University Extension funds, and placed in the charge of the local secretary of the center through whom the library business of the center is transacted. Whenever a lecture course is discontinued, the books used in this course are marked at greatly reduced prices and placed on sale in some convenient place. The books in the TABLE VII Teaveling Libeaet Statistics 1892-93 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 Number of volumes 1,100 1,754 64 4 30 1,834 2,001 64 5 44 1,935 2,010 89 9 56 27 828 242 2,460 1,782 59 7 45 20 523 116 3,467 3,536 94 8 36 30 1,398 274 3,663 3,562 83 8 48 20 586 478 3,550 2,848 Number of libraries sent 67 8 Number of cities or towns New libraries purchased Number of volumes purchased . . Number of volumes sold 46 12 642 896 The University Libeaby 233 traveling libraries are at all times for sale to the students of the centers at wholesale prices. The library administration is glad to carry the extra work thus involved for the sake of the opportunity afforded in this way to students to secure for themselves private libraries on subjects in which they have become interested. The preceding table shows a summary statement of the accessions, sales, and use of the books from 1892-99. BOOKS ADDED BY EXCHANGE From July 1, 1893, till July 1, 1899, there have been added to the Library of the University of Chicago, by exchange for University publications, 2,687 volumes, distributed as follows: TABLE vni Departments General Library .... Pedagogy - - - . . Political Economy - - . - Political Science - . - History --...- Sociology - - - - - Sociology (Divinity) . - - Anthropology - ... Comparative Religion .... - 70 No. Vols. - 992 9 - 422 16 9 156 - 29 15 Semitic --.... New Testament - . . - Sanskrit and Comparative Philology Greek - Romance 207 212 5 1 1 Departments English - . - ■ Astronomy - - - Physics . . . . Geology ... Botany . . - . Public Speaking - Church History Systematic Theology - Homiletics Divinity - - - Egyptology - Morgan Park Academy No. Vols. 2 12 1 143 Total 1 ■ 77 41 ■ 44 25 1 127 • 2,687 NuMBEK OF Volumes in Depaetments July 1, Departments General Library Philosophy - - . . Pedagogy Political Economy Political Science ... History . - - . . Archaeology . - . . Sociology . - - . Sociology (Folk- Psychology) ) Anthropology ) Haskell - - - - Comparative Philology - Greek ..... Latin Latin and Greek ... No. Vols. 248,443 2,846 1,700 6,067 2,545 5,104 464 3,523 838 9,027 1,417 1,971 4,415 549 Departments Romance - German - . - English Mathematics - Astronomy (Ryerson) Astronomy (Yerkes) Physics - - - Chemistry Geology - - . Biology Music - - . Public Speaking Physical Culture - No. Vols. 2,771 4,839 5,158 2,399 568 1,194 1,716 4,218 7,442 146 135 183 Total -.-..-- 319,678 EXCHANGES FOE UNIVEESITY THESES At the beginning of the year 1897 the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museirms authorized the Librarian to exchange the accumulated Doctors' theses with like publications of other institutions. A committee was appointed by the Board to prepare a list of institu- tions with which the exchanges should be made. In accordance with this ruling, the Librarian has sent to the following institutions a complete file up to date of the Doctors' theses of the University of Chicago, receiving in exchange corresponding files. Both in amount and in value 234 The President's Eepoet the eschaiiges differ greatly from each other, and some of the files received are longer than those offered by the University of Chicago. In one case, for example, the Strassburg University sent 3,000 theses, and placed the University on its permanent list for future exchanges, in return for 52 theses and similar registration for the future publications of the University of Chicago. TABLE IX Li3T OF Exchanges foe UNrvEESiTT Theses feom Jolt 1, 1897, to July 1, 1899 Name of Institution Theses Sent Theses Eeceived Name of Institution Theses Sent Theses Received American : Brown 50 50 51 50 29 50 50 50 50 54 29 50 49 50 1 1 26 19 31 142 2 11 1 3 Foreign : 55 55 55 52 55 52 52 52 55 52 49 51 Bryn Mawr Cliristiania California Griessen 125 Clark Columbia Halle Cornell Harvard Kiel Johns Hopkins Leiden 41 Leland Stanford Junior Leipzig N. Y. State Library 3,000 32 Pennsylvania Toulouse Princeton Tiibine'eii 45 W^isconsin Yale 635 662 3,243 237 Total American Grand total 662 237 1,297 • 3,480 NEWBEERY LIBRARY PRIVILEGES In February, 1899, a communication was sent to the trustees of the Newberry Library requesting them to take some action permitting the members of the University of Chicago to borrov/ books from the Newberry Library. February 11, the trustees of the Newberry Library voted to establish loans between the University of Chicago Library and the Newberry Library under the following regulations : "The Newberry Library will loan books during the year 1899 on the following conditions : "1. The request for the loan must come from the Librarian of either the University of Chicago, the Northwestern University, Lake Forest University, the John Crerar Library, or the Chicago Public Library. " 2. It must be in behalf of a scholar needing the volumes requested in the prosecution of his professional work. " 3. The institution represented by the Librarian asking the loan must agree to reciprocate in the loaning of books, must guarantee against loss of, or damage to, the book or books loaned, according to the terms of the loan, and must pay all expenses incurred by boxing and shipping. The books are to be at the risk of the borrower from the time they leave the business office of the Newberry Library until they are returned to that office. In case of loss of a volume taken from a set, the institution to which the volume is loaned is to replace the volume or pay the price of a new set. "4. The books must be used in the library building and under the supervision of the Librarian to whom they are addressed. " 5. Books loaned are to be returned not later than the date fixed by the Librarian of the Newberry Library, said date being transmitted with the books ; provided, however, that they must be returned immediately on demand. The Univeesity Libeaet 235 " 6. Prompt notice must be given of the receipt of the volumes loaned, and of the date of shipment when they are returned. "7. Excepted books : " a) All books, periodicals, and pamphlets in the medical department, unless for brief use by a court of law in session in the city, or in some other case of emergency when, in the discre- tion of the Librarian, the book may be safely loaned. " b) Books recently published. " e) Books to be obtained by reasonable search elsewhere. " d) Unbound periodicals. " e) Books that in the judgment of the Librarian cannot be replaced, or may be replaced only with great difficulty and at a large expense. "/) Books in special demand by the patrons of this library. " g) Any book or pamphlet that in the judgment of the Librarian should remain in the building." BAUR LIBRARY March 15, 1899, the University of Chicago purchased from Mrs. Baur, through Dr. H. H. Donaldson, administrator of the estate of the late Associate Professor George Baur, of the University of Chicago, the private collection of books and pamphlets on Paleontology consti- tuting the private library of her husband. The University agreed to pay 1400 for the collection, and agreed to the following condi- tions of sale : 1. All books found to be duplicates to be retm-ned to Mrs. Baur as her private property. 2. A certain collection of books (about fifty) to be purchased by the members of the Univer- sity of Chicago Faculty of Mrs. Baur as a private purchase. Mrs. Dixson, the Associate Libra- rian, and Associate Professor Jordan, the Library Adviser of the Biological Library, to approve the selection. 3. The collection to be distributed by subject, with no mention required by book-plate or otherwise of the source of the purchase of the library. The library is in fair condition as to books, but contains a large number of pamphlets and unbound books, which should be bound immediately. There are also several book rarities of unusual interest and of great value, which should be removed from the collection and placed with books of a similar character in the Librarian's office. The library has been shelved in the Zoology Building. II. DETAILED STATEMENT FOR 1899-1900 AND 1900-1901 Following is the report on the condition of the University Library, up to the present time, covering the years 1899-1900, 1900-1901, and 1901-1902. During this period the personnel of the Library Board has been as follows : THE UNIVEESITY LIBRARIES, LABORATORIES, AND MUSEUMS THE ADMINISTRATIVE BOARD The President, Chairman The Recokder, ex officio Professor Albert A. Michelson, ex officio Dean Harry Pkatt Jodson, ex officio Professor Henry Herbert Donaldson, ex officio Professor Thomas Chrowder Chamberlin, ex Professor Jacques Loeb, ex officio officio Professor John Ulric Nep, ex officio Professor Charles O. Whitman, ex officio Professor George Lincoln Hendeickson, ex Professor John Merle Coulter, ex officio officio 236 The Pkesident's Report Professor Geokge Ellery Hale, ex officio Associate Professor William Isaac Thomas, ex Professor Lewellys F. Barker, ex officio officio Professor Ira Maurice Price, ex officio Associate Professor Clarence Fassett Castle, Associate Librarian Zella Allen Dixson, ex . "-^ ' offlcio Assistant Professor James Rowland Angell, ex Associate Professor Frederick Starr, ex officio ^ Professor Frank Bigelow Tarbell Professor John Matthews Manly Professor Ernest DbWitt Burton Associate Professor Karl Pietsch Dr. Frederic Ives Carpenter EPITOMIZED SUMMARY OF ACTIONS The following recent actions have been formally approved by the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums : GROUP LIBRARIES On November 25, 1899, the Administrative Board formally accepted the report of the com- mittee in regard to the arranging of certain Departmental Libraries into Group Libraries, each Group to be in charge of a Library Assistant, and that the Library Advisers of all Group Libraries be ex officio members of the Library Board. BINDING OF BOOKS On the same date the Board established the following rules and regulations for the bind- ing of University books : "1. That the duty of preparing the original orders for binding be assigned to the General Library, instead of to the Departments as now. Suggestions for the binding may originate either with the Department or the General Library. It shall be the duty of the General Library to prepare such orders for all unbound books, and completed volumes of periodicals, as well as for all other books needing re-binding. "2. That these orders be approved by the Head of the Department for which the binding is to be done; or by the Library Adviser acting on the authorization of the Head of the Department. "3. That the binding orders be made on library cards, one card for each title, after the form presented ; this form to take the place of the order sheets hitherto employed. "4. That the cost of binding be charged to the book fund of the Department which orders the binding, as at present. " 5. That the substance of the above action be printed in the University Record, together with an abridged form of the accompanying statement concerning material and styles of bind- ing, and be sent to the Heads of Departments and to the Library Advisers for their information." PURCHASE OF PERIODICALS The Board also recommended to the Board of Trustees the appropriation of a sum suffi- cient to piuchase a list of publications of common interest to several Departments, with the understanding that this sum be not deducted from present appropriations. BOOKS BY MAIL On February 24, 1900, the Administrative Board instructed the Librarian to bring to the attention of Heads of Departments the fact that a book ordered "in haste" would be ordered by mail. The Univeesity Libeaey 237 BOOK OEDEES On October 27 the Director of the University Press reported that, in accordance with the request of the Library Board dated March 19, 1900, the following regulations governing the purchase of books had been established: " A limit has been put on the time allowed to dealers in which to fill orders, they having been notLBed that on January 1, 1901, all orders of more than a year's standing would be canceled, and that after that time no longer than one year would be given in which to fill any order." The Board voted that the University Press be requested to observe strictly the limit of time and price placed by Departments on rare and out-of-print books, under penalty of being held responsible for exceeding the price fixed by Departments. DEPAETMENTAL SUBJECT CATALOGUES On November 24 the Board voted that it was undesirable to require Departmental Libraries to employ the same system of subject catalogues. THE LIBEARY STAFF Zella Allen Dixson, Associate Librarian William Isaac Thomas, Superintendent of De- partmental Libraries Josephine Chester Robeetson, Head Cataloguer CoKA Belle Pebeine, Head of Accession Depart- ment Clarence Almon Toeeey, Inspector of Depart- mental Libraries Frank Leland Tolman, Loan-Desk Assistant Anna Sophia Packee, Accession Assistant Julia Louise Dickinson, Assista7it Cataloguer Maegaeet Anne Haedinge, in Charge of Travel- ing Libraries CHANGES ON THE STAFF July 1, 1900, Charles Harris Hastings, Assistant in Historical Library Group, resigned; Amy Hewes appointed to take his place. July 1, 1900, Ferdinand Ellerman, Assistant in Astronomical Library, resigned; Storrs B. Barrett appointed to take his place. October 1, 1900, Edgar Dow Varney, Assistant in Haskell Library, resigned; Preston P. Bruce appointed to take his place. October 1, 1900, William Frederick Yust, resigned; Prank Leland Tolman appointed to take his place. Ruth Edna Moegan, Second Assistant Cata- loguer Amy Hewes, Assistant in Historical Library Group Estellb Luteell, Assistant in Biological Li- brary Albeet E. Patch, Assistant in Haskell Library John Doesey Wolcott, Assistant in Classical Library Stoees B. Baeeett, Assistant in Yerkes Observa- tory Library Ieene Waeeen, Assistant in School of Education STUDENT ASSISTANTS, JULY 1, 1899-JULY 1, 1902 Mary Elizabeth Abernethy Ambrose Wesley Armitage Frank Perkins Barker Edith Bickell Margaret Jeanette Calvin Jacob Prank Casebeer Lucy Eleanor Chambers Lillian Clark Mary Meroe Conlan Georgia Toto First Helen Gardner Carl Henry Grabo Herman Gustavus Heil Raymond Ransom Kelly Irving King Aurelia Koch Beatrice Lessey Marie Lucy Lewis Edna Lisle Martin Ella R. Metsker Millard Riley Myers Charles Homer Norton Sarah Luella Patterson Eliza Margaretta Sloan Albertus Victor Smith Henry Cowles Smith Myra Virginia Smith Alvin Brinker Snider Georgia Mae Wheeler 238 The Pkesident's Kepoet Associate Professor William I. George C. Seller/ Edgar H. McNeal Arthur E. Bestor Charles B. Williams Charles A. Huston Arthur G. Thomas Garland Q. Whitfield LIBRARY ADVISERS AND ATTENDANTS PHILOSOPHICAIi-HlSTOElCAL GEOUP Thomas, Adviser Paul F. Peck William B. Guthrie Sydney A. Campbell Winifred G. Crowell William B. Miller Henry W. Brewster Howard B. Woolston Anthkopologt Associate Professor Frederick Starr, Adviser EASKELIi Associate Professor John W. Moncrief, Adviser Isaac A. Corbett James H. Brace Joseph E. Hicks John C. Granbery William J. McDowell Albert S. Wilson Elijah A. Hanley CLAgsioAL Geodp Professor George L. Hendrickson, Adviser Nina E. Weston David M. Kobinson La Rue Van Hook Matilda Gibson Mason D. Gray Thomas L. Comparette Geneva Misener Edna C. Dunlap MoDEKN Language Gkodp Instructor Frederic I. Carpenter, Adviser Frances M. Donovan Laura W. Darnell David L. Maulsby Florence Turney G. B. Hallett Alexander P. Thorns Francis M. Motter Edna C. Dunlap Fannie Fisch May B. Wilcoxson Mathematic3-Asteonomt Professor Bliakim H. Moore, Adviser PHTSIC9 Instructor Charles R. Mann, Adviser Geology Professor Rollin D. Salisbury, Adviser Fred H. H. Calhoun Assistant Professor Julius Stieglitz, Adviser CHEMI3TET Biology Physical Cultueb William C. Gore Kate Gordon Harriet E. Penfleld Evelyn S. Hayden Orville E. Atwood Forest G. Smith William R. Schoemaker Wynne N. Garlick Roy W. Merrifield Joseph S. Williams Julia L. Peirce Mabel K. Whiteside Edgar H. Sturtevant Maud A. Link Mae B. Provines Henrietta Becker Josephine Doniat William O. Beal Ralph H. Rice John L. Nelson Mary Lincoln Charles C. Adams Associate Professor Edwin O. Jordan, Adviser Mary Hefferan John M. Prather Public Speaking Assistant Professor Solomon H. Clark, Adviser Mngic Lester B. Jones, Adviser Professor A. Alonzo Stagg, Adviser SERIALS, 1899-1902 During the past three years continued effort has been made to reduce the expense of the annual subscription list for serials by exchanging University publications for serials for which regulai orders had been received. The following tabtilation shows the number of publications which have been coming to the University Library during the past three years, the Departments to which they have been sent and the sources from which they have been obtained : The University Library 239 TABLE X Tabdlated Statement op Serials Defabtments SODECE Issue C Anatomy Anthropology Astronomy (Ryerson) Astronomy (Yerkes) Bacteriology Botany Botany and Zoology Chemistry Church History Classical Archaeology Commerce and Administration Comparative Religion Scandinavian Seminaries English English and German English, German, and Romance General Library Geology German Haskell History Latin Latin and Greek Latin, Greek, aad Sanskrit, and Comp. Phil. Law School Mathematics Morgan Park Academy Music Neurology New Testament Paleontology Pathology Pedagogy Philosophy Physical Culture Physics Physiological Chemistry Physiology Political Economy Political Science Romance Sanskrit and Comparative Philology. . School of Education Semitic Sociology Sociology (Divinity) Sociology (Folk-Psychology) Systematic Theology Zoology 51 53 1 1 1 2 1 5 15 Total. 17 178 3 1 15 32 7 1 39 44 1 83 2 34 4 72 3 i 19 5i 423 30 25 8 5 7 15 21 1 8 5 3 7 7 1 6 70 3 23 2 25 24 1 71 38 27 2 14 7 5 16 7 18 6 17 3 17 12 6 11 10 42 15 9 10 4 1 21 31 28 9 20 7 53 7 22 1 8 7 5 7 8 1 6 160 53 24 138 28 1 26 1 77 39 27 2 15 7 5 21 56 22 6 20 3 17 101 9 11 11 63 19 67 10 4 1 23 1,287 1 1 2 31 5 2 55 14 1 4 2 2 216 37 2 11 1 20 2 6 1 2 5 2 i 51 16 5 40 4 26 9 18 2 4 2 1 3 32 3 3 10 1 1 37 1 1 1 44 1 29 3 i 4 423 5 3 io 2 70 1 2 "i 1 1 1 1 20 3 5 19 15 2 10 1 2 1 3 5 10 14 1 3 3 1 5 9 2 1 167 15 13 9 5 7 3 18 3 9 'i 3 1 2 46 26 10 9 7 1 9 1 27 14 1 '5 2 3 8 8 5 1 3 1 12 17 2 4 6 3 6 17 3 1 U 350 2i0 The President's Repoet SOCIETY PUBLICATIONS AJSTD STATE DOCUMENTS During the year the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museiuns has placed at the disposal of the Librarian, for the purpose of exchange, 20 copies of back numbers of books and studies, 200 copies of current publications, a limited number of back files of the journals, and 150 copies of current numbers. With these an effort has been made to secure the publications of societies, studies, and bulletins of universities and state publications. The following is a list of societies, institutions, and states with which exchanges have been made: SOCIETIES American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, Pa. Berlin, Konigliche Akademie der Wissenschaf ten Giessen, Oberhessische GeseUschaft filr Natur- und Heilkunde Gettingen, Konigliche GeseUschaft der Wissen- schaften Moscow, Sooi^td Impdriale des Naturalistes de Moscou Munich, Konigliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- ten Eoyal Society of Canada Eoyal Society of New South Wales STATES Connecticut Illinois Iowa Maryland Michigan New York Texas Idaho Indiana Maine Massachusetts New Hampshire Ohio Wisconsin CONDITION OF THE CATALOGUES According to the ruling of the Administrative Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums, each Departmental Library has two attendants selected from the Graduate Scholars and Fellows of the Department, each of whom serves the Library two hours a day in arranging TABLE XI Condition of CATAiOGuiNG in Depaetmental and Geoup LrBEAEiES Libraries Having Author Catalogue Libraries Having Subject Catalogue Libraries Having Subject Arrangement on Shelves Libraries Having Card Indicating Shelf Number Anthropology • Astronomy Biology Chemistry Classical Archjeology Comparative Philology English Geology German Greek Haskell History Latin Mathematics Pedagogy Philosophy Physics Political Economy Political Science Romance Biology English! Geology German History Latin Philosophy Physics Political Economy Political Science Sociology Sociology Astronomy Biology Chemistry Classical Archaeology Comparative Philology ' English Geology 1 German Greek Haskell History Latin Mathematics Pedagogy Philosophy Physics Political Economy Political Science Romance School of Education Sociology Biology Chemistry Comparative Philology ' English Geology ' German Greek Haskell History Latin Mathematics Pedagogy Philosophy Physics Political Economy Political Science Romance School of Education Sociology School of Education has dictionary catalogue and decimal classification. ' In course of preparation. ^ Anther arrangement on the shelves. The Univeesity Library 241 and cataloguing old and new books, and in doing other necessary work connected with the Library. Owing to this arrangement all the library work necessary in each Departmental Library can be done only as such help is available. The books in the General Library are all catalogued and arranged, except the undistributed portion of the Berlin collection. There is also in the General Library a complete catalogue of the books in the John Crerar Library, which enables members of the University to keep themselves posted in regard to the resources of that library. The preceding table shows the detailed statistics of the condition of the cataloguing throughout the University Library. TABLE XII Table of Rooms Used foe Depaetmental Libeaeies A B C Total Cobb Hall: Modern Language Group 2,3,5, 6D 4, 5, 7, 11, 12 C 4, eB 35,37 35 4D { 3,6C,1D ( Pol.Econ.officei ( 5B / Greek office' 24 5 Philosophical-Historical Group.. . Classical IC 10 Haskell Museum: Haskell q Kent Chemical Laboratory: Chemistry 1 Public Speaking A B 1 • Music 1 Ryerson Physical Laboratory: Physics 27 37 12,13 24 ( 3 rooms, 2d fl.I ( 1 room, 3d fl.' 1 room, 3d fl.' 1 Mathematics — Astronomy 1 Zoology: Biology 2 Physiology: Physiology 1 Walker Museum: Geology .... 4 Anthropology — Folk-Psychology . 1 Gymnasium: Physical Culture 4 I Psychological Laboratory: Psvoholoev Office 1 School of Education: School of Education 1 room' 1 Total 26 9 4 39 1 Rooms not numbered. 242 The President's Eepoet TABLE XIII Accessions July 1, 1899-JuL-ir 1, 1902 Purchase Gift Exchange Totals by Departments General Library Philosophy Pedagogy Pedagogy (Elementary School) Political Economy Political Science History Classical Archseology Classical Archaeology and Greek Sociology Sociology (Divinity) Sociology (Folk-Psychologyj Anthropology Comparative Religion Semitic New Testament Sanskrit and Comparative Philology Greek Latin Latin and Greek Romance German English Mathematics Mathematics and Astronomy Astronomy (Ryerson) Astronomy (Yerkes) Chemistry Physics Geology Zoology Anatomy Paleontology Neurology Physiology Physiological Chemistry and Pharmacology Botany lO Public Speaking Church History Systematic Theology Homiletics Morgan Park Academy Scandinavian Seminaries Commerce and Administration Music Physical Culture Biology Zoology and Botany Bacteriology Pathology Divinity Latin, Greek, and Sanskrit and Comp. Philology. Embryology Church History, Homiletics, N. T. and Syst. Theol. Latin, Sanskrit and Comp. Phil., and Class. Arch. Literature in English ._ Latin, New Testament, and Church History General Library and Mathematics Semitic and New Testament President's Office School of Education 2,026 435 382 '490 718 6,023 86 1 283 123 42 259 112 316 148 289 433 365 131 438 342 1,461 296 1 80 96 171 301 85 8.35 290 40 149 125 73 232 116 164 297 67 544 293 348 10 21 16 3 52 47 1 13 5 3 10 32 2 8 19,729 8,264 9 181 34 181 62 164 7 'iis 16 "22 6 56 66 8 55 159 3 24 9 224 146 "69 127 13 20 163 61 11 82 19 8 1 126 "52 8 5 22 64 104 54 1 181 "21 14 70 10 1,817 23 242 "265 34 18 221 7 "22 90 102 220 5 4 147 3 11 125 4 12 283 1 213 85 40 15 "ii 21 11,122 4,063 12,107 467 805 .34 936 814 6,205 93 1 619 146 42 303 208 474 4.34 302 488 525 134 463 352 1,690 442 1 153 370 187 332 373 900 301 122 170 133 86 641 117 429 390 112 581 357 463 64 22 197 10 73 61 92 13 5 3 10 42 2 8 5 4 1 34,914 The Univeesity Libeary 243 EXCHANGES FOR UNIVERSITY THESES, JULY 1, 1899-JULY 1, 1902 The following tabulation gives in detail the theses sent and received, and the names of the institutions, American and foreign, with which these exchanges were conducted : TABLE XIV Name of Institution Theses Sent Theses Eeceived Name of Institution Theses Sent Theses Eeceived American: Boston Public Library . . 112 27 27 26 112 27 48 27 6 27 6 6 77 27 27 23 6 48 27 112 6 28 27 1 1 1 76 18 59 4 8 Foreign: Berlin 22 112 112 22 112 22 25 22 25 25 25 22 25 28 26 77 IRA Brown 185 280 19 53 215 362 298 Bryn Mawr California Chicago Historical Soo. . Clark Freiberg Columbia Cornell Delaware Historical Soc. Halle Harvard 381 1,38 Iowa— Hist. Dept. of Kiel ..■.".■.■..■:::;:; Iowa — State Hist. Soc . . Leiden 42 John Crerar Library. . . . Leipzig 11 Johns Hopkins Strassburp" 233 246 Leland Stanford Jr Toulouse New York State Library Tubingen 205 Ohio Arch. & Hist. Soc. Upsala 112 Pennsylvania Total foreign Total American Grand total Princeton 702 859 2,968 168 U. S. Library of Congress U. S. War Dept. Library. Wisconsin 1,561 3,136 Yale Total American 859 168 LOAN DEPARTMENT, 1899-1900, 1900-1901, AND 1901-1902 The report of the Loan Department for the last three years is as follows i TABLE XV The Univeesity Libeaet Calls at the loan desk Average per day Volumes drawn Average per day Books from other libraries Books to other libraries . . . New cards issued Complimentary cards 1900 23,239 76 12,351 41 45 85 756 18 1901 38,241 126 17,605 58 68 90 666 8 51,822 171 22,279 74 100 367 773 6 244 The Peesidbnt's Repoet TABLE XVI Chicago Public Libkaey Station, 11 South 1900 1901 1902 Book orders sent in Volumes delivered . Volumes renewed . . New cards issued. . . 11,609 7,595 803 325 12,188 8,271 844 381 11,013 6,782 657 387 TABLE XVII Intbe-Ljbeaky Loans, 1899-1900, 1900-1901, 1901-1902 chief XjIbeakies feom which books have been boekowed by the untveesity Boston Public Library - - - - - 3 Chicago Public Library _ - - - 4 Chicago Theological Seminary - - - - 9 Clark University ------ 1 Columbia University ------ 5 Cornell University ------ 3 -71 2 - 1 2 -51 4 Harvard University - Johns Hopkins University Michigan Agricultural College - Minneapolis Public Library - Newberry Library Northwestern University Library • Oberlin College Library - - - - - 1 U. S. Library of Congress - - - - 4 U. S. Surgeon General's Office - - - - 5 U. S. Department of Agriculture - - - 1 University of Michigan - - - - - 6 University of Pennsylvania - University of Wisconsin Wesleyan University _ - - Western Reserve University Wisconsin State Historical Society Yale University - - - - 1 ■ 4 1 ■14 2 ■ 9 OHIEr LIBEAEIES TO WHICH THE UNIVEESITY HAS LOANED BOOKS Antioch College Beloit College Bradley Polytechnic Institute Butler College - - - Cornell College 1 -29 5 -13 6 Denison University 19 - 10 - 2 1 - 1 8 - 3 2 - 3 2 - 2 1 - 1 4 Field Columbian Museum Grinnell College - _ - Harvard University Iowa Agricultural College Jackson (Michigan) Public Library Jacksonville Ladies' Academy - Kansas State Normal Lake Forest University Leland Stanford Junior University Marietta College - - - Michigan School of Mines Milwaukee Public Library Northwestern University North Carolina College of Agriculture - - 3 Oberlin College ------ 3 Ouachita College - - - - - - 26 Parsons College ------ 10 Kockford College - - - - - - 11 University of Cincinnati - - - - 9 University of Idaho ------ 1 University of Indiana ----- 1 University of Iowa - - - - - - 14 University of Kansas University of Michigan University of Minnesota University of Missouri University of Nebraska - University of Pennsylvania University of Texas University of Wisconsin - Washington University - 4 -13 4 -10 1 - 1 10 168 1 TABULATED STATISTICS OF THE TRAVELING LIBRARIES 1899-1900, 1900-1901, AND 1901-1902 The following table gives in detail the statistics of the traveling libraries for the last three years: The University Library 245 TABLE XVIII Items Number of volumes Volumes sent out Libraries sent out Number of states represented Cities and towns represented . Libraries purchased Books purchased Books sold 190O 3,689 2,497 63 9 50 17 630 463 1901 3,950 1,965 44 6 37 12 535 228 1902 4,387 2,002 51 8 49 23 740 74 SPECIAL LIBRARY REGULATIONS I. No book, map, manuscript, periodical, pamphlet, print, or other article shall be taken from any library, whether by administrative oiEcer, member of Faculty, student, or other person, without record of such withdrawal being made at the time. The name of the person drawing, the title and accession number of the book drawn, and the date shall be recorded in every case. When a book is returned the person returning it shall see that record of return is made. II. (1) No book under any circumstances may be kept for more than three months without renewal, except on the written permission of the Group Library Adviser or the Head of the Depart- ment concerned. Any Group or Single Department (if not included in a Group) may shorten the period for which a book may be kept out, at its option. (2) Books may be drawn from Departmental Libraries by students only over night. The hours for the withdrawal and return of books shall be fixed by the Group or Departments con- cerned. This permission may be refused by any Group or by any Department (if not included in a Group), at its option. (3) Members of the Faculty of the Department or Group concerned shall have the privilege of drawing books from their Department or Group Library, subject to the provisions of these regulations, for a period not to exceed three months. Books so drawn may be renewed at the end of the period, if not required by others. Instructors connected with other Departments shall be allowed this privilege only on the written permission of the Group Library Adviser or the Head of the Department from whose library the book is drawn. This permission shall be only for the book and person named, unless a general and continuous permission is specified. Anyone desiring to use in the library a book drawn out by an instructor may notify the Library Adviser, who may then request the immediate return of the book to the Library. (4) The same privilege granted to instructors in the drawing of books may be extended to students engaged in the preparation of theses, or other research work of a similar advanced character, at the option of the Department concerned. A list of all persons in each Department (instructors and students) to whom this privilege is granted shall be kept where at all times it may be consulted by the library attendants in the Department or Group Library concerned. (5) A member of the Faculty in any Department may grant written permission to draw books in Ms name from the Library of the Department concerned for a period not to exceed three months. Such permission shall only be for the particular book and person named, and shall not be a continuous or general permission. In every case the instructor granting such permission shall be personally liable for loss. This permission shall be filed and kept on record by the attendant or by the Library Adviser. This privilege may be refused by any Department at its option. 246 The President's Kepokt (6) Oiirront numbei-s of periodicals may be withdrawn only on the written permission of the Group Library or Head of the Department concerned. (7) Books in most frequent use, such as dictionaries, eucyclopaxlias, and the like, books of special rarity or value, and books constantly needed for the use of any course, may be withdrawn from ciixnilation with the approval of the Group Library Adviser or the Head of the Department. Such books shall be marked with a special label (to be procured from the General Library), iudicatiug- that the book to which it is attached is not to be taken from the library under any circumstances. (^8) From the library of the Biological Group complete files of serials not to exceed five in munber, and other volumes not to exceed one hundred, may be withdrawn for a period not to exceed one year (but with privileg-e of renewal) to be placed in a Department biiilding. The original application for such books must be made in writing by the Head of the Department, and must be approved by the Group Library Adviser and the Library BoaixL Yearly renewals may be made on approval of the Group Library Adviser. Books so drawn shall be treated as reserved books and withdrawn from circulation. They shall be under the supeiTision of the Head of the Department, or of someone designated by him, and shall be regularly inspected by the Library Inspector and the Group Librarian, who shall see that they ai-e kept at all times accessible to instructors in all Departments. (9) Books may be withdrawn from Group or Departmental Libraries for permanent keeping in Laboratories or Museums only when they are duplicate copies of books retained in a Depart- mental Library. Such duplicates shall be removed to a Laboratory or Museum room only when a locked case is there provided for shelving them. They shall be under the supervision of the iustrxictor who has charge of the room, or of someone desiguatetl by him, who shall also keep the keys to the case. They shall be inspected regularly by the Library Inspector and the Group Librarian or Library Adviser. Such books shall not be withdrawn except upon written permission of the instructor in charge. Access to them shall not be denied to other instructors iu any Department. III. The Library Inspector shall send a notice in every case where a book is kept longer than three months without renewal. At the request of the Library Adviser he shall send a notice requiring the immediate return of a book which is needed in any library. He shall report to the Library Board (through the Librarian) all cases iu which books axe not retxurned within two weeks after such notice has been sent. IV. Any book lost or not returned within six months after notice has been sent shall either be replaced by the person in whose name the book has been drawn, or said person shall pay into the hands of the Librarian such a siun as in the opinion of the Librarian is the present market value of the book. V. Keys to any library room shall be given out only on the wiitten order of the Library Adviser concerned. He shall keep a record in every case of the name and addi-ess of the person to whom each key is issued, and may i-ecall the key at any time at his option. Xo pei-son to whom a key has been given shall lend his key or admit othei-s to the library with it. VI. Any pei-son violating these regulations may be denied the privilege of using any or all of the libraries of the University, either permanently or for a limited period of time, by a vote of the Library Board with the approval of the President. VII. At the opening of each Quarter it shall be the duty of the Library Inspector to see that all library attendants are instructed in these regulations. VIIT. These regulations shall be printed, and a copy shall be sent to each member of the Faculty. A copy shall be posted in a conspicuous position iu every library of the University. The Univehsity Libeaey 247 LIST OF PERIODICALS RECEIVED A list of current periodicals received by the University. The times of issue of periodicals are indicated as follows: d., daily; w., weekly; semi-w., semi-weekly; semi-m., semi-monthly; m., monthly; Vji-m., bi-monthly; q., quarterly; semi-a., semi-annually; y., yearly. The abbreviations for the journals used in exchange are: A. J. S. L. and L., American journal of Semitic languages and literatures; A. J. S., American journal of sociology; A. .1. T. American journal of theology; A. J., Astrophysical journal; B. W., Biblical world; B. G., Botanical gazette; E. S. T., Elementary school teacher; J. G., Journal of geology; .1. P. E., Journal of political economy; S. R., School review; U. R., University rojcord; Univ. Fub,, Uni- versity puVjlications. The periodicals secured by purchase are marked " pur." The abbreviations at the end of the line are for the libraries in which the publications can be found. Society publications are entered under the name of the society. American anthropologist. N. Y. q. pur. Anthrop. American antiquarian and oriental journal. Acadfemie des inscriptions et belles-lettres, Paris. See Institut de France. Acad^mie des sciences, Paris. See Institut de France. Acadr'mie internationale de gfiographie bo- tanique, Le Mans. Bulletin, m. B. G. Biol. Academy and Literature. Lond. w. pur. Gen. Lib. Academy of natural sciences of Philadel- phia. Proceedings, irreg. .J. G. Geol. B. G. Biol. Academy of science of St. Louis. Trans- actions, irreg. J. G. Geol. Accountant. Lond. w. pur. Acta mathematica. Stockholm. Advance. Chic. w. B. W. Advocate of peace. Bost. m. Agricultural journal. Cape free. Albany law journal, m. pur. Alemannia; Zeitschrift fur Sprache, Kunst u. Altertum. Bonn, irreg. pur. Ger. Alkoholismus. Dresden, q. pur. Sooiol. (Div.) Allgemeine botanische Zeitschrift. Carls- ruhe. m. B. G. Biol. Allgemeine deutsche Lehrerzeitung. Lpz. w. S. R. Ped. Allgemeine Zeitung. Beilage. Mun. w. pur. Ger. Allgemeiner deutscher Sprachverein, Ber. Zeitschrift. m. pur. Ger. Allgemeines statistLsches Archiv. Vienna. irreg. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. American academy of political and social science, Phil. Annals, bi-m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. A. J. S. Sociol. free. Gen. Lib. American annals of the deaf. Wash. 5 nos. Com. , and Adm. irreg. pur. Math. Haskell free. Haskell Town. m. Geol. Law A. J. S. Sociol. Chic. bi-m. B. W. Anthrop. pur. Gen. Lib. American banker. N. Y. w. .J. P. E. Pol. Econ. American catholic quarterly review. Phil. A. J. S. SocioL American chemical journal. (Johns Hop- kins university.) Bait. m. pur. Chem. American chemical society, Easton, Pa. Journal, m. pur. Chem, American church and sunday-school maga- zine. Phil. m. B. W. Haskell American economic association, N. Y. Pub- lications, q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. American education. Alb. 10 nos. free. Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. American engineer and railroad journal. N. Y. m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. American ephemeris and nautical almanac. Wash. y. pur. Astron. American federationist. Wash. m. free. Pol. Econ. American gardening. N. Y. w. free. Biol. American geographical society, N. Y. Bulle- tin. 5 nos. .J. G. Geol. American geologist. Minneapolis, m. .7. G. Geol. American Hebrew. N. Y. w. free. Haskell American historical magazine. Nashville, Tenn. q. pur. Hist. American historical review. N. Y. q. pur. Hist., Sch. of Educ. American institute of mining engineers, N. Y. Transactions, y. J. G. Geol. American journal of anatomy. Bait. q. pur. Biol. American journal of archaeology. (Archaeo- logical institute of America.) Norwood, Mass. q. free. Class. 248 The Pkesident's Eepoet American journal of mathematics. (Johns Hopkins university.) Bait. q. pur. Math. American journal of philology. (Johns Hop- kins university.) Bait. q. B. W. Comp. Philol. American journal of physiology. Bost. m. pur. Biol. American journal of psychology. Worcester. q. pur, Philos. Americal journal of science. (Silliman's.) New Haven, m. J. G. Geol. free. Biol. pur. Physics American journal of Semitic languages and literatures. (University of Chicago.) Chic. q. pur. Gen. Lib., Haskell American journal of sociology. (University of Chicago.) Chic. bi-m. pur. Gen. Lib., Sociol., Pol. Econ. American journal of theology. (University of Chicago.) Chic. q. pur. Gen. Lib., Haskell American kitchen magazine. Bost. m. pur. Sch. of Eduo. American law register. Phil. m. Univ. Pub. Law American law review. St. Louis, bi-m. J. P. E. Law American lumberman. Chic. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. American mathematical monthly. Spring- field, Mo. pur. Math. American mathematical society, N. Y. Bul- letin. lOnos. pur. Math. Transactions, q. free. Gen. Lib., Math. American medical association. Chic. Jour- nal, w. free. Biol. American medicine. Phil. w. free. Biol. American monthly review of reviews. N. Y. J. G. Gen. Lib. free. Haskell, Ped. J. p. E. Pol. Econ. A. J. S. Sociol. pur. Sch. of Educ. American museum of natural history, N. Y. Bulletin, irreg. J. G. Geol. American naturalist. Boston, m. free. Geol., Biol. pur. Sch. of Educ. American negligence reports. N. Y. bi-m. pur. American oriental society. New Haven. Journal, semi-a. pur. Haskell, Comp. Philol. American philosophical society, Phil. Pro- ceedings, irreg. B. G. Gen. Lib. ■ Transactions, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. American physical education review. Bost. q. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Law American quarterly. Bost. pur. Eng. American school board journal. Milwau- kee, m. free. Ped. American statistical association. Bost. Publications, q. A. J. S. Sociol. Analecta bollandiana. Brussels, q. A. J. T. Hist. Anatomische Hef te. Wiesbaden. 1 Abth. Arbeiten aus anatomischen Insti- tuten. irreg. pur. Biol. 2 Abth. Brgebnisse der Anatomic u. Entwickelungsgeschichte. y. pur. Biol. Anatomischer Anzeiger. Jena, irreg. pur. Biol. Anglia; Zeitschrift fur englische Philologie. Halle, q. pur. Eng. Beiblatt. m. pur. Eng. Annalen der Chemie. (Liebig's.) Lpz. irreg. pur. Chem. Annalen der Naturphilosophie. Lpz. irreg. pur. Philos. Annalen der Physik. Lpz. m. pur. Physics Beiblatter. m. pur. Physics Annalen des deutschen Reichs fiir Gesetz- gebung, Verwaltung u. Statistik. Mun. m. pur. Pol. Econ. Annales de chimie et de physique. Paris. m. pur. Chem. Annales des mines; ou,Recueil de m^moires sur I'exploitation des mines. Paris, m. J. G. Geol. Annales des sciences naturelles. Botanique. Paris, irreg. pur. Biol. Zoologie. Paris, irreg. pur. Biol. Annales des sciences politiques. Paris. bi-m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Annales du jardin botanique de Buitenzorg. See Buitenzorg, Java. Jardin botanique. Annales du midi. Toulouse, q. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Annales mycologici. Ber. B. G. Biol. Annali di matematica pura ed applicata. Milan, irreg. pur. Math. Annals and magazine of natural history. Lond. m. pur. Biol, Annals of botany. Lond. q. pur. Biol. Annals of Iowa. Iowa City. q. pur. Hist. Annals of mathematics. (Harvard univer- sity.) Camb. q. pur. Math. Ann^e philosophique. Paris, pur. Philos. Anthropological institute of Great Britain and Ireland, Lond. Journal, q. pur. Anthrop. Anthropologie. Paris, bi-m. pur. Anthrop. Anthropologische Gesellschaft in Wien. Mittheilungen. irreg. pur. Sociol. Folk-Psy. Antiquary. Lond. m. pur. Hist. Archiv der Mathematik u. Physik. Lpz. irreg. pur. Math. The Univeesity Libkaey 249 Archiv fiir Anatomie u. Entwickelungs- geschiohte. Anatomische Abtheilung des Archives fur Anatomie u. Physiologie. Lpz. bi-m. pur. Biol. Archiv fur Anatomie u. Physiologie. Lpz. Anatomische Abth. See Archiv fiir Anatomie u. Entwickelungsgeschichte. Physiologische Abth. See Archiv far Physiologie. Archiv fur Anthropologie. (Deutsche Ge- sellschatt fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologic u. Urgeschichte.) Brns. q. pur. Anthrop. Archiv fiir das Studium der neueren Sprachen u. Literaturen. Brns. 8 nos. pur. Ger. Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie des Menschen u. der Thiere. IJonn. irreg. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Eisenbahnwesen. Ber. bi-m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Archiv fur Entwickelungsmechanik der Organismen. Lpz. irreg. pur. Biol. Archiv fur experimentelle Pathologie u. Pharmakologie. Lpz. irreg. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Gesohichte der Philosophie. Ber. q. pur. Philos. Archiv fiir Gynaekologie. Ber. bi-m. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Hygiene. Mun. irreg. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir klinische Chirurgie. Ber. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Kriminal-Anthropologie u. Kriminalistik. Lpz. irreg. pur. Sociol. Archiv fur lateinische Lexikographie u. Grammatik. Lpz. semi-a. pur. Class. Archiv fttr Literatur u. Kirchengeschichte des Mittelalters. Freiburg, pur. Hist. Archiv fiir mikroskopische Anatomie u. Entvpicklungsgeschichte. Bonn, irreg. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte. Ber. bi-m. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir offentliches Recht. Tiibingen, Lpz. q. J. P. E. Law Archiv fiir Ophthalmologie. Lpz. q. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir pathologische Anatomie u. Physiologie u. fur klinische Medicin. (Virchow's.) Ber. m. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Physiologie. Physiologische Abtheilung des Archives fiir Anatomie u. Physiologie. Lpz. bi-m. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Protistenkunde. Jena. 3 nos. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Psychiatrie u. Nervenkrank- heiten. Ber. q. pur. Biol. Archiv fiir Religionswissenschaft. Frei- burg, i. B. q. pur. Haskell Archiv fiir slavische Philologie. Ber. q. pur. Comp. Philol. Archiv fiir soziale Gesetzgebung u. Statis- tik, Ber. irreg. J. P. B. Pol. Econ. Archiv fiir systematische Philosophie. Ber. q. pur. Philos. Archives d'anatomie microscopique. Paris. q. pur. Biol. Archives d'anthropologie criminelle, de criminologie et de psyohologie normale et pathologique. Lyons, m. pur. Anthrop. Archives de biologie. Lifege. q. pur. Biol. Archives de medecine exp^rimentale et d'anatomie pathologique. Paris, bi-m. pur. Biol. Archives de neurologie. Paris, m. pur. Biol. Archives de parasitologic. Paris. 7 nos. pur. Biol. Archives de psychologic. Paris, pur. Philos. Archives de zoologie exp^rimentale et g^- n^rale. Paris, irreg. pur. Biol. Archives des sciences biologiques. St. Petersburg, irreg. pur. Biol. Archives Internationales de pharmaco- dynamie. Ghent, pur. Biol. Archives italiennes de biologie. Turin. 5 nos. pur. Biol. Archivio per I'antropologia e la etnologia. (Society italiana di antropologia, etno- logia e psicologia comparata.) Florence. irreg. A. J. S. Anthrop. Archivio per le science mediche. Palermo. q. pur. Biol. Archivio storico italiano. Florence, q. pur. Hist. Arena. N. Y. m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Arkiv for nordisk filologi. Lund. q. pur. Mod. lang. group Assembly herald. N. Y. m. free. Gen. Lib., Haskell Association men. Chic. m. pur. Phys. Cult. B. W. Haskell Astronomical journal. Bost. irreg. pur. Astron. AstronomischeGesellschaft. Lpz. Viertel- jahrschrift. pur. Astron. Astronomisohe Nachrichten. Kiel, irreg. pur. Astron. Astrophysical journal. (University of Chi- cago.) Chic. 10 nos. pur. Gen. Lib., Astron. Athena. Athens, q. pur. Class. Athenaeum. Lond. w. pur. Gen. Lib., Eng. Atlantic educational journal. Richmond. m. free. Gen. Lib. Atlantic monthly. Bost. A. J. S. Gen. Lib. -^ — free. Ped. pur. Sch. of Educ. Atlantic reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Australian mining standard. Melbourne. w. J. G. Geol. Bakers' journal. Cleveland, w. free. Pol. Econ. Bankers' magazine. N.Y. m. J. P.E. Pol. Econ. 250 The President's Repoet Banking ca pur. Banking law journal. Baptist argus. Louisville, w. Baptist commonwealth. Phil. Charlottesville, Va. m. Law N. Y. m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. free. Haskell w. free. Haskell Baptist home mission monthly. N. Y. free. Haskell Bost. m. Haskell Gen. Lib. Haskell Law Baptist missionary magazine. free. Baptist union. Chic. w. free. B. W. Bar. Morgantown, W. Va. pur. semitischen Haskell Biol. Beitrage zur Assyriologie u Sprachwissenschaft. Lpz. pur. Beitrage zur chemischen Physiologie Pathologie. Brns. m. pur. Beitrage zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache u. Literatur. Halle a. S. 3 nos. pur. Ger. Beitrage zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen. Got. 3 nos. pur. Comp. Philol. Beitrage zur pathologischen Anatomie. Jena. bi-m. pur. Biol. Berlin. KSniglich-botanischer Garten u. Museum. Notizblatt. irreg. B. G. Biol. Berliner astronomisches Jahrbuch. pur. Astron. Berliner klinische Wochenschrift. pur. Biol. Berliner philologische Wochenschrift. pur. Class. Besarione. Rome. pur. Haskell BeweisdesGlaubens. Giitersloh. m. A.J. T. Haskell Bible society record. (Amer. Bible society.) N. Y. m. free. Haskell Bible student. Columbia, S. C. m. B. W. Haskell Biblia. Meriden. m. B. W. Haskell Biblical world. (University of Chicago.) Chic. m. pur. Gen. Lib., Haskell Bibliographer. N. Y. 9 nos. pur. Gen. Lib. Bibliographia medica. (Index medicus.) Paris, m. pur. Bibliographic de la France. See Journal gdn^ral de I'imprimerie. Bibliographischer Monatsbericht fiber neu erschienene Schul- u. Universitatsschrif- ten. Lpz. m. pur. Bibliotheca mathematica. Lpz. q. pur Bibliotheca philologica classica. Ber. q. pur. Class. Bibliotheoe sacra. Oberlin. q. A. J. T. Haskell A. J. S. Sociol. Bibliothfeque de I'Ecole des chartes. Paris. bi-m. pur. Hist. Biol. Eng. Math. Biblische Zeitschrift. Freiburg i.B. B. W. Haskell Biochemisches Centralblatt. Ber. pur. Biol. Biological bulletin. Lancaster, irreg. pur. Biol. Biological society of Wash. Proceedings, irreg. free. Biol. Biologisches Centralblatt. Lpz. semi-m. pur. Biol. Biometrika. Camb., Eng. q. pur. Biol. Bird lore. N. Y. bi-m. pur. Sch. of Educ. Birds and nature. Chic. 10 nos. pur. Sch. of Educ. Blackwood's Edinburgh magazine. Lond., N. Y. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Blatter fur das Gymnasial-Schulwesen. Mun. m. pur. Class. Blatter fur Gefangnisskunde. Heidelberg, bi-m. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Blatter fur pommersche Volkskunde. Stet- tin, m. pur. Anthrop. Board of trade journal. Lond. w. pur. Gen. Lib. Bollettino di bibliografia e storia delle scienze matematiche. Genoa, q. pur. Math. Bollettino di matematiche e di scienze fisiche e naturali. Bologna, pur. Math. Book buyer. N. Y. m. pur. Sch. of Educ. Book news. Phil. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Bookman. N. Y. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Boston journal of commerce, w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Boston medical and surgical journal, w. pur. Biol. Boston society of natural history. Pro- ceedings, irreg. B. G. Biol. Botanical gazette. (University of Chicago.) Chic. m. pur. Biol., Gen. Lib. Botanical society, Edinburgh. Transac- tions and proceedings, irreg. B. G. Biol. Botanische Jahrbilcher fur Systematik, Pflanzengeschichte u. Pflanzengeogra- phie. Lpz. irreg. pur. Biol. Botanische Zeitung. Lpz. lAbth. Original- abhandlungen. m. B. G. Biol. 2 Abth. semi-m. B. G. Biol. Botanisches Centralblatt. Leyden. w. B. G. Biol. Botanisk tidsskrift. Copenhagen. 2 nos. B. G. Biol. Botaniska notiser. Lund. bi-m. B. G. Biol. Botaniste. Paris, irreg. B. G. Biol. Bradstreet's. N. Y. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Brain. Lond. q. pur. Biol. British Columbia mining record. Victoria, m. free. Geol. British Columbia reports. Victoria, q. pur. Law British medical journal. Lond. w. pur. Biol. The Univeesitt Libeaet 251 British weekly. Lond. A. J. T. Haskell Brotherhood of locomotive engineers, Cleve- land. Monthly journal, free. Pol. Eoon. Brotherhood of locomotive firemen's maga- zine. Peoria, m. free. Pol. Econ. Buitenzorg, Java. Jardin botanique. An- nates. Leyden. irreg. B. G. Biol. Bulletin astronomique. Paris, m. pur. Astron. Bulletin de correspondance hell^nique. (Ecole frangaise d'Ath^nes.) Paris, irreg. pur. Class. Arch. Bulletin de folklore. Brussels, pur. Anthrop. Bulletin de I'Herbier Boissier. See Herbier Boissier. Bulletin de TolEce du travail. Paris, m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. A. J. S. Sociol. Bulletin de litt^rature eccl&iastique. Paris. lOnos. A. J. T. Haskell Bulletin de statistique, et de legislation compar^e. (France — Minist6re des fi- nances.) Paris, m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Bulletin des sciences mathdmatiques. Paris, m. pur. Math. Bulletin hispanique. Bordeaux, q. pur. Eom. Bulletin of bibliography. Bost. q. free. Gen. Lib. Bulletin russe de statistique flnanciSre et de legislation. St. Petersburg, irreg. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Bulletin scientifique de la France et de la Belgique. Paris, y. pur. Biol. Bulletins of American paleontology. Ithaca. Univ. Pub. Geol. Butlleti del centre excursionista de Cata- lunya. Barcelona, m. pur. Anthrop. Byzantinische Zeitschrift. Lpz. pur. Class. Calabria; rivista di letteratura popolare. Monteleone. bi-m. pur. Anthrop. California academy of sciences, San Fran. Proceedings. Third series, irreg. B. G. Biol. J. G. Geol. Cambridge (Eng.) philosophical society. Proceedings, irreg. J. G. Gen. Lib. Canada law journal. Toronto, semi-m. pur. Law Canadian bankers' association, Toronto. Journal, q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Canadian baptist. Toronto, w. B. W. Haskell Canadian criminal cases annotated. Toron- to, bi-m. pur. Law Canadian law review. Toronto, m. pur. Law Canadian law times. Toronto, m. pur. Law Canadien. St. Paul. w. S. E. Ped. Carpenter. Phil. m. free. Pol. Econ. Case and comment. Rochester, m. pur. Law Cassier's magazine. N. Y. m. pur. Pol. Econ. Cellule. Lierre. irreg. B. G. Biol. Central Baptist. St. Louis, w. B. W. Haskell Central law journal. St. Louis, pur. Law Central Presbyterian. Richmond, Va. w. free. Haskell Centralblatt fur allgemeine Gesundheits- pflege. Bonn. m. pur. Centralblatt fur allgemeine Pathologie u. pathologischeAnatomie. Jena, semi-m. pur. Centralblatt fiir Bakteriologie, Parasiten- kunde. Jena. 1 Abt. w. pur. 2 Abt. semi-m. pur. Centralblatt fiir Bibliothekswesen. m. pur. • Beihefte. irreg. pur. Centralblatt fur Nervenheilkunde u- chiatrie. Coblenz. m. pur. Centralblatt fur Physiologie. Lpz. semi-m. Century illustrated monthly magazine. N. Y. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ fcesky lid. Prague, bi-m. pur. Anthrop Chamber of commerce journal. Lond. m. pur. Charities. N. Y. w. pur. Charity organization review. A. J. S. Chautauquan. Springfield, O, Biol. Biol. Biol. Biol. Lpz. Gen. Lib. Gen. Lib. Psy- Biol. Biol. ■ free. Com. & Admin. Sociol. (Div.) Lond. m. Sociol. (Div.) m. S. R. Gen. Lib. Sociol., Haskell Chemical news and journal of physical science. Lond. w. pur. Chem. Chemical society, Lond. Journal, m. pur. Chem. Proceedings, semi-m. pur. Chem. Chemiker-Zeitung. Cothen. semi-w. Chem. Chem. pur. Chemische Zeitschrift. Lpz. semi-m. pur Chemisches Central-Blatt. Lpz. w. pur. Chem. Bulletin. Geol. Law Law Sch. of Educ. free. Gen. Lib. China review. Hongkong, irreg. pur. Anthrop. Christian advocate. N. Y. w. B. W. Haskell Christian century. Chic. w. B. W. Haskell Christian endeavor world. Chic. w. B.W. Haskell Christian evangelist. St. Louis, w. B.W. HaskeU Chicago academy of sciences. irreg. J. G. Chicago law journal, pur. Chicago legal news. w. pur. Child garden. Chic. m. E.S.T. Children's home finder. Chic. m. 252 The Peesident's Report Christian index. Atlanta, w. A. J. S. Haskell Christian intelligencer. N. Y. w. free. Haskell Christian leader. Cin. w. free. Haskell Christian messenger. Toronto, semi-m. free. Haskell Christian observer. Louisville, w. free. Haskell Christian register. Boston, w. free. Haskell Christian social union, Bost. Publications, m. free. Pol. Econ. Christian standard. Cin. w. B. W. Haskell Christian work and evangelist. N. Y. w. B. W. Haskell Christian world. Dayton, w. free. Haskell Christliche Welt. Marburg, w. A. J. T. Haskell Church economist. N. Y. m. free. Haskell Church quarterly review. Lend. A.J. T. Haskell Cigar makers' official journal. Chic. m. free. Pol. Econ. Cincinnati society of natural history. Jour- nal, irreg. B. G. Biol. J. G. Geol. Circolo matematico di Palermo. Rendi- conti. irreg. pur. Math. Classical review. Lond. 9 nos. pur. Class. Collier's weekly. N. Y. pur. Phys. Cult. Colliery guardian. Lond. w. free. Geol. Columbia university, N. Y. Contributions to philosophy, psychology and education, irreg. S. R. Pad. ■ Studies in history, economics, and pub- lic law. irreg. A. J. S. Sociol. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Columbia university quarterly. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Commerce, accounts and finance. N. Y. m. U. R. Pol. Econ. Commercial and financial chronicle. N. Y. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Commons. Chic. m. free. Gen. Lib. A. J. S. Sociol. Congregationalist. Bost. w. B. W. Haskell CongrSs international des accidents du travail et des assurances sociales, Paris. Bulletin du comite permanent, q. A.J. S. Sociol. Congressional record. (U. S. Congress.) Wash. (Daily during session.) free. Gen. Lib. Connecticut school journal. Meriden. w. free. Ped. B. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Contemporary review. Lond. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Co-operation. Chic. w. free. Gen. Lib. Cosmopolitan. Irvington-on-Hudson. m. free. Gen. Lib. Country life in America. S. N. Y. m. A.J. Sociol. Critic. N. Y. m. A. J. S. Gen. Lib. Critica sociale. Milan, semi-m. A. J. S. Sociol. Critical review of theological and philo- sophical literature. Edin. bi-m. A. J. T. Haskell Cumulative book index. Minneapolis, pur. Gen. Lib. Cumulative index to a selected list of peri- odicals. Cleveland, m. and q. pur. Gen. Lib. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Current history. Bost. m. pur. Sch. of Educ. Current literature. N. Y. m. free. Gen. Lib. Democracy. Lond. w. A. J. S. Sociol. Deutsche Blatter fur erziehenden Unter- richt. Langensalza. w. S. R. Ped. Deutsche botanische Gesellschaft, Ber. Berichte. 10 nos. pur. Biol. Deutsche botanische Monatsschrift. Arn- stadt. B. G. Biol. Deutsche chemische Gesellschaft, Ber. Berichte. irreg. pur. Chem. Deutsche Litteraturzeitung. Ber. w. pur. Mod. lang. group Deutsche Mathematiker-Vereinigung, Ber. Jahresbericht. m. pur. Math. Deutsche medicinische Wochenschrift. Lpz. pur. Biol. Deutsche morgenlandische Gesellschaft, Lpz. Zeitschrift. q. pur. Comp. Philol. Deutsche Revue. Stut. m. J. P. E. Ger. Deutsche Rundschau. Ber. m. pur. Ger. Deutsche Worte. Vienna, m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Deutsche Zeitschrift fur Nervenheilkunde. Lpz. m. pur. Deutsche zoologische Gesellschaft, Verhandlungen. irreg. pur. Deutscher Palaestina Verein, Lpz. theilungen u. Nachrichten. irreg. Biol. Lpz. Mit- Biol. pur. Haskell Haskell Sociol. Eng. Gen. Lib. m. Haskell Physics Zeitschrift. q. pur. Dial. Chic, semi-m. A. J. S. J. P. E. S.R. Ecclesiastical review. Overbrook, Pa, A. J. T. Eclairage ^lectrique. Paris, w. pur. Eoole d'anthropologie de Paris. Revue. m. A. J. S. Anthrop. Ecole normale sup^rieure, Paris. Annales. m. pur. Math. Ecole polytechnique, Paris. Journal, y. pur. Math. Economic journal. (British economic a^so elation.) London, q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. The University Library 253 Economic review. Lond. q. J.P.E. Pol.Econ. Economist. Ciiic. w. J.P.E. Pol.Econ. Economist. Lond. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Economista. Florence, w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Economiste f rangais. Paris, w. pur. Gen. Lib. Edinburgh medical journal, m. pur. Biol. Edinburgh review, q. pur. Gen. Lib. Education. Bost lOnos. pur. Ped. Education mathematique. Paris, semi-m. pur. Math. Educational monthly of Canada. Toronto. S. R. Ped. Educational news. Edin. w. S. R. Ped. Educational record. Lond. 3 nos. S. R. Ped. Educational review. (Columbia university.) N. Y. 10 nos. S. R. Ped. Educational review. St. John, N. B. m. S. R. Ped. Educational times. Lond. m. S. R. Ped. Educator-journal. Indianapolis. 10 nos. S. R. Ped. Egypt exploration fund. Lond. Archaeo- logical report, y. pur. Haskell Ekonomisk tidskritt. Upsala. m. J.P.E. Pol. Econ. Electrical world and engineer. N. Y. w. pur. Physics Electrician. Lond. w. pur. Physics Elementary school teacher. (University of Chicago.) Chic. pur. Gen.Lib.,Sch.ofEduc. Emancipation. Nimes. m. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Engineering and mining journal. N.Y. w. J. G. Geol. Engineering magazine. N. Y. m. pur. Physics, Sociol., Sch. of Educ. Engineering record. N. Y. w. pur. Sociol. Englische Studien. Lpz. irreg. pur. Eng. English historical review. Lond. q. pur. Hist. Enseienement mathtoatique. Paris, bi-m. purf Math. 'E0r)/iepls dpxaioXo7iK7j. Athens, q. pur. Class. Arch. Episcopal recorder. Phil. w. free. Haskell Ethical addresses. Phil. 10 nos. J. P. E. Philos. Ethical record. N. Y. A. J. S. Sociol. Ethnographia. Budapest. 10 nos. pur. Anthrop. Etudes religieuses, philosophiques, histo- riques et littdraires. Paris, semi-m. B. ^. Haskell Euphorion; Zeitschrift fur Litteraturge- schichte. Bamberg, q. pur. Ger. Evangelical episcopalian. Chic. m. free. Haskell Examiner. N. Y. w. B. W. Haskell m. Haskell B. Haskell Pol. Econ. See Uni- Expositor. Lond. m. A. J. T. Expository times. Kinnelf Berrie W. Packel. Chic. w. free. Faculty des sciences de Toulouse. versit^ de Toulouse. Faith's record. Chic. m. free. SocioL Federal reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Field Columbian museum, Chic. Publica- tions. Anthropological series. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Botanical series, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Historical series, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Ornithological series, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Report series, y. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Zoological series, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Financier. N. Y. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Fliegende Blatter aus dem Rauhen Hause zu Hamburg-Horn. m. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Flora. Marburg, irreg. pur. Biol. Folk-lore. (Folk-lore society.) Lond. q. pur. Anthrop. Foreign mission journal. Richmond, Va. m. free. Haskell Forschungen zur brandenburgischen u. preussischen Geschichte. Lpz. pur. Hist. Fortnightly review. Lond. m. A. J. T. Gen. Lib. Fortschritte der Medicin. Ber. 36 nos. pur. Biol. Fortschritte der Physik. Brns. irreg. pur. Physics Forum. N. Y. q. pur. Gen. Lib. Franklin institute, Phil. Journal, m. J. Q Physics Gael. N.Y. m. pur. Comp. Philol. Gazzetta chimica italiana. Rome. m. pur Geographical journal. Lond. m. pur. Geological magazine. Lond Chem. J. G. Geol. Sch. of Educ. J. G. Geol. Geological society of London. Quarterly journal. J. G. Geol. German American annals. Phil. m. pur. Ger. Germany. Kaiserliches Gesundheitsamt, Ber. Arbeitcn. 3 nos. pur. Biol. GesellschaftfiirErdkunde, Ber. Zeitschrift. 10 nos. J. G. Geol. Gesellschaft naturforschender Freunde, Ber. Sitzungsberichte. 10 nos. pur. Biol. Giornale degli economisti. Rome. m. J. p E. Pol- Been. Giornale di matematiche. Naples, bi-m. pur. Math. 254 The President's Report Giornale storioo della letteratura italiana. Turin, irreg. pur. Rom. Globus. Brns. w. pur. Sociol. Folk-Psy. Good government. N. Y. A. J. S. m. Sociol. Graphic. Lond. w. pur. Gen. Lib. Great round world. N. Y. w. pur. Sch. of Educ. Green bag. Best. m. pur. Law Guardian. Lond. w. A. J. T. Haskell Gunton's magazine. N. Y. m. A. J. S. Sociol. Harper's monthly magazine. N. Y. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ. Harper's weekly. N. Y. pur. Gen. Lib., Phys. Cult. Hartford seminary record, q. B. W. Haskell Harvard graduates' magazine. Camb. q. pur. Gen. Lib. Harvard law review. Bost. 8 nos. J. P. E. Law Haschiloah. Ber. m. free. Haskell Hebrew. San Fran. w. free. Haskell Hedwigia. Dresden, bi-m. B. G. Biol. Helping hand. Bost. m. free. Haskell Herald of the golden age. Ilfracombe. m. free. Gen. Lib. Herbier Boissier, Geneva. Bulletin, m. B. G. Biol. Hermes; Zeitschrift filr classische Philo- logie. Ber. q. pur. Class. Hibbert journal. Lond. A. J. T. Haskell Historische Vierteljahrschrift. Lpz. pur. Hist. Historische Zeitschrift. Mun. bi-m. pur. Hist. Hochschul-Nachrichten. Mun. m. free. Ped. Homiletic review. N. Y. m. B. W. Haskell Homme pr^historique. Paris, pur. Anthrop. Humanistisches Gymnasium. Heidelberg. m. S. R. Ped. Humanite nouvelle. Paris, irreg. A. J. S. Sociol. (Div.) Hygienische Rundschau. Ber. semi-m. pur. Biol. Illustrated London news and extras. N. Y. w. pur. Sch. of Educ. Imperial and Asiatic quarterly review. Woking. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Independent. N. Y. w. pur. Gen. Lib. A. J. T. Haskell Index and review. Wash. m. pur. Pol. Econ. Indian antiquary. Bombay, m. pur. Anthrop. Indian evangelical review. Calcutta, q. A. J. T. Haskell Indian forester. Dehra Dun. m. B. G. Biol. Indogermanische Forschungen. Strass- burg. irreg. pur. Comp. Philol. Industralist. (Kansas state agricultural college.) Manhattan, w. free. Pol. Econ. Institut de France, Paris. Acad^mie des inscriptions et belles-lettres. Comptes rendus des stances, bi-m. pur. Haskell Academie des sciences. Comptes ren- dus hebdomadaires des stances. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Institut des sciences sooiales, Brussels. Annales. irreg. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. A. J. S. Sociol. Institut fur oesterreichische Geschichts- forschung, Innsbruck. Mittheilungen.- q. pur. Hist. Institut Pasteur, Paris. Annales. m. pur. Biol. Institute of bankers, Lond. Journal. 9 nos. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Intelligence. Oak Park, semi-m. free. Ped. Interior. Chic. w. B. W. Haskell free. Gen. Lib. Interm^diaire des math^maticiens. Paris. m. pur. Math. International journal of ethics. Phil. q. pur. Philos. International monthly. Burlington, Vt. A. J. S. Sociol. International socialist review. Chic. m. A. J. S. Sociol. International studio. N. Y. m. pur. Sch. of Educ. International sunday-school evangel. St. Louis, m. B. W. Haskell Internationale Monatsschrift filr Anatomie u. Physiologie. Lpz. pur. Biol. Internationales Archiv fiir Ethnographic. Leyden. q. pur. Anthrop. Internationales Centralblatt filr Anthro- pologic u. verwandte Wissenschaften. Stettin, bi-m. pur. Anthrop. Interstate commerce reports. Rochester. irreg. pur. Pol. Econ. Iowa normal monthly. Dubuque, free. Ped. Iron age. N. Y. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Iron and coal trades review. Lond. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Iron moulders' journal. Cin. m. free. Pol. Econ. Iron trade review. Cleveland, w. J.P.E. Pol. Econ. Istituto botanico di Pavia. Atti. irreg. B. G. Biol. Jahrbuch filr Gesetzgebung, Verwaltung u. Volkswirtschaft im deutschen Reich. Lpz. q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Jahrbuch filr Philosophie u. spekulative Theologie. Paderborn. q. pur. Philos. Jahrbuch iiber die Fortschritte der Mathe- matik. Ber. 3 nos. pur. Math. Jahrbilcher fur Nationalokonomie u. Stat- istik. Jena. m. pur. Pol. Econ. Jahrbilcher filr Psyohiatrie u. Neurologie. Lpz. 3 nos. pur. Biol. Jahrbilcher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik. Lpz. irreg. pur. Biol. Jahresbericht ilber die Erscheinungen auf dem Gebiete der germanischen Philolo- gie. Dresden, irreg. pur. Ger. The University Libkaey 255 Jahresbericht fiber die Fortschritte der classisohen Alterthumswissenschaf t. Lpz. irreg. pur. Class. Jahresbericht ilber die Portschritte der Physiologie. Bonn. y. pur. Biol. Jahresbericht uber die Leistungen u. Fort- schritte in der gesammten Medicin. Ber. bi-m. pur. Biol. Jahresberichte filr neuere deutsche Littera- turgeschichte. Lpz. q. pur. Ger. Jamaica. Botanical department, Kingston. Bulletin, m. B. G. Biol. Jenaische Zeitschrif t f iirNaturwissenschaf t. q. pur. Biol. Jewish era. Chic. q. free. Haskell Jewish quarterly review. Lend. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Johns Hopkins hospital bulletin. Bait. m. pur. Biol. Johns Hopkins university, Bait. Studies in historical and political science, m. J. P. B. Pol. Boon. A. J. S. Sociol. Jornal de sciencas mathematicas e astrono- micas. Coimbra. irreg. pur. Math. Journal and messenger. Cin. w. B. W. Haskell Journal asiatique. Paris, bi-m. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Journal de botanique. Paris, m. B. G. Biol. Journal de I'anatomie et de la physiologie. Paris, bi-m. pur. Biol. Journal de math^matiques pures et ap- pliqu6es. Paris, q. pur. Math. Journal de physiologie et de pathologic g^nerale. Paris, bi-m. pur. Biol. Journal de physique th&rique et appliqufe. Paris, m. pur. Physics Journal des dconomistes. Paris, m. J. P. E. Pol. Bcon. Journal fur die reine u. angewandte Mathe- matik. Ber. irreg. pur. Math. Journal fur praktische Chemie. Lpz. ir- reg. pur. Chem. Journal g^n^ral de I'imprimerie et de la li- brairie. Paris, w. pur. Gen. Lib. Journal of American folk-lore. Bost. q. pur. Anthrop. Journal of anatomy and physiology. Lond. q. pur. Biol. Journal of Biblical literature. (Society of Biblical literature and exegesis.) Bost. semi-a. A. J. T. Haskell Journal of botany. Lond. m. B. G. Biol. Journal of comparative literature. N. Y. pur. Mod. lang. group Journal of comparative neurology. Gran- ville, q. pur. Biol. Journal of education. Bost. w. S. R. Ped. Journal of education. Lond. m. S. R. Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Journal of experimental medicine. Bait, irreg. pur. Biol. Journal of geography. Chic. 10 nos. J. G. Geol. S. R. Ped. B. G. Biol. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Journal of geology. (University of Chi- cago.) Chic. 8 nos. pur. Gen. Lib., Geol. Journal of Germanic philology. Blooming- ton, q. pur. Ger. Journal of Hellenic studies. Lond. semi-a. pur. Class. Arch. Journal of hygiene. Camb. q. pur. Biol. Journal of medical research. Bost. irreg. pur. Biol. Journal of mycology. Columbus, O. B. G. Biol. Journal of nervous and mental disease. N. Y. m. B. G. Biol. Journal of pathology and bacteriology. Edin. 3 nos. pur. Biol. Journal of pedagogy. Syracuse, q. S. R. Ped. Journal of philology. Lond. y. pur. Class. Journal of physical chemistry. (Cornell university.) Ithaca. 9 nos. A.J. Chem. Journal of physiology. Lond. bi-m. pur. Biol. Journal of political economy. JUnversity of Chicago.) Chic. q. pur. ~ " ~ Journal of social science. Bost. Gen. Lib., Pol. Sci, irreg. pur. Lond, Sociol. Journal of theological studies, ijona. q. A. J. T. Haskell Journal of tropical medicine. Lond. semi-m. pur. Biol. Journal offlciel de la r^publique. Paris, d. pur. Pol. Econ. Juridical review. Bdin. q. pur. Law Justice. Lond. w. free. Gen. Lib. Justice of the peace. Lond. w. pur. Law Kaiserlich-deutsches archaeologisches In- stitut, Ber. Jahrbuch. q. pur. Class. Arch. Mittheilungen. Athenische Abthei- lung. q. pur. Class. Arch. Mittheilungen. Romische Abtheilung- en. q. pur. Class. Arch. Kaiserlich-koniglich-zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaf t, Vienna. Verhandlungen. 9 nos. B. G. Biol. Kaiserlich - konigliches naturhistorisches Hof-Museum, Vienna. Annalen. q. B. G. Biol. J. G. Geol. Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften, Vienna. Mathematisch - naturwissen- schaftliohe Classe. Anzeiger. semi-m. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Denkschriften. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. 256 The President's Kepokt Sitzungsberichte. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. PhilosopMsoli - historisohe Classe. Sitzungsberichte. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Kantstudien. Bar. q. pur. Ped. Kavyamala. Bombay, pur. Comp. Philol. Kew, Royal gardens. Bulletin of miscella- neous information. Lond. irreg. B. G. Biol. Kinderfebler. Langensalza. bi-m. pur. Ped. magazine. Chic. 10 nos. Ped. Sob. of Educ. Springfield, Mass. Ped. Kindergarten S. R. E. S. T. Kindergarten review. 10 nos. S. R. E. S. T. Kirchenbote, Michigan city. w. Sch. of Educ. free. Gen. Lib. Koeniglich-bayerische Akademie der Wis- sensohaf ten, Mun. Mathematisoh-physi- kalische Classe. Sitzungsberichte. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Koeniglich-botanischer Garten u. Museum. See Berlin. Koeniglich-preussische Akademie der Wis- senschaften, Ber. Abhandlungen. y. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Sitzungsberichte. w. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Koeniglich - sachsische Gesellschaf t der Wissenschaften, Lpz. Philologisch-his- torische Classe. Abhandlungen. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Berichte. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Koenigliohe Gesellschaft der Wissenschaf- ten, Got. Gelehrte Anzeigen. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Nachriohten. Geschaftliche Mitthei- lungen. semi-a. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Mathematisch-physikalische Klasse. Nachrichten. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Philologisch-historische Klasse. Nach- richten. irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Labour co-partnership. Lond. m. free. J. P. E. Gen. Lib. Sociol. Biol. Labour gazette. Lond. m. Lancet. Lond. w. pur. Law journal. Lond. pur. Law journal reports. Toronto, pur. Law magazine and review. Lond. pur. Law notes. Northport, N. Y. m. free. Law times. Lond. pur. Lawyers' reports annotated. Rochester, semi-m. pur. Lehrproben u. Lehrgange aus der Praxis der Gymnasien u. Realschulen. Halle a. S. q. S. R. Leland Stanford junior university, Palo Alto. Publications. Contributions to biology, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib, Law Law Law Law Law Law Ped. Library. Lond. Library journal. Gen. Lib. q. pur. N. Y. m. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ. Library world. Lond. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Linnean society, Lond. Journal. Botany, irreg. B. G. Biol. Journal. Zoology, irreg. B. G. Biol. Lippincott's monthly magazine. Phil. free. Gen. Lib., Ped. Literarisches Centralblatt f tir Deutschland. N. Y. w. A.J. S. Ger. Gen. Lib. Haskell Gen. Lib. Sociol. roma- Ger. pur. Ger. Lpz. w. pur. Literary digest. free. Literary news. N. Y. m. pur. Literary world. Bost. m. free. Literaturblatt filr germanische u. nisohe Philologie. Lpz. m. pur. Litterarisches Echo. Ber. semi-m. Little chronicle. Chic. w. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Liverpool biological society. Proceedings and transactions, y. free. Biol. Living age. Bost. w. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ. Living church. Milwaukee, w. free. Haskell, Sociol. London, Edinburgh and Dublin philosoph- ical magazine and journal of science. Lond. m. pur. Physios London quarterly review, pur. Gen. Lib. A. J. T. Haskell Lutheran evangelist. Wash. w. free. Haskell Lutheran world. Cin. w. free. Haskell McClure's magazine. N. Y. m. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ. Magazin fur Litteratur. Ber. w. pur. Ger. Malpighia. Genoa, irreg. B. G. Biol. Man. London, ra. pur. Anthrop. Manchester (Eng.) literary and philosoph- ical society. Memoirs and proceedings. 5 nos. A. J. Gen. Lib. Manual training magazine. (University of Chicago.) Chic. q. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Manuel g^n^ral de I'instruction primaire. Paris, w. free. Gen. Lib. Marine biological association of the United Kingdom, Plymouth. Journal, irreg. pur. Biol. Marine review and marine record. Cleve- land, w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Maryland bulletin. Frederick, semi-m. free. Gen. Lib. Mathematical gazette. Lond. bi-m. pur. Math. Mathematische Annalen. Lpz. irreg. pur. Math. Mathematische Gesellschaft in Hamburg. Mittheilungen. irreg. pur. Math. The Univeesity Libkaey 257 Mathesis. Ghent, m. pur. Medical news. N. Y. w. free. Messenger and visitor. St. John, N. B, free. Messenger of mathematics. Lend. pur. Methodist quarterly review Tenn. A. J. T. Methodist review. N. Y. bi-m. A. J. T. Math. Biol. w. Haskell m. Math. Nashville, Haskell herald. Detroit. Haskell w. Haskell Michigan christian B.W. Michigan political science association, Ann Arbor. Publications, irreg. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Midland. Chic. w. pur. Haskell Midland municipalities. Marshalltown, la. m. free. Sociol. Mind. Lond. q. pur. Philos. Mind and body. Milwaukee, m. pur. Phys. Cult. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Mineralogical magazine and journal of the Mineralogical society. Lond. irreg. free. Geol. Mineralogische u. petrographische Mit- theilungen. See Tschermak's mineralo- gische u. petrographische mittheilungen. Mines and minerals. Scranton. m. free. Geol. Mission news of the A. B. F. M. in Japan. Yokohama. 10 nos. free. Haskell Missionary review of the world. N. Y. m. B. W. Haskell Mnemosyne. Lpz. q. pur. Class. Moderator-topics. Lansing, w. free, Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Modern language association of America, Bait. Publications, q. pur. Mod. lang. group Modern language notes. Bait. 8 nos. pur. Mod. lang. group Modern language quarterly. Lond. pur. Mod. lang. group Mois scientifique. Paris, irreg. free. Biol. Monatshef te fur Chemie u.verwandte Theile anderer Wissenschaften. Vienna. 10 nos. pur. Chem. Monatshefte fUr Mathematik u. Physik. Vienna, q. pur. Math. Monatsschrift fur innere Mission. Giiter- sloh. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Monatsschrift fur Ohrenheilkunde. Ber. pur. Biol. Monatsschrift fur Psychiatrie u. Neurologie. Ber. pur. Biol. Monde des plantes. Le Mans, irreg. B. G. Biol. Monde ^conomique. Paris, w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Ped. Philos. Florence, m. Biol. Lpz. irreg. Biol. Detroit, m. Pol. Econ. Monist. Chic. q. S. R. pur. Monitore zoologico italiano. pur. Morphologisches Jahrbuch. pur. Motorman and conductor. free. Mount Holyoke. South Hadley. 9 nos. free. Gen. Lib. Moyen Sge. Paris, bi-m. Hist. Muenchener medicinische Wochenschrift. pur. Biol. Muenchener volkswirtschaftliche Studien. irreg. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Municipal afifairs. N. Y. q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Municipal engineering. Indianapolis, m. A. J. S. Pol. Sci. Municipal journal. Lond. w. pur. Pol. Sci. Municipal journal and engineer. N. Y. m. A. J. S. Sociol. Mus6e beige; revue de philologie classique. Louvain. pur. Class. Mus^e social. Paris, m. A. J. S. Sociol. . J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Mus^on. Louvain. q. A. J. T. Haskell Musical record and review. Bost. m. pur. Music Nation. N. Y. w. pur. Gen. Lib. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. National association of wool manufacturers, Bost. Bulletin, q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. National geographic magazine. Wash. m. J. G. Geol. . pur. Sch. of Educ. National labor tribune. Pittsburg, w. free. Sociol. Nationalokonomisk tidsskrift. Copng. bi- m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Natur u. Schule. Ber. S. K. Ped. Nature. Lond. w. pur. Physics, Biol. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Freiburg i. B. Berichte. irreg. pur. Biol. Neighborhood house. Phil w. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Neue Jahrblicher fur das klassische Alter- thum, Geschiohte u. deutsche Litteratur. Lpz. 10 nos. pur. Class, Neue kirchliche Zeitsohrift; Lpz. m. pur. Haskell Neue philologische Rundschau. Gotha. semi-m. pur. Class. Neue Zeit. Stut. w. pur. Pol. Econ. Neuere Sprachen. Marburg. 10 nos. S. R. Ped. Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie, Geologic u. Palajontologie. Stut. bi-m. pur. GeoL 258 The President's Eepoet Beilage. 3 nos. pur. Geol. Neuphilologisches Centralblatt. Hannover. m. pur. Mod. lang. group Neurologisclies Centralblatt. Lpz. semi-m. pur. Biol. New England historical and genealogical register. Bost. pur. Hist. New England magazine. Bost. m. pur. Gen. Lib., Set. of Educ. New phytologist. Lond. m. B. G. Biol. New Shaltespeareana. N. Y. q. pur. Eng. New voice. N. Y. w. free. Haskell New York botanical garden. Bulletin. irreg. B. G. Biol. New York latin leaflet. Brooklyn, w. free. Lat. New York observer, w. B. W. Haskell New York teachers' monographs. N. Y. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. New Zealand journal of education. Dune- din. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Nineteenth century and after. Lond. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Nordisk tidsskrift for filologi. Copng. q. pur. Ger. Nordiskt medicinskt arkiv. Stockholm. pur. Biol. Norsk magazin for Isegevidenskaben. Christiania. pur. Biol. North American review. N. Y. nj. J.P. E. Pol. Econ. Northeastern reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Northwestern Christian advocate. Chic. w. B. W. Haskell Northwestern reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Notes and queries. Lond. w. pur. Sociol. Folk-Psy. Notizie degli scavi di antichit^. Milan. irreg. pur. Class. Nouvelle revue retrospective. Paris, m. pur. Gen. Lib. Nouvelles annales de mathematiques. Paris, m. pur. Math. Nuova notarisia. Padua, q. B. G. Biol. Nuovo giornale botanico italiano. Flor- ence, q. B. G. Biol. Oesterreichische botanische Zeitschrift. Vienna, m. B. G. Biol. Oesterreichische Handelsschulzeitung. Vi- enna, m. S. R. Ped. Oesterreichisches archsBologisches Institut, Vienna. Jahreshefte. semi-a. pur. Class. Arch. 0ns volksleven. Antwerp, irreg. pur. Anthrop. Ontario weekly reporter. Toronto, pur. Law Open court. Chic. m. B. W. Haskell Oregon historical society, Portland. Quarterly, pur. Hist. Orientalische Bibliographie. Ber. irreg. pur. Haskell Orientalistische Litteratur-Zeitung. Ber. m. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Our dumb animals. Bost. m. free. Gen. Lib. Outing, N. Y. m. pur. Phys. Cult., Sch. of Educ. Outlook, N. Y. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. B. W. Haskell free. Gen. Lib. Oxford university gazette, w. irreg. free. Ped. Pacific Baptist. Portland, Ore. w. free. Haskell Pacific coast miner. San Fran. J. G. Geol. Pacific reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Palestine exploration fund, Lond. Quar- terly statement, pur. Haskell Pathological society of Philadelphia. Pro- ceedings. 10 nos. free. Gen. Lib. Pedagogical seminary. Worcester, q. pur. Ped., Sch. of Educ. Pennsylvania magazine of history and biog- raphy. Phil. q. pur. Hist. Pennsylvania school journal. Lancaster, m. free. Ped., Sch. of Educ. Periodico di matematica. Leghorn, pur. Math. Petermann's Mitteilungen aus Justus Per- thes' geographischer Anstalt. Gotha. m. J. G. Geol. Pharmaceutical review. Milwaukee, m. free. Biol. Philadelphia medical journal, w. pur. Biol. Philologus; Zeitschrift fiir das klassische Alterthum. Lpz. q. pur. Class. Philosophical magazine. See London, Ed- inburgh, and Dublin philosophical maga- zine and journal of science. Philosophical review. N. Y. bi-m. A. J. T. Philos. Philosophische Studien. Lpz. q. pur. Philos. Philosophisches Jahrbuch. Fulda. q. pur. Philos. Photographic times-bulletin. N. Y. m. pur. Physics, Sch. of Educ. Physical review. (Cornell university.) N. Y. 10 nos. J. G. Physics Physical society of London. Proceedings, irreg. pur. Physics Physikalische Zeitschrift. Lpz. semi-m. pur. Physics Plant world. Wash. m. B. G. Biol. Political science quarterly. N. Y. J.P.E. Pol.Econ. A. J. S. Pol. Sci. Popular astronomy. Northfield, Minn. 10 nos. B. W. Astron. pur. Sch. of Educ. Popular science monthly. N. Y. A. J. S. Sociol. J. G. Geol. The Univeesitt Libeaet 259 free. ' Pol. Econ. pur. Sch. of Educ. Posse gymnasium journal. Bost. 11 nos. pur. Phys. Cult., Sch. of Educ. Piager medicinische Wochenschrift. pur. Biol. Pratt institute monthly. Brooklyn. 8 nos. free. Gen. Lib. Presbyterian banner. Pittsburg, w. free. Haskell Presbyterian journal. Phil. w. B. W. Haskell Presse m^dicale. Paris, irreg. pur. Biol. Primary education. Bost. 10 nos. U. R. Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Primary school. N. Y. 10 nos. free. Sch. of Educ. Princeton theological review, q. A. J. T. Haskell Protestantisohe Monatshefte. Ber. pur. Haskell Psychological review. Princeton, bi-m. A. J. S. Philos. Monograph supplements, irreg. A. J. S. Philos. Public libraries. Chic. 10 nos. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ. Public opinion. N. Y. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. free. Gen. Lib. pur. Sch. of Educ. Public policy. Chic. w. free. Gen. Lib. Publishers' circular. Lond. w. pur. Gen. Lib. Publishers' weekly. N. Y. pur. Gen. Lib., Sch. of Educ. Pulpit. Cleona, Pa. m. free. Haskell Quarterly bibliography of books reviewed in leading Amer. periodicals. Blooming- ton, pur. Gen. Lib. Quarterly journal of economics. (Harvard university.) Bost. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. ■ A. J. S. Sociol. Quarterly journal of microscopical science. Lond. irreg. pur. Biol. Quarterlyjournalof pureand applied math- ematics. Lond. pur. Math. Quarterly review. Lond. pur. Gen. Lib. Queen's quarterly. Kingston. B. W. Haskell Quekett microscopical club, Lond. Journal. semi-a. B. G. Biol. Questions diplomatiques et coloniales. Paris, semi-m. pur. Pol. Sci. Railway age. Chic. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Railway and engineering review. Chic. w. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Ram's horn. Chic. w. free. Gen. Lib. Rassegna bibliografica della letteratura italiana. Pisa. m. pur. Rom. Record of technical and secondary educa- tion. Lond. q. A. J. S. Sociol. Recueil de travaux relatifs k la philologie et k I'archdologie ^gyptiennes et assy- riennes. Paris, q. pur. Haskell Recueil des travaux chimiques des Pays- Bas. Leyden. bi-m. pur. Chem. Reform advocate. Chic. w. B. W. Haskell free. Gen. Lib. R^forme sociale. Paris, semi-m. free. Pol. Econ. A.J.S. Sociol. Reformed church review. Lancaster, Pa. q. A. J. T. 2 cop. Haskell Religious herald. Richmond, w. free. Haskell Repr&entation proportionelle; revue men- suelle. Brussels, pur. Pol. Sci. Review of education. Chic. 10 nos. S. R. Ped. Review of reviews. Lond. m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. A. J.S. Sociol. free. Geol. Review of reviews. Melbourne, m. A. J. S. Sociol. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Revista de archivos, bibliotecos y museos. Madrid, pur. Rom. Revolution f rangaise. Paris, m, pur. Hist. Revue. Paris, semi-m. A. J. S. Sociol. Revue arch^ologique. Paris, bi-m. pur. Class. Arch. Revue biblique Internationale. (Ecole pra- tique d'etudes bibliques.) Paris, q. B.W. Haskell Revue bryologique. Orne. bi-m. B. G. Biol. Revue celtique. Paris, q. pur. Comp. Philol. Revue chr^tienne. Paris, m. A. J. T. Haskell Revue critique d'histoire et de litt^rature. Paris, w. pur. Class. Revue d'histoire diplomatique. Paris, q. pur. Hist. Revue d'histoire eccl&iastique. Louvain. A. J. T. HaskeU Revue d'histoire et de litt^rature religieuses. Paris, bi-m. B. W. Haskell Revue d'histoire litt^raire de la France. Paris, q. pur. Rom. Revue d'histoire moderne'et contemporaine. Paris, pur. Hist. Revue de droit international et de legisla- tion comparee. Brussels, bi-m. pur. Pol. Sci. Revue de I'histoire des religions. Paris, bi-m. pur. Haskell Revue de I'orient latin. Paris, irreg. pur. Hist. Revue de la renaissance. Paris, pur. Rom. Revue de math^matiques. Turin, irreg. pur. Math. Revue de m^taphysique et de morale. Paris, bi-m. A. J. S. Philos. Revue de philologie, de litt^rature et d'his- toire anciennes. Paris, q. pur. Class. Revue de thdologie et de philosophie. Lau- sanne, bi-m. A. J. T. HaskeU Revue des deux mondes. Paris, semi-m. pur. Gen. Lib. Revue des etudes grecques. (Association pour I'encouragement des etudes grecques.) Paris, irreg. pur. Class. 260 The President's Keport m. A. J. S. Revue mycologique. Revue neurologique. Revue pedagogique. Revue penitentiaire. Revue des etudes liistoriques. Paris, pur. Hist. Revue des etudes juives. Paris, irreg. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Revue des langues romanes. Paris, bi-m. pur. Rom. Revue des questions historiques. Paris, q. pur. Hist. Revue des traditions populaires. Paris, m. pur. Anthrop. Revue du christianisme social. Vals. 10 nos. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Revue du travail. Brussels, m. J. P. E. Pol.Econ. Revue gen^rale de botanique. Paris, m. B. G. Biol. Revue gto^rale des sciences pures et ap- pliqu^es. Paris, semi-m. pur. Gen. Lib. Revue hispanique. Paris, irreg. pur. Rom. Revue historique. Paris, bi-m. pur. Hist. Revue Internationale de I'enseignement. Paris, m. S. R. Ped. Revue Internationale de p^dagogie com- parative. S^v^rac. 10 nos. S. R. Ped. Revue Internationale de sociologie. Paris. Sociol. Toulouse, q. B. G. Biol. Paris, semi-m. pur. Biol. Paris, m. S. R. Ped. Paris. 8 nos. pur. Sociol. Revue philosophique de la France et de I'etranger. Paris, m. pur. Philos. Revue politique et parlementaire. Paris, m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Revue soientiflque. Paris, w. B. G. Biol. Revue semestrielle des publications math^- matiques. (Soci^t6 mathematique d' Am- sterdam.) semi-a. pur. Math. Revue s^mitique. Paris, q. pur. Haskell Revue sociale catholique. Louvain. m. A. J. S. Sociol. Revue socialiste. Paris, m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. A. J. S. Sociol. Rheinisches Museum furPhilologie. Frank- furt, q. pur. Class. Rhodora. Bost. m. pur. Biol. Riforma sociale. Turin, m. J. P. E. Pol.Econ. Rivista della beneflcenza pubblica. Bolog- na, m. A. J. S. Sociol. (Div.) Rivista di discipline carcerarie. Rome, semi-m. A. J. S. Sociol. Rivista di fllologia e d'istruzione olassica. Turin, q. pur. Class. Rivista filosofica. Pavia. 5 nos. pur. Philos. Rivista internazionale. Rome. m. A. J. S. Sociol. Rivista italiana di sociologia. Rome. bi-m. A. J. S. Sociol. Rivista moderna politica e letteraria. Rome, semi-m. A. J. S. Sociol. Rivista politica e letteraria. Rome, irreg. A. J. S. Sociol. Rivista sperimentale di freniatria. Reggie. q. pur. Biol. Rivista storica italiana. Turin, q. A.J. S. Hist. Romania. Paris, q. pur. Rom. Royal agricultural society of England, Lond. Journal, irreg. pur. Pol. Econ. Royal Asiatic society of Great Britain and Ireland, Lond. Journal, q. pur. Haskell Royal astronomical society, Lond. Monthly notices. 9 nos. pur. Astron. Royal microscopical society, Lond. Jour- nal, bi-m. B. G. Biol. Royal society of Edinburgh. Proceedings. q. pur. Physics Royal society of London. Botanical papers from the philosophical transactions. irreg. pur. Biol. Proceedings, irreg. pur. Gen. Lib., Physics Royal statistical society, Lond. Journal. q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Russische medicinische Rundschau. Ber. m. pur. Biol. Sabbath recorder. Plainfleld, N. J. w. free. Haskell St. Nicholas. N. Y. m. pur. Sch. of Educ. St. Vincent de Paul quarterly. N. Y. pur. Sociol. (Div.) Saints' herald. Lamoni, Iowa. w. free. Haskell Salvation. N. Y. m. free. Haskell Sanitarian. N. Y. m. A. J. S. Sociol. pur. Sch. of Educ. Schmidt's Jahrbucher der in- und ausland- ischen gesammten Medicin. Lpz. m. pur. Biol. School and home education. Bloomington. 10 nos. S. R. Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. School bulletin. Syracuse, m. free. Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. School education. Minneapolis. 10 nos. free. Gen. Lib. School journal. N. Y. w. S. R. Ped. School news. Taylorville, 111. 11 nos. free. Ped. School of mines quarterly. (Columbia uni- versity.) N. Y. J. G. Geol. School review. (University of Chicago.) Chic. 10 nos. pur. Gen. Lib., Ped. School science. Chic. 9 nos. S. R. Ped. Sch. of Educ. Lond. m. S. R. Ped. E. S. T. School world. Science. N. Y. ■ J. G. B. G. Science abstracts, free. Lond. m. pur. Biol. Geol. Physics Physics The University Libeaey 261 Science and industry. Scranton, Science sociale. A.J. S. Scientific American. Supplement, Paris, m. m. pur. Sch. of Educ. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Sociol. N.Y. w. pur. Sch. of Educ. w. pur. Sch. of Educ. Scienza sociale. Venice, irreg. A. J. S. Sociol. Scots law times. Edin. pur. Law Scottish geographical magazine. (Royal Scottish geographical society.) Edin. m. J. G. Geol. pur. Sch. of Educ. Scottish law reporter. Edin. w. pur. Law Scottish law review. Glasgow, m. pur. Law Scribner's magazine. N. Y. m. J. P. E. Gen. Lib. pur. Sch. of Educ. Semaine m^dicale. Paris, pur. Biol. Sezatoarea. Falticeni. irreg. pur. Anthrop. Skandinavisches Archiv fur Physiologie. Lpz. irreg. pur. Biol. Social democrat. Lond. m. free. Gen. Lib. Sociale Rundschau. Vienna, m. A. J. S. Sociol. Socialistische Monatshefte. Ber. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Society, asiatica italiana, Florence. Gior- nale. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Soci^t^ anatomique de Paris. Bulletins et m^moires. 10 nos. pur. Biol. Society botanique de Prance, Paris. Bul- letin. 8 nos. pur. Biol. Society ehimique de Paris. Bulletin. semi-m. pur. Chem. Soci^t^ d' anthropologic de Paris. Bulletin et m^moires. bi-m. pur. Anthrop. Society de biologie, Paris. Comptes rendus hebdomadaires des stances, pur. Biol. Soci^t^ de I'histoire de Normandie, Rouen. Bulletin, pur. Hist. Soci^t^ de legislation compar^e, Paris. Bul- letin mensuel. A. J. S. Sociol. Society de statistique, Paris. Journal, m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Society franjaise de philosophie, Paris. Bulletin. 8 nos. pur. Philos. Society gdologique de Belgique, Lifege. An- nales. irreg. J. G. Geol. Society g^ologique de France, Paris. Bul- letin. 5 nos. J. G. Geol. Society imp^riale des naturalistes, Moscow. Bulletin, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Society math^matique de France, Paris. Bulletin, q. pur. Math. Society royale beige de geographic, Brus- sels. Bulletin, bi-m. J. G. Geol. Society royale de botanique de Belgique, Brussels. Bulletin, irreg. B. G. Biol. Society royale de gfographie d'Anvers. Bulletin, q. J. G. Geol. Societe scientiflque et m^dicale de 1' Quest, Rennes. Bulletin. B. G. Gen. Lib. Society of Biblical archaeology, Lond. Proceedings. 9 nos. pur. Haskell Society of chemical industry, Lond. semi- m. pur. Chem. Society of comparative legislation, Lond. Journal, irreg. A. J. S. Sociol. Solicitor's journal and reporter. Lond. w. pur. Law Sound currency. N. Y. q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. South African pioneer. Lond. m. free. Haskell South Carolina historical and genealogical magazine. Charleston, q. pur. Hist. Southeastern reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Southern history association, Wash. Pub- lications, bi-m. pur. Hist. Southern reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Southwestern reporter. St. Paul. w. pur. Law Sperimentale. Florence, q. pur. Biol. Sphinx. Upsala. pur. Haskell Stahl u. Eisen. Diisseldorf. semi-m. J. Chic. w. A. J. T. Lund. Pol. Econ. Haskell Gen. Lib. 5 nos. Pol. Econ. Freiburg i. B. Haskell Sch. of Educ. pur. Gen. Lib. m. free. Sociol. J. T. Haskell Literaturge- Ger. free. Ped. w. B. P. E. Standard, free. Statsvetenskaplig tidskrift. J. P. E. Stimmen aus Maria-Laach. A. J. T. Stone. Chic. m. pur. Strand magazine. Lond. m. Street railway review. Chic. Studi religiosi. Florence. A, Studien zur vergleichenden schichte. Ber. irreg. pur. Suisse universitaire. Geneva, m Sunday-school chronicle. Lond. W. Haskell Sunday-school times. Phil. w. B. W. Haskell Sunday-school world. N. Y. m. free. Haskell Sunset. San Fran. 10 nos. free. Gen. Lib. Tailor. Bloomington. m. free. Pol. Econ. Teachers' college record. N. Y. 5 nos. S. R. Ped. E. S. T. Sch. of Educ. Texas state historical association, Austin. Quarterly, pur. Hist. Theologisch tijdschrift. Leyden. bi-m. B. W. Haskell Theologische Literaturzeitung. Lpz. semi-m. B. W. Haskell Theologische Quartalschrift. Tubingen. A. J. T. Haskell Theologische Revue. Miinster. semi-m. free. Haskell 262 The Peesident's Report Theologische Rundschau. Ttibingen. m. A. J. T. Haskell Theologiscte Studien. Utrecht, bi-m. A. J. T. Haskell Theologischer Jahresbericht. Ber. 5 nos. A. J. T. Haskell Theologisches Literaturblatt. Lpz. w. pur. Haskell Therapeutische Monatshefte. Ber. pur. Biol. Tidings. Chic. m. free. Haskell Times law reports. Lond. pur. Law Torrey botanical club, N. Y. Bulletin, m. B. G. Biol. T'Oung Pao. Leyden. 5 nos. pur. Anthrop. Travelers' record. Hartford, m. free. Haskell Tschermak's mineralogische u. petrogra- phische Mittheilungen. Vienna, bi-m. J. G. Geol. Typographical journal. Indianapolis, m. free. Pol. Econ. Union signal. Chic. w. free. Haskell United brethren review. Dayton, bi-m. B. W. Haskell Unity. Chic. w. free. Haskell University catholique. Lyons, m. A. J. T. Haskell University de Toulouse. Bulletin, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. — — Faculty des sciences. Annales. Paris. q. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. University correspondent. Lond. semi-m. free. Gen. Lib. University of California, Berkeley. Uni- versity chronicle, irreg. U. R. Gen. Lib. University of Kansas, Lawrence. Bulletin. irreg. J. G. Geol. University of Minnesota, Minneapolis. Bulletin. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. University of Pennsylvania, Phil. Botanical laboratory. Contributions, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Bulletin. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Publications. Astronomy, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Contributions from the laboratory of hygiene, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Philosophical series, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen. Lib. Political economy and public law series, irreg. Univ. Pub. Gen Lib. University of Tennessee record. Knoxville. irreg. free. Verein fur niederdeutsche schung, Norden. Jahrbuoh. Korrespondenzblatt. pur. Verein fur Volkskunde, Ber. q. pur. Gen. Lib. Sprachfor- pur. Ger. Ger. Zeitechrift. Sociol. Folk-Psy. Verein fur wissenschaftliche Padagogik, Dresden. Jahrbuoh. pur. Ped. Victoria institute ; or, Philosophical society of Great Britain, Lond. Journal of the transactions, y. pur. Haskell Vierteljahrs-Katalog der Neuigkeiten des deutschen Buchhandels. Lpz. pur. Gen. Lib. Vierteljahrsschrift fur wissenschaftliche Philosophie u. Soziologie. Lpz. pur. Philos. Virginia law register. Lynchburg, pur. Law Virginia magazine of history and biography. Richmond, q. pur. Hist. Virginia school journal. Richmond, irreg. free. Ped. Volkskunde. Ghent, m. pur. Anthrop. Vorderasiatische Gesellschaft, Ber. Mit- theilungen. bi-m. pur. Haskell Wallonia. Lifege. m. pur. Anthrop. Washington academy of sciences. Proceed- ings, irreg. free. Gen. Lib. Watchman. Bost. w. B. W. Haskell Watchword and truth. Bost. m. free. Haskell Weekly reporter. Lond. pur. Law West Virginia school journal. Charleston. 9 nos. free. Ped. Westermann's illustrierte deutsche Monats- hefte. Ber. m. pur. Ger. Western recorder. Louisville, w. free. Haskell Western school journal. Topeka, Kan. m. free. Ped. Westminster. Toronto, m. B. W. Haskell Westminster review. Lond. m. pur. Gen. Lib. Wiener klinische Wochenschrift. pur. Biol. Wiener Studien. semi-a. pur. Class. Wiener Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Mor- genlandes. q. pur. Haskell William and Mary college quarterly histor- ical magazine. Williamsburg, pur. Hist. Wisconsin journal of education. Madison, m. free. Ped. Wochenschrift filr klassische Philologie. Ber. pur. Class. Wiichentliches Verzeichnis der erschie- nenen u. der vorbereiteten Neuigkeiten des deutschen Buchhandels. Lpz. pur. Gen. Lib. World's work. N. Y. m. A. J. S. Gen. Lib. Yale law journal. New Haven, pur. Law Yale review. New Haven, q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. A. J. S. Sociol. Zeitschrift fur agyptische Sprache. Lpz. irreg. pur. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine physiologie. Jena, irreg. pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir analytische Chemie. Wies- baden, m. pur. Cham. The University Libkaey 263 Zeitsclirift ftir anorganische Chemie. Ham- burg, irreg. pur. Chem. Zeitschrift fur Assyriologie. Strassburg. q. pur. Haskell Zeitsclirift fur Biologie. Mun. irreg. pur. Biol. Zeitsclirift fur celtische PMlologie. Halle. semi-a. pur. Comp. Philol. Zeitschrift fur das gesammte kaufman- nische Unterrichtswesen. Brns. m. S. R. Pad. Zeitschrift fiir das Gymnasialwesen. Ber. m. pur. Class. Zeitschrift fur das Privat- u. oflfentliche Reoht der Gegenwart. Vienna, q. pur. Law Zeitschrift fiir den deutschen Unterricht. Lpz. m. pur. Ger. Zeitschrift fur deutsche Philologie. Halle. q. pur. Ger. Zeitschrift fiir deutsche Wortforschung. Strassburg. irreg. pur. Ger. Zeitschrift fiir "deutsches Alterthum u. deutsche Litteratur. Ber. q. pur. Ger. Zeitschrift fiir die alttestamentliche Wis- senschaft. Giessen. semi-a. A. J. S. L. and L. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir die gesamte Staatswissen- schaft. Tilbingen. q. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Zeitschrift fiir die neutestamentliche Wis- senschaft. Giessen. q. A. J. T. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir die osterreichischen Gym- nasien. Vienna, m. S. R. Class. Zeitschrift fur Elektrochemie. Halle, w. pur. Chem. Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologic. Ber. bi-m. pur. Anthrop. Zeitschrift fiir franzosische Sprache u. Lit- eratur. Ber. irreg. pur. Rom. Zeitschrift fur Heilkunde. Vienna, m. pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir Hygiene u. Infectionskrank- heiten. Lpz. 9 nos. pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir Instrumentenkunde. Ber. m. pur. Physics Zeitschrift fiir kathologische Theologie. Innsbruck, q. A. J. T. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir Kirohengeschichte. Gotha. q. pur. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir klinischeMedicin. Ber. pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir Krystallographie u. Min- eralogie. Lpz. 10 nos. pur. Geol. Zeitschrift fiir Mathematik u. Physik. Lpz. q. pur. Math. Zeitschrift fiir mathematischen u. natur- wissenschaftlichen Unterricht. Lpz. 8 nos. pur. Math. Zeitschrift fur Missionskunde u. Religions- wissenschaft. Heidelberg, m. free. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir Morphologic u. Anthropolo- gic. Stut. 3 nos. pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir Ohrenheilkunde. Wiesba- den, pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir Philosophie u. Padagogik. Langensalza. bi-m. S. R. Ped. Zeitschrift fiir Philosophie u. philoso- phisohe Kritik. Lpz. q. pur. Philos. Zeitschrift fiir physikalische Chemie, StS- chiometrie u. Verwandtschaftslehre. Lpz. irreg. pur. Chem. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie. (Hoppe Seyler.) Strassburg. irreg. pur. Biol, Zeitschrift fiir praktische Geologie. Ber. m. J. G. Geol. Zeitschrift fiir Psychologie u. Physiologie der Sinnesorgane. Lpz. irreg. pur. Philos. Zeitschrift fiir romanische Philologie. Halle, bi-m. pur. Rom. Zeitschrift f ii r Schulgesundheitspflege. Hamburg, m. S. R. Ped. Zeitschrift fiir Sooialwissenschaft. Breslau. m. J. P. E. and A. J. S. Pol. Econ. Zeitschrift fiir Theologie u. Kirche. Tii- bingen. bi-m. A. J. T. Haskell Zeitschrift fur vergleichende Litteratur- geschichte. Weimar, irreg. pur. Ger. Zeitschrift fiir vergleichende Sprach- forschung. Giltersloh. 3 nos. pur. Comp. Philol. Zeitschrift fiir Volkswirtschaft, Social- politik u. Verwaltung. Vienna, bi-m. J. P. E. Pol. Econ. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Mikro- skopie u. fiir mikroskopische Technik. Brns. q. pur. Biol. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Theologie. Lpz. q. puT. Haskell Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Lpz. irreg. pur. Biol. Zentralblatt fur innere Medizin. Lpz. w. pur. Biol. Zion's advocate. Portland, Me. w. B. W. Haskell Zion's herald. Bost. w. free. Haskell Zoological society of London. Proceedings. q. pur. Biol. Zoologische Jahrbucher. Jena. Abth. fur Anatomic u. Ontogenie der Thiere. irreg. pur. Biol. Abth. fur Systematik, Geographic u. Biologie der Thiere. irreg. pur. Biol. Zoologische Station zu Neapel. Mittheilung- en. irreg. pur. Biol. Zoologischer Anzeiger. (Deutsche zoolo- gische Gesellschaft.) Lpz. semi-m. pur. Biol. Zoologischer Garten. Frankfort a. M. m. pur. Biol. Zoologisches Zentralblatt. Lpz. semi-m. pur. Biol. 264 The President's Kbpoet THE LIBRARY OF PROFESSOR VON HOLST January 15, 1900, the Trustees of the University of Chicago formally accepted from Pro- fessor Hermann Eduard von Hoist, of the Department of History, his private library. The gift was accompanied by the following conditions : 1. That the University provide Mr. von Hoist with a catalogue for his own private use of the books in this collection, the same to be made under his direction, and according to his convenience. 2. Each book to be plainly labeled as the gift of Mr. von Hoist, it being understood that no special gift plate be provided 3. The University to defray all expense of cataloguing, plating, and transfer of the collec- tion to the University. 4. The books to be delivered to the General Library for the present, leaving the matter open as to their ultimate destination. REPORT January 17 the work on Professor von Hoist's library began. Miss Cora Belle Perrine having been secured by the Trustees to have charge of the technical work on the library. The library contains a total number of 1,250 books and 200 pamphlets. The collection is strongly historical, but contains some books on other subjects. It is especially rich in periodical literature, among which is a file of the celebrated Niles Register, complete with the exception of Vol. LXIII, fifth series. No. 13. In addition to the interest which attaches to this collection as being the tools of Professor von Hoist's own work, it has an additional value from the fact that many of its books are presenta- tion copies from authors, students, and governmental officials. Conspicuous among these is a volume containing a presentation inscription and autograph of President Rutherford B. Hayes. THE LIBRARY OF DR. GEORGE WASHINGTON NORTHRUP On March 12, 1900, Dr. George Washington Northrup formally presented to the Univer- sity of Chicago his valuable private library, numbering in all 1,050 volumes and between 300 and 400 pamphlets. The library is composed chiefly of books in the departments of Systematic Theology and Ethics, with a small group of fine reference books. The chief value of this collection lies in the fact that the library was gathered year by year imder Dr. Northrup's personal direction, each book being selected with special care, and the whole collection kept so constantly pruned and overhauled that the usual drift material to be found in all private libraries is in this one con- spicuous by its absence. Dr. Northi-up especially requested that the Librarian, Zella Allen Dixson, who during her librarianship of the Baptist Union Theological Seminary had had special care and oversight of these books, should personally divide the library into two groups, selecting in one books to be placed in the Divinity Library of Haskell Museum, and the other to become part of the circu- lating department of the General Library. The University Trustees through the Library Department furnished Dr. Northrup a com- plete catalogue of the books thus presented. NEEDS OF THE LIBRARY 1. The Board of Trustees having made an-angements for the better housing in the near future of the collections which comprise the University Library, it is unnecessary to explain in detail the pressing needs which are at present created by the overcrowded condition of the present insufficient Library accommodations. The Univeksitt Library 265 2. The Library needs in the near future still fxirther to extend its rearrangement of Departmental Libraries into appropriate groups. The following group is suggested as the next one to be formed: The Mathematical Group, to be composed of the libraries of the Departments of Mathe- matics, Astronomy (Ryerson), and Physics. This rearrangement is recommended for the following reasons : a) It would enable these Departmental Libraries to be more elSciently and economically administered. b) It would save the expense of duplicating works of equal interest to each of the three Departments. c) Readers and investigators would be able to use each of the three Departments with less waste of time and energy than is possible under the present system. d) The work of the Departments concerned will be brought into closer connection and harmony. e) It would furnish an arrangement under which the University could give these Depart- ments better library administration by employing a trained librarian for the group. 3. At present the work of the Library is cramped by the lack of a sufficiently large staff. The work of the accession of books and the accession of periodicals is at present carried on by the same assistant, notwithstanding the fact that it is a physical impossibility for one person to carry so much work. It is, therefore, necessary as a regular thing to permit the accessioning of books to fall constantly behind. There is much accessioning on books in special collections urgently needing to be done. It is respectfully requested that in the near future an extra assistant be added to the regular staff, whose duty it shall be to accession books only, devoting such time as is not needed for newly purchased books in accessioning books in special collec- tions, whose accessions have never been written. It is desired also to call attention to the fact that the Department of the Traveling Libra- ries connected with the Extension Division is increasing so rapidly that it can no longer be carried forward as it should be without added assistance. It is undesirable to curtail in any way the activities of this department, but the aim should rather be to permit it to develop as much as possible, providing for it new avenues of growth. It is respectfully suggested that, if more assistance would be given the Library in this direction, a Department of Home Libraries in connection with the work of women's clubs could be undertaken, with results which would redound to the credit and usefulness of the University. 4. The work of the Loan-Desk Department, as will be seen by the tabulated statistics in this report, has very greatly increased with each year. During the last six months this depart- ment became so burdened that a student assistant was added to the loan-desk during the two hours of the day when the demand for books reaches its maximum. This has not provided sufficient help, and the Library administration desires earnestly to request that an assistant, on full time, be given to the regular loan-desk attendant. Unless this need is met, the Library will be wholly unprepared to give to the increased number of readers, which a better Library building will undoubtedly bring, the prompt and efficient service which has been rendered in the past. 5. A stenographer should be added to the staff to assist the Librarian in caring for the ever-increasing business correspondence, and communications with members of the University, the solicitation on a large scale of the publications of associations and institutions, securing municipal and state documents, preparing reports, arranging exchanges of duplicates, and other similar work, which at present is carried on in an unbusinesslike and inefficient manner, through the lack of sufficient clerical help. Respectfully submitted, Zella Allen Dixson, Librarian. 266 The President's Eepoet OUTLINE HISTORY OF THE LEGISLATION OF UNIVEESITY BODIES ON THE QUESTION OF DEPARTMENTAL LIBRARIES AND THEIR RELATION TO THE GENERAL LIBRARY The system of Departmental Libraries for research work, supplementing the General Library of the University, dates from the organization of the University itself. From the beginning, however, these Departmental Libraries were, to a limited extent, organized in groups, notably in the case of the Divinity School, the several libraries of which were, together with the Semitic Library, at first arranged in two groups, both being located in Cobb Hall, and afterwards, on their removal to Haskell, consolidated into one. Following the precedent thus set by experi- ence, the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums by action of November 26, 1898, appointed a committee, consisting of Messrs F. I. Carpenter, W. I. Thomas, and E. D. Burton, to consider the relations of the Departmental Libraries with a view to grouping them. The report of this committee was adopted by the Library Board May 27, 1899. Its chief recom- mendations were: 1. That there be formed, as soon as practicable, the three following groups of Departmental Libraries : (1) the Classical Group, to be composed of the libraries of Comparative Philology, Greek, Latin, and Archaeology; (2) the Historical Group, to be composed of the libraries of Political Economy, Political Science, History, and Sociology; (3) the Modern Language Group, to be composed of the libraries of Romance Languages, Germanic Languages, English Language, and Literature (in English). 2. That the libraries of all the Departments embraced in a Group be placed in adjoining rooms with a single common entrance; that a common catalogue be arranged for each Group; and that a single library adviser be appointed for each Group. The committee urged the adoption of these recommendations, to the end that the libraries might be more efficiently and economically administered; that the readers and investigators might use them with less waste of time and energy; and that the work of the Departments concerned might be brought into closer connection and harmony. April 8, 1899, the Senate voted to appoint a committee of five on the questions of educa- tional policy connected with the building of a library, and the following were appointed such committee: E. D. Burton, J. L. Laughlin, H. P. Judson, T. C. Chamberlin, and J. U. Nef. This Committee formulated three plans and submitted them to the Heads of Departments for their judgment. These three plans were: 1. The plan of Departmental Libraries as already existing, with the modifications in the direc- tion of grouping such libraries already approved by the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums, as indicated above. 2. The plan of centralization, by which the Departmental Libraries should be transferred to the General Library, provision being made in the General Library building for a seminar room for each Department, in which there might be kept a small collection of books, and for other offices, but the plan of Departmental Libraries being practically abandoned. 3. The compromise plan, by which those Departments which have laboratories should retain their Departmental Libraries in the laboratory buildings ; those having no laboratories should be in general transferred to the General Library building, retaining, however, their character as Depart- mental Libraries. The returns from the Departments indicated a decided preference for the third, or com- promise, plan. Upon the basis of these departmental replies, the Committee made to the Senate a report, of which the following are the chief recommendations : 1. That the [General] Library building of the University be used for library purposes only, and in particular that it contain neither an assembly hall nor the general administration offices [of the University]. The University Libraey 267 2. That at the outset the compromise plan (the third named above) be adopted. The Committee did not make specific recommendations as to what libraries should be placed in the General Library building and what in departmental buildings, but made the tentative suggestion (a) that all the Sciences represented in the Ogden Scientific School' retain their Departmental Libraries in connec- tion with their laboratories; (6) that the Historical and Social Sciences, Modern Languages, and per- haps Mathematics, be located in the General Library, (c) that Theology and the Semitic Languages, and probably also the Classics, be provided for in departmental buildings. While thus recommending the compromise plan, the Committee yet considered it very probable that, in consequence of the growth of the Library and the necessary limitations of space, certain Departments which in the beginning would occupy space in the General Library, would be obliged to remove in time to departmental buildings, and that thus the third plan would merge eventually into the first. 3. That the Departments which are located in the General Library building be grouped on sub- stantially the plan recently adopted by the Library Board. 4. That adjoining the reading-room of each Group [in the General Library building] there be provided seminar rooms and private consultation rooms. 5. That the Group reading-rooms be of different size, according to the probable needs of the several Groups. 6. That, in addition to the Group reading-rooms, there be provided [in the General Library building] a general reading-room intended especially for undergraduate students, and capable of pro- viding desk-room for a thousand students. 7. That the building be planned to contain shelf-room for a million volumes. 8. That the plan of the building be such as to permit erecting additional stack-rooms, and if neces- sary additional reading-rooms, without destroying its architectural symmetry, the location of the build- ing being selected with this in view, and adjacent space being left vacant so as to render it possible. 9. That ample corridors be provided, and provision made in the plan of the building for the adornment of them with statuary and pictures. 10. That ample entrances and exits be provided, and that these be placed so as to make entrance to the building easy from different parts of the Quadrangle. 11. That the building be fireproof. 12. That fireproof vaults be provided for the preservation of specially valuable books and manu- scripts. 13. That each Group Library be provided with cases in which books of special value might be protected under lock. 14. That a definite separation be made between the funds appropriated for the administration of the Library and those designated for the purchase of books. 15. That suitable provision be made for the proper administration and officering of the libraries of those Departments which remain in department buildings. 16. That the task of devising plans for the General Library building be intrusted to a committee consisting of the Head Librarian and representatives of the Senate and Library Board. This report was adopted by the Senate April 7, 1900, with an additional section depre- cating the placing of the General Library building on Ellis avenue, as contemplated in the original plan for the location of University buildings. At the meeting of the University Congregation held October 2, 1900, Messrs. E. D. Burton and H. P. Judson, by appointment of the Congregation Committee, presented briefs on the proposition " that a limit should be put in the near future to the development of the Depart- mental Library system." These briefs are contained in the University Record of September 28, 1900. After discussion of them, reported in the University Record of October 12, 1900, the Congregation adopted two resolutions: 1. That it is the judgment of this body that the Departmental Library system should be retained. 'Astronomy, Physics, Chemistry, Geology, Zoology, Anatomy, Neurology, Paleontology, Botany, and Physiology, 268 The President's Eepoet 2. That a committee of three for each of the several Groups of Departments recognized by the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums be appointed, the committee to consider and to recom- mend, respecting the group represented, what is best for it and the University in general. This Committee, being appointed, reported, and its reports appeared in the issues of the University Record for November 9 and 16, 1900. These departmental replies were by vote of the Congregation of November 2, 1900, referred to the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums for consideration, with the request that it make recommendation upon the subject to the Congregation. At the meeting of the Board of Libraries, Laboratories, and Museums held November 4, 1900, these departmental replies, together with certain other resolutions, entertained but not adopted by the Congregation at its meeting of November 2, 1900, and printed in the University Record of November 16, 1900, were by the Board referred to a committee consisting of Mr. E. D. Burton, Mr. F. I. Carpenter, and Mrs. Zella Allen Disson. This Committee reported to the Library Board February 23, 1901; its report, with some modifications, was adopted March 16, 1901, and laid before the Congregation at its meeting of March 20, 1901. Of this report, which went into considerable detail with reference to the provision to be made for each Department, and was printed in full in the University Record of March 20, 1901, it will suffice to quote here the four principles which the Committee stated in its preamble as being those -which, in its judgment, should be recognized in the determination of the policy of the University in respect to its Library : 1. That, while the maintenance of the departmental system is indispensable to the best devel- opment and the most profitable use of the library resources of the University, each Department and Group being specially responsible for and interested in the books pertaining to that Department or Group, yet all the library resources of the University should be recognized as belonging to the Uni- versity as a whole, and should be as easily accessible as possible to any person who is competent to make use of them, the entire administration being directed to the cultivation of what may be called the library habit on the part of the student, and the promotion of research. 2. That, in the interest of investigators whose studies must often cross the lines separating Departments and even Groups, it is desirable to concentrate the library resources of the University as far as possible at some one point. There should, therefore, be one central building in which a large proportion of the books of the University should be deposited, and at which any book possessed by the University, and not at that moment in use, could be consulted, books from the various Departments being, when needful, temporarily brought together. 3. That, in the case of all Departments having laboratories, and of some Departments having museums, it is indispensably requisite that their library resources should in large part be in the same building with such laboratories and museums, in order to be available in immediate connection with experimentation and study of museum material. 4. That, in the interest of undergraduates and other students doing ordinary class-room work, it is highly desirable that there should be carefully selected collections of books in close connection with lecture-rooms, in order to promote the use of books in connection with lecture and recitation courses on the part of students not chiefly engaged in research work. After extended discussion of the full report, action on it was postponed until a later meeting. When it again came before the Congregation, November 18, 1901, the Committee offered as a substitute a shorter report covermg only the main points of its fuller report. This shorter report is as follows : The Committee begs leave to recommend : 1. That the research libraries of the Departments of Physics, Chemistry, Geology, Paleontology, Botany, Zoology, Anatomy, and Physiology be located in the Department buildings of these several Departments in connection with their laboratories or museums.^ 2 That the chief library of Astronomy would remain at mendation under sec. 3 refers only to that portion of the the Yerkes Observatory was taken for granted. The recom- Library of Astronomy located in Chicago, The Univeksity Library 269 2. That the libraries of Law, Medicine, Technology, and Education be located in the Depart- ment buildings of these several schools. 3. That the research libraries of the following six Groups, viz.: (1) Philosophy, and History [and the Social Sciences] ; (2) Theology and Semitic Languages ; (3) Classical Languages ; (4) Modern Languages ; (5) Mathematics and Astronomy [on the main Quadrangle] ; (6) Music and Fine Arts ; be located as Group Libraries in the General Library building or buildings, or in departmental buildings so located that the library rooms can be immediately connected with the General Library building. 4. That all the above-named Departmental and Group Libraries be maintained on substantially the same plan as that now pursued for the Group Libraries in the various buildings, such libraries being under the oversight of an adviser representing the Department or Departments concerned, and being administered with primary reference to the needs of instructors and graduate students in the Departments represented, but with due consideration also of the interests of the whole University. 5. That the General Library building be located in view of the fact that it is to contain the research libraries named in sec. 3 above, or to be closely connected with them, and be accordingly placed in the south half of the original Quadrangle. 6. That in departmental buildings which contain no research library, there be maintained, whenever circumstances demand and funds permit it, a local library auxiliary to the main research library of the Department concerned. 7. That, in order to reduce to the minimum the* disadvantages entailed by the scattering of the library resources in various buildings, and to conserve the interests of investigators whose work covers several Departments, there be maintained a system of communication by messenger or other- wise between the General Library and all Group and Auxiliary Libraries on the University grounds, by which it shall be possible for an investigator desiring to use together books located in different buildings to obtain such books on reasonable notice at the central building ; and, furthermore, that the General Librarian shall have access at all times to all libraries of the University, and have the right to call for any book in any library not at the moment actually in use, and not reserved for the use of students or instructors at a given time ; provided, however that such books shall be promptly returned to the library from which they came as soon as the immediate need for them at the General Library has ceased, or on information that they are needed for the use of instructors or students in the Group or Auxiliary Library from which they came. 8. That the General Library maintain (1) a general University Circulating Library, containing such books as it is desirable should be accessible to all members of the University and open to be drawn for use outside the building ; and (2) a general Reference Library ; that it also receive and hold subject to suitable regulations such general collections of books as belong [i. e., pertain] to several Groups in common, but which are too expensive to be duplicated in the several Groups, and any other books which for any reason the Departments do not wish at present in their library rooms. Of this shorter report the first two sections were adopted. But after prolonged discussion of the third section, the Congregation adjourned without taking action. Consideration of this report was resumed at the meeting of December 18, 1901, and the two following motions were passed: 1. That the Library Committee [i. e., the committee whose report was before the Congregation] be instructed to place before the Trustees of the University all the information it has gained from the Departments, and to supplement it in cases where the present information is inadequate. 2. That the existing Committee on Libraries be instructed to use material already collected in the formation of a series of alternative propositions to be submitted to the six Departments ^ concerned, with a request for departmental replies, these to be collated and presented to the Congregation. 3 Meaning the six Groups mentioned in sec. 3 of the substitute report at that time before the Congregation. 270 The President's Report For reasons not necessary to be detailed the " alternative propositions " were submitted not only to the six Groups concerned, but to all Departments of the University and in the following form : Shall the University establish a Central Library, with Departmental Libraries to meet excep- tional requirements, or shall the present policy of Departmental Libraries be continued ? The two reports called for by the action of December 18 were presented by the Committee at the meeting of the Congregation held June 16, 1902. The report called for in the first motion was ordered transmitted to the Trustees. From the tabulation of the vote of the Departments submitted in accordance with the second motion the following facts appear: 1. A large majority of the representatives of the Departments of the Ogden Scientific School remained of the opinion previously expressed and approved by the Congregation, viz., that the Departmental Libraries of these several Departments should be located in the respective departmental buildings, subject, however, to such groupings as may be found desirable, and without prejudice to the right of these Departments to deposit books in the General Library. Some diilerence of opinion existed as to the extent to which grouping should be carried in the Biological Departments, but this did not affect the vote on the main question at issue. 2. The Department of Mathematics, which in previous reports on this subject had been assigned at least tentatively to a location in the General Library building, was unanimous in its expression of a desire that its Departmental Library should be located in its departmental building and in as close relation as practicable with the libraries of Astronomy and Physics. With this opinion the Department of Astronomy concurred, as respects that portion of the library which is to be located on the main Quadrangle (its main library being, of course, at the Observatory at Lake Geneva). The Committee also expressed approval of this vote of the Department of Mathematics. 3. The vote of the Departments of Philosophy, Political Economy, Political Science, History, Archaeology, Sociology, Comparative Religion, Semitic Languages, Biblical Greek, Comparative Philology, Greek, Latin, Eomance Languages, Germanic Languages, English, LiteratTire (in English), Systematic Theology, Chui-ch History, Homiletics (viz., those of which, with the addition of Mathematics and Astronomy, the Committee was instructed to obtain the votes) was as follows : By individuals, 39 for the central library system, 31 for the departmental system; by Departments, 12 for the central library system, 7 for the departmental system; by Groups, 3 for the central library system, 1 for the departmental system (Music and Fine Arts not yet organized and hence not voting). It is important to observe that, while the votes of the so-called scientific Departments and of Mathematics and Astronomy referred, in several cases expressly and in all cases by implica- tion, only to the preference of the Department as concerns the location of its own library, not to the policy to be pursued by the Humanities Groups, the votes of the several Departments of the Humanities Groups, on the other hand, referred not simply to the location of the library of the Department voting, but to the policy to be pursued respecting all these Groups. The latter was, indeed, the question to which the Committee was instructed to obtain replies, it having been recognized that among the Humanities Groups each Department was concerned, not only with the location of its own library, but in only less degree with that of other related Departments. To its tabulation and interpretation of the vote the Committee added the following paragraphs : The Committee is impressed with the fact that the three years of discussion of this question have served to clarify and crystallize opinion in the Faculties, and is persuaded that the votes reported today represent fairly the mature judgment of the different divisions of the Faculties. But, The University Library 271 while in sympathy with that policy which is favored by a majority of those whose votes are recorded, the Committee is still more strongly impressed with the unwisdom of the Congregation, or any other body of the University, taking final action at this time. The question at issue is one which involves the expenditure of a large sum of money, and, what is still more important, its decision involves the policy of the University on an important educational matter for many years to come. An error at this time might easily involve the waste of 1100,000 of money or the hampering of the work of the Univer- sity for a generation, or both. No committee or governing body of the University has, so far as the present Committee is aware, investigated the subject with that thoroughness, and with that assist- ance from expert advice of architects and librarians, which would qualify it to decide the important issues involved. In particular the architectural possibilities require far m.ore thorough study than they have received. We know fairly well what we want to accomplish, but we do not know in what different ways it may be accomplished, still less what is the best way. To act without further know- ledge on a question of such importance would be, in the judgment of the Committee, extremely unwise. The Committee therefore recommends the adoption of the following resolution: Resolved, That the Congregation request the Board of Trustees to appoint a joint commission on Library Building and Policy; it being further requested that such commission consist of representatives of the Board of Trustees and of the Faculty; that the Faculty members be selected to represent the different interests and opinions in the Humanities Groups, and that there be at least one representative also of the Science Groups; that a sufficient number of the Faculty members be released from the duty of instruction during the period of active service on the commission to enable them to make a thorough study of the problem; that the commission be authorized and instructed to secure the counsel of a competent architect and the advice of librarians and educators, and to incur necessary expenses, within an amount to be named by the Board of Trustees; that the commission be instructed to pre- sent its report to the Board of Trustees within four months, if possible, and requested in the mean- time to take the advice of the Congregation or other governing bodies of the University.* In recommending this action to the Congregation, the Committee needs only add that any sub- traction of time from the work of instruction, or any expenditure of money, which the work of such a commission is at all likely to involve, would be amply justified by the magnitude of the interests involved and the urgent need that the wisest possible course be adopted, and that before the question shall be further complicated by the erection of other departmental buildings. Respectfully submitted, Eenest D. Burton, F. I. Cakpentee, Zella Allen Dixson, CoTnmittee. The resolution recommended by the Committee was adopted by the Congregation and transmitted to the Board of Trustees. It was approved by the Board of Tmstees, and the Commission was created by vote of June 24, 1902. Before passing to the report of this Commission, it will be well to transcribe certain para- graphs from the report prepared by instruction of the Congregation in its vote of December 18, 1901, and by further instruction of the Congregation transmitted to the Board of Trustees simultaneously with the resolution requesting the creation of the Commission. These para- graphs sum up the results of legislation to the time of the creation of the Commission: From the foregoing history the following facts emerge: 1. The Departmental Library system, in its essential features, viz., the provision of reading- rooms for the several Departments and the placing of the books needed for research work in or near such rooms and easily accessible to students, has commended itself to a large majority of the mem- bers of the Faculties. 2. A modification of the departmental system by the organization of Departments into Groups has likewise received the approval of a large majority of the members of the Faculties. * This recommendation as here given embodies slight amendments made by the Congregation, 272 The President's Repoet 3. The need of more efficient administration both of the General Library and of the Depart- mental Libraries is generally — and by some members of the Faculties very keenly — felt. 4. The location of research libraries of the Science Groups in departmental buildings is favored by a large majority of the members of the Science Departments, and in this judgment the other Departments concur. 5. The Department of Mathematics, it is now generally recognized, should be, like the Science Departments, located in a departmental building in close association with the Departments of Astronomy and Physics. 6. In respect to the Science Groups there remain but two important questions on which there is serious difference of opinion; viz.: (1) To what extent should grouping be carried? and (2) Should the Department or Group Libraries contain practically the entire resources of each Department or Group, or should a considerable portion of these be deposited in the General Library, to be transferred to the library of the Department to which they belong according to need? On the first of these questions there is a difference of opinion among the representatives of the Biological Group, On the second, the Department of Physics is inclined to make a larger use of the General Library than most Departments of the Science Groups. 7. A far more serious difference of opinion exists among the representatives of the Humanities Groups. The tabulation of the vote, as reported by the Committee June 16, 1902, shows a majority in favor of placing the research libraries of the Departments which, broadly speaking, make up the Humanities [Groups] in the General Library [building], while still maintaining their character as Departmental or Group Libraries. It was with a view to the devising, if possible, of a plan which should meet the needs of all the Departments concerned more fully than any yet proposed that the Congregation adopted a recommendation of this Committee, requesting the Board of Trustees to appoint a Commission which should give prompt and yet thorough consideration to the important questions involved. It thus appears that the question of the General Library had become a question chiefly concerning the Humanities Groups, it being settled that the Science Groups would be provided for mainly in their departmental buildings, though retaining the right to deposit books in the General Library building to any extent which they desired. Two other facts need also to be named which are not specially referred to in any report on the subject of libraries : 1. It was generally recognized that the congested condition of the buildings of the origi- nal Quadrangle would soon demand the transfer of some portion of the work hitherto done on that Quadrangle to buildings to be erected elsewhere, and the transfer of the Junior College work to outside Quadrangles, involving the provision of special libraries for the students of the Junior Colleges, had already been approved by ruling bodies of the University. This fact served still fiu'ther to limit the function of the General Library by confining it chiefly to the use of Senior College and Graduate students and members of the Faculties. 2. The Law School had been recently organized, and was expected to open its doors for students in October, 1902. It was the strong wish of a majority of the representatives of the Historical and Social Sciences that the Law building containing the Law library should be so located as to be in close connection with the building devoted to the Historical and Social Sciences, when that should be hereafter erected. The question of the location of the Law building was pending before the Board of Trustees when the Commission above referred to was appointed. The work of the Commission above referred to will best appear in the following report of the Commission to the Congregation, presented to that body August 28, 1902: In accordance with the request of the Congregation made June 16, 1902, the Board of Trustees, by action taken June 24, appointed as a Joint Commission on Library Building and Policy the follow- ing persons: Messrs. Martin A. Ryerson, Franklin MacVeagh, F. A. Smith, W. R. Harper, F. I. Carpenter, J. M. Coulter, A. W. Small, H. P. Judson, W. G. Hale, and E. D. Burton. The Uniteesitt Libeaet 273 This Commission made a careful study of the past growth of the several Departments of the University, with a view to forming a judgment respecting their relative space requirements, both for books and students, and also of the growth of the several Departmental Libraries and the General Library, comparing these results with the reports of the libraries of several of the other leading universities of the country, with a view to determining approximately the probable rate of the future growth of the libraries.^ The result of these studies was to convince the Commission that it was practicable to devise a plan by which all the libraries of what have usually been called the Humanities Groups might be placed in the departmental buildings, and at the same time brought into such relation to the General Library building as to accomplish nearly all the good results which could be achieved by placing Departmental Libraries in the General Library Building. Plans embodying this general idea were submitted to Shepley, Rutan & Coolidge, and Mr. Coolidge went carefully over them with the Commission to determine their feasibility from an archi- tectural point of view. Mr. Coolidge having expressed the judgment that the plans were not only feasible, but the best that had been proposed, and the most practicable so far as could be seen now, the Commission at a meeting held August 12, 1902, adopted the following recommendations to the Board of Trustees: 1. That with a view to securing, as far as possible, the advantages both of location of Depart- mental Libraries in departmental buildings, and of placing such libraries in the General Library building, the Departmental Libraries of the following Groups of Departments and Schools, viz., (1) Philosophy, (2) History and the Social Sciences, (3) Classics, (4) Modern Languages, (5) Oriental Languages, (6) the Divinity School, (7) the Law School, be located in the buildings of these several Groups and Schools, but so connected with the General Library as to make communication between these several libraries as easy as possible. 2. And, in particular, that the sites indicated for the several buildings on the accompanying plan submitted by Shepley, Rutan, & Coolidge be assigned to those buildings, viz.: To the General Library building, a space approximately 216 feet by 90 feet, extending 108 feet east and west of the center of the south line of the main Quadrangle and 90 feet north of this line. To the Modern Language building, a space approximately 152 feet directly west of the General Library building, by 80 feet from north to south at its eastern end and 60 feet at its western end. To the Classical building, a space approximately 60 feet by 115 feet, at the southwest corner of the Quadrangle; viz.: 20 feet west of the Modern Language building, and south of the already existing Dormitories on the west side of the Quadrangle. To the building of the Historical and Social Sciences, a space approximately 168 feet directly east of the General Library building, by 80 feet from north to south at its western end and 60 feet at its eastern end; leaving a space of 20 feet between this building and Nancy Foster Hall. To the Law building, a space approximately 170 feet from north to south beginning 20 feet north of the Historical building and 216 feet directly east of Haskell Museum. To the Divinity building, a T-shaped space approximately 180 feet from east to west and 125 feet from north to south, 20 feet north of Haskell Museum, and 85 feet east of Cobb Hall. To Philosophy the necessary amount of the space north of the site of the Law building and west of Walker Museum, the remainder of this space being reserved for the extension of the Museum. 3. That the several buildings, when erected, be connected by bridges substantially as indicated on the plan. 4. That in each of these buildings, to be hereafter erected, there be provided, in addition to lecture rooms, seminar rooms, offices, etc., a library for the use of the Senior College and Graduate students working in these several Groups of Departments, with reasonable provision for the pros- pective growth of these Departments. 6. That the Departmental Libraries of each Group consist of so many of those books desired by the several Departments for the use of Graduate and Senior College students as the space which can be allotted for the Departmental Library will permit, it being understood that other books belonging to the Departments in question will be placed in the General Library building. 6. That reasonable stack facilities be provided for each Departmental Library, either in the departmental building or in an adjacent portion of the General Library; in either case such stack to be subject to the same departmental control as the library in the departmental building. 7. That a large reading-room be provided in the General Library building. 8. That a catalogue of each Departmental or Group Library be provided in the library-room of the Group, and that the General Library contain, accessible to readers, a catalogue of all books in the General Library and the several Departmental Libraries. 6 The tables prepared for the purposes of this study are printed in somewhat revised form as an appendix to this history. 274 The President's Repokt 9. That such, communication be established between the several Departmental Libraries above named and the General Library that transfer of books from any one of these libraries to any other may be made with the greatest possible facility, as nearly as possible as if they were all located in one building. 10. That, subject to the regulations of the Departmental Libraries, and to such regulations as the Library Board may approve, it shall be the privilege of students and instructors to bring together from the several libraries above named, books which they may need to use together, either to the General Library or to that Departmental Library in which they are working. 11. That the Library Board be instructed to appoint a Committee on Library Building, which shall make a deliberate and detailed study of the problem of the General Library building, and make recommendations to the Library Board, and through this Board to the Board of Trustees, concerning plans for the General Library building, and concerning its relation to the Departmental Libraries. Af/Dy/AY PLAI5Ar^C£. 12. That, pending the erection of a General Library building, the Library Board be instructed to present to the Board of Trustees a plan for accomplishing the end aimed at in Recommendations 9 and 10, including the preparation of the catalogue described in Recommendation 8. At a previous meeting of the Commission it had been voted to approve the placing of the Departmental Libraries of Chemistry, Physics, Geology, and the Biological Sciences in the depart- mental buildings of these Departments, it being understood that these Departments may place such books as they desire in the General Library building. The Commission also expressed its judgment that the Library of Mathematics, and that of Astronomy so far as it exists on the main Quadrangle, should be associated with the Library of Physics, it being expected that a building for Mathematics and Astronomy will at some time be erected near the Ryerson Physical Laboratory. These actions of the Commission were presupposed in the above recommendations, and in effect added to them. The plans recommended in the foregoing report provide for the General Library a building which, in addition to ample corridors, stairs, and elevators, will yield approximately 18,000 square feet of floor space for administration and kindred purposes, 18,000 square feet of floor space for reading- rooms, and 100,000 square feet of stack floors, stories 7J^ feet high. Such a building would store in The Univeesity Libeaey 275 easily accessible stacks from 1,500,000 to 1,750,000 books,« and provide from 700 to 1,000 desks for readers. This provides for the growth of the General Library and the libraries of the Humanities Groups (not including Mathematics) for from seventy-five to one hundred and ten years, if that growth should continue at the rate averaged in the first five years of the history of the University; and this without making allowance for the capacity of the libraries of the departmental buildings. The rate assumed exceeds the current annual growth of Harvard, Cornell, Yale, Johns Hopkins, and, so far as is known to the Commission, that of any other American university with the probable exception of Columbia, whose annual growth of 19,000 volumes includes the Sciences and Mathe- matics, these being in our plan provided for outside the General Library and the group of buildings now under consideration. These plans further provide for a building for each of the following Groups and Schools, viz.: Philosophy, History and the Social Sciences, Classics, Modern Languages, Oriental Languages (Haskell), the Divinity School, and the Law School, which, in addition to the lecture-rooms, class- rooms, seminar rooms, studies, offices, etc., which the rate of growth of these Groups and Schools in the past (the estimate was made on the basis of the growth of the years 1895-1901) indicates will be needed to provide for their future development, will in each case contain a library for the Group or School occupying it. Provision is also made for a museum in each of the following buildings, viz.: Classics, Modern Languages, and History. The areas of these several libraries, as laid out in the provisional plans drawn by the architect to test the feasibility of the general scheme, are adjusted to the probable demands of the future, as indicated by the statistics of the past growth of the Depart- ments and Schools now in existence. The number of students provided for, assuming that not more than two- thirds of the students in any Group or School will be in the library room at any given hour, is as follows : Philosophy and Pedagogy, 190 ; ' History and the Social Sciences, 315 : Classics, 130 ; Modern Languages, 490 ; Oriental Languages, 60 to 100 ; a total for these Departments of about 1,200 to 1,250. These figures are based upon a generous allowance of space for each reader [viz., 25 square feet of floor space for each student]. If the space in the Law building, which provides for 1,000 students, and that which is contemplated for the Divinity building, for approximately 450 stu- dents, be added, it will be seen that the proposed group of buildings in the south half of the main Quadrangle provides, outside the General Library building. Walker, and Cobb, for over 2,700 students in residence in any given Term or Quarter. The provision for Mathematics and the Sciences in the north half of the Quadrangle, and for Junior College students outside the main Quadrangle, is additional to this. If the actual seating capacity of the libraries of Philosophy, History, Classics, Modern Languages, and Oriental Languages — viz., two-thirds of the figures given above for these Groups — be added to the capacity of the General Library, as already stated, it will be seen that these libraries will provide desks for 1,500 to 1,800 students at work at a given moment. To these figures the Law and Divinity buildings will add perhaps 1,300 desks. The book capacity of the Departmental Libraries proposed for the south half of the Quadrangle would be approximately 100,000 volumes, exclusive of the libraries of Law and Divinity. These would add space for perhaps nearly as many more. Respectfully submitted on behalf of the Commission, Ernest D. Bdiston, Chairman. Frederick I. Carpenter, Secretary. The recommendations of the Commission to the Board of Trustees, as transcribed in the above report, were approved by the Congregation August 28, 1902, and adopted by the Board of Trustees September 16, 1902. fi By the use of steel rolling stacks, such as are already and a comparison of averages for a comparison of single in successful use in the Bodleian Library, Oxford, England, years. The result on the whole confirms the first calcula- the capacity of the stack could ba multiplied by nearly 2V4. tion, but shows that the flares given in this paragraph ' These figures exceed somewhat those which would be would probably provide for the growth of more than the obtained from Table III of the Appendix. The difference twenty-five years, which they were at first supposed to arises from substituting the years 1896-1902 for 1895-1901, cover. 276 The President's Report APPENDIX TABLES OF STATISTICS BEARING UPON THE SPACE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LIBRARY AND RELATED BUILDINGS : « PREPARED BY THE JOINT COMMISSION ON LIBRARY BUILDING AND POLICY, APPOINTED JUNE 24, 1902 TABLE I Depaetmental Eegisteation philosophy skoup Depabtment Philosoph.v: Summer' Autumn Winter Spring Pedagogy: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg. . . Stud. (J av. quar. reg. Geaduate Schools 50 54 64 73 31 36 21 14 81 90 85 87 85.75 28.58 35 52 46 35 76 40 10 21 111 92 56 56 78.75 26.25 45 55 52 37 56 12 35 24 101 67 87 61 79.00 26.33 54 41 56 54 71 30 23 18 125 71 79 72 86.75 28.92 47 55 68 57 31 23 41 135 86 91 98 102.50 34.16 72 44 39 48 44 29 25 12 116 73 64 60 78.25 26.08 Senioe Colleges 7 48 95 43 3 3 2 6 16 51 97 49 53.25 17.75 66 90 54 14 10 22 76 90 56 61.00 20.33 19 80 95 61 12 4 31 84 103 65 70.75 23.58 26 103 109 28 103 113 76 80.00 26.66 20 89 73 73 15 7 11 11 35 96 84 84 74.75 24.92 35 95 92 63 17 3 9 27 52 98 101 90 85.25 28.42 Three years' gain in average quarterly registration'" Three years' gain in students " ......... Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'' Grad. Sch. 8.00 2.66 2.34. Sen. Coll. 18.33 6.11 8 The Commission compiled the following tables not under the impression that the future growth or needs of the University could be accurately predicted on the basis of statistics, but in the belief that by means of them the relative requirements of the several Groups of Departments, and to a less degree the actual future needs both of the Library and of the several Groups of Departments, could be somewhat more correctly estimated than by pure con- jecture or personal impression. 9 Throughout Table I the figures for registration repre- sent the sum of the registrations in Major courses, plus one-half the registrations in Minor courses. In the Gradu- ate School of Arts and Literature the registration is that of students in the Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges respectively; in the Divinity School the figures represent registration in Divinity courses. Sunday courses are not counted, nor those in the Scandinavian Seminaries. 10 Viz., excess of average for 1899-1902 over average for 1896-99. H Viz., one-third of the average quarterly registration in the group, each student as a rule registering for three courses. 12 Viz., the ratio of the estimated registration twenty- five years hence to present registration ; obtained by multi- plying the three years' gain in registration in the Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges combined by 8M, adding the product to the registration for 1901-2, and dividing the sum by the registration for 1901-2. The University Library 277 TABLE I— Continued HISTORY GEOnP Depaetment Political Economy: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Political Science: Summer Autumn Winter Spring History: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Sociology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Compar. Religion: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg. . . . Stud. (J av. quar. reg.) Gbaduate Schools 9 30 35 34 38 49 33 82 45 52 56 25 46 44 47 1 1 155 171 164 181 167.75 55.92 25 30 39 17 61 47 38 44 79 42 34 34 46 209 190 209 206 203.50 67.83 42 35 .35 36 27 43 25 67 89 71 94 46 32 48 26 35 2 i 164 199 180 185 182.00 60. as 28 24 32 24 56 57 44 37 73 76 74 71 30 32 31 25 2 1 1 187 191 182 158 179.50 59.83 24 27 33 21 15 26 25 19 108 51 53 78 24 28 19 35 1 3 172 132 133 153 147.50 49.17 31 30 25 28 37 27 25 19 121 60 65 47 36 30 57 15 5 i 230 147 172 110 164.75 54.92 Senior Colleges 4 32 37 17 11 28 21 23 15 43 39 63 17 36 56 38 120 133 159 112.50 37.50 6 24 23 12 14 33 48 66 30 65 77 101 25 36 20 54 75 158 169 233 158.75 52.92 15 44 37 43 21 41 42 45 33 64 93 73 16 38 23 62 1 2 85 188 195 225 155.75 51.92 12 31 49 24 14 38 46 43 44 72 91 109 27 49 33 80 14 47 35 41 10 42 38 32 45 96 127 118 27 52 39 63 1 'e 1 2 97 190 220 258 191.25 208.00 63.75 69.33 97 237 245 254 16 57 80 47 27 59 51 42 64 114 128 105 ■51 40 63 87 5 2 163 272 322 284 260.25 86.75 Three years' gain in average quarterly registration i" Three years' gain in students" Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'^ 1.60. Grad. Sch. Sen. CoU -20.50 44.08 6.80 14.69 CLASSICS GROUP Department Greek: Summer Autumn Winter . Spring.. Latin: Summer Autumn Winter . , Spring. . , Geadctate Schools 36 50 44 39 80 37 46 44 46 47 46 101 72 79 72 48 47 59 46 145 89 70 61 46 57 42 50 90 84 82 46 54 32 33 30 103 63 59 50 71 30 27 18 166 62 54 37 Senior Colleges 7 21 27 26 32 29 39 6 17 20 23 12 34 48 40 11 40 26 33 13 40 34 39 5 21 22 23 14 23 54 53 5 20 24 29 29 42 44 43 20 28 24 30 28 34 48 34 278 -The President's Eepokt TABLE I— Continued CLASSICS GEOUP Depaktment Gkaduate Schools Senior Colleges Compar. Philology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring ArchEeology : Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg. . Stud. {} av. quar. reg.) 11 12 5 5 7 136 103 101 96 109.00 36.33 5 10 5 3 144 128 139 130 135.00 45.00 5 14 12 6 198 155 145 113 152.75 50.92 5 6 14 3 3 2 141 150 141 107 134.75 44.92 9 4 10 164 108 104 96 118.00 39.33 7 5 15 16 4 7 6 9 248 104 102 80 133 50 44.50 3 2 2 2 18 56 58 67 49.75 16.58 18 51 69 63 50.25 16.75 24 86 64 72 61.50 20.50 19 46 77 66 52.00 17.33 1 1 4 43 63 71 79 64.00 21.33 5 5 50 70 79 74 68.25 22.75 Three years' gain in average quarterly registration ^° Three years' gain in students " Grad. Soh. Sen. Coll -3.50 7.58 -1.16 2.53 Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'^ 1.16. Depaetmental Eegisteation modeen language gkonp Dbpaetment Germanic Languages Summer Autumn Winter Spring Romance Languages: Summer Autumn Winter Spring English: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Literature in English : Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg. . Stud. {^ av. quar. reg Geaduate ScnooLS 115 50 27 29 67 28 29 30 132 80 71 72 1 is 315 158 145 139 189.25 63.08 73 37 33 40 55 36 31 24 170 97 97 81 29 298 199 169 147 203.25 67.75 45 41 41 101 49 43 41 224 132 145 125 2 12 24 7 415 238 253 214 280.00 93.33 8 96 40 31 25 31 35 25 270 160 151 127 528 231 217 177 288.25 96.08 119 48 44 37 19 29 18 272 125 121 110 40 8 11 21 519 200 205 186 277.50 92.50 153 56 51 45 85 50 38 32 268 125 103 65 40 24 546 231 192 166 283.75 94.58 Senioe Colleges 10 24 15 29 12 18 15 38 32 44 64 98 27 40 55 86 121 205 116.75 38.92 9 43 33 30 29 42 33 28 58 71 58 43 19 10 45 173 165 131 128.25 42.75 13 35 40 31 24 58 49 66 43 80 91 106 3 19 7 22 83 192 187 225 171.75 57.25 15 37 38 48 30 49 50 45 40 85 67 76 93 171 155 169 147.00 14 48 57 49 28 50 44 45 40 94 114 11 20 31 36 93 212 246 206 189.25 49.00! 63.08 32 36 46 37 45 53 57 45 56 99 114 11 6 63 144 194 217 214 102.25 64.08 Grad. Scb. Sen. Coll. Three years' gain in average quarterly registration'" - - - - - - - 59.00 37.33 Three years' gain in students " . - - - 19.66 12.44 Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges," 2.68 The University Library 279 TABLE 1— Continued MATHEHATIC3 GEOUP Depaktment Mathematics: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Astronomy: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Sprir -? Average quar. reg. . . Stud. (J av. quar. reg.) Geaduate Schools 136 55 60 65 10 14 11 13 146 69 71 78 91.00 30.33 116 56 73 64 12 7 10 124 68 80 74 86.25 28.75 142 65 66 67 21 26 23 11 163 91 89 78 105.25 35.08 136 63 51 52 24 19 17 9 160 82 68 61 92.75 30.92 124 52 53 55 31 11 16 12 155 63 69 67 88.50 29.50 198 53 63 48 23 12 18 11 221 65 81 59 106.50 35.50 Senioe Colleges 3 7 17 12 3 15 19 12 12.25 4. 7 12 20 21 4 4 2 7 16 24 23 17.50 5.83 3 11 12 16 3 1 3 3 14 13 19 12.25 4. 5 15 18 15 53 15 18 20 15.25 5. 15 23 21 14 1 6 24 23 22 20 22.25 7.41 12 19 19 30 4 7 1 20 23 26 31 25.00 8.33 Grad. Sch. Sen. Coll. Three years' gain in average quarterly registration '" - 1.66 6.83 Three years' gain in students " - - - - - - - - - - -0.55 2.28 Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'^ 1.54. Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg . . Stud. (I av. quar. reg. Geaduate Schools 27 21 29 33 27.50 9.16 23 33 27 25 27.00 9.00 47 52 39 41 44.75 14.92 38 49 48 33 42.00 14.00 25 35 44 30 33.50 11.16 31 47 45 21 36.00 12.00 Senioe Colleges 18 3 8.50 2.83 2 9 29 19 14.75 4.92 9 16 7 27 14.75 4.92 15 21 33 15 21.00 7.00 18 16 24 25 20.75 6.92 12 21 36 37 26.50 8.83 Grad. Soh. Sen. Coll. Three years' gain in average quarterly registration "> - - - - - - - 4.08 10.08 Three years' gain in students " - .-. 1.36 3.36 Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'^ 2.88. Geaduate Schools 8 Sentoe Colleges Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg .... Stud. (\ av. quar. reg.) 71 21 21 20 as. 25 11.08 69 24 35 38 41.50 13.83 38 52 33 47.25 15.75 116 42 58 53 67.25 22.42 113 35 34 45 56.75 18.92 118 37 32 34 55.25 18.42 1 1 10 10 5.50 1.83 6 2 21 32 15.25 5.08 5 8 24 23 15.00 5.00 10 6 13 11 10.00 3.33 9 19 17 13.50 4.50 12 22 31 32 24.25 Grad, Sch. Sen. Coll. Three years' gain in average quarterly registration'" - 19.08 4.00 Three years' gain in students " - - - 6.36 1.33 Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges," 3.38, 280 The President's Report TABLE 1— Continued Depaetmental Eegisteation chemistet Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg. . . Stud. (J av. quar. reg.) GsADTiATE Schools 109 74 68 54 78.75 26.25 87 84 80 1 63.00 21.00 124 65 69 43 75.25 25.08 134 51 81 52 177 73 88 68 79.50102.50 26.50j 34.16 65 89 63 79 99.00 33.00 Senior Colleges 10 15 23 22 17.50 5.83 10 19 31 2 15.50 5.16 11 24 23 19 19.25 6.41 14 17 30 25 21.50 7.16 55 37 37 27 39.00 13.00 25 39 42 73 44.75 14.92 Grad. Sch. Three years' gain in average quarterly registration "> - - - - - - 21.33 Three years' gain in students" - - - - - - - - - - - 7.11 Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'^ 3.26. Sen. Coll. 17.66 5.88 BIOLOGY GEOUP Depaktment Zoology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Anatomy & Histology Summer Autumn Winter Spring Physiology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Neurology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Botany: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Average quar. reg. . . . Stud, [i av. quar. reg.) Gk.aduate Schools 32 31 28 27 17 3 4 1 23 3 15 10 5 7 3 33 29 27 28 105 71 81 69 81.50 27.17 31 32 37 30 19 2 4 1 22 16 6 16 5 7 58 26 20 33 134 82 72 87 93.75 31.25 63 44 47 37 20 2 2 20 42 15 17 14 5 7 54 48 35 44 171 141 106 104 130.50 43.50 68 43 54 51 16 8 6 3 7 25 29 47 15 8 10 68 36 46 43 167 127 143 154 147.75 49.25 98 58 55 44 9 32 26 6 13 32 36 47 18 9 10 17 62 34 51 45 200 165 178 159 175.50 58.50 33 47 39 27 69 43 9 18 31 56 62 13 11 17 19 75 60 73 83 166 218 228 228 210.00 70.00 Senior Colleges 3 2 1 1 4 5 4 10 20 20 14 27 20.25 6.75 7 7 5 12 20 18 16 27 20.25 6.75 7 13 9 13 7 2 1 2 11 7 4 1 1 1 1 6 5 6 24 23 32 24 42 30.25 10.08 3 7 29 17 5 17 15 3 4 20 15 24 1 io 2 5 8 16 14 50 67 70 50.25 16.75 15 20 25 11 1 21 12 1 4 14 18 11 5 1 7 5 8 14 32 61 63 39 48.75 16.25 67 8 6 22 6 37 20 4 3 24 9 24 1 2 13 6 4 33 91 75 40 85 72.75 24.25 Three years' gain in average quarterly registration '" Three years' gain in students '' Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges,'^ 4.22. Grad. Sch. Sen. Coll. 75.86 33.66 25.28 11.22 The Univeesitt Libeaey 281 TABLE I — Continued DIVINITY GEOnP 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Old Testament: Summer 114 128 52 52 61 42 54 26 9 ie 77 59 82 37 86 75 78 17 25 40 30 43 23 26 13 36 9 407 394 316 293 355.00 118.33 85 88 39 47 83 49 76 67 7 20 16 43 42 38 90 69 76 97 74 54 54 21 38 i2 41 375 328 291 332 331.50 110.50 116 98 86 35 99 51 83 47 22 42 35 29 17 28 56 65 65 34 36 12 24 2i 89 408 297 275 210 297.50 99.16 136 118 105 33 65 91 122 76 50 5 a 53 40 65 70 71 90 85 46 23 5 17 74 33 30 21 20 3 19 515 401 325 366 401.75 133.92 156 88 95 74 95 87 120 73 36 18 ii 41 77 27 68 71 64 54 79 41 19 19 12 5 29 36 45 39 ig 23 484 382 370 388 406.00 135.33 171 64 Winter 75 Snrins* 58 New Testament: Summer 121 Autumn 93 58 Spring 61 Bib ical Theology: 27 Autumn 29 Winter Spring Systematic Theology: ii 55 Autumn 46 Winter 26 47 Church History: 79 Autumn 57 Winter 83 55 Homiletics: 38 39 Winter. 25 36 Sociology: Winter 40 Spring 36 Pub. Speak., Disciples, Cumberland Presby.: Summer 42 Winter 34 Spring 10 Group totals: Summer 533 328 Winter 341 Spring 317 Average quar. reg Stud. (J av. quar. reg.).. 379.75 126.58 Three years' gain in average quarterly registration i° Three years' gain in students" . . - . Prospective 25 years' rate of gain," 2.48. 67.83 22.61 282 The President's Report TABLE I— Continued PCBLIC SPE.\KING Gkaddate Schools Senior Colleges S 1 S S 1 1 en g 1 B 1 i 2 Summer 7 1^75 0.58 3 6 1 4 3.50 1.16 11 4 4 3 5.50 1.83 12 5 2 4 5.75 1.92 14 7 2 12 8.75 2.92 24 6 2 7 9.75 3.25 3 13 21 33 17.50 5.83 1 10 62 17 22.50 7.50 4 59 24 21 27.00 9.00 4 7 5 26 10.50 3.50 12 4 30 25 17.75 5.92 13 Autumn 23 23 Spring 22 Average quar. reg Stud. (* av. quar. reg.) 20.25 6.75 Three years' gain in average quarterly registration lo - - - - - Three years' gain in students (one-third average quarterly registration) " - Prospective 25 years' rate of gain in Graduate Schools and Senior Colleges," 0.53. Grad. Soh. Sen. CoU. 4.50 -6.16 1.50 —2.06 TABLE n Table of Classes fok Yeak 1901-1902 philosophy gkodp Department Junior Classes Senioe and Geaduate Classes 30 or Less Over 30 Total 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total Philosophy: "i 2 1 1 2 1 3 '2 1 3 2 1 4 2 2 1 4 2 2 7 6 5 5 2 3 5 7 9 9 10 12 i 1 1 1 i i 1 i 1 1 7 Autumn 6 6 Spring 6 Pedagogy: Summer 3 Autumn 4 6 Spring 7 Group totals: Summer 10 Autumn 10 Winter 12 13 HISTOKT GROUP Junior Classes Senior and Graduate Classes 30 or Loss Over 30 Total 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total Political Economy: Summer 2 3 1 1 '2 1 2 3 3 2 3 8 11 7 3 3 5 3 1 2 "i i 1 1 i i Autumn 9 Winter 12 Spring 8 Political Science: Summer . . . , 3 Autumn . .- 6 Winter 5 Spring 4 13 Suinmer= First Term, Summer Quarter. The University Library 283 TABLE 11— Continued HISTOEY GEOnP Depaetment Junior Classes Senioe and Geaduate Classes 30 or Less Over 30 Total 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total History: Summer 1 i 1 3 4 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 3 4 2 2 3 2 1 'i 1 4 7 6 3 5 8 9 4 7 6 13 7 2 1 'i 20 26 38 22 4 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 6 5 2 6 i 2 1 "i 1 1 1 1 4 4 3 9 Autumn 11 Winter 12 SlDrinff 8 Sociology: 8 Autumn 8 Winter 15 10 Comparative Religion: 3 1 W^inter 1 Group totals: Summer 27 35 44 Spring 31 CLASSICS GHODP Depaetment Junior Classes 30 or Less OTer 30 Total Senioe and Geaduate Classes 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total Greek: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Latin: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Archaeology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Comparative Philology Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals : Summer Autumn Winter Spring 10 10 9 5 5 4 3 5 10 10 15 10 11 n. 9 16 11 7 1 1 1 1 4 2 5 15 13 21 19 284 The President's Eepokt TABLE 11— Continued MODESN LANGUAGE GEOUP Department Junior Classes or Less Over 30 Total Senioe anb Gkaduatb Classes 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total Romance: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Germanic: Summer Autumn Winter Spring English: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Literature in English: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals Summer Autumn Winter Spring 14 12 3 2 1 1 4 i 3 4 1 9 5 2 15 9 7 4 10 10 14 23 23 19 10 8 7 4 6 5 3 12 11 19 25 27 15 11 1 2 3 13 8 7 4 7 5 9 3 10 14 14 32 27 30 18 MATHEMATICS GEOUP Department Mathematics: Summer . . . Autumn . . . Winter Spring Astronomy: Summer . . . Autumn .. . Winter . . . . Spring Group totals: Summer.. . Autumn . . . Winter. . . . Spring JuNiOK Classes 30 or Less 1 9 10 6 2 9 11 6 Over SO Total 5 9 10 6 11 6 Senior and Ghaduate Classes 30 or Less 5 7 2 2 3 4 11 10 8 11 Over 30 Seminars Total 9 8 6 7 2 2 3 4 11 10 9 11 The University Library 285 TABLE II— Continued Depabtmbnt Physics: Summer . Autumn . Winter . . Spring.. . Chemistry: Summer. Autumn . Winter . . Spring.. . Geology: Summer . Autumn . Winter . . Spring.. , Depaetment Zoology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Anatomy: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Neurology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Botany: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Physiology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Pathology and Bacteriology: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring JuNioE Classes 3 or Less Over 30 Total 4 2 3 2 2 4 3 5 1 1 1 1 Senior and Geaduate Classes 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total 7 7 6 6 12 12 13 13 5 6 9 7 7 6 7 13 13 13 13 5 6 10 7 BIOLOGY GEOXJP 1* Jdnioe Classes or Less Over 30 Total Senioe and Geadtjate Classes 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total 3 3 5 6 23 3 22 3 19 5 25 7 4 3 3 4 4 3 6 7 7 8 1 5 7 6 4 4 6 24 33 30 31 14 No classes in Paleontology during this year. 286 The Peesident's Report PUBLIC SPEAKING Depaetment Junior Classes Senior and Geaduate Classes 30 or Less Over SO Total 30 or Less Over 30 Seminars Total Summer. . 3 6 10 6 i I 11 6 1 2 "i 1 Autumn 2 Winter Spring 4 DITINITY GBOCP Depaetment Old Testament: Summer Autumn Winter Spring New Testament: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Sociology (Div.): Summer Autumn Winter Spring Depaetment Systematic Theol.: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Church History: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Homiletics: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Depaetment Public Speaking: Summer Autumn Winter Spring Group totals: Summer Autumn Winter Spring 1 1 1 1 29 27 26 31 TABLE III Summary of Statistics Bearing Upon Eequihements foe Departmental Buildings op the Humanities Groups Philos'phy Group History Group Classics Group Modern Langniage Group Divinity Group Number of Graduate and Senior College classes in Quarter of 1901-02 having largest number of such classes Number of such classes having over 30 students. . . Number of Graduate and Senior classes in Quarter of 1901-02 having largest number of (Grad. and Sen.) classes over 30 Number of classes over 30 in said Quarter Seminars in Quar. having largest number of seminars Approximate number of classes in each room Average size of rooms (sq. ft.) Grad. and Sen. Coll. students in Dep. (one-third reg. Quarterly average for 1901-1902 Average for 1899-1902 Floor area needed for class rooms for present number of students, allowing 5 classes a day in each room 600 sq. ft. for classes of 30, 1,200 eq. ft. for larger classes Floor area, as above, but allow'g 3 classes in each room Floor area needed for Library, providing desks at any hour for two-thirds of present students at 25 sq. ft. each, and 1 ft. on all sides for wall cases. . . . Multiplier to provide for growth of 25 years (ratio of growth estimated from experience of 6 years, 1896-1902) 12 11 1 1 5 700 55 56 3,000 3,600 1,020 2.34 40 2 28 6 4 5 700 142 128 6,000 9,000 2,575 1.60 17 1 14 3 4 5 660 67 63 3,600 4,800 1,250 1.16 30 11 30 11 2 5 660 159 153 5,400 7,200 2,830 2.68 28 5 28 5 4 5 600 127 132 4,800 7,200 2,415 2.48 The University Library 287 TABLE IV KEQUIREMENTa FOE DEPABTMENTAL BUILDINGS, BASED ON STATISTICS OF THE DEPABTMENTS AND SOGGESTIONS OF DEPARTMENTAL RePKESENTATIVES Assembly room Theater Chapel Departmental club room Rest room for women ■ Class rooms for 60 students (1200 sq. ft. each) . . . Class rooms for 30 students (600 sq. ft. each) Class rooms for 20 students (ca. 400 sq. ft. each). Seminar rooms (ca. 400 sq. ft. each) Instructors' study rooms and offices Editorial rooms, etc Library, reading rooms Library, staclt rooms • Map, chart, and drafting rooms Museum Laboratory Office for Museum and Library Toilet rooms Elevators Deans' offices Corridors, 10 ft. wide Lockers (in basement) Philos'phy Group 2,000'5 600 600 1,200 7,200 "sob 2,400 200 2,400 600' 1,500 300 200'" History Group CO. 4,000 2,000 800 1,200 2,400 !,400 to 13,800 1,600 3,600 800 4,500 2,250 2,750" 400 300"* 2001" caio,66o Classics Group 1,300 2,200 "600 600 1,200 4,800 1,800 1,,300 3,000 3,250 1,000" Modern Language Group 3,840 1,266 1,200 2,400 6,000 to 12,000 2,000 1,600 3,600 200 6,900 6,000 400 300 150™ ca. 6,000 Divinity School 3,750 600 600 2,400 7,200 to 12,000 2,000 2,000 3,600 200 6,000 60016 600 "366 300 '« 200" ca. 7,566 800 300 300 's 1,200 ca. 6,000 TABLE V Facts Concekning the Growth of the Library General Library Philosophy and Pedagogy Political Economy Political Science History Sociology History group total . . . Archaeology Comparative Philology . . . Greek Latin Greek and Latin Classical group total . . floor. 15 Figures in tliese columns denote square feet of floor oe. 16 Of 14-ft. story yielding double floor area in 7-ft. stack 1' In basement. '8 Exclusive of space in basement. W 6X8 on each of four floors. 20 5X6 on five floors. Growth in 5 years (1892-97) 24,56421 3,923 5,392 2,104 4,288 3,410 15,194 405 1,190 1,808 4,219 485 8,107 Average per year 4,913 785 3,039 1,621 Growth in 10 years (1892-1902) 29,6362' 5,612 7,355 3,298 10,481 4,158 25,292 547 1,683 2,762 5,234 10,226 Average per year 2,964 561 2,529 1,022 21 These figures represent the additions made within the period of five and ten years respectively. The Library began in 1892 with about 225,000 volumes, included in three collections, viz., the Baptist Theological Union Library, the Library of the Old University of Chicago, and the Berlin collection. 288 The President's Repoet TABLE Y— Continued Romance . German . . English . . Modern Languages group total Divinity, including Semitics and Comparative Eel. Total " Humanities " with General Library . . . Mathematics Astronomy . . , Chemistry . . . Physics Geology Biology Total Sciences Grand total of growth . Total possessions, 1897. . Total possessions, 1902 . Growth in 5 years (1892-97) 2,492 ■ 4,606 4,412 11,510 8,060 71,358 2,141 518 1,658 947 3,940 7,112 16,316 87,674 ca. 312,674 Average per year 2,302 1,612 14,072 3,263 17,335 Growth in 10 years (1892-1902) 3,097 5,173 6,705 14,975 10,913 96,654 2,814 652 1,891 1,491 4,514 9,904 21,266 117,920 ca. 342,920 Average per year 1,497 1,091 9,665 2,126 11,792 TABLE Vr Cost or Libeast — Foe Puechase of Books, Etc. 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1899 $100,099.22 22 $17,049.68 2,213.15 43.85 $ 184.10 1,279.66 12.00 $1,034.27 608.06 242.% $1,102.26 443.29 266.54 $930.28 450.48 145.26 $802.08 Philosophy . ... 278.23 300.58 $2,257.00 $6,620.96 1,090.42 2,5.30.92 3,962.12 652.98 $1,291.66 $ 327.72 992.91 701.41 1,159.80 234.81 $851.02 $ 561.92 461.74 1,389.34 1,665.60 284.94 $709.83 $ 875.57 529.30 686.26 1,687.04 112.21 $595.74 $ 512.35 695.45 1,121.46 485.81 256.25 $578.81 Political Economy Political Science Sociology 23 $ .470.00 638.78 742.76 1,138.65 Comparative Religion 198.46 $14,857.40 $ 211.96 1,868.64 1,.591.84 3,347.25 $3,416.65 $ 370.26 321.26 470.51 456.10 $4,363.54 $ 243.54 379.62 891.43 723.12 $3,890.38 $ 236.15 241.83 723.38 940.34 $3,071.32 $ 148.29 346.07 384.96 413.46 $3,188.65 $ 280.50 Comparative Philology .... 486.20 394.17 364.60 Gronp total Romance Germanic $7,019.69 $ 2,059.16 4,022.85 4,316.77 $1,618.13 $ 385.46 236.57 860.38 $2,237.71 $2,096.66 324.78 1,421.. 59 $2,141.70 $ 513.81 460.85 1,193.20 $1,292.78 $ 183.23 274.39 747.47 $1,525.47 $ 347.69 314.61 English 781.53 Group total $10,.398.78 $2,119.19 $1,482.41 $636.46 111.03 $3,843.03 $666.54 275.82 $2,167.86 $446.05 112.77 $1,205.09 $502.33 377.15 $1,443.83 Mathematics Astronomy $467.75 397.85 Group total $2,119.19 $747.49 $942.36 $558.82 $879.48 $865.60 22 For 1892-93 accounts are not separate ; this amount includes the amount spent for both the General Library and the Departmental libraries. 23 Sociology includes Anthropology. The Univeksitt Library 289 TABLE YI— Continued 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1899 $ 379.43 1,711.53 139.04 104.49 82.04 $ 244.85 167.69 348.54 102.06 136.97 $ 314.73 223.51 348.49 204.78 131.99 $ 229.36 131.77 324.32 101.73 250.37 $ 151.10 154.16 350.39 102.04 166.87 $ 933.90 225.90 425.61 450.36 159.04 238.60 100.22 191.36 8,878.04 141.22 82.39 157.87 136.55 293.90 162.52 707.24 107.17 252.66 433.83 635.67 263.56 152.03 165.64 205.76 11)0.97 489.36 $9,733.79 $1,105.60 $1,956.09 $1,998.58 $1,200.53 $1,881.10 $2,716.03 50.03 1,532.96 $1,657.62 $1,659.62 48.29 424.60 76.97 $1,021.88 93.51 835.73 10.71 $ 220.83 $ 230.17 36.24 University Extension 526.70 479.30 19.90 704.62 39.27 Systematic Theology 389.47 2,449.24 689.48 490.68 292.10 300.90 2,641.37 950.23 2,218.42 1,272.20 951.30 1,033.42 $3,030.84 $3,399.47 $2,907.90 $1,762.88 $1,243.40 $1,334.32 Commerce and Adm Morgan Park Academy — $ 428.33 $ 765.85 $ 482.79 $ 456.77 $ 329.40 $ 242.47 Total $100,099.22 $73,284.68 $16,608.22 $21,364.43 $17,112.04 $11,773.31 $14,032.43 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 Total by Departments Total by Groups Average No. of Years Averaged $635.10 243.50 300.21 $2,659.83 358.55 196.73 $827.63 517.04 128.58 $25,225.2325 6,391.96 1,636.71 $125,324.4526 $12,532.44 710.21 181.85 10 9 Pedagogy 9 $543.71 $310.66 488.51 563.98 944.71 100.01 $555.28 $ 208.55 845.90 773.14 5,596.28 97.29 $645.62 $ 212.13 404.89 697.77 13,019.11 197.75 $8,028.67 $10,099.86 6,147.90 9,207.04 29,659.12 2,134.70 $1,122.20 683.10 1,023.00 3,295.45 237.18 9 9 9 9 Comparative Religion 9 $2,407.87 $7,521 16 $191.64 285.86 513.34 380.86 $14,531.65 $270.85 608.56 636.72 548.95 $57,248.62 $1,953,19 4,911.64 5,786.81 7,352.29 $217.02 545.73 642.97 816.92 9 Comparative Philology — $373.60 180.46 177.61 9 9 Latin 9 $731.67 $342.48 249.27 634.39 $1,371.70 $196.12 263.56 608.02 $2,065.08 $ 627.61 354.32 1,010.80 $20,003.93 $ 6,752.22 6,501.20 11,574.15 $ 750.24 722.35 1,286.01 9 9 English 9 $1,226.14 $1,067.70 $1,992.73 $24,827.57 2* The different departments of the Divinity School are combined for the year 1893-99, separate accounts not hav- ing been kept. 25 Total for nine years, omitting 1892-93. 26 Total for ten years; see also footnote 22. 290 The Peesident's Report TABLE \I — Continued 1899-190O 1900-1901 1901-1902 Total by Departments Total by Groups Average No. of Years Averaged $353.74 261.50 $543.03 341.29 $380.60 411.93 $6,115.69 2,289.34 $679.52 254.37 9 Astronomy 9 $615.24 $253.72 216.15 $884.32 $416.15 280.81 579.22 112.00 244.22 $792.53 $375.91 308.40 1,100.30 128.. 58 264.41 493.. 53 212.13 204.20 427.44 $8,405.03 $3,299.15 3,419.92 $3,299.15 3,419.92 3,615.91 1,306.04 1,435.91 493.53 1,976.02 1,572.99 3,262.93 9,121.76 $366.57 379.99 4.51.98 163.25 179.46 246.76 219.55 194.77 407.86 3,040.58 9 9 8 8 8 2 159.64 126.52 208.55 160.31 488.35 9 9 8 3 $286.16 $1,792.65 63.45 183.40 60.61 $2,830.59 $1,302.55 293.35 73.39 $22,785.09 $1,366.00 7,980.90 362.07 4,503.91 182.26 $683.00 997.61 45.25 750.65 20.25 171.03 73.41 182.42 135.21 636.84 37.09 122.74 1,511.15 2 $7,980.90 362.07 8 8 University Extension 6 10.29 209.42 99.27 215.61 132.60 345.72 25.82 111.34 25.12 140.51 34.66 216.36 1.57.29 753.49 48,37 128.15 182.26 513.09 220.23 547.26 405.65 5,731.64 74.19 368.23 9,066.94 9 163.16 86.30 115.29 115.76 200.56 3 3 Systematic Theology 3 3 9 2 128.74 3 6 $809.81 $1,139.73 $239.14 $1,298.83 $700.66 .95 358.19 $16,927.23 $939.80 .95 3,608.73 Commerce and Adm $469.90 .47 400.97 2 2 Morgan Park Academy .... 124«.12 269.81 9 Total $7,973.69 $18,543.08 $28,417.18 $309,214.28 THE UNIVEESITY PRESS To the President of the University: Sir : I submit herewith a report on the University Press for the ten years ending June 30, 1902: I. ORIGIN AND ORGANIZATION In the development of a great institution of learning publication of the literary and scientific contributions of members of the teaching staff has always been fraught with grave problems, because of the difficulty in securing adequate financial assistance to carry on even the more important undertakings. The experience of those engaged in the task of securing funds for educational purposes uniformly has been that it is vastly more easy to interest capital in a building needed for a college or university than it is to secm-e support for the endowment of instruction; and the question of making available to students in general the results of scientific research has been equally serious. As a consequence, much scientific material in America has remained unpublished, because it has not been possible to interest capital in the development of a business organization adequate to place scientific books and periodicals in the regular trade channels with profit. The idea of a press controlled by a university was first worked out in England, and the great example of what may be accomplished is found at Oxford, where a mammoth institution has grown up, its origin dating back to the fifteenth century. In its scope it covers the entire field of printing and publishing. The varied processes of engraving, lithographing, printing, etc., are conducted, printing materials manufactured, and the finished product distributed or sold. In America, however, the idea has been slow of development and until very recently the scientific output of our institutions of learning has been left to commercial houses under uncertain and changing arrangements. That a University Press should form an integral part of the University of Chicago was prominent in the minds of the founders at an early stage in the organization of the institution. The possibility of combining the large volume of miscellaneous printing required by such an institution with the work of issuing its several scientific periodicals already undertaken furnished a foundation on which to build. Prom this beginning it was hoped that it might be possible to develop an organization which would care both for the circulation of its magazines and for the distribution of the official documents of the University, as well as for the sale of books and pamphlets, the publication of which was in contemplation. No published plans, however, are found for this work prior to the opening of the University in 1892. In the announcement of the several Bulletins bearing on the organization of the University of Chicago one was to be devoted to The University Press, but the document was never issued, and the first outline in printed form of an organization is found in a collation of the statutes of the University, bearing date of June 27, 1893,^ embodying the actions of the Trustees prior thereto. At the close of the fiscal year 1892-93 plans of organization had been adopted which recog- nized The University Press as one of the five Divisions of the University, with separate departments of Manufacturing, Publication, Purchase, and Ketail. Provision was made for the general management to be in the hands of a Director, with a Board of Administration appointed from the University Faculties. While plans were being matured for the opening ^Annual Register of the University of Chicago, 1892-93, pp. 3-8. 291 292 The President's Repoet of the University, its bulletins and miscellaneous announcements- were parceled out to various commercial printing firms, generally bearing, however, the imprint of " The University of Chicago Press." The earliest recommendation looking toward the organization of The University Press was made April 11, 1892, when a communication was presented to the Board of Trustees from Messrs. D. C. Heath & Co., of Boston, outlining a plan of co-operation between the University of Chicago and a printing and publishing house to be incorporated on a separate basis, the same to be known as The University of Chicago Press. The proposition contemplated that the new corporation should provide a printing plant adequately equipped, a bookstore at the University, and an organization for the purchase of library books, and laboratory supplies and equipment. It was fui'ther stipulated that the new coi-poration should be the exclusive agent of the University in all matters of printing, publishing, and piu-chasing. At a meeting of the Board of Trustees of the University held May 17, 1892, the proposition was accepted, and a contract based thereon was authorized and afterward duly executed between the parties, its agreements being made effective fi-om and after July 1, 1892, The University of Chicago Press in the meantime having been incorporated under the laws of the state of Illinois. Business was conducted under this agi-eement until July 1, 1894, at which time, by mutual consent, the contract was canceled as of that date, and the transactions thereafter were conducted by the University as its directly administered University Press, its imprint continuing to be " The University of Chicago Press." II. SCOPE AND MANAGEMENT I, PERIOD OF PRIVATE OWNERSHIP (1892-93 AND 1893-94) During the first fiscal year the administrative organization was as follows: Director — Daniel C. Heath; members of the Board of Administration — President William R. Harper, Chairman; Recorder Charles R. Henderson, Secretary; and Messrs. Eri B. Hulbert, J. Laurence Laughlin, Henry H. Donaldson, Ira M. Price, and Francis A. Blackburn. During the first year special attention was given to the organization of the manufacturing plant and to the retail sale of books and stationery. The operations of the manufactm'ing plant were conducted in connection with the firm of R. R. Donnelley & Sons Co., at IM Monroe street, and temporary quarters for the Purchase and Retail Department were provided in Cobb Lecture Hall, Fifty-eighth street and Ellis avenue. At the beginning of the second year, July 1, 1893, Director Heath found it impossible to continue his active connection with the affairs of The University Press, and Mr. Charles W. Chase was appointed Vice-Director. The Administrative Board, with the exception of the Recorder, who was succeeded by Mr. Howard B. Grose, was continued. During the first half of the second year, with the increasing volume of business, it became apparent that the plans which had been made for carrying on the manufacturing interests were inadequate. From the editorial standpoint it was found to be a great inconvenience to have the mechanical department so far from the University, and, looking into the future, it was evident that The University Press, as an institution, could not be successfully operated without closer contact with the University itself. The situation was presented to the Board of Trustees by its Committee on Organization and Faculties January 30, 1894. After a discussion extending over several weeks, a new proposition was made and accepted by the Board of Trustees April 3, 1894, providing for the purchase of the equipment and stock of The University of Chicago Press and for the termination of its business as a private corporation. 2 All documents issued prior to July 1, 1892, are now out of print. The University Pkess 293 Pending organization under the direct control of the University, the affairs were in the hands of a special committee composed of Messrs. William K. Harper, Henry A. Kust, and Edward Goodman. II. PERIOD OF UNIVERSITY OWNERSHIP (1894-95 TO 1901-2) The assumption of financial responsibihty on the part of the University resulted in an enlargement of the field of activities anticipated by few of those interested in the undertaking early in its inception. The manufacturing plant, which consisted largely of body type, with a small job equipment, was transferred from the down-town district to the University Quad- rangles and located in the temporary gymnasium and library building near the corner of Fifty- seventh street and Lexington avenue. As occasion demanded, the equipment was increased, so that in a short time all composition was done at first hand. Mr. Charles W. Chase was advanced from the position of Vice-Director to that of Director, dating from July 1, 1894, which position he held for the succeeding two years. The personnel of the Administrative Board during this period was as follows: President William K. Harper, Chairman; Kecorder Howard B. Grose, Secretary; and Messrs. Eri B. Hulbert, J. Laurence Laughlin, Henry H. Donaldson, Ira M. Price, and Francis A. Blackburn. Kecorder Howard B. Grose, as Secretary of the Board, was succeeded by Mr. George S. Goodspeed during 1894-95. The field of the Purchase and Retail Department was enlarged, and special attention was given to the method of procuring library books. In the spring of 1896 Director Chase was obliged by ill-health to resign his position, and was succeeded by Mr. Hazlitt Alva Cuppy. During Mr. Cuppy's administration, which extended over the fiscal year 1896-97 and a portion of the following year, the Hnes of work already organized were developed, special efforts being given toward increasing the circulation of the several departmental joui-nals which had been established. Under Mr. Cuppy's guid- ance a substantial advertising patronage was secured, which has since enjoyed material increase. With the enlarging field of the journals it was found necessary to provide more adequate office room, and administrative quarters were assigned to The University Press in the Hull Botanical Laboratory, near the corner of Fifty-seventh street and Lexington avenue. During the year 1896-97 the Administrative Board was made up as follows: President William E. Harper, Chairman; Recorder George S. Goodspeed, Secretary; and Messrs. Hazlitt Alva Cuppy, J. Laurence Laughlin, Thomas C. Chamberlin, John M. Coulter, Albion W. Small, George E. Hale, Charles H. Thurber, Eri B. Hulbert, Henry H. Donaldson, Francis A. Black- burn, Ira M. Price, and Ernst Freund. The enlargement of the Board was brought about by the increase in the number of departmental journals. The membership remained the same during 1897-98 and 1898-99, with the one change in the Directorship of The Press. In the spring of 1898 Mr. Cuppy resigned his position as Director of The University Press, and was succeeded by Mr. Ned Arden Flood, who held the position until January, 1900. Dur- ing Mr. Flood's connection with The Press special attention was given to perfecting the details of the various lines of organization, with emphasis on a revision of the system of accounting. A representative was employed whose entire time was given to the interests of the advertising department of the several journals, and it may be said that the faithful work of Mr. Flood opened the field for the more extensive enterprises which have since been undertaken. In January, 1900, Mr. Flood was succeeded by the present Director. Since that time attention has been given especially to the publishing interests of The Press, to perfecting the system of purchasing laboratory supphes and equipment, and to the differentiation of the various lines of work operating on separate bases. In the spring of 1900 several members of the Administrative Board resigned, making new appointments necessary. Since July 1, 1900, the Board has been constituted as follows: 294 The President's Kepokt President William K. Harper, Chairman; the Recorder, ex officio, as Secretary; the Director of The University Press, ex officio; and Messrs. Thomas C. Chamberlin, John M. Coulter, J. Laurence Laughlin, Albion W. Small, George E. Hale, Shailer Mathews, George E. Vincent, James R. Angell, Ernst Freimd, and Francis W. Shepardson. III. DEVELOPMENT OF THE WORK I. GENERAL Before entering upon a detailed statement of the operations of the several departments of The University Press, as they exist at the present time, it will be of interest to survey the results of the work for the ten years as a whole. Brief mention has been made above of the plans developed under private control during the first two years of the University's existence. The expenses to the University of the opera- tions of the period amounted to 1104,523.72. The income from appropriations and receipts amounted to 194,243.55, which left a deficit of $10,280.17. Dming this time very little attention was given to the development of a publishing organization. The routine printing of the Uni- versity, and other manufacturing interests, together with the collection of the subscriptions of five periodicals, which had been undertaken, and the purchasing of library books and labora- tory supplies and equipment, employed the energies of those engaged in the work. It was left for the management under University control to solve the difficult problems of publishing which must be the ultimate aim of a University Press. At the beginning of the third year, July 1, 1894, when the University assumed ovmership of The University Press, the valuation of its properties was estimated at about $19,000. This included the plant of the mechanical department, a stock of books and stationery, and the publication rights in the few books and journals which had been undertaken. Under the new conditions the work of the next two years was largely experimental, as had been that of the first two years, and, as may have been expected, the operations were conducted at a financial loss. The years 1896-97 and 1897-98 mark a development in organization, but while great advance was made in effectiveness, financial conditions did not improve. At the close of the year 1898-99 the expenses had reached $167,290.95, with receipts amounting to $162,955.84, leaving a deficit for the single year of $4,335.11. At this point the adoption of certain econo- mies in operation brought about a marked improvement in the financial showing for the first half of the next year, with the result that the year ending June 30, 1900, showed a net gain of $2,553.12, the receipts for the period being $167,907.47, with expenses amounting to $165,354.35. Since that date it has been possible to maintain a creditable financial record, and the year ending June 30, 1902, resulted in a net gain of $3,685.16. The volume of business was consid- erable, the receipts being $242,994.17, with expenses amounting to $239,309.01. The following comparative statement will be of interest as showing the volume of business and financial outcome for the past four years : TABLE I Year Receipts Expenses BesultB 1898-1899 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 $162,955.84 167,907.47 158,681.80 242,994.17 $167,290.95 165,454.35 157,512.06 239,-309.01 $4,335.11 loss 2,453.12 gain 1,169.74 gain 3,685.16 gain The Univeesity Press 295 The status of the business as a whole may be ascertained from the following statements for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1902: TABLE II Expenses and Eaenings foe the Yeae Ending June 30, 1902 Expenses : Inventory June 30, 1901 $19,773.58 Work in progress June 30, 1901 2,844.36 Manufacturing plant depreciation - - 1,169.08 Purchases, stock, merchandise, equipment, etc. 136,968.10 Pay-roll 35,641.86 General expense 41,880.79 Rent - . . 625.14 Repairs 140.00 Heat 256.10 Gain - 3,685.16 Earnings : From University Journals $36,978.72 From University Departments 108,284.94 Inventory work in progress 6,362 . 89 From sundry accounts 63,449.07 Inventories merchandise and stock - . - 27,908.55 1242,984.17 $242,984.17 TABLE III Assets and Liabilities June 30, 1902 Assets: Cash $ 1,330.73 Inventory stock, Retail Department 13,708.21 Manufacturing Department 10,521.77 Inventory stock, Manufacturing Department 2,621-.99 Inventory work in progress, Manufacturing Department .... 6,362.89 Furniture 797.74 Inventory stock. Publishing Department 11,578.35 Chicago Post-Offlce deposit - . . . 200.00 Accounts receivable 15,363.80 Liabilities : The University of Chicago' $62,485.48 S62,485.48 $62,485.48 It is natural to expect in developing any new business undertaking that satisfactory organization will be reached only through a series of readjustments. This has been especially true in the history of The University Press, and definite policy, so far as it exists at present, is the result of experience. Authority for the existing management of affairs is found in the Constitution, which is a formulation of enactments of the Board of Trustees. The document is intended as a guide in conducting the business and has been constructed to meet conditions as they have arisen. The text of the Constitution is as follows: ARTICLE I 1. The general organization of the work of The University of Chicago Press shall be as follows: A. Manufacturing Department. To include: a) Composition and press work at first hand. b) Composition and press work at second hand. c) The manufacturing of books, stationery, etc. d) Purchase of stock, supplies, and necessary additions to plant. 3 In an independent business the account known as The Unirersity of Chicago would be divided in Capital, Profit and Loss, and Accounts Payable. 296 The Peesident's Kepoet B. The Publication Department. To include: a) The publication of the University journals. 6) The publication of all University literature, e. g., the Register, Circular of Information, etc. c) The publication of books, pamphlets, etc. d) The publication of books, pamphlets, or periodicals for others. C. Purchase and Retail Department. To include: a) The purchase and sale of books for the retail trade. 6) The purchase and delivery of books for the general and departmental libraries. c) The purchase and delivery of stationery and supplies for the oflSces and Departments of the University. d) The purchase and delivery of permanent laboratory equipment, specimens, etc., and of cur- rent laboratory supplies. AETICLE II 1. All orders and purchases falling within the scope of Article I shall be made in the name of the University of Chicago. 2. AJl assistants and employees necessary for carrying on the work as specified in Article I and as indicated in Schedules A, B, C, and D, attached hereto, shall be employed by the Director with the consent and approval of the President of the University. ABTIOLE III 1. The following regulations shall be established for the conduct of the Manufacturing Department : A. It shall be understood, for all work involving expense to the University, that a special appro- priation shall be made covering the cost of the same, and that no copy shall be accepted or work undertaken to be charged to any department that is not accompanied by the proper requisition, which requisition shall be signed by the Secretary of the University and shall state specifically the Department or appropriation to which the job of work is to be charged. B. For all University work a separate bill for each job shall be given indicating to which Depart- ment it is to be charged. C. The price of work on all jobs shall be reckoned to include (a) the actual cost of the same, (6) the salaries of the superintendent and bookkeeper of the Manufacturing Department, after which 18 per cent, shall be added to the work actually done in connection with the Press plant (8 per cent, of the same being the proportionate percentage of the 40 per cent, of the gen- eral salaries and 10 per cent, of the same being for the maintenance of the Manufacturing Department), and further that 10 per cent, be added to the outside cost on each job (8 per cent, being the proportionate percentage of the general salaries and 2 per cent, for general expense). D. A finished copy of every job shall be preserved in the office of The Press, and every job shall bear an ofiice number. E. Contracts for presswork, binding, etc., shall be made upon a basis of bids submitted to the Director. F. The wages of compositors and other workmen in this department shall be paid weekly. G. Of the general salaries as per Schedule A, hereunto attached, 40 per cent, shall be charged to this Department, together with all the special salaries of the superintendent and bookkeeper of the Manufacturing Department, and 10 per cent, of the bill clerk. H. A monthly report of the business shall be submitted to the President of the University. ARTICLE IV 1. The following regulations shall be established for the conduct of the Publication Department : A. It shall be understood that this department shall be responsible for the business management of the various University journals and for diligent and active efforts, in connection with the editors of the same, to increase the circulation and advertising patronage of each ; and further The Univeesity Press 297 that this department shall be responsible for the business management of all publication enter- prises which may be entered into from time to time. B. Copyrights shall be procured by the Director in the name of the University of Chicago. C. Of the general salaries as per Schedule A, hereunto attached, 40 per cent, together with the salaries of the subscription clerks and advertising representatives, and 10 per cent, of the sal- ary of the bill clerk shall be charged to this department. D. A monthly report of the business shall be submitted to the President of the University. ARTICLE V 1. The following regulations shall be established for the conduct of the Purchase and Retail Department : A. The Director shall have authority to order such books, stationery, supplies and equipment as in his judgment are needed from time to time to supply the retail trade. B. In general the selling price of books to the retail trade shall be 12 per cent, above the cost price, the latter to include transportation charges. C. Purchases to be charged to any department of the University shall be made in accordance with regulations specified from time to time, and it shall be understood that books for the general and departmental libraries, and equipment and supplies for the laboratories, and supplies for the offices and various departments, shall be billed at an increase of 5 per cent, over the cost price, the latter to include transportation charges. D. Of the general salaries as per Schedule A, hereunto attached, together with the salary of the chief clerk of the Purchase and Retail Department, and all other special salaries as per Schedule D, hereunto attached, and 20 per cent, of the salary of the bill clerk, shall be charged to this department. E. A monthly report of the business shall be submitted to the President of the University. GENERAL AND SPECIAL SALARIES Schedule A (General Salaries) The Director. First stenographer. Head bookkeeper. Second stenographer. Assistant bookkeeper. Shipping and mailing clerk. Schedule B (Special Manufacturiog Department Salaries) Superintendent. Bill clerk, 10 per cent. Record keeper. Foreman and the regular weekly pay-roll of plant employees. Schedule C (Special Publication Department Salaries) Subscription clerks. Bill clerk, 10 per cent. Advertising representatives. Schedule D (Special Retail and Purchase Department Salaries) Chief clerk. Bill clerk, 10 per cent. Assistant clerk. Foreign periodical expert. Messenger. Purchasing agent for laboratory supplies and equipment. II. MANXTFACTrrEING DEPARTMENT The valuation of the equipment of the Manufacturing Department July 1, 1894, amoimted to 112,364.65. Subsequent purchases made to June 30, 1902, brought the total amount of the expenditures up to $20,732.23. Deductions v^ere made during the time to profit and loss on 298 The President's Kepoet account of depreciation, etc., so that at the close of the decennium the inventory shows a net valuation of $10,521.77. The equipment is represented largely in the composing-room, where a most complete outfit has been collected. The main dress of the body letter is old style, the fonts of different sizes approximating the following weights: 12 point, 1,000 poimds; 11 point, 8,000 pounds; 10 point, 10,000 potmds; 9 point, 2,000 pounds; 8 point, 3,000 pounds, and 6 point, 3,000 pounds. In addition should be mentioned a smaller dress of modern body type, amounting, in the aggregate of the several sizes, to about 8,000 pounds. The plant is provided also with large fonts of Greek in five sizes, Hebrew in two sizes, Nesto- rian Syriac, Arabic, Ethiopic, etc., and with many special mathematical, astronomical, paleo- graphic, and linguistic signs and accents. Through the latter means The University Press has made a record for its ability to produce work impossible in almost any other printing plant in the West. Preparatory to executing the mechanical work in connection with the Decennial Publications of the University, plans are being made to lay the foundation for a complete diess of modern body type, and sufficient quantities have been purchased to meet the immediate needs of the work. The following statements show the operations of the Department since the responsibility for the same was assumed by the University: table it Statement of Oeiginal Cost or Manufacturing Plant and Additions Theeeto 1894, May 15, Original purchase ---------- $12,364.69 May 15 to June 30, 1894 --...-.--- 387.79 Fiscal year 1894-1895 ..-..- 494.83 1895-1896 --.-_----- 1,585.66 1896-1897 ----------- 1,514.37 1897-1898 ---------- 1,062.09 1898-1899 ----------- 713.92 1899-1900 ---------- 448.85 1900-1901 ----------- 224.98 1901-1902 -..-.----- 1,935.05 $20,732.23 Deductions: By charge to "profit and loss" account depreciation: June 30, 1899 - - - - - . . - 11,812.33 « 1900 ------------ 1,675.98 « 1901 ------- - 1,083.98 " 1902 __.---- 1,169.08 By charge to capital account June 30, 1901 ------- 4,469.09 810,210.46 1902, June 30, inventory - - - 810,521.77 TABLE V Statement of Peinting Stock on Hand and Work in Peogeess Juiii 1 Each Yeak 1894, July 1, inventory - - - - $ 845.84 1895 " " - . - - 3,422.91 1896 " ".---- 6,598.60 1897 " " . - - - 6,899.07 1898 " " - ^ - - - 12,024.34 1899 " " - - - - 9,041.86 1900 " ------ 13,264.72 1901 " " . - - - 5,187.30 1902 " « 8,829.27 The University Press 299 TABLE VI Summary of Pkofit and Loss Period Profit Loss May 15, 1894, to June 30, 1895 Fiscal vear 1895-1896 |i,405.2i 2,296.95 "276.44 1,156.88 $2,414.49 2,251.09 " " 1896-1897 " " 1897-1898 " " 1898-1899 3,906.40 " " 1899 1900 9.14 " " 1900-1901 " " 1901-1902 Total $5,135.48 $8,581.12 Net loss 3,445.64 TABLE VII Statement of Receipts, Expenses and Resdlts, 1900-1 and 1901-2 Year Receipts Expenses Restilts 1900-1901 $68,045.87 90,543.93 $67,769.43 89,387.05 $ 276.44 gciin 1901-1902 1,156.88 " III. PUBLICATION DEPARTMENT Prior to July 1, 1900, no attempt had been made toward the establishment of a PubHcation Department on a separate basis. Sales had been carried on through the Purchase and Ketail Department, but the arrangement was found to be extremely unsatisfactory. During the year 1900-1901 the publication business, as such, was divorced from the Purchase and Retail Depart- ment and put under separate management. The wisdom of this procedure has been demon- strated, and it is believed, with the plans which are now being followed, that the Department will become one of the most important lines of activity yet entered upon. While the financial gain of the past two years has not been great, it shows the possibilities which lie in the field of the Department. It must always be true that much of the material published by a University Press will not be self-sustaining from a financial standpoint. The responsi- bility for issuing publications of this sort must always rest with the University itself, and the problem of The University Press will be that of distributing in the most economical way. The first step in the organization of the Department was the preparation of a catalogue announcing the titles of all books previously issued. This appeared February 1, 1901. Many of the more recently issued books will show a profit, and it is probable that the entire investment in separate books and pamphlets made up to this time can be cared for eventually without financial loss to the University. The following statement shows the output of books and pamphlets by fiscal years, begin- ning July 1, 1892 : TABLE VIII 1892-1893 ------ 2 1893-1894 ----- 3 1894-1895 - - - - - - 11 1895-1896 ----- 8 1896-1897 ------ 31 1897-1898 ----- 27 1898-1899 ------ 22 1899-1900 - - - - - 28 1900-1901 ------ 28 1901-1902 - - - - - 40 Total ------ 200 300 The President's Eepoet The following conspectus of the output by allied groups will be of interest : TABLE IX Philosophy and Psychology -----, -.10 Education ----.--_..- 4^ Theology and Religion --._-..__ 7 Political Economy, Political Science, and Sociology - - - 31 History -----_--._. .7 Languages and Literatures -------- 44 Natural Sciences ---------- 58 Miscellaneous ----- 2 Total ------------ 200 A comparative statement of the financial results of the last two years is shown in the fol- TABLE X lowing table : Year Receipts Expenses Results 1900-1901 1901-1902 $ 8,861.93 17,862.62 S 8,369.77 17,423.38 1492.16 gain 439 24 " The largest undertaking yet entered upon by The University Press in connection with its Publication Department is a series of volumes to be issued for the University in commemoration of the completion of the first ten years of academic work. These volumes, annoimced as the Decennial Publications of the University of Chicago, are authorized by special action of the Board of Trustees, and edited by a committee of the Faculty, of which Professor Edward Capps is the chairman. The plans contemplate two series of cloth-bound books; the first quarto, the second octavo. The First Series includes two volumes of Eeports and eight volumes of Inves- tigations, the latter consisting of a collection of articles representing the work of research of the several Departments of the University organized during the decennium. The Second Series includes eighteen separate volumes, embodying original research and consisting of systematic treatises, unpublished documents, and collections of articles on allied subjects. Preprints from Vols. VII and IX, respectively (First Series), have recently appeared, namely, " On the Text of Chaucer's Parlement of Foules," by Eleanor Prescott Hammond, and "The Velocity of Light," by Professor Albert A. Michelson. The work as a whole is well under way, and will probably extend over several years, involving an expenditure, including the cost of manufacturing and publication, of about $75,000. The expense of the First Series will probably represent a direct contribution of the University, as it is not expected that the general sales of the volumes will be large. The books of the Second Series, however, in almost every instance, have a special constituency to which they appeal, and the sales of these are expected to reimburse the University for a large portion of the total expenditure involved in carrying out the plans. An important line of work connected with the Publication Department lies in the field of the departmental periodicals. These journals have formed one of the chief features of the Press from the beginning, the aggregate number of pages in all having averaged about eight thousand per year. The work includes at present the management of the subscription and advertising departments of ten periodicals and one quarterly magazine published on contract. During the first fiscal year publication of the following journals was undertaken : the Journal of Political Economy, the Journal of Geology, the American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures {continuing Hebraica), the Biblical World, and the University The University Peess 301 Extension World. The list was continued during the second year, 1893-94, and during 1894^95 the American Journal of Sociology and the Astrophysical Journal were estabhshed. During this year the University Extension World was discontinued. In 1895-96 publication of the School Review, the Botanical Gazette, and the American Journal of Theology was inaugu- rated, together with Terrestrial Magnetism, which was published for one year. Since that date the list of journals has remained the same, with the addition of a series of " Constructive Bible Studies" which was issued during 1899-1900. During this year the publication of the Manual Training Magazine, a quarterly, was assumed on contract. While allowances for meeting the expenses of the journals have been liberal, it has been found impossible, with the enlarging scope, to keep them within their several appropriations, and in this connection it is to be said that The University Press has contributed materially toward the administrative support of the journals, aside from carrying its other financial bur- dens. The following figures will be of interest in this connection: TABLE XI Year Appropriation Cost Overcharge Receipts Excess Cost over Receipts 1898-1899 $38,600.00 40,100.00 39,600.00 41,100.00 $40,671.92 40,673.73 42,403.04 46,358.92 $2,071.92 573.73 2,803.04 5,258.92 $17,815.42 17,670.01 23,795.82 24,136.38 $22,856.50 23,003.72 1899-1900 1900-1901 18,607.22 22,222.54 1901-1902 Aside from the activities, already noted, of the Publication Department, the handling of University Extension Syllabi, Reading Lists, Tracts, Circulars, etc., has formed an important feature of the business. The publications of the University Extension Division now number more than one htmdred and fifty titles, and the work connected therewith has to do with the care of the stock, the shipping of syllabi on special orders to University Extension lecture centers, the collection of all moneys due, etc. Another important feature is the handling of all official documents of the University. This list now includes the miscellaneous circulars and departmental programs, the President's Report, the Annual Register, the University Record, the Weekly Calendar, the Bulletin of Information, the Circular of Information, and the Announcements. The President's Report has been published in two volmnes as follows : TABLE XII 1897-98 ------ viii -|- 261 pages 1898-99 - - - - - - xl -(- 224 " The Annual Register has been published as follows: TABLE xni 1892-93 vii -|- 244 pages 1893-94 - - - - - - vii -I- 315 " 1894-95 - - - - - - vii -1-399 " 1895-96 - - - - - - vii 4- 440 " 1896-97 - - - - - - vii -H 444 " 1897-98 ------ viii -|- 480 " 1898-99 ------ viii -f- 501 " 1899-00 ------ viii + 471 " 1900-01 ------ viii -I- 490 " 1901-02 --.--- viii 4- 543 " 302 The Pkesident's Eepoet The University Record, edited by the Recorder of the University, is published monthly. The Weekly Calendar, edited by the Recorder of the University, is published forty-five times a year during the scholastic sessions. The Bulletin of Information, edited by the Recorder of the University, is published sis times a year. The Circular of Information, edited by the Recorder of the University, is published five times a year. The Announcements, edited by the Recorder of the University, is published eight times a year. IV. PURCHASE AND EETAIL DEPARTMENT Through the Purchase and Retail Department all purchases of library books and labora- tory supplies and equipment, are negotiated, and stationery and office supplies for the various Departments of the University are furnished. A book and stationery store for the convenience of patrons is maintained, and a depository for laboratory supplies is conducted, although goods are never sold through the latter agency. The following statements show the results of the operations of the Department for the period covered by University control: TABLE XIV Statement of the Condition of the Stock peoji Jdly 1, 1894, to July 1, 1902 July 1, 1894, inventory - - - - $7,009.92 1895, 1896, 1897, 1898, 1899, 1900, 1901, 1902, 8,410.24 10,450.59 7,754.73 9,163.94 9,091.00 11,550.14 10,634.70 14,505.95 TABLE XV Summary of Peofit and Loss Period Profit Loss May 15 1894 to June 30, 1895 $1,608.78 3,522.29 2,868 .'ii 911.46 1,718.76 Fiscal year, 1895-96 " " 1896-97 $4,504.49 " " 1897-98 694.52 " " 1898-99 44.93 " " 1899-00 " " 1900-01 " " 1901-02 Totals $10,630.00 $5,243.94 Net profit $5,386.06 The experience of the past three years demonstrates conclusively that it is possible to operate the Department at a profit. Should the present arrangement be continued, however, it will be necessary for one portion of the business to contribute practically the entire administra- tive support to the other line, which is distinctly different, namely, the administration of the work connected with the distribution of laboratory supplies and equipment. In order that the results of these two lines may be differentiated, it has been thought wise to arrange for a division The University Press 303 of the Department into two operating upon separate bases. The arrangement will provide for the Retail Department, which will retain the business connected with the retailing of books and stationery and the purchase of library books, and for the Laboratory Supply Department, which will have charge of the purchase and distribution among the laboratories of all supplies and equipment. IV. CONCLUSION In a report of this character many of the details which have entered into the history of the organization must of necessity be omitted. It is fair to say, however, that The Press has already demonstrated its value as a factor in the development of the University. Much has been accomplished, and much remains to be accomplished. The generous support which has been extended to the undertaking gives ground for the belief that the foiinders of the University planned well when this featiure of the new institution was provided; and we believe that The University Press is only on the threshold of its usefulness to the scholastic world. At the close of the first decennium the management is looking forward to the fulfilment of plans which will provide for the housing of the several departments under one roof. A fireproof bmlding, costing 1110,000, is nearing completion at the corner of Ellis avenue and Fifty -eighth street, which will eventually be devoted entirely to the interests of publishing. The basement and the first and fourth floors will be occupied immediately, while the second and third floors will be temporarily utilized for other University purposes. The space alloted to The Press in the new structxire will provide only for immediate necessities. The whole building will be needed very soon to provide retail, stock, and administrative quarters, and for an enlargement of the mechanical equipment, so that all manufacturing excepting photo-engraving, lithogi'aph- ing, electrotyping, and edition bookbinding may be executed. Looking into the not far distant future, it is to be expected that all of these activities will be entered upon, together with under- taking to manufacture some materials and equipments, as, for example, printing inks and, possibly, founding the type needed in the work. An immediate investment to the extent of 125,000 is contemplated, which amount, in addition to the present plant, will provide typesetting machines and book presses of the latest invention, folding, stitching, and sewing machines for book work, new dresses of job and body type, and an equipment for doing job bookbinding and library repairing. An important need of The University Press remains to be cared for, namely, a working capital of sufficient magnitude to enable the management to conduct the growing business without the necessity of asking credit beyond the terms ordinarily granted business houses, and without embarrassment to the University budget appropriations. With a definite working capital it will be possible for the aflPairs to be conducted at a material saving; and, with the situation met and adjusted. The University Press is in a position to go on to even greater things than have been accomplished in the past. Respectfully submitted, Newman Millee, Director. THE UNIVERSITY EXTENSION DIVISION THE LECTUKE-STUDY DEPARTMENT To the President of the University : Sir: I submit herewith a report of the work of the Lecture-Study Department of the Uni- versity Extension Division for the period 1892-1902. The first official announcement of the contemplated work of the University Extension Division was made by the University in Bulletin No. 6, issued in Jime, 1892, as foUows: To provide instruction for those who for social or economic reasons cannot attend in its class- rooms is a legitimate and necessary part of the work of every university. To make no effort in this direction is to neglect a promising opportunity for building up the university itself, and at the same time to fall short of performing a duty which from the very necessities of the case is incumbent upon the university. It is conceded by all that certain intellectual work among the people at large is desirable; those who believe in the wide diffusion of knowledge regard it as necessary; all are pleased to see that it is demanded. This work, while it must be in a good sense popular, must also be sys- tematic in form and scientific in spirit; and to be such it must be done under the direction of a university, by men who have had scientific training. For the sake of the work it should in every instance come directly from the university, that thus 1. There may be a proper guarantee of its quality. 2. Character may be given it. 3. Continuity may be assured. i. Suitable credit may be accorded. The doing of the work by the university will 1. Do much to break down the prejudice which so widely prevails against an educated aristocracy. 2. Give to a great constituency that which is their just right and due. 3. Establish influences from which much may be expected directly for the university. i. Bring inspiration to both professor and pupil in college and university. 5. Bring the university into direct contact with human life and activity. In accordance with an announcement issued in the same Bulletin, the work of the Lecture- Study Department was to consist of instruction given by means of lectures, classes, and written exercises. The method of teaching was copied after that of the Syndicates for the Extension of University Teaching organized in connection with the English universities, which has since become familiar in this country, consisting of: 1. Lecture studies given in courses of six or twelve. "These are intended rather to interest the student in the work and to inspire him to study than to furnish information." 2. The class held at the beginning or close of each lecture, during which the instructor dwells upon points suggested in weekly exercises, explains difficulties or answers questions raised by members of the class. 3. The syllabus, which gives a brief outline of the subject for the guidance of the student and furnishes references to the principal authorities to be consulted. 4. The written exercises in connection with each lecture, which are intended not as an examination, but rather to lead the student into scholarly methods. 5. The examination given at the close of the course, which is open only to those who have satisfied the instructor in the matter of attendance at the lecture studies and classes and in the performance of the required number of weekly exercises. In accordance with this method, there have been delivered during the ten years closing June 30, 1902, 1,326 coiu'ses of six lecture studies each, in 368 centers in 21 different states. Of 304 The Univeesity Extension Division 305 these 391 courses have been given in the city of Chicago and 356 in the state of Illinois, outside of Chicago. Other states in which one hundred or more courses have been delivered are: Ohio, 105; Iowa, 103; Michigan, 101; Indiana, 100. The coiu-ses are classified by departments in Table B, which is appended to this report. As was to have been expected, the Department of English Language and Literattu-e leads with a total of 367 courses; Sociology and Anthropology is a close second, with 827; History, 260; Biblical Literature in English, 138. The statistics for the number of centers as given above is deceptive, in that University Extension work in any particular community may have been, and in many instances has been, done by different organi- zations, and hence while the report credits the work to the organization under the auspices of which it was done, this on the surface would appear to multiply unnecessarily the number of centers. Table D contains statistics of the number of courses given by each lecturer. During this period courses of lectures have been given by ninety-one different men, but it is observed that one-third of the total number of courses has been given by three men, and that more than 95 per cent, of the total has been given by men devoting all of their time to University Extension work during the period in which their courses were in progress. The average attendance at the lecture courses for the ten years is 272,967 ; or, in other words, the average number of people attending these courses each year has been 27,296. The total number of admissions, as reported, is 1,637,802. During this period syllabi for one hundred and fifty-seven different courses have been published. Seven hundred and fifteen traveling libraries, including 25,832 volumes, have been sent to the different University Extension centers and kept in circulation among their respective members. A careful estimate of the expenditures of the University and the different University Extension centers during this period gives a grand total of 1325,000. Of this $250,000 have been contributed by the centers themselves and 175,000 by the University. A statistical report of the work of the Department arranged by years is given in full in Table A. It is to be observed that the number of courses delivered dicing the last year of the period is 35 per cent, larger than the best year in the previous history of the Department. We are sometimes asked: "What are the tangible results of this work?" We all know how impossible it is to estimate the value of any educational movement by giving statistics and definite results which have been accomplished by it. Nevertheless there are many such results which have followed the organization of University Extension work; for example, we can point: 1. To one who a few years ago was a grade teacher in the schools of a small town, and who afterward became a student at the University, and later a valuable and effective teacher in one of the best high schools of the state. She herself attributes her advancement to the original stimulus derived from attendance on a course of University Extension lecttures. 2. To scores of students who have gone to this and other colleges and universities, and who date their original desire for a higher education at the time of personal contact with a scholarly, sympathetic, and inspirational University Extension lecturer. 3. To at least one public library, which was founded and has since been perpetuated as the result of the work of the Local Committee for the Extension of University Teaching. Many libraries can be indicated which took on new life from the date of the organization of University Extension centers in their respective communities. 4. To at least one city into the public schools of which a system of manual training was introduced as a direct result of the delivery of two courses of lectures on practical sociology. It is equally true that to the interest aroused by the University Extension movement is to be attributed the successful inauguration of systems of free public lectures, most notably that conducted by the Board of Education of New York city. 306 The President's Kepokt However, as indicated above, the greatest and most lasting good done by University Extension, as well as other educational movements, cannot be indicated statistically. As another has said: " We are in a position to assert that a successful course perceptibly influences the tone of a locality for the period it lasts." We would not stop there. Any agency which keeps before the people of a community for any considerable length of time a higher educa- tional standard and arouses an interest in the acquisition of knowledge and culture cannot be a merely temporary influence. The librarian of a large cosmopolitan city writes : The University Extension lectures undoubtedly stimulate the use of books bearing upon the subjects treated. In this library collections of books on the subjects of the courses are reserved in the Reference Room and are in constant use ; while in the Loan Department there is a greater demand for books on the subjects discussed than we can supply, though we have many copies of each book. Our experience shows that these lectures have a permanent effect on the character of the reading in this community. The interest aroused by the lectures is not merely for the time, but continues to stimulate the use of the literature of the subjects treated. Moreover, the beneficent contagion spreads to other people and to other subjects. As stated by M. B6renger in an address at the Paris Exposition, " University Extension is the effort to develop in human life, in all classes of society, ideas and sentiments of liberal culture — of religion, of art, of aspiration." As an agency for the attainment of such results University Extension has the strongest claim for recognition. There are a number of practical difficulties which have confronted promoters of the Univer- sity Extension movement. There are not wanting many prominent educators who have believed that these diSiculties are insurmountable. The problems which, in their judgment, the friends of University Extension would be unable to solve are : 1. The local financial problem. 2. The discovery and engagement of satisfactory lecturers. 3. The absorption of university and college men in their own academic duties. 4. The extent of traveling and extra work required from busy professors. Of these the first has to do primarily with the administration of the local University Extension centers ; the others with the University or the societies under the auspices of which University Extension work is conducted. That the first difficulty is not insurmountable we believe is abundantly demonstrated by the fact that the University Extension centers, under the auspices of which this work from the University of Chicago has been conducted during the past ten years, have contributed in small sums a total of $250,000 in support of an educational movement, the development of which means much to the intellectual progress of the communities in which it is organized. Neverthe- less it is recognized that if this work is to be conducted upon a university plane and according to plans which are approved by university authorities, it must look for its success to the ardent support of a limited number of people instead of to the passing interest of large numbers. Hence it is necessary that the university itself contribute to the support of this work in the same way and for the same reason that it contributes to the support of residence college work. The institution which devotes all its energies and resources to the education of the limited number of people who can spend a period of years within its walls is, to say the least, neglecting its duty to the great masses of the people upon the elevation of whose standards and ideals its success must ultimately depend. The second, third, and fourth diSiculties mentioned above may be discussed under one head — the University Extension lectiu-er. It is universally conceded that here is the most difficult problem with which the movement has yet had to contend. As Professor Moulton has said: "An Extension lecturer must be something more than a good teacher, something more than The University Extension Division 307 an attractive lecturer ; he must be inspired with the ideas of the movement and ever on the watch for opportunities of putting them forward. The lecturers must maintain in audiences a feeling that they are not simply receiving entertainment or instruction which they have paid for, but that they are taking part in a public work." Or, as has been forcibly said by another, an Extension lectinrer must be "able to uplift, as well as to inform ; able to energize, as well as mobilize facts and to interpret them in terms of life." Such a man must not only possess scholarship ; he must be full of life and energy and enthusiasm, capable of imparting inspira- tion. His method of presentation must be clear, concise and effective. His audiences are not composed wholly of scholars ; in many instances he lectures to a miscellaneous audience. His lecture must accordingly be constructed and delivered in such a way that those who come to be entertained may remain to be instructed. If they come to drink in and be fed by the lecturer, to gather information from what he has to say, the truly successful University Extension lectmer will arouse them to active thought and stimulate them to thoughtful reading. Again in the words of Professor Moulton: "If a system of instruction gives discipline, method, and even originating power, without arousing a lasting love for the subject studied, the whole process is but a mental galvanism, generating a delusive activity that ceases when the connection between the instructor and pupil is broken off. If then it be conceded that the essence of edu- cation is interest, does it not seem a soberly practical purpose that we should open up to the whole nation, without exception, an interest in intellectual pm-suits ? " A successful popular lecturer is not necessarily a successful University Extension lecturer. Indeed, those elements which enter into successful popular lecturing are not at all essential to successful University Extension lecturing. While the Extension lecturer must be able during the hour in which he has his large audience before him to hold their attention and interest them in what he has to say, he has at the end of this period done at best not more than one- half his work. It is in the class that follows that his ability as a teacher must be shown. It is there that he has opportunity to come into intimate contact with the thoughtful members of his audience. It is here that he gains a deeper and clearer insight into the mental attitude and processes of those to whom he has been lecturing. Before, they were attentive listeners ; now, they are, imder his direction, thoughtful seekers for knowledge. Or even if in the class there is not found abundant opportunity to impart knowledge, it is still the hope of the lecturer to arouse by thoughtful questions a more careful consideration of the subjects which he could present at best in their general aspect only in the lecture. Hence all are ready to admit that the successful University Extension lecturer is vastly more difficult to find than the successful class-room instructor, and whatever may be his natural qualifications, he, like the successful worker in any other field, attains the highest degree of success after years of experience. The Extension lecturer is made, not born. As regards those men who are devoting their time and energy mainly to class-room instruc- tion, it is universally conceded that they can at best do very little successful University Exten- sion work. In the first place, the exacting duties of the class-room do not permit them to give the time and thought to Extension lecturing which is essential to the accomplishment of the results above mentioned. They cannot come before their audiences with that life and energy and vitality which is needed to arouse from its lethargy a mind which during eight or ten or twelve hours per day, year in and year out, is devoted to a consideration of the practical and material affairs of life. It is therefore conceded that if University Extension is to be conducted upon any large and permanent basis, it must be done by men who are giving their entire time to that work ; or at least the major portion of it must be done by men who regard it as a primary and not a secondary duty. The University has done much in the solution of this difficulty by selecting a number of men prominent as scholars in the different fields of literature, history, 308 The Peesident's Report TABLE A Statistical Eepoet of the Lectuee-Studt Woek of the Extension Division of the Uniyebsiti of Chicago, 1892-1902 a i 2 CO g "S d£g §0 ® .So -*J to Quarter CI O o o tt-l o CM MS ? 1" lis C3 11 B © m D O O is TO o 6 d 6 g?a g^« ^S 6^6 g-ss g-s a a ^ ;s Z < < CO g; < o o 1892-93, Autumn . 31 39 11 10,070 3,838 Winter.. . 52 83 20 16,443 8,217 Spring... 2 2 2 215 30 Total... 67 124 21 26,728 12,085 37 11.01-1- 71 24 1893-94, Autumn . 33 36 17 5,129 2,880 Winter. . . 35 44 16 7,059 4,224 Spring . . . 9 9 4 1,875 1,305 Total... 72 89 17 14,063 8,409 17 6 6.92- 37 23 1894-95, Autumn . 62 65 18 11,968 8,225 Winter.. . 48 52 17 9,724 8,164 Spring. . . 10 11 3 2,065 1,386 Total... 95 128 23 23,757 17,775 15 6 8.01- 29 19 1895-96, Autumn . 61 72 24 14,980 7,855 Winter. . . 41 46 18 9,615 4,005 Spring... 4 4 2 750 500 Total... 81 122 30 25,345 12,360 21 6 8.89- 41 23 1896-97, Autumn . 55 64 23 11,392 7,.332 Winter. . . 61 71 21 16,759 9,600 Spring . . . 6 6 5 1,193 450 Total... 95 141 29 29,344 17,382 15 8 8.90-1- 56 31 1897-98, Autumn . 71 79 17 16,888 6,338 Winter. . . 53 60 22 12,990 4,785 Spring. . . 2 2 2 437 372 Total... 92 141 29 30,315 11,495 9 6 8.91- 49 30 1898-99, Autumn . 54 57 17 10,837 4,731 Winter. . . 61 66 18 13,866 4,294 Spring. . . 2 2 2 290 Total... 93 125 25 24,993 9,025 12 6 8.06-1- 25 18 1899-00, Summer . 2 2 1 550 Autumn . 50 55 14 11,091 4,805 Winter. . . 61 67 15 17,488 7,923 Spring . . . 2 3 2 264 50 Total... 97 127 22 29,693 12,878 11 8 7.86-1- 21 16 1900-01, Autumn . 46 55 15 11,533 3,308 Winter. . . 64 75 15 18,714 4,797 Spring . . . 8 9 2 2,560 Total... 110 139 22 32,807 8,105 10 7 7.58 22 14 1901-02, Autumn . 81 88 19 15,461 6,954 Winter.. . 77 93 18 18,8.31 8,690 Spring. . . 9 9 5 1,630 789 Total. . . 140 190 27 35,922 16,433 13 16 8.14+ 28 14 Total number of courses delivered ....... 1,326 Total attendance at lecture courses - 272,967 Total attendance at lectures (No. of admissions) . . . 1,637,802 Total number of courses delivered in Chicago 379 The Univeesitt Extension Division 309 TABLE B Statistical Eepokt of Numbee of ConitsES Given in Lectuse-Study Depaetsient Classified by Subjects Department 1892-3 1893-4 1894-5 18D5-6 1896-7 1897-8 1898-9 '99-'00 1900-1 1901-2 Total English Language and Literature. Sociology and Anttiropology Biblical Literature in English Geology History Art. Semitics Philosophy and Pedagogy Neurology Botany Astronomy Chemistry Political Science Political Economy Physics Scandinavian Literature Music Greek Language and Literature Anatomy Zoology Romance Languages and Literatures. . 28 28 7 1 26 16 5 23 21 10 3 15 39 38 6 3 33 4 45 30 12 1 9 5 3 10 2 2 1 1 1 41 23 10 4 31 4 5 4 '7 1 '2 8 43 30 5 32 14 2 11 37 38 8 1 28 4 4 32 31 24 si 5 39 22 28 25 2 io 40 66 28 2 30 3 2 15 k 367 327 138 15 260 65 21 41 2 31 3 2 12 25 1 1 1 1 4 8 1 Total. 124 89 128 122 141 141 125 127 139 190 1,326 sociology, and science, and appointing them to regular positions in its faculty, with the under- standing that their chief duty is the advancement of knowledge and the promotion of culture by the University Extension method. During the past ten years we have had not a little suc- cessful work done by men who were at the same time conducting classes in the University, but in the nature of the case the centers in which they are lecturing must not only be few but must likewise be located near the University. We have in the past ten years not only discovered competent lecturers, but we have made another discovery which is equally important ; namely, that the people are ready for a forward movement for popular education such as is supplied by University Extension. This, as stated above, is to many most abundantly proved by the fact that during this period several thousand people have contributed in small amounts a total sum of $250,000 for the endowment of this form of instruction. Thus while the past ten years have revealed to us diifficulties, they have likewise shown us the stren-gth of our cause. We are now ready for more significant advances. TABLE C Teaveling Libeaeies The first Traveling Library was sent out in October, 1892, and the reports from that date to the present are as follows: Number volumes Number volumes sent out ■ Number libraries sent out To how many states To how many cities and towns.. . Number libraries purchased Number books purchased Number books sold 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1,100 1,754 64 4 30 1,834 2,001 64 5 44 1,935 2,010 89 9 56 27 828 242 2,460 1,782 59 7 45 20 523 116 3,467 3,536 94 8 36 30 1,398 274 3,663 3,562 83 8 48 25 586 478 3,550 2,848 67 8 46 12 642 896 3,689 2,497 63 9 50 17 6.30 463 3,950 1,965 44 6 37 12 535 249 4,.387 3,877 88 9 75 24 1,051 550 1 Counts each issue of a volume. The President's Kepoet The Traveling Libraries supplement eflBciently the resources of the General Library. When the books are not in active use at University Extension centers, they form a considerable proportion of the daily circulation from the loan desk of the General Library. TABLE D Ndmbee of Lectdee-Studt Coueses Given BY Each Lectdeee 1892-1902 R. G. Moulton - - 185 John Dewey - 8 Shaiter Mathews - 2 Charles Zueblin - 158 T. J. Lawrence 8 T.G.Allen - Edwin E. Sparks - - 125 H. S.Fiske - 7 Augusta Chapin Herbert L. Willett - - 69 William R. Harper - 7 George Dana Boardman - Frederick Starr - 51 A. H.Cole 6 OlausDahl J. G. C. Troop - 41 N. I. Rubinkam 6 George Schreiber - Nathaniel Butler - - 41 Benjamin S. Terry - 5 B.M.Davis - George E. Fellows - - 41 O. J. Thatcher 5 Wardner Williams - S. H. Clark - - 36 E. R. L. Gould 4 Ferdinand Schwill - F. W. Shepardson - - 35 E. H. Lewis - 4 J. W. Thompson Henry W. Rolfe - 34 Ella Adams Moore - 4 Paul Shorey - Lorado Taft - - 33 Ira M. Price - 4 J. P. Gordy - John Graham Brooks - 29 H.F. Reid 4 George L. Hunter - W. D. MacClintock - 29 Albert C. Eycleshymer - 4 Arthur Kaiser - - - Edward Bemis - 28 Myra Reynolds 4 H. L. Russell - Thomas P. Bailey, Jr. - 25 Oscar L. Triggs 3 F. L. Morse Ira W. Howerth - 23 W. H. Mace - 3 T. J. J. See - - - Jerome H. Raymond - 21 Alleyne Ireland 3 S. W. Stratton John M. Coulter - 20 Merton L. Miller 3 A. W. Wishart W. C. Webster - 19 H. H. Donaldson 2 George Kriehn James H. Breasted - 16 E. E. Barnard - 2 L. Taft - - - - Jenkin Lloyd Jones - 13 R. C. H. Catterall - 2 Albert H. Tolman - H. B. Grose - - 12 J. D. Forrest - - - 2 Pearl M. Pearson - W. M. R. French - 12 H. C. Cowles - 2 Serge Wolkonsky - W. H. Goodyear - 11 C.F.Kent 2 W. W. Atwood R. D. Salisbury - 10 Emil G. Hirsch 2 Alfred M. Brooks - Albion W. Small - - 10 C. A. McMurry 2 George C. Howland Ernest Ingersoll 9 F. W. Parker - 2 Charles A. Young - Edward von Bensley 9 J. R. Angell - 2 Other lecturers 10 H. P. Judson - 9 James H. Tufts 2 C. R. Henderson 9 Camillo von Klenze 2 Total . - - . 1,326 George E. Vincent - 8 TABLE E Places at which Coueses Have Been Deliveeed 1892-1902 Ada, Ohio - 1 Arlington Heights, 111. - 1 Benton Harbor, Mich. - 1 Aiken, S. C. - - 1 AsheviUe, N. C. - - 1 Birmingham, Ala. - 3 Akron, Ohio - 1 Ashland, Wis. - 1 Bloomington, 111. - 5 Alfjona, Iowa - 1 Athens, Ga. - - 3 Blue Island, 111. - - 8 Alhambra, Calif. - - 1 Atlanta, 111. - - 1 Braddock, Pa. - 1 Allegan, Mich. - 1 Aurora, 111. - - 14 Buffalo, N. Y. - 2 Allegheny, Pa. - 2 Austin— Oak Park, 111. - 3 Burlington, Iowa - - 9 Alton, 111. - - 3 Barrington, 111. - - 1 Burlington, Wis. - - 1 Anderson, S. C. - - 1 Batavia, 111. - 1 Calumet, Mich. - - 2 Ann Arbor, Mich. - 1 Bay City, Mich. - - 9 Canton, 111. - - 6 Anniston, Ala. - 2 Belvidere, 111. - 5 Canton, Ohio - 5 The University Extension Division 311 Cedar Rapids, Iowa - - i Cetttralia, 111. - 2 Charleston, III. - - 2 Charleston, S. C. - 1 Charlottesville, Va. - 1 Chicago: Altnira Center - - 5 All Souls' - 8 Architectural Club - - 1 Armour Institute - 1 Art Institute - - 10 Association - 4 Austin - - - - 5 Calumet - - 2 Catholic Woman's League 1 Centenary M. E. Church 1 Central Music Hall - - 2 Central Park Pres. Ch. - 1 Central Y. M. C. A. - - 8 Church of the Redeemer 1 Columbia School Oratory 8 Cook County Normal Sch. 9 D.A. R. - - - - 2 Drexel - - - - 6 Edgewater - - - 6 Englewood Men's Club - 1 Bnglewood Cong. Ch. - 1 Englewood Univer. Ch. - 9 Englewood Wom. Club - 2 Epworth League - - 1 Free Kindergarten - - 5 Free Lectures: Anderson School - - 2 Franklin School - - 2 G. W. Curtis School - 3 Hammond School - 1 Hull House - - - 1 Medill School - - 1 Perkins Bass School - 3 Horace Mann School - 3 Garfield - - - - 2 Garfield Park - - - 3 Goodrich School - - 2 Herder Lodge - - - 1 Holy Angels' - - - 1 Hull House - . - 7 Hyde Park - . - 1 Hyde Park M. E. Church 7 Hyde Park Christian Ch. 4 Irving Park - - - 3 K.A. M. - - - - 2 Kenwood - - - - 13 TABLE :E — Continued Kenwood Evangelical Ch. 1 Kindergarten Club - - 1 Kindergarten College - 10 Kindergarten Institute - 1 Klio Association - - 1 Lake Shore - - - 2 Lake View - - - 6 Leavitt Street - - - 3 Lewis Institute - - 16 Longwood - - - 1 Memorial Baptist - - 4 Millard Avenue - - 4 Monroe St. Christian Ch. 1 Newberry Library - - 21 New England Church - 4 Normal Park - - - 2 North Shore - - - 6 North Shore Club - - 1 Notre Dame - - - 2 Oakland Club . - - 6 Oakland ( Bible Study League) - - - - 1 Oakland - - - - 1 Owen Scientific Center - 1 People's Institute - - 4 Plymouth Church - - 7 Private - ... 1 Public School Dist. No. 8 2 Public School Dist. No. 1 2 Public School Dists. Nos. 3 and 4 - - - - 1 Public School Dist. No. 6 2 Ravenswood - - - 3 Robey St. - - - - 1 Rogers Park - - - 4 Rush Medical - - - 4 Ryder Lectures: Douglas School - - 1 Franklin School - - 2 Lewis School - - 1 N. W. Division High School ... 2 St. James's - - - 9 St. Gabriel's - - - 1 St. Paul's - - - - 5 Sedgwick St. - - - 1 Self Educational Club - 1 Sinai ----- 4 Sixth Presbyter'n Church 1 South Cong. Church - 4 South Side Club - - 3 South Park - - . 8 South Park M. E. Church 1 Steinway Hall - - - 5 Trade and Labor - - 1 Univ. Cong. Church - 1 Union Park - - - 8 Union Park L. B. S. - 1 University (afternoons) - 22 U. of C. Settlement - - 3 Wabash Ave. - - - 1 West End Club - - 2 Wicker Park - - - 6 Windsor Park - - - 3 Woman's Club - - - 5 Woodlawn - - - 5 Woodlawn Park Club - 1 Chicago Heights, 111. - - 1 Chillicothe, Ohio - - ■ 1 Cincinnati, Ohio: H. Thane Miller School - 3 Mt. Auburn - - - 1 Univ. Extension Center - 3 Y. W. C. A. - - - 5 Y. M. C. A. - - - 1 Claremont, Calif. - - - 1 Cleveland, Ohio - - - 2 Clinton, Iowa ■ - - 14 Columbia, S. C. - - - 2 Columbus, Ga. - - - 3 Columbus, Ohio - - - 5 Constantine, Mich. - - 1 Coshocton, Ohio - - 1 Dallas, Tex, - - - 1 Danville, 111. - . - 6 Danville, Ky. - - - 1 Davenport, Iowa - - - 14 Dayton, Ohio - - - 15 Decatur, 111. - - - - 5 Decatur, Ind. - - - 1 DeKalb,Ill. ... 4 Delaware, Ohio - - - 2 Des Moines, Iowa - - 2 Detroit, Mich. ... 7 DeWitt, Iowa - - - 1 Dixon, 111. - - - - 5 Dowagiac, Mich. - - - 1 Downer's Grove, 111. • - 1 Dubuque, Iowa - - - 9 Earlville, 111. . . - 1 East Chicago, Ind. - - 3 East St. Louis, 111. - - 3 Elgin, 111. - - . - 7 Elwood, Ind, - - 2 312 The President's Report Emmettsburg, Iowa - - 1 Estherville, Iowa - - -1 Evanston, 111. - - -4 Evanston, 111. (Bible-Study League) - - - 1 Evansville, Ind. - - - 2 Fairfield, Iowa - - - 1 Fayette, Iowa - - - 1 Findlay, Ohio - - . 3 Flint, Mich. - - - - 10 Fort Dodge, Iowa - - 2 Fort Madison, Iowa - - 8 Fort Wayne, Ind. - - 2 Frankfort, Ind. - - - 1 Freeport, 111. - - ■ 5 Fremont, Ohio - - - 2 Galesburg, 111. (Knox Col.) - 10 Galveston, Tex. - - - 6 Geneseo, 111. - - - - 4 Geneva, 111. - - - - 1 Gibson City, 111. - - - 1 Glenooe, 111. - - - - 3 Goshen, Ind. ■ - - 1 Grand Rapids, Mich. - ■ 5 Grand Haven - - - 4 Greenville, S. C. - - - 1 Grinnell, Iowa - - - 1 Hamilton, Ohio - - - 6 Hammond, Ind. - - - 6 Hannibal, Mo. - . - 2 Hartford City, Ind. - - 1 Herrington, Kan. - - 1 Highland Park, 111. - - 6 Hillsboro, Ohio - - - 2 Hinsdale, 111. - - - 5 Hiram, Ohio - - - - 1 Hoopeston, 111. - - - 1 Houston, Tex. - - - 2 Humboldt, Iowa - - - 1 Huntington, Ind. - - - 1 Independence, Iowa - - 1 Indiana, Pa. - - - - 2 Indianapolis, Ind. (U. E. C.) 15 Indianapolis, Ind., Public School - ... 1 Indianapolis, Ind., Manual Training School - - 1 Ironwood, Mich. - • - 1 Ishpeming, Mich. - - 1 Jackson, Mich. - - - 4 Jacksonville, 111. - - - 2 JoUet, 111. - - - - 22 TASLEB— Continued Kalamazoo, Mich. - - 7 Kankakee, 111. - - - 6 Kansas City, Mo. - - - 1 Kenosha, Wis. - - - 4 Kenton, Ohio - - - 1 Keokuk, Iowa - - - 9 Kewanee, 111. - - - 1 Kokomo, Ind. - - - 3 LaCrosse, Wis. - - - 4 Lafayette, Ind. - - - 4 La Grange, 111. - - - 3 Lagrange, Ind. - - - 1 La Moille, 111. - - . 2 Lansing, Mich. - - - 1 Lansing, Mich. (Agr. Col.) - 1 La Porte, Ind. - - - 5 La Salle, 111. - ... 2 Lebanon, Ind. - - - 2 Lemont, 111. .... 1 Lexington, Ky. - - - 1 Lima, Ohio - - - . 4 Lincoln, 111. - - - - 3 Lisbon, Ohio - - - 2 Lockport, 111. - - - 1 London, Ohio - - - 1 Long Beach, Calif. - - 1 Los Angeles, Calif. - - 2 Louisville, Ky. - - - 2 Ludington, Mich. - - 1 Macon, Ga. - - . - 1 Manistee, Mich. - - - 4 Mansfield, Ohio ... 3 Maquoketa, Iowa - - - 1 Marion, Ala. - - . - 1 Marion, Ind. - ... 5 Marion, S. C. - - - 1 Marquette, Mich. - - - 2 Marshall, Mich. - - - 5 Marshalltown, Iowa - - 2 Mason City, Iowa - - 2 Mattoon, 111. - - - - 4 Maywood, 111. ... 4 Mazon, 111. .... 1 Mendota, 111. - . .1 Meridian, Miss. - - - 1 Michigan City, Ind. - - 3 Middletown, Ohio - - 1 Milwaukee, Wis : College Endowment Asso- ciation - - - - 23 Ethical Society - - 1 Normal School - - - 1 S. S. Educ. Assoc. - - 2 Univ. Extension Center •- 2 Woman's Club - - - 1 Pastors' Assoc. - - - 1 Minneapolis, Minn : Institute Sac. Lit. - - 4 Stanley Hall - - - 13 Moline, 111. - - - - 12 Monmouth, 111. - - - 2 Morgan Park, 111. - - 2 Morgantown, W. Va. - - 1 Morrison, 111. - - - 1 Mount Carroll, 111. - - 4 Muncie, Ind. - - - 1 Muscatine, Iowa - - - 4 Muskegon, Mich. - - - 2 Neguanee, Mich. - - - 1 Newark, Ohio - - - 1 New Brighton, Pa. - - 1 New Harmony, Ind. - - 1 Niles, Mich. - - . - 3 Oak Park, 111. - - - 10 Osage, Iowa - - . - 2 Oshkosh, Wis. - - - . 1 Oskaloosa, Iowa - - - 1 Ottawa, 111. - - - 11 Ottumwa, Iowa - - - 7 Owosso, Mich. - - - 5 Palatine, 111. - . - 2 Pana, 111. . . . . 1 Paris, 111. - - - - 3 Paris, Ky. .... 1 Park Ridge, 111. - - - 2 Pasadena, Calif. - - - 2 Pekin, 111. - ... 5 Peoria, 111. - - - - 11 Peru, Ind. - ... 3 Pittsburg, Pa.: Univ. Extension Society - 12 Art Society - - - 1 Hazelwood Branch - - 1 Mt. Washington Branch - 1 Wylie Ave. Branch - - 1 20th Century Club - - 3 Plainwell, Mich. - . . 1 Plymouth, Ind. - - - 1 Polo, 111. .... 3 Pomona, Calif. - - - 1 Pontiac, 111. - - . - 3 Potomac, 111. " - - - 1 Princeton, 111. - - - 4 Pueblo, Colo. ... 1 The University Extension Division 313 TABLE E — Continued Princeton, Ind. - - 1 Santa Anna, Calif. 2 Tremont, 111. - 2 Quincy, 111. - - 4 Savanna, 111. 1 Trenton, Mo. 1 Redlands, Calif. - - 2 Sedalia, Mo. - - - - 1 Tuscaloosa, Ala. - . 1 Riclimond, Ind. - ■- 8 Selma, Ala. - - - - 2 Upper Alton, 111. - . 1 Richmond, Ky. - - 1 Shelbyville, 111. - 1 Urbana, Ohio - 1 Richmond, Va. - 1 Sidney, Ohio 5 Valparaiso, Ind. - - 4 Riverside, Calif. - - 1 South Bend, Ind. - 12 Vincennes, Ind. - - 1 Riverside, 111. - 7 South Evanston, 111. - 1 Wabash, Ind. - 3 Rochelle, 111. - 4 Spencer, Iowa 1 Washington, Iowa - 1 Rockford, 111. - 16 Springfield, 111. - 14 Washington, Ind. . 1 Rock Island, 111. - - 6 Springfield, Ohio - 6 Washington C. H., Ohio 1 Saginaw, E. S., Mich. - - 12 Sterling, 111. - - . . 9 Waterloo, Iowa - - 2 Saginaw, W. S., Mich. - - 5 Storm Lake, Iowa 1 Watertown, Wis. - - 2 St. Charles, 111. - - 2 Streator,Ill. - 9 Watseka, 111. . 1 St. John's, Mich. - - 2 Sycamore, 111. 5 Waukegan, 111. - 4 St. Joseph, Mich. - - 1 Taylorville, 111. - 1 Wheaton, 111. - 3 St. Paul, Minn. - - i Terre Haute, Ind. 4 Winnetka, 111. - - 4 San Antonio, Tex. - 1 Tiffin, Ohio - 4 Winona, Minn. - 6 San Diego, Calif. - - 1 Toledo, Ohio 9 Xenia, Ohio - 2 Sandusky, Ohio - - 2 Tonawanda, N. Y. 5 Youngstown, Ohio - 2 San Francisco, Calif. - - 1 Topeka, Kan. TABLE F SCMMAEY 1 Nnmber of Centers Number of Courses Number of Centers Number of Courses Chicago . .... 90 81 32 29 31 30 13 4 11 12 4 4 391 356 105 103 101 100 44 27 25 15 10 9 Georgia 6 2 3 5 4 2 2 1 1 1 7 7 7 6 5 2 2 1 1 1 Illinois (outside Chicago) Ohio New York . South Caro Kentucky . Missouri. . . Kansas.. . . lina. Iowa Michigan Minnesota . Mississippi North Caro West Virgil Total T-*pn n svlvan i a lina. aia . . Oalifornia , Alabama 368 1,326 Respectfully submitted, Walter A. Payne, Secretary Lecture-Study Department. 314 The President's Kepoet THE CORKESPONDENCE-STUDY DEPARTMENT To the President of the University : Sir: I submit herewith my report on the work of the Correspondence-Study Department of the University Extension Division from the opening of the University to June 23, 1902, the close of our tenth scholastic year. " To provide instruction for those who, for social or economic reasons, cannot attend in its class-rooms is a legitimate and necessary part of the work of every university. To make no effort in this direction is to neglect a promising opportunity for building up the university itself, and at the same time to fall short of performing a duty which, from the very necessities of the case, is incum- bent upon the university." — Official Bulletin No. 6, May, 1892. This is the earliest formulation here of the purpose and scope of university extension. To what extent the Correspondence-Study Department has met these obligations and oppor- tunities may be gathered from the following facts and tables. The first student registered for correspondence instruction in October, 1892 — the month in which residence instruction began. From that date to this 2,952 different students have registered for from one to twelve courses each. Of these 1,715 have matriculated in the Univer- sity through this Department. This is almost 11.6 per cent, of the total nvmiber of matricu- lants in the decade. The great majority, nearly 87 per cent., of those who enroll are educators. This is but natural, inasmuch as instruction is given in academic subjects only. By the remaining 13 per cent, at least sixty -five other vocations are represented. If the data had been furnished in every case, the number of different vocations would certainly have been much larger; still it would appear that there are mature persons in many walks of life who are eager for the mental discipline and the culture which college coiu'ses afford. The students have been scattered through every state and territory of our country, includ- ing our island possessions, and through the countries of every continent, Africa excepted. Obviously the work has extended the name and influence of the University. The tj^pe of student who is attracted by this kind of study may be inferred from the fact that some now serving on the Faculties, and several who have taken the Doctor's or the Master's degree, first established relations with the University through the Correspondence-Study Department. The opportunity to do a part of the work required for the Bachelor's degree at home has led many to choose this in preference to another institution. Moreover, it has enabled not a few who have had to drop resident study on account of ill-health, insufficient funds, or busi- ness openings, to complete their college course and gain the degree. The interweaving of resi- dent and non-resident study has grown noticeably within the last year and a half. Undoubtedly from this time on both regular students and those whose periods of residence must be brief and infrequent will more and more take advantage of the correspondence com'ses. The number of instructors engaged in the work and the number of courses given have increased from year to year, until in 1901-2 ninety-two members of the Faculties gave two hundred and seventeen courses. These figures are significant as indicating the Faculty senti- ment and the diversified demand — a demand which it would be difficult to satisfy without university resources. During the ten years three hundred and thirty-eight courses were given by one hundred and fifty-seven different instructors. For the first few years these were confined to History, the Languages, and Mathematics, as, owing to the difficulty of giving laboratory instruction, it was deemed impracticable to advance into the scientific field. Finally, as the result of an The Univeesity Extension Division 315 tirgent request, a trial was made in Botany. The success attending the experiment led to a second and third course, and little by Httle to the announcement of courses in other sciences. It now seems not unreasonable to expect that, by means of detailed and graphic lesson sheets, and by supplying the required apparatus, this method of insti-uction may be applied success- fully to the teaching of almost any subject in the curriculum — at least, in its elementary phases. That correspondence work has been tested by both indifferent and enthusiastic instruc- tors, incapable and brilliant students, application to so many subjects, and, most exacting of all, comparison with class-room results; that it has been tried in the case of so many people, through great distances, and for so long a time; and that it has not only survived, but stands today approved in the estimation of instructors and students alike, warrants the opinion that the experimental stage is passed, and that this method of instruction has fairly won its right to greater recognition as an effective educational factor. Has not the time come to reorganize the work on an independent basis, and thus enlarge its scope and efficiency? Hitherto these courses have been prepared and conducted by those whose time was mortgaged to residence duties. While this arrangement possesses certain advantages, it necessarily limits the number of students who can be accommodated, and this defect is abeady beginning to be felt. Even the natural increase resulting from the efforts of zealous students to extend a knowledge of the work — and it is to these that the present development is due — will soon overtax om- facilities. The desideratum is an endowment suffi- ciently large to permit of legitimate promotion, engaging special instructors, and supplying at nominal rates tuition and the necessary apparatus. The present requirement that all fees be paid in full in advance prevents many from enjoying the privileges which the University desires to extend. The liberality shown in allow- ing students who are unable to complete their coiirses within the prescribed time, another year for so doing, upon payment of a small reinstatement fee, and in permitting final examinations to be taken outside the University tmder approved supervision, has yielded satisfactory results, and justifies, it is believed, a wider application of the same policy. Table A, with its supplement, presents in a detailed manner the history of every regis- tration in every course since the opening of the Department. For those who are interested simply in comparing the relative demand for different subjects, the summary of this detailed conspectus presented in Table B will answer. The steady growth of the Department will be seen in Table C, showing the annual totals of new registrations, total registrations, and courses completed; Table D, showing the number of instructors, courses, and students year by year; and Table E, showing the annual gross income. Table F presents the roster of correspondence instructors, and the number of years each has taught. Kespectfully submitted, H. F. Mallory, Secretary Correspondence-Study Department. 316 The President's Report TABLE A Detailed Conspectus of Registration, October 1, 1892, to June 23, 1901 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 DEPABTMBNT8 to § 2 Eft 5 1 o t» a 3 'o m 5 5 1 1 i 1 1 3 2 a .2 *5) Z 4 i 3 8 ■ - 2 2 1 'i ~Y 'i 2 2 in a o "rf 'cfl 1 9 'i 3 13 3 3 1 1 1 2 5 i '4 2 1 "p, a 3 3 1 1 i 1 1 3 "2 P to CO 6 4 4 "i CD > bD d '3 '0 W 2 i '3 6 2 2 1 i 2 '2 2 .2 (S u _tn % CD z i i 2 4 4 3 3 '3 1 § ca ■s "5, W 3 2 '2 '4 8 6 6 4 i 5 '5 3 1 M a '3 '0 W 1 i i 3 4 4 1 1 '2 a _o CD z 1 i i 3 '2 'i 3 2 2 4 4 i 5 '2 2 i 3 cfl 1 CO 2 '2 '2 6 '2 'i 3 6 2 8 5 i 6 2 2 '3 3 T3 a i u CO § 1 1 2 2 1 1 i 'i 03 P< 0. R CO K s St. O g > 3 a B3 ■s •a K en •a -1^ © ■p. S o o a o Pi ID > o o (d F* "a K 1 OS c 2 -2 T 3 O 5 i J 3 J 2, J & ca ^ 3 3 "o & ca h 3 a ^3 S.S cj ° o 1 3 1 s« rt Fh 3 S "o eu &« S 5 E 2 O C 3 •> IZ H Q o W z H o u W » J H C J o ti n tj H u o M Z I-) t HOC ) 1 q in in 9 19 5 2 12 7 19 7 3 9 11 20 1 8 11 9 1 s 1 3 8 10 2 1 1 1 1 2 ^ 7 » 3 6 1 7 2 ,i 3 3 3 4- 4 ? fi ?. 1 3 3 6 2 1 H 2 5 3 2 2 4 .. 3 i 6 6 5 .. 1 9 10 fi 4 fi : 6 . 4 5 X 4 4 3 7 ?. 5 5 4 1 . 1 1 1 3 4 1 . 3 6 3 3 3 1 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 . 7 1 1 .. . i 15 18 18 18 36 9 3 24 18 42 1 9 7 1 6 31 47 11 u 25 22 1 4 & 13 1 24 8 11 1 1 2 . 9 9 3 5 2 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 i 10 3 3 .. . 3 11 2 2 i 1 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 12 3 3 3 1 4 2 1 I 2 3 1 2 2 2 . 13 5 5 5 3 8 5 3 3 3 . 9 9 2 1 6 1 7 3 2 U 7 7 7 16 ?S 4 19 1 20 9 9 2 9 11 1 1 y . 4 4 b 15 2 2 ^ 1 3 1 2 2 1 16 1 1 1 1 n 4 4 4 5 9 1 3 5 5 .. i 18 1 1 5 5 1 .. 4 2 6 4 2 3 5 1 3 19 1 1 .. . 1 20 2 2 .. T 21 3 3 1 2 2 4 2 . ?. 22 2 2 <; 2 2 15 18 2 1 15 22 37 9 3 25 18 43 1 2 13 1 8 34 52 15 6 31 29 c 16 1 5 29 23 4 5 1 4 6 10 4 1 5 4 9 . 5 4 3 7 4 1 2 6 1 9 2 2 5 24 2 4 2 ?, 1 3 2 1 1 1 . 3 3 1 2 3 2 . 1 25 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 9 26 1 1 1 27 1 1 i 28 i .. . 1 7 10 8 7 8 15 4 3 8 4 12 . 8 4 8 12 5 3 4 8 1 ] 3 4 2 7 29 4 2 ?. 30 . 31 32 , 33 1 34 1 1 1 35 1 1 1 1 1 36 3 3 ?, 1 8 9 7 .. 2 1 3 1 2 3 5 i 3 S7 1 1 1 10 10 6 .. 4 3 7 3 2 2 1 3 2 . 1 38 . 2 ?. 1 1 12 13 .. 3 2 5 2 2 1 3 4 .. 3 89 2 2 1 1 6 7 7 .. . 4 4 1 1 2 2 .. 1 1 6 2 3 1 9 10 5 1 4 36 40 ■ iO 1 9 10 19 6 6 7 7 ] 14 3 3 8 40 3 3 1 2 5 1 6 1 . 5 41 3 4 1 3 3 6 2 1 3 4 7 2 2 3 3 fi 1 2 3 8 1 4 2 5 42 2 4 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 . 3 3 1 2 6 8 5 . 3 43 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 2 4 1 i 2 44 1 1 1 45 2 2 1 1 6 7 4 .. 3 8 11 3 8 13 !1 12 2 7 46 5 6 1 1 4 1 5 2 2 1 1 1 .. . 47 2 3 1 « 1 3 1 2 2 1 1 . 48 5 5 4 1 318 The Peesident's Report TABLE A — Continued 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 Depabtments 1 1 1 W 1 EH % 'p. a to a is "o W a M W "to ® a cd M ..J M 'd H % "ft a tn QJ u 3 ■s P. ft (^ M 3 © > tD a "o 1 i 1 •a 3 "n B i h 3 i 3 10 1 \\ ■■ 1 i — 1 i 2 ■0 © g S p 3 'i S p> a 2 "o M 1 1 3 'i 8 '" 2 4 17 1 18 1 17 1 11 3 p n) 'tc © © 2 3 '2 2 17 1 1 1 1 2 21 2 11 1 4 'c 3 p 'ti © 3 3 4 , 5 2 'i Is" 2 1 .. 3 1 1 6 38 S 29 2 21 1 n © © "p. S 5 QJ M 1 1 '2 'i 7 1 6 2 7 '4 ■7 1 ft n © 3 'i i 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 Li © > u> 3 2 W IV. HI8T0KY — CONTINUED 49. Outline History of Modern Europe 50. History of Europe from 1517 to 1648 51. History of Europe from Reformation to French Revolution 52. General View of French Revolution 53. History of Europe in Nineteenth Century.. 54. History of England to Accession of Tudors . 55. England from Henry YII. to Present Time. 56. Outline History of Civilization— 1st Mj 57. Outline History of U. S. from Colonization 1 1 6 2 — 1 1 4 2 1 6 1 9 '5 1 3 1 3 '2 11 1 i i 3 2 1 '3 '3 1 2 2 1 2 3 '2 15 1 2 i 'i 5 3 7 1 12 8 2 5 2 1 1 i 5 1 'i i 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 'i 8 1 1 2 2 7 12 8 1 5 2 1 3 '2 i 12 1 1 'i 1 2 10 1 6 1 9 '■j i 2 5 '3 i 20 2 3 'i 1 4 17 1 18 1 17 1 12 2 58. Period of Discovery and Exploration in 2 59. Colonial Period and War of Revolution — 60. Social Life in American Colonies 61. The U. S. under Articles of Confederation.. 62. Beginnings of National Life 63. U. S. during Period of Dominant Foreign Politics 64. TJ. S. from 1817 to 1861 65. Territorial Growth of U. S Total 2 '2 2 13 TI. SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHEOPOLOGT 66.-Introduction to Sociology: 1 English Theological Seminary students 67. Introduction to Study of Society 68. The Structure of Society 69. Primitive Social Control 70. The Family: 2 2 1 English Theological Seminary students 71. Race Development of Mind 72. A Study of Charities and Corrections 73. Art and the Artist Class 74. Elementary Anthropology 75. Field Work in Anthropology — 1st Mi 76. Field Work in Anthropology — 2d Mj 77. Field Work in Anthropology — 3d Mj 78. Old- World Pre-Historic Archaeology 79. Mexican Archajology 80. Foods 81. House Sanitation Total 2 VH. COMPAEATIVE EELIGION 82. Introduction to History of Religion 83. Buddhism Total 1 1 VHI. SEMITIC LANGUAGES AND LITEEATUEES 1 6 1 9 '5 1 3 4 30 85. Intermediate Hebrew : 22 86. Exodus and Hebrew Grammar : University students 1 15 87. Haggai, Zechariah, and Malachi : i;. The University Extension Division 319 TABLE A.— C(mtinued 1896-1897 1897-1S98 1898-1899 1899-1900 1900-1901 1 1 1 a M 1 o "p. a 6 ID S g t3 (D 0, p. g a 1 a 2 "o W a z cn ■a M 3 s ■p. a u 1 a P tn CD S2 § ID > a ea u Z e 5 '2 1 1 'i 3 2 3 1 32 '3 i 3 4 i 2 14 1 1 i 3 6 1 1 i 1 a g^ 'J is i 1 i '3 1 d t-i "3) M a !3 ■q W 4 '3 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 26 '6 i 3 3 i 14 1 1 1 10 2 8 1 5 '4 1 w % © M © Z 6 7 i 4 4 1 3 7 5 1 i 2 1 63 1 4 3 2 i i 1 1 '2 16 3 3 2 5 4 2 2 1 -'i is i 1 i i [ft 1 u 'Ec © M la H 10 7 i 7 5 2 3 7 6 3 2 4 4 2 90 1 4 9 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 '2 30 4 4 3 15 6 10 3 6 1 5 1 1 s 'p. B m 5 2 '4 4 1 3 i 3 2 1 33 i 3 2 1 i i 9 1 1 1 2 © P, ft P eft © i 1 1 'i 1 .. 10 i 4 2 3 10 '9 '5 '4 '3 © > 6JJ a '3 '0 W 5 5 i 3 1 1 2 6 2 3 47 1 2 2 3 3 2 4 6 4 2 2 i 1 en a +3 © z 5 i 4 3 5 3 10 1 '2 1 1 3 78 3 1 2 1 i i 1 1 '3 14 3 3 2 1 2 4 i -• is ■A 1 .2 nJ in « H 10 5 ■•2 7 4 6 5 16 3 3 '3 1 2 4 126 4 3 4 2 i 1 1 i 1 1 1 '5 25 3 3 5 7 8 5 4 6 '2 1 •a S 'p. 1 3 4 3 '3 1 4 1 2 'i 1 47 i 1 i i '3 7 1 1 1 1 2 1 i P tn ID g i i 1 i 1 2 i 'i 1 1 17 2 1 3 1 i 8 2 2 1 3 5 2 1 1 'i © > to a '0 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 '2 2 3 2 '2 2 1 26 1 'i 1 1 6 3 16 1 8 3 5 1 4 1 "2 2 5 4 ■4 4 1 39 1 '2. 2 'i 1 1 8 1 1 7 46 1 30 4 20 1 14 1 2 1 i 1 6 i 1 1 1 '4 6 1 4 i 2 1 i 9 1 1 i 'i i '2 2 1 2 '2 3 1 24 '2 2 i i 6 7 41 1 23 3 15 1 13 1 2 '5 1 2 4 2 2 4 4 1 35 ■5 2 2 '2 11 5 8 5 10 '4 '5 2 '7 3 3 6 2 4 7 5 1 59 7 4 2 'i '3 17 12 49 6 33 3 19 1 18 1 'i 2 i 1 1 1 14 'i T 2 7 '6 1 3 '7 i 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 16 '2 1 3 4 27 15 1 6 '2 2 '5 2 3 '2 2 4 1 29 '4 3 2 i '2 12 6 15 6 12 1 10 1 9 1 1 i 3 3 5 4 10 2 '2 '3 62 2 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 i 10 3 4 2 1 2 5 i 320 The President's Repoet TABLE A — Continued 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 ■ 1895-1896 Dbpaetments PI _o a o H 1 'p. a o O o o ID £ P m o s g > O a ■o W .2 2 M o a o '■5 '3 B 1 2 i 44 4 4 1 6 5 1 1 i "S a o o I u pi O O 2 1 n3 0. S a h 3 O o 1 2 2 ~2 4 © > o .9 3 W 2 i 40 4 1 6 13 i 1 tn a _o © 1 37 1 10 '6 1 i 19 1 1 i i i ~3" a o u in •a © 3 3 i 77 3 14 1 12 1 'i 32 1 1 i i 1 i 2 6 'p. a o © 3 i 1 1 i i 3 -a © a s 1 o o 1 1 2 2 © > O .a 2 i 73 1 14 1 12 1 "29" 1 1 3 3 '5) © i 2 w '3) « Id 1 5 i 123" 2 29 1 19 1 1 53 8 3 1 2 1 i 3 'i 9 •a © © "p. a o o I 3 o o 2 ^9" '5 i 6 1 1 i 1 i © a p. o o [A (P 1 o .a '■5 1 THI. SEMITIO LANG. AND LIT.— CONTINDED 1 1 1 i 28 3 1 i 5 a.. 1 " 1 90. Judges 91. Isaiah (chaps. 1-39) 92. Isaiah (chaps. 40-66) 93. Jeremiah 9i. Psalms (American Institute students) 95. Elementary Arabic : 1 1 n •1 •> 1 American Institute students i 29 3 1 'i 5 1 1 1 1 16 1 3 1 5 ~io" 4 1 1 i "50^ 1 13 'h i 24 2 2 1 1 1 3 6 lo" 1 7 1 4 13 1 1 '\ 97. Advanced Assyrian Total 84 IX. BIBLICAL AND PATEI3TIC GEEEK 98. Elementary New Testament Greek : 1 n 99. Intermediate New Testament Greek : University students 100. Advanced New Testament Greek : University students American Institute students 101. Readings in Septuagint 102. New Testament Times in Palestine : University students English Theological Seminary students 103. New Testament History 104. Constructive Studies in Life of Christ: University students 106. Social Teachings of Jesus 107. Life of Paul & Introduction to His Epistles : University students English Theological Seminary students 108. The Epistle to Galatians 109. History of Apostolic Age 110. New Testament Quotations from the Old T. 111. New Testament Idea of Sin Total 1 1 "ST X. SANBKEIT 112. Elementary Sanskrit 1 Total ... .... 1 XI. THE GEEEK LANGnAGE AND LITEEATUEE 113. Elementary Greek — 1st Mj 1 114. Elementary Greek — 2d Mj 1 115. Xenophon : Anabasis, Books II-III 116. Xenophon : Anabasis, Books IV- VT 117. Homer: Kmd, Books I-III 118. Advanced Greek Prose Composition 119. Xenophon: Memorabilia, andPlato: Apol- OQy and Crito 1 1 i 120. Herodotus: Hisioi-me.BooksVI.VII— IstMj. 121. Herodotus: Historiae— 2d Mj 122. Herodotus : Historiae— 3d Mj 123. Thucydides 124. £)emosthenes and Lysias 125. Lysias 126. .Eschylus 127. Greek Meters and Prosody 128. Plato's Republic 129. Introduction to Greek Tragedy 130. The Attic Orators 131. Development of Religious Conception among the Greeks Total • T 1 1 1 The Univeesity Extension Division 321 TABLE \— Continued 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1899 1899-1900 1900-1801 vt a -o en ED 13 ■O w ■o m a -a m a 13 a o p a ■a a a] "a Tl .a *-*3 o a 'a SI 1 o o S a <5 a gT. •a O > O & «j S p TJ » sa » Sl CJ » &«= CO ^ 1^ f? S 3 V V Z EH o O M 'A H o u W SI h) H <_> O M Z 1-1 Eh o U » z J Eh o o W 89 90 1 1 1 1 91 1 1 92 I 1 93 ] 1 1 94 1 1 1 1 1 1 95 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 i 2 1 1 1 1 i 1 ?, 1 ij 96 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 1 97 1 1 1 45 129 17 4 108 40 148 28 56 64 22 4 90 26 29 35 17 2 54 9 21 24 17 41 7 14 20 98 1 2 1 1 2 3 3 6 9 1 3 R 5 10 1 3 « fi 1 13 1 fi B 10 27 1 fi 20 1 21 4 13 4 M 13 5 8 3 11 1 7 3 8 11 1 10 99 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 3 4 1 3 1 4 2 1 1 il 23 2 7 14 R 20 5 7 « 1 9 3 1 5 1 fi 1 •2 3 3 3 100 1 2 2 4 6 1 5 3 8 1 1 « 3 9 1 4 4 3 1 8 1 3 4 10 11 1 10 1 11 3 2 6 7 1 a 3 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 101 1 1 1 102 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 5 5 4 « 4 4 K 12 3 3 « 1 7 1 4 Z 103 104 I 1 1 105 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 106 1 1 1 107 1 1 1 1 1 i i i 108 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 109 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 110 ,, 1 1 1 1 Ill 1 1 1 1 i 35 69 6 15 48 23 71 16 23 32 29 61 11 15 35 30 65 12 23 30 23 2 55 8 18 29 112 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 .. 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 113 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 5 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 fi 1 5 114 1 1 2 2 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 115 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 ] 3 1 1 1 116 1 1 1 117 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 118 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 119 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ?, 2 i:o 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 121 1 1 1 122 1 1 1 123 1 1 2 124 1 125 1 1 1 1 1 126 1 1 1 1 127 1 1 128 1 1 1 1 1 1 129 1 1 1 130 1 131 1 1 ,, 10 16 3 4 9 4 13 5 4 4 15 19 9 1 9 11 20 8 4 8 13 21 10 3 8 322 The President's Kepokt TABLE A — Continued 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 Depaetmbnts a o M a 3 o H "3 B o Q I P o o 1 t en QJ fn O O > o to a 3 "o W Vi 1 s 1 2; CO I 5 1 i 6 3 i 17 i 1 o "a E 6 I g o 1 i o p. s o M O o 1 1 .. • ■ 3 1 111 ^p -3 "o W 3 i 2 i 10 i 1 a .2 1 1 & Z 1 i 2 2 i 2 1 3 i 4 3 21 2 ?. 1 u 1 l_ 4 2 2 5 2 1 '5 i 4 '4 31 2 i 3 13 .2 "E 1 to w i 3 '2 '3 i 3 '2 16 ■0 (D P, A n 2 s '2 3 g be a •3 "o W 1 1 i i i 2 1 "2 12 2 i 3 CO .2 S en © en a .0 4^ cS 1 © « I © 1 a 5 m CI m 6 P. 1 (» ID 1 &_ i 1 i 5 2 2 > 2 ■3 W Xn. THE LATIN LANGUAOE AND LITEEATDEE 132. Elementary Latin — 1st Mj 133. Elementary Latin — 2d Mj 13i. Ceesar : De Bella Gallico, Book I 135. CsBsar : De Bella Gallica. Book II 136. Cfflsar: De Bella Ga^iico, Books III-IT.... 137. Viri Romae 138. Nepos 139. Latin Prose Composition based on Ceesar, 140. Cicero: Oraiiones — 1st Mj 141. Cicero: Orationes — 2d. Mj 142. Latin Prose Composition based on Cicero. 143. Topical Work in Cicero's Orations 144. Virgil: JSneid, Book I 145. Virgil : ^neid. Books II-III 146. Virgil : Mneid, Books IV-VI 147. Virgil (special) 148. Classification of Subjunctives in Virgil and Cicero 149. Cicero : De Senectute 130. Cicero : Tusculan Disputations 151. Terence : Phormia 152. Livy 153. Advanced Latin Prose Composition 154. Cicero : De Aniicitia 155. Cicero: Epistulae 156. Tacitus: Aqricola and Gei-manm 157. Terence and Tacitus 158. Terence and Plautus 159. Plautus: Captivi 160. Odes of Horace, Books I-in 161. Ovid 162. Seneca, the Latin Tragedy 163. Roman Belief with Reference to Soul and Life after Death 164. Special Courses Total - 2 i i 5 - - - . . 2 i 1 5 3 1 '5 2 i 12 i 1 2 1 2 s 1 '2 '2 1 1 ■9 6 1 i i i 10 i i i 1 i 1 6 3 1 2 1 i 1 '3 '3 3 2 io 6 5 6 i 52 2 i 1 i 1 9 1 i 2 i 2 i i 1 i 15 '2 i i 1 i 1 7 2 1 1 '3 1 ') i 2 6 '5 4 '5 IT Xm. ROMANCE LANQnAGE3 AND LITEEATUEE3 165. Elementary French — 1st Mj 166. Elementary French— 2d Mj 167. Intermediate French 168. French Prose Composition no. History of French Literature 171. History and Theory of French Romantic Drama 172. French Literature of Nineteenth Century. . 173. Victor Hugo 174. History of Old French Lit. and Culture . .. 175. Old French Readings 176. Old French Morphology 177. Old French Provencal 178. Old French Epic 179. Old French Drama 180. French PhQology 181. Historical French Phonology 182. Historical French Grammar 183. French Dialects 184. Elementary Spanish 185. Modern Spanish Novels and Dramas 186. Spanish Prose Composition 187. Cervantes : Dan Quixate 188. Old Spanish Readings 189. Elementary Italian 191. Special Courses Total The University Extension Divisioi 323 TABLE A — Continued 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1899 1899-1900 1900-1901 p % •a 0) M 2; w a £ •a s ■a ® a M a a R en U tD > a W 1 m 'bo M ^a M m a .0 1 1 01 1" m a 1 1 T3 ® 1 m s g a M to 1 t-i g u 2 "o W 05 a ri u 'a ;s 7 5 '4 1 1 1 5 1 6 1 9 4 i 2 11 i 7 1 '4 3 3 71 4 12 2 7 2 8 1 38 i u tfi 1 1 *a ID M H 10 6 3 5 2 15 i 9 4 i 1 ii 3 4 104 9 13 3 7 3 1 i '8 1 1 1 1 ■0 P. a en 4 1 2 1 i '7 '3 '2 i 1 1 5 i 4 1 i 1 ■7 1 2 47 6 4 1 2 3 1 5 1 i 24 1 n g P 1 2 1 1 1 i i '2 i '2 2 u 1 1 1 i i 5 I .g 3 tn 4 4 '3 1 i i '2 1 '4 1 9 ■5 1 2 2 2 43 2 8 1 5 '3 'i 20 a ■s « 12 3 3 6 S "2 2 ■4 ■3 H 8 '2 3 '4 1 1 76 12 5 4 7 '3 i '5 1 3 'i 1 46 (A •V L Si II 1 i 2 1 .2 17 7 3 9 4 1 2 4 2 1 2 1 2 4 2 1 14 '3 16 9 '2 3 6 3 1 2 121 14 13 5 12 '3 '4 '8 1 3 2 1 ■ft a M 3_ 4 3 '2 2 i 2 1 1 2 1 1 5 '3 9 5 i 3 '4 2 54 1 6 2 1 i 11 1 P< 3 '2 1 i i '4 i i 1 1 16 1 3 1 3 '3 11 t-t to 1 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 6 1 1 2 6 1 i i i i 1 1 9 3 1 '6 i 43 3 '2 'i i '2 i 10 8 2 2 2 '9 2 2 i 1 3 '7 1 1 14 7 1 ii ■■ i 75 3 2 i i 2 i 10 3 2 1 '4 1 i 3 1 1 6 3 'i 33 1 i i '2 5 1 i 1 i i 1 i '2 3 '2 14 4 i '4 1 i i '2 '3 '6 1 1 '2 i 28 2 i i i 5 4 2 'i 2 ■7 3 ■4 '5 16 5 i i 2 5 i 53 1 ■3 'i 1 1 i 2 i 1 i IS 8 2 '2 2 ii 4 '5 i '2 '8 ie 6 1 1 i 2 7 '2 81 3 '4 i 1 2 i 2 i 1 i i 18 i i ■3 1 i '5 2 1 i 2 i 19 'i 1 1 '2 i i 9 6 ■3 '2 i i i '3 1 i 19 1 '2 3 2 1 i 2 '5 3 ■3 i 6 '8 3 i i 1 5 43 2 'i i i 1 6 6 1 3 1 1 '5 '2 i ■4 1 '3 3 i 1 '8 1 42 5 1 2 1 1 1 'i i 1 i 15 :: 8 2 3 2 3 io 3 '3 '2 "2 io 1 ii 6 i 1 1 1 1 13 1 85 21 2 1 '2 '3 1 '5 1 8 1 i '5 30 2 i 1 i i 1 i 8 3 i 1 ■4 2 '3 i i i 2 i i 1 22 i i 2 3 1 3 1 '3 '2 i '4 '2 3 i 1 '■; 1 33 5 1 1 i 1 i i 11 10 4 3 5 1 1 1 3 i i 1 1 '5 '6 4 i i i 1 51 12 4 2 8 ■3 '4 '5 1 2 '2 1 44 324 The President's Report TABLE &. — Continued 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 Dbpaetments 'be o 1 'p. B Q (-1 1 a ft g u ID > u a 2 "o tn a m Vi I u "3) 1 (D a> "ft a Q 8 t-l 1 1 5 1 p, ft 1 g '2 2 2 2 10 .9 W 1 ^ 1 1 ) 1 . '.'. ■] ■] 2 6 ■7 ■' '9 ■' '.'. f 1 ■3 ■] .". '( 19 3( 1 s « 2 1 1 i i 2 ii i 3 ie '6 2 1 ■4 ) '6 I i ! 2 > I5" "3. S in s u 1 "3 2 i '2 i 9 -0 a D 8 i 1 1 3 8 14 en I i 1 3 .2 an S 3 ^ g a a Z 1 4 1 i 1 1 1 1 .. i i '.'. 2 i G IT 8 12 1 7 7 i2 5 '5 2 i 1 2 i 4 6 i ■3 i i 32 51 m a d .1 a "3 W XIV. GEEMANIO LANGDAGES AND LITEEATnKES 192. Elementary German — 1st Mj 193. Elementary German — 2d Mj 194. Intermediate German 195. Intermediate German Prose Composition.. 196. Advanced German Prose Composition 197. Idiomatic Vocabulary 198. German Idioms and Synonyms 199. Modern German Comedies 200. Contemporaneous German Literature 201. Deutsche Auf s&tze and Stilubungen 203. Deutscher Satzbau 203. Outline History of German Literature 204. Goethe's Lyrical Poetry as an Exponent of 1 •• '2 2 ii 2 '2 15 1 2 3 ■3 19 1 i 5 '8 is '5 '2 34 3 2 20,5 Faust . 2 i 3 1 206. Goethe 207. Schiller 208. Heine 209. Wallenstein 210. Das Nibelungenlied 211. Gothic i i 212. Old High German 213. German Phonology 214. Special Courses Total i 10 XV. ENG. LANOnAGE, LITEEATUEB, KHETOEIO 215. English Composition and Rhetoric (Eng. Theo. Sem. students) 216. Grammarand Composition 217. Preparatory English Composition 218. English I ii 2i9. English II 220. English III 221. English IV 222. Preparatory English Literature 223. Introduction to English Literature 224. Masterpieces of English Literature 225. Studies in Elizabethan Literature 226. Studies in Shakespeare 227. Comedies of Shakespeare 228. Tragedies of Shakespeare 229. The English Epic 230. English Literature of Classical Period .... 231. Beginnings of English Romantic Movement 232. English Romantic Poetry (1750-1830) 233. Eng. Romantic Poets of Early 19th Century 234. English Literature from 1798 to 1832 235. Representative Eng. Writers 19th Century 236. English Essayists of the 19th Century 237. English Novelists of the 19th Century 238. Studies in Works of Robert Browning 239. Studies in Works of Wordsworth 240 Studies in Poetrv of Tennvson. ii '2 "2 15 ii 6 2 241. Studies in Works of Walt Whitman 242. Studies in America'n Literature 244. Laws and Types of Fiction 246. Types of Modern Drama 248. Element of Art in English Literature 250. Elementary Old English 252. Special Courses Total 49 The University Extension Division 325 TABLE A— Continued 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1899 1899-1900 1900-1901 p I H 1 "p. a i 1 0, p ryi 3 u > d *o W tn □ § •a 1 ■0 0) 0) 3. a 1 9 u 1 fi m 0) S2 tai a [A tn & CD 2 II en a '3) H ■a ■p. a 1 3 1 g 3 > a '^ "o W 3 *-fj ca ■| © ID z 9 11 2 48 9 8 37 19 6 10 17 26 'e .. 11 3 1 i '5 9 10 '5 1 1 7 1 1 8 i 4 201 1 -"1 Sn ■J 1 1 '3 i 4 3 p 'St i 13 12 12 13 1 '6 1 1 4 1 2 66 16 16 77 40 11 10 26 42 io ii 4 4 1 2 '2 5 9 13 is 1 6 8 2 7 8 1 i 1 4 351 T3 "3. a 1 P 2 7 4 10 i i 1 26 2 2 ie 9 5 i io ■5 i 2 1 i i i 1 'i 1 2 i 3 1 1 i 75 1 ft g P 2 1 2 1 i •7 8 6- 26 17 2 1 7 '8 '3 i '2 1 i 1 1 1 '4 2 1 1 2 1 i Is" u _3 '5 "o W 9 4 6 2 1 '5 1 '2 1 2 33 6 8 35 14 4 9 18 24 '2 '9 2 1 i '4 7 11 2 '2 7 '2 6 i 3 178 □ 2 1 11 10 11 12 '2 9 2 '5 i 63 8 22 47 16 23 7 24 26 ■4 3 1 i 1 5 1 is 5 6 2 '2 '6 '3 3 22F 1 H t% %a fflK A 2 '3 1. "9" a 1 l_ 20 14 17 14 1 2 14 3 '7 1 1 2 96 16 8 22 85 31 27 16 43 45 '■7 3 1 9 2 2 1 6 1 ii 12 17 2 2 2 2 13 '5 9 i 3 410 3* a i 10 6 7 8 42 4 2 1 22 13 4 7 3 i2 '2 1 1 5 2 1 i 1 '2 2 6 i 2 2 2 6 '3 108 T3 a « 1 c .2 ca Hi a a "ti 3. S « 1 1 a S s 1 □ ■S w '3) .2 '-3 I m '3) M 5 !s "p. a i 3 •0 (D a a p 3 ca .9 •a XVII. MATHEMATI 253. Elementary Algebra 25i. Plane Geometry — 1st Mj . . 255. Solid Geometry 256. Plane Surveying 257. College Algebra 258. Plane Trigonometry 259. Plane Analytic Geometry. 260. Solid Analytic Geometry — 261. Calculus (Osborne's text) — 262. Calculus (Osborne's text)- 263. Calculus Byerly's text)— 1 264. Calculus (Byerly's text)— 2 265. Theory o£ Equations (Todh 266. Advanced Theory of Equa and Panton's text)— 1st Mj 267. Differential Equations 268. Partial Differential Equat 269. Analytic Mechanics 270. Johnson's Least Squares . . 271. Theory of Functions 272. Elliptic Functions 273. Advanced Algebra 274. Projective Geometry 275. Modern Analytic Geometry 276. Theory of Surf aces 277. Analysis 278. Groups 279. Fourier's Heat 280. Pedagogy of Mathematics . cs is Is 2< St d UI bic oi b& t il M Mj ite ns IS. Hi. r's (I text)!!! Juruside 1 i 'i i i ■3 10 i 1 -^ i 2 1 '2 '3 2 1 1 'i 1 "i 1 2 '5 i 3 1 2 "2 1 "i 3 2 i 2 '3 '3 1 i i 1 "2 1 '4 '2 "4 "2 3 1 '3 2 i i 1 4 4 1 4 3 i i 4 1 i '2 '4 i ■3 3 1 4 3 4 i 2 i '7 2 3 1 1 2 '2 i 2 i '3 1 16 5 4 5 4 6 2 'i 3 i ■3 2 1 i 1 'i i 3 i '2 .. '2 1 '4 1 2 12 i 1 '5 2 3 1 2 3 Total ■ 8 i 1 19 i 1 27 "2 2 9 3 15 '2 2 14 1 1 ■■ 29 1 1 2 8 1 1 i 1 1 20 'i 1 25 45 i 1 14 19 XVm. ASTEONOMY 281. Elementary Astronomy 282. Analytical Mechanics 283. Celestial Mechanics Total XXI. GEOLOGY 284. Physiography 285. Special Courses Total 1 XXH. ZOOLOGY 286. Gen. Morphology of Invertebrates — 1st Mj. 287. General Morphology of Vertebrates Total XSYII. BOTANY 288. Methods in Plant Histology 289. General Morphology of Algse and Fungi 290. General Morphology of Bryophytes and Pteridophy tes 291. General Morphology of Gymnosperms and Angiosperms 292. Special Morphology of Gymnosperms 293. Special Morphology of Spermatophytes 294. Laboratory Ecology 295. Field Ecology Total XXVm. PATHOLOGY AND BACTEBIOLOGY 296. Bacteriological Technique 297. Advanced Bacteriology Total -I- The University Extension Division 327 TABLE A- Continued _ 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1899 1S99-1900 1900-1901 1 ta 1 'fcJD o 1 CD 'p. a 5 to m § 1 P. 1- VI QJ Ul t4 3 i '3 2 3 1 2 3 i u > 13 3 m 2 3 '4 1 i 4 1 i i 1 a C-l ■a ID K ? is 3 2 2 '5 2 3 4 5 '2 1 5 i i '2. 40 1 1 ii 4 '5 lo" in a ^j 'a K 3 _^ 5 5 2 '9 3 3 5 9 1 2 1 5 '2 i i '2 '2 58 1 1 i2 4 '5 21 ■0 a 1 3 2 i 2 i i 7 '8 2 10 1 a to 3 1 2 1 '2 1 i 3 1 i i 14 > B '•3 "o w 4 s 1 ■5 2 3 3 4 '2 1 5 i i i i 37 1 1 '4 ■5 11 m a c rt u '5) <§ 4 3 2 1 5 9 3 "2 1 3 1 1 i i '2 i 40 ■3 3 1 1 ii 5 5 i 22 en CO Ct _o tfi 'to « l_ 8 6 3 1 10 11 6 3 6 1 5 2 6 "2 i 1 i 2 i 1 77 1 '3 4 1 .. 1 is 5 i 5 33 •0 'a a 6 (D 3 2 2 1 '3 2 1 1 i 1 i i 1 i 1 21 ■7 2 1 10 ^3 R 1 5 > M 3 •3 ■3 W 4 1 1 1 5 8 2 '2 1 3 1 1 i 1 CS to •a CD « io 3 !l *i *i 2 10 a .2 d t-i l_ 4 2 3 1 15 12 3 1 3 3 5 1 2 1 58 1 1 3 5 7 7 '3 3 1 18 7 7 i 4 7 45 1 1 2 13 1 'ft a u to 0) (^ § 2 1 2 '4 3 1 i 3 1 i 19 '3 3 1 n 2 i 3 3 1 'i '3 1 2 i 18 u > ,3 '■3 ■q K 'i 1 8 6 1 1 1 i 1 21 1 1 2 7 en a 2 tn 'S) « z 5 1 1 13 5 5 1 7 i 2 1 9 1 'i 1 i 1 49 1 1 4 tn OS Tig II _o ca u \ H 5 2 2 *ii 11 6 2 8 '2 2 1 3 70 2 1 3 11 ■0 © p. S tn tn 1 ■5 5 2 1 1 i 2 17 2 2 2 1 3 1 13 3 2 1 ■4 24 i T3 g g P (n <:; u P i 1 '4 2 2 10 i 1 5 5 i 1 i i 2 CD i> u 3 '■3 "o W 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 2G0 261 262 263 264 205 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 ^275 276 277 278 279 280 2 3 '2 2 2 1 4 1 3 i '2 i 24 i 1 2 i 1 'i i 5 2 6 4 ■4 i '2 i i i 2 '2 '2 i 2 3 1 '5 '2 2 3 i '5 i 5 1 1 i2 4 2 1 7 i 2 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 281 282 283 284 285 43 i 1 i 1 9 16 1 18 i 1 25 1 1 ■3 1 i 5 31 '3 3 1 1 ■5 4 4 i 4 18 25 1 1 2 6 6 tJ 3 1 13 3 3 'i 3 3 27 1 1 2 43 2 2 4 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 '2 2 '5 4 4 i ■3 17 1 1 ■4 1 1 'i 2 9 7 i 1 1 9 2 2 ■3 2 19 i 4 2 3 5 1 21 8 2 1 "2 8 43 *i 1 11 2 4 6 2 30 10 4 1 ■§ 10 4 '2 2 1 16 7 2 '5 6 296 297 63 i 37 1 1 1 328 The President's Report TABLE A— Concluded 1892-1893 1893-1894 1894-1895 1895-1896 Depaktkents en a 1 '3) ■ft S 8 1 I 1 Q. O a O " o u a "o W ■3 5 a rt u ■s ■51 z 1 1 2 5 i i 9 I 1 1 2 7 i '4 u "p. s I 1 1 -a £> P. a fi tn a ■q W 2 7 i ■4 14 139 a ■a ID M 1 Z '5 "i 9 172 [A 1 M la 2 12 i '8 23 311 a 1 cn I ., 63 'a p. ft « g 1 1 28 > M 2 1 12 i '$ 22 220 CO d (d ^< "tft z '3 1 4 6 '2 8 1 1 261 en a ■a a h P i i 2 106 P. P, t. ft 1 p i 1 1 8 i .. '2 12 .. 89 bo a 1 XLI. O. T. LITEEATUEE AND INTEEPEETATION 298. General View of Period of Samuel, Saul, David, and Solomon : University students '? American Institute students Total 1 3 XLII. N. T. LITEEATUEE AND INTEEPEETATION 299. Life of Christ In Connection with Gospel of Luke : University students 2 3 5 9 SOO. Life of Christ in Connection with Gospel of John : University students American Institute students 301. The Acts: University students American Institute students 302. Founding of Apostolic Church : University students ■■ '7 Total 111 XLIV. SVSTEMATIC THEOLOGY 303. Apologetics (Eng. Theo. Sem. students) . .. Total XLV. CHUECH HISTOEV 30i. Church History Prior to Constantine (Eng. Theo. Sera, students) 305. The Protestant Reformation : University students Eng. Theo. Sem. students 306. The Early Christian Church (100-313 A. D.) Tot 1. .. . 4 4 85 124 209 33 32 1 1 XLVI. HOMILETICS 307. Outline Course on Homiletics: University students Total LIBEAEY SCIENCE 308. Methodology 309. Elementary Library Economy 310. General Bibliography 811. Technical Methods of Library Science Total 93 ■>M The University Extension Division 329 TABLE k— Concluded 1896-1897 1897-1898 1898-1M9 1899-1900 1900-1901 Ifl S ■o (A cfl T3 m TJ CO T3 T3 § o il ^3 o O •^ •n o O i^ T) a O J^ a -2 Tl p, a ft bi ri s p, S M a) m cfl "S P. Ui rt ft ft iJ eij a ft ft u i ■I Si o o o > O w o p o .2 •a O O fi o o O s fi a > O a en 'El « O M fi in 0) 6 He S cfl 3 & ffj e 15 f? e 1^ cC '■3 & &(§ f^ o O O n n o n o n « H u !J W Z H o u w z ^ H O O W z h-4 H U O W 2 hj H O U W 298 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 7 9 2 7 7 14 3 4 7 R 1(1 2 H 1 1 1 1 4 — 1 1 3 1 8 2 11 ,_ 2 4 7 1 9 ^- 1 16 3 1 5 8 1 4 1 12 2 9 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 299 1 1 2 3 1 2 5 7 2 5 2 7 3 4 1 5 2 1 16 1 5 10 7 17 2 7 8 3 11 1 2 8 2 10 3 4 3 2 1 2 2 2 300 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 5 1 4 4 8 1 7 2 C 1 6 2 2 4 1 1 2 301 1 1 1 2 2 ? 1 1 1 1 13 13 13 13 2 9 2 ? 1 1 1 1 1 1 302 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 27 7 43 1 4 9 3 33 1 14 4 47 2 2 2 2 -^ 2 31 5 1 16 1 10 -^ 1 1 18 1 6 5 5 20 22 12 34 1 8 25 6 7 303 1 1 -^ — 1 1 4 4 5 5 2 2 3 2 5 5 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 -- 2 2 -^~ 1 1 1 1 -^ 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 304 1 1 3 4 1 3 3 fi 2 2 9 3 5 2 3 2 2 2 305 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 1 1 1 2 i 1 3 1 1 i i i '2 2 306 2 -- — 2 3 5 1 ^— 4 1 8 1 1 1 1 — ■1 -^ — 12 4 2 6 4 10 5 4 1 3 2 307 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 6 2 4 9 13 4 1 8 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 6 2 4 10 14 5 1 8 308 5 5 2 3 3 3 309 3 3 1 2 4 6 3 3 S 1 2 1?:::::: 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 11 3 3 1 2 30 12 5 7 11 18 1 6 11 355 641 127 102 412 469 881 182 211 ■188 522 5 1015 282 261 472 676 10 1158 336 282 540 753 18 1311 392 246 573 330 The President's Repoet SUPPLEMENT TO TABLE A Foe the Yeae 1901-1902 OUESES 1 1901-1902 COUESES 1 1901-1902 COUE9ES 1 1901-1902 c Z is Q 2! M.2 .11 "§.2 Is 11 P5 5S Sp 10 2 1 2 6 i2 5 5 '5 i i 3 56 9 3 3 3 9 1 3 4 2 4 6 i 3 9 8 5 1 1 1^ 'Ed II z 1 66 3 1 i 1 1 2 1 1 1 i 1 2 IS 3 3 3 2 2 3 '2 2 14 3 3 3 3 1 2 ■4 1 1 '2 IT [A 2'c i © en a ■' 1 1 '2 i i i i 1 i tctn Si a M.o 32 1 3 128 5 2 2 2 2 26 4 4 6 8 4 5 2 8 2 1 2 38 9 13 5 6 5 3 1 6 1 1 1 2 53 g-g «l b^ a "SE « '2 50 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 12 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 3 2 15 2 5 i 1 9 a la en F i 29 2 i 3 1 1 1 4 i i 2 9 2 6 2 3 2 1 '2 i oS to-' s>. W 1 49 2 1 1 .i 2 i i 2 11 2 2 3 2 3 2 14 5 2 3 3 3 2 ■3 1 1 2 25 s 1 M e.2 z a P. m c: .2 bfltfi oi a 1" en a-a 11 ■SB M 1- II tfi M u OS I 10 2 2 4 ii 7 3 5 6 i 4 58 8 4 2 1 15 4 2 3 9 6 4 3 10 5 1 2 3 8 11 7 1 4 2 i 3 22 5 3 6 7 1 23 7 6 2 2 11 6 1 4 5 1 2 114 13 5 2 1 1 22 7 3 6 1 17 5 11 7 5 17 11 2 1 3 5 8 12 21 9 1 4 2 9 i 2 1 1 8 1 i 1 2 1 1 32 4 i 1 6 3 '9 1 6 '7 3 2 11 3 1 i 4 4 'e 3 '2 1 3 3 1 2 '3 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 28 5 1 1 7 1 i 2 4 1 i 2 2 1 1 2 i 3 7 1 i 1 63 . . XI 113 3 1 '5 2 2 1 2 2 2 8 1 1 5 2 4 1 2 2 2 2 1 '2 '2 'i '2 2 i 1 i 5 9 2 2 5 1 1 1 2 '2 1 '3 '2 1 i 33 8 2 1 2 1 i 3 1 i 4 2 64 Total VI «« 1 67 114 3 115 117 '2 5 118 ?, 7 119 1 § 1 9 10 120 1 129 2 11. 69 ** Total XII 13. U. 70(E.T. S).. 20 6 2 1 4 4 2 5 2 2 4 5 i 7 5 12 10 '6 1 1 '3 83 7 7 4 10 3 1 '6 5 i 1 1 28 17 6 4 9 5 3 1 8 2 3 4 6 1 1 1 12 5 18 14 1 7 1 1 1 4 135 19 11 6 18 6 1 4 11 6 2 2 2 10 3 2 1 1 2 1 '3 ■3 1 i '3 2 6 6 1 5 i '2 44 4 3 2 9 2 '2 '2 1 1 2 13 * . .. 73 t n. 18. 1 5 2 1 19 74 20. Total... II 76 77 73 134 21. 135 3 136 2 80 137 1 81 138 139 n Total VII 82 3 140 2 141 142 3 144 4 Total.... Ill Total VIII ^ 1 ^5 ! 86 j «^ \ 95 (A. IS.).. Total IX 98 j 99 1 100 j 102 i 104 ( loL::::;::;! 106 z«. 145 146 147 i 149 6 151 3 152 in 153 7 155 160 39. Total.... IV ft 161 1 *t 40. ■U. lei:: 163 '? Total XIII 165 li~ 42 . 43 45 49 7 .50. 166 fi 5' 167 3 168 7 54 170 3 *i 1 .'ili. . . 180 184 1 •57 X .58 185 3 .59 186 188 189 1 i;o Total til 1 For title of course consult corresponding number in || English Theological Seminary Student. (Not counted Table A. as a new course, 1901-2.) *The Method of Some Subjects in the Elementary § Homer: Odyssey. (New course, 1901-2.) School Curriculum. (New course, 1901-2.) "Introduction to the Greek Drama. (New course, t Urban Life in the United States. (New course, 1801--.) 1901-2.) *tCatullus. (New course, 1901-2.) t Origin of Social Institutions. (New course, 1901-2.) *t Comedies of Moli6re. ( New course, 1901-2.) The Univebsity Extension Division 331 SUPPLEMENT TO TABLE A.— Continued COtTESES 1 XIII— Colli. 192. 193. 194. 19.5. 197. 198. 199. 201. Total. XIV 1901-1902 K a 203 Total.. XV 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222. 224. 226. II. 227. 228. 229. 230. 231. 232. 233. 2.S6. 237. 2.38. 239. 210. 241. 243! 245. 246. *t. 250.. Total. «.2 259 1 1 90 13 15 14 17 1 22 3 7 1 _J_ 94 20 2 47 112 12 56 10 6 47 39 6 1 7 8 1 4 4 2 8 8 15 13 13 2 5 3 7 13 3 5 1 1 481 111 5fR 20 14 OS CODESES 1 S.2 265. 266. 267. 269. tt. 273. 274. 279. 280. 253. %■ 255. 257. 258. XVII 259. 260. 261. 263. 264. 1901-1902 281. 282. Total... XVIII 284. Total. XXI 286. 287. Total. . XXII Total.. XXVII 289. 290. 291. II II. 294. 295. Total. 50 67 o 01-= 23 COUESES 1 1901-1902 296. 297. XXVIII Total. XLI (A. L S.) . (E. T. S.). Total..., XLII 299 300 301 (A.I. S.). Total . . . . XLIV 303 (E. T. S.: Total.... XLV 304 (E. T. S.).. Total . XLVI 307 (E. T. S.). Total . Lib. Science 311 Total Grand total. 132 tew; M.2 23 23 14S5 438 2 & 338 (>0 o3 a 3 Oi-J W 15 15 709 1 For title of course consult corresponding number in Table A. 2 This represents only those whose time expired on or before June 30, 1901, who reinstated during the scholastic year 190J-2. _ In addition to these there were 61 whose time expired during 1901-2 who reinstated during the same year. * Italian Novels. (New course, 1901-2. ) tOutline History of Italian Literature. (New course, 1901-2). tEnglishV. (New course, 1901-2.) II Shakespeare : Typical Plays. (New course, 1901-2.) § English Literature from 1832-92. (New course,1901-2. ) "American Literature: The Renaissance of New Eng- land. (New course, 1901-2.) *+The Short Story in English and American Literature. (New course, 1901-2.) "t Plane Geometry, 2d Mj. (New course, 1901-2.) *l| Trigonometry, Special. (New course, 1901-2.) *§ Calculus, Special. (New course, 1901-2.) tt Analytic Statics. (New course, 1901-2.) tJElementary Plant Physiology. (New course, 1901-2.) II II General Morphology of the Spermatophytes. (New course, 1901-2.) §§ Clinical Examination of Blood and Secretions. (New course, 1901-2.) t+Old Testament Prophecy. (New course, 1901-2.) til Old Testament Worship. (New course, 1901-2.) tgOrigen and Augustine. (New course, 1901-2.) til The Ecumenical Councils. (New course, 1901-2.) ||§The Missions to the Northern and Western Tribes. (New course, 1901-2.) *** Constructive Homiletics —English Theological Sem- inary. (New course, 1901-2.) Total number of different courses given in the decade, 338. 332 The President's Keport TABLE B Summary of Eegistkation by Depaetments October 1, 1892, to June 23, 1902 Departments Registra- tions Lapsed Courses Renewed Course's Completed Courses Dropped Holding Over July 1,1902 I A. Philosophy I B. Education II. Political Economy III. Political Science IV. History VI. Sociology and Anthropology VII. Comparative Religion VIII. Semitic Languages and Literatures IX. Biblical and Patristic Greek X. Sanskrit and Indo-European Philology . XI. Greek Language and Literature XII. Latin Language and Literature XIII. Romance Languages and Literatures . . . XIV. Germanic Languages and Literatures . . XV. English Lang, and Lit. and Rhetoric. . . XVII. Mathematics XVIII. Astronomy XXI. Geology XXIL Zoology XXVII. Botany XXVIII. Pathology and Bacteriology XLI. Old Test. Literature and Interpretation . XLII. New Test. Literature and Interpretation XLIV. Systematic Theology XLV. Church History XL VI. Homiletics Library Science Total 141 161 61 85 346 84 9 287 221 6 90 446 177 256 1,135 296 10 20 13 143 6 30 101 11 26 27 36 3 1 1 2 1 1 10 3 2 13 3 72 72 27 60 197 42 5 136 69 3 52 262 94 148 419 134 5 5 5 86 5 6 24 5 15 11 51 55 26 16 102 32 3 147 130 3 25 129 43 69 465 122 3 8 3 35 22 73 4 8 7 12 21 35 9 9 49 11 2 14 25 is 58 40 41 264 43 2 7 5 23 1 2 6 2 3 9 15 4,224 461 1,968 1,593 709 TABLE C SUMMAEI OF ReGISTEATIONS BY YeAE3 October 1, 1892, to June 23, 1902 1892-93 1893-94 1894-93 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Holding over New registrations Lapsed courses renewed Total registration Registrations completed Registrations dropped . . 93 4 4 85 124 209 38 32 139 172 sii 63 28 220 261 48i 106 89 284 355 64i 127 102 412 469 ^ 2 88i 182 211 488 522 53 1,015 282 261 472 676 10* 1,158 336 282 540 753 185 1,311 392 246 673 799 136 1,485 438 338 1 This represents only those who reinstated in a dif- ferent scholastic year from that in which their term ex- pired. There were 169 others who reinstated in the same scholastic year in which their term expired, of whom obviously no account could be taken in this table. 2 There were 5 students whose time expired during the scholastic year 1897-98 who reinstated in their respective courses during that year. 3 This represents only those whose time expired on or before June 30, 1898, and who reinstated during the scho- lastic year 1893-99. In addition to these there were 34 whose time expired during 1898-99 and who reinstated during the same year. *Thi3 represents only those whose time expired on or before June 30, 1899, and who reinstated during the scho- lastic year 1899-1900. In addition to these there were 25 whose time expired during 1899-1900 and who reinstated during the same year. 5 This represents only those whose time expired on or before June 30, 1900, and who reinstated during the scho- lastic year 1900-1901. In addition to these there were 44 whose time expired during 1900-1901 and who reinstated during the same year. 6 This represents only those whose time expired on or before June 30, 1901, and who reinstated during the scho- lastic year 1901-2. In addition to these there were 61 whose time expired during 1901-2 who reinstated during the sam© year. The University Extension Division 333 TABLE D Table Showing Numbee of Insteuctors, Codeses, Students, and Eeoisteations by Yeabb OcTOBEE 1, 1892, TO June 23, 1902 1892-93 1893-94 1894^95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 23 .33 41 44 59 66 73 80 89 39 62 78 97 128 151 186 208 208 82 185 279 425 555 755 845 930 1,081 93 209 311 481 641 881 1,015 1,158 1,311 1901-02 Teachers giving instruction Courses actually given Different students enrolled Total registration in all courses. 92 217 1,249 1,485 TABLE E Gross Income feom Mateicdlation and TniTioN Fees in the Coeeespondence-Stddy Depaetment, 1892-1902 1892-1893 $1,128.40 1,717.00 1,898.00 2,870.92 4,386.03 1897-1898 $7,278.02' 1893-1894 1898-1899 7,996.93 1894-1895 1899-1900 10,010.55 1895-1896 1900-1901 12,062.25 1896-1897 1901-1902 13,165.61 TABLE F Table Showing Those who Have Given Instedotion by Cokeespondbnce Each Yeab Octobee 1, 1892, TO June 23, 1902 — indicates that instruction was given Names 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-95 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 1. Abbott E. W 2. Allen, P. S 3. Almstedt, H. B 4. Anderson, G 5. Bailey, J. W 6. Bensley, E. V 7. Berry, G. R. 8. Blackburn, F. A 9. Boyd, C. E 10. Boyd, J. H 11. Bronson, F. M 12. Bru6re,RW 13. Bruner, J. D 14. Buck, CD 15. Buckley, E. J 16. Bulkley, J. E 17. Burgess, T.C 18. Burnet, P. B 19. Burton, E. D 20. Calhoun, F.H.H.... 21. Cameron, M. C. E. . . . 22. Capps, E 23. Cary, A 24. Carpenter, F. I 25. Castle, C. F 26. Catterall, R. C. H. . . . 27. Chamberlain, C. J. . . 28. Chamberlin, T. C... 29. Child, CM 30. Clement, W.K 31. Colyer, F. H 32. Conard, L. M 33. Cowles, H. C ' Includes an item of 3 ).00 not earned in 1897-i 334 The President's Report TABLE Y— Continued Names 3i. Crandall, C. E 35. Cutting, S.W 36. Damon, L.T 37. Davidson, R.B 38. Davies, H. E 39. Davis, W.S 40. Dewey, J 41. Fellows, G.E 42. Fite, W 43. Flint, E. P 44. Foster, G. B 45. Goodrich, H.I 46. Goodspeed, E. J. . . 47. Goodspeed, G. S . . . 48. Guyer, M. F 49. Harding, W.F 50. Harper, R.F 51. Harper, W.R 52. Hastings, C.H 53. Hatfield, H. R 54. Henderson, C R. . . 55. Herrick, R 56. Hill,W 57. Hoblit, M. L 58. Hoben, T. A 59. Hoover, W 60. Howerth, I.W 61. Howland, G. 62. Hoxie, R.F 63. Hulbert, E. B 64. Ingres, M 65. James, E. J 66. Jessen, K. D 67. Johnson, F 68. Jonas, J. B. E 69. Judson, H. P 70. Kelly, E.W 71. Kern, P. O 72. Kimble, R.G 73. von Klenze, C 74. Knox, F. A 75. Kummel, H. B 76. Laves, K 77. Linn, J. W 78. Livingstone, B. E. . 79. Locke, G. H 80. Lovett, R. M 81. MaoClintock, P. L. 82. MacClintock, W. D 83. IVIacMillan, D. P . . . 84. Manny, F. A 85. Marsh, G. L 86. Maschke, H 87. Mathews S.. 88. McLennan, S. F... 89. McMurry, C. A.... 90. Meyer, J.J 91. Miller, F.J 92. Moenkhaus, W. J.. 93. Moncrief, J. W 94. Monroe, P 95. Moody, W. V 96. Moore, A. W 1892-93 1893-91 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 The University Extension Division 335 TABLE ¥— Continued Names 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 97. Moore, C. H 98. Moore, E. H 99. Morgan, O. T 100. Moulton, F. R 101. Mulfinger.G. A 102. Neff, T. L 103. Owen, W. B 104. Pellett, S. P 105. Pietsch,K 106. de Poyen-Bellisle, R 107. Price, I. M 108. Radford, M. L 109. Raycroft, E. B 110. Reynolds, M 111. Robertson, J. C 112. Robson, A 113. Rolfe, H. W 114. Sanders, F.K 115. Schmidt-Wartenberg, H. 116. Schub, P. O 117. Schutze, M 118. Seidenadel, C. W 119. Shepardson, P. W 120. Shorey, P 121. Sisson, E. O 122. Slaught, H. E 123. Smedley, P. W 124. Smith, H. J 125. Smith, J. M. P 126. Sparks, E. E 127. Spillman, G. L 128. Starr, P 129. Stratton, A. W 130. Stuart, H. W 131. Talbot, M 132. Tanner, A. E 133. Tanner, J. S 134. Thatcher, O.J 135. Thomas, W. I 136. Thurber.C. H 137. Tolman, A. H 138. Tower, W. L 139. Triggs, O. L 140. Troop, J. G. C 141. Tufts, J. H 142. Varney, E. D 143. Veblen, T. B 144. Vincent, G.B 145. Votaw, C. W 146. Walker, A. T 147. Wergeland, A. M 148. West, M 149. Whitford, H. N 150. Wilcox, W. C 151. Willett,H.L 152. Wolcott, J. D 153. Wood, LP 154. Woodruff, C.E 155. Young, E. P 156. Youngr, J. W. A 157. Zueblin, C Total 23 33 41 44 59 73 89 92 PHYSICAL CULTUEE AND ATHLETICS To the President of the University: Sir : I submit herewith my report on the condition of the Department of Physical Culture and Athletics during the first decade of the University. The Department of Physical Cidture and Athletics was organized October 1, 1892, with the following corps of instructors : Amos Alonzo Stagg, Associate Professor and Director; Dr. Alice Bertha Foster, Tutor; Joseph Edward Kaycroft, Assistant; Horace Butterworth, Assistant; Charles W. Allen, Assistant. No change was made in the ofBcers of instruction until the Autumn Quarter of 1894, when Miss Kate S. Anderson, Instructor, was placed in charge of the women's work, in place of Dr- Poster, who had resigned in June. Miss Bertha Steig was also appointed Assistant. Miss Anna P. Davies temporarily conducted the women's work diu:ing the Summer Quarter of 1894. The Department began its work on October 1, 1892, when the candidates for the football team met for the first time in Washington Park for practice. Thirteen men reported. Compulsory work in physical training began during the third week in October. The women met in three classes in one of the rooms on the fourth floor of Cobb Hall. The men took their physical culture on an open lot west of the Quadrangles. The work of the former consisted of free standing exercises, while the latter were trained in football formations without scrimmage. The Gymnasiimi was thrown open for use on November 30, 1892, and the classes were put through squad drills until the completion and fitting up of the building, about two months later. From the beginning of the University, compulsory work in physical training was made a , requirement for graduation. In this the University became a pioneer among western institu- tions, some of which had a requirement in military drill, but no department of physical culture. Since then nearly every college and university of note in the piiddle West has added a depart- ment of physical training. Upon the completion of the Gymnasium, early in the Winter Quarter, the practice of exercises for both men and women, which had before been conducted under difficulty (on account of cramped quarters, bad weather, and lack of conveniences) on three days of the week, was extended to one half -hour's work on Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday. Four to seven classes, in different forms of exercise, have been conducted regularly since that time, in addition to the training for athletic teams, which a student had the option of taking. The following paragraph appeared in the General Regulations which were to govern the University on its organization : "All students will be examined as to their physical condition on entering the University, and at intervals dming the com-se. The University physician, who will make the examination, will give each student thus examined a written statement, in detail, of his physical condition, indicating constitutional weaknesses, and forms of exercise, desirable and undesirable, for the individual in question. A student will not be permitted to study in the University four con- secutive Quarters without a physician's certificate that he may do the work of the fourth Quarter without injury to his health. The Director of the Department of Physical Education will give his personal attention, not only to the organization and training of athletic teams, and the gen- eral athletic interests of the students, but especially to the physical training of each student in so far as it is practicable." 336 Physical Cultuke and Athletics 337 The original regulations demanded ten Quarters' work in Physical Culture, unless excused on account of disability or other sufficient reasons. This rule was changed on April 24, 1893, to read: " Six Quarters' work in Physical Culture is required of Academic College students, and four Quarters of University College students." This change was deemed advisable in order to give the student freedom where he would enjoy it most, and had the greatest need for it, and also because in the enforcement of the requirements it was not to the advantage of the student to omit his work during two Quarters at the beginning of his course. As the difficulties of enforcing the requirement presented themselves, additional rules were made. At the beginning no penalty was attached to non-attendance at classes, but there was general statement that students were required to take Physical Culture — the idea of the Depart- ment at the beginning being to require eleven Quarters of work. No statement in definite form, however, was made to this effect, so that one of the first actions of the Board of Physical Cul- ture, which was organized March 27, 1893, was to announce definitely that "The requirements for graduation shall be thirty-six Majors and ten Quarters' work in Physical Culture." It was thought that the change of the rule so as to require six Quarters' work in the Academic College would have the effect of preventing delinquency, inasmuch as the student would want to get his transfer to the University Colleges as quickly as possible. This he could not get if he were deficient in Physical Culture. Later it was found that this was not sufficient inducement, and a regulation was passed, stating that " students taking an excessive number of cuts will not be allowed to continue their University work until they shall conform to the requirements." This was strengthened afterward by the action of the Board of Physical Culture and Athletics, in passing a rule, December 7, 1895, that, " If a student have ten or more absences in the course of Physical Culture,, no credit will be allowed him for the work; if he have five to ten absences, he will receive 50 per cent, credit for the work." Later this rule was changed to conform with the general requirements of all University work, namely: "Should the number of a student's absences reach 25 per cent, of the whole number of class exercises, he will receive credit for one-half of the course. No credit will be given when the number of absences, is equal to 50 per cent, of the class exercises." In enforcing the requirement of ten Quarters of Physical Cultui'e it has been necessary, in three or four cases, to have students remain in residence after their other University work was completed. The Administrative Board of Physical Culture and Athletics met for the first time on March 27, 1893. The members of this pioneer body for the administration of the Department of Physical Culture and Athletics were: The President, ex officio. Associate Professor A. A. Stagg, ex Officio, Director of Physical Culture. Dr. Alice B. Foster, ex officio, Tutor, Physical Culture. Professor H. P. Judson, Political Science. Associate Professor J. H. Tufts, Philosophy. Associate Professor Franklin Johnson, Church History. Associate Professor Marion Talbot, Sanitary Science. Mr. William Caldwell. In 1894 the newly appointed Examining Physician, Dr. C. P. Small, and in 1895 the new Recorder, Associate Professor G. S. Goodspeed, became ex officio members of the Board. In May, 1896, it was voted to admit one student representative each from the Graduate School, the Divinity School, the Senior College, and the Jrmior College, to membership on the Board. Messrs. H. T. Clarke, H. E. Jones, H. G. Gale, and John Mentzer were elected by their respective schools. 338 The Peesident's Kepoet In 1898 it was deemed wise to have one of the Deans serve as an ex-officio member of the Board, and Associate Professor James H. Tufts was appointed. During this year the Depart- ment of Military Science and Tactics was organized in which work might be taken as an equiva- lent for Physical Culture. Since then the instructor in this Department as well as the instructor in the Department of Physical Culture in the School of Education have become members ex officio of the Board. The Examining Physician for the men's Department has also become a member ex officio. In the spring of 1893, in response to a request from President Harper, Mr. Marshall Field granted the University the use of the vacant block situated between Fifty-sixth and Fifty- seventh streets and Ellis and Greenwood avenues for an athletic field. Arrangements were at once made for inclosing this space. A large proportion of the lumber necessary for the pm:- pose was contributed by the John Spry Lumber Company, and the work of nailing on the boards was performed gratuitously by the students. The field was graded, sodded, and prepared for baseball by the latter part of June, and the first game on our grounds was played between the 'Varsity team and that of the University of Virginia, during examination week, 1893. The diamond faced from the northeast to the southwest. The summer was extremely hot, the water supply limited, and, notwithstanding the most constant care, the grass withered and died. A football field was laid out at the beginning of the Autumn Quarter, but there were no seats arranged until the Thanksgiving Day game, when some wooden horses and planks that were being used in the construction of the new University buildings were utilized as a temporary stand. The same arrangement continued during the baseball season of 1894, but the need of something better and of a more permanent character was so apparent that subscriptions for a grandstand were solicited early in that year, the total sum received from this source being $818.95. This is the only subscription for athletic purposes which the Department has ever solicited. The covered stand in the northwest corner of the field, seating about 1,200 people, which was finished in time for the football games at a cost of $1,210.50, was a result of the co-operation of students and Faculty. The chaii-s of the grandstand were provided, in part, through the courtesy of Mr. John J. Mitchell. In the spring of 1895 a new diamond, facing from the northwest toward the southeast, was laid out, and a large quantity of black dirt was put on the outfield. A running-track of a little less than four laps to the mile was built at an expense of $465. In the autumn of that year additional accommodations for the Thanksgiving Day football game, in the form of bleachers seating 3,600 people, were erected at a cost of $900. In the spring of 1896 a large quantity of clay and black dirt was put on the field outside the diamond, and sowed with clover and grass seed. This secured an excellent txirf for both football and baseball. In the fall of 1898 new bleachers capable of holding 6,000 people were erected, and in the following autumn additional bleachers for 4,000 persons were built. During the winter of 1899 the University acquired possession of the block of land adjoining the athletic field and placed a twelve-foot board fence around it. This purchase added much needed room to the field and per- mitted the moving of the east bleachers back from the running-track and baseball field for the spring athletics. A new quarter-mile running-track, averaging more than 20 feet wide was built of cinders in the spring of 1900. The Intercollegiate Conference meet which was organized that year accepted our offer for the free use of our field and track. The Gymnasium building, which was to be a temporary structure and built of rough brick, was erected during the Autumn Quarter of 1892 at a cost of about $18,000. The Women's Gym- Physical Culture and Athletics 339 nasium which was torn down in the summer of 1901 to make room for the University Commons buildings was 100 feet by 50 feet, of which 50 feet by 30 feet was devoted to baths, lockers dressing-rooms, and office. The exercising room was fitted up with apparatus of the best quality. Diu:ing the years 1901 and 1902 the women used the chapel of the Hyde Park Baptist Church for temporary quarters. The Men's Gymnasium was 200 feet by 50 feet, the exercising rooms having the large dimensions of 140 feet by 50 feet. Besides being fitted up with the finest apparatus, it possessed space and equipment for training in many kinds of outdoor sports, including ground practice, batting, and base-sliding for baseball; sprinting, pole-vaulting, high and broad jumping, shot-putting, etc. In addition to these there were handball courts, a tennis court, and a running-track of a fraction over twelve laps to the mile. The Men's Gymnasium originally contained 200 lockers. Additional lockers were built at different times, which increased the locker supply to 500. The Women's Gymnasium also had to enlarge its locker supply, while the number of dressing-rooms was doubled. In the summer of 1894 a special room for the physical examination of students was built over the locker room in the Gymnasium. This was used also as the library room, where a small selected library was kept. Other changes consisted in the laying of a linoleum carpet on the running track, at a cost of $200, and the partitioning off of a room for rubbing purposes. The old Gymnasium was a unique building in gymnasium construction, and will pass out of existence still unique. The idea of a combination gymnasium and a diminutive athletic field under one roof was a new feature in physical training at the time of its construction. The plan of having a dirt floor at one end of the exercising room fturnished special advantages for the practice of certain kinds of out door sports. The newer development of a special building for athletic work during the winter months is a larger consummation of the same idea. On Thanksgiving Day, 1901, the corner stone of the magnificent new Gymnasium was laid with appropriate ceremonies. This accomplishment was brought about through the splendid munificence of Mr. Adolph C. Bartlett, one of the Trustees of the University, who wished to rear the most useful and fitting memorial to the memory of his son, Frank Dickinson Bartlett, who died while in the midst of his college course at Harvard. The building is 200 feet by 80 feet and has two stories and a basement. It is located on the southeast corner of the athletic field. The top floor is an immense exercising room wholly free from pillars and other obstructions. A thirteen-lap-to-the-mile running-track twelve feet wide is suspended from the girders holding the roof. The ground floor contains locker rooms, Faculty exercising room, swimming-tank, and bath rooms and offices. The basement will be devoted to special rooms for the athletic teams. The building when finished and equipped will cost $260,000. It will be finished for occupancy in the fall of 1903. INSTRUCTION During the first ten years of the University, courses were offered to men in the following forms of exercises: calisthenics and free movements; setting-up drills; Swedish movements; pulley- weights; dumb-bells; bar-bells; iron wands; Indian clubs; wall machines, ladders, etc.; light apparatus; elementary, intermediate, and advanced work on heavy apparatus; corrective work on special apparatus; general work on various apparatus; tumbling; advanced gymnastics; wrestling; fencing; basketball; handball; tennis; golf; swimming; track and field sports; pole- vaulting, hurdling, and sprinting; cross-country and long-distance running; baseball, and football. 340 The President's Eepoet TABLE A The Staff of the Division of Physical Cultuee and Athletics, 1892-1902 Name Title Year Amos Alonzo Stagg Professor and Director 1892-1902 Alice Bertha Poster, M.D. Tutor 1892-1894 Joseph Edward Raycroft, M.D. Instructor and Examining Physician 1892-1902 Horace Butterworth Instructor 1892-1902 Charles W. Allen Assistant for Divinity School 1892-1895 Charles Porter Small, M.D. Examining Physician 1892-1902 Kate Anderson Instructor 1894-1897 Anna F. Davies Tutor (Summer Quarter) 1894^1895 Clara Tilton , Assistant (Summer Quarter) 1897 Bertha Steig Assistant 1894^1899 Gertrude Dudley Instructor 1897-1902 Dorcas Merriman Assistant (Summer Quarter) 1898 Ida Purniss Assistant 1899-1902 Clara Comstock Assistant 1901-1902 William P. Bender Assistant (Winter Quarter) 1901 Perry J. Payne Assistant 1897-1902 Assistant Coaches Name Department Year Charles W. Allen Football 1896-1897 Henry Gordon Gale Football 1898-1899 Charles Foster Roby Football 1898 Clarence Bert Herschberger Football 1899-1901 Walter Scott Kennedy Football 1900 Ralph C. Hamill Football 1901 Morris Gordon Clarke Baseball 1899 Fred. Merrifield Baseball 1901 T. Burton Smith Baseball 1902 Faculty Eepbesentatives on the Administeative Boaed of Physical Cultuee and Athletics, 1893-1902 The President, Chairman Professor Amos Alonzo Stagg, Director, ex officio - 1893-1902 Dr. Alice Bertha Foster, ex officio --------- 1893-1894 Professor Harry Pratt Judson --- -- 1893 Assistant Professor Franklin Johnson --------- 1893-1894 Associate Professor Marion Talbot -.--...-- 1893-1895 Assistant Professor James H. Tufts - .-. 1893 Mr. William Caldwell ------ 1893 Miss Kate Anderson, ex officio - - - 1894-1897 Associate Professor Robert Francis Harper -------- 1893-1899 Associate Professor Oliver J. Thatcher - - 1893-1902 Mr. William Hill - - --.--. 1893-1894 Examining Physician Charles Porter Small ------- 1894-1902 Professor Shailer Mathews - - - - . - 1894-1899 Professor Carl Darling Buck - . - 1894-1902 Physical Culture and Athletics 341 The Recorder, ea; o^cw ------------ 1895-1902 Assistant Professor Myra Reynolds --------- 1895-1898 Professor Frank Frost Abbott 1896-1897, 1899-1900 Miss Gertrude Dudley, ex officio - - - - 1897-1902 Associate Professor James Hayden Tufts, Dean, ex officio ----- 1898-1899 Assistant Professor George Herbert Mead -------- 1898-1899 Professor Eri Baker Hulbert, Dean, ex officio - 1899-1902 Professor John Merle Coulter - . . - 1899-1902 Professor Starr Willard Cutting ----- 1899-1901 Professor Edward Capps ----- 1900-1902 Lieutenant-Colonel Brinkerhoff, ex officio - - - 1901-1902 Assistant Professor Carl J. Kroh, ex officio ------- 1901-1902 Dr. Joseph Edward Raycrof t, ex officio - - - - 1901-1902 Mr. Horace Butterworth, ex officio 1901-1902 Professor George Stephen Goodspeed 1901-1902 Student Kepbesentativbs on Athletic Questions on the Administeatite Boaed of Athletics 1896 — Henry Gordon Gale, representing the Graduate Schools. Hayden E. Jones, representing the Divinity School. Henry Tefft Clarke, representing the Senior Colleges. John Mentzer, representing the Junior Colleges. 1896-97 — Henry Gordon Gale, representing the Graduate Schools. Robert B. Davidson, representing the Divinity School. John Mentzer, representing the Senior Colleges. LeRoy Tudor Vernon, representing the Junior Colleges. 1897-98 — Henry Gordon Gale, representing the Graduate Schools. Robert Bailey Davidson, representing the Divinity School. Charles Lindsey Burroughs, representing the Senior Colleges. LeRoy Tudor Vernon, representing the Junior Colleges. 1898-99 — Fred Harvey Hall Calhoun, representing the Graduate Schools. Fred Merrifield, representing the Divinity School. LeRoy Tudor Vernon, representing the Senior Colleges. Kellogg Speed, representing the Junior Colleges. 1899-00 — Allen T. Burns, representing the Graduate Schools. Fred Merrifield, representing the Divinity School. LeRoy Tudor Vernon, representing the Senior Colleges. Kellogg Speed, representing the Junior Colleges. 1900-01 — Clarence Bert Herschberger, representing the Graduate Schools. Howard B. Woolston, representing the Divinity School. Edward C. Kohlsaat, representing the Senior Colleges. James M. Sheldon, representing the Junior Colleges. 1901-02 — James Finch Royster, representing the Graduate Schools. John Wellington Hoag, representing the Divinity School. Frank McNair, representing the Senior Colleges. Philip Armour Sunderland, representing the Junior Colleges. 342 The President's Eepoet TABLE B The Athletic Teams of the Univeksity captains Year Football Baseball Track and Field Athletics Tennis 1892-1893 A. A. Stagg, Act. Capt. A. A. Stagg, Act. Capt. W. H. Prescott 1893-1894 A. R. E. Wyant F. D. Nichols H. C. Holloway W. S. Bond 1894-1895 C. W. Allen H. D. Abells H. C. Holloway C. B. Neel 1895-1896 C. W. Allen H. D. Abells C. U. Bachell^ W. S. Bond 1896-1897 C. F. Roby H. T. Clarke F. F. Steigmeyer* T. H. Patterson P. Rand 1897-1898 C. B. Herschberger G. H. Sawyer F. H. Calhoun C. D. Halsey 1898-1899 W. S. Kennedy F. Merrifield B. B. Smith E. L. Poulson 1899-1900 W. S. Kennedy L. T. Vernon W. A. Moloney H. N. Gottlieb 1900-1901 K. Speed T. B. Smith W. A. Moloney P. P. Bruce 1901-1902 J.R.Henry* J. M. Sheldon F. E. Harper F. G. Moloney J. W. Bingham TABLE C The Members of the Teams Football Baseball Track and Field Athletics Tennis 1892-93 W. Rullkoetter, c. G. N. Knapp, r. g. W. R. Smith, 1. g. A. R. E. Wyant, r t. R. E. Brennemann, ) , . C. W. Allen, \ ^' ^■ H. T. Chace, r. e. W. B. Conover, 1. e. J. E. Raycroft, q. b. C. B. McGillivray, 1. h. b. A. A. Stagg, r. h. b. W. Rapp, f. b. Substitutes H. G. Gale J. LaMay J. V. Fradenburg 1893-94 A. R. E. Wyant, c, Capt. W. Rullkoetter, ) N. W. Flint, \ ^- ^■ C.W.Allen, ) , W.R. Smith, } ^-S- G. R. Sikes, r. t. G. N. Knapp A. M. Wyant, 1. t. H. G. Gale, ) P. E. Hering, \ J. LaMay, ) , H.T.Chace, 5 '■ ®- J. E. Raycroft, q. b. F. D. Nichols, r. h. b. C. K. Bliss, ; , , , J. Flint, \^-^- ^■ C. B. Neel, f. b. 1992-93 F. D. Nichols, c. A. A. Stagg, p. W. H. Prescott, 1st b. H. M. Adkinson, 2d b. H. G. Gale, ) o^ ,, L. B. Vaughan, \ "^^ '^■ R. W. Webster, s. s. C. B. McGillivray, r. f. C. S. Pike, c. f. W. B. Conover, 1. 1. Substitutes H. D. Speer A. E. Logie 1893-94 C. S. Pike, o. F. D. Nichols, p., Capt H. D. Abells, 1st b. H. M. Adkinson, 2d b. J. S. Brown, 3d b. R. W. Webster, s. s. H. G. Gale, r. f. F. E. Hering, c. f. F. Grant, 1. f. Substitute C. B. McGillivray 1893-94 C. V. Bachell6 S. D. Barnes C. R. Barrett G. Bliss W. P. Behan H. D. Church H. L. Clarke A. E. Davis A. A. Ewing H. Holloway, Captain H. D. Hubbard W. B. Keen A. M. Wyant J. LaMay E. F. Mandell T. L. NefE E. W. Peabody 1892-93 W. H. Prescott V. R. Lansingh C. A. Torrey C. S. Pike 1893-94 W. S. Bond, Captain P. Rand V. R. Lansingh W. B. Chalmers C. B. Neel R. C. Dudley C. B. McGillivray * Resigned Physical Cultuee and Athletics 343 TABLE C— Continued Football Baseball Substitutes W. R. Rapp H. G. Lozier H. D. Speer 1894^95 A.R.E.Wyant, ) N. D. Flint, 5 °- C. W. Allen, r. g.. Captain W. RuUkoetter, 1. g. G. N. Knapp, r. t. 0. F. Roby, 1. t. J. LaMay, r. e. B. R. Yundt, 1. e. F. E. Bering, q. b. H. I. Coy, ) , ^ A. A. Ewing, \ ^- '^^ °- F. D. Nichols, 1. h. b. H. G. Gale, If ^ C. B- JHerschberger, )' ' Substitutes W. E. Garrey R. N. Tooker H. W. Black V. E. McCaskill H. T.Chace 1895-96 P. S. Allen, c. B. E. Looney, ) T. L. Ketman, ] ^- ^■ W. RuUkoetter, 1. g. C W. Alien,!, t., Captain. E. V. Williamson, 1. 1. C. F. Roby, r. e. N. W. Flint, ) 1 „ J. LaMay, S A. A. Ewing, ) . H. T. Clarke, ] ^' °- F. D. Nichols, r. h. b. H. G. Gale, ) i ], ^ A. A. Ewing, ) ' ' ' C. B. Hersohberger, ) H. G.Gale, ^f.b. C. B. Neel, ) Substitutes J. S. Brown H, W. Dickey H. G. Leighton 1896-97 W. J. Cavanagh, c. R. N. Tooker, r. g. J. E. Webb, 1. g. C. F. Roby, r. t,. Captain. Track and Field Athletics Tennis r. f. 1894-95 H. E. Jones, C. S. Pike, H. T. Clarke, F. D. Nichols, J. S. Brown, H. D. Abells, 1st b., Capt H. M. Adkinson, 2d b. C. S. Winston, 3d b. F. D. Nichols, ) „ „ P. Grant, S "' "' J. S Brown, H. T. Clarke, F. Grant, ) , f C.S.Pike, T" F. E. Bering, c. f. Suestitutb G. B. Sawyer 1895-96 H. E. Jones, c. a. T. Clarke, F. D. Nichols, [■ p. J. S. Brown, , a. D. Abells, 1st b., Capt a. M. Adkinson, 2d b. C. S. Winston, 3d b. O. T. Sweet, / „ _ M. G.Clarke, S J. S. Brown, / 1 . C.S.Pike, r ■ C. B. Berschberger, c. f. G. a. Sawyer, r. f. 1896-97 a. T. Clarke, p., Capt. W. T. Gardner, c. E. D. Abells, 1st b. B. M. Adkinson, 2d b. A. T. Pienkowsky P. Rand L. Sass F. E. Sherman v. W. Sincere F. F. Steigmeyer L. Wolff 1894-95 T. a. Patterson E. W. Peabody C. B. Berschberger F. P. Steigmeyer E. P. Mandel W. P. Drew a. C. BoUoway, Capt. J. LaMay a. I. Coy a. B. Campbell S. C. Dickerson L. Sass P. Johnson C. V. Bachell(S C. L. Burroughs C. B. Neel G. A. Bliss A. B. Bancook P. G. Wooley T. L. Nefl 1895-96 C. V. Bachell^, Capt. T. a. Patterson P. F. Steigmeyer, E. Gundlach G. L. White F. a. Calhoun E. Williamson E. L. Poulson a. McClenahan C. B. Neel C. R. Barrett C. B. Berschberger E. W. Peabody A. E. Logic a. A. Peterson C. L. Burroughs a. W. Dickey a. T. Chace W. Jackson P. G. Wooley C. O. Taylor 1896-97 T. a. Patterson, Capt. G. L. White B. B. Smith F. a. Calhoun 1894-95 C. B. Neel, Capt. P. Rand V. R. Lansingh W. E. Chalmers W. S. Bond C. A. Torrey C. B. McGillivray R. C. Dudley 1896-97 P. Rand, Capt. W. S. Bond C. D. Balsey W. P. Anderson 344 The President's Report TABLE C— Continued Football Baseball Track and Field Athletics Tennis W. S. Kennedy, ) , j. T. W. Mortimer, $ B. C. Hamill, r. e. C. Firth, ) , . B. D. K. Lefflngwell, \ '• ''■ M. G. Clarke, q. b. H. I. Coy, r. h. b. C. B. Herschberger, / j j^ ^, J. S. Johnson, ) ' ' ' W. T. Gardner, f. b. SCBSTITCTEa H. T. Clarke C. B. Neel V. W. Sincere P. B. Davis M. A. Cleveland H. M. Burchard 1897-98 W. J. Cavanagh, c. A. C. Bowdish, r. g. K. Speed, 1. g. J. E. Webto, r. t. T. W. Mortimer, 1. t. R. C. Hamill, r. e. G. H. Garrey, / . H. Fox, S ^- ®- M G. Clarke, q. b. C.B.Herschberger,r.h.b.,C. W. S. Kennedy, 1. h. b. W. T. Gardner, f. b. Substitutes T. H. Patterson N. K, Anderson F. Merrifield, 3d b. 1898-99 K. Speed, ) W.J. Cavanagh, ] ^• C. J. Rogers, r. g. O. S. Burnett, 1. g. J. B Webb, r. t. T. W. Mortimer, 1. 1. R. C. Hamill, r. e. J. R. Henry, ) , W. J. Schmahl, \ '• ^^ W. S. Kennedy, q.b., Capt. C. B. Herschberger, r. h. b. M. G. Clarke, h h b J. R. Henry, ^ ' " " F. L. Slaker, f. b. J. S. Brown, 1. f. J.F.Hagey,: G. H. Sawyer, r. f. C. B. Hershberger, c. f. L. T. Vernon, ) „ „ M. G. Clarke, ) ^- ^■ Substitute H. G. Leighton 1897-98 W. T. Gardner, c. T. B. Smith, p. W. S. Kennedy, 1st b. M. G. Clarke, ) „ , , H. B. McElree, \ '^^ '^• F. Merrifield, 3d b. L. T. Vernon, s. s. D. B. Southard, ) , . E. A. Wriedt, ) ^- ^■ C. B. Herschberger, c. f . G. H. Sawyer, r. f., Capt. Substitute H. G. Leighton 1898-99 H. G. Bodwell, c. T. B. Smith, p. W. S. Kennedy, 1st b. L. T. Vernon, 2d b. F. Merrifield, 3d b., Capt. G. B. Allen, s. s. D. B. Southard, 1. f. C. B. Herschberger, c. f. J. C. Ewing, r. f. C. V. Brown C. B. Herschberger F. P. Lachmund A. L. Barton W. S. Bond C. L. Burroughs J. B. Hyman G. A. Brayton H. L. Ickes C. V. BachelW H. B. Campbell N. M. Fair P. A. Brown W. M. Burns 1897-98 F. H. Calhoun, Capt. B. B. Smith G. L. White C V. Brown C. B. Herschberger A. L. Barton C. L. Burroughs N. M. Fair F. A. Brown A. E. Beers M. B. Parker B. G. Leake W. A. Moloney W. S. Kennedy T. W. Mortimer W. J. Schmahl W. H. Andrews D. R. Richberg H. S. Walker J. F. Goodenow M. H. Pettit E. L. Heath D. E. Fogle 1898-99 B. B. Smith, Capt. C. L. Burroughs W. A. Moloney H. B. Slack C. B. Herschberger W. J. Schmahl C. V. Brown T. W. Mortimer N. M. Fair M. B. Parker J. F. Goodenow D. P. Trude P. Ross F. G. Moloney R. C. Hamill E. L. Poulson P. Blackwelder H. N. Gottlieb R. G. Gould 1897— 9S C. D. Halsey, Capt. H. M. MacQuiston P. D. MacQuiston H. N. Gottlieb P. Blackwelder E. L. Poulson H. W. Belfleld R. Page 1898-99 E. L. Poulson, Capt. P. D. MacQuiston C. D. W. Halsey H. N. Gottlieb H. W. Belfield C. Richards J. W. Bingham P. P. Bruce Physical Cultuee and Athletics 345 TABLE C—Contimied Football SOBSTIinTES P. KnoUa M. A. Cleveland B. J. Cassels J. C. Ewing E. G. Allen Baseball 1899-00 K. Speed, c. H. F. Ahlswede, r. g. C. G. Flanagan, 1. g. J. E. Webb, r. t. F. Fell, 1. t. B. J. Cassels, ) W. F. Eldridge, \ '^^ ®- ■ J. M. Sheldon, 1. e. W. S. Kennedy, q. b., Capt. R. C. Hamill, r. h. b. J. R. Henry, 1. h. b. F. L. Slaker, f. b. Substitutes C. W Ervin A. F. Holste 190(M)1 K. Speed, c. Captain C.W. Ervin, ) W. Carey, (■ r. g. H. G. Bodwell, ) C. G. Flanagan, 1. g. J. G. MaoNab, r. t. F. Fell, ) 1 , O. E. Atwood, \ ^- ^■ W. F. Eldridge, " Z. R. Pettet, E. P. Rich, 1. e. J.M. Sheldon, ) „ , G. H. Garrey, ] ^- '^■ A. W. Place, / . , F.O.Horton, S J. R. Henry, U y. y. H. H. Lord, \ ^- ^- "• A. B. Snider, E. E. Perkins, f.b. Substitutes B. Strauss J. W. Hoag J. H. Jensen A. H. Fowler Substitutes F. C. Cleveland H. G. Leighton C. S. Jacobs 1899-00 F.E. Harper, ) E. O. Wood, \ ^■ T. B. Smith, ) F. Merrifield, [ p. W. S Rogers, ) W. S. Kennedy, 1st b. L.T.Vernon,Capt. ) E.O.Wood, C2dh C. M. Van Patten, ) F. Merrifield, ) oj k T. B. Smith, ] "^^ *'• L. T. Vernon, ) CM. Van Patten, 5 ^•®- R. Merrifield, / E. O. Wood, S A. W. Place, c. f- J. C. Ewing, r. f. Track and Field Athletics l.f. 1900-01 F. E. Harper, c. T. B. Smith, Capt., H. C. Calhoun, [ p. C. R. Howe, A. L. Hoover, 1st b. R. Merrifield, 2d b. C. M. Van Patten, 3d b. P. A. Sunderland, s. s. F. M. Horton, 1. f. A. W. Place, c. f. H. J. Sloan, r. f. Substitute H. C. Smith C. V. Drew L. Byrne C. R. Manning J. P. Magee W. A. Gordon G. L. White G. E. Tucker G. A. Brayton S. T. Bowen A. B. Snider D. R. Richberg H. Street Z. R. Pettet G. G. Davis D. E. Fogle 1899-00 W. A. Moloney, Capt. T. W. Mortimer H. H. Lord F. G. Moloney C. E. Hulbert C. R. Manning F. M. Horton G. G. Davis J. P. Magee J. T. Lister H. B. Slack, W. J. Schmahl C. V. Brown D. R. Richberg E. D. LeiSngwell Z. R. Pettet D. P. Trude B. J Cassels 1900-01 W. A. Moloney, Capt. F. G. Moloney H. H. Lord F. M. Horton Z. R. Pettet W. Carey L. A. Hopkins A. W. Place R. L. Henry E. R. Ferriss R. H, Wellington E. B. Bliss M. B. Louer A. Jahn E. E. Perkins Tennis 1899-00 H. N. Gottlieb, Capt. C. D. W. Halsey W. F. Eldridge C. W. Richards J. P. Magee J. S. Hammond P. P. Bruce J. H. McCune 1900-01 P. P. Bruce, Capt. H. L. Axtell J. W. Bingham H. W. Belfield C. W. Richards A. Frake 346 The President's Kepoet TABLE C— Continued Football Baseball Track and Field Athletics Tennis 1901-02 1901-02 1901-02 1901-02 A. C. Ellsworth, c. H. J. Sloan, c. f. F. G. Moloney, Capt. J. W. Bingham, Capt. M. M. Beddall, r. g. W. A. Rooney, s. s. C. A. Blair E. Blackwelder R. L. Knapp, 1. g. P. A. Sunderland, 1st b. Z. R. Pettet H. Belheld R. B. Kennedy, r. t. F. B. Harper, o. Capt, R. L. Henry A. P. Nelson C. G. Flanagan, 1. t. W. C. Smith, ) 1 „ A. W. Place, \ '• '• J, P. Magee C. A. Proctor J. G. MacNab, r. e. M. L. Cahill A. Prake F. A. Speik, 1. e. R. W. Merrifield, r. f. F. A. Speik G. H. Garrey, ) „ , L. W. Maxwell, \ I" '^■ A. C. Ellsworth, ) B. M. Friend C. R. Howe, [ p. E. W. Miller E. E. Perkins, r. h. b. L. Ballenger, ) O. E. Granberg J.M.Sheldon, Capt, ) , v, v, F. O. Horton, \ ^■'^■^■ F W. Patrick, 3d b. R. H. Wellington G.R.MacClyment,2db. L. A. Hopkins 0. E. Atwood, . . B. Strauss, ^- "' E. E. Quantrell W. G. Matthews W. Carey Substitutes A. W. Place E. B. Cooke H. Kalamatiano J. J. Laird H. D. Warner C. S. Jennison E. E. Perkins M. S. Dondanville F. M. Horton P. M. Conrad W. R. Jayne G. Senn F. G. Smith E. P. Gale TABLE D WlNNBKS OF THE ' 1892-93 Football Baseball J. E. Raycroft, Capt H. T. Chace W. B. Conover G. N. Knapp W. R. Smith W. Rapp ain C. B. McGillivray W. Rullkoetter H. G. Gale C. W. Allen A. R. E. Wyant R. E. Brenneman F. D. Nichols, Captain C. B. McGillivray R. W. Webster W. H. Prescott C. S. Pike H. M. Adkinson H. D. Speer L. B. Vaughan H. G. Gale W. B. Conover 1893-94 Football Baseball Track A. R. E. Wyant, Captain F. D. Nichols, Captain H. C. HoUoway, Captain H. G. Gale G. R. Sikes C. S. Pike A. A. Ewing J. E. Raycroft A. M. Wyant F. E. Hering C. V. BachelW C. B. Neel J. Flint J. S. Brown F. C. Sherman H. T. Chace J. La May R. W. Webster H. V. Church C. K. Bliss G. N. Knapp H. M. Adkinson G. A. Bliss W. Rapp C. W. Allen H. D. Abells W. P. Behan F. D. Nichols F. E. Hering H. G. Gale L. Sass W. R. Smith W. Rullkoetter F. Grant Physical Culture and Athletics 347 TABLE D— Continued 1894-95 football Baseball Track C. W. Allen, Captain H. D. Abells, Captain H. C. Holloway, Captain C. B. Hershberger H. E. Jones C. V. Bachelle J. La May H. M. Adkinson C. B. Hershberger H. T. Chace F. E. Hering T. H. Patterson F. D. Nichols H. T. Clarke L. Sass N. Flint F. Grant E. F. Mandel E. R. Yundt F. D. Nichols F. Johnson W. Garrey J. S. Brown C. F. Roby C. S. Winston G. N. Knapp C. S. Pike H. W. Black A. A. Ewing H. G. Gale W. Rullkoetter P. E. Hering A. R. E. Wyant H. I. Coy 1895-96 C. W. Allen, Captain H. D. Abells, Captain C. V. Bachell(5, Captain H. G. Gale C. S. Winston T. H. Patterson P. S. Allen C. B. Hershberger E. W. Peabody F. D. Nichols M. G. Clarke F. F. Steigmeyer H. G. Leighton H. E. Jones H. A. Peterson A. A. Ewing H. T. Clarke W. P. Drew C. B. Neel H. M. Adkinson S. C. Dickerson C. P. Roby F. D. Nichols C. B. Hershberger N. Flint C. S. Pike E. T. Gundlach H. W. Dickey J. S. Brown E. V. Williamson O. H. Looney O. E. Sweet F. H. Calhoun W. Rullkoetter G. H. Sawyer C. B. Neel E. V. Williamson H. T. Clarke J. LaMay T. L. Ketman 1896-97 C. F. Roby, Captain H. T. Clarke, Captain T. H. Patterson, Captain C. B. Hershberger H. D. Abells G. L. White W. S. Kennedy H. M. Adkinson B. B. Smith W. T. Gardner C. B. Hershberger C. L. Burroughs V. Sincere W. T. Gardner P. H. Calhoun R. N. looker J. S. Brown C. B. Hershberger P. D. Nichols G. H. Sawyer C. V. Bachelle R. C. Hamill L. T. Vernon J. E. Webb P. Merrifleld T. W. Mortimer M. G. Clarke P. B. Davis J. P. Hagey H. I. Coy C Firth C. B. Neel W. J. Cavanagh M. G. Clarke J. S. Johnson H. T. Clarke E. D. K. Leffingwell H. M. Burchard 348 The President's Kepoet TABLE D — Continued 1897-98 FootbaU Baseball Track C B. Hershberger, Captain G. H. Sawyer, Captain F. H. Calhoun, Captain W. S. Kennedy M. G. Clarke W. S. Kennedy K. Speed T. B. Smith C. B. Hershberger A. C. Bowdish L. T. Vernon . W. J. Schmahl G. H. Garrey F. Merrifleld N. M. Fair T. H. Patterson H. G. Leighton M. H. Pettit M. G. Clarke W. T. Gardner E. L. Heath W. T. Gardner E. A Wriedt W. A. Moloney J. E. Webb W. S, Kennedy G. L. White N. K. Anderson C. B. Hershberger B. B. Smith W. J. Cavanagh H. B. MoElree C. V. Brown T. W. Mortimer B. G. Leake R. C. Hamill A. E. Beers H. Fox W. H. Andrews C. L. Burroughs M. B. Parker J. F. Goodenow A. L. Barton T. W. Mortimer 1898-99 W. S. Kennedy, Captain F. Merrifleld, Captain B. B. Smith, Captain J. E. Webb Ij. T. Vernon D. A. Trude M. G. Clarke F. C. Cleveland C. V. Brown J. R. Henry T. B. Smith W. A. Moloney W. J. Cavanagh E. G. Allen M. B. Parker K. Speed J. C. Ewing C. B. Hershberger B. J. Cassels H. G. Leighton H. B. Slack F. L Slaker W. S. Kennedy R. C. Hamill C. J. Rogers D. B. Southard P. G. Moloney T. W. Mortimer H. G. Bodwell T. W. Mortimer O. S. Burnet C. B. Hershberger C. R. Manning C. B. Hershberger C. G. Jacobs W. J. Schmahl R. C. Hamill L. Byrne W. J. Schmahl J. F. Goodenow M. A. Cleveland P.Ross C. L. Burroughs C. V. Drew 1899-00 W. S. Kennedy, Captain L. T. Vernon, Captain W. A. Moloney, Captain J. E. Webb A. W. Place H. B. Slack J. M. Sheldon R. Merrifleld C. E. Hulbert A. F. Holste F. E. Harper G. G. Davis F. S. Slaker J. C. Ewing D. R. Richberg H. F. Ahlswede W. S. Kennedy J. P. Magee B. J. Cassels C. M. Van Patten P. G. Moloney J. R Henry F. Merrifleld T. W. Mortimer C. W. Ervin T. B. Smith H. H. Lord W. F. Eldridge E. O. Wood C. V. Brown K. Speed W. S. Rogers T. J. Lister P. Fell D. A. Trude R. C. Hamill E. D. K. Lefflngwell C. G. Flanagan J. F. Goodenow Physical Culture and Athletics 349 TABLE D — Continued 1900-01 Football BasebaU Track K. Speed, Captain T. B. Smith, Captain W. A. Moloney, Captain J. M. Sheldon C. R. Howe W. M. Carey W. F. Eldridge A. W. Place Z. R. Pettet A. B. Snider F. B. Harper H. H. Lord F. Feil R. Merrifield R. L. Henry E. P. Rich C. M. Van Patten F. M, Horton O. E. Atwood H. J. Sloan F. G. Moloney H. G. Bodwell A. L. Hoover E. E. Perkins H. H. Lord H. C. Smith A. W. Place C. G. Flanagan P. A. Sunderland L. A, Hopkins G. H. Garrey H. C. Calhoun C. W. Erwin F. M. Horton F. O. Horton J. R. Henry J. G. MacNab W. M. Carey A. W. Place E. E. Perkins Z. R. Pettet 1901-02 J. M. Sheldon, Captain F. E. Harper, Captain F. G. Moloney, Captain C. G. Flanagan H. J. Sloan F. M. Horton P. M. Conrad C. R. Howe J. P. Magee F. A. Speik G. R. MacClyment C. A. Blair R. L. Knapp W. E. Smith M. L. Cahill L. W. Maxwell L. Ballinger E. E. Perkins E. B. Cooke A. C. Ellsworth H. M. Friend O. E. Atwood A. W. Place W. G. Matthews B. Strauss P. A. Sunderland A. W. Place M. M. Beddall R. Merrifield Z. R. Pettet G. H. Garrey W. A. Rooney R. L. Henry J. J. Laird F. W. Patrick L. A. Hopkins C. S. Jennison E. E. Quantrell F. O. Horton F. A. Speik E. E. Perkins R. B. Kennedy J. G. MacNab A. C. Ellsworth List of " C " Men Name Years Won " C " in Baseball Years Won " C " in Football Years Won " C " in Track Abells H D 1894, 1895, 1896, 1897 1893,1894,1895,1896,1897 Adkinson H M Ahlswede, H. F 1899, 1902 1892,1893,1894,1895 Allen, C. W Allen. E G 1899 Allen, P. S 1895 1897 Anderson N K Andrews, W. H 1898 Atwood, O. E igoo, igbi 350 The President's Kepoet List of "C" Men — Continued Name Bachell^, C. v.... Ballenger, L Barton, A. L Beddall, M. M... Beers, A. E Behan, W. P Bezdek, H. F.... Black, H. W Blair, C. A Bliss, C.H Bliss, G. A Bodwell, H. G... Bowdish, A. C . . . Brenneman, R. E Brown, C. V Brown, J. S Burohard, H. M . . Burnet, O. S Burroughs, C L. Byrne, L Cahill, M. L Calhoun, F. H... Calhoun, H. C... Carey, W.M Cassels, B. J Catlin, M. S Cavanagh, W. J . . Chace, H. T Church, H. v.... Clarke, H.T Clarke, M.G..... Cleveland, F. C. Cleveland, M. A . . Conover, W. B . . . Conrad, P. M.... Cooke, E.B Coy, H. I Davis, G. G Davis, P. B Dickey, H. W.... Dickerson, S. C . . Drew, C. V Drew, W. P Eldridge, W. F . . Ellsworth, A. C. Erwin, C. W Ewing, A. A Ewing, J. C Fair, N. M Farr, E. W Fell, F Firth, C Flanagan, C. G . . Flint, J Flint, N Fox, H Friend, H.M.... Gale, H. G Gardner, W. T.. Garrey, G. H. Garrey, W Years Won " C " in Baseball 1902 1899 1894,1895,1896,1897 1901 1895. 1896. 1897 1896. 1897. 1898 1899 1893 1902 i899,' igbo' 1893, 1894 1897, 1898 Years Won " C ' in Football 1901 1902 1894 1893 1900 1897 1892 1896 1898 1900 1898, 1899 1902 1896,1897,1898 1892, 1893, 1894 1895,' 1896 1896, 1897, 1898 1898 1892 1901 1901 1894, 1896 1896 1895 1899, 1900 1901, 1902 1899, 1900 1894, 1895 1902 1899, 1900 1896 1899, 1900, 1901 1893 1894, 1895 1897 1892,' i893,'i894, 1895 1896, 1897 1897, 1900, 1901 1894 Years Won " C " in Track 1894, 1895, 1896, 1897 1898 i898 1894 1902 i894' 1898, 1899, 1900 1897, 1898, 1899 1899 1902 1896, 1897, 1898 igoi 1894 1900 1896 1899 1896 1894 i898* 1902 Physical Cultuee and Athletics 351 List of "C" Men — Continued Name Years Won " C " in Baseball Years Won "C" in Football Years Won " C " in Track 1898, 1899, 1900 Grant F 1894, 1895 fiiindlaph R T 1896 Hagey,J.F...., Hamill R. C 1897 1896,1897,1898,1899 1899 Harnpr F F 1900, 1901, 1902 Heath E L 1898 1898, 1899, 1900 Hftnrv Ti Tj 1901, 1902 Herina- F E 1894, 1895 1896,1897,1898,1899 1893, 1894 1894,1896,1897,1898 Herschberger, C. B HoUowav H C 1895,1896,1897,1898,1899 1894, 1895 Hol=;t« A F 1899 Hoovftr A L 1901 HoDkins. L A 1901, 1902 Horton, F. M 1901 1901, 1902 Horton F O 1900,1901 Howe. C. R 1901, 1902 Hulbert, C. E 1900 Ivison G E 1902 .Tflfohq O S 1899 .TftTTnison O S 1901, 1902 (Folinsoii F 1895 1896 .Tnn fis TT T^^ 1895, 1896 1901 1896, 1897, 1898, 1899 1895 1892. 1893. 1894 1901 1902 1901 1893. 1894. 1895 Kennedy, W. S i898, i899, ibbb 1898 Ketman T L TCnanr) Ti Tj Koehler J P T.amav .T Leake. B G 1898 Leffingwell, E. D. K Leishton H G 1896 1895 1900 1898, 1899 Lister. T J 1900 1895 1900 Lord, H. H 1900, 1901 MacBlree. H B 1898 MacNab, J. G 1900, 1901 MacClyment, G. R Mae-ee. J. P 1902 1900, 1902 Mandel, E. F 1895 1899 Matthews. W. G 1902 Maxwell L W 1901, 1902 1902 1892 Maxwell. R W McGillivray, C. B Merrifield P 1893 1897, 1898, 1899, 1900 1900, 1901, 1902 Morrifipld R Moloney, F. G 1899, 1900, 1901, 1902 Moloney W. A 1898, 1899, 1900, 1901 Mortimer, T. W 1896, 1897, 1898 1893, 1895, 1896 1893,1894,1895,1896 1898, 1899, 1900, Neel, C. B 1896 Nichols P. D 1893, 1894, 1895, 1896 Parker. M B 1898, 1899 Patrick P W 1902 Patterson, T. H 1897 1895, 1896, 1897 Peabodv. E. W 1896 Perkins, E. E 1900, 1901, 1902 1901, 1902 352 The President's Report List of "C" Hioi — Continued Namo Years Won " C " in Baseball Years Won "C in Football Years Won "C" in Track Peterson, H. A. . . Pettit. M. H Pettet, Z. R Pike, C. S Place, A. W Prescott. W. H... Quantrell, E. E.. Eapp, W Eavcroft, J. E... Rich, E. P Richbers.D. R... Robv, etP RoEfers. C. J Rogers, W.S Roonev, W. A Ross, P RuUkoetter.W... Sass, L Sawver, G. H . . . . Schmahl, W.J... Schnur, G. E.... Sheldon. J. M.... Sherman, P. C... Sikes, G. R Sincere, V Slack, H. B Slaker, P. S Sloan, H. J Smith, B.B Smith, H. C Smith, T. B Smith, W. E Smith, W. R Snider, A. B Southard, D. B . . Speed, K Speer, H. D Speilc, P. A Steigmever, P. P. Strauss," B Sunderland, P. A Sweet, O.E Terrv, S. B Tooker, R. N Tripp, R. C Trude, D. A Van Patten, C. M Vaughn, L. B. . .. Vernon, L. T Webb, J. E Webster, R. W... White, G. L Wightman. S. H. Williamson, E. V Winston, C. S.... Wood, E. O Wriedt, E. A Wvant, A. M Wvant, A. R. E.. Yundt, E. R 1893, lS9i, 1895, 1896 1900, 1901, 1902 1893 1900 i906' 1896 1898 1901, 1902 1901, 1902 1902 1892. 1893 1892, 1893 1900 1900 190-2 1896, 1897, 1898 1894, 1895, 1896 1898 1892, 1893, 1894 1898 1902 1899, 1900, 1901, 1902 iS93 1896 1900 1899 1894,' 1895 1898, 1899 1894 1901, 1902 1898, 1899 1901 1898, 1899, 1900, 1901 1902 1899, 1900 i897,"i898,'i899 1892. 1893 1900 1899 1893' 1897, 1898, 1899, 1900 i96i,'i962 igoi 1902 1896 1901, 1902 1896 1900, 1901 1893 1897, 1898, 1899, 1900 1902 1896 1902 1893, 1894 1896, 1897, 1898, 1899 1899, 1900 1902 1895 1897, 1898 1896 1895, 1896 1900 1898 1893 1892, 1893, 1894 1894 Physical Cultuee and Athletics 353 TABLE E EeCOEDS of GAJIES — FOOTBAI.L 1892 Autumn Quarter, 1892 Score October 22 Chicago vs. Northwestern University Northwestern University Lake Forest University University of Michigan University of Illinois Purdue University University of Illinois 0-0 November 2 4-6 November 5 18-18 November 12 10-18 November 15 10-4 November 19 0-38 November 24 12-28 Number of games won, 1; lost, 4; tied, 2. Points scored by Chicago, 54; by opponents, 112. 1893 Autumn Quarter, 1893 Score October 14 October 17 Chicago vs. Lake Forest University Northwestern University University of Michigan Purdue University University of Cincinnati Oberlin University Northwestern University Armour Institute Lake Forest University University of Michigan Northwestern University University of Notre Dame 0-10 12-6 October 21 10-6 October 25 10-20 October 28 26-0 November 4 12-33 November 8 6-6 18-6 November 18 14-14 November 30 10-28 December 16 22-14 January 1, 1894 8-0 Number of games won, 6; lost, 4; tied, 2. Points scored by Chicago, 148; by opponents, 143. 1894 Autumn Quarter, 1894 Score September 29 Chicago vs. Chicago Athletic Association Northwestern University Rush Medical College Beloit College Chicago Athletic Association (Second Team) University of Wisconsin Chicago Athletic Association University of Iowa Prairie Athletic Club Purdue University Englewood Y. M. C. A. Lake Forest University University of Illinois Northwestern University University of Michigan Leland Stanford Junior University Leland Stanford Junior University Reliance Athletic Club Salt Lake Y. M. C. A. 4-12 46-0 October 11 14-6 October 13 16-0 October 17 ." 20-0 October 20 0-30 October 24 0-30 October 27 18-18 October 31. . . 26-0 6-10 November 7 4-0 November 10 28-0 November 21 10-6 November 24 36-0 November 29 4-6 December 25 24^ December 29 0-12 January 1, 189.5 0-6 January 3, 1895 52-0 Number of games won, 11; lost, 7; tied, 1. Points scored by Chicago, 308; by opponents, 140. 354 The President's Report TABLE E — Continued 1895 Autumn Quarter, 1895 Score Chicago vs. Eureka College Chicago Athletic Association Lake Forest University Northwestern University Armour Institute University of Minnesota University of Wisconsin Western Reserve University Northwestern University University of Michigan 28-0 September 28 . ... 8-0 October 5 52-0 October 19 6-22 October 22 24-4 October 26 6-10 November 2 22-12 14-0 November 16 6-0 November 28 0-12 Number of games won, 7; lost, 3. Points scored by Chicago, 166; by opponents, 60. 1896 Autumn Quarter, 1896 Score Chicago vs. Wheaton College Eureka College Monmouth College Hahnemann Medical College University of Iowa Notre Dame University Oberlin University Armour Institute Northwestern University University of Illinois University of Wisconsin Lake Forest University Northwestern University University of Michigan 47-0 September 26 46-0 43-0 October 7 34-0 October 10 6-0 October 14 18-0 October 17 30-0 October 21 36-0 October 24 6^6 October 31 ■ • • • November 7 12-0 0-24 0-0 November 14 18-6 November 26 7-6 Number of games won, 11; lost, 2; tied, 1. Points scored by Chicago, 303; by opponents, 82. 1897 Autumn Quarter, 1897 Score October 2 October 9 Chicago vs. Monmouth College Lake Forest University Armour Institute Beloit College Northwestern University University of Illinois Notre Dame University University of Wisconsin University of Michigan 41-4 71-0 October 12 24-0 October 16 39-6 October 23 21-6 October 30 18-12 34-5 November 13 8-23 21-12 Number of games won, 8; lost, 1. Points scored by Chicago, 277; by opponents, 68. Physical Cultuke and Athletics 355 TABLE E — Continued 1898 Autumn Quarter, 1898 Score September 24 Chicago vs. Knox College Rush Medical College Monmouth College Physicians and Surgeons College University of Iowa Beloit College Northwestern University University of Pennsylvania Purdue University University of Wisconsin University of Michigan 22-0 September 28 8-0 October 1 24-0 October 5 22-0 October 8 38-0 October 15 21-0 October 22 34-5 October 29 11-23 November 5 17-0 November 12 6-0 November 24 11-12 Number of games won, 9; lost, 2. Points scored by Chicago, 214; by opponents, 40. 1899 Autumn Quarter, 1899 Score September 23 Chicago vs. Knox College Physicians and Surgeons College Notre Dame University University of Iowa Dixon College Cornell University University of Pennsylvania Purdue University Northwestern University Beloit College University of Minnesota Brown University University of Wisconsin 40-0 September 30 12-0 October 4 23-6 October 7 5-5 October 11 29-0 October 14 58-0 October 28 5-5 November 4 44-0 November 11 76-0 35-0 November 25 29-0 November 30 17-6 December 9 17-0 Number of games won, 12; lost, 0; tied, 2. Points scored by Chicago, 407; by opponents, 28. 1900 Autumn Quarter, 1900 Score September 23 Chicago vs. Lombard College Monmouth College Knox College Dixon College Purdue University Rush Medical College University of Minnesota Brown University University of Pennsylvania University of Iowa Northwestern University University of Wisconsin University of Michigan 24-0 September 26 29-0 September 29 16-0 October 3 23-5 October 6 October 9 17-5 40-0 October 13 6-6 October 20 6-11 October 27 0-41 November 3 0-17 November 10 0-5 November 17 5-39 November 29 15-6 Number of games won, 7; lost, 5; tied, 1. Points scored by Chicago, 181; by opponents, 135. 356 The President's Kepoet TABLE 'E — Continued 1901 Autumn Quarter, 1901 Scoro September 21 Chicago vs. Lombard College Monmouth College Milwaukee Medical College Knox College Illinois Wesleyan College Purdue University University of Illinois University of Pennsylvania Beloit College Northwestern University University of Michigan University of Wisconsin 38-0 23-0 October 2 12-0 October 5 6-0 October 9 22-0 October 12 5-5 October 19 0-24 October 26 0-11 17-17 November 9. 5-6 0-22 November 28. . ... 0-35 Number of games won, 5; lost, 5; tied, 2. Points scored by Chicago, 128; by opponents, 120. TABLE F Baseball 1893 Games Played Score May 8 Chicago vs. Denison University University of Wisconsin University of Iowa Rush Medical College Electrics Rivals University of Illinois Lake Forest University University of Illinois Elgin (morning) Elgin (afternoon) University of Wisconsin St. Ignatius College Electrics University of Virginia 7-11 May 13 6-10 May 16 6-2 May 17 25-2 May 18 • May 20 19-2 5-10 May 22 2-3 May 24 14-8 May 27 May 30 6-0 18-6 May 30 9-8 June 2 11-5 June 9 15-12 June 14 6-1 June 24 8-3 Number of games won, 11; lost, 4. 1894 Games Played Score April 21 Chicago vs. Rush Medical College Rush Medical College University of Wisconsin Northwestern University Armour Institute University of Illinois Englewood Y. M. C. A. University of Illinois Englewood Y. M. C. A. Northwestern University Englewood Commercials University of Iowa University of Michigan Englewood Commercials Chicago Athletic Association University of Minnesota Northwestern University University of Wisconsin 18-9 April 28 1-16 May 5 16-6 May 9 2-3 May 7. 14-4 May 12 9-10 May 14 15-4 May 18 17-18 May 20 14-6 May 23 4-6 May 24 15-4 May 26 10-4 May 30 June 2 2-3 18-5 June 7 June 13 24-19 4-2 June 14 1-8 June 16 2-12 Number of games won, 9; lost, 9. Physical Culture and Athletics 357 TABLE ¥ — Continued 1895 April 20 April 22 April 24 April 29 May 1. May 3. May i.. May 6., May 7., May 11 . . May 14. . May 15 . . May 25.. May 30.. May 31.. June 1 . June 5 . June 10 . June 11 . June 15 . Games Played Chicago vs. Northwestern University Rush Medical College Rush Medical College Northwestern University Lake Forest University Chicago (National League) University of Wisconsin Rush Medical College Northwestern University University of Iowa Northwestern University Grinnell College University of Michigan Omaha Omaha University of Wisconsin Lake Forest University Northwestern University St. Johns Military Academy University of Michigan Number of games won, 16; lost, 5. Score 23-13 18-9 8-6 11-6 10-4 2-5 8-2 6^ 8-9 40-6 21-10 18-4 13-1 11-6 11-12 5-16 26-5 26-1 27-3 ? 4-6 1895 April 11 April 14 April 15 April 16 April 19 April 21 April 24 April 25 April 29 May 1. May 2. May 4. May 7. May 9. May 11. May 13. May 16. May 18. May 20. May 22. May 23. May 25. May 27. May 28. June 4 June 11 June 13 June 27 June 30 July 2 Games Played Chicago vs. University of Illinois Illinois Cycling Club City League Lake Forest University Whitings Rush Medical College Blackburn University Whitings University of Illinois Chicago (National League) Northwestern University Illinois Wesleyan Rush Medical College University of Michigan Detroit League University of Michigan University of Indiana Grinnell College University of Michigan Cornell University Orange Athletic Club University of Pennsylvania Yale University Harvard University University of Michigan University of Michigan University of Wisconsin Brown University Brown University Brown University Score 9-6 18-6 19-3 27-3 4^5 8-5 12-9 6-8 10-4 2-7 28-5 22-3 8^ 7-3 3-15 0-6 14-9 9-1 2-9 3-2 3-6 15-10 5-31 7-10 7-3 10-5 9-5 1-0 3-13 5-6 Number of games won, 18; lost, 11. 358 The President's Keport TABLE F — Ccmtinued 1897 April 9 . April 15. April 17. April 20. April 24. April 26. April 30. May 1 . . May 4.. May 5.. May 8.. May 12.. May 15 . . May 18.. May 20 . . May 24.. May 29.. May 31.. June 5 . June 7 . June 12 . Games Played Chicago vs. Edgars Edgars University of Illinois Cranes Lake Forest University Rush Medical College Alumni University of Illinois University of Wisconsin Beloit College University of Michigan University of Michigan Notre Dame University Oak Park Club University of Nebraska University of Iowa University of Michigan Oak Park Club University of Wisconsin University of Michigan Oak Park Club Score 4-1 18-5 5-9 12-4 11-3 6-5 14-8 9-5 5-0 11-12 5-3 4-1 10-2 12-6 4-2 10-6 3-5 24-13 18-2 24-3 6-16 Number of games won, 17; lost, 4. 1898 Games Played Score April 16 Chicago vs. Beloit College Northwestern University Whitings Rush Medical College University of Michigan Northwestern University University of Michigan University of Illinois Northwestern University University of Michigan Beloit College University of Illinois University of Illinois University of Michigan Notre Dame University University of Illinois Lake Forest University Graduates Graduates 4-3 April 20 10-3 April 23 1-2 April 25 22-4 May 3 4-5 May 7 6-1 May 11 4-2 May 14 12-9 May 18 May 19 8-1 2-4 May 21 1-4 May 22 6-5 May 26 13 4 May 28 1 4 May 31 9-12 June 4 2 1 June 8 7-1 June 9 5 12 June 17 15-13 Number of games won, 12; lost, 7. 1899 Games Played Score April 22 April 24 Chicago vs. University of Illinois Rush Medical College Lake Forest University University of Wisconsin Northwestern University University of Illinois 2-4 13-1 April 25 11-5 April 26 8-2 April 29 23-2 May 3 9-11 Physical Culture and Athletics 359 TABLE F — Continued 1899 Games Played May 4. May 6. May 9. May 10. May 13. May 15. May 18. May 20. May 24. May 25. May 27 . May 31. June 2 June 6 June 7 June 10 June 17 June 19 June 21 June 24 University of Indiana Hamilton Club University of Wisconsin Purdue University Northwestern University Lake Forest University University of Minnesota Notre Dame University University of Illinois Northwestern University Ravenswood Athletic Club Oberlin College Naval Reserves University of Illinois Northwestern University Beloit College University of Pennsylvania University of Pennsylvania University of Pennsylvania Hamilton Club Number of games won, 18; lost, 9. 1900 March 29. March 30. March 31. April 10.. April 14 . . April 17.. April 18 . . April 19.. April 21.. April 24.. April 26.. April 28.. May 3... May 5 . . . May 9... May 12... May 16... May 17... May 19... May 22... May 23... May 26... May 29... May 31. June June June June June June June 12. June 16. June 18. June 19. Games Played Chicago vs. Vanderbilt University Vanderbilt University Vanderbilt University Northwestern University Marquettes Northwestern University Chicago American League Chicago American League University of Illinois Rush Medical College Lake Forest University Northwestern University University of Kansas University of Illinois University of Michigan University of Michigan University of Michigan Purdue University Notre Dame University University of Wisconsin University of Illinois University of Illinois University of Wisconsin Northwestern University Beloit College University of Michigan Cornell University University of Pennsylvania Georgetown University Georgetown University University of Minnesota University of Pennsylvania University of Pennsylvania University of Pennsylvania Score 13-6 21-12 9-6 1-10 6-4 7-6 12-0 2-7 9-3 11-0 4-8 5-2 4-2 2-9 1-2 4-3 9-3 6-3 1-7 7-4 Score 18-3 11-8 22-7 10-4 12-3 6-7 2-10 4-18 1-11 10-7 10-3 11-2 13-7 1-4 9-6 11-18 11-11 6-2 2-7 5-9 4-9 3-10 5-2 12-7 4-3 2-3 4-5 10-6 8-10 3-6 4^1 7-10 6-12 11-2 Number of games won, 17; lost, 18; tied, 1. 360 The President's B,epoet TABLE ¥ — Continued 1901 Games Played Score April 10 Chicago vs. Wheaton College Lake Forest University University of Michigan Chicago American League Chicago American League Northwestern University Beloit College Northwestern University University of Illinois Notre Dame University University of Minnesota University of Illinois University of Wisconsin University of Michigan University of Illinois Purdue University University of Illinois University of Wisconsin Northwestern University University of Iowa Oberlin University Brown University Harvard University Holy Cross College Syracuse University Oberlin College University of Michigan University of Wisconsin Northwestern University University of Michigan 36-3 April 13 9-6 April 16 7-6 April 17 0-14 April 18 8-12 April 20 6-2 April 24 9-8 April 27 4-3 May 1 3-15 May 4 3-11 May 7 4-6 May 8 6-17 May 11 5-6 May 15 6-10 May 17 7-8 May 18 3-7 May 22 2-5 May 25 9-8 May 28 4-2 May 29 9-3 June 1 June 3 2-3 4^10 June 4 1-7 June 5 0-12 2-12 June 7 4-6 June 8. . . '. 3-6 June 14 4-1 June 15 14-7 June 17 3-5 Number of games won, 11; lost, 19. 1902 Games Played Score April 5 Chicago vs. Physicians and Surgeons Morgan Park Academy St. Ignatius College South Side Academy Culver Military Academy University of Michigan Lake Forest College Northwestern University University of Wisconsin University of Illinois University of Illinois University of Illinois University of Illinois University of Indiana Purdue University University of Illinois Northwestern University St. Albans Academy Oberlin College University of Michigan University of Wisconsin Oberlin College Northwestern University University of Michigan Northwestern University Beloit College 12-3 April 8 5-3 April 10 8-0 April 11 7-0 April 12 17-5 April 14 14-7 April 16 April 19 6-2 3-2 April 23 7-8 April 26 6-5 April 30 1 10 May 3 3-2 May 7 3-7 May 14 9 1 May 16 18-5 May 17 1-15 May 21 2-4 May 22 11-4 May 23 8-1 May 24 8-4 May 28 4 5 May 29 9-6 June 4 1 June 7 8 7 June 14 11-2 June 16 3-5 Number of games won, 17; lost, 8. Physical Cultubb and Athletics 361 TABLE G Teack Meets and Scores foe Yeaes 1894-1902 Date Meet 1894: May 25.... June 2 1895: March 16. . May 18.... June 1 1896: March 1 . . . May 30. . . . June 6. . . . June 13. . . . 1897: May 11.... May 29.... June 5 1898: February 19. March 6. April 30 . May 7. . May 14. . June 4. . June 11. . 1899: January 28. . February 19, March 11 . . . April 29 May 13 May 20.... May 27 June 2 1900: March 3... March 10... April 28.... May 12 May 26 June 2 July 9 1901: February 20. March 2... March 9... March 16. .. April 27.... May 18 May 25 June 2 1902: February 15, March 1... March 15. . . April 26.. May 3.. May 10. . May 17.. May 31.. June 7. . . Chicago, Northwestern, and Lake Forest Western Intercollegiate Lalce Forest, Chicago, and Northwestern Chicago, Lalie Forest, and Northwestern Western Intercollegiate Chicago vs. Lake Forest Chicago, Lake Forest, and Northwestern Western Intercollegiate Chicago vs. Michigan Chicago vs. Illinois Chicago vs. Michigan Western Intercollegiate Chicago vs. Northwestern Invitation Meet at Tattersalls 1-Mile Relay Race at Philadelphia Chicago vs. Northwestern Chicago vs. Illinois Western Collegiate Athletic Meet Chicago vs. Michigan Annual Championship Meet of A. A. U. at Milwaukee Chicago vs. 1st Regiment Athletic Club Triangular Indoor Meet at Notre Dame 1-Mile Relay Race at Philadelphia Chicago vs. Northwestern Chicago vs. Notre Dame Chicago vs. Illinois Western Intercollegiate A. A. U. Meet at Milwaukee Triangular Meet at Notre Dame 1-Mile Relay Race at Philadelphia Chicago vs. Illinois Chicago vs. Wisconsin Western Intercollegiate Paris Games Chicago vs. Michigan A. A. U. Meet at Milwaukee Triangular Meet at Notre Dame Chicago vs. Michigan 1-Mile Relay Race at Philadelphia Chicago vs. Michigan Chicago vs. Wisconsin Conference Meet Chicago vs. Wisconsin A. A. U. Meet at Milwaukee Chicago vs. Wisconsin ( Relay Races at ( Special events ( Philadelphia ( Team of three men Chicago vs. Illinois Chicago vs. Northwestern Chicago vs. Michigan Conference Meet Chicago vs. California Score 72-45-36 Chicago won fourth place with 10 points 34-31-13 50-39-39 Chicago won fifth place with 11 points 56-33 63-36-44 Chicago won third place with 16 points 50-67 77-43 46-94 Chicago won fourth place with 12 points 39-47 Chicago won first place with 42 points Chicago won 54-71 74-54 Chicago won second place with 41 points 72-72 (1) Second place with 241-^ points (2) Relay Race won by Chicago 62-44 Notre Dame, 37; Chicago, 28; Illinois, 25 Chicago won third place 106-38 81J^-62K 67-61 Chicago won first place with 46 points Chicago, 23 points Chicago, 48; Notre Dame, 33; Illinois, 17 Chicago won 90-38 71-57 Chicago won second place with 30}^ points 30-42 Chicago won third place with 15 points Notre Dame, 43; Chicago, 37; Illinois, 28 17-55 Chicago second 52«.;-73i^ 53-59 Chicago won third place with 17 points 33-47 Chicago won with 44 points 251^-461^ One first; three seconds 65-61 77-35 65-61 Chicago won second place with 25 points 8-5 362 The President's Report TABLE H Recoed of the One Mile Relay Teams at the Pennsylvania Relay Games Names Time Names Time 1898: C. Ij. Burrouerlis. .53 .511 .51f .51 1900: H. B. Slack 50| N. M. Fair H. H. Lord .5la F. G. Moloney .52 G. L. White W. A. Moloney .491 Chicago first, Pennsylvania second, Michigan third. Time 3:27 Chicago first, Pennsylvania second, Georgetown third. Time 3: 23 J. 1899: D. P. Trude 1901: Z. R. Pettet .54 H. B. Slack F. G. Moloney .53* G. L. White H. H. Lord .51f W. A. Moloney W. A. Moloney .521 Yale first, Pennsylvania second, Chicago third. Time 3: 24|. Yale first, Chicago second, Syracuse third, Penn- sylvania fourth. Time 3: 27J-. TABLE I Teack and Field Athletics— Eecosds Made in Contest Event Winner Record Date 1894: 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 880 yards run 1 mile run 120 yards hurdles 1 mile bicycle Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump . Running broad jump Pole vault 1895: 35 yards dash 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles . . . 1 mile walk 1 mile bicycle Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump. Running broad jump Pole vault 1896: 35 yards dash 100 yards dash 220 yards dash E. F. Mandel J. LaMay F. C. Sherman H. C. Holloway L. Sass S. Barrett A. M. Wyant A. M. Wyant J. L. Laning H. V. Church A. A. Ewing T. H. Patterson T. H. Patterson T. H. Patterson H. Holloway E. W. Peabody A. C. Johnson L. Sass C B. Herschberger F. Johnson C. V. Bachell^ C. B. Herschberger T. Neff C. B. Herschberger F. F. Steigmeyer C. B. Neel C. B. Herschberger C. L. Burroughs P. G. Woolley T. H. Patterson C. L. Burroughs 10| sec. 23f sec. 2 min. 9| sec. 4 min. 47^ sec. 19| sec. 2 min. 39| sec. 36 ft. 3 in. 78 ft. 9H in. 5 ft. 4 in. 21ft. 10 ft. 4 1 sec. 10| sec. 23 sec. 52| sec. 2 min. 13J sec. 5 min. 13 sec. 18| sec. 30| sec. 7 min. 55 sec. 2 min. 32f sec. 33 ft. 9 in. 33 ft. 9 in. 73 ft. 7 in. 5 ft. 5 in. 20 ft. 2% in. 10 ft. 6 in. 4f sec. 10| sec. 22i sec. June 2 May 25 May 25 May 25 May 25 June 2 May 25 May 25 June 2 June 2 May 10 May 10 May 18 May 10 April 13 May 10 May 10 May 10 May 10 May 10 April 13 May 18 May 10 May 13 May 18 June 1 February June 13 May 30 Physical Culture and Athletics 363 TABLE I — Continued Event 1896: 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles 1 mile walk 1 mile bicycle Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump Running broad jump Pole vault 1897: 35 yards dash 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run {trial for record) . 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles 1^ mile bicycle (paced) Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump Running broad jump Pole vault 1898: 35 yards dash 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles 1 mile walk J^ mile bicycle 1 mile bicycle (paced) Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump Running broad jump Pole vault Discus throw 1899: 35 yards dash 50 yards dash 75 yards dash 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 440 yards run 440 yards run, straightaway 880 yards run 1 mile run 75 yards hurdles 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles Winner T. H. Patterson F. H. Calhoun H. A. Peterson F. F. Steigmeyer C. B. Herschberger E. T. Gundlach E. W. Peabody E. V. Williamson O. B. Herschberger F. F. Steigmeyer C. B. Neel C. B. Herschberger C. L. C. L. 0. L. G. L. G. L. B. B. C. B. F. H. C. V. C.B. C. B. F. P. C.B. C.B. C.B. Burroughs Burroughs Burroughs White White Smith Herschberger Calhoun Bachell^ Herschberger Herschberger Steigmeyer Herschberger Herschberger Herschberger C L. Burroughs C. L. Burroughs C. L. Burroughs W. A. Moloney W. A. Moloney B. B. Smith C. B. Herschberger W. H. Andrews M. B. Parker C. V. Brown C. V. Brown W. S. Kennedy T. W. Mortimer L. Byrne W. J. Sohmahl W. A. Moloney C. B. Herschberger T. W. Mortimer C. L. Burroughs C. L. Burroughs C. L. Burroughs C. L. Burroughs C. L. Burroughs W. A. Moloney H. B. Slack W. A. Moloney B. B. Smith C. R. Manning F. G. Moloney D. P. Trude Record 54 J- sec. May 4 2 min. 8 sec. May 29 4 min. 52i sec. June 13 17 J sec. June 13 28^ sec. May 30 7 min. 253:'o sec. June 13 2 min. 29 sec. May 4 36 ft. 9 in. May 4 102 ft. 3 in. June 13 5 ft. 4M in. March 1 21 ft. 2 in. June 13 10 ft. June 13 4| sec. March 13 10 sec. June 11 23| sec. May 11 52f sec. May 29 2 min. 7 sec. May 29 4 min. 46J sec. June 11 ni sec. June 11 28J sec. May 11 1 min. 9y sec. June 11 35 ft. 5 in. May 11 86 ft. 1 in. May 29 5 ft. 4 in. March 13 20 ft. 3 in. May 11 10 ft. 7 in. February 20 4| sec. February 19 lOJ sec. June 4 22 sec. June 4 51 f sec. May 14 2 min. f sec. June 11 4 min. 33 sec. June 4 17 sec. May 14 28i sec. May 14 8 min. 5^ sec. May 7 34 sec. June 4 2 min. 8 sec. May 14 35 ft. 6 in. May 7 122 ft. 7 in. June 4 5 ft. 61 in. June 4 19 ft. 11 Hn. May 14 10 ft. 6| in. March 5 96 ft. 9 in. June 4 4J sec. Mayl 5f- sec. May! 7f sec. January 28 10 sec. June 3 22^ sec. May 20 491 sec. April 29 49| sec. April 20 2 min. 4?- sec May 20 4 min. 39 sec. March 11 llj- sec. January 28 16| sec. May 27 26| sec. May 20 Date 364 The Peesident's Kepoet TABLE I — Continued Event Winner Eecord Date 1899: 1 mile walk J4 mile bicycle 1 mile bicycle Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump , Running broad jump . . , Pole vault Discus throw 1900: 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run 75 yards hurdles 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles }^ mile bicj'cle j| mile bicyle 1 mile bicycle Shot put Hammer throw High jump Broad jump Pole vault Discus throw 1901: 100 yards dash 220 yards dash 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run 2 miles run 75 yards high hurdles 120 yards high hurdles 220 yards low hurdles Shot put Hammer throw Running high jump Running broad jump Pole vault Discus throw 1902: 100 yards dash 220 yards dash | 120 yards hurdles 220 yards hurdles 440 yards run 880 yards run 1 mile run 2 miles run Running high jump Running broad jump Pole vault Discus throw Hammer throw Shot put M. B. Parker O. V. Brown C. V. Brown W. J. Schmahl T. W. Mortimer L. Byrne W. J. Schmahl H. Street C B. Herschberger W. J. Schmahl E. D. K. Leffingwell H. B. Slack W. A. Moloney W. A. Moloney C. E. Hulbert F. G. Moloney F. G. Moloney F. G. Moloney C. V. Brown C V. Brown J. F. Goodenow T. J. Lister T. W. Mortimer C. Smith Z. R. Pettet J. P. Magee E. D. K. Leffingwell W. A. Moloney W. A. Moloney W. A. Moloney W. A. Moloney E. Bliss R. L. Henry F. G. Moloney F. G. Moloney F. G. Moloney E. E. Perkins W. Carey E. Ferriss L. A. Hopkins C. F. Kennedy A. W. Place C. A. Blair C. A. Blair F. G. Moloney F. G. Moloney F. G. Moloney Z. R. Pettet M. L. CahiU W. G. Matthews R. L. Henry E. E. Quantrell H. Friend J. P. Magee A. W. Place F. A. Speik F. A. Speik 7 min. 14| sec. May 13 34 sec. May 13 2 min. 39 sec. May 13 36 ft. 5 in. May 27 121 ft. 2 in. June 3 5 ft. 7 in. 1 May 13 May 20 21 ft. 6 in. May 27 10 ft. 8 in. June 3 108 ft. 8i in. May 27 10 sec. May 12 22 sec. May 12 49^i3ec. April 28 2 min. 2 sec. June 2 4 min. 33| sec. May 26 10| sec. March 3 16^ sec. June 2 25 sec. May 12 33 sec. May 12 45| oec. May 26 2 min. 19 sec. May 12 39 ft. 2h in. May 26 130 ft. 7 in. May 26 5 ft. 8f in. February 10 21 ft. 7i in. March 10 10 ft. 7 in. May 25 103 ft. 4J in. May 12 10 sec. May 25 22f sec. May 25 50| sec. June 4 1 min. 59f sec. May 18 4 min. 47f sec. January 31 10 min. 33 sec. May 18 10| sec. March 2 15| sec. October 5 24? sec. October 5 38 ft. 8 in. May 25 140 ft. May 25 5 ft. 7 in. February 20 22 ft. 81 in. May 18 10 ft. February 2 110 ft. May 25 9f sec. May 9 22 sec. ( 129?^ yds., ) oo i around }■ 22 sec. ^ the curve S June 7 May 17 15| sec. May 31 24J sec. Mays 51 1^ sec. May 3 2 min. 1 sec. Mays 4 min. 41 sec. May 3 10 min. 14| sec. Mays 5 ft. 9 in. May 31 22 ft. 8 in. May 17 11 ft. 9 in. MayS 112 ft. 8^ in. May 31 120 ft. 1 in. June 21 40 ft. 21 in. June 7 Physical Cultuke and Athletics 365 TABLE J Financial Statement of Athletics, 1892-1902 1892-93 (July 1-June 30) : Football Baseball Totals 1893-94: Football Baseball Athletic field Totals 1894-95: Football Baseball Athletic field Totals 1895-96: Football Baseball Athletic field Totals 1896-97: Football Baseball Athletic field Track and field sports Totals 1897-98: Football Baseball Athletic field Track and field sports Tennis Totals 1898-99: Football Baseball Track and field sports Tennis Athletic field Gymnasium and miscellaneous . Totals". 1899-1900: Football Baseball Track and field sports Tennis Athletic field Gymnasium and miscellaneous . Totals 1900-01: Football Baseball Track and field sports Tennis Athletic field Gymnasium and miscellaneous . Totals Receipts $723.92 451,22 §1,175. M $2,792.20 1,011.82 865.50 $4,669.52 $8,761.32 2,460.00 $11,221.32 $10,736.07 5,341.51 652.24 $16,729.82 $15,497.31 2,690.19 461.00 649.23 $19,297.73 $21,965.84 2,252.39 49.00 1,498.40 23.00 $25,788.63 $30,324.76 2,369.30 852.26 "1,890 'to 201.92 $35,638.94 $38,124.95 3,253.18 610.01 "'i82!75 78.40 $42,249.29 $35,633.18 3,082.24 1,295.12 "'i59!55 398.78 Expenditures $40,568.87 $633.33 689.15 $1,322.48 $2,421.99 894.13 1,311.15 $4,627.27 $7,557.88 1,834.25 821.96 $10,214.09 $8,846.47 5,271.39 841.00 $14,958.86 $13,734.78 2,599.88 777.95 879.00 $17,991.61 $18,161.90 3,886.00 5,458.49 3,455.83 241.60 $31,203.82 $21,783.46 4,165.74 2,253.61 129.55 6,499.00 1,033.79 $35,865.15 $27,109.14 5,731.86 2,245.07 154.87 5,210.67 2,001.40 $42,453.01 $27,756.72 4,667.48 5,118.05 169.17 2,197.46 848.85 $40,757.73 Gain $90.15 $370.21 117.69 $1,203.44 625.75 $1,889.60 70.12 $1,762.53 90.31 $3,803.94 Loss $8,541.30 $11,015.81 $7,876.46 $237.93 $821.96 $1.88.76 $316.95 229.77 $1,633.61 5,409.49 1,957.43' 218.60 $1,796.44 1,401.35 129.55 4,608.30 8.31.87 $2,478.68 1,635.06 154.87 5,027.92 1,923.00 $1,585.24 3,822.93 169.17 2,037.91 450.07 366 The President's Kepoet TABLE J — Continued Receipts Expenditures Gain Loss 1901-02: Football $27,347.56 2,188.89 1,633.04 30.00 675.56 234.60 §32,109.65 §22,678.82 3,208.46 3,584.16 333.14 2,191.93 402.37 132,398.88 $4,668.74 Baseball 11,019.57 1,951.12 Track and field sports Tennis 303 14 Athletic field 1,516.37 167.77 Gymnasium and miscellaneous Totals KespectfuUy submitted, Amos Alonzo Stagg, Director. WOMEN'S DEPAKTMENT To the President of the University : Sib: I herewith submit my report upon the condition of the Department of Physical Culture and Athletics for Women, for the ten years ending June 30, 1902. The report of the work for the first five years is incomplete, since the records cannot be found and it is impossible to give an accurate summary without them. THE GYMNASIUM From October, 1892, to June, 1901, the north end of the temporary building used for the men's gymnasium was assigned the women. From June, 1901, to October, 1901, the activ- ity was restricted to an office in a frame building on Ellis avenue. From October, 1901, to the present time the Sunday-school room of the Hyde Park Baptist Church has been used. In the autumn of 1898 there were enrolled on the gymnasium list 315 students; in 1899, 360; in 1900, 459; in 1901, 495; in 1902, 525. ATHLETIC FIELDS In addition to the gymnasium, the Department has the use of two fields. In October, 1901, permission was given to use a part of the open field on Woodlawn avenue and Fifty-ninth street for a hockey field, where this sport has since been enthusiastically participated in. In April, 1902, the northeast corner of Marshall Field, 300 X 175 feet, was inclosed, affording a fine opportunity for athletic training and contests. In May, 1902, this field was formally opened by the first of a series of basket-ball games between the Junior and Senior College teams. STAFF The following table shows the teaching staff of the Department, together with the dates of service: TABLE A Years 1892-1894 1894-1898 1898-1899 1899-1900 1900-1901 1901-1902 Instructor Kate S. Anderson Bertha Steig Dr. C. P. Small Gertrude Dudley Bertha Steig IdaM. Furniss Dr. C. P. Small Frances A. Kellor Gertrude Dudley Ida Furniss Dorcas _ Merriman Dr. C. P. Small Frances A. Kellor Gertrude Dudley Ida Furniss Dorcas Merriman Dr. C. P. Small Frances A. Kellor Dr. Alice Foster Dr. C. P. Small Dudley Ida Furniss Clara Comstock Dr. C. P. Small Examining A. Kellor Physical Culture and Athletics 367 INSTRUCTION Instruction covers three well-defined branches — gymnastic, corrective, and athletic. The gymnastic work is made the basis of all athletic work and must be continued, even when a student is a member of an athletic team. The corrective work occupies a place of growing importance, and has become a well-recognized feature of the Department. This is individual, not class work, and is based upon special physical needs of the student which are ascertained by careful physical examinations. In accordance with this system of work, the following are the courses of instruction offered: TABLE B Gymnastics. Athletics . . . Autumn, 1898 General work Simple apparatus Pulleys Corrective work Basket-ball Winter, 1899 General work Simple and advanced apparatus work Pulley weights Corrective work Fencing Basket-ball Spring, 1899 General work Apparatus work Corrective work Fencing Basket-ball Tennis Walking Wheeling Rowing Summer, 1899 General work Basket-ball Tennis Rowing Golf Autumn, 1899 Winter, 1900 ' Spring, 1900 Summer, 1900 Gymnastics. . Athletics General work Apparatus work Pulley weights Corrective work Rowing Golf Basket-baU General work Simple and advanced apparatus work Pulley weights Corrective work Fencing Basket-ball General work Apparatus work Corrective work Fancy dancing Basket-ball Tennis Golf Rowing General work Tennis Golf Rowing Swimming Autumn, 1900 Winter, 1901 Spring, 1901 Summer, IBQl Gymnastics. Athletics . General work Simple apparatus work Pulley weights Corrective work Basket-ball General work Simple and advanced apparatus work Pulley weights Corrective work Fancy dancing Fencing Basket-ball Indoor baseball General work Simple and advanced apparatus work Corrective work Fancy dancing Basket-ball Indoor baseball Rowing Tennis Golf Wheeling Walking Rowing Tennis Golf Swimming 368 The Peesident's Kepoet TABLE B— Continued Autumn, 1901 Winter, 1902 Spring, 1902 Summer, 1902 Gymnastics.. Athletics General work Simple apparatus work Pulley weights Corrective work Basket-ball Hockey Golf General work Simple and advanced apparatus work Corrective work Fancy dancing Fencing Basket-ball Indoor baseball General work Corrective work Fencing Basket ball Baseball Hockey Rowing Golf General work Baseball Hockey Rowing Tennis ATHLETICS From the courses of instruction offered, it will be seen that the athletic work has been a steady growth. In the first years basket-ball was the only sport known, and from this small beginning have grown the following: indoor gymnastic contests, baseball games between Uni- versity teams, class contests in hockey and tennis, and golf tournaments. Besides the regular TABLE c Basket-Ball SCOEE Year Junior College Teams Position Senior College Teams Junior Senior 1899 Wayman, Agnes (Captain) C. Paddock, Carol (Captain) 6 — 4 Crockett, Grace L.F. Bevans, Edna 4 — 8 Gilman, Margaret R. F. Reichman, Alvena 2 — 6 Buck, Hazel L. G. Brehl, Helen Robinson, Ella R.G. Ohrenstein, Eda 1900 Wayman, Agnes (Captain) C. Shailer, Louise (Captain) 6 — 8 Ostergren, Nanna L.F. Fairman, Marion 13 — 8 Steagall, Mary R. F. Freeman, Ethel 10 — 8 Buck, Hazel L. G. Merriman, Dorcas Sweezy, Anne R.G. Bushnell, Grace Ridlon, Hester; Hopkins, M.; ) Biddlecomb, M.; Hogan, B. \ Substitutes 1901 Ashby, Winnifred C. Shailer, Louise 2 — 11 Wayman, Agnes (Captain) L.F. Fairman, Marion — 4 Ostergren, Nanna R. F. Russell, Eva 10 — 6 Goldstein, Anne L.G. Robey, Ann (Captain) Wilder, Mabel R.G. Yondorf, Alma Martin, E.: Warren, G.; ) McBride, M. ] Substitutes ( McKinney, I.; Bowman, C; ( Freeman, E. 1902 Tschirgi, Martha C. Houghton, Madge 9 — 9 McDonnell, Katherine (Capt.) L.F. Wayman. Agnes, (Captain) 7 — 3 Just, M. L. R.F. Bickell. Edith 14 — 5 Goldstein, Anne L.G. Moore, Ruth Suadener, Julia R.G. Cox, A. B. Rhod^A.; Sedgwick, G.;) MoGoorty, A.; Munson, E. J Substitutes ( Brandeis, H,; Conlon, M.; ( Hopps, C. PhysicaJj Culture and Athletics 369 instruction leading to these contests, there is regular class work in rowing, fencing, and swimming. The most important athletic as well as social feature is the series of basket-ball games played annually, before large and enthusiastic audiences, between the Junior and Senior College teams, for possession of a silver cup and banner. Emphasis is placed upon what may be called the edu- cational, aesthetic, and social, as well as the physical, value of sports, and the competitive spirit is developed in harmony with these. The accompanying tables show the membership of the athletic teams, together with the dates and records of contests. TABLE D Baseball SCOEE Year Reds Positions Blues Reds Blues 1902 Pond. L. P. Gaylord, G. 23 — 32 Vaughan, K. C. Porter, L. 16 — 18 Schmidt, B. 1 B. Swanson, G. Daskiewitz, M. 2 B. More, B. Golden, K. 3 B. Biegler, M. Millis, V. R.F. Comstock, C. Freeman, H. L.F. Jaynes, K. MacParland, E. S. S. Hunger, E. Price, B. C.F. Bradley, E. Dymond, Edith Ridlon, Hester Lackner, J. Goodwin, C TABLE E Tennis Toubnament — Spring, 1900 Landers, M. Baier, J. Hayman, G. Sweezy, Anne De Cew, L. Darlington, G. Coleman, H. Patrick, C. Won by L. De Cew and G. Darlington TABLE F G-TMNASTio Contests Yeae Laddbe Bkoad Jdmp HOESE Incline Rope Steaight Rope High Jdmp High Time Form Kick 1901 Won by 2 Martha Allerdice Lil Stevens Martha Allerdice Nanna Ostorgren Margaret McBride Mildred Dodge Martha Allerdice Nanna Ostergren Martha Allerdice Ina Griffin Omitted Omitted Omitted 1902 Won by 2 Alice Bhod6 Frances Taussig Katherine McDonnell Alice BhodS Rena Hooper Katherine Golden Alice Bhod6 Katherine McDonnell Omitted Omitted Rena Hooper lua Griffin Omitted k 370 The President's Kepoet PHYSICAL EXAMINATIONS Each student is given three examinations — the first when she enters the gymnasium, the second at the close of the first year, and the third when the ten Quarters of requu'ed work are completed. These examinations include a history of the case, heights, gjrths, depths, breadths, weight, lung capacity, strength tests, and heart and lung examinations. Heart and lung examinations are repeated each year when students are taking athletic as well as gymnastic work. The following is the record of the numbers examined: TABLE G Date NUMBEE First .Second Third Total By Miss Anderson By Miss Dudley 1884-98 153 143. 195 212 57 62 133 126 17 21 18 6 500 227 Autumn, 1899 225 Autumn, 1900 Autumn, 1901 346 344 Kespectfully submitted, Gebtbode Dodley, Instructor. THE KELIGIOUS WORK IN THE UNIYEUSITY To the President of the University: Sir: I submit herewith my report on the Religious Work in the University. The first public act of the University was the first Chapel Assembly, on October 1, 1892, at 12:30 o'clock. The order of service was as follows: Doxology. The Lord's Prayer in concert, led by President Harper. Hymn —" Nearer, My God, to Thee." Responsive reading of Psalm 95, led by President Harper. Hymn— "O Could I Speak the Matchless Worth." Scripture reading — Gen., chap. 1; John, chap. 1; and Phil., chap. 4, vss. 8 and 9 — by Dean Harry Pratt Judson. Prayer, by Professor Galusha Anderson. Hymn — " Hail to the Lord's Anointed." Benediction, by Dean Eri B. Hulbert. At the first meeting of the Autumn Quarter of each year a service has been held in con- nection with the Chapel Assembly, in which this order of worship was followed. I. THE OFFICIAL RECOGNITION OF RELIGION The people who established the University of Chicago placed in its charter and funda- mental regulations an expression of their desire that religion should not only be recognized, but assume an important and influential place in its activities. It was expressly provided that the Trustees and the President should be men in sympathy with the essential ideals and principles of Christianity; and all that law can do to guarantee this kind of direction and control has been done under the best legal advice. In administering this trust the governing body has uniformly and without exception dealt with it in good faith. It has always been assumed that the religious body thus made responsible for the life of the institution held among its essential religious principles and teachings the duty of freedom and courtesy, and the obligation to treat persons of different beliefs, not only with tolerance, but with respect. It is confidently believed by the Trustees and by the administrative ofiicers that any attempt at constraint or artificial pressure upon members of the community would tend to produce annoyance or pretense, but never sincerity, earnestness, and genuine zeal. It is not believed that generous and coiu'teous conduct is ever inconsistent with enthusiasm and devotion. Those who lead in the conduct of worship are Christians, and their expression of religion is in the language of the Christian world, familiar and sacred to most of us from the dawn of consciousness. But this does not exclude other dialects of the common faith of the world, and freedom to voice the deeper feelings of the soul in any form hallowed by reverence and family associations is permitted and encouraged. It is unreasonable to intei-pret the granting of liberty of thought, speech, and action as a sign of indifference. By its very nature religion forbids compulsion; it is free or it is nothing. 371 372 The President's Repobt II. THE DIVINITY SCHOOL There is a Divinity School in connection with the University. The Faculty of this Divinity School is nominated by a body whose membership is constantly renewed and made representative of the Baptist denomination, which is responsible for the University. But this Divinity School does not exclude any reputable student on accormt of his denominational rela- tions, and the University permits any body of religious people to establish lectureships which represent the particular tenets of the various communions, and permits students freely to elect courses rmder these lectureships. The presence of this body of instructors and students, pro- foundly interested in the religious life of mankind, is itself a guarantee that this supreme element of culture shall never be forgotten. The power of the Trustees will naturally always be exerted to maintain a high standard of scholarship to correspond to that of other Departments. Under this system of responsibility and of freedom it is reasonable to expect that a hearty, sincere, rational, and aggressive type of spiritual life vnll be cultivated and held in honor. Nothing but skepticism as to the inherent power of truth would question the wisdom of this policy. Those who are in administrative positions are convinced, after years of trial, that this policy is honest, fair, and safe, and that, in the circumstances, no other policy could be substi- tuted for it without injury to the cause of Christianity. III. THE CHAPLAIN A statute of the University, enacted by the Trustees, thus defines the duty of the Univer- sity Chaplain: The University Chaplain, in co-operation with the President and other officers, studies and pro- poses methods of promoting the spiritual life of the University; serves as needed in religious exercises; ministers as a pastor; and advises with the religious and benevolent organizations of the University in the interest of harmony and efficiency. In accordance with this statute, the Chaplain has published in the University Record the following standing notice of his readiness to serve, and the Bureau of Information posts a notice of his office hours : The Chaplain is an officer of the University appointed by the Trustees to serve the spiritual interests of the institution. He is expected to bring to the work of organization the experience of a pastor and the special information derived from a study of religious and philanthropic activities. Together with other instructors, he assists in the devotional exercises of the Chapel Assemblies, and co-operates with student organizations as occasion arises. He is ready to visit the sick, to have con- versation in his office or at home by appointment with individual students. Such appointments may be made in person at the close of any Chapel Assembly, or at the office hour, or in response to a note left in the Faculty Exchange. The Chaplain does not wish to intrude upon any person, and yet earnestly desires to respond to the calls of those who honor him with their confidence. One of the ways in which the Chaplain makes himself useful is in connection with his duties as teacher of practical ethics and sociology. In this relation he is brought into natural relations with students of Colleges and Graduate Schools. Almost every day students seek him for conversation on practical ways of usefulness by personal service, and some days many students solicit advice of this kind. All recent writers on the psychology and pedagogy of religious education strongly urge that emotion and thinking must be translated into character through action and habit. One does not become good merely by thinking he would like to become good, and young people of noble pmpose and fresh enthusiasm need to have ways of service pointed out to them by persons who have had considerable experience in the great world of business, social intercoiurse, philanthropy, politics, and religion. At this point the connection between the teaching duty and the office of Chaplain has proved to be fruitful and wise. A similar arrangement has vindicated its wisdom at Harvard University and elsewhere. The Religious Work op the Univeesitt 373 IV. THE NEW BOARD OF PREACHERS The Board of Trustees, acting upon a fundamental principle in the law of the University, has made liberal provision by a fund for securing the service of eminent preachers who are invited to visit the University, conduct a service on Sunday, preach a sermon, assist in the Chapel Assemblies, and be accessible for consultation at specified office hom-s duiing the week days of the residence. So far as practicable, the engagement of each visiting preacher will extend over the entire period of six weeks, and in the year of his service he will be designated as an officer of the institution, a member of the staff. Experience shows that there are great advantages in this supplementary service. The students have thus an opportunity of coming into personal contact with the most eminent living exponents of spiritual experience and thought. The great variety of needs is richly met by a variety of types of expression, character, and thought. A spirit of fairness, candor, sympathy, and catholicity will naturally be fostered. The essential harmony in the variety of forms of thought will be a witness to the reality of the divine life in man. Since all human beings are greatly influenced in their estimate of the value of religion by the personality of those who represent it, many hundreds and thousands of talented youth will learn to associate faith with all that is manly, robust, forceful, hmnan, and attractive. For those who are to be public speakers this object-lesson will be one of the highest factors in their culture. Prom every point of view this new addition to our educational resources is at once a noble opportunity to our honored visitors and to the throngs of young people who are destined to be leaders of public thought and conduct. It should be said that, while this measure is new with us, it was introduced because it had been proved fruitful and useful, in an eminent degree, at Harvard and Yale Universities, and in other institutions. Its adoption by our Trustees is an evidence that they sincerely intend to leave no means neglected to minister in the best possible form to the religious needs of the students, and through them to help mankind. V. NEW MANDEL HALL In connection with the introduction of the Board of Preachers it is cheering to mention the erection of a new and commodious hall. Hitherto, as remarked in previous reports, we have not been able to accommodate all who desire to attend upon occasions of unusual interest. With the completion of the Mandel Hall, made possible by the noble generosity of a merchant of Chicago, we shall be able to provide a suitable audience room for the great company who will desire to enjoy the public ministry of gifted preachers. Yet even with this hall we can foresee the need of the great religious edifice, with more commodious space and appropriate structure and adornment, which shall some day crown the groups of buildings devoted to science, art, and faith. What more fitting monument for some devout person of adequate wealth than the erection of such a permanent sanctuary, where faith, hope, and love, the never-failing inspiration of striving spirits, shall be breathed into the culture of our commimity, with the ministry of the arts of music, eloquence, scuJptiue, painting, and architecture subservient to the divine honor! Something fine and splendid as Giotto's tower, only with the "glory of the spire," should, in good time, point toward the Highest. VI. THE BOARD OF THE CHRISTIAN UNION The appointment of the Board of Preachers has been the more immediate occasion of another improvement in our religious organization. By recent amendments in its constitution the Christian Union has come to be more closely and vitally an oflBicial organization of the University. This has become necessary in order to give eflSciency to the new and more complete 374 The Peesident's Eepoet provisions supplied by the Trustees for religious work, and to meet more adequately the demands of the situation. Hitherto the Christian Union has been a voluntary association, without formal and official place in the general organization of the University; henceforth it is to be an organic part of that organization. I. ITS PURPOSE AND METHOD The Christian Union was formed in the autumn of 1892, at the very beginning of the University work. Its purpose has been and is to open the way for all members of the University to join in religious and humane effort. This society carries forward certain lines of spiritual and philanthrophic activity common to all teachers and students who choose to participate. It leaves all to organize in more special efforts in which any number of persons may be interested. In order to promote unity and common understanding, it is agreed that the presidents of all the religious societies shall meet with the Board for conference. This arrangement, which admits entire liberty and yet prevents friction, has been admirably adapted to our conditions. II. CONSTITUTION PREAMBLE Whereas, It is highly desirable to unite all the members of the University in a single, har- monious organization on the basis of those elements of religious faith which are held in common; and Whekeas, All may unite upon this common ground without inconsistency with the maintenance of individual religious conceptions; and Whereas, In the spirit and purpose of the above it has seemed good to form such an organiza- tion, to be known as the "Christian Union;" therefore be it Resolved, That the undersigned students and instructors of the University of Chicago do hereby subscribe ourselves as members in the Christian Union. Membership in the Union, with privilege of voting at all meetings, shall l^elong to all instructors and students of the University without any subscription or other formal act, and without payment of fees. EEGDLATIONS 1. The officers of the Christian Union shall be a President chosen from the Faculties of the Uni- versity, a Vice-President chosen from the student body, and a Secretary-Treasurer chosen at large. 2. The direction of the Christian Union shall be in charge of a University Board, constituted as follows : a) Ex officio, the President of the University, the Chaplain of the University, the officers of the Christian Union, the president and secretary of the Board of the University Settlement, and of each religious society of the University recognized by the Board. b) Five members of the Faculties, recommended by the President of the University and appointed by the Trustees. c) Two representatives of each district student division. The administrative work of the Board shall be in the hands of the Chaplain and the President of the Christian Union, in consultation with the President of the University. 3. The elections shall be by ballot, and, with the exception of the President and Secretary- Treasurer, from a double list of nominees presented to the Union one week before the annual meeting by a nominating committee of five appointed by the President. In the case of the President there shall be only one name presented by the committee; but ten or more persons may unite in presenting (through the committee) another name if they so desire. The Secretary-Treasurer shall be chosen by the Board, subject to the approval of the University Council. 4. The Board shall direct the work of the Christian Union in all its departments, appointing such standing committees as may be necessary for the purpose of conducting public worship, Bible study, work in philanthropy, and such other work as the Union may see fit to undertake. The presi- dents of the represented organizations shall be chairmen of the committees in their respective depart- The Religious Work of the Univeesity 375 ments. The committee on philanthropy is identical with the incorporated Board of the University of Chicago Settlement. This Board has power to till vacancies in its membership according to its own rules. 5. The President and Secretary-Treasurer of the Christian Union shall be ex officio members of all committees. 6. No work- shall be undertaken in the various departments of the Christian Union without the previous consent of the Board. 7. Each committee appointed for continuous service shall make, through its chairman, a monthly report to the Board of all work done in its department. 8. There shall be a regular monthly meeting of the Board. 9. At a regular time in each Quarter, which the Board may fix, the Board shall present a report of its work to the Christian Union. 10. The officers of the Union shall be elected annually, in March, at a special meeting to be called for that purpose by the President, and they shall take office at the first regular meeting of the Board in April. 11. These regulations may be altered or amended by a two-thirds vote of the Union at any regular meeting, provided a week's notice of the proposed change shall have been given. 12. Fifteen members of the Union shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. VII. RELIGIOUS ACTIVITIES OF UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTORS As has already been noted, the members of the teaching staff are entirely free in relation to the expression of their spiritual life. What they do is done freely and because they desire to help. Every act is voluntary. Therefore it is interesting to consider how many are engaged in positive and active service. No attempt has been made to collect statistics, for these would necessarily be fragmentary and misleading. But it is known that in the neighboring chiu-ches, in city, home, and foreign missions, and in philanthrophic enterprises the motives of the inner life come to expression. Some of the most trusted and generous leaders in churches are members of the Faculty. In the social relations of the Campus these instructors are ready to help the students in their meetings or in personal conversation. The presidents of the Christian Union for several years represented a department of nature science, and one also widely felt in connection with the Young Men's Christian Association, and it is a pleasure to recognize the high value of their service. On Sunday mornings Bible classes are taught by the President and by other representa- tives of the biblical Departments, and this work is on the same plane with scholarly instruction in all other subjects. This department will gradually be developed until it is hoped to have upon the Campus a model organization of modern religious education. In all of its ofiBcial meetings and assemblies a solemn act of worship is part of every order; as at the regular meet- ings of Senate, Congregation, and Convocation. Thus in the most distinct, articulate, and public form does the University offer mtness to the world of its faith and reverence. Eeligious conferences have been held, at frequent intervals, to encourage the students to make known their difficulties, so that they may be met in the open and, so far as possible, overcome. Among the publications of the University are important magazines devoted to sacred learning and to the practical direction of religious organization and effort; and these have gained a wide and ever-growing influence. With the rapid increase in the number of students it is becoming a serious question whether it will not become advisable for the members of the Faculty to concentrate their religious efforts more and more upon the University community, one of the largest of parishes, and one whose composite membership gives it a central position in the world's spiritual life. It is to the students that teachers owe their first and the best service in all that may contribute to character. 376 The President's Report VIII. THE ASSOCIATIONS In the Report of the President for July, 1897-July, 1898, pp. 201-16, may be found many details of the religious work of the University up to that time; and further details are given in the Report for July, 1898-July, 1899, pp. 143-53. YOUNG men's christian ASSOCIATION The Y. M. C. A vs^as organized during the first Quarter after the University began its work of teaching. The first meeting to consider the subject was held November 26, 1892, and com- plete organization was effected December 2, 1892. The most important facts relating to the work of the past two years are here given: WORK OF THE YOUNG MEN'S CHRISTIAN ASSOCIATION FOE 1899-1900 AND 1900-1901 During 1899-1900 substantial progress was made in the work and development of the Association. A large and enthusiastic corps of workers was secured, the Advisory Committee and Faculty showed lively interest, and an efficient man 'gave part of his time to the work of General Secretary. As a result, the membership was largely increased, the influence of the Association became more widely felt, and the spiritual life of many men was quickened and deepened. If somewhat less may be said for 1900-1901, it is because during this year the Association had no General Secretary. The work of a Y. M. C. A. in a great university is far too large and exacting to be done by a regular student, be he ever so faithful. However, the Association has been kept together and along several lines has done excellent work. For convenience, the facts with regard to the two years may be exhibited together: I. MEMBEESHIP Members, April 1, 1899 150 Received during the year ------- 72 Terminated membership -44 Members, April 1, 190O 178 Received during the year 22 Terminated membership -...-.. 43 Net total April 1, 1901 157 II. BELIGIODS MEETINGS A. 1899-1900 Meetings for men only 33 Average attendance --- 40 Union meetings .----.-.. 44 Average attendance 52 The week of prayer was observed in November by holding five morning meetings; average attendance, twelve. Of special interest were the conferences on religious difficulties, conducted by Professor Shailer Mathews. B. 1900-1901 Meetings for men only 33 Average attendance --- 30 Union meetings 44 Average attendance of men 25 The week of prayer in November was observed as usual, the average attendance being nine. The Religious Woek of the Univeesity 377 Several of the religious meetings were addressed by members of the Faculty and by speakers from abroad. Especially noteworthy were two series of addresses of four evenings each. The first was by Mr. C. W. Votaw, in April-May, 1900; subject, "Practical Keligion." The second was by Mr. Gerald B. Smith, in January and February, 1901. His subject was " Some Phases of Twentieth-Century Christianity." Others who spoke diu-ing the year were : Messrs. John M. Coulter and Charles R. Henderson, Miss Myra Reynolds, and Messrs. Theodore NeflF, George S. Goodspeed, Tufts, Edgar J. Goodspeed, Herbert Willett, A. H. Tolman, F. M. Blanchard, G. E. Vincent, John R. Mott and H. W. Hicks, of the International Committee of the Y. M. C. A.; Miss Mary McDowell, of the University Settlement; and Mr. John Boose, of McCormick Seminary. III. BIBLE STDDY A. 1S99-1900 Number of classes -------- 8 Men enrolled ---- 83 In private study --------- 23 Total engaged in study ------- 106 Most of the classes continued only one or two Quarters. Men were also urged to attend the regular Bible classes of the University. President Harper conducted for a short time a class for the study of personal difficulties. B. 1900-1901 One class in the study of the Bible was conducted by the Association, for two months in the spring, with an attendance of seventeen. The men seemed to prefer to attend the classes in the regular course. IV. MISSIONARY WOEK A. 1899-1900 Three missionary meetings were held, with an average attendance of thirty-seven. A Volunteer Band of Ten met throughout the year, except during the Second Term of the Summer Quarter. A missionary library was begun. Three courses in the study of missions were offered: ■'Japan and its Regeneration," byMr. Isao Hatai; "Social Evils in the Non-Christian World," by Mr. Burlingame; and " Side-Lights on Missionary Byways," by Mr. Solenberger. The classes were conducted informally. A few members of the Association performed helpful service at the University Settlement. B. 1900-1901 Three missionary meetings were held; average attendance, twenty. The Volunteer Band numbered ten and held monthly meetings throughout the year. For some of these meetings special speakers were provided, notably Mr. Kelsey, returned from Mexico; Mr. McKibben, from China; Mr. Kelso, from Singapore; and the president of the Anglo-Chinese College in Pekin. The Association also brought Dr. and Mrs. Howard Taylor to the University for two public addresses on missions. Two courses in mission study were conducted: one on "Evangelization of the World in This Generation," by Mr. Bailey; average attendance, four; and one on "China," by Mr. McKibben, with an average attendance of twelve. Several addresses on missions were made by students in neighboring churches. Two additions were made to the library. V. INTERCOLLEGIATE RELATIONS A. 1899-1900 Letters sent out by Corresponding Secretary - - - 28 Letters received by Corresponding Secretary - - - 22 Visits made by students 10 Visits received from students and secretaries - - . 8 378 The President's Eepobt The Association has been represented at one conference and one convention by fourteen delegates. Twenty-eight copies of the Inter-CoUegian are being taken. General correspondence through the General Secretary: Letters received .-.--.--. 222 Letters sent out - . - - 213 Nine outside meetings were held, or addressed by members of the Association. B. 1900-1901 Letters sent out by Corresponding Secretary - - - 35 Letters received by Corresponding Secretary - - - 28 Visits made by students - - 3 Visits received from students and secretaries - . . 6 Delegation to the summer conference . .... 7 VI. FINANCE A. 1S99-1900 Cash on hand April 1, 1899 $ 0.05 Received from membership feea ----- 130.50 Received from subscriptions ------ 182.50 Received from miscellaneous sources - - - - 14.51 Total - S327.56 Estimated budget for year from July 1 to July 1: Receipts from membership fees ----- $200.00 Receipts from subscriptions . - . _ - 200.00 Receipts from miscellaneous sources - - - - 61.40 Total - - - S461.40 B. 1900-1901 Cash on hand April 1, 1900 S 12.27 Received from dues and subscriptions - - - 118.17 Total receipts -------- $130.44 Current expenses, printing, etc. S 53.88 Payments on the piano 40.00 The General Secretary of 1899-1900 - - - 10.00 Part expenses of one delegate to Geneva - - - 5.00 State Committee 10.00 Total expenditui.-,; ------- $118.88 Balance on hand April 1, 1901 - - - . 11.56 The Associaticn diu'ing 1901-2 is obliged to meet a debt of seventy-five dollars on the piano, and of forty -five dollars of pledges to the state and international committees of some years' standing. The estimated income for current expenses is about three hundred dollars. VII. SOCIAL ACTIVITIES The social activities of the Association for the two years may be summarized in one state- ment. At the opening of the Fall Quarter a large committee was on duty to welcome newcomers and aid in registration and in finding board and rooms. During the second week of the Quarter a general reception was given, at v>'hich President Harper and other members of the Faculty assisted in receiving. In 1899 this reception was held at the home of Professor George Vincent; in 1900, in Haskell Museum. At both the attendance was between four and five hundred. In 1899-1900 an informal social for men and a dinner were given. In the summers of both years several socials were arranged for, and trips to places of interest planned and conducted. The Religious Work of the Univeksity 379 VIII. ADVISORY COMMITTEE III 1899 the Advisory Committee of the Association was appointed. It is a self -perpetuating body of the greatest value. It has the power to nominate the General Secretary and regulate his term of office and salary. Further, it stands ready to advise the Association on any impor- tant matter submitted to it. In the spring of 1901 this committee raised a thousand dollars for a General Secretary on full time. Its personnel April 1, 1901, was as follows: The Facul- ties: C. K. Barnes, chairman; J. M. Coulter, A. A. Stagg; business men: Charles Marsh, E. Burritt Smith, Judge Freeman; alumni: H. D. Abells, W. A. Payne, S. C. Mosser; Association oflBcers: J. F. Hosic, president; K. W. Merrifield, treasurer. IX. MISCELLANEOUS POINTS During 1899-1900 excellent work was done in visiting the sick. Names of the sick were sent to the General Secretary by the Deans. In all thirty-five calls were made. In this year also a permanent arrangement was consummated by which "at least ten members of the Y. M. C. A., who had been in residence three Quarters and whose standing in class work was good, might be excused from examinations to attend the entire Conference at Lake Geneva." As a result large delegations were sent in both this and the following year. The officers for 1899-1900 were: President — C. F. Yoder Vice-President — M. R. Myers Recording Secretary — H. P. Kirtley Corresponding Secretary — A. E. Bestor Treasurer — E. H. Sturtevant, H. H. Nelson General Secretary — Fred Merrifield The officers for 1900-1901 were: President — C. W. Button Vice-President — R. W. Merrifield Treasurer - Recording Secretary — R. B. Nelson Corresponding Secretary — A. E. Bestor -L. R. Cartwright, F. J. Tische The officers for 1901-1902 were: President — J. F. Hosic Vice-President — H. H. Lord Treasurer - Recording Secretary — M. B. Pratt Corresponding Secretary — L. J. Bevan -R. W. Merrifield In view of the employment of a competent General Secretary, the outlook for Association work in the University is bright. The field is peculiar, but very important, and destined, when properly cultivated, to yield most happy and profitable results. One of the most encouraging aspects of the situation is the friendly attitude of members of the University toward well- conducted Y. M. C A. work. There seems to be no doubt that the hopes and desires of all in this connection are soon to be realized. CONSTITUTION OF THE YOUNG MEN S CHBISTIAN ASSOCIATION OF THE UNIVEKSITY OF CHICAGO AETICLE I — NAME The name of this organization shall be " The Young Men's Christian Association of the Univer- sity of Chicago." ARTICLE II — OBJECT The object of this Association shall be to promote Christian life, Christian faith, and Christian fellowship among its members; to carry on aggressive Christian work, especially by, and for, students; to train its members for Christian service; and to lead them to devote their lives to Jesus Christ, not only in distinctively religious callings, but also in secular pursuits. 380 The President's Keport ARTICLE III — MEMBERSHIP Section 1. The active membership of the Association shall consist of men, either students or members of the Faculty of this institution, who are members in good standing of evangelical churches, who have declared themselves to be in sympathy with the purpose and methods of the Association as indicated in its Constitution, and who have been elected by a two-thirds vote of the members present at any meeting. Only active members shall have the right to vote and to hold office. Seo. 2. Any man of good moral character, either a student or member of the Faculty of this institution, may become an associate member by a two-thirds vote of the members present at any meeting. Sec. 3. Any student or member of the Faculty who has been an active or associate member of another College Christian Association having the evangelical basis may be transferred by letter to the same grade of membership in this Association by a two-thirds vote of the members present at any meeting. Sec. 4. The membership fee shall be one dollar ($1) per annum, payable at such time or times as the Association may determine. Sec. 5. It shall be the duty of each member to co-operate heartily in carrying out the object of the Association according to the policy as determined each Quarter by the Cabinet or Executive Committee. ARTICLE IV — OPPICEBS Section 1. The officers of this Association shall be a President, Vice-President, Recording Sec-retary, Corresponding Secretary, Treasurer, and General Secretary. Sec. 2. Duties of officers. a) The President shall preside at all business meetings of the Association and on all public occasions. He shall be the chairman of the Executive Committee and of the Cabinet. He shall appoint, with the advice of the General Secretary, all committees, and notify all committeemen of their appointment. He shall see that all committees are organized and set at work as soon after their appointment as possible, and shall hold the chairmen responsible for the work of their respective committees. He shall have general supervision of all the work of the Association. On retiring from office he shall present to the Association a written report covering his term of service, together with recommendations concerning the future work of the Association. The President shall be ex officio a member of all committees. b) The Vice-President shall assist the President in the performance of his duties, and assume the place of the President when he is absent. c) The Recording Secretary shall keep in permanent form full minutes of all business meetings of the Association, of the Cabinet, and of the Executive Committee. He shall notify all officers and members of their election. d) The Corresponding Secretary shall conduct the correspondence between the Association and other associations relative to the exchange of ideas and the interchange of visits. He shall be chair- man of the Committee on Intercollegiate Relations. e) The Treasurer shall have charge of the funds of the Association, and shall pay out money only on the order of the Executive Committee, signed by the President. He shall collect all dues, and keep an account in permanent form of all receipts and disbursements. He shall be chairman of the Finance Committee, and, with the advice of the Executive Committee, he shall prepare and present to the Association the annual budget. At the close of the Association year the Treasurer shall present to the Association a report of the financial condition of the Association, including the receipts and expenditures of the Association for the preceding year. /) The General Secretary shall sustain an advisory relation to the other officers of the Associa- tion, and shall assist them in the discharge of their executive duties. He shall be ex officio a member of all committees, and shall advise with them in regard to the execution of their policies, and shall receive and file all their reports. He shall conduct all the general correspondence of the Association. He shall, at the end of each Association year, present in writing a complete report covering the work of the several departments of the Association during the year. The amount of time which the General Secretary shall devote to the work, and the amount of his compensation, shall be determined by the Executive Committee. The Religious Wokk of the Univebsity 381 Sbc. 3. a) The six officers shall constitute the Executive Committee. This committee shall have charge of all property belonging to the Association and shall have general management of its affairs. Meetings of this committee shall be held weekly. 6) The six officers of the Association, together with the chairmen of the standing committees, shall constitute the Cabinet. It shall be the duty of the Cabinet to meet within three weeks of the opening of each Quarter, to discuss the condition of the work in each department and to adopt policies to govern the committees for the ensuing Quarter. ARTICLE V — COMMITTEES Section 1. Regular eommittees. Upon entering the duties of his office, the President shall appoint, with the advice of the General Secretary, the following committees : a) A Committee on Work for New Students, which shall organize and direct the special work for new students at the beginning of the Autumn Quarter, and likewise of the other Quarters, if there be a sufficient need. b) A Committee on Membership, which shall follow up the work of the preceding committee and endeavor to bring every man in the University ultimately into the Association. c) A Committee on Bible Study, the object of which shall be to interest men in the Bible and to enlist them in some form of systematic Bible study. d) A Committee on Religious Meetings, which shall have charge of the regular and special devotional and gospel meetings. e) A Missionary Committee, which shall aim, by missionary meetings, study classes, and other methods, to secure the active interest of every member of the Association in the cause of missions, and to promote the Student Volunteer Movement as an organic department of the Association. A majority of the committee shall be, when possible, student volunteers. /) A Committee on Intercollegiate Relations, which shall bring to the Association the results of the experience of similar organizations, and make the influence of the Association felt in the intercol- legiate movement. This committee shall have supervision of all delegations to conventions and summer schools, arrange for interchanges of delegations between this and other Associations, and shall undertake such forms of Christian work in the city as shall not interfere with the cultivation of the University field. g) A Finance Committee, which shall secure for the Association the funds necessary for the cultivation of its own field and for the extension of the Association movement. h) A Social Committee, which shall endeavor to promote the social life of the Association and make the social element prominent in its meetings. Sec. 2. Each regular committee shall hold a monthly meeting for the consideration of its work. Immediately after the monthly meeting the chairman of each committee shall file with the General Secretary a written report of the work of the committee for the preceding month. Sec. 3. Immediately after the annual report of the Treasurer (or at the close of his term of office, if there occur an irregular change in the office), the President shall appoint a committee of three to audit his accounts. Sec. i. Special committees may be provided and their work defined by vote of the Association at any business meeting. Sec. 5. Whenever practicable, all committees shall include one or more members from the Divinity School, from the Graduate School, from the Senior College, and from the Junior College. ARTICLE VI — MEETINGS AND ELECTIONS Section 1. Meetings. a) Devotional meetings. A weekly meeting for men and a weekly meeting in union with the y. W. C. A. shall be maintained by the Association. Special meetings may be arranged at the discre- tion of the Cabinet. b) Business meetings. The annual business meeting shall be held not later than one month before the close of the Winter Quarter. In connection with the last men's meeting of each Quarter, 382 The President's Report the chairmen of the various committees shall read before the Association reports covering the worlt done by their respective committees during the Quarter. Special business meetings may be called by the President or at the written request of five members. Sec. 2. Elections. a) The annual election of officers shall be held at the annual business meeting. A Nominating Committee of five members, two of whom shall also be members of the Faculty, shall be appointed at least two weeks before the annual election. This committee shall post its nominations at least one week before the election, and shall receive and post such other nominations as are indorsed in writing by at least five members of the Association. In case there is more than one nomination for any officei election to that office shall be by ballot. The officers shall enter upon their duties at the beginning of the Spring Quarter, and shall hold office for one year, or until their successors are elected. Pro- vided, that this paragraph does not apply to the election of General Secretary. b) In case a vacancy occurs in any office, it shall be filled by special election either at a regular or a special business meeting. A Nominating Committee of three, appointed at least one week in advance, shall present the nomination for a special election. c) In case of the election of General Secretary, at the annual business meeting or at any other time, the Nominating Committee shall consist of the Executive Committee of the Association, the President of the University, the Chaplain of the University, and the President of the Christian Union. This committee shall present one name to the Association for its confirmation. Sec. 3. Fifteen active members shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. ARTICLE Vll — CESSATION OP MEMBERSHIP Section 1. Any member in good standing may sever his connection with this Association by written resignation, and upon request shall receive a letter of dismissal. When any member in good standing severs his connection with the University he ceases to be a member of the Association, but if he again connects himself with the University, he thereby resumes his former membership. Sec. 2. Any member may be dropped from membership by a unanimous vote of the Executive Committee for the non-payment of dues, immoral conduct, or other sufficient reason. ARTICLE VIII — DEBT No debt shall be incurred by any administration beyond the amount provided for in the annual budget. ARTICLE IX — AMENDMENTS Amendments to this Constitution shall require for their adoption notice at a meeting of the Association at least one week in advance and a two-thirds vote of the members present, except that this article, Article I, and Article III, section 1, shall not be amended or repealed without the concur- rence of the International Committee of the Young Men's Christian Associations. AMENDMENTS I The members of the Divinity School of the University of Chicago, in order to secure affiliation with the World's Student Christian Federation, shall constitute the Divinity Section of the Y. M. C. A. of the University of Chicago. (Adopted March 15, 1899.) II The chairman of the Missionary Committee of the Divinity Council shall, after his election as an active member of the Y. M. C. A. of the University of Chicago, be a member of the Executive Com- mittee of the Association. (Adopted March 15, 1899.) Ill THE ADVISORY COMMITTEE Section 1. a) The Advisory Committee shall consist of three members of the Faculty, three business men, and three alumni of the University who formerly were members of the Association, together with the President and Treasurer of the Association. b) Only members of evangelical churches may become members of this committee. c) Seven members shall constitute a quorum. The Religious Work of the University 383 Sec. 2. The regular term of office, excepting that of the President and the Treasurer of the Association, shall be three years. The committee shall be self-perpetuating. Sec. 3. The regular election of members of the committee shall be held at its last meeting in the Spring Quarter. The term of office shall begin on July 1. All vacancies which may occur during the year in its membership shall be filled by the committee. Sec. 4. The committee shall elect its own officers and appoint its own committees, and shall adopt such rules of procedure as it may deem necessary. Sec. 5. The committee shall be selected first in the following manner: The Association shall elect the three members of the Faculty, who, acting with the President and the Treasurer, shall select the six remaining members. At the first meeting of the committee the three members of each of the three classes mentioned shall determine, by lot, who shall hold office for one, two, and three years respectively. Sec. 6. The duties of the committee shall be as follows: a) To act through the General Secretary in an advisory relation to the Association. b) To select the General Secretary, subject to the confirmation of the Association; such selec- tion to be posted not later than one week before the first of March of each year. c) To provide for the salary of the General Secretary and to determine the term of office. (Adopted June, 1899.) YOUNG women's CHEISTIAN ASSOCIATION The Young Women's Christian Association ' was established December 2, 1892. Without repetition of details published in earlier reports, the main facts relating to the past two years are given herevfith. EEPOET OF THE YOUNG WOMEN'S CHRISTIAN ASSOCIATION, 1899-1900, 1900-1901 PURPOSE It is the purpose of the Association "to promote Christian life, Christian faith, and Christian fellowship among the members; to carry on active Christian work, especially by and for students; to train the members for Christian service, and to lead them to devote their lives to Jesus Christ." ORGANIZATION All women connected with the University are eligible to membership, those belonging to any evangelical church as active, others as associate, members. The work of the Association is carried on by the following committees, serving under the direction of the usual officers: Membership, Eeligious Meetings, Bible Study, Philanthropic, Social, Eest-Eoom, Publication, Finance, and Intercollegiate Kelations. The Cabinet, consisting of the officers and the chair- men of committees, meets monthly to plan and discuss the work of the Association. During the past year the Constitution has been revised and broadened to meet the present needs and methods of administration by incorporating an Advisory Board, and the office and duties of a General Secretary. The value to the Association of possessing a General Secretary has been inestimable, and the efficiency of the work has increased many times. The need of an Advisory Board was greatly felt, not only to provide for the election and payment of a General Secretary, but also to bring the Association into closer touch with the Faculty of the University. MEMBERSHIP Number of members in the Association, June, 1899 - - - - - 83 Number of members received during the year 1899-1900 - - - 73 Number who terminated their membership 1899-1900 _ _ . - ^61 Total number, June, 1900 95 Number received 1900-1901 -..-.. 77 Number terminating membership 1900-1901 ----- ^59 Total number, June, 1901 - - 113 1 Later changed to the Yountr Women's Christian Lcagne. 384 The Peesident's Report MEETINGS Keligious meetings are held weekly; they are usually led by students, but are occasionally addressed by outside friends. In co-operation with the young men, union meetings have been held on Sunday evenings. The week of prayer in November was observed in 1900 by holding five morning meetings, with an average attendance of twelve. Number of Young Women's meetings, 1899-1900 28 Average attendance 22 Number of Young Women's meetings, 1900-1901 31 Average attendance ---35 Number of Union meetings, 1900-1901 33 Average attendance 54 BIBLE STDDT The Association has urged its members to avail themselves of the exceptional opportunities for thorough and intelligent Bible study offered by the University, and has repeatedly called attention to the courses offered by the American Institute of Sacred Literature. PHILANTHROPT Visits have been made to the women of the University who were ill, and in need df friendly service, whenever such cases were known. The philanthropic committee has also been instru- mental in securing yoimg women to assist at the University Settlement, some of whom have given regular systematic service throughout the year. SOCIAL Each Quarter assistance in registration has been offered to students who are strangers at the University. Early in the Autumn Quarter new students have been welcomed at an evening reception given in co-operation with the Y. M. C. A. A special reception for women entering the University for the first time was given early in the fall, and was well attended. New members are welcomed into the Association at a Quarterly Recognition Service, which service is partly devotional and partly social. EEST-ROOM The room on the fourth floor of Cobb Hall, formerly used by the Association as a rest- room for women, has been needed by the University through two Quarters for class-room pm-poses; but it is once more at the disposal of the Association. The proceeds of a concert under the auspices of the alumnee members were used to purchase new furnishings, which add to the attractiveness and comfort of the room. It was formally opened at the beginning of the Spring Quarter. FINANCES 1899-1900 Balance from previous year ------ $16.10 Dues ----------- 66.50 Pledges ----- 8.55 Total receipts -------- S91.15 Total expenditures -------- 78.88 Balance S12.27 1900-1901 Balance from previous year ...--- $12.27 Dues 65.25 Pledges ----- 26.20 Total receipts $103.72 Expenditures - 102.64 Balance - -,^-- - - - - - $1.08 The Eeligious Work of the Univeesity 385 INTERCOLLEGIATE RELATIONS Letters have been exchanged with about twenty associations connected with other colleges and universities. Copies of the Inter-Collegian and the Evangel are available to the officers of the Association. CONFERENCES AND CONVENTIONS Three delegates attended the Summer Conference at Lake Geneva, Wis., in the summer of 1899, and five were present in 1900. One delegate was sent to the State Convention at Bloomington in the winter of 1901, and several members have interested themselves in the conferences held each spring. The work during the summer has been carried on by a committee of twelve, six of whom are taken from the members of the Association and six from the members of the Young Men's Christian Association who remain in residence during the summer. The summer students have entered into the work in hearty co-operation with the former members, making both summers very successful. The receptions were very largely attended, and the summer devotional meetings, held jointly with the young men on Wednesday and Sunday evenings, were very helpful and successful. The officers of the Association are as follows: 1899-1900 1900-1901 President— Catherine Cleveland, Florence Parker Ethel Freeman, Margaret Coulter Vice President— Grace Conant, Mary Averett, Grace Manning Grace Manning, Florence Miller Recording Secretary— Edith Bullis, Olive Sieben Cecile Bowman, Ceoile Bowman Corresponding Secretary— Elizabeth Lingle, Anna Ellison Anna Ellison, Mildred French Treasurer— Mabel Porter, Margaret Calvin Helen Gardiner, Jessie Sherman General Secretary— Florence Parker Ethel Freeman The oflBcers are elected at the close of the Winter Quarter, so as to get the work well under way for the next year before the close of the Spring Quarter. The members of the Advisory Board are as follows: Dr. Coulter Mrs. Goodspeed Miss Freeman Mr. Mathews Mrs. Miller Miss Donnan Miss Talbot Miss Reed Miss Coulter Miss Bronk IX. MISSIONS In the Divinity School and in the Christian Associations systematic provision is made for instruction in the history, aims, and methods of city, home, and foreign missions; organized efforts are made to hold the duty of this service before the minds of the students and help them to wise personal decisions. The most earnest and successful missionaries and managers of societies are frequently invited to present some aspect of the subject as it appears to one whose whole life is devoted to this branch of Christian enterprise. As a result of this effort the pastors who have been educated here are leaders of missionary enterprises; many of our alumni are spending their lives in the service of humanity and of the kingdom of God, both in hard fields in our own country and at diflBcult posts abroad. Many have offered themselves to missionary boards and are ready to go where they are most needed. X. MORAL INFLUENCES Parents and patrons have a right to ask us what effort is made at the University to build up the moral character of the students intrusted to us, to help them overcome temptation and to become positive forces of good in the world. The implied question has, in part, been answered by all the statements of this report, but only in part. The Physical Culture Depart- 386 The President's Kepokt meat, by the personal character of the instructors and by the discipline it gives in good habits, lays the physical foundation for all virtue and offers worthy and powerful motives for good conduct. The ordinary discipline of the class-rooms and of the Deans is carefully ordered with a view to repress selfish and degrading tendencies, and to ennoble and refine the heart and life of all. Perhaps it is this daily habit, far more than ethical precepts, which is the most important factor in moral development. There is no time for dissipation. This is a " working university." The idle, the heedless, the dissolute are sifted out by frequent examinations. Those who are guilty of immoral conduct are required to withdraw from the community. That wrong acts are done we do not deny; but the atmosphere of the society is favorable to all those qualities which are held in just esteem by all Christian communities. One of the most helpful factors in this connection is the presence of refined and pure women who are inspired by the noblest ideals and sustained by the most worthy aims. Kespectfully submitted, Chaeles Richmond Henderson, Chaplain. THE HOUSE SYSTEM AT THE UNIVERSITY To the President of the University : Sib: I submit herewith my report on the House system at the University. True education aims to produce harmony with environment — to enable men to live, and to live nobly. The American college of today is the result of experience which has been adapted to environment. It differs from both the colleges and the universities of Em-ope. It is the out- growth of American life. The early college was designed to be a training school for preachers and teachers. But with the expansion of the nation and the development of its material resources, the scientific and technical curriculum has gained upon the older form, and today has place in every college of eminence in the country. Wondrous material changes have been wrought in the foundation of Ubraries, the equipment of laboratories, the erection of student dormitories, the establishment of professional and technological schools. Nor has the evolution ended here. Continental ideals and practices — witness the seminai — have been assimilated, although, fortunately, all attempts to empty the American college of its native characteristics have proven futile. These changes have naturally resulted in an enormous increase in the number of students in oiu- universities and colleges. Yet in two respects imtil recently higher education has been curiously backward: first, in appreciating the fact that a certain amount of physical culture may be profitably joined with mental effort; and, second, in developing the social instinct in the student diuring the formative period of life, when character is most adaptable and the lessons of experience are most easily learned. The first of these has now been overcome. The college man today secures relaxation from his books in healthful and well-directed exercise either in the gymnasium or upon the athletic field. But the social life of almost every American college is a yet undeveloped factor; or if it has been developed, it has grown haphazardly, and is either lacking in coherence, or else has hardened into narrow cliques which perpetuate unwise traditions and breed antagonism. Broad, genuine, sympathetic, social life is still an unknown element in far too many institutions. But the change is happening — has happened. It is only tardily that American college authorities have become aware of this deficiency in student life, and have grown to appreciate that liberal culture implied the development of the American college student in all right directions, intellectual, physical, aesthetic, social. The building of the well- equipped men's clubhouse at the University of Chicago marks the purpose in the minds of the Trustees to provide a symmetrical education, lying four-square, in the Liberal Arts, in Science, in Gymnastics, and in "the manners that make men." American education has been slow in some ways to profit by the experience of Europe. Everyone knows in a general way that the mediaeval universities "were at first simply an expansion and evolution of the existing ecclesiastical organization," but not all are familiar with the fact that the colleges of Oxford and Cambridge, which today with their separate faculties emphasize the instructional side of education, originally were social organizations; indeed, that the colleges which formed the universities of the Middle Ages grew out of eating clubs of students and were originally only endowed hostels. There must be some common bond or common occasion among men for meeting. Table talk is doubtless one of the most ancient forms of literature, and now as always one of the most universal. Man relaxes when he eats, and becomes social. Strangely enough, the founders of American collegiate institutions ignored 387 388 The Pkesident's Repoet the lessons of experience, or perhaps the penury of all of our earlier colleges prevented the development of this necessary feature of student life. At any rate, the social life of American students for generations lacked the unity and sympathy derived from living together and breaking the bread of silence or of mirth in neighborly company. Students boarded in private families, enjoying few of the comforts of home, and led a life of isolation, combined with intense intellectual effort, or else of frivolity undisciplined by and unknown to the college authorities. Harvard was the first college to attempt the betterment of such conditions and to realize the advantageous results to be derived from a community life on the part of the students. In October, 1747, the Overseers passed a vote that it would be "beneficial for the college that the members thereof be in commons," and recommended that " speedy and effectual care should be taken that the law on that subject be carried into execution." The corporation immediately passed a vote to this effect, "but unfortunately," says Quincy, in his History of Harvard College, " the provision for various reasons was a dead letter from the very beginning." Ten years later the Overseers endeavored to revive the statute and restrained students from lodging or boarding in private houses, on the ground that life in commons would very much contribute to the health of the students, facilitate study, and prevent extravagance. The corporation regarded the suggestion as impracticable; yet from the building of Hollis Hall at Harvard until the present beautiful edifice of the Harvard Union, Harvard has attempted to stimulate and develop the communion and social life of students at Cambridge. The history of social development at Chicago proves that the University has profited by the light of experience. It is an interesting story of social experimentation, adaptation, and development. The Quinquennial Convocation statement of the President, made July 2, 1896, admirably describes this genesis: There were at first no bonds of association, and only to the slightest extent was there acquaint- anceship of any kind. Bold and courageous were those first men and women who began work October 1, 1892. The recollection of life in the Beatrice, and the removal of the women to Snell in the spring, will never be forgotten by those who took part in these experiences The decision of the Faculty to discourage the organization of fraternities now seems to have contributed much to the confusion of earlier years. There was, however, everywhere the presence of an excellent spirit, and the pioneer days performed no slight service in developing character that would not otherwise have been developed. At the beginning of the second year the House system was adopted, and immediately social organization began to take form. Meantime several efforts were put forth to organize literary societies, and these, with the associations formed in connection with the University of Chicago Weekly and other similar efforts, furnished the basis for still further development. The simple division of all undergraduate students into two classes .... prevented all friction of a traditional character between Freshmen and Sophomores, and at the same time encouraged a more independent feeling on the part of the younger students as compared with those who had been longer engaged in college work. The large number of graduate students unquestionably exerted restraining influence upon the under- graduates — an influence, however, which was upon the whole good. The same influence was exerted by the life of the Houses, especially in the women's Houses, where graduate and undergraduate women have lived together. The athletic activity was cultivated vigorously from the beginning. Here more than anywhere else paternalism may be said to have existed. The University did not wait for the students to organize. The work of the athletic field was placed under the direct supervision of a University officer. The results show that under certain circumstances paternalism is an effective agency. The Monday receptions instituted soon after the organization of the Houses have contributed perhaps more than any other single agency to the general social life of the students Naturally the Senior students took in hand the celebration of Washington's birthday, and the custom of Junior College Day seems to have become a law. Within two years the exercises connected with graduation have become more and more distinctive, until now certain events of a specific character seem to have become permanent. The more important traditions of student life may be regarded as established. The House System at the University 389 It will be seen by this statement that from the beginning the University of Chicago appre- ciated the educational importance of the social life of the student. It recognized the fact that the student's development is determined almost, if not quite, as much by contact with his fellows as with the libraries, laboratories, and his teachers. But it required some time to discover the most happy method of association among the students. It was not until 1893 that, in accordance with this appreciation, the system of the University Houses was established, a "House" being understood to be a group of members of the University entitled to continuous residence in a particular Hall, this residence being limited to students in attendance upon courses in the University, and to ofBcers of the University. Each House had a Head, appointed by the President of the University ; a Counselor, chosen from the Faculty of the University by the members of the House ; a House Committee, elected by the members of the House, of which House Committee the Head of the House was chairman and the Counselor an ex officio member; and a secretary and treasurer, elected by the members of the House. The adoption of this form of administration was in June, 1893, although the application of it was deferred until the ensuing autumn. It was the result of a request by the Deans of the University, made to the Faculties of Arts, Literature, and Science, to appoint a Parietal Com- mittee which should consider the details of student and University life upon the grounds of the University as well as at a distance from these grounds. This committee held a meeting and considered the various problems presented by the members of the committee. In view of the circumstances, at this meeting of the committee it was not found possible to formulate anything that was in any sense satisfactory. A little later the Council of the University took up the matter, and as the result of its work a plan was proposed which was submitted to various members of the Faculty, to the Parietal Committee, to a Committee of the Board of Trustees on Organization, and finally to the Board of Trustees itself. This plan, after many modifications and many suggestions, combined, as well as could be combined, the wisdom of many persons, and was legally adopted. A word or two of explanation as to the origin, and what might be called the philosophy, of the plan may be of interest. In the University life there were many things to draw students apart, many departments of work, many difPerent interests, many instructors, and very many courses of instruction. From the beginning the University did not have that influence which comes from class organization. The University had been organized upon another scheme. No one doubts for a minute that there is a great gain in all that constitutes class interest, but it was thought that this gain might be secured in some other way. No one doubted for a minute the need of some interest which would bring those of kindred spirits together and bind them into a unit. In an institu- tion as large as the University of Chicago it was entirely out of the question that every man and woman in the institution could know or become intimate with every other man and woman. In the nature of things this was impossible. In a small college, where the number is limited to but one or two or three hundred students, it is possible; and here without doubt is one of the strongest arguments in favor of the small college and smaller institutions. But might not a great university accomplish this same result by being organized in such a way that there might be the equivalent of many smaller colleges, so that those who were like-minded might associate together? For this purpose, and in part also to introduce the principle of self- government, the plan of the House system was adopted. It was understood that these Houses, as they were organized, should cultivate the individual spirit ; that each House should have its own traditions and its own interests ; that there should be a rivalry, but a generous rivalry, between Houses. It was understood that the control of the House should be in the hands of those who constituted the membership, yet with certain safeguards established. The Head of 890 The President's Report the House was to be appointed by the President. This meant that the Head was in every case confirmed by the Board of Trustees, and by virtue of this appointment and confirmation became an oiScer of the University. The Councilor, selected from some Faculty of the University, was the representative of the House in Faculty meetings. He was to have in his hands the public interests of the House. Aside from these officers, the remainder of the organization was entirely in the hands of the members of the House. The executive committee was the committee chosen by those who lived in the House ; the secretary and treasurer was elected by the members of the House ; in real truth, each House was to be self -governed. A more important fact, from the point of view of the constitution of the House, was that the membership of the House was to be determined by those who already had become members. This practically made a House a club or a society. Those who had once gained membership in a House decided, within certain limitations, who should afterward become members of the House. There were, of course, many possibilities of vacancies in the House, and for the interest of the members of the House, as well as for the interests of the University, it was necessary that these vacancies be filled, and provision was made in the plan for the temporary filling of such vacancies. But a guest, a temporary occupant of a room in the House, occupied it only for a specific number of weeks, and if at the end of that time the guest were not elected to member- ship, the guest had no longer any claim upon the room which he or she might have occupied. This meant that no person should become a permanent member of the House without the consent of those who had already become members of the House, and was a most important feature of the plan, for its assured congeniality among the members. The plan of working all four Quarters in the year, of welcoming students who were able to come for only a single Quarter, made it necessary that rooms upon the groimds should be furnished. It seemed wise to render all the assistance that could be rendered in this matter, and so the Trustees proposed to provide the money for the furnishing of the Houses upon terms the examination of which shows that they were businesslike and reasonable. This plan allowed those who so desired to have a House furnished with some degree of elegance. It even permitted those who so desired to have a House furnished very elegantly. It enabled members of the Houses who might wish to do so, to purchase and put into the House any fm-niture that they might desire ; but a restriction was put upon all furniture for which the House paid only a percentage. It was not thought wise that those who were present today, for example, should establish a debt too large for those who were to follow, and hence the Trustees provided that all furniture which was to be purchased and for which the Trustees were to advance the money must be purchased by an officer of the Board of Trustees and purchased upon a requisition approved by a committee of the Board which has charge of the buildings.^ In pursuance of the new policy, thus somewhat fully outlined, the dormitories occupied by the men and women students of the University were first organized as Houses, distinction being given by prefixing the name of the Hall to the House. The first Houses were established under the above form in October, 1893. These were Beecher Hall, Kelly Hall, and Foster Hall, whose charter members had been residents of the Beatrice. In December Graduate Hall and Middle and South Divinity were organized under the House system. Snell Hall, the first undergraduate House for men, was organized in January, 1894. Green Hall, the largest of the women's Houses, was established on December 13, 1898. The government of each House was intended to be, and is yet, a democracy, the power of the Head, except in the case of certain broad University regulations, being limited to the enforcement of statutes framed by the House members. For three principles have been upper- 1 Adapted from remarks made by President Harper in Chapel, June 20, 1893 (unprinted) . The House System at the University 391 most in the minds of those most interested in organizing and influencing the life and activities of the students of the University : unity, liberty, and equality. Within a short time, however, after the inauguration of the House system, modification was made necessary, owing to the fact that various Greek-letter fraternities had entered the University. At the inception of the University the methods of this kind of organization were believed by some to be in distinct antagonism to the ends desired by the administration ; the original thought of the University authorities was to discourage every effort at the establishment of fraternities at Chicago, where it was aimed to foster the spirit of a great university rather than of a provincial college. The error of this policy was soon seen, however, and the general vote of the Trustees in 1893 allowed fraternities to enter. The action was taken without special reference to the effect on the somewhat complicated and extremely important form of House organization which was then in process of formation. The results have been most gratifying. It is an undoubted fact that in the authorization of the Greek-letter fraternities the University created the opportunity to stimulate House life among the students, and at the same time eliminate the undesirable features of the fraternity system. By becoming members of the larger House system the fraternities at Chicago stand in much more healthful relations to each other and to the student body as a whole, and to the Faculty, than is usual elsewhere ; for they are not in the position of student organizations merely tolerated, but are normal, co-operating organs of the whole University life. The following Greek-letter Houses, organized outside the Quadrangles, have been recognized by the University: 1. Delta Kappa Epsilon House, 5754 Woodlawn avenue; established December, 1893. Councilor, Associate Professor J. E. Angell; Head, Professor Shailer Mathews. 2. Phi Kappa Psi House, 5635 Lexington avenue; established January 4, 1894. Councilor, Professor George Lincoln Hendrickson; Head, Dr. D. J. Lingle. 3. Beta Theta Pi House, 5806 Washington avenue; established January 25, 1894. Coun- cilor, Associate Professor F. W. Shepardson; Head, Associate Professor Wilham Bishop Owen. 4. Alpha Delta Phi House; established March 20, 1896. Councilor, Professor G. S, Good- speed; Head, Dr. Joseph Edward Eaycroft. 5. Sigma Chi House, 5723 Washington avenue; established January 23, 1897. Councilor, Associate Professor S. H. Clark; Head, Director Newman Miller. 6. Phi Delta Theta House, 5719 Monroe avenue; established February 18, 1897. Councilor, Associate Professor John W. Moncrief ; Head, W. E. Godso. 7. Psi Upsilon House, 6006 Woodlawn avenue; established November 24, 1897. Councilor, Professor Robert Francis Harper; Head, Assistant Professor George Carter Howland. 8. Delta Tau Delta House, 5731 Monroe avenue; established May, 1898. Councilor, ■ ; Head, Associate Professor Alexander Smith. 9. Chi Psi House, 6028 Kimbark avenue; established November 25, 1898. Councilor, Professor John Matthews Manly; Head, Assistant Professor Walter A. Payne. 10. Delta Upsilon House, 6018 Kimbark avenue; established January, 1901. Councilor, Assistant Professor R. M. Lovett; Head, Dr. James Westfall Thompson. 11. Phi Gamma Delta House, 341 E. Fifty-third street; established May, 1902. Councilor, Professor John M. Coulter; Head, Professor Wilbur S. Jackman. 12. Sigma Alpha Epsilon House, 6116 Lexington avenue; established 1902. Councilor) Mr. A. R. Hatton; Head, Mr. F. G. Smith. But apart from its connection with dormitory and fraternity life, the House system, soon after its inauguration, was destined to experience other expansion. Notwithstanding the establish- ment of Houses in the Quadrangles, and the organization of fraternities into University Houses, 392 The President's Eepoet outside the Quadrangles, a radical social need still remained for which there was no provision. This sprang from the large number of students — nearly 40 per cent, of the body — which came from the city of Chicago and vicinity. Most of these, who lived at home, and a large per cent, of them at a distance from the University, were getting very little of the University life and atmosphere outside the class-room. The situation was briefly described by the President in his Quarterly Statement of January 3, 1898: Of the twelve hundred students in residence, about one-fourth have homes in the Quad- rangles; that is to say, in Halls situated upon the University grounds. Three-fourths of the entire number live at a greater or less distance from the University. Many come to the University from the North and West Sides of the city. The accommodations provided in the University buildings for students who come for the day have been inadequate, and many well-grounded complaints have been made. Such students, to their very great disadvantage, have been compelled in many cases to take courses which were scheduled for three successive hours, in order that their worlj at the University might be finished within the shortest possible time, and an opportunity thus afforded for returning home. To meet this demand the President announced at this time that the University had appro- priated rooms and money for the establishment of two new Houses for men who were day students, and, in accordance with the appropriation, Lincoln and Washington Houses were organized in February, 1898. The plan of organization was essentially the same as that of the other Houses located upon the Campus. The members of the new Houses had headquarters assigned. These headquarters consisted of a large room, which formed the home of the members during the day. These Houses were in reality clubs, the students themselves determining the membership. Each House had its Head appointed by the President. The membership was limited to fifty, and was restricted to students not members of other University Houses, including fraternities. Prom the beginning these Houses have been successful, being formed by a congenial group of men who were not greatly interfered with and managed by the Faculty, and who were at liberty to select men of their own stamp, and who built up a tradition and perpetuated it. A simple but important element in their success was due to the fact that the members had a common luncheon hour and crude facilities for preparing simple food. It was determined at this time that, should there be a demand for more than two Houses, organization of additional Houses would be considered, and it was thought that this fiurther adaptation of the House system would relieve what in the case of many students had been a serious hardship and deprivation. The success of Washington and Lincoln Houses emboldened thuteen young women of the University not resident in the women's dormitories, late in the spring of 1898, to petition for similar accorrimodations for their enjoyment. Recognizing that the demand was just, the University, with the generous assistance of Mrs. Rockefeller, fiu'nished quarters for Spelman House, named in honor of Mrs. Rockefeller (May 7, 1898). Although the efficiency of these Houses was handicapped from the start by their disadvantageous location in quarters primarily designed for class-rooms, they have abundantly justified their organization. The broad purpose of the House system by this time embodied the hope of organizing every group of six or more students living together as an organization outside the Quadrangles into a House subject to the general rules of Houses, with such modifications of the rules in each case as might be determined by the administrative board. But even without the realization of this ideal, the proper supervision of the Houses ah-eady established, and the oversight of numerous student organizations of various sorts, demanded more centralization; and therefore, on March 19, 1896, the Board of Student Organizations was created, complementary to the Board of Physical Culture and Athletics. The spheres of activity of the new Board com- prehended students' organizations, publications, and exhibitions. The establishment of the The House System at the Univbksity 393 Board was announced to the public at the end of the Winter Quarter by the President in these words : Upon the recommendation of the Council, the Trustees have established the Board of Student Organizations, Publications, and Exhibitions. This Board is charged with the execution of all University regulations bearing upon the University Houses, student fraternities, student publica- tions, and also general supervision of all student entertainments and exhibitions. It will be the policy of the Board to encourage these student activities and in no way to interfere with or repress them. The large freedom which from the beginning has been granted the students of the University will be continued, and every effort will be put forth by the new Board to encourage the development of student activity within reasonable limits. The college is a place for study, but the college life includes more than study. The life of the student must be considered in all the elements which make up that life. The most ideal institution of learning, so far as the word home is concerned, is Oxford, where the colleges are only houses developed. Yet even if the University of Chicago could have a garden for the use of the members of each House, the Oxford ideal would be far from realization. The American college fraternity lodge or students' dormitory inclines to be like a modern club, yet the mediaevalism of immemorial tradition still remains to a certain degree in social and domestic life among college men. It is tmfortunate that a certain amoimt of defiance or independence of the best social usage is considered a possession to be fostered in their life. All this is wholly counter to what is best in the House system, which at Chicago is yet in its formative stages, particularly in the case of the men's Houses upon the Campus. In the spring of 1900 a Committee on Membership in the University Houses applied to the House secretaries with very poor success, so far as the men's Houses were concerned, and on September 25, 1900, reported to the Board of Student Organizations that " the House member- ship seems to be only a matter of form in the men's Houses whose organization has been examined, while in the women's Houses it is developing along the lines anticipated by the Council and is growing to be more and more an influential agency in the personal and social life of the University." Despite the marked success of the women's Houses, the futiure, however, must see an adaptation of the House life of the University of Chicago to the local women's societies. At present the opportunity afforded by the great community of interest and social sympathy existing among the members of the various women's societies is not cultivated as it should be. It may be that living together in separate dwellings, as in the case of the fraternity men, may not prove expedient, but a compromise is possible. The erection of women's dormitories, divided after the model of Hitchcock Hall, into distinct sections, would at once respond to the desires of separate social groups of women, and at the same time preserve the larger unity which is so fine a social feature of the women's Halls. The history of a Hall like Green or Foster is a story with a moral not to be ignored. The report of a committee on a plan for the future development of the Junior Colleges, submitted on May 17, 1902, to the Junior College Faculty, to the effect that the future residence Quadrangles east and west of the main Campus be subdivided into Houses, each with its own commons and resident Head, and that Houses or clubs with common luncheon be provided for students who live outside the University, already points this way. The essential reason for the variation apparent between the social life of the men and of the women seems to be the fact that the women enjoy real home life, while the men do not. Where there is no common table, it is diflScult for men young or old to be social and intirnate. The best nucleus of social life is some sort of a club table, and the new Commons, when opened, is quite likely to stimulate this form of student association. The following features would seem to be essential, if House life among the men of the University is to be made a success: First, the house must not be too large as to membership. 394 The President's Eepoet Second, there must be a common dining-room, or at least a club table, in the Commons. Third, there must be a common meeting-place — library, lounging room, or something of the sort. The main defects of Snell have related to the club room, which was not very well adapted to this purpose. The club room of each House ought to be commodioiis, convenient, comfortably furnished, and provided with some writing materials. It ought to have on the walls photo- graphs of former members, and other things which will give distinctive character to the place. In these apartments the tables should be small, the public rooms large, and there should be no long corridors. Fourth, there must be a control of membership by the body of the House. If the administration is to foist anybody upon the group, the principles of selection and self- perpetuation disappear; and these are fundamental to the real growth of a House tradition. Obviously, therefore, the matter of the selection of the Head of the House is one of prime importance. He should be a man of some degree of executive ability, of such strength of character as to command the respect of all the members of the House, and at the same time one who should be both an example worthy of imitation in the matter of personal conduct, and of social ability, so as to give a tone to the whole social life of the House. In this connection it may be suggested that the present deans' system might be modified so that Heads of Houses of those students under their respective supervision be made deans — an innovation which would be likely to bring the student seeking for direction in his study into connection with the one most familiar with his position and attainments. The office of Head, it is plain, is one of influence, capable and worthy of development. The Head in every case should be a resident member of the House. That this is not so in the case of the fraternity Houses is a serious deficiency in the House administration. There is a wide difference between the efficiency of the Head of the House and the Councilor thereof. In general it may be said that the Coim- cilors, except in the case of the women's Houses, do not seem to have been very useful. Another change which might be tried is that of making Heads of Houses ex officio members of the Board of Student Organizations. The question of maintaining discipline in the undergraduate Houses upon the Campus is a more difficult one than in the case of those which are fraternity lodges. The temptation to and the undesirability of "rough housing" are patent to all familiar with student ways, but in the latter organizations the risk of imperiling or destroying furniture and other property, which is owned by the House members, acts as a deterrent, while in the men's undergraduate dormi- tories the property, belonging to the University, is of so public a character that thoughtless students lose respect for property rights. The remedy seems to lie in increasing the respon- sibility and powers of the Head, while at the same time the student is held sharply to account for any destruction which may occur. Beyond this perhaps it should be urged that the build- ings, either by the Head of the House or perhaps by some other University officer, require frequent inspection as to the condition of the furniture, bedding, etc. Perhaps the Head is the best person upon whom to lay this responsibility. But one can'easily imagine that in some cases a man fitted to be Head would not be willing to take the responsibility in this matter. The benefits accruing to the student from congenial House life during his or her residence at the University are manifold. It has been truly said that the student who lives in a private family does not enjoy the full advantage of University lite. The student who lives at home, though enjoying for this reason special privileges, nevertheless loses many of the important privileges of University life The ideal college and university life will be attained only in those cases in which the life of the individual is brought into the closest contact with the life of many other individuals, and this is impossible when students isolate themselves and main- tain association in large measure with those who have no connection with the University The development of University life is largely dependent upon the growth of the University Houses. The House System at the University 395 Some of the advantages alluded to are: tte increase of good fellowship among all; the stimulus given to students having local residence, who are least likely to get into the spirit of college life; closer inspection of and more interest in the life of the students; social culture for many who at present have no social opportunity. The words of the President in the Quarterly Statement made October 1, 1896, are both a prophecy and a promise: The time will come when every student of the University will be a member of a University House. This time, however, cannot come until more University Houses have been built, and until provision is made for residence at the University during the day of those who from necessity must live at home or with friends in the city. The development of University life is largely dependent upon the growth of the University Houses, and the increase in the number of students who live upon the University grounds. Kespectfully submitted, James Westpall Thompson, Director of University Houses. REPORTS OF THE LABORATORIES THE YERKES OBSERYATORY To the President of the University: Sir: I beg to present my report on the work of the Yerkes Observatory for the period covered by your forthcoming report on the condition of the University — July 1, 1899, to June 30, 1902. A sketch of the circumstances connected with the establishment of the Observatory by Mr. Yerkes, and a brief description of the buildings and instruments, are given in the First Annual Report of the Director. The present report deals almost exclusively with the period which has ejapsed since the publication of my report for the year ending June 30, 1899. Much valuable information on the work of various departments of research, derived from data furnished by members of the staff, may be found in the more detailed statements given below. In these introductory pages I shall confine my remarks to some of the more general questions which concern the Observatory. PLAN OF WOEK The plan of work entered upon by the Yerkes Observatory in 1897 was defined by two closely related considerations: (1) the fields of research which under all the circumstances seemed to promise the best returns, and (2) the importance of realizing in the fullest possible degree the special qualities of the forty-inch telescope. Hitherto, in view of the necessity of constructing in our own shops the greater part of the auxiliary apparatus required, it has been impossible to bring into effect a well-rounded plan of research. But, one by one, such instruments as a three and one-fourth-inch transit, a six-inch comet-seeker, a double-slide plate-carrier for the forty-inch telescope, the Bruce spectrograph, the two-foot reflector, and the apparatus necessary to equip the spectroscopic laboratories, have been completed and brought into use. At the present time, although much important work of con- struction remains to be done, the equipment of the Observatory is sufficiently complete to permit many of the details of a general plan of research, which has been contemplated from the outset, to be described. THE FOETY-INCH YEEKES TELESCOPE A statement regarding the performance of the great refractor may be found on p. 407. The result of the test of the object-glass by Professor Hartmann's new and valuable method is most satisfactory. Professor Hartmann states that, so far as can be determined from measures of the photographs sent to him, the forty-inch is superior to any objective, large or small, that he has yet tested. The telescopes tested by Professor Hartmann include many of the best instruments of both European and American opticians. The performance of the mounting, dome, and rising-floor has also been entirely satisfactory, and much credit is due to Messrs. Warner & Swasey for their successful work. MICEOMETEIG OBSEEVATIONS The forty-inch telescope, on account of its great apertiu-e and focal length, the stability and perfection of its mounting, and its ease of manipulation, is admirably adapted for micro- metric measurements of all kinds. At present, four nights of each week are devoted to such work. On two of these nights Professor Burnham is engaged in the measurement of double stars. Up to the time of publication of his " General Catalogue of 1290 Double Stars," ' Professor 1 Publications of the Yei-Jces Observatory^ Vol. I. 399 400 The President's Eepoet Bumham devoted his nights with the forty -inch to the measurement of /S stars for the purposes of the Catalogue. Since that time, as is explained more fully on p. 408, he has been engaged in the measurement of a long list of neglected double stars, taken in large part from the catalogues of the Herschels. Much of the efiFectiveness of Professor Bumham 's work is due to his invariable adherence to a carefully considered plan, from which he permits himself to deviate for no side- issues, however attractive they may be. This accounts for the fact that he has found very few new double stars with the forty-inch telescope. All of these were picked up accidentally. If he had made a regular search for such objects, there can be no doubt that hundreds would have been added to his long list of discoveries. Professor Barnard's micrometric work has also been pursued with very definite objects in view, but it has covered a wider field. If I am not mistaken, his measures of the fifth satellite of Jupiter are the only ones published during the past few years. These show a remarkable degree of precision, and afford excellent evidence of the qualities of the forty-inch telescope for exact micrometric work on the faintest and most diiEcult objects. There is good reason to believe that his extensive measures of Eros, which represent the contribution of the Yerkes Observatory to the recent international campaign for the determination of the solar parallax, will prove to be exceedingly well adapted for their piurpose. His triangulations of star clusters have involved an immense amount of work, and should be of great value, both for the detection of possible changes and for comparison with measures of photographs of these clusters taken by Mr. Eitchey with the same telescope. A more complete account of Professor Barnard's micro- metric work may be found on p. 408. Attention is called to the measures of stars in the Pleiades, made in an investigation of the variation of the focal length of the objective with the temperature. It would be interesting to compare these with similar results obtained with other large telescopes. CELESTIAL PHOTOGEAPHT The possibility of using the forty-inch refractor as a photographic telescope, which Mr. Kitchey's work with a color screen and isochromatic plates has so amply demonstrated, was not foreseen when the first plans for research with this instrument were made. In view of the uncertainty which still exists regarding systematic errors that may affect visual and photo- graphic measures of star places, it is fortunate that by this simple means it becomes possible to use a single telescope, with no change of objective or focal length, for both classes of work. In the stellar parallax campaign which is planned for the immediate futvure, a simultaneous visual and photographic study of the parallax of certain stars will be made with the forty-inch telescope. As it should also be possible to use the new coelostat reflector for simultaneous work, both visual and photographic, on the same stars, there would seem to be an exceptional oppor- tunity to discover sources of systematic error, especially as the coelostat reflector is wholly free from flexure. The large scale of the photographs taken with the forty-inch telescope, and the sharpness of definition made possible by the use of a double-slide plate-carrier, should permit a high degree of precision to be attained in measures of star places made with their aid. The Obser- vatory does not yet possess a measuring machine for use in both co-ordinates, but, through the kindness of Miss Whitney, the excellent Kepsold machine belonging to the Vassar College Observatory was loaned to us during the summer of 1901. The measures of stellar photographs made by Professor Barnard with this machine, and compared with his visual results, were exceedingly satisfactory. As soon as measuring machines can be obtained, it is hoped that much work may be done on photographs made with the large refractor. Photographs of the Moon taken with the same instrument by Mr. Eitchey are remarkably sharp, and selenographers have stated that they exhibit many details not previously recorded The Yekkes Observatory 401 photographically. In view of the recent publication of photographic maps of the Moon, it has not been considered advisable to make a new one, but enlargements from selected regions will soon be published. Some of the negatives have been sent to Mr. S. A. Saunder, of Berks, England, at his request for measurement. A comparison of photographs of the same objects taken by Mr. Ritchey with the forty- inch refractor and the two-foot reflector brings out in a striking way the relative advan- tages of the two instruments for work of this kind. On account of the great focal length (sixty-four feet) of the forty-inch telescope, the scale of photographs taken with this instrument is eight times that of photographs taken with the reflector. The star images are larger in the case of the forty-inch But as settings can be made on them with a linear error hardly greater than that with the small scale pictures, the precision of the resulting measures is many times greater. The angular field of good definition is doubtless considerably larger with the refractor than with the reflector, but the field actually included on the 8X10 plate employed with the forty-inch is not larger than the field of good definition with the reflector. In all other particu- lars the reflector has very great advantages. For example, stars beyond the reach of the forty- inch refractor can be photographed with the two-foot reflector in forty-five minutes. In the case of nebulae the advantages of the reflector are far greater. The absence of chromatic aber- ration and absorption, which gives the reflector its power of photographing so quickly, is equally important in spectroscopic work, for which the reflector seems eminently adapted. For a continuation of Professor Nichols's research on the heat radiated by the stars (p. 422), a great reflector will be indispensable. The bearing of these facts on the importance of mounting our five-foot mirror is obvious. THE FIVE-FOOT REFLECTOR As stated in my First Annual Eeport, a five-foot mirror for a reflecting telescope, con- structed in our optical shop at the expense of Mr. William E. Hale, was offered by him to the University on condition that funds be obtained to mount and house it. The University decided to accept this offer if it could obtain the necessary funds, but no money has been secured for the purpose. Meanwhile, the work of Keeler and Perrine with the three-foot Crossley reflector, and that of Eitchey with the two-foot reflector built in our own shops, has convinced astrono- mers of the great advantages of reflecting telescopes. In November, 1901, a circular letter was sent to a number of astronomers and physicists, requesting their opinion regarding the most powerful telescope that could be constructed for use in various specified fields of astrophysical research. Eeplies were received from Mr. C. G. Abbot, Washington; Sir Eobert Ball, Cambridge (England); Professor A. B^lopolsky, Pulkowa; Professor W. W. Campbell, Mount Hamilton; Mr. W. H. M. Christie, Greenwich; Dr. A. A. Common, London; Professor G. C. Comstock, Madison; Professor A. Cornu, Paris; Sir William Huggins, London; Professor H. Kayser, Bonn; Dr. S. P. Langley, Washington; Sir Norman Lockyer, London; Professor A. A. Michelson, Chicago ; Mr. H. F, Newall, Cambridge (England) ; Professor Simon Newcomb, Washington; Professor E. F. Nichols, Hanover; Professor E. C. Pickering, Cambridge (Mass.); Professor J. K. Eees, New York; Professor A. Eicc5, Catania; Professor Arthur Schuster, Manchester; Professor H. H. Turner, Oxford; Professor H. C. Vogel, Potsdam; Mr. W. E. Wilson, Daramona, Ireland ; Professor Max Wolf, Heidelberg ; and Professor C. A. Young, Princeton. The opinion was unanimous that a great reflecting telescope, provided with such a mirror as the one of five feet aperture constructed here, would be decidedly superior to any other instrument for our purpose, and would render possible many advances quite beyond the range of existing telescopes. It is greatly to be hoped that the funds necessary to mount the five-foot mirror can be obtained very soon. 402 The President's Repoet spectroscopy Spectroscopic research at the Yerkes Observatory is conducted along three converging lines, involving stellar, solar, and laboratory investigations. The importance of this three-fold mode of attack seems to me very great. Observations of stellar spectra include (1) the meas- urement of stellar motions in the line of sight, and (2) the detailed investigation of all the lines, for the identification of the chemical elements present in the star's atmosphere, the study of its physical constitution, and the determination of the star's place in some general scheme of stellar evolution. With the aid of suitable instruments, immense advances in our knowledge of stellar evolution can be made when stellar spectroscopy is studied alone. But when it is remembered that the Sun is the only star which is near enough the Earth to allow its indi- vidual phenomena to be investigated, while all' the other stars are mere points of light in the most powerful telescopes, it becomes obvious that solar research is absolutely essential to the interpretation of stellar phenomena, and that great advantages must result from the simul- taneous study of both subjects in a single institution. Even this is not enough. Peculiarities of stellar and solar spectra, for which no explanation based on existing knowledge is adequate, are constantly presenting themselves. It may happen, for example, that the wave-length of a certain line is different in different stars; or in an investigation of pressure in the solar atmosphere, based upon pressure shifts of the lines, the amount of shift per unit atmosphere may not be known for the lines in question; or in a study of the lines widened in Sun-spots it may be of the utmost importance to be able to produce reversals of certain lines at will in the laboratory. Such examples could be given without number. To me they indicate the great desirability of providing means in an observatory for making physical researches whenever they may be needed. The equipment of the laboratory should be such as to permit the spectrum of any element to be photographed at short notice, under a great variety of conditions of tempera- ture, pressure, and potential, in any desu'ed gaseous or liquid medium. Furthermore, to derive the full advantage of such an equipment, provision should be made, not only for brief experi- ments, but also for extended researches on questions connected with stellar or solar problems. stellar spectroscopy The principal stellar spectroscopic investigations hitherto conducted at the Yerkes Observatory comprise a research on the evolution of the red stars, made by myself, with the assistance of Messrs. Ellerman and Parkhurst, and a research on the motion in the line of sight of twenty stars of the Orion type, made by Professor Frost and Mr. Adams. The first- mentioned research, which has been alluded to in previous reports, is now approaching comple- tion; the photographs have been measured and reduced by Mr. Parkhurst, and the results are about to be published. Sir Norman Lockyer contends that bright lines are absent from fom'th- type spectra, but recent results have only tended to strengthen my earlier conclusion in favor of their presence. An important fact brought out by this research is the striking similarity of the dark-line spectra of the two types of red stars. If we except the regions just including the blue and yellow carbon bands, we find a very close and suggestive agreement of these spectra. Further remarks on these stars may be found on another page (p. 414). The stellar spectrograph used in the above research was built by Brashear after the design of Keeler's Allegheny Observatory spectrograph. The instrument embodies many excellent features, but is not suited to work of precision requiring long exposures xmder changing tempera- ture. This fact materially affected the accuracy of the work on the red stars, but it made itself even more distinctly felt in Professor Frost's and Mr. Adams's investigations of motion in the line of sight. Fortunately the defects had already been recognized, and the construction of the Bruce spectrograph was well under way before the most serious difficulty with the old The Yekkes Observatory 403 spectrograph was experienced. Except for the prisms, for which more homogeneous glass might perhaps be obtained, the Bruce spectrograph leaves nothing to be desired. The results obtained with this instrument show a remarkable degree of precision, and are nearly equally good for long or short exposiu-es. As magnitude 5J is about the limit of this instrument, it is planned to undertake as soon as possible the construction of a spectrograph of smaller disper- sion for use with fainter stars. This will be particularly useful in cases where the lines of the spectra are broad and ill-defined. The question of general co-operation in line of sight investigations is one which will naturally arise in the near future. A begiiming has been made, at the instance of Professor Frost, through the adoption by the Lick, Potsdam, Cape, Pulkowa, Meudon, Cambridge, and Yerkes Observatories of a list of standard stars, to be measured at stated intervals at each of these institutions. The check thus afforded on the work of these spectrographs, and the consequent detection of systematic errors, should prove invaluable. From such results it will ultimately appear whether a more general plan of co-operation is likely to be feasible. SOLAE INVESTIGATIONS With the renewal of solar activity, and the completion of several instruments required for researches on the Sun, it is hoped that a full program of solar observations may soon be in progress at the Yerkes Observatory. As no field of investigation offers more promising oppor- tunities, it is diflScult to account for the comparative neglect of solar observation during the last twenty years. Inaccessibility of site and expense of equipment have not prevented the uni- versal observation of total eclipses, but the vast majority of the astronomers who take part in these expeditions make no observations of the Sun at home. The full program of solar observations prepared for the Yerkes Observatory some years ago, which will be fully realized within a few months, includes systematic investigations along the following and related lines : 1 . Direct photography. — Daily photographs of the Sun on a scale of seven inches; large- scale photographs of spots and other regions. 2. Monochromatic ijhotography . — Daily photographs with the spectroheliograph, for systematic study of the form, area, distribution, and motion of the calcium and other vapors on the disk and in the chromosphere and prominences. Comparative photographs of spots and other regions in various bright and dark lines, and other special researches. 3. Daily photographs of the spectrum — a) Of Sun-spots, for the systematic study of the positions and intensities of the widened lines and the bright H and K lines. b) Of various regions of the photosphere, for the study of the bright H and K lines, and the detection of possible changes in the position and intensity of dark lines. c) A special series of photographs, taken at the shortest practicable time intervals near the Sun-spot maximum, in order to register, if possible, such remarkable changes in the reversing layer as are referred to on p. 416. 4. Special researches, radiometric, visual, and photographic, on the spectrum of the revers- ing layer and the chromosphere with a large solar image and powerful grating spectroscope. 5. Investigations on the solar rotation, determined with the spectroheliograph and by spectrographic observations of the photosphere, spots, chromosphere, and prominences. 6. Radiometric investigations of various kinds. 7. Visual observations to supplement those made photographically. Much time has been devoted to the construction and perfection of the instruments required for these various pieces of work. Several of the researches enumerated are now in progress, and the others wiU be imdertaken very soon. 404 The President's Repoet laboeatoey eeseaeohes The provision of a well-equipped spectroscopic laboratory, for which space was reserved in the plans of the Observatory, was begun by the erection of the Kenwood four-inch concave grating spectroscope in 1897. Several investigations were made with this instrument, but con- tinuous laboratory work was not undertaken until July, 1900. During the previous winter, in connection with our observations of Nova Persei, I had endeavored to repeat Wilsing's experi- ments on the spectrum of a spark between metallic poles in liquids, but no alternating dynamo was then available, and in other respects the equipment proved inadequate. This work was therefore deferred until the summer of 1900, when a small alternating dynamo, kindly loaned us by Professor Crew, of Northwestern University, and subsequently purchased for the spectro- scopic laboratory by Dr. George S. Isham, became available for use with a transformer giving 15,000 or 30,000 volts. With the assistance of Dr. N. A. Kent, I then undertook an investigation of the spectriun of the spark in air at high pressm-es, and subsequently returned to the work on the spark in liquids. Meanwhile, largely through the generosity of Dr. Isham, the spectro- scopic laboratory had been fitted up in the manner described on p. 420. At present it is possible to investigate the spectriun of any element under various conditions of pressure, tem- peratiure, etc. The use of a circular table, with apparatus arranged on its circumference for producing a spark or arc in air at atmospheric pressure, in gases at high pressm-es, in liquids, etc., with a central mirror permitting the light from any source to be brought into instant adjust- ment on the slit of the spectroscope, has proved to be very convenient in practice. OCELOSTAT EEFLEOTOK In planning the Yerkes Observatory a heliostat room about one hundred feet long, with sliding roof at one end, was provided. This room has already proved very valuable in several investigations, the most important of which was Professor Nichols's research on the heat radia- tion of the stars. A large Fahrenheit heliostat, with mirrors two feet in diameter, was to be erected in the heliostat room for use with a long focus mirror for the photography of nebulae, etc., and for certain spectroscopic investigations. The great excellence of the photographs of the corona and prominences obtained by Professor Barnard and Mr. Kitchey with a ccelostat at the total eclipse of May 28, 1900, and the fact that the field of the ccelostat does not rotate, led me to decide on the construction of a ccelostat reflecting telescope of great focal length, and to defer the construction of the heliostat. It was thought best to erect the new instrument in a separate building on the Observatory grounds, and to reserve the heliostat room for miscella- neous work with the heliostat, which will be constructed later. The detailed scheme for the ccelostat and other parts of the horizontal telescope, as worked out by Mr. Ritchey, involve the use of a thirty-inch plane ccelostat muTor, a twenty-foiu'-inch plane mirror to give the desired direction to the horizontal beam, and a twenty-four-inch con- cave mirror of sixty-two feet focal length. The last mirror can be replaced by a twenty-foiu:- inch concave mirror of one himdred and sixty -five feet focal length when the conditions warrant. The image can be received (1) on a plate mounted in a double-slide plate-carrier; (2) on the slit of a concave grating spectrograph of fifteen feet focal length (with collimator lens to obviate astigmatism), mounted in a constant-temperature laboratory for photographing stellar spectra ; (3) on the slit of a concave (or plane) grating spectrograph of twenty-one feet (or eighteen feet) focal length, for solar observations; (4) on the slit of a spectroheliograph designed to photo- graph a solar image seven inches in diameter. The ccelostat and most of the other instruments are ready for use, and will soon be given a trial. We hope to accomplish two important results with this apparatus: (1) to make a thorough test, both photographic and visual, of a reflecting telescope, mounted in the ccelostat form, in The Yerkes Observatory 405 comparison with the forty-inch refractor, which has nearly the same focal length as one of the reflector mirrors; (2) to take advantage of the excellent conditions of a constant-temperature physical laboratory in both stellar and solar spectroscopic work. CO-OPERATION IN RESEARCH The benefits which may result from co-operation in research have been clearly illustrated in recent astronomical and astrophysical work, most recently in the international campaign for the determination of the solar parallax from observations of Eros. Professor Barnard's long series of micrometric observations of Eros, made in conjunction with the general plans of the international congress, are reduced and will soon be published. There can be no doubt that a series of photographs of Eros, taken with the forty-inch telescope and color screen, would have proved of great value. At the period of the opposition, however, the color-screen method was undergoing its first tests, and it did not seem advisable under the circumstances to devote to photography time which could be used advantageously in visual work. A second co-operative research in which the Yerkes Observatory has been glad to take part was inaugurated by Professor Pickering, for the purpose of observing photometrically sets of comparison stars for variables which are very faint at minimum. The telescopes engaged in this work are the fifteen-inch of the Harvard Observatory, the twenty-six -inch of the McCormick Observatory, the thirty-six-inch of the Lick Observatory, and the forty-inch of the Yerkes Observatory. Mr. Parkhurst's report on the observations already made here may be foimd on p. 419. I have alluded elsewhere to the co-operative observations of the radial velocities of certain standard stars, in which the Lick, Potsdam, Pulkowa, Cambridge, Meudon, Cape, and Yerkes Observatories are taking part. It is probable that further co-operative work in this field, as well as in other departments of astrophysical research, will prove to be deskable. THE VISITING COMMITTEE The appointment of a committee to investigate the work of the Observatory and its needs, and to report its conclusions annually to the President and Trustees of the University, has proved to be an event of importance. According to the constitution adopted, the Committee shall consist of at least twelve members, of whom four are to be elected each year to serve for three years. At each annual meeting, which is held at the Observatory in June, an eminent man of science is invited to be present as a member of the Committee for that year. At the first annual meeting, held in Jvme, 1901, Professor E. C. Pickering, Director of the Harvard College Observatory, who was present in this capacity, did much to assist in inaugmating the work of the Committee. Dr. H. S. Pritchett, President of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, acted in the same capacity in June of the present year. The Committee issued a report in 1901, setting forth the needs of the Observatory, and calling special attention to the importance of securing funds for additional assistants and computers. The present membership of the Committee is as follows: James B. Forgan, Chairman; George S. Isham, Secretary; Henry S. Pritchett, Edward E. Ayer, W. J. Chalmers, H. D. Estabrook, John V. Farwell, Jr., Charles G. Fuller, Frank G. Logan, Ezra B. McCagg, John J. Mitchell, J. S. Kunnells, H. G. Selfridge. SPECIAL INVESTIGATORS The mutual advantage of placing certain of the instrumental facilities of the Observatory at the disposal of investigators from other institutions, when this can be done without interference with the routine work, is well emphasized by such researches as that of Professor Nichols on stellar heat radiation, carried out during the summers of 1898 and 1900. Professor 406 The President's Report Nichols will continue this research, as soon as the completion of the five-foot reflector provides the indispensable means of doing so. Professor St. John's recent investigations also afford evidence of the advantage of this policy, which will be continued in the future. Those who come to the Observatory as Volunteer Assistants, after becoming familiar with the work and methods, are encouraged to return in subsequent years with the view of undertaking researches of their own. INSTRUCTION IN ASTRONOMY AND ASTROPHYSICS On account of the special equipment of the Yerkes Observatory, its work must of necessity be largely that of an institution devoted to research. Nevertheless, thoroughly qualified students have always been made welcome, and every possible facility has been given them to profit by the work of the Observatory. Experience has shown that what such students desire is an opportunity to have some actual part in the Observatory's work rather than to follow a class- room course, such as they might obtain at institutions less thoroughly equipped for research. The only practical difficulty which has been experienced has arisen through the inadequacy of the Students' Observatory on the University campus. Professor Laves and Dr. Moulton are greatly handicapped in their efforts to interest students in astronomical work, and much credit is due to them for the success achieved under unfavorable circumstances. As pointed out in previous reports, it is of the utmost importance that a well-equipped Students' Observatory should be erected on the University campus in the immediate future. Until this is done no adequate body of students in Astronomy can be expected at the University of Chicago. The great distance of the Yerkes Observatory from the University campus limits the use of its facilities to such students as are able to reside at Wilhams Bay. WORK OF THE OPTICAL LABORATORY AND INSTRUMENT SHOP On p. 427 a list may be found of the instruments which have been constructed in the optical laboratory and instrument shop. Without well-equipped shops much of the work already accomplished at the Yerkes Observatory could not have been done. It is diflScult to overestimate the importance of constructing instruments imder the eye of the designer, and of having the means constantly at hand to repair, modify, or reconstruct at will. With the small funds available, such a project as the coelostat reflector would never have been undertaken, had it not been for the possibility of constructing both the optical and mechanical parts in our own shops. It is therefore essential that the efficiency of the shops be maintained, both in the provision of necessary tools and in the employment of a suflScient working force. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The various gifts made to the Observatory from time to time have been duly acknowledged in the President's Quarterly Statements, but I wish to add a further word here, in view of the great importance of the assistance thus received. Mr. Yerkes's continued interest in the work of the Observatory, as manifested by his annual gifts for the employment of assistants and computers, has been most gratifying, and has led to the accomplishment of much work otherwise beyond the reach of our limited staff. Special mention must also bo made of the late Miss Catherine W. Bruce, whose numerous contributions have provided for most important needs, which other- wise would have been left unsupplied. Dr. Isham's personal interest and participation in the laboratory and eclipse work, no less than his provision of eclipse apparatus and a large part of the equipment of the spectroscopic laboratory, have been appreciated by every member of the staff. In the construction of instruments, which has of necessity occupied a prominent place in the work of the Observatory, the encouragement and assistance rendered by the Kumford The Yeekes Observatory 407 Committee of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, and the Draper Committee of the National Academy of Sciences, have been of the greatest value. The ccelostat reflector, v?hich is the largest instrument hitherto constructed in our instrument shop, was undertaken as the direct results of grants from these Funds. To these friends of the Observatory, and to many others whose aid has been no less important, I desire to repeat our thanks. OBSEKVATORY STAFF The staff of the Observatory at present is constituted as follows: George E. Haie, Professor of Astrophysics and Director (solar, stellar, and laboratory spectroscopy). S. W. BuKNHAM, Professor of Practical Astronomy (double stars). E. E. Babnabd, Professor of Practical Astronomy (micrometric observations, stellar pho- tography, etc). Edwin B. Frost, Professor of Astrophysics (stellar spectroscopy: velocities in the line of sight). G. W. RiTCHBY, Instructor in Practical Astronomy and Superintendent of Instrument Construc- tion (instrument design; photography of nebulae, star clusters, etc.). Ferdinand Ellerman, Instructor in Astrophysics (solar and stellar spectroscopy, and general photography). Storbs B. Barrett, Secretary and Librarian (solar spectroscopy). Walter S. Adams, Assistant (stellar spectroscopy: velocities in the line of sight). J. A. Parkhurst, Assistant (photometry and stellar spectroscopy). N. A. Kent, Assistant (laboratory spectroscopy). M. C. Hole, stenographer. J. A. Johannessen, Instrument Maker. O. F. Romaee, Machinist. F. R. Sullivan, Engineer in charge of Forty-Inch Telescope. F. G, Pease, Optician. THE FORTY-INCH REFRACTOR Five years have elapsed since the completion of the forty-inch telescope. During the first few months of this period, owing to the accident to the rising-floor, the telescope could not be used. But since September, 1897, when the reconstruction of the rising-floor was completed, the telescope has been in use throughout practically every clear night. With one slight exception, which has not affected the results obtained with the telescope, its performance has been highly satisfactory. Mr. Carl Lundin, who was with the Clarks for twenty-five years, and is now at the head of the Alvan Clark Corporation, readjusted the objective in its cell on August 29, 1899. This seemed to remove a slight defect which had been noticed in the stellar images. It has since returned, however, and more radical measures may be required to correct it. A distinct triangularity of the image is noticeable in the case of bright stars, and is most easily seen when pointing near the zenith. The angles of the triangle correspond to the three points at which the objective is supported in the cell. Thus the effect is probably due to flexure, and there is reason to hope that a suitable support system for the objective, which Mr. Eitchey is to design, will completely remove it. From the tests of the objective made before its acceptance by the late Professor Keeler and myself, it appeared that the effect of flexure in so large and heavy an objective would be likely to manifest itself in some positions of the telescope. As explained in Professor Keeler's report,^ the appearance of flexure at the time of the tests was removed by rotating the flint lens in the cell. When finally put in place on the telescope, the objective gave perfect images, and 2 Astrophysical Journal, Vol. Ill (1896), p. 154. 408 The President's Report met successfully the most severe tests for definition and resolving power. The triangularity of the images did not appear until after the objective had been in use for nearly two years af the Yerkes Observatory. At the request of Professor Hartmann, a diaphragm pierced with a large number of small holes was placed over the forty-inch objective, and photographs of a bright star both inside and outside of the focus of the telescope were taken by Professor Barnard. The plates were measured by Professor Hartmann, who pronounced the object-glass excellent. This method of testing, which has revealed serious errors in large objectives by the best Eiu'opean opticians, is certain to play an important part in optical work of the futm-e. OBSEEVATIONS OF DOUBLE STARS (Professor Burnham) Up to the end of 1899 Professor Biu:nham was engaged in remeasuring all /3 stars of short period, and those of which recent observations were lacking, for use in his " General Catalogue of 1290 Double Stars," which appeared in 1900 as Vol. I of the Publications of the Yerkes Observatory. Since that time his working list has consisted for the most part of stars not likely to be observed elsewhere, selected from the following sources : 1. Long-neglected and little-known pairs, mainly from the catalogues of the two Herschels and Sir James South. Many of these stars have not been measured for from seventy to one hundred and twenty years, so that even in very slow-moving systems the change might be sufficient to be detected. 2. Stars noted as double by meridian circle observers, and included in such catalogues as Weisse, Argelander, Harvard Zones, A. G. Zones, etc. 3. Neglected S stars, including wide pairs not measured since observed by Dembowski some twenty-five years ago. This part of the work was discontinued on the appearance of Hussey's reobservatious of all the Pulkowa stars. 4. Miscellaneous pairs from more recent catalogues. In many of these cases the original observations were incomplete. About fifteen hundred of these measures, including only pairs which have been measured on at least two nights, will soon appear in Vol. II of the Publications of the Yerkes Obsei~va- tory. From these it will be seen that if the original measures (or estimates) can be relied upon, there are many cases of change in the Herschel and South stars. In the very wide pairs this may in all probability be ascribed to proper motion of one of the components, but among the closer pairs there are some which may prove to be physical systems. Professor Burnham has made no attempt to discover new pairs; indeed, his system of observing, in which the object is almost immediately found without the necessity of examining neighboring stars, almost precludes the possibility of chance discoveries. In spite of this he has picked up about twenty new pairs. GENERAL MICROMETRIC OBSERVATIONS (PRorBSSOB Barnard) The observations have been made mainly with the great telescope, and consist of micro- metric measures of stars, planets, satellites, and nebulae. Satellite of Neptune.— Systematic measures have been made of the satellite of Neptune from the beginning of the work with the forty-inch. From the fact that isolated observations of this satellite are of little value, the observations were made as continuous as possible in each series and the satellite measured on as many dates as it was observable. Of this satellite the following observations have been obtained: The Yeekes Obseevatoey 409 TABLE I Season of Observation Number of Nights of Observation 1897-1898 51 1898-1899 52 1899-1900 69 1900-1901 48 1901-1902 - 48 Total 268 These consist of five settings each for position angle and foiir settings on each side of the fixed wire for the double distances; a complete night's measure consisting of thirteen settings of the micrometer wires. The first season's measures of this satellite were used by Professor A. Hall in a new determination of the orbit of the satellite. At present all these measures are being used by Professor Newcomb in an investigation of the motion of the satellite. Diameter of Neptune. — A few measures were obtained, as the conditions permitted, of the diameter of Neptune, which were in good agreement with previous measm-es made by Professor Barnard at the Lick Observatory. Fifth satellite of Jupiter. — During the oppositions of 1898 and 1899 extensive observations were made of the fifth satellite of Jupiter, consisting of some eight hundred independent measures of its position. From these measures a new determination of the motion of the line of apsides of the satellite's orbit was made. The motion was found to be 900 degrees per year, or a complete revolution of the orbit in about 4.9 months. Satellites of Uranus. — It was intended to take up a systematic series of measiu'es of the four satellites of Uranus, but it was found that the planet was too far south to carry on the work successfully, and it was discontinued after a few measures were obtained. Diameters of Juno, Ceres, and Vesta. — In the year 1900 the asteroid Juno — the smallest of the first four discovered — was at one of its nearest approaches to the Earth, at which time only can its diameter be measured. The planet was measured on this occasion and its diameter determined. The diameters of the minor planets Ceres and Vesta have also been determined with the forty-inch, and are in close accord with the previous measures with the thirty-six-inch at the Lick Observatory. Observations of Eros. — In conjunction with European observatories the planet Eros was measured in the fall and winter of 1900-1901 for a redetermination of the solar parallax. One thousand five hundred and six determinations of right ascension and declination (each depending on five measures) were made on seventy-three nights. These observations have all been com- pletely reduced, and in the early spring of this year were forwarded to Paris. In the fall of 1898, shortly after its discovery, the position of Eros was measured on twenty-six nights, and in the summer of 1900, before beginning the parallax observations, Eros was measured on thirteen nights. Parallax of 61 1 Cygni. — In 1900 a series of measures was begun of the star 61 1 Cygni with reference to two faint stars on each side of it, for redetermination of its parallax, and also to test the theory of Wilsing, of Potsdam, as to the probable motion of 61 1, about an unknown dark body in a period of some twenty-two months. The measures were interrupted in the fall and winter of 1900 by the observations of Eros, but were again taken up in the fall and winter of 1901 and the spring of 1902. These stars were measured on seventy-five nights, there being about two hundi-ed and twenty-five measures of thirteen determinations each of 61i and 61 2 Cygni and the two small stars. These measm-es are now under process of reduction for the parallax of 61 1 Cygni. The indications so far are that the resulting parallax will be not far from 0^37. 410 The President's Kepoet Parallax of B.D + 57° 4131. — A long series of measures was made of the star B. D. + 37° 4131 with reference to four comparison stars for the verification of a large parallax assigned this star by Professor Schur, of Gottingen, from heliometer measures. The resulting observa- tions showed that the star really has no sensible parallax. Observations of planetary nebulce. — Several of the planetary nebulae were measured for parallax, notably N. O. C. 2892, which was measured with reference to two stars on twenty- seven nights, but no parallactic displacement showed in the measures. A longer series of measiu-es was made of the nebula N. G. C. 404 with four comparison stars, but no satisfactory result was obtained. A test for parallax of the nucleus of the great nebula of Andromeda was also made, but with no positive result. A large number of measures of the position of the central star of the annular nebula of Lyra (M. 57) were made with respect to a number of surrounding stars in 1898 and 1899, in an endeavor to determine the motion of the nebula by comparison with similar measures of the nucleus by Professor Burnham in 1891. The results possibly indicate a slight motion, as a difference of 1° in angle and 1" in distance was shown by the measures. Measures have been made of the dimensions and positions of a number of the other planetary nebulae. An extensive series of measures of the relative focus of nine of the planetary nebulae was made with reference to the fixed stars. The observations consisted of measuring the focus for the nebula, for its nucleus, and for a fixed star. It was shown that the focus for both nebula and nucleus was farther from the object-glass than that for a star, and that the focus for the nucleus was nearer to that of the star. The nucleus is therefore not so blue in color as the rest of the nebula, perhaps because it is in a later state of development. Position of Nova Cygni and Nova Persei. — In the fall of 1901 a series of measiures was made of the position of the new star in Cygnus of 1876. An accturate determination of its place showed that the star had not sensibly changed its position in the past quarter of a century, the discrepancy between the present position and the meridian determinations of 1876 being — 0'06 in R. A. and —0^36 in declination. The star itself had faded to below the fifteenth magnitude. Eighty measures of fourteen stars were made in the svunmer, fall, and winter of 1901 of the new star in Perseus to determine motion or parallax. The measures do not show any sensible parallax. The magnitudes of this star were also determined on forty -five nights with five comparison stars. Triangulation of star clusters. — An extensive series of measures was made of a number of the individual stars in the great star clusters M. 8, M.'5, M. 18, and M. 92. A great number of observations of some of the variable stars in M. 8, M. 5, and M. 13 have been made, from which their periods, etc., have been determined. A variable in M. 18 which has a period of five days was found with the forty-inch. One hundred and twenty measures were made of twenty-nine stars in the cluster Prcesepe for comparison with photographic measures. The photographs are made, but await a measuring engine for their measurement. Double stars, nebulce and comets. — Micrometrical measures have been continued for several years of the difficult close companion to Procyon, discovered in 1896 by Professor Schaeberle, but during the present year the unfavorable weather prevented its being seen again. A few double stars have been measured, especially /3 883, and a few new ones found. Some new nebulae have been found, though no search has been made for such objects. A series of micrometrical measures was made of Swift's comet of 1899, and the double head of the comet carefully measured also. Several photographs were obtained of the comet. Micrometrical measures of Perrine's comet of 1898 with several photographs were also obtained. The Yeekes Obsekvatoey 411 Focus of the forty-inch objective. — Essentially throughout the existence of the great tele- scope here, a series of measures of Atlas and Pleione of the Pleiades has been kept up. These stars were measxured at every opportunity for the detection and determination of the amount of change in the focus of the forty-inch objective due to changes of temperattire. In all, measures have been made of these stars on two hundred and sixty-seven nights. They show that the focus of the great object-glass is subject to considerable change in length from summer to winter, amounting in all to about three-fourths of an inch. In connection with these measures the AS of Electra and Celceno of the same group was measured on eighty-six nights as a check on the iixity of Atlas and Pleione. Miscellaneous observations. — Other and miscellaneous work, such as observations of spots and markings on the planets Jupiter and Mars, and measures of the diameters of Venus and Mercury, have been carried on as circumstances have permitted. Kegular observations have been made of the November meteors, and also of the aurora, which is finely seen here. Profes- sor Barnard also keeps up his observations of the Gegenschein, which is as well seen here as at Mount Hamilton. VELOCITIES OF STARS IN THE LINE OP SIGHT (Pbofessob Frost and Mb. Adams) The spectrograph of the " Universal " type originally provided for the great telescope was regularly employed during 1899 and until it was dismounted in April, 1900 to be sent to North Carolina as a part of the outfit of the eclipse expedition. From July 1, 1899, to April, 1900, the following plates were obtained: (1) with the short camera, of 271 mm. focal length: stellar spectra, 65; planetary, 30; trial plates of sky, Svm, or comparison spectrum, 79; (2) with the camera of 456 mm. focal length: stellar spectra, 148; Moon and planets, 6; trial plates, 33. The spectrograph was used on two, or three, nights per week, the observers being Messrs. Frost, Ellerman or Adams. The definition of the plates taken during this period was fairly satisfactory, and accordant settings could be made upon the lines, but the stability of the spectrograph was insufficient, and it was not provided with any means for maintaining the constancy of the temperature of the prisms. A comparison of the measures of these plates with other and more recent results indi- cates that irregular disturbances of an instrumental character seriously affected the accuracy of the determinations, and made possible an uncertainty in some cases as high as 10 km. Several European observers, using a similar type of instrument, had experiences of the same sort. Fortu- nately the construction of the new spectrograph had already been begun when the inadequacy of the older instrument was thus fully demonstrated. The three prisms of heavy flint glass from Mantois, to be used in the new spectrograph, were ordered in December, 1899, and were received from Brashear in the following April. They were used in the prismatic camera at the total solar eclipse of May 28, 1900. After our return from the eclipse they were subjected by Professor Frost to an extensive series of tests, which with other experiments in preparation for the new spectrograph, occupied a considerable part of the srunmer. As a consequence of the unfavorable results of the tests, new prisms of Jena glass were ordered, which were received in the siimmer of 1901, some time after the mechanical parts of the spectrograph had been completed in the shops of the Observatory. While not wholly free from the non-homogeneity which so seriously injured the performance of the first set of prisms they yielded much better results, and have been regularly used with their full aperture. Similar difficulties with large prisms for spectrographs have been experienced elsewhere particularly at Cambridge (England), and Pulkowa. 412 The President's Kepokt The first tests of the Bruce spectrograph attached to the great refractor were made in February, 1901, the Mantois prisms being used until the arrival of the Jena prisms in July. The spectrograph has been described in detail, together with a statement of the mode of meas- uring and reducing the plates, in Professor Frost's article in the Astrophysical Journal (Vol. XV, No. 1, 1902). From July 27, 1901, when the instrument was first used in its complete form with the Jena prisms, until July 1, 1902, the records of the observing books may be summarized as follows: A. Plates of Series A (short camera; aperture = 71 mm., Zeiss anastigmat lens. Catalogue No. 9 of Series II; focal length = 449 mm.): 186 of stellar spectra, 9 of Moon and planets, besides a large number of trial solar and spark plates. B. Plates of Series B (long camera, triple lens, by Brashear from specifications by Hastings; aperture = 76 mm., focal length = 607 mm.): 189 of stellar spectra, 10 of Moon and planets, besides very numerous trial plates. The observers were Professor Frost and Mr. Adams, the latter having returned to the Obser- vatory in May, 1901, as Assistant, after a year's absence. Valuable assistance during the exposures is regularly rendered by Mr. Frank Sullivan, engineer in charge of the great refractor, who shares equally in the guiding during the night. This assistance, besides greatly relieving the strain upon the eyes of a single observer, also permits more continuous observing, especially during extremely cold weather, and enables the observer to develop some or all of the plates at night so that they may be dry and ready for measurement in the morning. The guiding arrangement adopted for the instrument has proven very satisfactory, as has the device for maintaining a constant temperature around the prisms. Cramer's "Crown" and Seed's "Gilt Edge 27" plates have been used Hydrochinon developer was formerly used, but of late rodinal has commonly been employed. Drying of the plates has been much expedited by the use of a "dryer" made in 1901. It consists of a large box with projecting funnels covered with muslin, which prevent the entrance of dust. An electric fan, of an ordinary office type, forces a strong current of air past the plates, which stand so as to present the least sm'face to the fan. With this arrangement, plates can be thoroughly dried in half an hour, which otherwise would require half a day or more. The quality of the grain of the plates is also considered by experts to be improved by rapid drying. The comparison spectrum regularly employed is the titanium spark. A helium tube is also added when desired. A simple lens has been found more satisfactory for forming the image of the spark upon the slit-plate than the concave mirror chiefly used at first. The induction coil in use for the past year is one by Willyoung, kindly loaned by Dr. George S. Isham. The excellent condenser, regularly used in the secondary circuit, was constructed by Dr. Kent from copper sheets separated by glass, the whole inclosed in paraffin. To suppress the air lines, (particularly distru'bing when iron is the comparison spectrum) and to increase the sharp- ness of the titanium lines, a small coil of self-induction is also introduced in the secondary circuit. This coil was made to order by M. E. Leeds & Co. Its binding posts are arranged so that 50,100, 200, or 500 (or combinations of these) turns of about two inches diameter may be used. The lens of Camera B, the Hastings triple of |=^ inches, has been subject to certain rather peculiar disturbances dm-ing the year. On several occasions it has without apparent cause developed a considerable degree of astigmatism. This is assumed to be due to the "pulling" of the Canada balsam of the cemented lens, but it has occm:red when there had been no conspicuous change in the atmospheric temperatiue, and when there has been no strain due The Yekkes Observatory 413 to the lens cell. Sometimes this has been cured by lying still in a horizontal position for a few days. The lens has been several times recemented by Mr. Brashear. It is hoped that it will soon settle to a permanent condition. The short Camera A (Zeiss anastigmat) has been used for about one-half of the plates, with satisfactory results; owing to its constituent lenses, however, its speed is practically the same as that of Camera B. Early in 1902 a collimator lens and a camera lens of Professor Hastings's "isokumatic" (quadruple) construction, which were originally ordered, but not then procurable, were received from the Brashear Company. The collimator showed a slight superiority to the triple system hitherto used, and has been since regularly employed; the field of the isokimiatic camera lens was, however, inferior to that of the triple lens, and it has not been used. During the winter Mr. Adams applied the photographic method for testing the imiformity of illumination of the collimator by the spark, by placing a plate close to the outer surface of the lens. The results were much more satisfactory than by the usual test. As the uniformity of illumination by the source of comparison spectrum is one of the most critical points in connection with the spectrograph. Professor Frost has recently sought to put it beyond question by inserting a small ground glass plate at a slight distance in front of the slit, after the manner successfully applied at Potsdam with the arc comparison. The cone of rays from the spark lens illuminates an area on the ground glass which subtends an angle at the slit several times greater than the angular aperture of the collimator lens. It is hoped that the possibility of imequal illumination from spark and star is now wholly removed. STATISTICS OF MEASUREMENTS OF PLATES Of the two early series of plates, taken in 1898, 1899, and 1900, about one hundred were measured and reduced by Professor Frost and Mr. Adams. The measurements were made with Zeiss comparators. Most of these results remain unpublished, as they are necessarily much inferior in accuracy to those obtained with the new Bruce spectrograph and with the new types of spectrograph in use elsewhere. Some of the plates have been measured for the sake of experience by the different volunteer assistants who have been at the Observatory during recent summers. Two new measuring machines with micrometer screws, made by William Gaertner & Co. of Chicago, according to the designs of the Director and Professor Frost, were acquired in 1901. They permit more rapid measurements, and less strain on the eye, than is the case with the Zeiss comparators having one microscope for the spectrum plate and another for the scale. The screws of the new machines are at present being investigated, and periodic errors of considerable magnitude (at a maximum 4 m) have been found. Of the plates taken with the Bruce spectrograph and Jena prisms, first used on July 27, 1901, 209 have been measured and reduced, the greater number, of course, by Mr. Adams, whose whole time is devoted to the work. The principal item in the program adopted by Professor Frost for the year was the determination of the velocities of certain stars with spectra of the Orion type, which will be published in Vol. II of the Publications of the Yerkes Observatory. In all, velocities of forty-nine different stars have been measured; twenty-nine of these were of the Orion type, the remainder of the solar and first types. The solar stars were taken for the pm-pose of testing the capacity of the instrument for exact results. Ten plates of the spectrum of Sirius were taken by Mr. Adams in the winter, and his results gave, in combination with those obtained at Potsdam a decade ago, a new, determination of the parallax of Sirius, which was published by him in the Astrophysical Journal. 414 The President's Eepoet The summary of measurements is as follows: TABLE 11 Measceed by Fk03T Measueed by Adams No. of Plates No. of Stars No. of Plates No. of Stars Snpptra of OvioTi tvDe 50 1 8 2 15 1 4 125 28 21 10 29 SDectra of Class let 2 9 10 Spectra of Moon and planets Total 61 20 174 48 The stars v Orionis, /3 Cephei, and s Ceti proved to be spectroscopic binaries in the regular course of the measures, and of these stars respectively twenty-one and twenty plates were measured; the variability of velocity of o Persei and 5 Librae was shown by five and four plates taken and measured by Mr. Adams. The binary character of t Scorpii was indicated by our plates before we learned of its prior detection on the Harvard plates.^ Some other stars on our list are suspected of variable velocity. The proportion of stars whose velocity has been found to vary to the whole number now observed for the first time is about 1 to 6, or about the same as has been found by Professor Campbell in his observations from 1895 to 1900. The results of the measurements of the plates are very conveniently recorded by the method of the card catalogue. The observations of radial velocities so far published by other observers, and the data as to spectroscopic binaries, are also instantly available in card catalogues. A most satisfactory and safe provision for the preservation of the negatives of the stellar spectra has been afforded by an oak cabinet, specially constructed in its well known style by the Library Bureau, which is capable of containing two thousand plates. SPECTRA OF STARS OF SECCHI'S FOURTH TYPE (Pbopessor Hale, Me. Ellerman, and Mr. Paekhurst) The photographic investigation of the spectra of red stars of Secchi's foirrth type, which was in progress when my last report was written, is now nearly completed. The long delay in measuring the photographs has been due to eye-afifections, which made it necessary for both Mr. Ellerman and myself to give up all work of measurement. With the exception of such plates as had been measured before this difficulty arose, all the spectra have been measinred by Mr. Parkhurst. The plates measured include the following spectra taken with three prisms: TABLE III star No. of Plates No. of Lines 280 SchiellerwD 4 6 5 4 4 5 4 7 211 356 318 BirmifiahciTn, . 336 74 Schjellerup 278 78 SchielleruT) 334 132 Schielleruv 478 279 152 Schiellerut) 333 Total 39 2605 3H. C. 0. Annals, Vol. XXVIII, N. 2, p. 178. The Yeekes Obseevatort 415 Each plate was measured twice, once in each position, involving about 30,000 micrometer settings. The reductions, using the Cornu-Hartmann formula, have been completed, and a card catalogue made, giving the wave-lengths of 473 lines in the different stars, also the mean wave- length for each line. From forty cards the average probable error of the mean for lines occur- ring in from five to eight stars was found to be ±0.055 tenth-meter, the range being from 0.02 to 0.10 tenth-meter. The identification of the lines was greatly facilitated by the use of a cata- logue of arc spectra prepared by Professor Crew, who was kind enough to loan it for this piurpose. Miss Anne S. Young rendered valuable assistance in this work. Comparisons were also made with Kayser and Eunge's iron lines, and with Kowland and Harrison's and Hasselberg's vanadium lines, which are not included in the catalogue. A large number of reasonably close coincidences, especially with iron, titanium, cobalt, chromium, magnesium, and vanadium lines, were found; for example, sixty-two iron lines gave a mean difference of 0.007 tenth-meter from Kayser and Eunge's value. Comparisons were also made with lines widened in Sun-spots found in the Greenwich Observations and on photographs taken at the Yerkes Observatory. These show a striking agreement with most of the prominent dark lines outside of the carbon flutings in the less refrangible part of the stellar spectra. Comparisons were made of the bright lines in fourth-type spectra with the lines from such sources as the chromo- sphere, the nebulae, the Wolf-Eayet stars, etc. The determination of the velocity in the line of sight of these stars has been attended with some difficulty, on account of the uncertainty which existed at first as to the identity of the lines. It has since become possible, however, to determine the velocity by two distinct methods, which yield fairly accordant results. These are in no wise to be compared, of course, with the results obtained with the Bruce spectrograph, which is in every respect far superior to the three-prism spectrograph employed in the present investigation. In view of the fact, however that none of the fourth-type stars had been observed for velocity by either visual or photographic methods prior to this research, it is felt that the results cannot fail to be of considerable value. As preliminary steps to the discussion of results, widened enlargements of the spectra have been prepared, together with widened enlargements on the same scale from our photo- graphs of the spectra of stars of Seech i's third type. The similarity of the spectra of these two types of stars, except in the region of the yellow and blue carbon flutings, is alluded to elsewhere in this report. Although the discussion is not yet far enough advanced to allow final conclusions to be drawn, it appears probable that the view of Vogel, Dun^r, and others that these two types of spectra form co-ordinate branches, will be confirmed. The complete results, including the wave-lengths of all the lines measmed and a dis- cussion of the observations, will soon appear in Vol. II of the Publications of the Yerkes Observatory. Through the kindness of Professor Pickering, a twelve-inch objective prism belonging to the Harvard College Observatory was loaned for use with our twelve-inch refractor in photo- graphing the spectra of some of these stars. The telescope did not prove to be well adapted for the work, and as the spectra were far inferior to those obtained with the spectrograph attached to the forty-inch telescope, the experiments were discontinued. SOLAR OBSERVATIONS (Propessob Hale, Me. Ellerman, and Mr. Barrett) SPECTEUM OF THE CHEOMOSPHEEE On account of the very quiet state of the Sun during the last few years, the period has been an unfavorable one for observations which cannot be made in the absence of spots or erup- tive phenomena at the limb. It was thought advisable to postpone the systematic examination 416 The Peesidbnt's Repokt of the bright lines of the chromosphere until the period of frequent eruptions, though observa- tions of the reversals have been made from time to time. With good seeing a remarkably large number of bright lines can be seen at any point on the limb. In addition to the green fluting of carbon, vsrhich is always reversed when the seeing is good, seven or eight lines of the yellow fluting are sometimes visible, though they can be seen only when the atmospheric conditions are excellent. Under such conditions some two hundred bright lines are visible between C and b in the undisturbed chromosphere. As but a small fraction of these lines could be seen with the twelve-inch Kenwood refractor, there can be little doubt that the visi- bility of so many lines is due to the large diameter (seven inches) of the solar image given by the forty-inch refractor. There is reason to hope, therefore, that with the twenty -inch solar image given by the long-focus mirror of the new ccelostat reflector, combined with the advantages arising from the use of a grating spectroscope of eighteen feet focal length, we may be able to record a large number of bright lines in the chromospheric spectrum during the spot maximum. It will be diiBcult to photograph the fainter reversals, on account of the encroachment of photospheric light on the slit, arising from the constant agitation of the solar image. Some of the brighter lines have been photographed with the forty-inch, and their wave-lengths have been measured by Mr. Adams. Accurate wave-length determinations have also been made of the ultra-violet chromospheric lines on the Kenwood plates. SPECTRA OF SUN-SPOTS Many experiments were tried at the Kenwood Observatory in photographing the widened lines in the spectra of Sun-spots. In some cases the widening of the lines was fairly well shown, but it was evident that the two-inch solar image given by the twelve-inch telescope was too small for work of this character. In the general absence of Sun-spots during the minimum little could be done with the forty-inch telescope, but with the approach of the maximum the work has been taken up systematically. The photographs, which are made with the remodeled Kenwood solar spectrograph, show the more conspicuous widened lines between D and b very well. It is evident, however, that a greater linear dispersion will be required to record the smaller lines. For this reason it is expected to transfer the work to the large solar spectroscope of the coelostat reflector as soon as it is ready. EEMAEKABLE CHANGE IN THE REVERSING LAYER While making a series of photographs in February, 1894, for the purpose of determining the exposure times required with different orders of spectra, Mr. Ellerman chanced to record two stages of the most remarkable solar spectroscopic phenomenon I have ever encountered. It amounted to nothing less than a complete change in the character of the reversing layer, which extended over a distance of at least one-eighth of the Sim's diameter, and lasted for several minutes. The solar spectrum as recorded on these two photographs would not be recognized by one who is familiar with the normal spectrum. The slit happened to lie on a spot in which the phenomenon seemed to center, but the disturbance extended away to a great distance on either side. The eruptive phenomena on the disk photographed on several occa- sions with the Kenwood spectroheliograph were characterized by great intensity of the H and K lines. In the present instance the bright H and K lines seen over and near the spot before the disturbance, and also the broad dark bands, have disappeared, giving place at K to a series of fine lines resembling those which Jewell recorded once in the Sun and once in the electric arc. Measures of the photographs by Mr. Adams show that most of the lines of the abnormal spectra correspond well in position with lines in Kowland's solar-spectrum tables, but the The Yeskes Obseevatoey ' 417 changes in intensity are so great as to render them unrecognizable. The measures of the lines, with reproductions of the photographs, will be published shortly. The long delay in publication has been due to the desire to eliminate every possible doubt as to the truly solar origin of this unique phenomenon. It will be desirable during the coming maximum to make every possible attempt to record other changes of this kind, which must be very infrequent. Photographs of the solar spectrum should be taken whenever possible with an analyzing tele- scope. As this disturbance seemed to center in a Sun-spot, it would be advisable to seek for similar phenomena in spot regions ; but as the length of the disturbed area was at least one- eighth of the Sun's diameter, it is by no means certain that such changes in the spectrum may not be found at any part of the disk. DIEEOT PHOTOGEAPHS OF THE SUN Daily photographs of the Sun are made by Mr. Ellerman with the twelve-inch refractor whenever spots are present. These photographs, which are intended for use in connection with the spectra of Sun-spots, are on a scale of only two inches to the Sun's diameter; they will shortly be replaced by a series of photographs on a scale of seven inches to the Sun's diameter. WOEK WITH THE SPECTEOHELIOGEAPH Eeference has been made in previous reports to the large spectroheliograph which was constructed in our instrument shop for the forty-inch telescope. In order to photograph the entire seven-inch solar image it was necessary to build a spectroheliograph of six and one-fourth inches aperture (even this involving a small loss of light), and to produce the relative motion of solar image and slit by moving the telescope in declination with the slow-motion motor. The corresponding motion of the plate behind the second slit was affected by a shaft led down the telescope tube from the declination motor. The slits of the spectroheliograph are eight inches long, and the optical train consists of two Voigtlander portrait lenses of six and one-fourth inches aperture for collimator and camera, and two 60° prisms of light flint, giving, in conjunc- tion with a plane mirror, a total deviation of 180° to the K line when at minimum deviation. The great care taken to eliminate diffuse and reflected light, by the use of a very complete system of diaphragms and in other ways, resulted in the production of photographs much superior to those obtained with the Kenwood spectroheliograph. The difiiculty of producing a perfectly uniform and synchronous motion of the telescope and photographic plate was largely overcome, but the effect of small irregularities was complicated with that produced by the shaking of the telescope in the wind, and the boiling of the Sun's image. For these reasons most of the images, though they showed the calcium vapor in beautiful contrast both in the polar and equatorial regions, were more or less uneven at the limb. In view of the necessity of attaching the spectroheliograph to the telescope every morning and removing it at night, its great weight (about seven hundred pounds) proved to be a serious disadvantage. As soon as the construction of the coelostat reflector had been arranged for, it was therefore decided to transfer the large spectroheliograph from the forty -inch to this telescope, where it can instantly be moved into or out of place, without interfering with the immediate use of the solar spectroscope or other instru- ments. This leaves the forty-inch telescope free for spectroscopic or photographic observations with the Kenwood spectroheliograph, which is so constructed that it can be arranged for either class of work in a few moments' time. The mottling of the entire solar surface, from pole to pole, with a structure characterized by the reversal of the H and K lines, which had been so clearly evident on the Kenwood plates, was found to persist throughout the Sun-spot minimum. 418 The President's Repobt photography of the moon, nebulie and star clusters (Mr. Ritchey) The objective of the forty-inch refractor was designed by Mr. Clark for visual observations, and it was not thought advisable to provide a third lens, like that employed with the Lick telescope, to adapt it for photography. For photographic work on the more refrangible region of stellar spectra a small correcting lens near the focus, designed by Professor Wadsworth, gave fairly good results with the old spectrograph. This was subsequently replaced by a correcting lens designed by Professor Hastings, which has given perfect satisfaction in con- junction with the Bruce spectrograph. The spectroheliograph, in view of its employment of monochromatic light, permits almost equally good results to be obtained in solar photography with visual or photographic telescopes. It remained, however, to provide a method of making direct photographs of such objects as the Moon, nebulae, and star clusters with the large telescope. Some experiments with this purpose in view, made by Mr. Ellerman and myself in 1898, were described in the Vierteljahrsschrift der Astronomischen Gesellschaft, Jahrgang 31, Heft 2, p. 187. The method employed, which was not essentially new, involved the use of a thin screen of greenish -yellow glass placed immediately in front of an isochromatic plate. This cut out the more refrangible rays, and gave photographs of the Moon which were fairly comparable in quality with those made at the Lick Observatory. This method had been independently devised by Mr. Kitchey in 1891. In 1900 he under- took experiments with the forty-inch telescope which resulted in the production of photographs of the Moon surpassing in sharpness any previously obtained. The success of his work on the Moon led him to design a double-slide plate -carrier for the application of the same method to the photography of faint objects requiring long exposm'es. On account of the perfection of guiding rendered possible by the use of a guiding eyepiece magnifying a thousand diameters, and the convenience of manipulation of the double-slide plate-carrier, the photographs of star clusters and of the Orion nebula obtained by Mr. Kitchey are remarkably sharp, and are probably not inferior to results such as could be obtained with a forty-inch photographic objective. Indeed, the photographs seem to siurpass in sharpness of definition the best that have been obtained with large photographic refractors. This is doubtless due to the employ- ment in the present instance of the double-slide plate-carrier instead of the guiding telescope ordinarily used. It is obvious that such slight motions of the plate as are constantly needed to retain a stellar image at a fixed point can be secured much more readily through the motion of the small carriage which supports the photographic plate than by the motion of the entire instrument, which is necessary when a guiding telescope is employed. The construction of a two-foot mirror for a reflecting telescope had been undertaken by Mr. Kitchey before he joined the staff of the Yerkes Observatory. This mirror was acquired by the Observatory and used in Professor Nichols's investigations on stellar heat radiation in 1898 and 1900. An equatorial mounting was designed for it in 1896 by Professor Wadsworth, who was then in charge of our instrument shop. At the time of Professor Wadsworth 's appointment to the directorship of the Allegheny Observatory, the construction of this mounting, though well advanced, was still not completed. Mr. Kitchey, who succeeded Professor Wadsworth as Superintendent of Instrument Construction, designed many important parts of the mounting, such as the driving clock, skeleton tube with interchangeable ends, and other parts not already provided for, and the mounting was completed imder his direction. Special attention was given to the driving clock and worm gear, and the success of the photographs made with this instru- ment is doubtless due in no small degree to the perfection of this work. The double-slide The Yeekes Obseevatoet 419 plate-carrier used with the two-foot reflector is the one employed in Mr. Kitchey's first experi- ments in photographing star clusters with the forty -inch refractor. The use of the two-foot reflector in the photography of nebulae has afforded much valuable experience in the manipulation of reflecting telescopes. The common impression that the reflector is far inferior to the refractor as regards stability of collimation, convenience of manipu- lation, etc., is not borne out by Mr. Kitchey's experience. Indeed, the first photograph obtained with the instrument was a successful one, and there has never been any practical difficulty in securing good results when the atmosphere was favorable. At present Mr. Kitchey is engaged in photographing certain nebulae with long exposures, and has already been successful in bringing out hitherto invisible details in objects which have been photographed with much larger reflectors. The remarkable sharpness of the photographs obtained with the two-foot mirror, and the intricacy of detail discovered by Mr. Ritchey in certain nebulae, lead to the con- viction that a much larger instrument, constructed with the utmost care and embodying the results of experience with the present telescope, would render possible many important advances Mr. Pease has given valuable aid in the photographic work with the two-foot reflector. PHOTOMETKY (Mr. Pakkhurst) This Observatory having arranged to co-operate with the Harvard, McCormick, and Lick Observatories in the work of determining standards for faint stellar magnitude, a wedge pho- tometer designed by Professor E. C. Pickering was supplied by the Rumford Committee of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. The photographic wedge (No. II) sent with the instrument was investigated by Mr. Parkhurst by the method of standard stars and also with a wheel photometer. A report of this work, with description of the instrument, was given in the Astrophysical Journal, Vol. XIII, No. 4. As the resulting value of the wedge constant, 0.130 mag., differed from that previously found at Harvard, the wedge was returned to the latter observatory, that the measures might be repeated, and a similar investigation was made of Wedge V, sent to replace Wedge II. A preliminary reduction of the latter investigation gave 0.110 as the wedge constant. To adapt the photometer for use with the six-, twelve-, and forty- inch telescopes, the perforated diaphragm for forming the artificial star was replaced with a movable one, carrying five holes varying from 0.1 to 0.3 mm. in diameter. Two absorption glasses supplied by Professor Pickering were arranged to be turned into or out of the field, in order that brighter standard stars might be used. The absorption occasioned by the two com- bined was foimd by measurement to be 1.70 mag. During and after this preliminary work sixteenth-magnitude standards in eighteen of the thirty-six fields included in the scheme have been measured on one or more nights, thirty-six complete sets being secured, or about one-third the allotted work. Photographs have been taken of eight of these fields with the two-foot reflector, with exposures of from one to one and one-half hours. Paper prints of these, on the scale of Hagen's charts, and also on the scale of 10" to 1 mm., show stars down to seventeenth magnitude or fainter, and render the identification of the faint standards certain — a work equally important with the photometric measures themselves. About fifty variable stars have been observed by Mr. Parkhurst, before and during his connection with this Observatory, most of these stars having minima faint enough to require observations with the twelve- or forty -inch telescopes. Preliminary reductions of fifty-one faint minima were published in Bulletin No. 13 of the Yerkes Observatory and Astrophysical Jour- nal, Vol. IV, No. 3. In order to reduce these observations to the photometric scale, measures of the comparison stars referred to in the Potsdam and Harvard standards have been made with the above described wedge photometer as follows : 420 The President's Repobt TABLE rv Aperture Complete Sets No. of Settines Six inches 37 46 59 1,659 1,831 Forty inches 2,235 Total 142 5,725 In all, twenty-nine different fields have been measured, twenty-three of them with the forty-inch. The work of reducing these observations, and drawing the light curves of the variables on the photometric scale, is well advanced. The minimum magnitude of several of these stars has been found to be very faint, as the following table wiU show: ^ TABLE V Mininmm Magnitude No. of Stars Between 14 and 15 13 Between 15 and 16 -- 7 Between 16 and 17 -------- - 5 Fainter than 17 -------- - 2 SPECTROSCOPIC LABORATORY (Pkgfessgk Haie and Dr. Kent) The equipment of the spectroscopic laboratory comprises the following instruments : Six-inch concave grating spectroscope of twenty-one and one-half feet focal length. Four-inch and three-inch concave gratings and mountings, for use with the above instrument. 3 K. W. 110-volt alternating dynamo. Presented by Dr. Isham. 1 K. W. transformer, giving 15,000 or 30,000 volts. Apps induction coil for twelve-inch spark. High frequency-spark coil, made by the General Electric Co. Presented by Mr. James Lyman. Large condenser, copper plates with glass and oil insulation ; capacity from 0.00073 to 0.064 microfarads. Presented by Dr. Isham. Self-induction coil, which permits the use of self-inductions from 0.000006 to 0.00043 henry. Set of volt, watt, and ammeters for 110-volt power-house current. Presented by Dr. Isham. Fifty-foot standpipe for water pressure. Presented by Dr. Isham. Apparatus for producing the spark in air at high pressures. Presented by Dr. Isham. Apparatus for producing the spark between metallic electrodes in air at atmospheric pressure and in liquids. 110 arc. Apparatus for measuring the electrical conductivity of liquids, etc. Mercury pump and other miscellaneous apparatus. The various light sources are arranged on the circumference of a circular table, at the center of which is a plane mirror. By means of this mirror the light from any source can be reflected to a concave mirror of nine and three-eighths inches aperture, at a distance of twenty- two feet, four inches from the spectroscope slit, on which it forms an image magnified about two diameters. By rotating the plane mirror to certain position angles defined by stops, the image of any source, in focus and ready for observation, can be formed on the slit. The circular table is in a room separated fi'om the concave gi-ating room by a partition. The image of the source on the slit can be observed with a telescope in the outer room, and given any necessary position by means of screws attached to the moimting of the concave mirror. The grating is The Ybekes Observatory 421 always filled with light, and it is believed that the danger of displacements of lines, which sometimes occur when an adjustable image lens is used in front of the slit, is wholly obviated by this apparatus. The investigations conducted in the spectroscopic laboratory have been of great service in connection with our study of the pairs of bright and dark lines in Nova Persei, the enhanced lines in the chromosphere and in certain stars, the oxygen lines in stars of the Orion type, etc. The results of the investigation of the spectrum of the spark between metallic poles in liquids to which some months have been devoted, may prove of value in the interpretation of certain solar and stellar phenomena. The introduction of a little common salt into water in which a spark is passing between iron poles is sufficient to shift most of the iron lines and to reverse some of them. Changes in the electrical conditions of the spark circuit will produce similar results. It remains to be seen what bearing these phenomena may have on astrophysical investigations. The possibility of controlling the reversal of spectral lines, and of passing by successive steps from a bright-line spectrum to a spectrum in which nearly all of the more refrangible lines are reversed, at least provides a simple method, additional to those afforded by pressiu:e, the magnetic field, etc., of classifying lines on the basis of their relative behavior. NOVA PERSEI The new star in Perseus, which made its appearance on February 22, 1900, has been thoroughly observed at the Yerkes Observatory. A series of photographs of the spectrum of the Nova, taken by Mr. Ellerman with the forty-inch telescope, was measured and reduced by Mr. Adams, who has published the results in the Astrophysical Journal. Measm-ements of the position of the Nova with the large telescope were made by Professors Burnham and Barnard, and the latter has also made a careful series of measures of the focus of the Nova as compared with that of neighboring stars. Prior to August 29, 1902, the Nova was found to have the same focus as stars near it. Since that time it has Tindergone a very perceptible change, and now resembles the planetary nebulae (and Nova Aurigae in its later stages) in having a focus considerably outside of that of a star. Photometric observations of the Nova have been made regularly by Mr. Parkhurst. On receipt of the information that Professor Max Wolf had photographed traces of nebidosity near the new star, Mr. Ritchey at once proceeded to photograph the Nova with the two-foot reflector, then recently put into commission. On September 20, 1901, he obtained a photograph showing the Nova to be surrounded by a ring of nebulosity, which subsequent photographs made by Perrine with the Crossley reflector and by Eitchey with our own two-foot reflector have indicated to be expanding with a velocity of the order of that of light. Mr. Ritchey has published in the Astrophysical Journal a series of drawings from his various negatives of the nebulosity. The unique character of the phenomena thus recorded has led to much discussion, but it is still too soon to pronounce a final opinion concerning their cause. BRUCE PHOTOGRAPHIC TELESCOPE Reference has been made in previous reports to Miss Bruce's gift of $7,000 to provide for the construction of a photographic telescope with an objective of ten inches aperture of the portrait-lens type. The difficulty of securing a lens which would give an angular field large enough for Professor Barnard's purpose has proved to be very great. Several trial lenses were made by Brashear, but in all cases the field was too small for the proposed work of photograph- ing the Milky way and extended nebulae. In a trip to Europe, made for the express purpose of discussing this question with English and continental opticians. Professor Barnard was unable to obtain assurance that such a lens as he needed could be constructed. Ultimately, however, 422 The President's Kepoet a lens made by Brasbear was found to be much superior to any other lens previously examined. With a plane plate this lens, which has an aperture of ten inches and a focal length of fifty inches, gives sharply defined star images over a field about six degrees in diameter and the focus can be averaged so as to give fairly good images over a field of eight or nine degrees. By using a curved plate of spherical surface a satisfactory field about ten or twelve degrees in diameter can be obtained. This lens has accordingly been accepted, and the mounting is in process of con- struction by Warner and Swasey. HEAT RADIATION OF ARCTURUS, VEGA, JUPITER, AND SATURN (Professor E. F. Nichols) In the Report of the Director of the Yerkes Observatory for 1898 an account was given of the meastu-es of the heat radiation of Arcturus and Vega made by Professor E. F. Nichols, of Dartmouth College, during the summer of that year. In this preliminary investigation the mean deflections of the radiometer, not corrected for atmospheric absorption, were 0.60 mm. for Arcturus, and 0.27 mm. for Vega. In the summer of 1900 Professor Nichols again visited the Observatory, and continued the investigation with improved apparatus. The old heliostat used in 1898 was replaced by the coelostat built in our shop for the eclipse of May 28, 1900, provided for this investigation with a plate-glass mirror measuring 30 X 36 inches, which reflected the star's rays to a second plate-glass mirror and thence to a concave mirror of 23| inches aperture and 93 inches focal length (the mirror subsequently used in the two-foot reflector). The image formed by the mirror, after reflection on a small 45° flat mirror, entered the radiometer case through a fluorite window. By moving the coelostat in right ascension the image could be thrown on or off the vane. The entire apparatus was mounted in the heliostat room between the two small domes. TABLE VI T>ofa 1SQR Vega Arcturus r? *i^ Saturn Arcturus Vega August 3 0.55 0.33 6. "64 0.33 0.60 0.50 0.68 6'65 1.06 1.60 1.30 0.98 1.36 o^es 4 2 1 5 7 8 2.0 9 3 11. 12 2.3 13 1 0.52 1.09 2.1 Jupiter Arcturus o!99 1.45 0.99 0.70 i!66 1.15 0.92 0.89 1.70 1.58 1.87 1.93 0.27 0.18 0.24 13 93 14 1 30 15 18 1 50 19 1.60 28 1.07 1.48 0.23 1 33 The Yeekes Observatory 423 The preceding table contains the results obtained in 1898 and 1900, reduced to 10~' meter candle with no correction for atmospheric absorption. In the 1900 observations, as compared with those of 1898, there was one additional reflection, for which no correction is here applied. In order to determine the atmospheric absorption, measures were made of the heat radiated by candles in tents distant 2,000 feet and 4,500 feet respectively from the Observatory. The final values, reduced by this means to the zenith, are as follows: table VII Vega ArctuTus Jupiter Saturn 0.51 1.14 2.38 0.37 The ratio of the thermal intensities of these objects is therefore: Vega: Arcturus: Jupiter: Saturn = 1: 2.2 -.i.T-.O.li. The ratio of the zenith photometric intensities is : Vega: Arcturus: Jupiter = 1:1 -.LB. It appears probable from these results that the temperature of the outer envelope of Jupiter is comparatively low. TOTAL SOLAR ECLIPSES OP MAY 28, 1900, AND MAY 18, 1901 ECLIPSE OP MAY 28, 1900 The observations made by the Yerkes Observatory party at Wadesboro, N. C, were as follows: 1. Photographs of the corona with several small lenses and with a ccelostat telescope of sixty-one and one-half feet focal length, by Professor Barnard and Mr. Kitchey. 2. Photographs of the spectrum of the "flash" with prism and grating spectrographs, by Professor Frost and Dr. Isham. 3. Measurement of the heat radiation of the corona, by the Director and Mr. Ellerman. 4. Observations of contacts, by Professor Flint. The photographs of the corona were made with the aid of a ccelostat constructed in the instrument shop of the Yerkes Observatory. The same polar axis carried two plane mirrors, one of twelve inches aperture, used by Messrs. Barnard and Ritchey, and one of fifteen inches aperture, used by Messrs. Frost and Isham. Light was reflected from the twelve-inch mirror to a sis-inch photographic objective of sixty-one and one-half feet focal length by Brashear, which gave photographs of the corona on a scale of thirteen inches to the degree. The six-inch objective was connected with the photographic house by a long light-tight tube, shielded from direct solar radiation before the eclipse by a white cotton screen and fitted throughout with diaphragms to prevent internal reflections. To facilitate handling, the large photographic plates (three of 14 X 17 inches, four of 25 X 30 inches) were mounted on a wooden carrier fifteen feet long, free to move on ball bearings on a steel track extending at right angles to the tube the entire length of the photographic house. In this carrier the plates were all placed at an angle equal to the latitude, so that the long axis of the plates was parallel to the celestial equator. A catch operated by hand served to stop the carrier at the proper place for each exposure. With this apparatus seven plates, backed with a mixture of caramel and burnt sienna in a little alcohol, were given the following exposiu-es during totality: f , 2, 8, 30, 14, 4, and 1 second. The resulting photographs offer abundant evidence of the advantage of using long focus objec- tives for photographing the details of the corona. The polar fans are shown with remarkable 424 The President's Eepoet beauty, and the inner corona is full of detail. The greatest extension of the equatorial corona is about 40' from the center of the Moon; to bring out extensions of a degree or more would have required exposures of not less than a minute. Stars as faint as the 6.5 magnitude appear on the plates exposed for fourteen and thirty seconds. The photographs of the spectrum of the "flash" and the corona were made with a three- prism spectrograph of two inches aperture, and a Rowland concave grating of sixty inches radius, ruled surface I X 1| inches, both used direct, without slit or image lens. A plane grating was used by Professor Frost for visual observations of the flash, to determine the exact moment for the exposures. In his discussion* of the photographs obtained with the above apparatus. Professor Frost reaches some very important conclusions. In all, 382 bright Unes were measured on the photo- graphs of the cusp and the first and second flashes. Of these, 319 appeared on the prism plates. Limiting the discussion to that part of the spectrum which was in the best focus, from about X4060 to X4310, he finds 230 bright lines, of which 160, or 70 per cent, are identified with 176 of the dark lines in Rowland's Table of Solar Spectrum Wave-Lengths. To malse the comparison an entirely fair one, the discussion is further hmited to lines in the solar spectrum of intensity 3 or greater, as the fainter lines would not be shown vpith this spectrograph. Of these stronger dark lines at least 60 per cent, are found to be bright in a stratum not over one second of arc, or 500 miles, in thickness, lying in close contact with the solar photosphere. As there is every reason to believe that the fainter lines would also be shown with sufficiently powerful apparatus. Young's view that the reversing layer is a thin stratum at the base of the chromosphere may be regarded as fully confirmed. Lockyer's argument in favor of his contention that the reversing layer is above the chromosphere is shown by Professor Frost to rest upon a false assumption in the discussion of the former eclipse results. No special relationship was found to exist between "enhanced lines" and lines in the flash. On a photograph of the spectrum of the corona, rings of coronal origin were found at XX 4230.4, 4311, and 4558, and others were suspected, though they were too faint to measure. The bolometric work on the corona was undertaken in connection with my attempts to observe the corona without an eclipse, which have been in progress since 1892. The experiments made by a photographic method at the Kenwood Observatory in 1892, on Pike's Peak, with the aid of Professor Keeler, in 1893, and on Moimt ^tna, through the comiesy of Professor Ricc5, in 1894, led to the conclusion that no photographic means then available would accomplish the desired result. I accordingly devised a new method, based on the use of a bolometer, which has the advantage of being purely diflFerential in principle, and consequently theoretically capable of determining the form of the corona from measures of the heat radiation of its various parts, almost equally well in full sunlight or during an eclipse. Experiments with various telescopes and bolometric apparatus were made in 1895, 1896, 1898, and 1899, but no certain evidence of differences in radiation from different parts of the corona was obtained. At the eclipse of May 28, 1900, an accident in the bolometer house prevented the heat radiation of the corona from being measured during the total phase. But immediately after totality no decrease could be detected in the radiation of the corona at points where it was covered by the Moon. This proves conclusively that the radiation of the corona is very small, much less in proportion to its light than that of the full Moon. Mr. Abbot's measures at the same eclipse confirm this result, and indicate that the failure of my attempts to detect the corona in sunlight has been largely due to the insiifficient sensitiveness of the apparatus. Some further experiments have been made at the Yerkes Observatory since the eclipse with a very sensitive radiometer, but no conclusive results have been obtained. In view of the surprisingly small heat radiation of the corona, it is now evident that results of importance are hardly to be expected. * Astrophysical Journal, Vol. XII (1900), pp. 307-51. The Yerkes Obseevatoey 425 eclipse of may 18, 1901 Through the courtesy of Professor S. J. Brown, then Astronomical Director of the United States Naval Observatory, Professor Barnard was enabled to go to Sumatra to observe the eclipse of May 18, 1901, as a member of the party sent out by the government. On accoimt of the gi-eat length of the total phase (five minutes, fifty-two seconds at Solok), this eclipse offered an exceptional opportunity for making long-exposure photographs of the corona. Professor Barnard took with him the ccelostat and six -inch objective of sixty-one and one-half feet focal length which had proved so effective in Wadesboro. It was provided with a new tube, made at the Yerkes Observatory, which could be packed in sections. Instead of the sliding plate-carrier previously employed. Professor Barnard decided to use large plate-holders, one for a plate 40X40 inches, constructed for this eclipse, two for plates thirty inches square, and five for 14 X 17 plates. All of these, except the first, which was provided by the Naval Observatory, were kindly loaned by Secretary Langley, of the Smithsonian Institution. In order to facilitate the change in the midst of totality from the 30X30 plate-holders to the very heavy one of 40 X 40 inches, a vertical sliding frame was constructed, so counterbalanced that it was a simple matter to bring into position the upper section of the frame, in which the large plate-holder was permanently mounted, or the lower section, in which the smaller plate-holders were placed one after another. Exposures from one second up to one hundred and fifty seconds were to be given. To insure perfect following during the long exposures the ccelostat clock (which belongs to the twelve-inch Kenwood refractor) was used with its electric control. In spite of the fact that the long series of meteorological observations made at Solok showed it to be the most promising site available for the eclipse station, the sky was cloudy throughout totality, though at neighboring stations it was clear. In favorable weather the perfect condition of the apparatus and the care with which every adjustment had been made by Professor Barnard would certainly have insured success. LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE OF THE YERKES OBSERVATORY The latitude and longitude of the Yerkes Observatory were first determined by Mr. W. H. Wright, now of the Lick Observatory, in 1897, and the approximate values were given in Bulletin No. 2. In the autumn of 1900, through the courtesy of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, Assistants C. H. Sinclair (chief of party) and O. B. French were detailed to determine the latitude of the Observatory and the difference in longitude between our transit room and the Coast Survey station at St. Louis. A full description of Zenith Telescope No. 4, and of the methods of observation and reduction employed in the determination of the latitude by Mr. French, may be found in Report of the United States Geodetic Survey, 1897-98, Appen- dix No. 7 (fourth edition), pp. 342, 347-50, 354-63, etc. The resulting value of the latitude was 42° 34' 12^64 ±0^038. In the determination of the longitude. Transit No. 18 was mounted on the transit pier of the Yerkes Observatory at a point 264 feet, 5 inches (=0?235) east of the forty-inch equatorial pier. At St. Loiiis, Transit No- 19 was mounted on the brick pier erected by Professor Wood- ward in the east end of the Observatory of the Washington University. This station is 1.2 feet (=0'001) west of the Coast Survey station of 1881. The results obtained from the observations were as follows : TABLE VIII St. Louis (1881)— Yerkes Observatory Transit (1900) Longitude St. Louis (1881), latest adjustment Longitude Yerkes Observatory Transit - - - - Longitude Yerkes Observatory forty-inch Equatorial - gm 36" 248±0»009 6" 00 » 49!256 5 54 13.008 5 54 13.243 k 426 The Pbesident's Report I take pleasure in expressing the thanks of the Yerkes Observatory to Superintendents Pritchett and Tittmann, and to Assistants Sinclair and French, of the Coast and Geodetic Sm-vey, for the important results of this admirably conducted campaign. PUBLICATIONS Vol. I of the Publications of the Yerkes Observatory, entitled "A General Catalogue of 1290 Double Stars Discovered from 1871 to 1899," by S. W. Burnham, was published in 1900. It is hoped that Vol. II will be published in 1903. Its contents will include: "Measures of Double Stars Made with the Forty-Inch Refractor of the Yerkes Observatory in 1900 and 1901," by S. W. Burnham. " Micometrical Observations of iJros made with the Forty-Inch Refractor of the Yerkes Observ- atory during the Opposition of 1900-1901," by E. E. Barnard. " On Certain Rigorous Methods of Treating Problems in Celestial Mechanics," by F. R. Moulton. "Radial Velocities of Twenty Stars Having Spectra of the Orion type," by Edwin B. Frost and Walter S. Adams. " The Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fourth Type," by George E. Hale, Ferdinand Ellerman, and J. A. Parkhurst. " Astronomical Photography with the Forty-Inch Refractor and the Two-Foot Reflector of the Yerkes Observatory," by G. W. Ritchey. "The Orbit of the Minor Planet 334," by Kurt Laves. Most of these papers will be accompanied by reproductions of photographs. The following Bulletins have been issued since the publication of my last report: Bulletin No. 12 — " Carbon in the Chromosphere. Some New Forms of Spectroheliographs." Bulletin No. 13 — " Variable Star Observations with the Twelve-Inch and Forty-Inch Refractors." Bulletin No. 14—" Observations of the Total Solar Eclipse of May 28, 1900, at Wadesboro, N. C." Bulletin No, 15 — " Photographs of the Cluster M 13 Herculis with the Forty-Inch Visual Telescope." Bulletin No. 16—" The New Star in Perseus." Bulletin No. 17 — " Changes in the Spectrum of Nova Persei." Bulletin No. 18 — " Latitude and Longitude of the Yerkes Observatory." Hereafter Bulletins will be issued rarely, and only to provide for the publication of infor- mation which does not naturally find a place in other channels. A list of the papers contributed by members of the staff to scientific journals and the pro- ceedings of societies has been prepared for publication in one of the Decennial Volumes of the University, and need not be repeated here. OBSERVATORY LIBRARY (S. B. Barrett, Librarian) On July 1, 1902, an approximate determination of the number of books and pamphlets in the library (exclusive of those belonging to the private library of the Director) resulted as follows : TABLE IX Number of books, bound 1,320 Number of books, unbound ..--.. 678 Number of periodicals, unbound volumes - - - - 115 Number of pamphlets .--_-.- 1,700 The accessions for the year ending July 1, 1902, were 453, of which 122 are books and 331 are pamphlets. Many books have been bound during the year, and others are now at the binders. Mr. Barrett has devoted much time to the card catalogue. The Yeekes Observatory 427 The thanks of the Observatory are extended to all institutions and individuals who have contributed to the library. Special acknowledgment has been made of the gift of important sets of the proceedings of societies and the publications of observatories and laboratories. OPTICAL LABORATORY AND INSTRUMENT SHOP Under the effective superintendence of Mr. Ritchey, much work has been done in the optical laboratory and instrument shop since the publication of the last report. Mr. Eitchey's personal work has included the figruing of plane mirrors of thirty inches, twenty-four inches, twelve inches, and eight inches apertiu:e, concave mirrors of twenty-four inches apertxu-e and sixty-two and one-half feet focal length, twenty-four inches apertxire and one hundred and sixty- five feet focal length, twenty inches aperture and twenty-seven feet focal length, and a five-inch convex mirror. He has also designed the mechanical parts of most of the following instruments, which have been constructed wholly or in part during the period covered by the present report: Driving mechanism for large spectroheliograph. Mechanical parts of Bruce spectrograph, and its temperature case. Twelve-inch ccelostat and sixty-one and one-half foot horizontal telescope for eclipse of May 28, 1900. Small {3}i X 4M inches) double-slide plate-carrier for forty-inch refractor and two-toot reflector. Large (8 X 10 inches) double-slide plate-carrier for forty-inch refractor. Thirty -inch coelostat and one hundred and sixty-five foot horizontal telescope. Other work done in the instrrmaent shop during this period includes: Mounting of six-inch objective of sixty-one and one-half feet focal length on forty-inch refractor. Mounting of a six-inch concave grating for the large concave grating spectroscope. Apparatus for work on the spectrum of the spark and rotating arc in liquids and on the spark in air at high pressures, together with much auxiliary apparatus required in the spectroscopic laboratory. Reconstruction of Kenwood spectroheliograph. Large concave grating spectrograph for coelostat reflector. Large concave and plane grating spectrograph with rotating slit for coelostat reflector. Six-inch comet seeker, the patterns for which were kindly loaned by the J. A. Brashear Co. Repairs of power-house engines, and other machinery. The machine for ruling gratings was practically completed by Mr. Mors in the summer of 1899. At Professor Wadsworth's request, it was sent to him at the Allegheny Observatory for the final experiments required to get it into working order. The driving mechanism was con- structed by Brashear, after Professor Wadsworth's designs. On account of the delay in the completion of the new Allegheny Observatory, and the impossibility of maintaining the labora- tories of the old Allegheny Observatory at a uniform temperature, Professor Wadsworth has hitherto been unable to do any work on the machine. VISITORS AT THE YERKES OBSERVATORY Visitors are admitted to the Observatory on Saturday of each week, on presentation of tickets, which are furnished free of charge to those who apply for them. The number of tickets issued since the publication of my last report is as follows: , TABLE X July, 1899 to July, 1900 ----.- 4,889 July, 1900 to July, 1901 5,009 July, 1901 to July, 1902 5,288 428 The President's Report From these numbers it will be seen that the interest of the public in the Observatory has undergone no diminution with time. The popular lectures which have been given at the Observ- atory during the summer season have drawn audiences which have outgrown the capacity of the Observatory. In view of the danger of admitting large audiences to the rising-floor, it has been suggested that a lecture-room be constructed on the ground floor of the large tower, where the acoustic properties would be much superior to those in the space under the dome. Kespectfully submitted, George E. Hale, Director of the Yerkes Observatory. k THE HULL ZOOLOGICAL LABORATOEY To the President of the University: Sir: I submit herewith a sketch of the history of the Department of Zoology, from 1892 to June 30, 1902. In the earliest organization of the work of the University there was but a single Depart- ment of Biology. The original members of the Department were: Charles 0. Whitman, Ph.D., Head Professor of Biology and Professor of Animal Moi-phology; Henry Herbert Donaldson, Ph.D., Professor of Neurology; Franklin P. Mall, M.D., Professor of Biology; George Baur, Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Paleontology; Jacques Loeb, M.D., Assistant Professor of Biology; William Morton Wheeler, Ph.D., Instructor in Biology; Edwin O. Jordan, B.S., Tutor in Animal Morphology; Sho Watas6, Ph.D., Eeader in Cellular Biology. The Fellows in Biology during the first year were: Charles L. Bristol, M.S.; A. C. Eycleshymer, B.S.; Herbert P. Johnson, B.S.; Frank K. Lillie, B.A.; A. D. Mead, M.S.; Harry L. Russell, B.S. The work of the first year was conducted under some difficulties, but with abundance of enthusiasm, in " Science Hall," a flat building that had been hastily erected at the corner of Lexington avenue and Fifty-fifth street for accommodation of World's Fair visitors. Before the end of the first year the Department of Biology had been divided into five, viz. : Zoology, Anatomy and Histology, Physiology, Neurology, and Paleontology. At the close of the first year of the University the Department of Zoology was moved into the Kent Chemical Laboratory, where it enjoyed the hospitality of the Department of Chemistry, until the removal of the Department to its permanent home, the Hull Zoological Laboratory, in 1897. From its foundation the Department of Zoology has emphasized the research side of its work. The results of this are evidenced, not only by the list of original contributions to Zoology by members of the Department, but also by the national scientific organizations and enterprises with which its members have been connected. STAFF OP THE DEPARTMENT Charles O. Whitman, Ph.D., appointed 1892, Head Professor of Biology and Professor of Animal Mor- phology; 1893, Head Professor of Zoology. George Baur, Ph.D., appointed 1892, Assistant Professor of Comparative Osteology and Paleontology; 1893, transferred to Department of Paleontology. Deceased. William M. Wheeler, Ph.D., appointed 1892, Instructor in Embryology; 1894, Assistant Professor of Embryology; 1900, called to the University of Texas as Professor of Biology. Edwin O. Jordan, Ph.D., appointed 1892, Tutor in Zoology; 1893, Instructor in Biology; 1894, Assistant Professor of Zoology; 1896, Assistant Professor of Bacteriology; 1900, Associate Professor of Bacteriology; 1901, transferred to the Department of Pathology and Bacteriology. Sho Watas^, appointed 1892, Tutor in Cellular Biology; 1893, Instructor in Cellular Biology; 1894, Assistant Professor of Cellular Biology; 1900, called to the University of Tokyo as Professor of Cellular Biology. Prank R. Lillie, Ph.D., appointed 1893, Reader in Embryology; 1894, called to the University of Michigan as Instructor in Zoology; 1899, called to Vassar College as Professor of Biology (John P. Giraud Chair of Natural History); 1900, called to the University of Chicago as Assistant Professor of Zoology; 1902, Associate Professor of Embryology. 429 430 The Peesident's Kepoet D. G. Elliot, F.B.S.E., appointed 1894, Lecturer in Zoology, to 1896. Norman Wyld, appointed 1894, Docent in Zoology, to 1896. Charles Manning Child, Ph.D., appointed 1896, Associate in Zoology; 1898, Instructor in Zoology. A. L. Smith, Lecturer in Bacteriology, Summer Quarters of 1899 and 1900. Charles B. Davenport, Ph.D., appointed 1899, Assistant Professor of Zoology; 1901, Associate Professor of Zoology and Embryology. Howell E. Davies, Ph.D., appointed 1899, Assistant in Bacteriology; 1901, resigned. Elliott R. Downing, Ph.D., Assistant in Zoology, Summer Quarter, 1901. E. H. Harper, Ph.D., Assistant in Zoology, Summer Quarter, 1901-2. W. L. Tower, 1901, appointed Assistant in Embryology. LIST OF FELLOWS The following have held Fellowships in the Department of Zoology: 1892-1893 Charles L. Bristol, to 1894; Professor of Biology, New York University. A. C. Eycleshymer, Ph.D.; Assistant Professor of Anatomy, University of Chicago. Herbert P. Johnson, Ph.D.; Bussey Institute, Boston, Mass. Prank R. Lillie, Ph.D.; Associate Professor of Embryology, University of Chicago. A. D. Mead, Ph.D., Professor of Comparative Anatomy, Brown University. Harry L. Russell, Ph.D.; Professor of Bacteriology, University of Wisconsin. 1893-1894 Emanuel R. Boyer; deceased. John P. Munson, to 1897. Marcus S. Farr, Ph.D.; Curator, New York State Museum, Albany. O. P. Hay (Hon.); Curator, American Museum of Natural History, New York city. William A. Locy (Hon.), Ph.D., to 1895; Professor of Zoology, Northwestern University, Evanston, 111. A. L. Treadwell (Hon.), Ph.D., to 1896; Professor of Biology, Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. Cornelia M. Clapp (Hon.), Ph.D.; Professor of Zoology, Mount Holyoke College, S. Hadley, Mass. 1894-1895 Howard S. Brode, Ph.D., to 1896; Professor of Biology, University of Washington, Walla Walla, Wash. Charles M. Child, Ph.D., to 1896; Instructor, University of Chicago. Harriett Bell Merrill, to 1896; Teacher, Milwaukee High School. 1895-1896 Agnes M. Claypole. Samuel J. Holmes, Ph.D., to 1897; Instructor in Zoology, University of Michigan. Virgil E. McCaskill, Ph.D.; Professor of Biology, Normal School, Stevens Point, Wis. Wales H. Packard, to 1899; Instructor in Biology, Bradley Polytechnic Institute, Peoria, 111. 1896-1897 Harry R. Fling; Professor of Biology, Normal School, Oshkosh, Wis. Mary M.Sturges, to 1898. ^^^^_^^^^ Fred L. Charles; Teacher of Biology, Lake View High School, Chicago. Emily Ray Gregory, Ph.D., to 1899; Professor of Biology, Wells College, Aurora, N. Y. Michael F. Guyer, Ph.D., to 1900; Assistant Professor of Zoology, University of Cincinnati. George W. Hunter, Jr.; Teacher of Biology, DeWitt Clinton High School Annex, New York city. Howell S. Davies; St. Luke's Hospital, Chicago. 1898-1899 Ralph S. Lillie, Ph.D.; Instructor in Physiology, University of Nebraska. Horatio H. Newman, to 1900. The Hull Zoological Laboeatoey 431 Anne Moore, Ph.D. 1899-1900 1900-1901 Charles C. Adams, to 1902; Curator, Zoological Museum, University of Michigan. Elliott R. Downing, Ph.D.; Professor of Biology, State Normal School, Marquette, Mich. Minnie M. Entemann, Ph.D. Eugene H. Harper, Ph.D.; Professor of Biology. William J. Moenkhaus; Assistant Professor of Zoology, University of Indiana, Bloomington, Ind. Alice Wilcox; Instructor in Zoology, Wellesley College, Mass. 1901-1902 Bennett M. Allen. Mary Hefferan ; Curator, Bacteriological Museum, University of Chicago. THE LABORATORY The Zoological Laboratory is 120 X 50 feet, and four stories high, exclusive of basement. The accompanying plans show the arrangement of the rooms: \/ "^ X-^ i3 \ / t2 1 / \ / / y 14 ^v. X lO \ // 1 FIRST FLOOR On the first floor are six rooms, numbered 10 to 15. Kooms 10, 11, 12, and 13 were origin- ally intended for a small museum; Rooms 14 and 15 are laboratories for the elementary work, and are capable of accommodating, when properly furnished, about thirty -five students. Eooms 12 and 13 are at present occupied by the library of the Biological Departments, and Eoom 10 is used as a research-room for the Department of Pathology and Bacteriology. Room 11 is in use at the present time for a part of the zoological collections. The remainder of the collections is scattered over the building, or stored in the basement. The space in Room 10 is much 432 The President's Report needed for exhibition of tiie material; and the recent formal establishment of a Museum of Zoology will soon make the space of Rooms 12 and 13 necessary. The second floor is devoted mainly to research. Room 21, at the west end, is a research SECOND FLOOR laboratory for advanced students. Two private research-roorns for Fellows of the Department open off this. Rooms 20, 22, and 23 are also research-rooms for members of the staff; 24 is a lecture-room, seating about sixty students. Rooms 25 and 26 are occupied by the Director of THIRD FLOOR the Laboratory and the artist; 27 and 28 are research-rooms for Fellows or assistants. Room 29 is a laboratory, used at present both for Bacteriology and Embryology at different times. The ends of the third floor are occupied by two large laboratories. Room 31 is used for Comparative Anatomy and Embryology; 36, for Bacteriology and Embryology; 30 is the The Hull Zoological Laboratory 433 embryological preparation-room; 32, 33, and 35 are private rooms for members of the staff; 34 is a research-laboratory for the work in variation and statistical zoology; 37 is used both as a lecture-room and general laboratory for the same subjects; 38 is a private research-room. The fourth floor is at present occupied entirely by the Department of Bacteriology. In the basement are nine rooms, variously used and fully occupied as storage and animal rooms; and a glass-covered extension for aquaria, 25 X 40 feet. At present the Department is greatly hampered for lack of sufficient space — a condition that will be improved with the removal of the Department of Pathology and Bacteriology, The fourth floor will then come into use for work in Comparative Anatomy and for the quarters of the preparator, and the room on the ground floor, vacated by Pathology, will be immediately occupied by the musemu, at present crowded into one small room. fourth floor The Department thus needs at the present time the entire space in the building. Even then one considerable drawback will remain: the lack of a lecture-room of adequate size for the largest classes. For this the Department is at present dependent upon the courtesy of the Head of the Department of Botany. There are still many deficiencies in the furnishing and equipment of the laboratories. The sum of $11,000 could be well expended in the following ways: $2,500 for oak, glass-faced cases for the museum. 500 for adequate equipment of a preparation-room. 5,000 for skeletons, injected materials, and rare specimens for the museum. 2,000 for completing the furnishings of the laboratories, cases, tables, aquaria, etc. 1,000 for a complete photographic outfit and dark room (one of the most pressing needs at present). VIVARIUM The Department would- also recommend the expenditure of about $175,000 in building and equipping a good vivarium, which should include the best provisions for maintaining all forms of animal life under conditions as nearly normal as possible. The importance of such a provision in the work of all the Biological Departments could hardly be overestimated. It would be possible under these conditions to carry on long series of experiments in the breeding of animals, in the efl'ect of altered conditions on animals, on the laws of inheritance, etc. A very attractive feature of such a vivarium would be the marine aquarium, in which all classes 434 The President's Kepoet of marine animals could be kept the year around, and many of the advantages of a marine biological laboratory be brought to our own doors. No less important would be a fresh-water aquarium, including one or two small ponds. Such a vivarium would require at the start a number of trained attendants for the care of the aquaria and animals. This vivarium would be of the greatest assistance in the work of the three Departments of Zoology, Physiology, and Botany. LIBRARY Next to its Faculty, the greatest concern of a university should be its collection of books. Since ancient times, at every center of learning where scholars have come together they have sought first to establish a great library. It is natural, therefore, that the Department of Zoology should urge the necessity of doing something to improve the scientific side of the library. There are two special requirements met by a library in any science like Zoology: first, it is essential that all that has ever been published on any subject of the science should be at once easily accessible; second, it is important for the investigator that the current ideas of his colleagues in whatever field should be early accessible to him, since they afford suggestions and a stimulus. The first-mentioned function of a library is a consequence of the essential nature of a science. It builds upon recorded facts. If the scientific worker cannot get the recorded facts, he may waste much time in duplicating work already done. Moreover, every worker is bound to show the relation of his facts to those previously known; to bring together all the scattered published data bearing upon his investigation, and to examine them critically in the light of his investigation. All this requires that the complete literature of Zoology, as indexed in the Record or Bericht of the science, should be available. At present the Library of the University, including the Biological Group Library, comes far short of reaching the ideal of completeness, and is every year getting more hopelessly behind. At the present time we are regularly receiving only about 15 per cent, of the zoological journals, and probably only about 20 per cent, of the current output in Zoology. We are much more deficient in the literature previous to 1892. Altogether, probably less than 5 per cent, of the books on Zoology are accessible at the University. The chances are thus greatly against a student being able to refer to any article cited. In consequence, any attempt to present a com- plete critical analysis of the literature on a subject becomes impossible. In fact, the highest type of scholarly work in Zoology cannot be done at the University; and so long as this is so, the best graduate students will tend to eastern universities. In comparison with other sciences at the University, Zoology has fared very badly. Cer- tain sciences, such as Chemistry, report that they have a nearly complete library. But chemi- cal books cost far less than those of Zoology. It is the lithographic plates that make zoological literature the most expensive of any science. An appropriation for books that would suffice for Chemistry would be meager indeed for Zoology. Moreover, not only is the zoological literature expensive, but it is very great in the number of parts issued. Consequently the work of the Department has been hampered by an insufficient library. There is no single way in which the work of the Zoological Department, as at present limited, could be more effectively strengthened than by an income of $10,000 a year to be devoted exclusively to zoological books. EQUIPMENT The Department possesses thirteen Zeiss compound microscopes of the highest grade, and about fifty other compound microscopes, mostly by Leitz; thirty -one dissecting microscopes; sixteen camera lucidas; and other optical apparatus. There are sixteen microtomes, an electrical The Hull Zoological Laboeatory 435 projection lantern with attachment for microscopical projection, in addition to a great variety of minor apparatus. The collection of charts includes the complete Leuckart and Nitzsche series, and about one hundred prepared in the Laboratory. The Department also has the complete series of Ziegler Embryological Wax Models, as well as some others. The museum contains a small synoptic collection composed of typical representatives of the principal groups, and some material prepared for purposes of illustration and demonstration. A collection of North American moths and butterflies, comprising twenty cases, has been pur- chased by the Department, and, in addition, there is a number of skeletons of vertebrates, mounted and immounted. Mention should also be made of the Baur Collection of Galapagos vertebrates, including specimens of the famous giant tortoise of these islands. A collection of microscopic preparations has been begun, which is at present used chiefly in the various courses of instruction, and consists of about three to four thousand slides. It is intended, in the case of the embryological collection, to prepare as complete a series of slides as possible, illustrating the development of different classes of animals, for use by investigators. A LAKE BIOLOGICAL STATION It is to Mr. Edward Phelpes Allis, of Milwaukee, that we owe the first attempt to establish a lake biological station. It was under the auspices of the Allis Lake Laboratory that the Journal of Morphology was started. The plan was to locate the station eventually among the smaller lakes of Wisconsin. This part of the scheme is of first importance, for the small lakes are of far greater value than the large ones for biological pmposes. The fauna and flora in these small Wisconsin lakes are far richer than those of Lake Michigan, the conditions are more varied, the water pure and transparent. They are connected by streams of convenient size for complete control, and just adapted to feed small ponds made alongside for special purposes. It would be a mistake, from every point of view, to locate a station on the Great Lakes, for the life in these is greatly inferior in variety and scientific interest, and what there is is less accessible and handled with great difficulty on account of the muddy water. The ideal place for a lake laboratory is among the smaller lakes. The Great Lakes are great only in body of water; biologically they are incomparably smaller than the small lakes. Even the minute surface forms of life, on which much more has been said than done, are undoubtedly more abundant in the small lakes. A lake laboratory would miss the mark if it did not provide for studies on living organisms. Here its functions would merge with those of a biological farm, which should certainly be developed in close connection with it. The union of these two projects, liberally supported, would mark an epoch in the history of Biology of unprecedented importance. A BIOLOGICAL FARM FOE THE EXPEBIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OP HEREDITY, VARIATION, AND EVOLUTION, AND FOR THE STUDY OF LIFE-HISTORIES, HABITS, INSTINCTS, AND INTELLIGENCE The biological laboratories of today, in design, equipment, and staff, are almost exclusively limited to the study of dead material. Living organisms may find a place in small aquaria or vivaria, but they are reserved, as a rule, not for study, but for fresh supplies of dead material. It is no disparagement of the laboratory to point out a broad limitation in its ordinary functions and the pressing need of new facilities for observation and experiment on living organisms. The fundamental problems of heredity, variation, adaptation, and evolution cannot be wholly settled in the laboratory. They concern vital processes known only in living organisms —processes which are slow and cumulative in effects, expressing themselves in development, growth, life-histories, species, habits, instincts, intelligence. These problems require, therefore. 436 The President's Report to be taken to the field, the pond, the sea, the island, where the forms selected for study can be kept under natural conditions, and where the work can be continued from year to year without interruption. Such a field, combining land and water, stocked with animals and plants, and provided with a staff of naturalists, would have the essentials of a biological farm, now justly considered to be one of the great desiderata of Biology. This great need (pointed out in all our annual programs since 1892, and named as one of the three leading purposes of the Culver endowment) has been felt ever since Darwin's time, and has been strongly urged by such evolutionists as Komanes, Varigny, Galton, Weismann, and Meldola. Thus far the project has not been realized, except on a small scale through individual effort. The most notable move in this direction is that of Professor Cossar Ewart, of the Univer- sity of Edinburgh. The Penycuik Experiments — the first product of Professor Ewart's enter- prise — form a brilliant illustration of the kind of fruit to be expected from a farm devoted to experimental research. Single-handed, Professor Ewart attacks the problems of heredity, and quickly shows how decisive are direct experiments in dealing with such subjects as telegony, prepotency, reversion, inbreeding, etc. The plans proposed by Romanes and Varigny had as chief ends in view demonstrative tests of the theory of the origin of species by natural selection. But the contest between the old belief in the immutability of species and the new doctrine of descent has been decided, and the original idea of the farm has consequently ceased to have great influence. The functions to be fulfilled by a farm are no longer prescribed by the exigencies of theories, but by the deeper and broader needs of pure research on living organisms. The problems of heredity and variability are fundamental, and naturally form the center of interest. Variability is the source of new species and the fountain of all progressive development in the organic world. In heredity lies the power of propagation and continuity of species. These are inexhaustible subjects, from the investigation of which must flow rich accessories to knowledge, which will redound to the advancement of human welfare. These subjects are in some aspects and details amenable to laboratory research; but for the most part they can be effectively dealt with only under conditions represented in the farm. This holds, for example, in that most promising branch of experimental Biology — hybridization. Botanical gardens and zoological parks have been utilized to some extent in this work, but they are adapted to show purposes, and of little value for research of this kind. The far-reaching importance of this subject, both for science and practical breeding purposes, is well attested in Mr. Ewart's experiments, in those of Hugo de Vries, as recorded in his monographs on the origin of species in the plant world, and again in Mr. Bateson's Experimental Studies in the Physiology of Heredity. The functions of a biological farm are not all summed up in experimentation. That old and true method of Natural History — observation — must ever have a large share in the study of living things. Observation, Experiment, and Reflection are three in one. Together they are omnipotent; disjoined they become impotent fetiches. The Biology of today, as we are begin- ning to realize, has not too much laboratory, but too little of living nature. The farm will certainly do much to mend this great deficiency. The farm would enable us to work out life-histories, bring us face to face with instinct, put it under control so we could handle it, photograph it, analyze it, read its history, and extort from it an answer to the question: Whence and how came intelligence? It would enable us to extend the study of development beyond the stages presented in the egg and the embryo to those leading up to mature age, and thus bring within reach vast series of most important data for the study of evolution. The Hull Zoological Laboeatoet 437 In such data we might expect to see to what extent individual development recapitulates race-development, and to get important clues to the meaning of this so-called biogenetic law. The whole meaning of development and heredity is involved in these phenomena of " recapitu- lation." That the first step in recapitulation is the germ-cell, we know. The fertilized germ, or egg, passes through a series of form-stages, leading through the morula, blastula, gastrula, embryo, larva, etc. Whether these stages epitomize the ancestral series is a question very diffi- cult to decide, and opinion is much divided. This obscure but fundamental problem of devel- opment can probably never be solved by embryological data alone. Paleontology throws much light on the general question, but deals entirely with non-living remains. If there be recapitu- lation, it should certainly be discoverable in post-embryonic stages, where characteristic features are slowly elaborated and brought to completion in detail qxiite beyond the possibilities in earlier life. Strange to say, these later stages have been but little studied in living forms, museum morgues having been the chief reliance. It is in these stages that recapitulation may be actually seen as a life-process, successive steps in evolution repeating themselves with suffi- cient fulness to satisfy the most skeptical. Such sequences are often manifest in the develop- ment of instinctive behavior, and even in voice-changes and food-instincts at certain life-epochs corresponding seemingly to evolution-epochs. Remembering that the distant ancestors of land animals were undoubtedly aquatic, the history of individual development in amphibious forms of today becomes intelligible as an abbreviated and variously modified record of race-evolution. Making all allowance for second- ary adaptive changes, it is nevertheless safe to say that race-evolution is sketched in the develop- ment of the individual — sketched not only in fundamental features of structure, but also in the accompanying physiological and psychological changes. Reminiscences of aquatic life are seen not only in land animals that return to the water to deposit their eggs, but also in all the higher animals, since they begin life in the unicellular stage and their eggs require for develop- ment to be bathed in water or an aqueous fluid. Sequence in color-patterns, so characteristic of young animals of almost all species, and especially so of birds, furnishes innumerable illustrations of the biogenetic law, and in many cases, where only two extremes of the sequence are present, it is possible by simple experiment to bridge the gap, and thus to show that the two extremes are really two stages of a continuous development. For example, in some wild species of pigeons we find that the color-pattern of the first plumage succeeding the down is so different from that of the second (adult) plumage as to appear to have no direct developmental relation to it. By plucking one or more feathers from the first plumage at diflPerent times before the first moult, intermediate stages can be obtained, showing precisely how the first pattern can be progressively converted into the second. Such experiments enable us to force from nature more complete records of her past and present doings. Work on living organisms, dealing with such subjects as heredity, variation, adaptation, correlation, development, recapitulation, hybridization, origin of species, natxu'e of specific characters, life-histories, habits, instincts, intelligence, etc., requiring vminterrupted continuance from year to year for long periods, under conditions that secure most favorable control for experimentation and study, calls for facilities which have yet to be provided for. There is no quite satisfactory name for the new plant required for such work, and no one has suggested a practical method of developing it. " Biological Farm," broadly defined, is perhaps the best we can do for a name, as the work would be, so far as possible, upon plants and animals under cultivation. A considerable tract of land, of varied surface, including woods, streams, and ponds, would represent the essentials of the farm headquarters. In dealing with the problem of heredity and variation, it is of the highest importance to 438 The President's Keport know the history of the material to be investigated. It is this prime essential that is so con- spicuously missing in most of the work hitherto done in these lines. Curves and formulsG may be all right mathematically and yet all wrong biologically. Even Galton, the father of the statistical school, warns us that " no pm-suit runs between so many pitfalls and unseen traps as that of statistics." ' The farm will furnish material with exact records, and will thus render a most important service to laboratory workers. A single illustration will suffice. It has been discovered that the paternal and maternal chromosomes in the cross-fertilized egg remain distinct, at least in the earlier stages of development. This seems to account for the fact that hybrids of the first generation between distinct species are generally " intermediates." When these hybrids breed inter se or with the parent species, we often get so-called " reversions." Hitherto we have not found any explanation for these "reversions." The solution of this most interesting problem in heredity only waits for the right material with precisely defined origin, and for this the laboratory could look to the farm. But the farm could do more than supply the needed mate- rial; its records and experiments would suggest the theory and give the physiological test, while the laboratory work would find the morphological test. The co-operation between labora- tory and farm would thus be intimate and of inestimable value in a multitude of ways. The practical question arises as to how to proceed with the development of a farm. Our limited experience strongly confirms the opinion with which we set out, namely, that the best method is to develop the farm slowly, section by section. Each section should be a group of related species, selected with a view to combining a wide range of problems. It should be developed and directed by an investigator prepared to make it his life-work. This investigator, or director, should have the support of a number of assistants competent to deal with special problems, one or two artists, a photographer, a stenographer, a keeper, and a business superin- tendent. Developed in this way, the cost of maintenance would not be heavy at first; $10,000 a year would support a large and thriving section. The multiplication of sections and the general growth of the work would call for a larger income. A farm of ten large sections would require an endowment of a million. If the scheme here outlined approaches the ideal which science is waiting to see realized, it will be seen that the farm does not find its chief purpose in demonstrations of the truth of evolution or in testing the theory of natural selection. It is not a project designed simply to turn out curves and formidse, nor is it the particular pet of any school or fad. Moreover, the prevailing idea that it has something in common with a zoological or botanical park, rests on a total misapprehension. The organization, management, and all the conditions obtaining in the public park are incongruous with those required for a research farm. Heterogeneous collections of animals, exhibited for the amusement of people, are wholly unsuited to the purposes of investigation in time, place, and character. For the kind of work contemplated, the investigator must have forms of his own selection, collected, arranged, and kept for his special purposes. He must have complete and permanent control of his quarters and the forms he is to study, and, above all, complete isolation from the public. Only under such conditions could he have the unbroken quiet required in delicate observation, or expect natural behavior from the forms occupying his attention. The location of a biological farm should be such as to give command of as many natural advantages as possible. The ideal situation would include plain, ridges, hills, woods, streams, ponds, and a tract of seashore. From fifty to one hundred acres or more would be needed. 1 Biometrika, Vol, I, p. 8. The Hull Zoological Laboratory 439 The farm should be in close touch with a laboratory, and this need would suggest a com- bination of the farm project with a marine laboratory or with a lake biological station. In either case the two establishments would work hand in hand in many problems, and accomplish far more together than they could by separate work. The possibility of first choice in location is now open to the University. The project is already in the minds of the people connected with other institutions, and it seems probable that it will be undertaken somewhere in a very short time. The lead in this important work in this section of the country should be taken at once. Respectfully submitted, Charles O. Whitman. THE WALKER MUSEUM To the President of the University: Sib: I submit herewith my report on the condition of the Walker Musexrm from its organization to June 30, 1902. The Walker Museum was founded by a gift of $130,000 from Mr. George C. Walker, in the spring of 1892. The Museum building, which consists of a fireproof structure of three stories and basement, was formally opened October 1, 1893. The presentation address by Mr. Walker and the President's response, which are given in the historical sketch, printed elsewhere in this volume, set forth the history of the foundation of the Museimi THE STAFF The Museum is under the general charge of the following officers of government: Thomas Chrowder Chamberlin, Professor of Geology, and Director. CUEATOES Rollin D. Salisbury, Professor of Geographic Geology. Joseph Paxson Iddings, Professor of Petrology. Richard Alexander Fullerton Penrose, Jr., Professor of Economic Geology. Samuel Wendell Williston, Professor of Paleontology. Frederick Starr, Associate Professor of Anthropology. Stuart Weller, Assistant Professor of Paleontologic Geology. William F. E. Gurley, Associate Curator in Paleontology. SCOPE OF THE MUSEUM The collections in Anthropology, Geology, Geography, Mineralogy, Petrography, Paleon- tology, Osteology, Botany, Semitic Archaeology, and Comparative Religions were at first accommodated within the building. On the establishment of the Haskell Oriental Museum the collections in Semitic Archaeology and Comparative Religions were transferred to it, and on the opening of the Hull Biological Laboratories the collections in Botany, Osteology, and vertebrate Paleontology were removed to these. The Museum, therefore, now embraces the collections in Anthropology, Geology, Geography, Mineralogy, Petrography, and historical Paleontology. The collections at first consisted chiefly of purchases, of gifts from the exhibitors at the World's Fair, and of a few donations made by generous friends. To these, important additions have been made from year to year by purchases, by gifts, and by collec- tions made by members of the University staff, for which provision has been made by University appropriations or by fimds provided by friends THE GEOLOGICAL COLLECTION The general geological collection contains a large variety of material illustrating the phenomena of the earth's structure and the modes of action of dynamic agencies. It also embraces a series of models, casts, photographs, and lantern slides illustrating structural and other phenomena. The economic division of the collection embraces a large series of ores, economic minerals, and mining products representing the various phases of industrial Geology. These have been drawn from the leading mining districts of the United States and from among foreign countries. 440 The Walker Museum 441 THE GEOGEAPHICAL COLLECTION The collection of illustrative geographic material embraces a large series of models, casts, maps, photographs, and lantern slides illustrating the leading types of topographic expression and the methods by which surface configuration is produced. The relief maps and models represent the actual configuration of the sxirface of certain selected regions in various parts of the world. MINERALOGICAL AND PETROLOGICAL COLLECTIONS The collection in Mineralogy embraces a systematic series of choice minerals arranged in cases for public exhibition, and a supplementary series arranged in drawers for laboratory study and the illustration of lectures. The petrological collection embraces a systematic series of igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks, arranged chiefly with reference to laboratory and lecture-room service. These are accompanied by an extensive series of microscopic slides for optical study. There are special collections of volcanic rocks from a number of typical localities in western America. Two collections of value have recently been added to the mineralogical group: one col- lection, which was donated by Mr. C K. G. Billings and exhibited at the Paris Exposition by the University, represents the silicate minerals of America; the other, loaned to the University by W. C E. Seeboeck, is a beautiful collection of crystallized minerals, embracing more than three thousand specimens. THE PALEONTOLOGICAL COLLECTION The collection of fossils includes a systematic series of life relics arranged in stratigraphic order for the purpose of illustrating the successive faunas and floras of the earth's history. It also embraces a much larger collection arranged in drawers for the purpose of laboratory study and class illustration. Besides specimens purchased and gathered from various sources, including many minor donations, the collection embraces the following special collections: The Gvrley Collection, the most important and valuable collection in the Museum, is of especial interest to the University, as it is particularly rich in the Paleozoic fossils of the Mississippi valley. (This collection contains material which requires fifteen thousand cata- logue entries. About six hundred types of species are included in the collection.) The Washburn Collection is very rich in Niagara species; the James Collection, valuable for its Cincinnati types; the Kramtz Collection, a collection of European fossils; the Barton Col- lection, representing the Niagara formation of Chicago; the Matthew Collection, containing Cambrian fossils from New Brunswick; the Squyer Collection, a small collection of Cretaceous fossils fi'om the Black Hills; the Ami Collection, a small collection of Ordovician fossils from Canada; the Willcox Collection, a small but choice collection of Tertiary shells from Florida and other eastern localities; the Waller Collection, rich in the Carboniferous fossils of south- western Missouri; the Sampson Collection, a valuable collection of the rare Chouteau limestone fossils of central Missouri. THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL COLLECTION The anthropological collection contains a large quantity of ethnographic and archaeo- logical material, which has recently been much extended by the collections of Professor Starr. In addition to these, the following collections are on deposit and furnish material for study: The Ryerson Collection in Mexican Archaeology, numbering more than three thousand pieces; the Ryerson Collection, from the clifif dwellings and cave houses of Utah, accompanied by a series of photographs which add much to its educational value. These two collections were 442 The President's Report deposited by Mr. Martin A. Eyerson. The Fulcomer Collection, from the Aleutian Islands and the northwest coast, illustrating the Ethnography of the Eskimos, the Aleuts, and their neighbors; it is deposited by Miss Anna Fulcomer. The Clement Collection, from Japan, containing art works in lacquer and porcelain, and an interesting series of articles used in the curious Dolls' Festival; it is deposited by Professor E. W. Clement, of Tokio, Japan. The Starr Collection in Mexican Archaeology, particularly rich in specimens which have been illustrated in important writings. The International Folk-Lore Association Collection, including masks, games, religious objects, and a large series of the wooden dolls made by the Moki Indians of Arizona and described by Dr. J. Walter Fewkes; the collection was made by Mrs. Helen W. Bassett and transferred by her to the association. DONORS Among the donors to the geological, mineralogical, petrological, paleontological and anthropological divisions of the Museum are the following: Professor W. C. Alderson; Dr. F. H. Day; C. H. Rose & Co.; Superintendent Sorin, of the Arizona exhibit; Mr. James Douglas; Mr. Adaire, of the Arkansas exhibit; Barber Asphalt Co.; Superintendent Fowler, of the British Columbia exhibit; Superintendent Willmotte, of the Canadian exhibit; Superintendent Berlime, of the Cape Colony exhibit; P. M. Harris, of the Chili exhibit; Superintendent Hicks, of the Colorado exhibit; President Jackson, of the Florida exhibit; M. Max Duchonoy, of the French exhibit; Superintendent Marcou, of the Minnesota exhibit; Superintendent Bickford, of the Montana exhibit; Superintendent Came, of the New South Wales exhibit; Superin- tendent Brown, of the North Carolina exhibit; Superintendent Boyle, of the Ontario exhibit; Superintendent Ayres, of the Oregon exhibit; Superintendent Mcintosh, of the Quebec exhibit; Superintendent Webb, of the South Dakota exhibit; Standard Oil Co.; Superintendent Arthur Teffler, of the Swedish exhibit; Superintendent Meany, of the Washington exhibit; United States government; United States Geological Survey; Dr. and Mrs. Henry D. Sheldon; Miss Annice Butts; Professor R. A. F. Penrose, Jr.; Dr. G. LindstrOm; Mrs. A. D. Davidson; Mr. J. C. Carr; Mr. A. H. Rudd; Mr. J. A. Bownocker; Mr. D. K. Gregor; Mr. J. W. Macfarland; Professors S. L. Penfield, L. V. Pirsson, T. C. Chamberlin, R. D. Salisbury; Mr. Martin A. Ryerson; Dr. Milton Moss; Dr. Henry S. Washington; Professors J. F. Kemp, George P. Merrill; Field Columbian Museum; Mr. J. W. Yoder; Mr. F. T. Cockerton; Mr. F. W. Cooper; Mr. C. G. Woodall; Mr. H. P. Heizer; Professors W. B. Clark, F. D. Adams, J. P. Iddings; Mr. H. W. Turner; Mr. M. B. Steozynski; Mr. J. H. Shaffner; Mr. Frank Wilder; Professor A. H. Purdue; Mr. D. W. Meade; Mr. Stuart Weller; Mr. H. BaokstrOm; Mr. B. Frosterus; Mrs. David Whiteford (books); Mrs. Oliver Hicks; Mr. Robert Howell; Professor J. A. Udden; Mr. L. Howard; Mr. W. C. Knight; Mr. T. H. MacBride; Mrs. Ralph Emerson; Mr. E. E. Teller; Chicago Academy of Sciences; Mr. H. B. Derr; Mr. H. H. Hurley; Miss Mary Marvin; Mr. H. F. Bain; Mr. F. C. Baker; Professor C. R. Eastman; Mr. George C. Morgan; Mr. T. E. Savage; Mr. W. T. Lee; Mr. A. W. Slooum; Mr. John K. Prather; Professor J. J. Stevenson; Mr. George F. Harris; Mr. Frank Springer; Professor Joseph Willcox; Mr. F. W. Sardeson; Mr. C. H. Sternberg; Mr. R. F. Damon; Mr. Frank Hartley; Ward's Natural Science Establishment, Smithsonian Institu- tion; Due de Loubat; Major W. S. Beebe; Mr. N. S. Boughton; Mr. J. E. Freeman; Mr. W. A Alexander; Mr. F. H. Reute; Dr. Alexander Bruce; Mrs. Dr. Sheldon. Respectfully submitted, Thomas C. Chamberlin, Director. THE DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY To the President of the University : Sir: I submit herewith a sketch of the history of the Department of Geology from 1892 to June 30, 1902. The Department of Geology was organized in 1892 by the appointment of the following instructional staff: Thomas C. Chamberlin, Ph.D., LL.D., Head Professor of Geology. Rollin D. Salisbury, A.M., Professor of Geographic Geology. Joseph P. Iddings, Ph.B., Associate Professor of Petrology. R. A. F. Penrose, Jr., Ph.D., Associate Professor of Economic Geology. Charles R. Van Hise, Ph.D., Non-Resident Professor of Pre-Cambrian Geology. Charles D. Walcott, Non-Resident Professor of Paleontologic Geology. William H. Holmes, A.B., Non-Resident Professor of Archaeologic Geology. Henry B. Kummel, A.B., Fellow in Geology. Twenty -eight courses of study were adopted, entitled as follows: Physiography, Crystal- lography, Physical Mineralogy, Descriptive Mineralogy, Petrology, Petrography, Petrology (Advanced), Field Petrology, General Geology, Geographic Geology, Laboratory Work in Geographic Geology, Stnactural Geology and Continental Evolution, Dynamic Geography, Economic Geology, Chemistry of Ore Deposits, Geologic Life-Development, Paleontologic Geology, Paleontology, Pre-Cambrian Geology, Laboratory Course in Pre-Cambrian Geology, Archaeologic Geology, Principles and Working Methods of Geology, Special Geology, Local Field Geology, Seminar, Geology in Camp, Professional Geology, Independent Field Work. The controlling purposes of the Department were set forth as follows: The Department has been organized with a view to providing systematic training in Geology (embracing, as constituent sciences. Geography, Mineralogy, and Petrology) in such a form as to be serviceable as a part of a liberal education, and, at the same time, to be specifically preparatory to professional and investigative work in the science, either in connection with educational institutions, official surveys, industrial enterprises, or private researches. The first purpose predominates in the earlier courses and the second in the later, but both have a place in all, and find their realization in a common method of treatment. The professional element has been the more controlling in the con- struction of the courses, and the professional or investigative phase of treatment will find constant expression in their execution. While it is not expected that more than a small percentage of those who take the earlier courses will have such professional or investigative work in view, or will ever engage in it, it is believed that they will derive larger and more distinctive returns because of such shaping of the work than they would under the more common didactic methods, because of the closer contact with the living problems of the science into which they will thus be brought. That special mental and moral discipline which is appropriate to the science, and is distinctive of it, can be secured only by wrestling with its problems as they actually present themselves to the investigator. A radically different discipline is secured from handling the subject in the non-professional, didactic method — a discipline not at all characteristic of the science. It is believed that those who enter upon any of the courses with an intelligent appreciation will desire to come into touch with the working methods and controlling spirit of the science. The Journal of Geology, a semi-quarterly magazine devoted to Geology and the allied sciences, was established by the Department during its first year and has been continued to date. The original editorial staff embraced the members of the geologic Faculty and the fol- lowing associate editors: Sir Archibald Geikie, Great Britain; H. Rosenbusch, Germany; Chaxles Barrois, Prance; Albrecht Penck, Austria; Hans Keusch, Norway; Gerard de Geer,' 443 444 The Peesident's Eeport Sweden; George M. Dawson, Canada; Joseph Le Conte, University of California; G. K. Gilbert, Washington; H. S. Williams, Yale University; J. C. Branner, Leland Stanford Ji^inior Univer- sity; G. H. Williams, Johns Hopkins University; I. C. Kussell, University of Michigan; O. A. Derby, Brazil. Of these Professor G. H. Williams, Dr. George M. Dawson, and Professor Joseph Le Conte have been lost by death; and Professor W. B. Clark, of Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, has been added. In 1893-94, the instructional stafiP was increased by the addition of Edmund C. Quereau, Ph.D., Assistant in Paleontologic Geology, and John C. Merriam, Ph.D., Docent in Paleonto- logic Geology. Courses in Paleontologic Geology — Paleozoic Life, Paleontologic Geology — Mesozoic Life, and Special Paleontologic Geology were added, and it was found necessary to repeat the course in Physiography under Professor Salisbury. Hon. Charles D. Walcott, having been appointed Dh-ector of the United States Geological Survey, retired from the staff. Diu-ing the first year the Department had occupied temporary quarters on the corner of Lexington avenue and. Fifty-fifth street, but at the opening of the second Quarter of the second year it was transferred to commodious rooms in Walker Museum, which had in the meantime been constructed by funds donated by Mr. George C. Walker, of the Board of Trustees. Through the added generosity of Mr. Walker, the Department was provided with cases for the installation of its collections and the inaugtu-ation of its section of the Walker Museum. This, aided by a generous allotment for equipment by the Board of Trustees, and by numerous dona- tions by exhibitors of ores, minerals, rocks, and other geologic material at the World's Fair, enabled the Department to equip itself effectively for instmction and research. A Geological Club was organized dming the year for the discussion of current subjects of geological interest, and this has been maintained to the present date. In 1894-95 OUver Cummings Fai-rington was appointed Professorial Lecturer on Deter- minative Mineralogy, and Messrs. Quereau and Memam accepted advanced positions elsewhere. The following Fellows and Graduate Scholars were appointed: Henry Barnard Kiimmel, A.M., Honorary Fellow; Thomas Cramer Hopkins, S.M., A.M.; Charles Emerson Peet, S.B.; Charles Hem-y Gordon, S.M., Fellows; and Elwood Chappell Perisho, S.M., Graduate Scholar. Large additions to the collections and equipment of the Department were made during the year, notable among which were the Washbm-n collection of fossils, especially rich in Niagara forms: the collection of the late Professor U. P James, especially rich in Cincinnati fossils; a brilliant suite of minerals fi-om the Copper Queen mine of Arizona; and a special col- lection of fossils made by Dr. Quereau for the University. The Department library was also increased to about 2,500 volumes and 3,800 pamphlets, besides a periodical and serial list of fifty-seven leading publications. A coiu'se in Determinative Mineralogy was added, and some modifications of other courses were made, the number now offered being thnty-one. In 1895-96 Han-y Fielding Keid, Ph.D., was temporarily engaged in the University Extension Department as Associate Professor of Physical Geology, and Mr. Stuart Weller, S.B., was added to the permanent staff as assistant in Paleontologic Geology. Professor Iddings was promoted from Associate Professor of Petrology to Professor of Petrology. Albert Homer Pm-due, A.B., Dexter Putnam Nicholson, S.M., and Henry Chandler Cowles, A.B., were appointed Fellows. Six courses in Paleontologic Geology imder Mr. Weller were introduced, and a com-se in Graphic Geology with Professor Holmes was added, and some modifications of previous coiurses were made, so that the total list of com-ses now nimibered thirty-seven. The coiuse in Physiogi-aphy under Professor SaUsbury was repeated during the Winter Quarter in addition to the Autumn and Siunmer Quarters. The Departmental library had now increased to about 3,000 volumes and 5,800 pamphlets. In 1896-97 the Faculty of the Department remained unchanged. The following were appointed Fellows: Harry Foster Bain, S.M.; John Paul Goode, S.B ; Samuel Weidman, S.B. The Department of Geology 445 The course in General Geology in the Winter Quarter being insufficient to meet the demand for it, a second general course, entitled History of the Earth, under Mr. Chamberlin, was added. In 1897-98 William Clinton Alden, A.B., Cyrus Fischer Tolman, Jr., S.B., and Claude Ellsworth Siebenthal, A.]M., were appointed Fellows. Professor William H. Holmes, who had given courses in Anthropic and Graphic Geology in connection with his duties as Curator of the Field Columbian Museum, having accepted a position in the National Museum, was unable to continue his course in the Department. In 1898-99 the increased demand for instruction during the Summer Quarter was met by the engagement of John PauJ Goode, S.B., and Wallace Walter Atwood, S.B., as Associates in Physiography, and by the addition of a supplementary course in Physiography and a field and laboratory course under the former, and by courses in Glacial Geology and Fundamental Problems in Geology by Mr. Chamberlin. To fm'ther meet the increased demands, the course in Physiography was repeated in the Spring Quarter. It had thus grown from a single-Quarter course in 1892 to one repeated each Quarter. The appointees to fellowships were: John Wel- lington Finch, A.M.; William Newton Logan, A.M.; Kussell D. George, A.M.; and Claude Ellsworth Siebenthal, A.M. In 1899-1900, in addition to the regular instructional staff, John Paul Goode, S.B., assisted with Physiography in the Summer Quarter; and John Wellington Pinch, A.M., Wallace Walter Atwood, S.B., and Fred Harvey Hall Calhoiru, S.B., assisted in Geology. The following Fellows were appointed: Wallace Walter Atwood, S.B.; Russell D. George, AM.; Willis Thomas Lee, S.M.; William Newton Logan, A.M.; and William George Tight, S.M. A great addition to the equipment of the Department was made in the acquisition of the Gurley collection of fossils, embracing about 14,000 entries and more than 200,000 specimens, among which 570 are type specimens. The material is exceptionally choice and valuable, and is the product of thirty years' assiduous collecting by Mr. Gm'ley, to whose generosity the acquisition of the collection is mainly due. In 1900-1901 the work of the regular instructional staff was supplemented in the Summer Quarter by John Paul Goode, S.B., who gave a course in Elementary Meteorology and a field and laboratory course; by Russell D. George, A.M., who gave a course in Elementary Mineralogy and Petrology; by Fred Harvey Hall Calhoun, who conducted a field course in the First Term of the Summer Quarter; and by Nevin Melancthon Fenneman, who conducted a field course in the Second Term. The appointees to Fellowships for this year were Fred Harvey Hall Calhoun, S.B.; Claude Ellsworth Siebenthal, A.M.; Russell D. George, A.M.; and Nevin Melancthon Fenneman, A.M. FIELD WORK IN GEOLOGY A limited amount of field work forms a part of the courses in Geology given at the University during the Autumn, Spring, and Summer Quarters. In addition to this local field work, more extended and systematic courses in field work are provided for those who desire to undertake it. These courses, in places more or less distant from Chicago, are given dming the Summer Quarter. The actual work in the field is carried on through foxir, or some multiple of four, weeks. For each four weeks' field work, two weeks are allowed for the preparation of a report on the area studied. The field courses are grouped in three classes, known as the first, second, and third courses respectively. The first course, taken preferably before the study of Geology has been pursued more than one year, is the detailed study of some selected region presenting a considerable variety of physiographic and geologic phenomena. The course is intended ( 1 ) for those who are prepar- ing to teach Physical Geography and Geology in secondary schools; (2) as an introduction to field work for those who contemplate Geology as a profession; and (3) for the general student 446 The President's Report who is sufficiently interested in Geology to undertake the severe work which the course demands. The fields selected for this course vary from year to year. Students frequently take two " first com-ses" in different fields. The first courses have been given ( 1 ) in the vicinity of Devil's Lake and the Dalles of the Wisconsin; (2) in the vicinity of Green Lake, Wisconsin; (3) in the upper Illinois valley; and (4) in the Mississippi valley, between the mouth of the Wisconsin river and Muscatine, Iowa. The second course, which is most advantageously undertaken after two years of work in Geology, has often been in a field where the study is less detailed, but where a wide range of phenomena are to be seen. This course has been given in the Yellowstone Park; in the vicinity of the Grand Canon of the Colorado in northern Arizona; in the mountains of the northwest (Montana and Washington); in the mountains of Utah; and in Wyoming. The course is intended for more advanced students of the classes specified in the preceding paragraph, and is frequently taken twice, in different regions, by the same student. Written reports on the area studied constitute a part of the work. The third course is largely individual work, and is undertaken after the student has advanced sufficiently to undertake independent or semi-independent work. It consists of the detailed, professional study of some area or problem, and is intended for those who take up geologic work in a professional way. Less advanced students may accompany those who are taking the third course, and for such students the course may count as a first or second course. A field course was first given in 1894. The field was the vicinity of Devil's Lake and the Dalles, Wisconsin, where problems of Stratigraphy, Glacial Geology, and Physiography are well illustrated. The number of students was nine. In 1895 the field was the upper Illinois valley, where the general problems were the same, though more largely stratigraphic. The number of students was thirteen. In 1896 two areas were studied by the same class, viz.: the region about Green Lake, Wisconsin, and that at Devil's Lake. The number of students was thirteen. In 1897 the field was the same as in 1894, and the number of students ten. All courses given to classes up to this time were what are here classed as first courses. At the same time, students of advanced standing did individual work in various regions. In 1898 two classes were in the field, one at Devil's Lake, Wisconsin, and the other in the Yellowstone Park. The number of students in the two courses was thirteen. In 1899 three parties were organized, the first course being given twice, once in the earlier and once in the later part of the summer, in Wisconsin. The second course was given in the region of the Grand Canon of the Colorado. The number of students in the field in 1899 was thirty-eight. In 1900 thi-ee classes were in the field, two first courses, as before, being given in Wisconsin, and a second course in the moun- tains of Montana and Washington. The number of registrations for this year was twenty-nine. In 1901 the first course was given but once, the field being in the Mississippi valley. Four smaller parties of advanced students were in the western mountains, one in Montana, one in Washington, one in Utah, and one in New Mexico. These courses were third courses for some students, and second and first courses for others. The total number of students taking field courses during this year was nineteen. In 1902 the first course was given twice, once in Wis- consin and once in the Mississippi valley. Three parties of advanced students were in the western moimtains — one in Utah, one in Wyoming, and one in Montana. The number of students taking field courses was thirty-one, nine of whom were in the field eight weeks, and five twelve weeks. In 1902 there was, in addition to the above, a field course in Geography from the School of Education. Their work was partly in northern Illinois, partly in eastern Wisconsin, and partly about Marquette, Mich. The number of students taking this course was ten. Kespectfully submitted, Thomas C. Chambeelin. THE HULL BOTANICAL LABORATORY To the President of the University : Sir: I submit herewith a sketch of the history of the Department of Botany up to June 30, 1902. The Department of Botany was not definitely organized until 1896, although some instruction had been given before that date. In 1894 a laboratory was opened in a single room in Kent Chemical Laboratory, in charge of one instructor. In 1895 this laboratory was trans- ferred to two improvised rooms in Walker Musetmi, where it remained for two years. In the autumn of 1896 the Department of Botany was organized for the first time with a Professor in charge, the teaching staff consisting of thi'ee instructors: a Professor, an Assistant, and a Laboratory Assistant. In 1897 Hull Botanical Laboratory was completed and occupied, which provided ten rooms for general laboratory work, sixteen rooms for private research, lecture- rooms, and a roof conservatory. At this time the staff of instruction was increased to six, comprising a Professor, an Associate, an Assistant, and three Laboratory Assistants. At present the staff of instruction consists of two Professors, an Assistant Professor, two Instructors, an Associate, and two Assistants; in addition to which the Fellows of the Department, usually three or four in number, act as laboratory assistants; the available instructors in the Depart- ment, therefore, niunber eleven or twelve. At first the work of instruction and of research dealt almost exclusively with Morphology, and the first equipment had this subject in view. Nothing fiurther was attempted until the more ample accommodations of the new building permitted some expansion. In 1897, therefore, Cytology was more definitely developed as a subject distinct from Morphology, and was announced for instruction and research. At the same time, the relatively new field of Ecology was taken up and definite courses organized. This subject was almost imtouched at that time in America, and this Laboratory happened to be the first in the country to recognize it in definite courses of study, and has remained one of the most influential centers for its develop- ment. In 1898 the subject of Plant Physiology was introduced with a Professor in charge ; but for a time only opportunities for instruction were offered, and not imtil 1902 were opportunities for research provided. At the present time, therefore, undergraduate and graduate courses are conducted in Morphology, Cytology, Ecology, and Physiology. Arrangement has been made for beginning instruction in Experimental Morphology in the Spring Quarter of 1903. Private research work in this subject has been carried on in the Department for some time. The Department is also concerned in botanical work outside of the Laboratory. A member of the staff has charge of the work in Botany each svunmer at the Marine Biological Laboratory at Wood's Holl; and other members of the staff are engaged during the summer either at Wood's Holl or at the Biological Laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor. In addition to these, field parties for the study of Physiographic Ecology, ranging in number from ten to twenty, have worked in various regions of the United States, among which may be mentioned the northern islands of Lake Michigan, the southern shore of Lake Superior, the moimtains of Tennessee, the Gulf coast, the Rocky Moimtain region of Montana, and the Mount Katahdin region of Maine. Diuing the history of the Laboratory forty-one formal papers embodying the results of research have been published under the title " Contributions from the Hull Botanical Labora- tory." In addition to these there have been published numerous papers in the regular joirmals, 447 448 The President's Report as well as books, which will be found enumerated in the Bibliography of the Department. Of the forty-one "Contributions" from the Laboratory twenty-three are morphological, four are cytological, three are morphological and cytological, six are ecological, and five are physiological. The preponderance in morphological output results from the fact that the instruction and equip- ment of the Laboratory were directed toward this work alone for a considerable time, the other subjects being of comparatively recent development. In this morphological work the first problems attacked were those connected with the seed-plants, the general purpose being an investigation of the phenomena of sexual reproduction and the accompanying structures, and to obtain some light upon the phylogeny of the group. A wide range of plants has been investi- gated by various members of the staff and students of the Department, and the results obtained have been organized in two volumes: one dealing with the Special Morphology of the Gymno- sperms, and the other with the Special Morphology of the Angiosperms; the former pub- lished January, 1901; the latter to appear in January, 1903. Special mention is made of these voliunes as they organize in a general way the principal output of the research work of the Department during the first six years of its existence. The same kind of research among the lower groups of plants has also been undertaken, and each group has had its investigators who have made contributions to the general problems of plant Morphology. In addition to these morphological problems which are being investigated by the Depart- ment, research work is now dealing with such general problems as the cytological features of fertihzation and spore-production, the causes that determine changes in form and structure, and the essential factors of plant distribution. In addition to the four distinct departments of botanical work now provided for in the way of instruction and research, there remain other great fields of botanical activity that need development by the University before it can be said to represent fairly the status of the science. Taxonomy or Classification, which is the oldest phase of Botany, is entirely imrepresented both in instruction and in facilities for research. The large fields of Anatomy, Pathology, and Paleobotany are also unprovided for, and all demand attention. In addition to the work of instruction and research the Department has taken a strong interest in the work in Botany in secondary and grade schools. This interest has taken the form of the preparation of texts for secondary schools and giving instruction to special classes for teachers. The Department has been successful in placing a considerable number of its advanced students and graduates in botanical positions, as is shown by the following list: Bray, W. L., Professor of Botany, University of Texas, Austin, Tex. Caldwell, O. W., Professor of Botany, State Normal School, Charleston, 111. Conrad, A. H., formerly Instructor in Botany, High School, West Superior, Wis.; English High and Normal School, Chicago. Coulter, J. G., formerly Instructor in Botany, Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y.; Professor of Botany, Government Normal School, Manila, P. I. Coulter, S. M., Instructor in Botany, Shaw School of Botany, St. Louis, Mo. Holtzman, C. L., Instructor in Botany, Penn College, Oskaloosa, la. Lawson, A. A., Assistant in Botacy, Leland Stanford Junior University, Calif. Lawson, H. W. Assistant in Botany, United States Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C. Lee, Grace, Instructor in Botany, High School, Pueblo, Colo. Livingston, B. E., Assistant in Botany, University of Chicago. Lyon, Florence M., formerly Instructor in Botany, Smith College, Northampton, Mass.; Associate in Botany, University of Chicago. McCallum, W. B., formerly Instructor in Biology, Armour Institute, Chicago. The Hull Botanical Laboeatoey 449 Merrell, W. D., Instructor in Botany, University of Rochester, N. Y. Moore, A. C, Professor of Botany, University of South Carolina, Columbia, S. C Nelson, N. L. T., Instructor in Botany, High and Normal School, St. Louis, Mo. Overton, J. B., Professor of Botany, Illinois College, Jacksonville, 111. Roberts, H. F., formerly Instructor in Botany, Washington University, St. Louis, Mo. Smith, R. W., Professor of Botany, MacMaster University, Toronto, Can. Stevens, P. L., formerly Assistant Sanitary Survey, Chicago; Professor of Botany, College of Agri- culture and Mechanic Arts, Raleigh, N. C. Transeau, E. N., formerly Instructor in Botany, High School, Colorado Springs, Colo. Webb, J. B., formerly Instructor in Biology, Morgan Park Academy, Chicago. Whitford, H. N., formerly Instructor in Biology, Armour Institute, Chicago; Assistant in Botany, Uni- versity of Chicago. In addition to the work of instruction and research the Department has charge of a monthly journal entitled the Botanical Gazette, averaging eighty pages. This journal was established as a private enterprise by the Head of the Department in 1875. In 1882 the present professor of Plant Physiology became the junior editor, and the journal has continued under this editorship ever since, in 1896 becoming one of the publications of the University. Through 1895 one volume was published each year; since that time two annual volumes have been issued, that for the latter half of 1902 being Vol. XXXIV. Respectfully submitted, John M. Codlteb. THE HULL PHYSIOLOGICAL LABOEATORY To the President of the University : Sir : I submit herewith a sketch of the history of the Department of Physiology from 1892 to June 30, 1902. As far as the first five years are concerned, this is a repetition of the report made five years ago: "During the first year of the University the Physiological Laboratory was located in an apartment house on Lexington avenue and Fifty-fifth street. Later on, it occupied one, and ultimately two, rooms in the Eyerson Physical Laboratory. On July 1, 1897, it moved into its permanent quarters. " The Laboratory has tried to develop those lines of research work from which the best results may be expected in the next years. We have made it a special task systematically to substitute Comparative Physiology for the prevailing Vertebrate Physiology. Thus far the Laboratory has given its time chiefly to the building up of the Comparative Physiology of the Central Nervous System. The result of this work has recently been put together in book form. " A second line of work pursued in the Laboratory has been Physiological Morphology. Among the contributions of the Laboratory to this new branch of Physiology the following may be mentioned: (1) the observation that lack of oxygen and certain poisons liquefy solid cell elements, for instance, the membrane; this accounts for sudden death under these conditions; (2) experiments determining the cause of the hereditary marking in embryos; (3) experiments on the artificial production of twins; (4) experiments on the influence of light on the production of certain organs in animals; (5) experiments on the role of water in growth; (6) experiments on the segmentation of the nucleus without the segmentation of protoplasm; (7) further experiments on heteromorphosis and the transformation of tissues, etc. "In the field of animal irritability the latest addition has been the discovery of animal tropisms. The work done in the Hull Laboratory includes experiments on the artificial trans- formation of positively heliotropic animals into negatively heliotropic animals, and vice versa, and a series of publications on galvanotropism. The latter work resulted in a new theory of galvanotropio effects and the observation that in the central nervous system of many forms there exists a simple relation between the orientation of elements and the direction of movement produced by their activity. "The experiments on galvanotropism lead to the mention of that new development in Physiology which will be of great importance in years to come; namely, the application of Physical Chemistry. In the experiments on galvanotropism the Laboratory tried to prove that the physiological effects of a galvanic current are in reality due to chemical effects of the ions set free at the limit of two electrolytes. In connection with this, it was possible to show that the apparent physiological effects of electric waves are not due to the oscillatory character of the discharge, but to the rapid disappearance of the potential. The fact that the electric current acts as a universal stimulus led to the idea that ions may be of specific importance for phenomena of contractility as well as for sensations. With this in view, a series of investiga- tions on specific ion effects was undertaken." Since the publication of the previous statement, the main new departures in our work have occurred in the following direction : First, work on artificial parthenogenesis has been successfully undertaken. In every form of echinoderms and annelids on which such experiments have been tried we were able to pro- 450 The Hull Physiological Laboeatory 451 duce living larvae from the unfertilized egg, by chemical or physical means. Thus it has been possible to deprive one of the most mysterious of the vital phenomena of its mysticism. A second field which the Laboratory has opened in that time is the field of anti-toxic effects of ions. It has been shown that any solution of one electrolyte alone, at a certain con- centration, is poisonous, but this solution can be rendered harmless through the addition of only a trace of another electrolyte with a bivalent kation. A third line of work which has been taken up is that of the reversibility of the phenomena of development. It has generally been assumed that the phenomena of development occur only in one direction, inasmuch as an animal develops from a simple stage to a more complicated stage. It was possible to show that in some animals this process can be reversed by physical agencies, and that it is possible to cause certain adult animals, by physical agencies, to return to an undifferentiated embryonic stage, and afterwards to produce at will from this undiffer- entiated material any desired organ of this form. This, incidentally, may explain the pheno- mena of regeneration, inasmuch as it is possible that, in cases of regeneration, through the wound that causes regeneration, the injured cells are caused to return to an embryonic condition. Respectfully submitted, Jacques Loeb. THE BACTERIOLOGICAL LABORATORY To the President of the University : Sir : I submit herewith a sketch of the history of the work in Bacteriology from 1895 to June 30, 1902. Work in Bacteriology at the University was begun in October, 1895. From that date until July, 1897, the work was carried on in Kent Chemical Laboratory in a basement room placed at the disposal of the Department through the courtesy of Professor Nef . The conditions for work were disadvantageous and the equipment was not extensive, so that little else was attempted than the elementary instruction of a limited number of students. The erection of the Hull Biological Laboratories, through the munificence of Miss Helen Culver, made it possible to transfer the work in the summer of 1897 to more suitable and commodious quarters. The Bacteriological Laboratory was first installed in four rooms on the foiuth floor of the Hull Zoological Laboratory, and, owing to the increase in the number of students, several additional rooms on the same floor were afterwards assigned to the work. In 1901 the inauguration of the first two years' work in Medicine made the acquisition of further space necessary, and one laboratory on the third floor and one on the second floor were generously tendered for the emergency by the Department of Zoology. These laboratories were fully equipped in the summer of 1901, and have since been used for the work in Bacteriology and Embryology. The limited space available makes necessary the repetition of courses, and in other ways cramps the work materially. It is hoped that this serious difficulty will be removed by the construction of new buildings for the medical work. In the spring of 1899 the Laboratory undertook a comprehensive investigation of the Illinois Eiver and its tributaries in behalf of the Chicago Sanitary District. The results of this work are now in press and will soon be published. The full list of the publications from the Laboratory appears in another Volume of this Report. The following persons have held Fellowships in Bacteriology: 1897-1900— H. E. Davies; Interne, St. Luke's Hospital, Chicago. 1900-1901— E. E. Irons; Assistant in Bacteriology, University of Chicago. 1901-1902 — Mary Hefiferan; Curator of the Bacteriological Museum, University of Chicago. Respectfully submitted, Edwin O. Joedan. 452 THE KENT CHEMICAL LABORATORY To the President of the University: Sir : I submit herewith a sketch of the history of the Department of Chemistry from 1892 to Jime 30, 1902. THE LABORATORY During the period October 14, 1892, to January 1, 1894, the Department of Chemistry was established in temporary quarters on the southwest corner of Fifty-fifth street and Lexington avenue. The laboratories, lecture- and store-rooms were distributed in three large rooms on the first floor, and the library was in a room on the fourth floor. On January 1, 1894, the Depart- ment moved into its present quarters, the Kent Chemical Laboratory. At the opening of the Laboratory on January 1, the donor, the late Mr. Sidney Kent, formally presented the Labora- tory to the University, and expressed the hope " that the standard of education will be such as to command the respect, not only of this country, but of the civilized world." In accepting the gift from Mr. Kent on behalf of the University, the President of the University explained how the donation of the Laboratory had formed an important turning-point in the early development of the University by being the first response to the appeal for the support of the citizens of Chicago for the new undertaking of establishing a university of high standards in their very midst. Mr. Kent, as the President pointed out, had also set the highest standard for all future laboratories of the University — a statement the force of which is most appreciated now, eight years after it was made. An address by Professor Nef on " Important Factors in the Develop- ment of a Kesearch Laboratory" — a strong plea for the fostering of the spirit of pure scientific research in this country — and a meeting of fifty-eight teachers of chemistry, representing forty- one institutions, closed the dedicatory exercises of the first day. On January 2, the formal address in connection with the opening of the Kent Chemical Laboratory was delivered at the Winter Convocation by Dr. Ira Eemsen, Professor of Chemistry in, and now President of, Johns Hopkins University; the address on "The Chemical Laboratory" discussed most ably the questions how chemical laboratories came to be established in universities, what an important part they have played in the advancing of knowledge, and what the possibilities of the chemical laboratory of a university in this country would be. The building cost $215,000, the original equipment $20,000 ; the present equipment in chemicals and apparatus is valued at $30,000. In the course of nine years the work of the Department has developed until now all the laboratory space has been occupied. The following is, in the main, the present distribution of laboratory space: two large laboratories for General Chemistry, for 190 students; one large laboratory for Qualitative Analysis and General Organic Chemistry, for 110 students; one large laboratory for Quantitative Analysis, for 30 to 40 students; one large laboratory for Eesearch Work, for 11 to 22 students; seven smaller laboratories for Preparation Work, Physical Chemistry, Furnace Work, Ga s Analysis, Spectrum Analysis, Combustions, etc. ; five private laboratories for the staff ; two balance-rooms, two store-rooms, and a number of storage'rooms; a large library room. Some of the laboratories, notably those for General Chemistry, Quantitative Analysis, and Preparation Work, have already occasionally been crowded to the limit. As the Department is growing (see Tables I and II), provision must be made in the near future for more space and facilities, either by means of a second laboratory, or by moving the undergraduate work into a separate building. The Chemical Library, which at the opening of the University in 1892 contained 900 vol- umes, had a total of 1,891 volumes on April 1, 1902. 453 454 The President's Report THE STAFF The staff of instructors originally included one Professor (the Head of the Department), two Assistant Professors, a Research Assistant, and two Docents. It now comprises one Profes- sor (the Head of the Department), two Associate Professors, three Instructors (one acting as a Research Assistant), a Laboratory Inspector of the rank of Instructor, and four Assistants. Provision is also made for a considerable number of student assistants. The following have been or are members of the staff of the Department : the names are arranged according to rank diu'ing the tenure of office, and the present rank or occupation is given. John Ulric Nef, Ph.D. (University of Munich), Professor of Chemistry, and Head of the Department, 1892-. Henry Newland Stokes, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins University), Assistant Professor of General Chemistry, 1892-93; resigned in 1893; chemist of the United States Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Edward F. Schneider, Ph.D. (University of Freiburg i. B.), Assistant Professor of Inorganic Chemistry, 1892-94. Alexander Smith, Ph.B. (University of Munich),Associate Professor of General Chemistry, 1894-. Felix Lengfeld, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins University), Assistant Professor of Inorganic Chemistry, 1892- 1901: resigned in 1901; chemist, San Francisco, Calif. Julius Stieglitz, Ph.D. (University of Berlin), Associate Professor of Chemistry, 1892-. Massuo Ikuta, Ph.D. (University of Erlangen), Instructor in Chemistry, 1892-99; resigned in 1899; chemist, Tokio, Japan. John C. Hessler, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Instructor in Chemistry, 1899-. Herbert N. McCoy, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Instructor in Chemistry, 1901-. Lauder W. Jones, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Instructor in Chemistry, 1897-. James A. Lyman, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins University), Decent, 1892-93; Instructor in Chemistry, Port- land Academy, Portland, Ore. Richard S. Curtiss, Ph.D. (University of Wilrzburg), Decent, 1893-97; Professor of Chemistry, Union College, Schenectady, N. Y. Adolph Bernhard, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Laboratory Assistant, 1894-97; Research Assistant, 1899-1900; Stone Creek, Ohio. Bernard C. Hesse, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Lecture Assistant, 1896-97; expert chemical adviser Badische Anilin- und Soda-Fabrik, New York. James B. Garner, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Lecture Assistant, 1896-98; Professor of Chemistry, Wabash College, Crawfordsville, Ind. James H. Ransom, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Lecture Assistant, 1898-1900; Associate Professor of Chemistry, Purdue University, La Fayette, Ind. Henry C. Biddle, Ph.D. (University of Chicago), Lecture Assistant, 1900-1901; Instructor in Chemis- try, University of California, Berkeley, Calif. Willis B. Holmes, Ph.D. (Harvard University), Research Assistant, 1900-. Ira H. Derby, MS. (Harvard University), Research Assistant, 1901-1902; Assistant in Analytical Chemistry, 1902-. Roy H. Brownlee, A.B. (Monmouth College), Lecture Assistant, 1901-. Richard B. Earle, Sc.D. (Harvard University), Research Assistant, 1902-. THE INSTRUCTION GROWTH OF THE DEPARTMENT The growth of the Department is shown by the following table which gives (1) the total registration in Chemistry for each year (for the four Quarters) ; (2) the total registration in the Colleges and Graduate Schools of the University for the same periods, and (3) the percentage of the whole formed by the Chemistry registration. The Kent Chemical Laboeatoey 455 TABLE I 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1895-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-1902 Chemistry 134' 4,679' 218' 6,404' 438 9,315 303 12,374 487 12,617 540 15,014 548 16,411 615 16,482 844 17,780 8272 19,6953 1,278* 21,739^ Per cent, in Chemistry 2.9 3.4 4.7 2.4 3.9 3.6 3.3 3.8 4.7 4.2 5.9 The following diagram shows graphically the data^ given in the table: DIAGEAM I n — — r~ r" ~ — ~ ~ ~ ~* ' ~~ ■~~ ~" ■"^ "* ■" ~ — f ^ ■" 27.000 24,000 21.000 18.000 15,000 12.000 9,000 6,000 3,000 1.500 90b / / ■~ ~H — / / i / -- / , ' ■' •^ ._ -- _, -" -' / " _, -' / ^ ._ -■3 /- ' / V • / N V / /.- -■ ' r> -■ ^ ... 1892-93 1893-a4 180-t-9D 1803-90 1896-97 1897-98 1808-99 1899-00 — Total Chemistry registration, four Quarters, excluding medical students; scale of 50 to the line. -- Total University registration, four Quarters, e.'icludinCT professional Bchoolsj scale of 1,500 to tlio lino. 1900-01 1001-02 .— Total CbemiBtry, including medical students. —- — — Total University, including professional schools. The following table and diagram show the total and the relative growth of Chemistry for the ordinary school year by giving (1) the total registration in Chemistry for each year, exclu- sive of Summer Quarters; (2) the total registration in the Colleges and Graduate Schools of the University for the same periods; and (3) the percentage of the whole in Chemistry: TABLE II 1892-93 1893-94 1894-9.5 1895-96 1896-97 1897-9S 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-1902 134 4,679 218 6,404 359 7,740 230 9,812 369 9,830 425 11,006 371 12,111 417 11,631 569 12,752 527 « 13,472' 9788 The University 15,5169 Per cent, in Chemistry 2.9 3.4 4.7 2.3 3.7 3.9 3.1 3,6 4.5 3.9 6.3 1 No Summer Quarter sessions were held. 2 Kxclusive of Medical students. 3 Exclusive of Medical, Divinity, and Education stu- dents. * Including Medical students. 6 Including the professional schools. 6 Exclusive of Medical students, eighty-six college regis- trations for two half-Major courses in General Organic Chemistry were counted as only forty-three registrations (Majors) in Chemistry. 7 Including Medical students. * Exclusive of the professional schools. 9 Including the professional schools. 456 The President's Repoet The following diagram shows graphically the results given in the table: DIAGRAM II ^* / / 18,000 15.000 12,000 9,000 6.000 2,000 1,000 / / -. y y _-J L. -■ -- X — __ -- -■■ lL ^ - — ■- ~ ~" ' — y ,_ ~~ .,^ -■ "■■ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ^ ^ -- -^-J A 200 ,- ^ ■' >■ — L _ L _ U u u _ J L L _ _^ _ _ _ _ lS'J2-03 1303-94 1894-95 1895-90 1890-97 1897-9S 1S9S-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 ^^~~^ Total Chemistry registration, four Quarters, excluding medical students; scale of 50 to tlie line. """■" Total University registration, four Quarters, excluding professional schools; scale of 1,500 to the lloow • "*""""' Total Chemistry, including medical students. '"* Total University, including professional schools. jfxcfoisi'ue oftft6 Sitminpr QitartcTS_ Comparing the average percentage of registrations in Chemistry for the first five years (3.4) with the average percentage (exclusive of registrations of Medical students in 1901-1902) for the last five years (3.8), it is obvious that the Department has grown on the average at a one-tenth faster rate than the University as a whole, great as the latter's growth has been. CLASSES OE STUDENTS The following table shows what classes of students have been taking the work in Chemis- try and gives the number of registrations for each year, exclusive of the Summer Quarters, (1) by Graduate students, (2) by Senior College students, (3) by Junior College students, and (4) by Unclassified students : TABLE III 1901-02 Graduate Students Senior College Junior College Unclassified 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 118 130 168 102 196 217 177 184 229 8 14 40 33 60 77 66 72 101 8 42 102 67 81 104 95 111 182 30 49 28 32 27 33 50 57 231 154 187 48 The most noteworthy result shown by the table, besides the very large increase in the numbers of College students, is that Graduate students have so far formed the most numerous single body of students in the Department and have even outnumbered the combined registra- tions of College students until 1900-1901. It is thought that the very large number of Graduate students will continue to exert their excellent influence on the tone of the work in the Depart- ment. At the same time, it is considered a most desirable development that the Department should reach as many students at as early an age as possible, and thus have larger opportunities for the selection and development of those showing the greatest ability in its own particular work. These two tendencies, which it is desired to foster, without allowing them to become extreme, The Kent Chemical Laboeatoky 457 may co-exist readily, as there are numbers of graduates taking the undergraduate courses and, in recent years, appreciable numbers of our undergraduates who have specialized sufficiently in Chemistry to be admitted to graduate courses. The following table for three recent years, chosen at random, shows that neither tendency is likely to become extreme. It gives (1) the number and percentage of graduates in undergraduate courses, and (2) the number and per- centage of undergraduates in gi-aduate courses in 1897-98, 1899-1900, and 1900-1901 : TABLE IV 1897-1898 1899-1900 1900-1901 Number Per Cent. Number Per Cent. Number Per Cent. Graduates in undergraduate courses Undergraduates in graduate courses 58 12 23 7.5 82 25 14 15 48 24 13.5 12 The following statement, for two years chosen at random, shows that the Department has relatively a much larger proportion of Graduate student registrations than the University at large, and relatively a smaller proportion of Junior College students. The table gives percent- ages of registrations of the various classes for the whole University and for the Department of Chemistry for 1897-98 and 1901-2 for the Autumn, Winter, and Spring Quarters: TABLE V 1897-1898 1901-1902 Grad. Sen. Jun. UnclasE. Grad. Sen. Jun. Unclass. The University Chemistry 27 51.1 21.3 18.1 39.1 24.5 12.6 6.3 22.6 37.3 23 24.8 46.7 30.1 7.5 7 5 These proportions are largely due to the fact that Chemistry is required of only a small percentage (10 to 12) of the students in the Junior College. THE MAIN BRANCHES OF CHEMICAL INSTEUOTION The following table represents the total and the relative growth of the main branches of chemical instruction given at the University; the total registrations are given for the Autumn, Winter, and Spring Quarters in General Inorganic Chemistry, Analytical Chemistry, Organic Chemistry (General and Special), and " Other Courses," which include, particularly, Physical Chemistry, Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, and all the courses in Research: TABLE VI 1892-93 1893-94 1891-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-021011 General Chemistry 28 30 38 38 69 55 62 30 120 93 67 74 85 58 58 38 118 111 ■ 73 67 167 104 74 83 127 102 71 69 148 126 81 63 249 143 97 78 175"' 206 11912 56 319" Analytical Chemistry Organic Chemistry 206 163 '2 13 Physical Chemistry and other courses 56 10 Exclusive of required medical work. 11 Including medical students. 12 Two registrations of College students for two half- Major courses in General Organic Chemistry forming one course counted as one. 13 There were also one hundred and forty-five registra- tions in Toxicology not included in the above total. 458 The President's Eepoet THE UNDEEGEADUATE WORK AND THE UNDEEGEADUATE STUDENTS Data concerning the total registration of Undergraduate students and also concerning their attendance in graduate classes have been given above in Tables III-V. The courses intended primarily for Junior and Senior College students are taken largely also by Graduate students. The following table represents, therefore, the amount of undergraduate work done by the Department; it includes the registrations for each year, excepting the summer Quarters, (1) in General Inorganic and General Organic Chemistry (Junior College coiirses), and (2) in the undergraduate courses in Analytical Chemistry (Senior College courses): TABLE VII 1892-93 1893-91 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 General Inorg. Chemistry . . General Organic Chemistry Undergrad. Anal. Chemistry 28 ir. 69 '55 120 '76 85 ■56 118 ■59 167 '86 127 '68 148 '83 249 167 175 >* 4314 16 140 31915 87U16 140 Total 58 124 190 135 177 253 195 231 356 358" 546 '5 Diagram III illustrates the rapid growth of this class of work and shows what a tax its pressure must make on the resources of the Department, especially in the way of instruction. DIAGRAM III n ~ ~1 - /■ 4&0 ,-•' / ^ ""■ __ — -. ,, _ .. .- -■ " ' ^ .- ■^ ~~ — ::'- •^ "' L_ _J L- 18fl2-il3 1893^94 1894-^95 ■ Undergraduate work in Chemistry. - Graduate work in Ctieniistry. 1893-96 1901-02 — Undergraduate work in Chemistry, including medical work. Exctitsivc of Ihe Sumnicv QiucrterM The following students received Senior College Scholarships for excellence in work in Chemistry in the Junior Colleges; their present occupation, as far as known, is given: 1895 — Joseph Friedman, physician. 1896 — Robert Elliot Graves, physician. 1897— Max Darwin Slimmer, Ph.D. in Chemistry, University of Berlin, 1902. 1898 — Roberta I. Brotherton, teacher of science. 1899 — John P. Ritchie, student of medicine. 1900— William Luther Goble, teacher of science. 1901 — Oscar O. Hamilton, teacher of science. 1902 — George Edmeston Fahr, Senior College student. The following students received Graduate Scholarships for excellence of work in Chemistry in the Senior Colleges : 1897 — Hyman E. Goldberg, inventor. 1899 — Mary Bockes Pardee, teacher of science. 1* Excluding medical work. 15 Including medical work. isSeenote (12), p. 457, The Kent Chemical Laboeatory 459 1900— Howard P. Kirtley, graduate student. 1901 — Kellogg Speed, medical student. 1902 — Oscar O. Hamilton, teacher of science. The following students graduated with Honors in Chemistry: 1897 — Maurice J. Rubel, physician. 1899 — William Hayden Jackson, business man. 1899 — Mary Bockes Pardee, teacher of science. 1899 — Hugh J. Polkey, physician. 1901 — Kellogg Speed, medical student. 1902— Grace Bartlett Lincoln, teacher of science. 1902— Oscar O. Hamilton, teacher of science. THE GEADUATE WOEK AND THE GEADUATE STUDENTS The Department of Chemistry has always been able to attract large numbers of Graduate students, and as seen from Table III, which gives the registrations for the Autumn, Winter, and Spring Quarters, they have always formed, not only the most important, but also the most numerous single class of the student body in the Department. As seen from Table V, they also form a much larger proportion of the whole constituency of the Department than of the University as a whole. While this arises, as explained before, partly from the fact that Chemistry is a required study for an inconsiderable proportion only of the largest class of students on the campus, the Junior College students, and the amount of elective work of these students is very small, the hold of the Department on Graduate students is shown directly by the growth in the numbers of registrations of such students; the number in 1901-2 (231) is twice as large as in 1892-93 (118), when Graduate students formed 90 per cent, of the enrolment in the Department, and the average number for the last five years (208) is about 40 per cent, larger than the average number in the first five years (143). The Department, as will be explained below, also reaches a very considerable number of Graduate students in the Summer Quarters, when practically the same courses as in any other Quarter are given. The total annual graduate registrations, including those of the Summer Quarters, are as follows: TABLE VIII 1892-93 1893-9i 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-CO 1900-01 1901-02 Graduate registrations 118" 130" 207 158 277 289 293 316 388 410 The amount of graduate work done (in graduate courses), exclusive of that of the Summer Quarters, is shown in the following table of total registrations in graduate courses: TABLE IX 1892-93 1893-94 1894-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Graduate course registrations 76 92 151 104 184 161 158 167 197 189 Diagram III (p. 458), illustrates these results and shows the relation of the graduate work to the undergraduate work in the Department; whereas during the first five years the graduate " No summer session was held. 460 The President's Repokt work formed but little less than half of the total, now, in spite of the very great increase in undergraduate work, owing to its own growth, it still forms 36 per cent, of the total work. The danger of injury to the graduate work by the rapid increase in undergraduate work must be always borne in mind. It lies chiefly in the danger of instructors' time and strength being diverted from graduate work by the growing and constant pressure of undergraduate instruction. It can really be averted only by keeping the increase in staff somewhat in advance of the increase in undergraduates; but the college administrations are, perhaps naturally, rather reluctant to follow such a policy. How grave the danger is in our Department of Chemistry is well shown by the rapidly diverging curves in the last diagram. But the graduate instruction must not only be preserved intact; it must be made to expand and there is special need at present for such expansion by providing larger facilities for instruc- tion and work in Physical Chemistry. Most of the members of the Department have been particularly interested in this important and most modern branch of Chemistry, and have been among the earliest instructors in the country to use its results and methods in their research and class-room work. The elements of Physical Chemistry have always formed a large part of the instruction in General Chemistry and in Analytical Chemistry, and they have been a very important factor in making these courses both efficient and attractive for the student mind. Graduate courses comprising fom- half-Majors, including laboratory work, have been given annually since 1893 and have always been largely attended, and five or six of the investigations of the Department have been along the lines of strictly physical-chemical work. But there is urgent need and demand for greater opportunties for advanced and research work in this sub- ject. The increasing pressure of the other fundamental courses on the instructors' time and the exceptional importance of the subject require that the undivided attention of a specialist be now given to Physical Chemistry in our Department. It is hoped that our graduate work will be encoiu-aged to made a rapid advance in this branch in the immediate future. Special attention will be given below to the research work of the Department and the men that have been engaged in it. The follovping students have taken the Master's degree in Chemistry at the University: 1897 — Harriet Stone, S.B., University of Chicago. Thesis: "The Constitution and Synthesis of Uric Acid." Master of Science. Instructor in Chemistry and Physics, Forest Park University, St. Louis, Mo. 1899 — Warren C. Hawthorne, A.B., University of North Dakota. Thesis: " Hydrogen Peroxide, Ozone, and Processes of Oxidation." Master of Science. Instructor in Chemistry and Physics, Young Men's Christian Association, Chicago, 111. The following list gives the names, the academic record, and the present occupations of the Fellows in Chemistry: 1892-93— John L. Bridge, B.S., Wesleyan University, 1888; Ph.D., Clark University, 1893. Teacher of Science, High School, Waterbury, Conn. 1892-94— Warren Rufus Smith, A.B., Bowdoin College, 1890; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1894. Instructor in Science, New Bedford High School; Assistant Professor of Chemistry, Lewis Institute, Chicago, 111. 1893-94— Adolph Bernhard, A.B., Johns Hopkins University, 1889; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1894. Assistant, ibid., 1894-97 and 1899-1900; Instructor in Chemistry, University of Texas, 1897-98. 1893-96— Bernard C. Hesse, S.B., University of Michigan, 1892; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1896. Assistant, ibid., 1896-97; Expert Chemical Adviser, Badische Anilin- und Soda-Fabrik, New York. 1893-95— Samuel E. Swartz, A.B., Denison University, 1879; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1896. Professor of Chemistry, Shurtlefl College, Upper Alton, 111.; Principal, Broadus Classical and Scientific Institute, Clarksburg, W. Va. The Kent Chemical Laboeatoky 461 1893-94 — Robert W. Wood (Honorary Fellow), A.B., Harvard University, 1891. Instructor and Assistant Professor of Physics, University of Wisconsin; Professor of Experimental Physics, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. 1894-96— Frank Burnett Dains, Ph.B., Wesleyan University, 1890; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1896. Assistant Professor of Chemistry, Northwestern Medical School, Chicago, 111.; Professor of Chemistry, Washburne College, Topeka, Kan. 1894-97— Nellie E. Goldthwaite (Lamson Fellow),!^ B.S., University of Michigan, 1894. Professor of Chemistry, Mount Holyoke College, South Hadley, Mass. 1895-96- James Bert Garner, S.B., Wabash College, 1893; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1897. Assistant, ibid., 1896-97; Assistant Professor of Chemistry, Bradley Polytechnic Institute, Peoria, 111., Professor of Chemistry, Wabash College, Crawfordsville, Ind. 1895-97— Lauder W. Jones. A.B., Williams College, 1892; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1897. Assistant, Associate, and Instructor in Chemistry, ibid., 1897-. 1896-98— Herbert Newby McCoy, S.B., Purdue University, 1892; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1898. Research Assistant, ibid., 1898-99; Associate Professor of Chemistry, University of Utah, 1899- 1901; Instructor in Chemistry, University of Chicago, 1901-. 1896-98 — Fred Neher, A.B., Princeton University, 1889. Assistant Professor of Chemistry, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. 1896-97 — James F. Sellers, A.B., University of Mississippi, 1885. Professor of Chemistry, Mercer University, Macon, Ga. 1897-1900— Henry Chalmers Biddle, A.B., Monmouth College, 189-; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1900. Lecture Assistant, ibid., 1900-1901; Instructor in Chemistry, University of California, Berkeley, Calif. 1898-1900— Hyman E. Goldberg, S.B., University of Chicago, 1896. Instructor, Chicago. 1898-1900- William McCracken, S.B., University of Michigan, 1886. Professor of Chemistry and Physics, Normal School of Northern Michigan, Marquette, Mich. 1898-1901— Solomon Farlee Acree, S.B., University of Texas, 1896; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1902. Assistant Professor of Chemistry, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, Utah. 1898-1900-Max Darwin Slimmer, S.B., University of Chicago, 1897; Ph.D., University of Berlin, 1902. 1899-1900— Eugene P. Schoch, C.E., University of Texas, 1894; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1902. Instructor in Chemistry, University of Texas, Austin, Tex. 1900-1902— William McAfee Bruce, A.B., Central College, 1896. Fellow, University of Chicago. 1900-1902— Francis W. Bushong, A.B., Franklin and Marshall College, 1885. Professor of Chemistry, Kansas City University, Kansas City, Mo. 1900-1901 — John Wilkes Shepherd, A.B.. University of Indiana, 1896. Assistant, University of Chicago; Professor of Science, Chicago Normal School, Chicago, 111. 1901-2— Wallace Appleton Beatty (Loewenthal Fellow i'), A.B., Kentucky University, 1896; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1902; Loewenthal Fellow, 1902-3, ibid. 1901-2 — Roy H. Brownlee, A.B., Monmouth College, 1898. Lecture Assistant, University of Chicago. 1901-2— Alfred O. Shaklee, S.B., University of Chicago, 1899. Teacher of Physical Science. High School, Jackson, Miss. EESEAECH WOEK From the very opening of the University in 1892 research work in the Department has been carried on vsdth enthusiasm on the part of all of the instructors and the candidates for the Doctorate degree, stimulated always by the untiring exertions and encouragement of the Head of the Department. An excellent equipment and certain liberal University conditions have favored its development; it is, probably, still a unique feature in this country, although by no means so abroad, that it should be thought wise and highly desirable to place the full time and strength of an instructor of advanced rank and salary in the capacity of research assistant IS The Lamson FellowsMp in Chemistry was endowed 19 The Loewenthal Fellowship was endowed in 1901 by for three years by Mr. L. J. Lamson, and yielded $520 per Mr. Berthold Loewenthal as a memorial to his son, Joseph year. B. Loewenthal. It yields an annual income of $420. 462 The Pbesident's Report exclusively at the service of a professor of Chemistry, in order to advance his investigations in the field of pure science. The University has, furthermore, wisely guarded the interests of chemical research by not exposing the Head of the Department to the great pressure of pro- viding for the needs of the rapidly growing undergraduate classes. While the burden of this work necessarily seriously handicapped the other instructors in the Department during the last years of greatest growth, until some adjustment to the increasing needs could be secured, the Department has always afforded all its staff at least some opportunities for research work. Candidates for degrees. Fellows and others, have been encouraged by the Head of the Depart- ment to undertake their research work for the Doctorate dissertations under any instructor, partly in order to broaden the fields of research in the laboratory, partly as an aid to the work of the whole staff. Full freedom of choice has always been exercised. As to the quantity of research work done in the Department, reference is made to the long bibliography of papers published by its members during 1892-1902. How successful the policy above described has been in the cause of chemical research, as judged by quality of work, must be decided by outsiders — the Department is satisfied to leave its case in their hands. It believes, more especially, that their verdict must be that Organic Chemistry will always, as now, feel the profound and, in certain respects revolutionizing, influence of the exhaustive studies of the Head of the Department. Every facility has been afforded for independent research work on the part of Doctors of Philosophy of other institutions. We have been glad to welcome the following colleagues for such work among us : James A. Lyman, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University. Decent, University of Chicago, 1892-93 ; Instruc- tor of Chemistry, Portland Academy, Portland, Ore. Henry L. Wheeler, Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Chemistry, Yale University, 1893-94. Hew Haven, Conn. Richard S. Curtiss, Ph.D., University of Wiirzburg. Decent, University of Chicago, 1893-97 ; Pro- fessor of Chemistry, Hobart College, Geneva, N. Y.; Professor of Chemistry, Union College, Schenectady, N. Y. William E. Henderson, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University. Summer Quarter, 1898. Associate Profes- sor of Chemistry, University of Ohio, Columbus, O. Howard H. Higbee, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University. Summer Quarter, 1898. Professor of Chemis- try, Hamilton College, N. Y. Emmet E. Reid, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University. Summer Quarter, 1900. Professor of Chemistry, Baylor University, Waco, Tex. H. G. Byers, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University. Summer Quarters, 1900 and 1902. Professor of Chem- istry, University of Washington. Anthony M. Muckenfuss, Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University. Professor of Chemistry, University of Arkansas. Walther G. Dilthey, Ph.D., University of Erlangen. Autumn, Winter, and Spring Quarters, 1900-1901. Privat-Docent, University of Zurich. The degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Chemistry has been conferred by the University on the following persons in the period between October 1, 1892, and July 1, 1902 : 1894 — Warren Ruf us Smith, A.B., Bowdoin College. Thesis : " On the Addition Products of the Isocyanides." Professor of Chemistry, Lewis Institute, Chicago. 1894 — Adolph Bernhard, A.B., Johns Hopkins University. Thesis : " Ueber die Einf uhrung von Acylen in den Benzoylessigaether." Stone Creek, O. 1896 — Bernard C. Hesse, S.B., University of Michigan. Thesis : " On Malonio Nitrile and Some of its Derivatives." Expert Chemical Adviser, Badische Anilin- und Soda-Fabrik, New York. 1896 — Samuel Ellis Swartz, A.B., Denison University. Thesis: "The Action of Sodium Ethylate on Bromamides." The Kent Chemical Laboeatory 463 1897 — James B. Garner, S.B., Wabash College. Thesis : " Condensations with Benzoin by Means of Sodium Ethylate." Professor of Chemistry, Wabash College, Crawfordsville, Ind. 1897— Lauder W. Jones, A.B., Williams College. Thesis : " On Salts of Nitroparaffines and Acylated Derivatives of Hydrosylamine." Instructor in Chemistry, University of Chicago. 1898 — Frank Burnett Dains, Ph.B., Wesleyan University. Thesis : " On the Isourea Ethers and Other Derivatives of the Ureas." Professor of Chemistry, Washburne College, Topeka, Kan. 1898— Otto Knute Folin, S.B., University of Minnesota. Thesis : " On Urethanes." Chemist and Physiologist, McLean Hospital, Waverly, Mass. 1898— Elizabeth Jeffreys, Ph.B., Oberlin College. Thesis: "On the Preparation of the Higher Alipathic Amines : Undecyl and Pentadecyl Amine." Teacher of Science, Clyde High School, Clyde, 111. 1898— Herbert N. McCoy, S.B., Purdue University. Thesis: "On the Hydrochlorides of Carbo- Phenylimido Derivatives." Associate Professor of Chemistry, University of Utah ; Instructor in Chemistry, University of Chicago. 1899— John C. Hessler, A.B., University of Chicago. Thesis : " On Alkyl Malonic Nitriles and Their Derivatives." Instructor in Chemistry, University of Chicago. 1899— William McPherson, A.B., Ohio State University. Thesis: "On the Nature of the Oxy-azo Compounds." Professor of Chemistry, Ohio State University, Columbus, O. 1899 — James H. Ransom, S.B., Wabash College. Thesis : " On the Molecular Rearrangement of o-Aminophenylethyl Carbonate to o-Oxyphenyl Urethane." Associate Professor in Chemistry, Purdue University. 1900 — Henry C. Biddle, A.B., Monmouth College. Thesis : " Ueber Derivate des Isuretins der Form- hydroxamsaure und ihre Beziehungen zur Knallsaure." Instructor in Chemistry, University of California, Berkeley, Calif. 1901— Ralph Harper McKee, A.B., University of Wooster. Thesis : " On the Oxygen Ethers of the Ureas : Methyl- and Ethylisourea." Associate Professor of Chemistry, Lake Forest University, Lake Forest, 111. 1902 — Wallace Appleton Beatty, A.B., Kentucky University. Thesis : " The Action of Sodium Alco- holates on Salts of the Patty Acids." The research work of the following additional candidates for the Doctorate degree was satisfactorily completed before July 1, 1902: John L. Bridge,^" B.S., Wesleyan University. Thesis : " On the Ethers of Quinone-Oxines (Nitroso- Phenoles)." Nellie E. Goldthwaite, B.S., University of Michigan. Thesis : " On Benzhydrol Derivatives." Profes- sor of Chemistry, Mount Holyoke College, South Hadley, Mass. Maxwell Adams, A.B., Leland Stanford Junior University. Thesis : " On Derivatives of Hydroxyl- amine." Professor of Chemistry, Normal School, Chico, Calif. Solomon F. Acree,^' S.B., University of Texas. Thesis : " On Sodium Phenyl and the Action of Sodium on Ketones." Assistant Professor of Chemistry, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, Utah. Eugene P. Schoch,^' C.E., University of Texas. Thesis : " On the Red and the Yellow Oxides of Mer- cury and the Mercuric Oxychlorides." Instructor in Chemistry, University of Texas, Austin, Tex. Edward E. Slosson,^' S.B., University of Kansas. Thesis : " On Acyl Alkyl (Alphyl) Halogen Amines and the ' Beckmann Rearrangement.' " Professor of Chemistry, University of Wyoming, Laramie, Wyo. Two of the above number, Dr. McPherson and Dr. Slosson, carried out their researct work in Summer Quarters only. Of the above number (twenty-two) eleven worked under the direction, and in the field of work, of Professor Nef, one in the same way with Associate 20 The work was done 1891-93 under the direction of 21 These candidates received the Doctor's degree from Professor Nef, partly at Clark University and partly at the University at the end of the Summer Quarter, 1902. this University. Mr. Bridge received the degree of Doctor of Philosophy from Clark University in 1893 on the basis of this work. 464 The President's Repoet Professor Smith, three with Assistant Professor Lengfeld, and seven with Associate Professor StiegHtz. In the course of the ten years, 1892-1902, eleven candidates discontinued their work without completing it. In one case, that of Mr. Lawrence S. Williams, Instructor in Chemistry at Armour Institute, Chicago, death put an end to a career that was full of promise. In the following nine cases election to a chair of Chemistry, or some other promising opening in the profession, induced the candidate to give up or postpone the completion of his work: F. E. Goodell, Professor of Chemistry, Des Moines College, Des Moines, la.; Fred Neher, Professor of Chemistry, Princeton University; William McCracken, Chair of Chemistry and Physics, Normal School of Northern Michigan, Marquette, Mich.; Hyman E. Goldberg, Inventor, Chicago; William Dehn, Instructor in Chemistry, University of Illinois ; Oscar R. Flynn, Teacher of Science, Hyde Park High School, Chicago; John W. Shepherd, Chair of Science, Chicago Normal School, Chicago; Alfred O. Shaklee, Teacher of Science, High School, Jackson, Mich; Herbert C. Gore, Assistant Chemist, United States Agricultiu'al Bureau, Washington, D. C. In only one case, complicated by ill-health, the work was discontinued, and the degree afterward taken at a foreign University. In 1896 the Department of Chemistry had the honor of welcoming one of the most emi- nent inorganic chemists in the world. Dr. Henri H. Moissan, of the University of Paris, and it had the pleasure of listening to an address in which he discussed the artificial preparation of the diamond, and applications of the electric furnace. In June, 1901, the Department had the honor of receiving the visit of one of the most distinguished living chemists, eminent notably in the field of Physical Chemistry, Dr. Jacobus H. van 't Hoff, of the University of Berlin. Dr. van 't Hoff gave a series of eight lectures on the applications of Physical Chemistry in the natural sciences, which were enjoyed by the Faculty, the student body, and many visitors from other universities. Professor van 't Hoff received the honorary degree of LL.D. from the Uni- versity at its decennial celebration in June, 1901. THE SUMMEE QUAETEK The Summer Quarters have not differed essentially from the other Quarters in the class of work done, but they have differed considerably in the constituency of the student body working in the Department. As in other Departments of the University, the student body in these Summer Quarters has consisted for the most part of Graduate students, teachers from universities, colleges, high schools, and academies, with a very much smaller proportion of vmdergraduates (see Table XIII, below). The maturity of this class of students and their wide- spread influence, exercised through their schools throughout the country, have made them a most desirable class of students to reach and teach. Ready for enthusiastic work and inspira- tion, appreciating thoroughness of work and method, they form a far more stimulating body of students for the instructors than do the undergraduates. The instructors in the Department are encouraged through them to aid in raising the standards of teaching in their Department to higher levels, and in modernizing their work throughout the West, Northwest, Southwest, and South. It was thought wisest to make the courses offered these students almost the same, as regards content and method, and exactly the same as regards requirements and standards, as those offered during the other three Quarters of the year. The greater maturity of the classes influenced the results chiefly in the average quality of the work and the depth of insight gained. To a considerable extent the courses were given by the same instructors as in the other Quarters, or by instructors equal in rank to them; in only one branch, that of General Organic Chemistry, yomiger instructors were always called upon to give the courses. Professor Nef has been in residence five Terms of the Summer Quarters; Assistant Professor Lengfeld, fourteen Terms; The Kent Chemical Laboeatoey 465 Associate Professor Stieglitz, thirteen Terms; Associate Professor Smith's first Term of Summer residence was in 1902. In order to ofiFer complete courses in a subject in a single quarterly session, the majority of the courses have always been offered as double courses (double Major and double Minor courses), twice as many lectures being given and twice as much laboratory work being required per week as in the ordinary course, the students concentrating their time and effort on one or two comrses only. The method has worked to the perfect satisfaction of instructors and stu- dents, and this raises the query, whether more opportunities for such concentrated effort might not be offered in the other Quarters. The Department has also always made it a special point to offer in every Summer Quarter nearly the equivalent of all its Junior College work, all of its Senior College courses, and the main graduate courses, and in alternate years, as far as possible, all of its special graduate courses. In this way almost the complete annual work of the Depart- ment has been duplicated every simimer for the benefit of a vast body of students who could attend no other Quarter, but who could, without any change in the order of their courses, take all the main courses in succession by attending during a sufficient number of Summer Quarters. The result of this policy has been that many students have been just as regular attendants in the Rummer Quarters for five or six years as ordinary students have been for as many Quarters of the usual school year. A characteristic feature has been that two candidates for the Docto- rate degree completed their research work altogether in Summer Quarters. A somewhat larger total time was required, perhaps, for the completion of the research work than would have been found necessary in the case of uninterrupted work at cooler periods of the year. But untiring courage and self-sacrifice on the part of the students overcame all the difficulties of the situa- tion. The Summer Quarters have also been a favorite period for research work on the part of Doctors of other imiversities, who have come great distances for the sake of the laboratory facilities and the stimiilus of intercourse with men of their own profession. It must be stated, however, that the carrying on of research work under the trying conditions of summer time is a great strain on staff and student alike; but for men of sound health it has proved to be a prac- tical and valuable opportunity. DIAGRAM IV — — — — 1 — — — — — — -" — — 1 n n — n — — — n n ~ — — —' — r~ ~ - - ~ r — , ~ ~ ~ ~ _ ~ ~ _ ~ ■ 7.500 6,000 4,500 3,000 1,500 300 -• ' ■ " ,— — - _ ._- -- — ' 150- "~ ~ _ ~ "" "~ ~ — _ , ~ _ ~ ~ "■ ■ ,_ ^ <■- 100- — I— — ~ ~ — — ~ ~ _ ZZ ~ iZ: =^ =: =^ "^ '^ ^^ ■■' ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ _ '" ' U—i U— J l»=J 18 u I'S Jo IH QG 18 97 18 98 18 99 19 00 19 0) - ToUl Chamistry registration ; scale of GO to the line. "Total UoiVtirBity cegistration; scale of 1.500 to the line. Siimaipy Qtmrters The curve which illustrates Table X below, not only shows the rapid growth of the work in Chemistry in the Summer Quarters, but also brings out the fact that its rate of growth has been larger the last few years than that of the University as a whole, great as the latter has been; the total attendance in the last four summers (950) shows a gain of 150 per cent, over the attendance in the first four summers (385), as against 100 per cent, for the University as a whole. During all this time only the regular courses of the Department have been given; there have been no "open" courses. 466 The Pkesident's Repoet The following table shows the total registrations for the Summer Quarters in Chemistry and in the University as a whole: TABLE X 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 Chemistry 79 1,575 73 2,565 118 2,787 115 4,008 177 4,300 198 4,851 275 5,028 300 The University 6,223 The following table compares the total Chemistry in Majors in the Summer Quarters with the average total Chemistry registrations for the Autumn, Winter, and Spring Quarters of the same year. It shows that the work done and the increase is almost exactly the same in both cases: TABLE XI 1894r-95 1895-96 1896-97 1897-98 1898-99 1899-00 1900-01 1901-02 Summer Quarter Average Quarter 97 120 87 77 126 123 105 142 165 124 142 139 185 190 199 17622 The following table gives the amount of work (in Majors) in the main branches of instruc- tion in the Department, and shows the development of each: TABLE XII 1894 1895 1896 ■ 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 General Chemistry Analytical Chemistry . . Organic Chemistry "Other" courses 2^ 45 28 22 3 26 37 18 6 47 32 28 20 46 31 19 10 54 63 29 21 42 54 38 8 45 74 37 29 63 64 47 27 The next table, a particularly important one, compares the total work (in Majors) in graduate courses in the Summer Quarters with the average registrations for such courses for the three other Quarters. It shows that the former has been exceeding the average graduate work in other Quarters since 1898. As a number of the registrations in ordinary Quarters are for half-Major special courses, the real balance in favor of the Summer Quarters is still greater. TABLE xin 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 Summer Quarter Average Quarter 25 50 24 34 55 61 36 54 63 53 57 56 80 66 89 63 The last table, giving the registrations of Graduate, Senior College, Junior College, and Unclassified students, expresses clearly the mature character of the summer student body. The registrations of Graduate students, in all but the first year, have easily outnumbered those of all the other students combined. TABLE XIV 1901 Graduates Senior College. Junior College . Unclassified . . . 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 39 56 81 72 116 132 159 2 3 8 7 11 17 39 1 8 22 11 8 11 37 14 21 14 39 41 54 179 28 19 74 22 Without Medical student registrations. 2' Research courses, Advanced Inorganic and Physical Chemistry. The Kent Chemical Labokatoey 467 POSITIONS FILLED BY GRADUATES AND STUDENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT The various classes of students who have worked in the Department, Fellows, candidates for the Degrees of Doctor, Master, or Bachelor, have been largely called upon to fill positions in Chemistry in the universities and colleges of the country, or positions to teach the physical sciences in high schools and academies. The nature and the location of the positions filled by the most advanced classes of students— our Doctors, Fellows, and Masters— appear from the tables on pp. 460 and 463 of the preceding statement. They include eighteen professorships and five instractorships in universities, colleges, and normal schools, and five positions as teachers of Physical Science in high schools or academies (besides two positions as expert advisers, the one in a great technical house, the other, a research position, in a large eastern hospital). Unfortimately, no record has been kept of the numbers of graduating Bachelors and Graduate students who have specialized in the Department and, on its recommendation, have received appointments to teach Chemistry in high schools and academies In the last three years^ the supply of candidates for such positions, whom the Department was willing to recom- mend, and who had asked for its support, has been exhausted in the early summer, and the Department has been unable to supply candidates for many later xirgent and direct applications. There has also been an increasing demand from technical sources for men trained in the Depart- ment, largely from the city, but also from more distant localities. Its supply of such men, seeking technical positions, necessarily rather small in the absence of a complete school of technology, has also been exhausted at early dates after graduation, and many requests for men have had to remain unfilled because of the lack of further candidates. Undoubtedly the general prosperity of the country has made the large demand in recent years possible, but the satisfactory work of those who have gone out before has been the most important factor, as shown by the nature of the requests received. In view of the lack of statistics for most of the preceding years, it may be of interest to state that in the present season (1902) sixteen positions (university, college, and school) and ten technical positions (two temporary ones) have been filled on the basis of recommendations by the Department, and about fifteen requests have had to be refused, up to the present date, after the list had been exhausted. The only difiiculty the Department has met in this matter is in the placing of its women graduates. Superintendents of schools have shown an unfounded prejudice in favor of men teachers of Science, which does not seem to exist in regard to other subjects. The discrimina- tion has gone to the extent of favoring men of only average ability, recommended only with qualifications, as against women candidates of superior ability and intelligence who have been given unqualified recommendations. It has been found, moreover, that the few women teachers sent out by the Department have in nearly every instance given satisfaction, and have been com- pletely successful in handling classes in Chemistry. Such a prejudice does not seem to exist in the East, and it need not exist in the West. Kespectfully submitted, Julius Stieqlitz. REPORTS OF OTHER OFFICERS THE BUSINESS MANAGER To the President of the University : Sib : The business history of the University from the date of its organization to June 30, 1902, as appearing upon the recurring annual periods of its fiscal years, is reflected by the exhibits of the hereinafter following Financial and Statistical Tables, viz.: Table I. General Balance Sheet, June 30, 1902. Table II. Budget Expenditures: by years covering period 1894^1902 (eight fiscal years). Table III. Budget Income: by years covering the period 1894-1902 (eight fiscal years). Table IV. Budget Income and Expenditures by Departments and Years, covering the period 1894-1902 (eight fiscal years). Table V. Income and Expenditures — Gross, Summarized: covering the period 1894- 1902 (eight fiscal years). Table VI. Budget Income — Sources Analyzed: by years covering the period 1894-1902 (eight fiscal years). Table VII. Seven Departments: Receipts and Expenditures, covering the period 1893- 1902 (nine fiscal years). Table VIII. Budget Expenditures — Analyzed: covering the period 1894-1902 (eight fiscal years). Table IX. Assets — June 80: 1893-1902 (ten years). Table X. Budget Expenditures: Per Capita (apportioned), fiscal year ending 1901-1902. TABLES XI, XII, XIII THE UNIVEESITY OF CHICAGO PBESS (Departmental Statements 1901-1902) Table XI. Book Store. Table XII. Printing Office. Table XIII. Publication. Table XIV. Gifts: In Gross — annually by fiscal years 1889-1902 (thirteen years). Table XV. Endowment Funds — Consolidated Statement; Amounts, Classification of Investments, Interest, Income, etc. (eight fiscal years). TABLE I Geneeal Balance Sheet, Jdnb 30, 1902 Dr. Investments (see p. 2) - - - - $8,674,962.12 Buildings (see p. 3) ---------- - 2,812,032.60 Grounds (see p. 3) 1,297,003.19 Cash and current assets (see p. 4) ------- - 490,164.02 Cash ..-...$ 385,774.62 Bills receivable --------- 9,940.06 Due from University officers and agents - - - - 23,864.75 Miscellaneous- --------- 70,584.59 Books (page 5) ------ '~. I I 314,949.78 Scientific equipment " « - - - 440,993.48 Furniture " " - - - 66,804.54 Carried Forward ------------ $14,096,909.73 471 472 Thk Pkesident's Report Brought Forward ----------- $14,096,909.73 Material and supplies " " - _ 36,569 . 28 Printing office plant " " 10,521.77 Real estate " " - 984,375.17 Total ----------..-- -. : $15,128,375.95 Cr. Capital (see p. 6) ----....- $3,975,633.79 Endowments ""---.-...- 8,739,194.38 Building funds " " --------- 798,297.25 Land Purchase Fund ""-------.- 1,229,416.03 Special funds '-7 - - - 73,673.55 Current liabilities "'=--------- 312,160.95 Total -------- : :^ $15,128,375.95 Total June 30, 1901 --------.--_- 12,364,216.58 Increase ----- - - - $2,764,159.37 Investments Rockefeller ("A") --------- $571,648.07 Rockefeller ("B") --------- 903,063.95 Rockefeller ("C") --------- 526,467.38 Rockefeller ("D") --------- 689,486.86 Rockefeller ("E") --------- 1,027,185.51 Rockefeller ("F") --------- 499,399.80 Rockefeller ("G") --------- 989,045.16 Rockefeller ("H") --------- 998,713.68 Ogden - - - - - - - - - - - 317,027.97 Culver ------------ 852,853.60 Reynolds ----------- 113,053.58 Haskell No. 1 ---------- 23,688.05 Haskell No. 2 ---------- 20,000.00 School of Education --------- 788,020.14 Security Building (mortgage) - 180,000.00 Gallup Fund investment -------- 30,000.00 Hitchcock Fund investment 50,000.00 Woman's Building Fund investment - ----- 23,360.00 1223 Michigan avenue (Kelly gift) ------ 15,777.13 Miscellaneous investments --- 56,171.24 Total ----------- ~~- : : $8,674,962.12 Analysis of Investments Real estate - - ----- $4,295,000.30 Fees -----------$ 3,398,450.30 Chicago loans --.---.. 703,050.00 Farm mortgages -------- 193,500.00 Bonds ------- : r- 4,024,846.68 Railway ----- 2,573,020.13 Street railway - - - - - - - - - 144,763.75 Elevated railway .--.-.-- 221,837.80 Miscellaneous - - - - 1,085,225.00 Stocks - - . - ^ : : 310,427.09 Railway 119,275.00 Carried Forward , - - . $8,630,274.07 The Business Manages 473 Brought Forward - - - ----- - $8,630,274.07 Street railway --------- 88,401.26 Elevated railway --------- 102,750.83 Miscellaneous ----- 44,688.05 Total ------------ 8,674,962.12 TotalJune 30, 1901 ---------- 7,603,691.55 Increase ----------- 1,071,270.57 TJniveesitt Buildings and GrEonNDS Buildings -------- - $ 2,812,032.60 (a) Complete ------------ $2,220,865.19 Cobb Hall -------- $ 221,956.03 Graduate and Divinity Halls 172,805.72 SnellHall --------- 53,586.41 Kelly HaU ---------, 62,149.21 BeeoherHall - 62,126.05 Foster HaU- - - - 62,966.86 Foster Hall addition 20,466.04 Green Hall - 72,000.00 Kent Laboratory 202,270.19 Ryerson Laboratory ------- 200,371.41 Walker Museum -------- 109,275.11 Haskell Museum - ------- 103,017.49 Hull Biological Laboratories - ----- 325,000.00 Temporary Library and Gymnasium - - - 25,207.88 Power and oil storage plants (old) - - - - 19,636.35 Electric light plant and wiring - . - - - 13,965.03 Yerkes Observatory and Telescope . - - - 39,699.05 Morgan Park Academy --.'--- 30,000.00 West Hall, Morgan Park, 35,000.00 East Hall, Morgan Park, ------ 43,667.47 Gymnasium, Morgan Park, - 20,715.00 School of Education, Temporary Building - - 24,983.89 (6) Under construction ------ - '- '- - 591,167.41 School of Education ------- 50,192.52 Charles Hitchcock Hall - - - - - - - 117,076.96 Frank Bartlett Gymnasium ----- 40,642.93 Central light, heat, water, and power plant - - - 221,702.33 Group - - - - 89,286.84 Press Building 72,265.83 Grounds ----------- ~~- - ' - - $1,297,00319 Campus ----- 528,038.73 Scammon Court 132,368.65 Athletic Field 335,000.00 Yerkes Observatory -------- 25,300.00 Morgan Park Academy - - 22,000.00 Morgan Park Library - 3,000.00 Block 16 . - . - - 111,117.40 , Block 9 - - 140,178.41 Total, buildings and grounds - - - - - I I - - - $4,109,035.79 TotalJune 30, 1901 ---------- - - . 3,451,434.24 Increase $657,601.55 474 The President's Repoet Cash and Cdebbnt Assets Cash .-.-_.... $385,774.62 Bills receivable - - 9,940.06 Due from University officers and agents 23,864.75 Registrar S 1,681.55 Registrar Academy 390.52 University Press Division ------ 16,694.53 Cash -------$ 1,330.73 Individuals 15,363.80 Charles Hull E wing "- : '- 2,516.31 Trotter & Kimball 2,282.57 A. H.Parker --------- 299.27 Miscellaneous ■ - - 70,584.59 University College $ 8,926.15 Elementary School 7,031.98 School of Education budgets 13,164.77 Course of study 532.75 Catherine M. White Income 603.98 Bruce Telescope Fund (certificate of deposit) - - 6,125.00 Thaw Illustrations 83.54 Bruce Astronomical Fund investment . . - - 8,000.00 Russian Lecture Fund expense 2,000.00 President's Fund investment 130.00 Baptist Theological Union 28.51 Real estate investment expense 4,823.60 University Lecture Association 1,226.30 Temporary advances 1,426.40 Income accrued 19,877.60 Chicago Manual Training School 1,000.00 Miscellaneous 604.01 Total "- '- '- ~- ^ - $490,164.02 TotalJune 30, 1901 ..-.--- 482,761.36 Increase $7,402.66 Books $314,949.78 Scientific equipment 440,993.48 General $405,989.86 School of Education - 32,184.73 Bruce Spectrograph 2,085.17 Bruce Photographic Telescope 733.72 Furniture ---------- ^ '- ~ 66,804.54 General - - - - 38,235.25 Kelly Hall - . - - 2,601.67 BeecherHall - - - - 2,977.40 Foster Hall ---------- 2,978.34 Graduate Hall --------- 1,519.91 SnellHall - . - 2,251.28 Commons - - - - 4,963.53 Academy Commons - - - 1,996.95 Women's Commons -------- 4,803.29 Academy 4,472.12 Hitchcock Hall 4,75 Carried Forward ------ - I I - - - $822,747.80 The Business Manager 475 Brought Forward . $822 747.80 Material and supplies . . 36569.28 Bookstore - _ $14,505.95 Printing office - 8,829.27 Publications 11,578.35 Laboratory Supply Store 1,318.26 Postage - - 229.06 Academy Commons 58.39 Commons -.-.. 5000 Printing office plant - "~I '. I 10521.77 Real estate ---------..... 93^ 375 yr Block 3, Fern wood addition $204,653.99 Block 1, Fernwood addition ■ - - - . . 151,696.75 Block 5, Marshall Field's addition ----- 147,150.69 Block 13, Mason ' THE EXTENSION OF THE QDADKANgJHI' The need of more ground for the use of the University being increasingly felt, steps were taken to acquire the territory embraced in the two blocks lying between Fifty-sixth and Fifty- seventh streets, bounded by Ellis avenue on the west and Lexington avenue on the east. On December 30, 1898, Mr. Eockefeller offered to give two hundred thousand dollars ($200,000) toward the purchase of this property provided Mr. Marshall Field would give one hundred and thirty -five thousand ($135,000). This arrangement being carried out, and the city council having vacated Greenwood avenue running through the tract, a very valuable addition was made to the University Quadrangles. THE GIFT OF THE LEON MANDEL ASSEMBLY HALL On November 29, 1899, Mr. Leon Mandel made a contribution for the erection of the long- needed assembly hall, all large gatherings at the University having been crowded into the lecture-room of Kent Chemical Laboratory, which was planned for an entirely different purpose. Mr. Mandel's gift was made in the following letter: Chicago, November 29, 1899. President W. R. Harper: Dear Sir: I will give to the University of Chicago the sum of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), to be used for the erection of a building for assembly purposes, on condition that the building shall be called the Leon Mandel Assembly Hall. I will pay the sum indicated when I am informed that the contract for the building has been let. Yours truly, Leon Maudel. This generous gift was increased at a later date by twenty-five thousand dollars ($25,000), the amount first named proving insufficient for the completion of the proposed hall. 556 The President's Report THE GUELEY COLLECTION OF FOSSILS At a meeting of the Board of Trustees held on December 12, 1899, President Harper announced that an agreement had been effected with Mr. W. F. E. Gurley by which a great collection of fossils, valued at one hundred and twenty-five thousand dollars ($125,000) was to come into the possession of the University, the owner, Mr. Giirley, contributing a large propor- tion of the amount needed for the purpose. This collection was received in due time, and was placed on exhibit in Walker Museum. THE GIFT OF THE CHARLES HITCHCOCK HALL On December 12, 1899, announcement was made to the Board of Trustees that Mrs. Annie Hitchcock was considering a large gift to the University, to be used partly in the erection of a dormitory for men, the building to be a memorial of her husband, Charles Hitchcock, long a leading lawyer of Chicago, and partly in the establishment of a professorship. At a meeting held January 2, 1900, the formal offer was made, the amount paid to the University by Mrs. Hitchcock being two hundred thousand dollars ($200,000), in accordance with the following letter: Jantjary 1, 1900. William B. Harper: Deak Fkiend: Desiring to erect a memorial in the University of Chicago to my husband, Charles Hitchcock, I am prepared to transfer to that institution my interest in La Salle Block (corner of Madison and La Salle streets) to the value of two hundred thousand dollars (8200,000), subject to the conditions already discussed between us. Sincerely your friend, Annie Hitchcock. the foster hall addition At the same meeting the following letter was presented: 789 FcxLBBTON Avenue. President William R. Harper, University of Chicago: Dear Db. Harpee: I should like to have Nancy Foster Hall extended to the west and made a complete building with light on three sides. For the purpose of building and furnishing this exten- sion, including an elevator for the building, I am willing to give twenty thousand dollars (^20,000). Will you please inform the Trustees? Very sincerely yours, Nancy S. Foster. ESTABLISHMENT OF THE CRANE RUSSIAN LECTURESHIP At the same meeting the following letter was read from Mr. Charles K. Crane: January 2, 1900. William R. Harper, The University of Chicago: My dear Dr. Harper: 1 wish to confirm by letter my recent conversation with you regarding a lectureship on Slavic subjects. I should like to have you accept for this lectureship ten thousand dollars ($10,000), to be paid in five annual instalments of two thousand dollars (§2,000) each. These lectures should, I think, be given so far as possible by distinguished Slavs, especially Russians ; the course as a whole planned to give a general view of the Slavic world, its geography, ethnography, history, arts, institutions, and religious sects. Please let me know if this is satisfactory to you. Very truly yours, C. R. Crane. The time set for the securing of the two million dollars, offered under certain conditions by Mr. Kockefeller, having expired, it was announced that the offer had been extended for three months longer, and at the Convocation in April, 1900, President Harper announced that the necessary amount had been raised and that this great addition to the funds of the University had been made. An Histoeioal Sketch 557 Two significant gifts were made to the Library of the University in the early part of 1900, one being the private library of Professor Hermann E. von Hoist, and the other that of Professor George W. Northrup, both collections being specially selected by the donors, the one rich in volumes of history, the other being largely theological. The equipment of the library was also enriched on April 17, 1900, through the establishment by Mrs. Delia S. Gallup of a fund of thirty thousand dollars ($30,000), the interest of which is to be used in the purchase of books in the special field of American history. A GIFT OF ONE MILLION, FIVE HUNDEED THOUSAND DOLLAES On December 12, 1900, this letter from Mr. Rockefeller was presented to the Trustees: December 6, 1900. Mr. Martin A. Ryerson, President Board of Trustees, University of Chicago, Chicago, III.: My dear Sir : My father will give to the University of Chicago one million, five hundred thousand dollars ($1,500,000), of which $1,000,000 is for endowment, payable as of the date of December 1, 1900, in cash or approved securities at the option of the Board, and 8500,000 is for the general needs of the University, payable as required before July 1, 1902. Very truly, John D. Rockefeller, Jr. THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE SCHOOL OF EDUCATION The early part of 1901 was marked by the establishment of the School of Education, this great advance coming as a result of the negotiations growing out of the receipt of the following letter: Chicago, February 5, 1901. To the Trustees of the University of Chicago: During the past three or four weeks we have had some interviews and correspondence with President Harper, with a view to the transfer to the University of Chicago of educational work which we have been intending to carry on, namely, a pedagogic school and a school for children in con- tinuation of the schools formerly in charge of Colonel Francis W. Parker at Normal Park. At one time during the course of our communications with President Harper we addressed to your Board a proposition which, we believe, has not been presented to you because the conditions upon which it was based were deemed by President Harper impracticable. We wish now to make the following offer : We will turn over to the University property of about the value of One Million Dollars, consisting of — a) Unimproved real estate for which four hundred and twenty-five thousand dollars in cash was paid in 1899. b) School equipment and building materials which have cost a little more than seventy-five thousand dollars. c) Convertible securities worth five hundred thousand dollars ; provided, the use of this property for the purpose for which we have intended to use it can be assured on a basis agreeable to you and to us. We have not as yet gone into the subject suflBciently to enable us to make any more definite proposal of terms ; but if your Board should be disposed to enter upon negotiations with us, we shall be glad to proceed immediately. Our plans are such that the greatest possible haste is necessary; if therefore you should accept our contingent otfer, may we suggest that you make such provision that there may be on your side no delay in the negotiations, and that, if these reach a satisfactory conclusion, a proper contract may at once be executed? Anita McCormick Blaine, Owen F. Aldis, Henry Baird Favill, Cyrus Bentley, _ Stanley McCormick, As Trustees of the Chicago Institute. (Signed) 558 The President's Report At a meeting of the Board held March 5, 1901, a resolution was adopted setting apart from the funds given by the Reynolds estate the sum of Seventy Thousand Dollars ($70,000) for the erection of the Students' Club House. On March 18 it was voted to erect a building for the University Press at a cost not to exceed Eighty Thousand Dollars, and on the same day it was voted to build a Heat, Light, Power, and Water Plant, at an expenditure not to exceed One Hundred and Fifty Thousand Dollars. On April 16 a general plan of laying out the University grounds was approved, and steps were ordered taken for carrying it out. At the same meeting plans were formulated by which the first two years of the work of the Eush Medical College, an affiliated institution, was to be transferred to the University. At the same meeting the following communication was presented : Desiring to leave some lasting memorial to my late beloved husband, J. Young Scammon, who was for many years a Trustee of the University of Chicago and had great interest in its affairs, and valuing lots 5 to 16 inclusive in block two (2) in Fernwood addition to Hyde Park, in the county of Cook, state of Illinois, at One Hundred and Twenty-two Thousand One Hundred Dollars (§] 22,100), I offer to convey the same to the University for the sum of Sixty -one Thousand and Fifty Dollars ($61,050), being one-half of such sum and value, subject to all unpaid taxes and assessments; condi- tioned that such land be used solely and exclusively for University purposes, that it bear the name of "Scammon Court," and that such name be forever maintained in some conspicuous place in or on it. Mabia S. Scammon. The Trustees voted to accept this offer of Mrs. Scammon. On May 15 an important gift was received from Mr. Stuart Weller, of the Department of Geology, who presented his private collection of fossils, comprising between two and three thousand specimens representing one thousand types. On June 14, 15, 16, 17, and 18, 1901, the Decennial Celebration was held. The first day was devoted to the interests of the students of the University, the most prominent feature being the performance of the play, As You Like It, imder the auspices of the Department of Public Speaking. Saturday, June 15, was Alumni and Class Day, the various business meetings and the dinner of the alumni being held, as well as the Class-Day exercises of the class of 1901. An interesting feature of this occasion was the presentation to the University of a memorial tablet to Hon. Stephen Arnold Douglas, the founder of the first university established in Chicago. The tablet of bronze shows an excellent likeness of Mr. Douglas, and beneath it the inscription IN HONOR OF STEPHEN A. DOUGLAS WHO IN 1855 GENEROUSLY CON- TRIBUTED TO THE FOUNDING OF THE FIRST UNIVERSITY ESTABLISHED IN CHICAGO THIS TABLET IS ERECTED IN JUNE 1901 BY THE DECENNIAL CLASS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO The address on behalf of the class was made by Mr. Arthur Eugene Bestor, the class president. Mr. Franklin MacVeagh, representing the Board of Trustees, accepted the tablet, saying, among other things : ''■> The University Record, Vol. VI, No. 13, pp. 125 ff., published June 28, 1901, gives a complete account of the Decennial Celebration. An Histoeioal Sketch 559 The university which Senator Douglas helped so liberally and with such enlightenment to establish has passed away. But it lasted long enough to educate many worthily; to make a rallying point for the higher intellectual life of a giant city in its beginnings ; to emphasize the fitness of university life in this appointed city of educational leadership ; and to break the ground for this far greater University, which came, in due course, to realize in the fuller time every dream and ideal with which Senator Douglas and his associates began their enterprise. And that university ought not to be permitted to pass out, though its halls are closed and its voices are silenced. Though it was only a group of memories before this University was conceived, those memories should be permanently treasured, and the spiritual relations between that university and this, the successive efforts of a great underlying educational necessity, should be carefully recog- nized. And it is a peculiarly happy thing that the Seniors of this year, grounded strongly in loyalty to their own alma mater, should, with true catholic feeling, turn their faces for a while to the first beginnings of university life in Chicago, with the wish to commemorate them gratefully. Certainly no time could be more appropriate for such cordial reminiscence than this year, when the new University is celebrating its unprecedented development and prosperity. I congratulate the Seniors upon their choice of the occasion, and upon their selection of the man, in honoring whom they intend to mark their appreciation of the early strivings of all those earnest men and women who, through sunshine and cloud, did their utmost to establish here that higher education which now flourishes all the more appropriately and luxuriantly because of their labors and sacrifices. This day was also marked by the corner-stone ceremonies of the University Press Building and the Charles Hitchcock Hall, and the formal dedication of the addition to Nancy Foster Hall. The first corner-stone to be laid was that of the University Press Building. The follow- ing introductory statement was made by the President of the University: The printing press is the university's most efiicient ally. Through the press, instruction which would have reached tens or hundreds is received by hundreds of thousands. During the period of its work the Press of the University of Chicago has purchased and sold books, stationery, and scientific equipment to the amount of about S552,213; it has printed and published 372 volumes of books and pamphlets, aggregating 76,350 pages, together with volumes of twelve journals and periodicals, aggregating 459 separate issues, amounting to i7,736 pages, and 38 official documents, aggregating approximately 10,000 pages ; a grand total of 1,071 publications, of 124,086 pages. This would amount to 413 volumes at 300 pages each. The Press has in addition executed printing to the amount of 1118,585. The purpose of the organization of the Press was, as stated ten years ago, the following : a) The printing and publishing of University bulletins, catalogues, and other official documents. b) The printing and publishing of special papers, journals, or reviews of a scientific character, prepared or edited by instructors in the various Departments of the University. c) The printing and publishing of books prepared or edited by University instructors. d ) The collecting, by way of exchange, of papers, journals, reviews, and books similar to those published by the University. e) The purchase and sale of books for students, professors, and the University Library. ' It is fitting, in the opinion of the Trustees, that a work of so important a character should have suitable quarters. The building will be erected with funds kindly furnished by the founder of the University. When finished, it will serve also as the temporary home of the Library. The following list of articles deposited in the corner-stone was read by Dr. T. W. Goodspeed, Secretary of the Board of Trustees : Photograph of the founder of the University; official statement of donations for the erection of the building ; the University Register; the University Record ; Directory of Alumni; Chicago daily papers ; program of Decennial Celebration ; addresses delivered at the laying of the stone ; catalogue of the publications of the University Press; University Press Style Book and style sheet; representa- tive publications of the University Press. The corner-stone was thereupon laid by Mr. Newman Miller, Director of the Press, and the comer-stone address was delivered by Professor J. Laurence Laughlin. 560 The Peesident's Kepoet At the laying of the corner-stone of the Charles Hitchcock Hall the President made the following introductory statement : To have one's residence on the university grounds or in close proximity to them is a privilege of university life second only to that of enjoying the facilities for instruction offered in connection with the class-rooms, the libraries, and the laboratories. When it was officially decided ten years ago to erect, on the Quadrangles, University houses for men and women, a most important feature of the Uni- versity's policy was established. There are very few situations in which this policy, ordinarily called " the dormitory system," is undesirable. In an institution located in a great city it becomes an abso- lute necessity. It is frankly to be confessed that up to this time the University has not done for men in this particular feature of its policy what it has done for women. This inability to carry out its ideals has been due to the fact that so large a share of the time and attention of those concerned has been devoted to the erection of buildings necessary for instruction. With the laboratories of the Univer- sity now in large measure provided for, it is possible to enter more definitely upon the work of making better provision for the needs of student life. It is a source of much gratification that these needs have already appealed so strongly to some of the University's friends. This morning it is our privilege to celebrate the first beginning of a Hall which is intended to serve as a contribution toward the elevation and enrichment of student life. A woman profoundly interested in the upbuilding of young men, in memory of a husband who in his lifetime was equally interested, expresses her own high esti- mate of the magnificent possibilities of human life by erecting the building, the corner-stone of which is now to be placed. Dr. Goodspeed read the follovcing record of articles placed within the stone : Memorial volume of Mr. Hitchcock; diploma from Dartmouth College; admission to practice in United States Supreme Court; proceedings of the Illinois constitutional convention of 1870, of which Mr. Hitchcock was president; photograph of Mr. and Mrs. Charles Hitchcock; photograph of the late D. L. Shorey (by request of Mrs. Hitchcock); photograph of the Hitchcock homestead; bookplates of the library to be placed in the Hall by Mrs. Hitchcock; photograph of the founder; photographs of the University buildings; photograph of Hitchcock Hall; addresses delivered at this corner-stone laying; the University Register; the University Record; the Cop and Gown, 1901; the University of Chicago Weekly; the Chicago daily papers; Directory of Alumni; program of Decennial Celebra- tion; official statement of donation for erection of building. Mrs. Charles Hitchcock then formally laid the stone, and Professor Paid Shorey delivered the corner-stone addi'ess. The dedication of the addition to Nancy Foster Hall occun-ed immediately after the laying of the corner-stone of the Charles Hitchcock Hall. The President made the following intro- ductory statement: If it is regarded as important that men should have an opportunity of living in suitable cir- cumstances on the grounds of the University, in the case of women this becomes a matter of necessity. The University owes a debt of gratitude to the woman whose generosity we celebrate to-day, because ten years ago she was the first woman graciously and voluntarily to suggest that she desired to erect a home for women on the University grounds. The encouragement which this suggestion gave to us at that time will never be forgotten; and when, a year ago, a most urgent effort was being made to comply with the terms of a great contribution, she again proffered to the University a sum of money with which to enlarge and to complete not only the building she had erected, but as well the entire southeastern corner of the University grounds. The debt of gratitude, already large, was more than doubled. To this good woman, whose age makes her presence here today impossible, we send the heartiest greetings from the women of the Hall which bears her name, from every woman in the Uni- versity, from every member of the University, and from every man or woman who is, or has been, interested in the cause of woman's education. We rejoice today that her esteemed son, a member of the Board of Overseers of Harvard Uni- versity, and a respected citizen of Chicago, Mr. George E. Adams, is here today to represent her in the presentation of Nancy Foster Hall to the University. An Historical Sketch 561 Mr. Adams said: As the President has already said, I am here as the representative of Mrs. Nancy Foster, the giver of Nancy Foster Hall. Among all her many acts of benevolence — and the world will never know how many they are — I believe there is not one that has given her more sincere pleasure than the gift of the money by which Nancy Foster Hall, in its original form, was constructed a few years ago. It was more than a gift of money; her heart went with the gift; her heart has been with it ever since. The kindly smile that beams from her portrait over the mantel in the old hall is only a token of the tender regard and interest she has felt for the welfare, not only of the women who now reside here, but for the welfare of the women who will reside here during the generations to come; and when, as the President of the Uni- versity has told us, opportunity came to enlarge and complete the Hall, it was a new happiness to her to furnish the money with which that was done. It would be a still further happiness to her if she were strong enough to be here and take part in this ceremony which marks the consummation of her gift. She cannot be here. I am here to speak and act for her; and so, Mr. President, it is my pleasant duty, in token of the affectionate regard of Mrs. Nancy Foster for the University of Chicago, and especially for the women of the University, to deliver to you the keys of Nancy Foster Hall. President Harper then said: I accept these keys on behalf of the University, and on behalf of the women of the University. It is a matter of rejoicing also with us today that on this occasion the address will be made by one who was most closely associated with the first work of the University; one who, so far as women are concerned, in large measure formulated and carried into execution the policy of the University during its first years — Mrs. Alice Freeman Palmer. Mrs. Palmer then made the dedicatory address. On Saturday evening the second performance of As You Like It was given, following the annual dinner of the Alumni Association. On Sunday, June 16, four meetings were held. The first was a Bible service, with addresses on the theme " Sacred Wisdom;" by the President, who discussed the wisdom of the Old Testa- ment; by Professor Richard G. Moulton, who discussed the wisdom of the Apocrypha; and by Professor Shailer Mathews, who discussed the wisdom of the New Testament The second was the Convocation Eeligious Service, at which the President delivered the Baccalaureate Address. The third was a vesper service, at which brief addresses were made by Professor Eri B. Hulbert, Eev. Marcus Dods, of New College, Edinburgh; Professor Emil G. Hirsch, and Chancellor Elisha Benjamin Andrews of the University of Nebraska. The music on this occasion was fur- nished by the University of Chicago Military Band, Mr. Glenn M. Hobbs director, and by the Decennial Chorus, Mr. Lester B. Jones director, comprising the members of the University of Chicago Choir and Chorus; the Quadrangle Chorus (Mrs. T. D. Wallace leader), and the follow- ing church choirs: the Immanuel Baptist, the Normal Park Baptist, the Lexington Avenue Baptist, the First Methodist (Englewood), the First Baptist (Englewood), the St. James Metho- dist, the Oakland Methodist, the Hyde Park Baptist, the Calvary Baptist; assisted by Mrs. Clara Henley Bussing, soprano; Miss Etta C. Levin, contralto; Mr. Boise Carson, tenor; Miss Mary Tracy, Miss Margaret Coulter, Mr. Edward G. Ewart, accompanists. The closing service of the day was the union meeting of the Young Men's Christian Association and the Young Women's Christian Association, at which addresses were made by Rev. Ernest M. Stires, of Grace Church, Chicago, and by Miss Jane Addams, of Hull House. Monday, June 17, was devoted to a series of educational conferences. In the morning a general meeting was held, where addresses were delivered upon the theme, " College and Uni- versity Problems," by Chancellor Andrews, of the University of Nebraska, President George E. MacLean of the State University of Iowa, President Charles H. Thwing of Western Reserve University, and Professor Albion W. Small. At the close of this meeting exercises were held marking the oflBcial opening of the School of Education, the address being delivered by Professor 562 The Peesident's Repoet Nicholas Murray Butler of Columbia University, after which a procession moved to the site of the new buildings iu Scammon Court, where, after a brief introductory statement by President Harper, Director Francis Way land Parker turned the sod for the foundation, and then said: Nothing that is good is too good for the child; no thought too deep, no toil too arduous; for the welfare of the child means better homes, means an improved state of society, means the perpetuity of our republic, the salvation of the world. The economy of all economy is the education of the little child. We are thankful to God for the universities and for our University; to him for his mercy, to man for his gifts. But it can be said that of the great throng of men and women who leave the universities there is a large contingent who fail; their failure due, not to the universities, but to the education below it, to elementary education. To put money into the education of the child means the building of the university in the broadest and grandest way. Our fathers, inspired, founded the common school for the development of a free government. Normal schools, now spread all over the land, were established for the training of teachers and the advancement of the common school. Then came the kindergarten to breathe the breath of lite into education. The estabhshment of chairs of pedagogy in universities followed; and, last, schools of education, Columbia University having led the way. Now this, the second school of education, is here dedicated to the little child. May it be consecrated under God to the development of the child and the salvation of society. We march along the endless pathway of unrealized possibilities. The possibilities lie in the little one who are like Him who was born at Bethlehem. Let me say with Froebel: "Come, let us live with the children." In the afternoon the conference met in four sessions, representing Science, Language and Literature, History, and Theology. The first was addressed by Jacob Henry Van 't Hoff, Professor of Physiological Chemistry in the University of Berlin, and by Charles Doolittle Walcott, Dkector of the United States Geological Survey. The second was addressed by Basil L, Gildersleeve, Professor of Greek in Johns Hopkins University, and by George Lyman Kittredge, Professor of Latin in Harvard University. The third was addressed by His Excellency M. Jules Cambon, Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary from the French Eepublic to the United States of America. The fourth was addressed by Marcus Dods, Pro- fessor of New Testament Literature in the New College of Edinbui-gh, Scotland, and by William Newton Clarke, Professor of Christian Theology in Colgate University. The Decennial Celebration came to an end with the exercises of Tuesday, June 18, centering around the Thirty-eighth University Convocation. Before this meeting there were corner-stone ceremonies connected with the University Commons, the University Tower, the Students' Club House, and the Leon Mandel Assembly Hall. At the site of the Commons President Harper said: No more difficult problem presents itself in connection with the life and work of a large institution than that which relates to the preparation of food for the students of the institution. Those who engage in intellectual work require a nourishment of the body which will meet the special demands made upon it. To ignore this fact, to live without regard to well-known principles, or to be compelled because of poverty to live in a manner known to be injurious, means great loss of power on the part of the individual, and consequent loss to the institution. We are willing to acknowledge that hitherto the University of Chicago has been unable to perform its full duty in this direction. For lack of adequate arrangements the men of the University have been left to take care of them- selves. But now, by the generosity of Mr. Charles L. Hutchinson, in whose honor the building has been named Hutchinson Hall, this great lack will be supplied, and in the beautiful Hall, the corner- stone of which we are about to place, the social and spiritual side of student life will be assisted, as well as the physical. The following list of articles deposited in the corner-stone was read by Dr. Goodspeed: The University Register; the University Record; the Cap and Gown; the University of Chicago Weekly; the Chicago papers; the addresses delivered at the laying of the stone; the photo- graph of the founder of the University; pictures of the buildings and grounds; the Directory of Alumni; the Decennial program. An Historical Sketch 563 Mr. James Milton Sheldon, chairman of the Junior College Cbimcil, laid the stone, after which the address was delivered by Professor A. W. Small. The corner-stone of the Tower was laid by Mr. Joseph C. Hazen, chairman of the Divinity School Coiincil. The President made the following introductory statement: It has been the thought of the University Trustees that the most careful consideration should be given to the arrangement and architecture of the buildings erected. In an institution of learning there must be found ways of cultivating the side of sentiment. In the older universities there is the sentiment that grows out of age, but this is necessarily lacking in a younger institution. Perhaps nothing exerts a stronger influence in this regard than beautiful buildings. As an architectural feature of the entire body of buildings, and as a special feature of the buildings of this group, the Tower has been planned. Representing, as it will, not only beauty, but strength, not only symmetry, but power, we shall have constantly before our eyes that which will give encouragement by the association of thought, and that which will afford inspiration by the suggestion of the ideal. The building of this Tower is made possible by the kind munificence of one of Chicago's most noted and liberal business men, Mr. John J. Mitchell, president of the Illinois Trust and Savings Bank. Dr. Goodspeed read the following oflScial record of the articles placed within the stone: The Holy Scriptures; the address delivered at the laying of the stone; the photograph of the founder; pictures of the buildings and grounds; the Directory of Alumni ; program of the Decennial Celebration; the Chicago papers; the University Register; the University Record; the Cap and Gown; the University of Chicago Weekly. Professor Richard Green Moulton made the address. Mr. David A. Eobertson, chah-man of the Senior College Council, laid the stone of the Students' Club House, after the following introductory statement by the President: The average college man receives as much benefit from his fellow-student as from the officers of instruction in the college with whom he comes in contact. College life, in a word, is the close association of a body of men who have in general common sympathies. This life is in miniature the life which these same men will live later in the world at large. It includes friendships and animosi- ties, struggle and achievement, disappointment and victory. The college world is the most democratic world that exists. Occasionally, to be sure, politics gains an entrance, as in other democratic communities; but, generally speaking, the man who gains distinction earns it. The Student Club House to be erected on this corner is expected to become the headquarters of student life and activity. It is here that friendships will be cemented, battles fought, victories gained, and defeats and disappointments manfully accepted. It is impossible to overestimate the importance or the significance of this new addition to the University life. This building is provided by the choice of a committee representing the estate of Joseph Reynolds, who died February 21, 1891. It was Mr. Reynolds's desire to do something tor boys and young men. In the erection of this building that desire will have been fulfilled. The building will bear his name and will stand in the future as the memorial of a man whose life was full of that same vigor which he desired to see cultivated by the men of the coming generation. The articles placed within the corner-stone were these: The official statement of donation; the photograph of Mr. Reynolds, the donor of the building; some memorials of Mr. Reynolds; the photograph of the founder of the University; the University Register; the University Record; the Cap and Gown; the University of Chicago Weekly; the Standard; the addresses dehvered at the laying of the stone; the Directory of Alumni; the Decennial program; the Chicago daily papers. The corner-stone address was delivered by Associate Professor George E. Vincent. Mr. Henry M. Adkinson, chairman of the Graduate School Council, laid the corner-stone of the Leon Mandel Assembly Hall, after President Harper made the following statement: The sufferings of the members of the University here on the University grounds during these first years have been only less than the privileges and pleasures that have been enjoyed. In so far as these Bufferings aflfected ourselves, we have tried to be patient and submissive, but when we have 564 The President's Kepoet been called upon to suffer Yicariously for our friends who visit us from time to time, the exercise of patience has not always been observed. Again and again in the history of the University distin- guished men have come to us, but we have had no University hall in which to receive them, in which to give them opportunity to present their message. It has been a source of serious and constantly increasing pain and grief that we could not say to our friends in the city and from the states about us on these important occasions: "Come and join us." The largest room on the grounds today will not seat one-third of the students. In fact, it is not large enough to accommodate the members of the Faculties and their families. The fact that in these first years we have not all been able to come together on any occasion has resulted in great injury to the development of the spirit of unity — but the clouds are vanishing, and within a year these difficulties which have seemed almost unbearable will be removed. The Assembly Hall, of which the corner-stone is at this moment to be placed, will be that building on the grounds which more than any other shall represent the unity of our University life. Here we shall receive words from the lips of the greatest characters. Here we shall assemble for recreation; on this spot, in short, there will grow up a community of feeling, a center of activity, which no other portion of the grounds will furnish. The University is indebted for this great addition to its general equipment to a highly esteemed citizen of Chicago, Mr. Leon Mandel, whose interest in higher education and in the work of the University has led him to make this generous gift. The articles placed within the corner-stone vcere the following: The University Register; the addresses delivered at the laying of the stone; the photographs of Mr. and Mrs. Leon Mandel; the photograph of the founder of the University; the University Record; pictures of the buildings and grounds; the Directory of Alumni; the Standard, the Decennial program; the Cap and Gown for 1901; the University of Chicago Weekly; the daily papers. The comer-stone address was given by Professor Emil G. Hirsch. THE DECENNIAL CONVOCATION The Convocation exercises were held in a large tent which had been pitched in the center of the Quadrangles. The Convocation procession consisted of three divisions. The candidates for degrees met at Kent Laboratory. The President of the University, the fotinder of the University, the Senators, the Board of Trustees, and the candidates for honorary degrees met at the President's house. The Faculties and distinguished guests met at Haskell Oriental Museum. The first and second sections, uniting, marched to the President's house, and thence the entire procession, numbering more than five hundred persons, took its way to the tent. The prayer was offered by the University Chaplain. The following address on behalf of the Board of Trustees was delivered by President Martin A. Kyerson: Members and Friends of the University: The charter of the University of Chicago bears the date September 10, 1890; its academic existence began in 1891 with the appointment of the first members of the Faculty; its doors were first opened to students in the autumn of 1892. This is not an imposing chronological table; it does not appeal to us through any charm of age or long association. Any interest which it may inspire must be derived from something other than a long retrospect. Yet we feel that there is a special interest in the fact that this is not only the regular Summer Convocation of the University, but also a part of our Decennial Celebration — -an interest derived from the very youth of the University, taken in conjunction with the position it has attained. We are here to rejoice in this vigorous youth because of what it has so quickly brought; we are here to rejoice in it more because of what it promises for our own future; we are here to rejoice in it most because of what it indicates for our country and our times. In this age of rapid change, of quick development, we should welcome every evidence that the world's great material growth, so threatening in some ways in the minds of many, is but a manifesta- An Historical Sketch 565 tion of a general progress whict is urging us onward intellectually with equal rapidity. We are surrounded with evidences that theology, science, literature, and art are all ready to participate in every forward movement, but we do not always realize how full a share they will claim if the opportunity be offered. We should therefore greet this event as significant, not only of a higher progress, but also of the fact that the world is as ready to respond to earnest and devoted work in moral and intellectual fields as it is to efforts put forth for material gain. We should rejoice that the short space of ten years can contain so much of importance in the life of an educational institution newly founded; that the termination of that period seems to call tor special notice. That the period just elapsed does call for such notice no members of the University are in a better position to realize than the Board of Trustees. We know that these ten years have brought a success beyond our highest expectations. We understand that, as factors in the results attained, we can claim but a small part of the credit. There are many others more important to share it with us. This gives greater freedom to our appreciation and lessens any sense we might feel of self-congratulation when we give expression to our satisfaction. In touch as we are with both the material and the intellectual sides of our University's life, we have been able to note each step in its advance, and yet today we come to this celebra- tion with sensibilities unimpaired and gratitude undiminished by this familiarity. In fact, close observation of the daily progress of the University leaves us more impressed by the results attained than can be any stranger who looks upon those results today for the first time, for we have not left so far behind the obstacles overcome that they cease to magnify our appreciation of the advance made. To what should we attribute the growth and the success of the University of Chicago? It would be an interesting but a difiicult task to analyze all the elements which have contributed to them. Under the guidance of Divine Providence there have been many factors, personal as well as conditional. Perhaps the underlying element is the fact that there was a strong latent demand for another institution of higher education in this community, that the great middle West was ready for the establishment of a university in its metropolis. The business sense of the Board is impressed with the feeling that we are supplying a demand active and growing; its philanthropic instincts are troubled by the seeming impossibility of keeping pace with it. There is a continuous pressure upon us to enlarge the sphere of the University's activity. In the guidance of its growth we are embarrassed by the vigor with which it seeks to expand. Our diflBculty lies in choosing rather than in seeking fields of usefulness. There are many here at hand — we see them all about us. There come to us at the beginning of each Quarter increasing numbers of earnest students with aptitudes and ambitions which justify the best training which modern educational methods can supply, and we owe it to them, to the community, and to ourselves to keep abreast of their requirements. A second element of our success lies in the fact that we have been fortunate in securing the enthusiastic co-operation of an able Faculty, as loyal to the young institution as though bound to it by the strongest ties of time and tradition. It would give me pleasure to dwell upon this feature, to egress more fully the appreciation of the Board. If we have had in this connection any cause for disappointment, it has been our inability to furnish the material requisites for the full fruition of all the knowledge and the energy which is here at the service of the University. Particularly must we regret that the pressing demands of the growth in which we rejoice have made it impossible to attain our highest ideals of the functions of a university, which should include more encouragement to pure scholarship and original research than we have been able to give. What can I say that will measure our debt to the head of this Faculty, the President of the University, Dr. Harper? Dr. Harper is so bound up in our conception of the University and its work that praise of the institution is his praise. It is rarely given to a man to identify himself so fully with a great educational work, for it is rare to find untiring energy and unselfish devotion united with high scholarship and great executive ability, and to these given a great opportunity. We who have seen him at work since the early small beginnings of the University can testify to his possession 566 The President's Kepoet of these qualities, and with them an impartial solicitude for all of the departments of our work. Himself an able specialist in one great field of scholarship, he has always shown the broadest sympathies with the work of those who are laboring in other fields. I am tempted at this point to say something about my colleagues in the Board of Trustees, about their patient attention to all the details of the University's affairs, and their ready acceptance of all the responsibilities ; but, as I am to speak for them and not about them, I shall only pause a moment to give expression to our afl'ectionate remembrance of those whom death has removed from our number : Judge J. M. Bailey, Daniel L. Shorey, W. B. Brayton, and C. C. Bowen. Their devotion to our work may well be recognized here. It was given at a time when our responsibilities were very heavy and our difBculties very great. I come now, in my brief enumeration, to an element of our success which is placed after the others, because I know that it has been called forth by confidence in them. I refer to the liberality of the friends of the University who have so generously given it moral and material support. Their number is too great for me to mention all here. I name only Mr. Field, Mr. Cobb, Mr. Kent, Miss Culver, Mrs. Snell, Mrs. Foster, Mrs. Kelly, Mrs. Beecher, Mr. Mandel, Mrs. Hitchcock, Mr. Mitchell, Mrs. Scammon, Mr. Yerkes, Mrs. Haskell, Mrs. Blaine, the Reynolds and the Ogden estates. The University has on other occasions acknowledged its indebtedness to them, and to the many others who have given us aid and encouragement. An important acknowledgement still remains to be made. Its importance has caused it to suggest itself to everyone present ; it has carried itself along in our minds as an accompaniment to this enumeration of all the other elements of our success, for it is the acknowledgment of something which has made all the other elements possible and effective. It is not easy to put it into words forcible enough to express our sentiments, and which will at the same time be acceptable to the one to whom they are addressed. Sometimes the comfort and satisfaction which men derive from their benefactions are disturbed and even diminished by a recognition which they deem too forcible. While their broad human sympathies lead them to value the good opinion of their fellow-men, they prefer to any profuse assur- ance of gratitude the evidence that they are succeeding in doing the good which it is in their hearts to do. I shall, therefore, not say all that comes to my mind in acknowledging here on hehalf of the Board of Trustees the special debt of gratitude which we owe to the founder of the University, Mr. John D. Eockefeller. We feel it deeply; the events of these last few days and all that has been said must have made this evident. We trust that it is equally evident to him that his great benefactions are doing the good which he hoped for them. I desire, however, to lay stress upon the fact that this is not merely a recognition of the original impulse given to our work; it does not confine itself to the material aid so generously provided ; it is inspired also by the moral enouragement which he has given at every onward step and by the feeling that Mr. Rockefeller is not only the founder of the University of Chicago and its greatest benefactor, but also an earnest sympathizer with its highest aspirations. I might perhaps close here, but I am sure that the Board of Trustees wish their message to express something more than their satisfaction with what has been accomplished ; something more even than the general optimism which it seems to justify. Our Decennial Celebration is drawing to a close; we are about to enter upon a new decade, and our thoughts naturally turn to the future. Much has been done, but more remains to be done. The strength of some parts of our work has, by contrast, made evident the weakness of other parts. The necessity of strengthening these weak parts is causing delay in initiating new work necessary to the symmetrical development of the University. We recognize that our task is only begun. These considerations mingle with our rejoicing, and might even overshadow it, did we not find in the past something more than the record of this incomplete achievement. We do find in it much more: we find a promise for the future, not only in what has been done, but also in the spirit in which it has been done, and in the spirit in which it has been received. We feel that the same conditions continue, the same demand exists, the same influences are at work; and, above all, we see everywhere in the University and among its friends a constantly broadening conception of its An Historical Sketch 567 Following the address of Mr. Kyerson there were addresses by Professor Frank F. Abbott, on behalf of the Faculties of the University; by Mr. Arthur Eugene Bestor, on behalf of the students and alumni ; by Mr. George E. Adams, on behalf of the city of Chicago : and by the founder of the University, Mr. Rockefeller, who said : It is a great pleasure for me to be present on this occasion. Five years have quickly passed since my last visit, and I see on every hand the great work which has been accomplished during that period — greater by far than our most sanguine expectations at that time. The extent and magnitude of the work are not alone measured by what we see of new structures and additional lands, together with new books and apparatus, but also by the steady and remarkable growth in the influence which this University exerts. It has stood, and will stand, for the best and the highest; for the good of man and the glory of God. I am not here to discuss theological questions, such as whether Jonah's relation to the whale was that of tenant or landlord, nor yet the question of whether Stephen A. Douglas — all honor to his memory — or President Harper was the founder of the University of Chicago. But of this I am satisfied, that the University of Chicago would not be in existence today had it not been for our honored President, William Eainey Harper. The friends of the University gave him their confidence and highest regard from the first. It is needless to say that he has shown himself entirely worthy of it, and that he has always proved himself eminently fitted for his high position. No words of mine can give you a more favorable impression of President Harper in respect to every quality that goes to make him what he is — one of the foremost leaders and educators of our time. Indeed, I do not know where we could have found another so well qualified for this important work. I am sure I express the wish of all present here today, and a multitude of friends throughout our land and other lands, that his life and health may long be spared to continue this great work which he has in this very brief period brought to such a high state of perfection, and which already ranks with the leading universities of our country and the world. We, the friends of the University, assure President Harper of our continued co-operation and support. The University is to be congratulated on its Board of Trustees. It was no easy undertaking to secure such a Board, composed as it is of men occupying the most important positions in the business and professional world. This task, however, was rendered less difficult on account of the widespread confidence felt in our President. Much as we value the contributions of money which have been so generously furnished by the many friends of the University, we cannot overestimate the services of the Trustees, which have been given with unsurpassed ability, loyalty, and devotion. Indeed, I am certain that many gifts of money and property to the University of Chicago have been made because of the growing and well-merited confidence which the services of these Trustees have inspired in the public at large. In addition to these gifts, it is well known to you that large contributions have been made by individual members of this Board, and I understand there are still others in contemplation. The statement has been made, on good authority, that the Faculty of the University of Chicago is not surpassed by that of any other university in our country. It has been chosen with the greatest care by those eminently qualified to make such choice. No pains or money were spared in securing the very best professors and teachers, from every part of our own country and also from Europe. Certain it is that the high commendations with which they came to this University have been borne out in the work which they have since accomplished. They have proved themselves broad-minded and progressive men, and the large body of students from all parts of the country who have been in attendance at the University of Chicago is the best testimonial to their ability and efficiency. The confidence and esteem in which the Faculty is held is shared by the President, the Board of Trustees, and the community at large. Most friendly and cordial relations exist between the Faculty, the students, and all others sharing with the Faculty the responsibilities of the University administration, and at no time has there been so bright an outlook for the University as at present. Students of the University of Chicago, what can I say to you that will enable you to make the best use of your opportunities? You look out upon the world with bright prospects, and from a standpoint far more advantageous than that of many who preceded you. Whatever your station may be hereafter, do not tail to turn gratefully to your families and friends who have stood by you 568 The President's Eepobt in your time of struggle for an education. Many of them toiled incessantly through long, weary years, that you might be possessed of advantages which they were unable to secure tor themselves. 1 entreat you not to forget them, and not to fail, as the years go by, frequently to express to them your gratitude and regard, and to return to them, in loving and helpful attentions, the proof of the sincerity of your unfailing appreciation. These expressions will give happiness to them, and the reflex influence of your words and acts of gratitude will bring blessing to you. We all rejoice in your hope of success. We trust that you will be so anchored in the possession of sterling qualities that you will turn to best account whatever life has in store for you. In the end the question ^ will be, not whether you have achieved great distinction and made yourselves known to all the world, but whether you have fitted into the niches God has assigned you, and have done your work day by day in the best possible way. We shall continue in the future, as in the past, to need great men and women to fill the most important positions in the commercial and professional world, but we shall also need just as much the men and women who can and will fill the humblest positions uncomplainingly and acceptably. The vital thing is to find as soon as possible the place in life where you can best serve the world. Whatever position this is it is the highest position in the sight of ■ good men and in the economy of God. I tremble to think of the failures that may come to some of you who are possessed of the brightest intellects and capable of the greatest accomplishments. I shall expect to see many who are here present among the slow, methodical, plodding ones, who are • not at all distinguished as you are for brilliancy, go forward until at last they are found occupying positions of greatest honor and responsibility. Some of the foes which threaten your success may not be apparent to you until it is too late. If you are to succeed in life, it will be because you master yourselves, and if you are to continue masters, and not slaves, you do not need that I should say to you here today that you must jealously guard the approach of any foe to your well-being. You will do well not to underestimate the strength of such a foe. How many a young man whom I knew in my school days went down because of his fondness for intoxicating drinks ! No man has ever had occasion to regret that he was not addicted to the use of liquor. No woman has ever had occasion to regret that she was not instrumental in influencing young men to use intoxicants. So much has been said of late on the subject of success that I forbear making particular suggestions. The chances for success are better today than ever before. Success is attained by industry, perseverance, and pluck coupled with any amount of hard work, and you need not expect to achieve it in any other way. Citizens of Chicago, it affords me great pleasure to say to you that your kindly interest in, and generous support of, this University have been of the greatest encouragement to all those interested in its welfare, and have also stimulated others to contribute to its advancement. It is possible for you to make this University an increasing power for good, not only for the city of Chicago, but for our entire country, and indeed the whole world. The success of the University of Chicago is assured, and we are here today rejoicing in that success. All praise to Chicago ! Long may she live, to foster and develop this sturdy representative of her enterprise and public spirit ! Following Mr. Rockefeller, President Harper made a review of the ten years' history of the University, mentioning as the fom- factors in its success, its professorial staff, its many friends, over three thousand of whom had contributed funds, its Board of Trustees, and the character of the student body. Degrees were then conferred upon a large number of candidates, and at the close of this ceremonial the special .ceremony of conferring honorary degrees in celebration of the Decennial of the University was carried out. Dean Harry Pratt Judson called successively to the plat- form the following gentlemen: His Excellency, Jules Cambon, Ambassador to the United States from the Eepublic of Prance; E. Benjamin Andrews, Chancellor of the University of Nebraska; William Newton Clarke, Professor of Theology in Colgate University; Marcus Dods, Professor of New Testament Interpretation in New College, Edinburgh; Basil Lanneau Gildersleeve, Professor of Greek in Johns Hopkins University; Wilham Watson Goodwin, Professor of An Histoeioal Sketch 569 Greek in Harvard University; George Lyman Kittredge, Professor of English Literature in Harvard University; Edward Charles Pickering, Professor of Astronomy and Director of the Astronomical Observatory of Harvard University; Jacob Henry Van 't Hoff, Professor of Physical Chemistry in the University of Berlin; Charles Doolittle Walcott, Director of the United States Geological Sm:vey; Edmund Beecher Wilson, Professor of Zoology in Colimibia University. Each one of these gentlemen, as his name was called, came upon the platform arm in arm with a member of the University Senate especially appointed to accompany him. He took his place in front of the President of the University, who had risen, and after a recital by the President of his distinguished services in politics or letters, closing with the formal confer- ring of the degree, the hood was placed upon his shoulders by the Kecorder of the University. The ceremony was concluded by the President taking the hand of the recipient, thus welcom- ing him to the University. The degree of Doctor of Divinity was conferred upon Marcizs Dods and William Newton Clarke; upon the others the degree of Doctor of Laws. THE SOCIAL SIDE OP THE DECENNIAL OELEBEATION The presence of the founder of the University and Mrs. Rockefeller during these exercises, together with the attendance of many distinguished educators, whether as visitors or as official guests, gave to the Decennial a social interest of a marked character. Besides the informal meetings of the educational conferences, several social functions were arranged, whereby an opportunity was given to many members of the University and their friends to greet the guests. On Satvurday at 1 p. m. the first University luncheon to the official guests was given in Nancy Foster Hall. The same evening at 6 : 30, occurred the annual dinner of the Almnni Association, at the Quadrangle Club. The second University luncheon was given on Monday at the Quadrangle Club. The same evening occurred the President's dinner to the official guests, at 6 o'clock, at the Quad- rangle Club. A large number of persons occupied seats at the long tables in the dining- room. At the close of the dinner Dean Harry Pratt Judson greeted the visitors in the name of the University. Two brief addresses were made, the one by President A. S. Draper of the Uni- versity of Illinois, representing American universities, who gave a vigorous and growing eulogy of democratic institutions, the other by Professor Jacob Van 't HoflF, of the University of Berlin, representing European universities, who declared that the deepest impression thus far made upon him by his visit to America had been that of the spirit of idealism which he found everywhere present. Perhaps the most unique and attractive social affair connected with the Decennial was the Convocation Eeceptiou, held in the great tent on Monday from 8 to 11 p. m. It is estimated that more than three thousand persons were present and greeted the foimder of the Uni- versity. At the close of the Convocation, on Tuesday, the Congregation Dinner was held in the tent on the Graduate Quadrangle. More than six himdred persons sat down at the tables. At the close of the dinner Professor T. C. Chamberhn, vice-president of the Congregation and toastmaster, introduced the speakers. The program was as follows: "The University from the View-Point of a Trustee"- - - - Mb. Chables L. Hutchinson "The Alumni" - - . . Mb. George E. Vincent "American Universities" - . - _ Me. W. W. Goodwin "European Universities" - - Me. Maecus Dods "Requisites in Pounding Universities" Me. John D. Rockepellek "Our Guests" - - Me. William R. Haepeb 570 The President's Report In his response Mr. Eockefeller said: I was very much interested in the statement of the morning that the contributions to build this University came from more than three thousand people. I was not only very much interested, but also very much delighted. I also heard the statement that the contributions to the University of Chicago came in without solicitation. Now, as you may imagine, that was to me a most interesting statement. Nevertheless, I cannot question the correctness of the statement. I do, however, know of certain institutions of this kind where many solicitations have been made and a smaller per- centage than 91 per cent, has been received. I am hesitating with reference to one statement that I now make. I am fearing that I may be taken by this august body and tried for treason. I may say that I make the statement with no purpose to do you injury. I have no such thought. I only make it in harmony with the idea that prevails here that we hear and see both sides of the question. I approve of that idea. The statement is this: A friend of mine, in order, I suppose, to encourage me and help me on, made the remark — and you will probably regard it as a very cheerful remark — that funds contributed for the University of Chicago were thrown away. It reminded me of a little incident in my own business experience. A bright Boston man, well able to take care of himself, an able and experienced mer- chant who, while he was seeking to protect his own interest, was jealously watching to see that others were not getting any advantage in any particular, being suspicious that some neighbors out in the West were receiving advantages which he did not receive, addressed them something like that: " I am opposed, I am decidedly opposed, to any of these schemes by which you have the advantage over me, unless I am in it." Now, I need not explain to you that my dear friend who gave to me those comforting words just referred to was not — at all events I have not heard of him as — a regular contributor to the University of Chicago. I want to say to my friend, concerning the' University of Chicago: I am in it. And it is not such a case as I once heard of. A New England man, trying to give his own description of a burying ground, said that it was a place where those who were in could not get out and where those who were out did not want to get in. Dear friends, I do not want to get out. And I have to thank you for allowing me to stay in. What a delightful reception you gave us last night! We very much appreciated it and your many other kind attentions. And the beautiful spirit in which they have been given! Recurring again to that reception, that delightful and ever-to-be-remembered reception of last night, I desire especially to thank our President for his kind and well meant advice as to sundry applications to be used in restoring our right arm and hand. Friends of Chicago, you have indeed taken strong hold of me! Finally may I refer to just one little incident, that of an ignorant young man who was desirous of entering the church? He had not been well instructed; he was sincere in his desire to lead a bet- ter life, and, as is often the case, there were many questions asked of him, and probably many more than there should have been, but he was asked at last: "What do you think of Jesus Christ?" And the poor, ignorant young man said: "I have nothing agin' him." And so say we to dear President Harper, and so say we to you all before making our adieus to everyone present here today : We have nothing "agin' " you. We have had a most delightful visit and owe you naught but good will. During the months following the celebration of the Decennial the Trustees of the Uni- versity were busy v?ith many plans for the completion of the new buildings and for the changes in the University in consequence of these added facilities. On July 30, 1901, arrangements were made for the construction of a temporary building to be used for the School of Education, this to be erected on the corner of Ellis avenue and Fifty-eighth street at a cost of not to exceed twenty-five thousand dollars. The construction of this building was pushed rapidly, and it was ready for occupancy at the opening of the Autimin Quarter. DEATH OP PRESIDENT MCKINLEY At a meeting held Sept. 17, 1901, the Trustees adopted the following expression of feeling over the death of President McKinley : The Trustees of the University of Chicago share in the prevailing sorrow of their fellow- countrymen over the death of President McKinley. An Historical Sketch 571 During his lite the University conferred upon him its highest honor. In his death It mourns the nation's loss of an upright, able, and patriotic President. In his domestic relations, in his devout life, in his devotion to the public welfare, in his mani- festation of the many virtues which adorn human life, he has bequeathed to his country a priceless heritage. The record of his life will long continue an inspiration to noble living. The Trustees extend to Mrs. McKinley their sincere sympathy. At the same meeting an additional contribution to the University was announced from Mrs. Elizabeth G. Kelly, in the amount of fifteen thousand dollars. THE GYMNASIUM COENEE-STONE LAID On Thanksgiving Day, November 28, 1901, the corner-stone of the Frank Dickinson Bart- lett Gymnasium was laid with appropriate ceremonies. The following introductory statement was made by the President of the University: Ladies and Gentlemen: It was just ten years ago this month, November, that the arrangements were finally completed for the organization of the Department of Physical Culture and Athletics in the University. It was the thought of the Trustees at that time that the gymnasium would be one of the first four or five buildings to be erected on the University grounds. A statement to that effect was made to Mr. Stagg, and he came to the University with the full expectation that there would be furnished a well-equipped building for the work of the Department which he represents. At two or three times during the year preceding the opening of the University it seemed quite certain that such a building was about to be secured. On the first of July, when only ninety days remained until the time should come for the opening of the doors of the University to students, it was decided to build a temporary structure which might provide facilities for two or three years. Ten years have passed and the Department is still doing its work in a temporary structure. The difficulties with which the staff of the Department have had to contend have been almost incalculable. The spirit with which these difficulties have been met, on the part of the staff and students, has been admirable. We rejoice today that within the coming year the Department will have a permanent home in a building of adequate size and provided with proper facilities of instruction. We rejoice that a citizen of Chicago, one of the Trustees of the University, has thought it wise to erect this building of which the corner-stone is now about to be laid — a building which will represent educational work as it stands related to the body, the physical well-being of the student. And we rejoice that in the erec- tion of this building there shall be forever preserved a memorial of that young life taken from us so suddenly and mysteriously. His was a short life, but a true one, and while our rejoicing is mingled with sadness, we may nevertheless remember that it was a life so pure and strong that, notwithstand- ing its brevity, it deserves the lasting and magnificent memorial which has been established by a loving father. As the first stone in this great structure takes its place, let us recall the beautiful memories of the past, and let us look forward to the great and splendid possibilities of the future which shall always be connected with the name of Frank Dickinson Bartlett. After a brief address by Director A. A. Stagg, the Secretary of the Board of Trustees, Dr. T. W. Goodspeed, read the following list of articles deposited in the corner-stone: Photograph of Frank Dickinson Bartlett; Bible belonging to him; coat of arms of his alma mater — Harvard University; University publications— the iSegisfer, etc.; student publications — the Cap and Gown and the Weekly, Directory of Alumni; addresses delivered at the laying of the corner-stone; photograph of the founder; photographs of the University buildings; Chicago daily papers; proceedings of the Intercollegiate Conference of Faculty Representatives of Athletic Com- mittees or Board of Control of Western Universities to date; A. A. Stagg's Treatise on American Football; H. Butterworth's How To and Exercise for Everybody; list of men who have won the "C" up to this date; official program, football season 1901; the Standard ; program of the Thanksgiving Day exercises; official statement of Mr. Bartlett's donation for erection of building. The corner-stone was then laid by Mr. A. C. Bartlett, the donor of the building, after which the corner-stone address was delivered by Eev. Frank W. Gunsaulus. 572 The Peesident's Kepobt ANOTHER MILLION-DOLLAE GIFT At a meeting of the Trustees held in December, 1901, the following letter was presented: New Yokk, December 14, 1901. Andrew McLeish, Chicago: My deak Mb. MoLeish: Understanding that the estimated deficit for the running expenses of the University, as represented in the budget for the year 1902-1903, will amount to Two Hundred and Fifty Thousand Dollars (S250,000), my father will give so much thereof as may actually be required, up to Two Hundred and Fifty Thousand Dollars ($250,000), to cover such deficit, payment to be made on call of the Treasurer, accompanied by a statement showing the deficit actually incurred. My father will also give toward the general endowment of the University, under date of Decem- ber 1, 1901, One Million Dollars (11,000,000). This One Million Dollars he will give in cash or securities, as the Trustees may elect. (Signed) John D. Rockepellee, Jr. THE LAW SCHOOL ESTABLISHED On March 11, 1902, the Trustees authorized the expenditure of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) for the purchase of a Law School library and the organization of the University School of Law. PRESENTATION OP PRESIDENT HARPER's PORTRAIT On April 15, 1902, the following letter was presented : To the Trustees of the University of Chicago: Gentlemen : The following friends of President Harper take great pleasure in presenting to the University the portrait of Dr. Harper, painted by Gari Melohers: George E. Adams, A. C. Bartlett, E. B. Butler, Mrs. Emmons Blaine, E. M. Barton, Jesse A. Baldwin, Miss Helen Culver, C. A. Coolidge, C. R. Crane, Marshall Field, E. B. Felsenthal, F. T. Gates, H. G. Grey, C. L. Hutchinson, H. N. Higin- botham, D. G. Hamilton, J. J. Mitchell, A. McLeish, C. H. McCormick, Harold F. McCormick, Martin A. Ryerson, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., A. A. Sprague, Byron L. Smith, F. A. Smith, George C Walker, W. B. Walker. The picture is now at the Art Institute, and can, if you desire, remain there until the new buildings are finished, when we hope you may think it best to place it in the dining-hall. Yours very truly, C. L. Hutchinson. GRADUATES OF THE UNIVERSITY BY YEARS The following table shows the number of persons graduating from the University since its establishment, with an indication of the degrees conferred : (Method of classification by years : all graduates from July 1 of one year to July 1 of the next year are enrolled as gradu- ates of the latter year.) Class Bachelors of Arts, Philosophy, and Science Bachelors of Divinity Masters of Arts, Philosophy, and Science Doctors of Philosophy Re-enacted Total 1893 12 28 58 105 129 145 169 162 214 291 11 6 3 3 29 25 15 17 18 17 3 11 10 15 20 15 15 33 22 26 3 8 16 23 27 34 23 48 36 26 37 22 2 3 2 4 1 29 1894 53 1895 87 1896 183 1897 227 1898 221 1899 225 1900 262 1901 294 1902 (including June class) 361 Total 1,313 144 170 244 71 1,942 An Histokioal Sketch 573 financial summary A few paragraphs relating to financial history may properly close this sketch of the devel- opment of the University up to June 30, 1902. From the following tables may be gathered certain interesting facts, viz. : (1) the growth of the assets of the University from year to year; (2) the distribution of these assets; (3) the percentage of income realized on invested funds; (4) the various sources of the University's income for a given year, and the proportionate amount furnished by each. June 30, 1894 $4,272,147.06 1895 - • - - 5,586,160.65 " 1896 ------ 7,732,626.06 " 1897 - - - - - - - 8,311,642.60 " 1898 ------ 8,937,759.41 1899 9,157,721.50 1900 9,880,777.52 » 1901 - 12,364,216.58 1902 ------ 15,128,375.95 The distribution of these assets on June 80, 1902, was as follows : Investments -------$ 8,674,962.12 Buildings -------- 2,812,032.60 Grounds ------- 2,281,378.36 Books -------- 314,949.78 Scientific equipment ----- 440,993.48 Furniture - - - 66,804.54 Material and supplies 36,569.28 Printing office plant ----- 10,521.77 Cash and current assets . - . - 490,164.02 Total ------- $15,128,375.95 The percentage of income realized on invested funds has been as follows : Date Sate per Cent. June 30, 1895 - - 5.30 1896 - - 5.22 1897 - 5.20 1898 - - - 5.05 1899 5.03 1900 4.66 1901 4.44 1902 -------- 4.12 The various sources of the University's income and the proportionate amount furnished by each for the year 1901-2 : Per Cent. 1. Invested funds - . - $258,187.42 26.4 2. Students ----------- 371,536.12 38.0 a) Tuition fees $269,065.03 b) Other fees .--.--- 56,106.74 c) Room rents - - 46,364.35 3. John D. Eockefeller --------- 310,644.00 31.9 a) Current expense ------ 253,144.00 b) Medical work ------ 50,000.00 c) History books ------- 7,500.00 4. Publication receipts - 23,182.91 2.3 5. Theological Union - --------- 9,300.00 0.9 6. Donations, old subscriptions, and miscellaneous - - - 4,977 . 88 0.5 Total $977,828.33 100.0 574 The President's Kepoet THE UNIVERSITY BUILDINGS The following are the buildings of the University, arranged in the order of erection, with the names of the donors, and the actual cost : Building Date Erected Cost Donor Cobb Hall Graduate Hall ) Middle Divinity [■ South Divinity ) Kent Chemical Laboratory Ryerson Physical Laboratory SneU Hall Nancy Foster Hall Beeoher Hall Kelly Hall Walker Museum Haskell Oriental Museum Hull Biological Laboratories Yerkes Observatory Green Hall Poster Hall Addition School of Education (temporary building) Charles Hitchcock Hall Press Building Power Plant Frank Dickinson Bartlett Gymnasium School of Education Group of buildings on corner of Fifty-seventh street and Lexington avenue 1892 1892 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1896 1897 1898 1898 1900 1901 1901 1901 1901 1902 1902 1902 $221,956.03 172,805.72 202,270.19 200,371.41 53,586.41 62,966.86 62,126.05 62,149.21 109,275.11 103,017.49 325,000.00 325,000.00 72,000.00 20,466.04 24,983.89 150,000.00 105,606.00 365,000.00 240,000.00 567,000.00 500,000.00 Silas B. Cobb John D. Rockefeller Sidney A. Kent Martin A. Ryerson Mrs. Henrietta Snell Mrs. Nancy Foster Mrs. Jerome Beecher Mrs. Elizabeth Kelly George C. Walker Mrs. Caroline E. Haskell Miss Helen Culver Charles T. Yerkes Mrs. Elizabeth Kelly Mrs. Nancy Foster Several funds Mrs. Charles Hitchcock John D. Rockefeller John D. Rockefeller A. C. Bartlett and friends Mrs. Emmons Blaine and friends C. L. Hutchinson, John J. Mitchell, Leon Mandel, the Reynolds estate, and friends On June 30, 1902, the University grounds included one hundred and forty acres, counting the sixty-five acres at Williams Bay, Wisconsin. Feanois W. Shepaedson. LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 1029919 233 7, V t , > . IT i ^^1^ h • V it y r:\ M: